Catia Delmia Enovia VPLM 519

Program Directory
© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2008 Version 5 Release 19

All rights reserved. CATIA, DELMIA, ENOVIA VPLM, ENOVIA CES and CAA-RADE
Prerequisites This program directory is intended for any user who wishes to install or maintain
the system, or access product data. This information is provided as an addition
● H/W & S/W Requirements to the official documentation, which is available on your Documentation CD.
❍ On-line Documentation
❍ V5 Client Side
Viewing
for CATIA, ENOVIA DMU, ENOVIA This program directory can be viewed using Internet Explorer, Mozilla or Mozilla
3d com, ENOVIA V5 VPM, DELMIA Firefox.
Resource Detailing & Validation,
DELMIA Automation and CAA-RADE In order to view some of the publications, you must have Adobe Reader installed
❍ CAA-RADE additional requirements
on your computer. If you do not currently have it, you can download it free of
charge from the Adobe Website.
❍ V5 Server Side
ENOVIA 3d com, ENOVIA V5 VPM Getting the Most Out of this Program Directory
❍ Notice for DB2 for ENOVIA VPLM Click the links on the left to access information on the following subjects:
❍ ENOVIA CES ● Prerequisites
❍ DELMIA Resource Modeling & ❍ H/W & S/W Requirements (including middleware and third-party
Simulation (D5) requirements) - Updates to the Hardware and Software requirements
❍ DELMIA Process Planning (PE) ❍ Certifications – A list of product certifications.

http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/certified-derived-
● Certifications workstations/
❍ CATIA / ENOVIA VPLM / DELMIA
❍ Upgrade - Issues that are relevant when migrating to the current release
Process Detailing & Validation /
DELMIA Automation ● Installation
❍ ENOVIA CES ❍ Notices and Modifications - it defines updates and notices to the original
❍ DELMIA Certified Third-Party
installation documentation guide (for Hardware and Software issues, see H/
Software (Windows-based)
W & S/W Requirements)
❍ OS Considerations - it provides additional operating system-specific
information
Installation
● Notices and Modifications ● Solutions and Products
❍ Common Procedures ❍ Product Enhancements Overview for current and last two releases
for CATIA, ENOVIA DMU, ENOVIA ❍ General and Open Issues - general issues are important notes,
3d com, DELMIA Process Detailing recommendations, changes, permanent restrictions; open issues are
& Validation and DELMIA
Automation
temporary restrictions or known problems; a documentation section lists
the latest updates to documentation
❍ CATIA (addendum)
❍ Closed Issues - report of closed incidents
❍ ENOVIA
■ ENOVIA V5 VPM
■ ENOVIA DMU (addendum) Service Process
■ ENOVIA 3d com Classic All product issues should be reported to the support organization using your
(addendum) standard support procedures.
■ ENOVIA CES Reminder: end of support dates
❍ DELMIA The end of support (EOS) dates are defined as follows for the various releases:
DELMIA Resource Modeling &
■
Version 5 Release 19 September 10th, 2010
Simulation (D5)
■ DELMIA Process Planning (PE)
■ DELMIA Process Detailing &
Validation (PLM V5 / Automation
V5) (addendum)
❍ CAA
● OS Considerations
❍ CATIA, ENOVIA (V5 VPM, DMU, 3d
com Classic), DELMIA Process
Detailing & Validation (PLM V5 /
Automation V5)
❍ ENOVIA CES
❍ DELMIA Resource Modeling &
Simulation (D5)
❍ DELMIA Process Planning (PE)
Solutions and Products

● Product Enhancement Overview
❍ CATIA
❍ ENOVIA VPLM
❍ ENOVIA CES
❍ DELMIA
● Special Packages
❍ CATIA PLM Express
❍ DELMIA PLM Express
❍ CATIA Student
● General and Open Issues

❍ CATIA
■ Infrastructure
■ Mechanical Design
■ Shape Design & Styling
■ Product Synthesis
■ Equipment & Systems
■ Analysis
■ Machining
❍ ENOVIA
■ ENOVIA V5 VPM
■ VPM Navigator Products
■ VPM Product Editor Products
■ ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle
Products
■ ENOVIA VPM Enterprise
Gateway Products
■ ENOVIA VPM Administration
Products
■ ENOVIA DMU
■ ENOVIA 3d com
■ ENOVIA 3d com Classic
Products
■ ENOVIA MULTICAx-MULTIPDM
Products
■ ENOVIA VPLM - CATIA
Interoperability
■ ENOVIA MatrixOne
Interoperability
■ Refer to ENOVIA MatrixOne
release notes about CT5
product
❍ DELMIA PLM
■ MBOM
■ Process Detailing
■ Resource Detailing
■ Factory Layout
■ Factory Flow
■ Factory DMU Solutions
■ Robotics
■ Ergonomics
■ Logic Based Behavior
■ Machining
■ Off-line Programming
■ Work Instructions
■ Shop Floor Execution
Management & Monitoring
■ PPR Family
■ Collaboration
■ MULTICAx
■ PDM Interfaces
■ ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub
■ Virtual Reality
■ Cross-Solution Products
❍ DELMIA Automation
■ CSM Products
■ CLM Products
■ HMI Products
■ Infrastructure and Simulation
products
❍ ENOVIA CES
❍ CAA
● Closed Issues
❍ GA
IBM references:
Program Numbers 5628-ACN, 5628-
DMU, 5628-LCA, 5628-CAA
Version 5 Release 19
Patents, Trademarks and Copyrights
Published date: June 2008
On-line Documentation
Documentation Browsers Prerequirements

To access the contents of the documentation provided in HTML format, the following browsers are supported with the
required corresponding Java plug-in.
Operating System Browser Java Plug-In Level URL to download this Java Plug-In
Internet Explorer 7 http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.
Microsoft Windows Version 6 Update 2
Firefox 2.0 html
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/
IBM AIX Mozilla 1.7 JRE 5 SR6
java/jdk/aix/service.html
Hewlett-Packard HP-UX Mozilla 1.7 5.0.10 http://www.hp.com/go/java/
http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.
html
Sun Solaris Firefox 2.0 Version 6 Update 4 Firefox 2.0 can be downloaded at the
following address:
http://www.mozilla.com/en-US/
firefox/2.0.0.3/releasenotes
Although access to the online documentation might work on other HTML browsers, incidents specific to other
browsers than above mentioned products are not eligible for support.
Documentation search applet

● AIX 5.3
When running a search in the documentation on AIX 5.3 TL 05 SP3, Mozilla level 1.7.12, you should use the Java
plugin 1.4.2.
● HP-UX B.11.11 U 9000/785
When running a search in the documentation, you should use Mozilla 1.6 with the plugin
1.5.0.10_01_oct_2007_14_41.
On-line Documentation Installation

Use the following link to consult the official installation documentation:
Installing the On-line Documentation
When installing the CATIA or ENOVIA DMU online documentation, the MULTICAx products documentation are always
installed.
Accessing Online Documentation Using Internet Explorer on Windows XP

Professional x64 Edition and 32-bit Windows XP SP2
When you open the online documentation homepage, the homepage looks like this:
The default security setting displayed in the information bar disables active content.
To display the documentation homepage correctly, click OK, then click the information bar and select the option
"Allow Blocked Content...", then click Yes when prompted. The homepage will then be displayed correctly.
V5 Client Hardware & Software Requirements
This document is provided as a guideline regarding hardware configurations, operating systems and operating
system patches recommended for the use with Version 5 Release 19 on Client side. This information applies to
the following products:
● CATIA
● ENOVIA DMU
● ENOVIA 3d com (client side only)
● ENOVIA V5 VPM (client side only)
● DELMIA Process Detailing & Validation (PLM V5) and Automation
● CAA-RADE (generic requirements); for detailed information, please read the dedicated page
To access the page for Server side, click here.
Operating System Supported Operating System Level(s) Detailed Information

This section contains information common to all
All Platforms click here
operating systems
● Windows XP Professional SP2 click here
Microsoft Windows 32-bit
● Windows Vista Enterprise Edition x86 click here
● Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2 click here

● Windows Vista Enterprise Edition x64 click here
IBM AIX ● AIX 5.3 Technical Level 05 Service Pack 3 click here
Hewlett-Packard HP-UX ● HP 11iv1 (11.11) December 2004 click here
Sun Solaris ● Solaris 10 HW 03/05 click here
Important notice for Operating Systems support
The support of the following operating systems ended with Version 5 Release 17.
These systems are not supported from Version 5 Release 18 on:
● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

● IBM AIX 5.2
● SGI Irix (all levels)
● Sun Solaris 8
All Platforms
Recommended Memory
The following specifications apply for RAM (real memory)
For 3d com products:

● minimum required: 128 MB
● recommended: 256 MB
For CAA-RADE products:

● minimum recommended:
❍ Windows XP 32-bit, IBM AIX, Hewlett-Packard HP-UX, Sun Solaris: 512 MB
❍ Windows XP 64-bit: 2 GB
For other products (CATIA, DMU, ENOVIA V5 VPM, DELMIA Process Detailing & Validation, DELMIA
Automation):
● minimum recommended: 256 MB
● for DMU applications on large assemblies, for Digitized Shape Editor 2 product, recommended: 512 MB
Requirements may be greater when large amount of data are used.
For CAA-RADE: Specific Hardware Requirements
Operating Disk
OS Level Memory (MB) Min. CPU (MHz) Comment
System (GB)
● Intel Xeon
EM64T
Windows XP x64 SP2 2048 15 ● Intel Pentium4

EM64T
● AMD Opteron
64-bit
Windows XP SP2 512 4
AIX 5.3 TL05 SP3 mini 512 4
HP-UX 11.11 (11i) 512 4
Solaris 10 HW 512 4
Solaris
03/05
An approximate size of 300 MB on Windows and 375 MB on UNIX is needed to install the software itself.
For ENOVIA 3d com: Specific Hardware Requirements

ENOVIA 3d com is designed to operate with the following hardware on the client side. The following OS and
minimum configuration are supported :
Operating Disk
System (MB)
● Intel Xeon
EM64T
Windows XP x64 SP2 ● Intel Pentium4

EM64T
● AMD Opteron
64-bit
300 MHz mini

● Intel Xeon
● Intel Pentium4
Windows XP SP2 128/256 100
● Intel Xeon
EM64T
● Intel Pentium4
EM64T
Windows Vista 512 20 000 800 MHz mini
Windows Vista 64 512 20 000 800 MHz mini
AIX 5.3 TL05 SP3 mini 128/256 100
HP-UX 11.11 (11i) 128/256 100
Solaris 10 HW
Solaris 128/256 100
03/05
Microsoft Windows XP 32-bit

Operating System
Windows XP Professional SP2 with the following patches applied:
Patch Description
KB 926255 Vulnerability in Windows could allow elevation of privilege:
(MS06-075) http://www.microsoft.com/technet/security/bulletin/MS06-075.mspx
MSI Installer 3.1: Windows Installer 3.1 v2 (3.1.4000.2435) available
KB 893803 at
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/893803
Memory leaks may occur for Graphics Device Interface (GDI) objects
when you create and destroy child windows:
KB 319740 http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;319740"%
20target=_blank%20>http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?
scid=kb;EN-US;319740
● Windows XP deliver an implementation of OpenGL libraries. Dassault Systemes will provide

recommendations related to driver levels based on certified configurations at URL:
http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/windows/certified-workstations-list/.
These drivers may offer a CATIA Version 5 application setting (see Control Panel, Display Properties tabs),
which should be selected when available, as they may contain application specific features.
● Localized version of the operating system may be required when selected installation locale differs from
Latin1
Additional Software Requirements

● compiler
Operating System Compiler
Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 - SP1 with the following

patches applied:
❍ KB926601 (this is the SP1 and must be installed first)
Microsoft Windows XP ❍ KB937122
32-bit
❍ KB935225
❍ KB935935
❍ KB946310
● CRT and MFC Redistributables

as delivered with V5 media and should be installed on targeted host
For ENOVIA 3d com and V5 VPM products:

Java enabled HTML browser
Note: Firefox 2.0 is supported for 3d com as an external browser (and not as an embedded browser). The
embedded browser are Internet Explorer 7.0.
Microsoft Windows http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.
Internet Explorer 7 Version 6 Update 2
32-bit html
Java Run-Time Environment

ENOVIA VPLM Web Navigator products are designed to operate with the following software on the client side:
URL to download this Java Run-Time
Operating System Java Run-Time Environment
Environment
Microsoft Windows
Sun Version 6 Update 2 http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.html
32-bit
For V5 VPM products:

.NET Run-Time
URL to download this .NET Run-Time
Operating System .NET Run-Time Environment
Environment
Microsoft Windows Microsoft® .NET Framework version 3.0
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads
32-bit redistributable package
Microsoft Windows Microsoft Visual J# 2.0 Redistributable
32-bit Package – Second Edition (x86)
Certified configurations
Please follow the link to the dedicated page of the program directory.
Microsoft Windows Vista 32-bit

Windows Vista x32 Enterprise Edition with the following patches applied:
Patch Description
Fix for Indexing Services issue : http://support.microsoft.com/
KB940069
kb/940069
Virtual address space usage in Windows : http://support.microsoft.
KB940105
com/kb/940105

● compiler
patches applied:
❍ KB937122
Microsoft Windows Vista
32-bit ❍ KB935225
❍ KB935935
❍ KB946310
❍ KB932232


Microsoft Windows http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.
32-bit html

Environment
Microsoft Windows
32-bit
For V5 VPM products:

.NET Run-Time
Environment
Additional Considerations
IP V6 Inactivation
Starting with Windows Vista, IPv6 is installed and activated by default whereas a dual IPv4/IPv6 layer is
provided. V5 Client/Server communication does not support IPv6 in V5R18, it is thus recommended to
inactivate IPv6 to go back to IPv4
To inactivate IPv6 please refers to the following Microsoft Technet article:
http://technet2.microsoft.com/windowsserver/en/library/cba5a7ac-742a-49a6-8212-3844c768a0f81033.mspx?
mfr=true
Sections :
To Uninstall IPv6 Using the Network Connections Folder
Or
To Uninstall IPv6 from a Computer from the Command Prompt
Note that this operation requires Administrative credentials
Known DS Product Limitation

MS Known issue: partial encryption of vbscript does not work :
Windows scrrun.dll bug : Tag for partial encoding (**Start Encode**) has no effect on Vista RTM, when
used, all the script is encoded.
This bug is fixed in Windows Vista SP1.
Microsoft Windows XP 64-bit

Note on Microsoft Windows 64-bit Support
Note that for ENOVIA 3d com Classic and ENOVIA V5 VPM, the support of Windows 64-bit is
effective only on client side, not on server side.
Operating System
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2
● Windows XP Professional x64 Edition delivers an implementation of OpenGL libraries. Dassault Systemes
will provide recommendations related to driver levels based on certified configurations at URL: http://
www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/windows/certified-workstations-list/.
These drivers may offer a CATIA Version 5 application setting (see Control Panel, Display Properties tabs),
which should be selected when available, as they may contain application specific features.
Installation of 32-bit V5 applications

● Although those Version 5 products are 32-bit applications, they will be able to allocate up to 4GB of
Memory when running on this operating system.
The following patches must be applied:
Patch Description
required for applications allowing more than 2GB of address space .
KB911021
please contact your Microsoft support representative.
For CATIA, DELMIA and ENOVIA DMU only: Installation of 64-bit V5 applications
● Note: for a 64-bit process, memory consumption is completely different than for a 32-bit process. In this
conditions, it is not pertinent to compare the « Virtual Bytes » counter of Perfmon between 32-bit process
and 64-bit process. Although this counter is important to track for a 32-bit process because the global
address space is limited to 4 GB including reserved virtual memory, for 64-bit process, virtual address
space can reach 8 TB.
● Known issue: When Japanese locales are used, console output will be corrupted at first Japanese
character display, the "cout << " does not print any character after. This is a Microsoft CRT 8.0 bug and
should be fixed by Microsoft.
The following patches must be applied:
Patch Description
None

● compiler

patches applied:
Microsoft Windows XP
64-bit ❍ KB937122
❍ KB935225
❍ KB946310


Note: Firefox 2.0 is supported for 3d com as an external browser (and not as an embedded browser). The embedded browser
are Internet Explorer 7.0.
Microsoft Windows XP http://java.sun.com/products/archive/
64-bit index.html

Environment
64-bit
32 and 64-bit Certified Configurations
Microsoft Windows Vista 64-bit

Windows Vista x64 Enterprise Edition with the following patches applied:
Patch Description
Fix for Indexing Services issue : http://support.microsoft.com/
KB940069
kb/940069
Virtual address space usage in Windows : http://support.microsoft.
KB940105
com/kb/940105

● compiler

patches applied:
Microsoft Windows Vista ❍ KB937122
64-bit
❍ KB935225
❍ KB946310
❍ KB932232


Microsoft Windows Vista http://java.sun.com/products/archive/
64-bit index.html

Environment
Microsoft Windows Vista http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.
Sun Version 6 Update 2
64-bit html
Additional Considerations
IPv6 inactivation
Starting with Windows Vista, IPv6 is installed and activated by default whereas a dual IPv4/IPv6 layer is
provided. V5 Client/Server communication does not support IPv6 in V5R19, it is thus recommended to
inactivate IPv6 to go back to IPv4
To inactivate IPv6 please refers to the following Microsoft Technet article:
http://technet2.microsoft.com/windowsserver/en/library/cba5a7ac-742a-49a6-8212-3844c768a0f81033.mspx?
mfr=true
Sections :
To Uninstall IPv6 Using the Network Connections Folder
Or
To Uninstall IPv6 from a Computer from the Command Prompt
Note that this operation requires Administrative credentials
Known DS Product limitation

MS Known issue: partial encryption of vbscript does not work :
Windows scrrun.dll bug : Tag for partial encoding (**Start Encode**) has no effect on Vista RTM, when
used, all the script is encoded.
This bug is fixed in Windows Vista SP1.
IBM AIX
Note
AIX 5.1 is no more supported since Version 5 Release 16.

Operating System
Base support:
AIX 5.3 Technical Level 05 Service Pack 3 (using 64-bit kernel) with following components:
Component
XL C/C++ Enterprise Edition V8.0.0 Run-time Environment
● April 2007 IBM C++ Runtime Environment Component for AIX
● with fileset xlC.aix50.rte at level 8.0.0.9
XL Fortran Enterprise Edition V10.1.0 for AIX Run-Time

● August 2006 XL Fortran V10.1 for AIX Runtime
● with fileset xlfrte.aix51 at level 10.1.0.2
OpenGL 1.3 as delivered on AIX CDs

and the following recommended patch installed:
Patch Description
PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION WHILE USING MALLOC_BUCKETS/
IY97882
FREE_BUCKETS

Compiler
February 2008 XL C/C++ Enterprise Edition V8.0 for AIX PTF
IBM AIX
( vacpp.cmp.core at level 7.0.0.18 )

http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/java/jdk/
IBM AIX Mozilla 1.7 1.5.0 SR6
aix/service.html

Operating System Java Run-Time Environment URL to download this Java Run-Time Environment
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/java/jdk/aix/
IBM AIX 1.5.0 SR6
service.html
Certified Configurations
List of configurations certified with Version 5 is available at
http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/unix/unix-based-workstations/.
HP-UX
Operating System
HP 11iv1 (11.11) December 2004 with the following components:
Component Date
HP-UX Technical Computing OE (TCOE) Component December 2004
Hardware Enablement Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 December 2004
Gold Applications Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 December 2004
Gold Base Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 December 2004
and the following patches applied:
Patch Description
PHCO_31923 libc cumulative header file patch
PHCO_33360 libc cumulative patch
PHKL_31918 fsadm;ACL;locking order;8K mount;readdir
PHNE_32477 ONC/NFS General Release/Performance Patch
PHSS_29483 HP aC++ Compiler (A.03.52)
PHSS_31271 (PA2.0 only) PEX 5.1/Starbase/Hardcopy Run
PHSS_31274 (PA2.0 only) Starbase/Hardcopy Dev
PHSS_31275 (PA2.0 only) OpenGL 1.1 Dev
PHSS_32573 HP aC++ -AA runtime libraries (aCC A.03.61)
PHSS_32928 (PA2.0 only) 3D Common Run
PHSS_32934 (PA2.0 only) OpenGL 1.1 Run
PHSS_32939 Xserver cumulative patch
PHSS_33033 ld(1) and linker tools cumulative patch
HP 11iv1 (11.11) June 2007 with the following components:
Component Date
Gold Applications Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 June 2007
Gold Base Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 June 2007
Patch Description
PHSS_34398 Fortran90 from B.11.11.70 to B.11.11.99.02

Compiler
Hewlett-Packard HP-UX C++ compiler at level A03.52,

delivered by the B3911DB bundle

Patch Description

Hewlett-Packard HP-UX Mozilla 1.7 5.0.10 http://www.hp.com/go/java/

Environment
Hewlett-Packard HP-UX 5.0.10 http://www.hp.com/go/java/
Important notice on HP-UX support
Version 5 Release 19 will be the last release to support HP-UX
SUN Solaris
Operating System
Solaris 10 HW 03/05 (SPARC) with the following patches applied:
Patch Description
119280-06 CDE 1.6 Runtime library patch for Solaris 10

Compiler
Sun Solaris C, C++ Sun Studio 10 compiler

Patch Description
117830-02 C++ 5.7 sun studio 10 C++ compiler
117832-01 common compiler backend iropt cg ipo ss10cc
117834-02 f95 8.1 fortran 90 sun studio 10
117836-02 C 5.7: Patch for SS10 C Compiler
117840-02 Patch for Sun Studio 10 Fortran 95 Dynamic Libraries
118678-01 Patch for Sun Studio 10 Performance Analyzer Tools

http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.html
Firefox 2.0 can be downloaded at the following

Sun Solaris Firefox 2.0 Version 6 Update 4 address:
http://www.mozilla.com/en-US/firefox/2.0.0.3/
releasenotes

Sun Solaris Version 6 Update 4 http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.html
CAA-RADE
Installation Requirements and Considerations
The following sections identify the system requirements for installation and activation.
System Requirements
General requirements are listed in the V5 Client Hardware and Software Requirements page.
Some additional information is given hereafter.
For Build Time

In addition to the requirements listed in the above referred page, following information also applies:
IBM AIX
HP Windows Windows XP
Platforms (including Sun Windows Windows
HP- XP Professional
supported 64-bit Solaris Vista x86 Vista x64
UX 32-bit x64 Edition
support)
CAA - Data Model
X(*) X(*)
Customizer
CAA - C++
Interactive X(*) X(*) X(*) X(*)
Dashboard
CAA - Java
Interactive X X
Dashboard
CAA - Multi-
Workspace X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Application Builder
CAA - C++ Unit
X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Test Manager
CAA - JAVA Unit
X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Test Manager
CAA - C++ API
Documentation X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Generator
CAA - C++ Source
X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Checker
CAA - Source Code
X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Manager
CAA - Interactive
X X X X(**) X X(**) X
Test Capture
CAA - Web
Application X X
Composer
X(*) Client on Windows, Server on any platform

X(**) Also support Windows Server 2003 32-bit operating system
Remarks
Starting with V5R18, the SGI IRIX platform is no longer supported.

Starting with V5R16, CAA - Teamwork Release Manager is no longer delivered.
Starting with V5R19, Windows 32-bit code generation on Windows 64-bit platform is supported.
All configurations can be installed on Windows 64-bit platforms, but only the products listed in the previous
table are supported on those platforms.
For Run Time

In addition to the requirements listed in the above referred page, following information also applies:
Will Run on
Applications Built
Format Windows XP Windows Windows
with CAA RADE Windows XP
Generation Professional Vista Vista
on 32-bit
x64 Edition x86 x64
Windows XP 32-
32-bit YES YES (*) YES YES (*)
bit
Windows XP 64-bit NO YES NO YES
Professional x64
Edition 32-bit YES YES (*) YES YES (*)
Windows Vista
32-bit YES YES (*) YES YES (*)
x86
Windows Vista 64-bit NO YES NO YES
x64 32-bit YES YES (*) YES YES (*)
(*): when running on Windows 64-bit platforms, Windows 32-bit applications take advantage of Windows-32-on-
Windows-64 emulation mode (WoW64).
Additional Software Requirements for CAA RADE V5 Products

Depending on the product(s) to be installed, the following requirements apply:
CAA-RADE Operating
Requirements
Product System
Java Development Kit Environment to build IDL interfaces and code for Java server
side and client side applications, version 1.6 on windows 64-bit:
URL to download this Java

Operating System Java Development Kit
Development Kit
http://java.sun.com/products/
archive/index.html
Multi- Microsoft Windows Version 6 Update 2 For Windows 64-bit: SUN Java
Workspace Development Kit for 64-bit at the
Application same level is required
Builder
http://www-106.ibm.com/
IBM AIX 5.0 SR6 developerworks/java/jdk/aix/service.
html
Hewlett-Packard HP-
5.0.10 http://www.hp.com/go/java/
UX
http://java.sun.com/products/
Sun Solaris Version 6 Update 2
archive/index.html
All
supported
C++ IDE for Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 SP1
Windows
Interactive platforms
Dashboard
Microsoft Internet Explorer (delivered with Windows XP or with Windows XP
Professional x64 Edition), at minimum level 7.0.
Either: Rational Software Modeler (RSM) Version 7.0
Data
●
Model ● Or: Rational Software Architect (RSA) Version 7.0

Customizer
Microsoft Internet Explorer at minimum level 7.0
C++ Unit
Test
Manager
Windows
when Mortice Kern Software MKS Toolkit for Developers V8.1
XP 32-bit
running
Automatic
Run time
batch test
replay
Java Unit
Test Windows
Mortice Kern Software MKS Toolkit for Developers V8.7 patch 5
Manager XP 64-bit
when
running
Automatic
Run time
batch test
replay Windows
Mortice Kern Software MKS Toolkit for Developers V9.1
Source Vista
Code
Manager
Java
Interactive IBM Rational Application Developer 7.0
Dashboard
Web
Application IBM Rational Application Developer (RAD) Version 7.0
Composer
Source
All The Interactive User Interface and the merger utility require java Runtime-
Code
Platforms Environment Sun Version 5 Update 7.
Manager
Prerequisites for the Licensing Environment

● Windows workstations must have a LAN Card (Ethernet or Token Ring) and TCP/IP installed and properly
configured, even in the case of nodelock licensing, but there is no need to have the workstations connected to
the network.
● No additional software is required when accessing nodelock licenses. IBM License Use Management (LUM), is
required to serve concurrent licenses across a network.
● NOTE THAT LUM 5 IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS V5 DELIVERY. 4.6.8 level of LUM is required on all
platforms for all product brands.
LUM 4.6.8 + 4.6.8.3 patch is the latest level certified by Dassault Systemes. It is recommended to migrate
your LUM servers to this level.
● IBM License Use Management may be obtained, at no charge, from http://www.ibm.com/software/lum
V5 Server Hardware & Software Requirements
This document is provided as a guideline regarding hardware configurations, operating systems and operating
system patches recommended for the use with Version 5 Release 19 on Server side. This information applies
to the following products:
● ENOVIA 3d com (server side only)
● ENOVIA V5 VPM (server side only)
To access the page for Client side, click here.
Operating System Supported Operating System Level(s) Detailed Information

This section contains information common to all
All Platforms click here
operating systems
● Windows 2003 Server SP2, Standard Edition
Microsoft Windows 32-bit click here
● Windows 2003 Server SP2, Enterprise Edition
Microsoft Windows 64-bit ---- NO SUPPORT ---- click here
IBM AIX ● AIX 5.3 Technical Level 05 Service Pack 3 click here
● HP 11iv1 (11.11) December 2004

Hewlett-Packard HP-UX ● for Web Sphere Application Server and for Web click here
Sphere Portal Server : HP-UX 11.v2 (run time)
Sun Solaris ● Solaris 10 HW 03/05 click here
Important notice for Operating Systems support
The support of the following operating systems ended with Version 5 Release 17.
These systems are not supported from Version 5 Release 18 on:
● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

● IBM AIX 5.2
● SGI Irix (all levels)
● Sun Solaris 8
All Platforms
Recommended Memory
The following specifications apply for RAM (real memory)
For 3d com products:
● minimum required: 256 MB
● recommended: 512 MB
For ENOVIA V5 VPM:

● server installation requires 256 MB of RAM for the first session, but could use up to 2GB (or more in some
cases) depending on system settings, database parameters, and other factors. If ENOVIA V5 VPM server is
installed on the same server as the database, be sure to consider the database memory requirement with
that needed for ENOVIA VPM.
Additional memory is required for each additional session, and 75 MB should be used as a typical-use
starting point (with a minimum of 25MB per user session for those only logged-on). More or less additional-
session memory may be required depending on user-specific factors such as the amount of data loaded, the
number of different application areas open concurrently, local customizations, etc.
For ENOVIA 3d com: Specific Hardware Requirements

ENOVIA 3d com is designed to operate with the following hardware on the server side.
The following OS and minimum configuration are supported :
Operating Disk
System (MB)
● Intel Xeon
● Intel Pentium4
SP2,
Windows 2003 Standard or 256/512 700 ● Intel Xeon
Enterprise Edition EM64T
● Intel Pentium4
EM64T
Windows XP SP2 256/512 700
AIX 5.3 TL05 SP3 mini 256/512 900
HP-UX 11.11 (11i) 256/512 800
Solaris 10 HW 256/512
Solaris 700
03/05
Note: One of the CDs included in the ENOVIA 3d com Products is titled ' Volume 5: Windows'. This CD
contains the 3d com server (including MetaSearch software).
● The hardware needed for networking the workstation on LAN or WAN (depends on the type of network).
● The memory requirement depends on the number of simultaneous ENOVIA 3d com sessions; customers are
invited to accordingly dimension the server machine.
For ENOVIA V5 VPM: Specific Software Requirements

Database Management System (DBMS) requirements are:
● either, for IBM DB2 Universal Database:

Server Software Requirements
Database Server IBM DB2 UDB Version 9.1 FP4 minimum
Solaris : IBM DB2 UDB Version 9.1 FP4a minimum
ENOVIA V5 VPM AIX, Windows : IBM DB2 UDB Version 9.1 FP4 minimum
Server HP-UX 11iV1 : IBM DB2 UDB Version 8.2 FP4
● or for Oracle Enterprise Edition:

Database Server ORACLE Enterprise Edition 10.2.0.2 minimum
ENOVIA V5 VPM
ORACLE 10.2.0.2 minimum
Server
Supported Application Servers are WAS 6.1 and WP6.

Operating System
Windows 2003 Server SP2, Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition with the following patches applied:
Patch Description
KB 926255 Vulnerability in Windows could allow elevation of privilege:
(MS06-075) http://www.microsoft.com/technet/security/bulletin/MS06-075.mspx
MSI Installer 3.1: Windows Installer 3.1 v2 (3.1.4000.2435) available
KB 893803 at
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/893803
● For ENOVIA V5 VPM server in a multi-user environment only:

DirectX at minimum level 8.1 (available from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/; also available with
Windows XP distribution) is required for correct operation of ENOVIA V5 VPM Server in a multi user
environment.
● Localized version of the operating system may be required when selected installation locale differs from
Latin1

Environment
Microsoft Windows
32-bit
For ENOVIA V5 Vault server if Full Text Search is activated :

.NET Run-Time
Environment
Certified configurations

Note on Microsoft Windows 64-bit Support
Note that for ENOVIA 3d com Classic and ENOVIA V5 VPM, the support of Windows 64-bit is
effective only on client side, not on server side.
IBM AIX
Note

Operating System
Base support:
AIX 5.3 Technical Level 05 Service Pack 3 (using 64-bit kernel) with following components:
Component
XL C/C++ Enterprise Edition V8.0.0 Run-time Environment
● April 2007 IBM C++ Runtime Environment Component for AIX
● with fileset xlC.aix50.rte at level 8.0.0.9
XL Fortran Enterprise Edition V10.1.0 for AIX Run-Time

● August 2006 XL Fortran V10.1 for AIX Runtime
● with fileset xlfrte.aix51 at level 10.1.0.2
OpenGL 1.3 as delivered on AIX CDs
and the following recommended patch installed:

Patch Description
PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION WHILE USING MALLOC_BUCKETS/
IY97882
FREE_BUCKETS
Additional support for virtual frame buffer, the following patches must be installed:
Patch Description
AIX 5.3 TL6: IZ17911
AIX 5.3 TL7: IZ17912 DRAWABLE RESOURCES NOT FREED WHEN DRAWABLE IS FINISHED
AIX 5.3 TL8: IZ17913
AIX 5.3 TL6: IZ06649
AIX 5.3 TL7: IZ06508 FAILURE IN XTDESTROYAPPLICATIONCONTEXT USING XVFB
AIX 5.3 TL8: IZ06202

http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/java/jdk/aix/
IBM AIX 1.5.0 SR6
service.html
HP-UX
Operating System
HP 11iv1 (11.11) December 2004 with the following components:
Component Date
Gold Applications Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 December 2004
Gold Base Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 December 2004
Patch Description
PHCO_31923 libc cumulative header file patch
PHCO_33360 libc cumulative patch
PHKL_31918 fsadm;ACL;locking order;8K mount;readdir
PHNE_32477 ONC/NFS General Release/Performance Patch
PHSS_31271 (PA2.0 only) PEX 5.1/Starbase/Hardcopy Run
PHSS_31274 (PA2.0 only) Starbase/Hardcopy Dev
PHSS_31275 (PA2.0 only) OpenGL 1.1 Dev
PHSS_32573 HP aC++ -AA runtime libraries (aCC A.03.61)
PHSS_32928 (PA2.0 only) 3D Common Run
PHSS_32934 (PA2.0 only) OpenGL 1.1 Run
PHSS_33033 ld(1) and linker tools cumulative patch
HP 11iv1 (11.11) June 2007 with the following components:
Component Date
Gold Applications Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 June 2007
Gold Base Patches for HP-UX 11i v1 June 2007
Patch Description
PHSS_34398 Fortran90 from B.11.11.70 to B.11.11.99.02

Environment
Hewlett-Packard HP-UX 5.0.10 http://www.hp.com/go/java/
HP-UX 11.v2 (run time) only for WebSphere Application Server and for WebSphere Portal Server :
For more information, please refer to

ENOVIA V5 VPM Document/ Installation and Deployment
Deploying Webtop and Wintop Applications
Deploying the Web Application in an Application Server
Deploying the Web Application in the WAS
Creating the Enterprise Archive File
For exact Level : refer to IBM Websphere Prerequisites on HP-UX
Important notice on HP-UX support
Version 5 Release 19 will be the last release to support HP-UX
SUN Solaris
Operating System
Solaris 10 HW 03/05 (SPARC) with the following patches applied:
Patch Description
119280-06 CDE 1.6 Runtime library patch for Solaris 10

Sun Solaris Version 6 Update 4 http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.html
DB2 for ENOVIA VPLM Information
If IBM DB2 UDB is delivered with the V5 Package you received, the following statements
apply:
Use of IBM DB2 UDB Components

ENOVIA VPM V5 Release 19 (as well as ENOVIA VPLM ENOVIAVPM Version 1.6) is shipped
with the DB2 Universal Database program ("DB2 UDB"). Customers who purchase the
product are authorized to use this DB2 UDB only in conjunction with and in support of the
Solution (as defined below), and are authorized to install and use this DB2 UDB only in
association with your licensed use of the ENOVIA VPLM products for the storage and
management of data used or generated by the Solution and not for any other data
management purposes. Only inbound and outbound data transactions in which the Solution
directly either creates, reads, updates or deletes data are permitted.
Examples of uses not permitted include (i) inbound connections to the database from other
applications for queries or report generation, or (ii) outbound database connections in which
the Solution provides no added value to the data transaction.
The Solution and DB2 UDB can be installed on either the same server or separate servers.
In the case where DB2 UDB is installed on a separate server, the access point to the DB2
UDB server must be solely through the Solution server.
"Solution" is defined as any ENOVIA VPLM or ENOVIA SmarTeam program product other
than those listed as follows:
● "SMARTEAM -- Development Suite", a component of the "SMARTEAM -- Development
Suite Configuration" (5691-SDV)
● all CAA RADE products and APIs.
ENOVIA CES Installation OS Requirements
The following sections are listed in this document. Click on the name of the section you want to reach:
Client:
● Client Hardware Requirements
● Client Software Requirements
Server:
● Server Hardware Requirements
● Server Software Requirements
Client Hardware Requirements

This table describes the hardware required on the client side:
OS Client Level Memory (MB) Disk (MB) Min. CPU (MHz) Internal / External Drives
Windows XP Professional SP2 256 250 Intel Pentium III or Pentium 4 Required
Any Power 5 workstations
AIX 5.3 ML03 256 250 Required
supported on AIX Version 5.3.
Client Software Requirements

This table describes the software required on the client side:
Operating System Software Requirements
● Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0

● J# 2.0 Redistributable Package
Windows XP ● Java Enabled HTML Browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 on Windows with SUN Java plug-in version 6 Update 2, which can be
downloaded from http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.html
● Java Enabled HTML Browser:
AIX Mozilla 1.7 with IBM Java plug-in 5 SR6, which can be downloaded from IBM web site :
http://www-106.ibm.com/developerworks/ java/jdk/aix/service.html
It is recommended that you download the required Java plug-in installation to the client and then install locally. Installing
over the network might result in unpredictable behavior.
Server Hardware Requirements

This table describes the general hardware requirements expected in the supported Operating Systems required to run the CES
application:
OS Server Level Memory (MB) Disk (MB) Min. CPU (MHz) Internal / External Drives
Windows 2003 Server SP2 2 GB 1 GB Intel Pentium 4 Required
Any Power 5 workstations
AIX 5.3 ML03 2 GB 1 GB Required
supported on AIX Version 5.3

This table describes the software required on the server side:
Operating System Software Requirements
● Database : Oracle 10G R2.2

Windows 2003 Server ● WebSphere Application Server: 6.1
● Java 6.0 update 2
● Database:
❍ Oracle 10G R2.2
AIX 5.3 ML03 ❍ DB2 V8.2.4 (V8.1 FixPak 11) A 64-bit DB2 instance must be created for the CES database.
● WebSphere Application Server: 6.1

● Java 5 SR6
DELMIA Resource Modeling & Simulation
D5 Installation OS Requirements
Supplementary to Standard Documentation
1. DELMIA Resource Modeling & Simulation (IGRIP, QUEST, ENVISION, etc) is certified
on the same hardware and operating system platforms as V5 Clients.
2. Although Windows NT is no longer supported, a few help messages may erroneously
state that it is.
3. SGI Tezro using V12 graphics card is supported with some known limitations. DELMIA
D5 products running on this configuration display polygon anomalies. This can be
overcome by setting the environment variable GL_VERTEX_PRECLIP to either
"Fastest" or "Nicest". Setting the variable will however result in a noticable
degradation in performance.
4. C8000 model of HP-UX workstation needs the environment variable
IG_TRUE_DOUBLEBUFFER set to 0 in order for the dialogs to work correctly
5. DELMIA D5 is supported on AIX 5.3 TL04 on Power 275 and Power 285 hardware
platforms.
DELMIA Process Planning
PE Installation OS Requirements
DELMIA Certified Operating Systems (Windows-based)
Windows Windows
Windows Windows Windows Windows Server Server
XP Pro XP x64 Vista x86 Vista x64
DELMIA 2003 SP2 2003 x64
SP2 only Pro SP2 (32-bit (64-bit
Application and R2 SP2 and
(32-bit only (64- OS) OS) (32-bit R2 (64-bit
OS) bit OS)
OS) OS)
Manufacturing
Yes (local Yes (local Yes (Bridge
Hub Server No No Yes
clients) clients) server)
(32-bit)
PE Client Yes (Citrix

Yes Yes Yes Yes No
(32-bit) server)
ENOVIA VPM
V4/V5
No No No No Yes Yes
Loaders
(32-bit)
ENOVIA VPM
V4/5 Loader N/A No N/A No N/A Yes
(64-bit)
Notes: Yes: Officially supported

Yes (local clients): Supported only for clients installed on the same machine as the
Manufacturing Hub server. Note: Microsoft Workstation operating systems restrict the
number of simultaneous connections to client computers.
Yes (Citrix server): Supported only for PE clients installed on a Windows Server platform,
which is used as a Citrix server. (See Certified Third-Party Software, also.)
Yes (Bridge server): Supported only for IPDServer and PoolingServer processes, which are
used with ENOVIA VPM V4/V5 Loaders (32-bit and 64-bit).
N/A: Not technically feasible
All Platforms
● Intel Pentium-4, minimum 2400 MHz, at least 1024 MBytes memory (2048 Mbytes, if you want to
install PE Client, PE Server, and the ORACLE server on the same machine).
● Graphical interface (1024x768, OpenGL, min. 32Mb onboard memory)
● LAN Interface (completely configured)
● TCP/IP
● The PC has to have an IP address (either a static one or via DHCP)
Microsoft Windows Server
● 5 Gbyte diskspace for the Manufacturing Hub server application and Oracle database, optionally
more disk space for 3D graphic files or others (.cgr, .jt, ...)
Known Restrictions
An installation using Windows XP 64-bit as the operating system only works if there are no
parentheses such as ')' or '(' in the path. Using the default path ( '...\Program Files (x86)\...' ) leads
to a non-usable installation.
Applicable Patches
Please see DELMIA Process Detailing and Validation V5 Operating System Requirements.
DELMIA Recommended Configurations

Oracle Server Manufacturing Hub Server PE/V5 Client*
10.2.0.3 with
Patch 13 Hardware OS Hardware OS
Windows XP
Windows Any certified SP2 only (32-
Any certified Any certified server
Server 2003 workstation with 64- bit)
hardware and OS with 64-bit CPU
R2 SP2 (32- bit CPU Windows XP
platform (Intel EM64T)
bit) (Intel EM64T) x64 SP2 only
(64-bit)
Notes: DELMIA certifies all combinations of clients running on client-supported OS with a
Manufacturing Hub server running on a server-supported OS.
For information on the prerequisites for V5 clients, see: DELMIA Process Detailing and
Validation V5 Operating System Requirements.
Recommended Deployment
Click here to see a graphical representation of recommended deployment of PE (E5) servers with
other Dassault Systèmes clients and servers.
Hardware Certifications
In this page, you will find information about certified Windows configurations for use with CATIA and ENOVIA VPLM.
● Windows operating system
❍ certified configurations
❍ derived configurations
Windows Certified Configurations

You will find in this section information for :
● Windows Windows XP
● Windows 64-bit
● OpenGL Shaders & CgFX on Windows
Windows XP
Complete list of certified configurations is available at URL : http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/windows/certified-workstations-
list/
Note that configurations are certified with Windows XP : they are explicitly marked as such in the list of certified configurations.
● Note about HT Technology :
DS does not make any recommendation about the hyper threading (HT) technology. Certification have be ran with processor's
configuration parameters defined by default by the hardware vendor (in the system BIOS). Thus, for any recommendation
about Hyper Threading, please contact your hardware vendor.
List of providers:
● Dell
● Fujitsu-Siemens
● Hewlett_Packard
● Lenovo (Lenovo and formerly IBM Corporation)
● IBM Corporation
Dell
Partners Workstations Processor and clock speed Graphics Adapters Certification

Date
Dell Precision Workstation T3400 Intel Core 2 Duo Q6700, up to nVidia 05/08
3.0 GHz Quadro FX 3700 04/08 (169.31)
Windows XP Driver: 169.55
Dell Precision Workstation T7400 / T5400 Intel Quad-Core Xeon®, up to nVidia 05/08
(derived configuration) 3.2 GHz Quadro FX 3700 04/08 (169.31)
3.0 GHz Quadro FX 4600 03/08 (162.69)
3.0 GHz Quadro FX 570 03/08 (162.69)
3.0 GHz Quadro FX 1700 01/08 (162.69)
Dell Intel Core 2 Duo T7700, 2.40 nVidia 01/08

M6300 Quadro FX 1600M
Windows XP GHz 11/07 (156.79)
Driver: 156.87

M4300 Quadro FX 360M
Windows XP GHz
Driver: 101.19
Dell Precision Workstation 390 Intel Core Duo E6700, up to nVidia 07/07
2.67 GHz Quadro FX 4600

M90 Quadro FX 3500M
Windows XP GHz
Driver: 94.22
Dell Precision Workstation 690 / 490 (derived Intel Dual Core Xeon 5150, 2.67 nVidia 04/07
configuration) GHz Quadro FX 4600
Windows XP Driver: 91.85 03/07 (91.36)
2.67 GHz Quadro FX 4500 03/07 (91.36)
configuration) GHz Quadro FX 4500 02/07 (91.36)
Windows XP Driver: 91.85 02/07(91.36)
Dell Precision Workstation 690 / 490 (derived Intel Dual Core Xeon 5150, 2.67 ATI FireGL V3400 10/06
configuration) GHz Driver: 8.263.4.1
Windows XP
Dell Precision Workstation 380 Intel Pentium 4, Dual Core, ATI FireGL V7200 09/06
EM64T Driver: 8.223.4.1
Windows XP
up to 3.4 GHz
Dell Precision Workstation 380 Intel Pentium 4, Dual Core, ATI FireGL V3100 08/06
EM64T Driver: 8.223.4.1
Windows XP
up to 3.4 GHz
2.67 GHz Quadro FX 3500 08/06 (84.37)
Dell Precision Workstation 690 / 490 (derived Intel Dual Core Xeon 5080, nVidia 07/07
configuration) 3.73GHz Quadro FX 4500 08/06 (84.37)
configuration) 3.73GHz Quadro FX 3450
Dell Precision Workstation 380 Intel Pentium 4, Dual Core, nVidia 07/07
EM64T Quadro FX 3500 08/06 (84.37)
up to 3.4 GHz
configuration) 3.73GHz Quadro FX 3500 07/06 (84.37)
EM64T Quadro FX 4500 12/05 (77.59)
up to 3.4 GHz
Dell Precision Workstation 470 Intel Xeon, EM64T nVidia 07/07
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 4500 11/05 (77.59)
Windows XP Driver: 91.85 Derived

3.4 GHz Quadro FX 4500 11/05 (77.59)
EM64T Quadro FX 4400 11/05 (77.56)
up to 3.4 GHz
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 3450 10/05 (77.56)

3.4 GHz Quadro FX 3450 10/05 (77.56)
EM64T Quadro FX 3450 10/05 (77.56)
up to 3.4 GHz
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 540 09/05 (77.56)
Derived
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 540 09/05 (77.56)
EM64T Quadro FX 540 09/05 (77.56)
up to 3.4 GHz
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 1400 10/05 (77.56)
Derived
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 1400 10/05 (77.56)
EM64T Quadro FX 1400 10/05 (77.56)
up to 3.4 GHz
Dell Precision Workstation 370 Intel Pentium 4, EM64T nVidia 07/07
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 1400 10/05 (77.56)
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 4400 10/05 (77.56)
Derived
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 4400 10/05 (77.56)

3.4 GHz Quadro FX 3400 10/05 (77.56)

3.4 GHz Quadro FX 3400 10/05 (77.56)
Derived
3.4 GHz Quadro FX 1300 10/05 (77.56)

3.4 GHz Quadro FX 1300 10/05 (77.56)
Derived
Dell Intel Pentium 4, EM64T nVidia 07/07
Precision Workstation 370 Quadro FX 1300 10/05 (77.56)
Windows XP 3.4 GHz
Driver: 91.85 08/04 (61.71)
Hewlett Packard
Certification
Partners Workstations Processor and clock speed Graphics Adapters
Date
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW6600 (certified) / Intel Quad-Core Xeon®, nVidia 05/08
Windows XP XW8600 (derived) processor 5440, up to 2.83 GHz Quadro FX3700
Driver 169.55
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4600 Intel Core 2 Duo E6850, up to nVidia 05/08
Windows XP 3.00 GHz Quadro FX3700
Driver 169.55
XW8600 (derived) processor 5440, up to 2.83 GHz Quadro FX1700 01/08 (162.69)
Windows XP
Driver 169.55
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4600 Intel Quad-Core Xeon®, nVidia 05/08
processor QX6700, up to 2.67 Quadro FX4600 01/08 (162.69)
Windows XP
GHz Driver 169.55
3.00 GHz Quadro FX1700 01/08 (162.69)
Windows XP
Driver 169.55
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW6400 (certified) / Intel Dual Core Xeon 5100, nVidia 05/08
XW8400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX4600 11/07 (160.08)
Windows XP
Driver 169.55
Hewlett Packard HP Mobile Workstation nw8710 Intel Core 2 Duo T7700, 2.40 nVidia 11/07
Windows XP GHz Quadro FX 1600M
Driver: 156.31
Hewlett Packard HP Mobile Workstation nw8510 Intel Core 2 Duo T7700, 2.40 nVidia 11/07
Windows XP GHz Quadro FX 570M
Driver: 156.31
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4400 Intel Quad Core QX6700, nVidia 07/07
Windows XP EM64T, up to 2.67 GHz Quadro FX3500
Driver 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Mobile Workstation nw8440 Intel Core 2 Duo T7600, 2.33 GHz ATI Mobility 01/07
Windows XP FireGL V5200
Driver : 8.223.4.0
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4400 Intel Core Duo E6700, 2.67 GHz nVidia 07/07
Windows XP Quadro FX560 11/06 (91.36)
Driver 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4400 Intel Core Duo E6700, 2.67 GHz ATI 10/06
Driver : 8.223.4.1
Driver 91.85 09/06 (84.80)
Windows XP XW8400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX4500 08/06 (91.36)
Driver 91.85
Driver 91.85 08/06 (84.80)
Driver 91.85 08/06 (84.80)
Driver : 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Mobile Workstation nw9440 Intel Core Duo T2600, 2.16 GHz nVidia 06/06
Quadro FX 1500M
Windows XP
Driver: 84.64
Hewlett Packard HP Mobile Workstation nw8440 Intel Core Duo T2400, 1.83 GHz ATI Mobility 05/06
Driver : 8.223.4.0
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW6200 Intel Xeon, EM64T nVidia 07/07

Windows XP up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX4500 11/05 (77.82)
Driver 91.85 Derived
Driver : 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4300 Intel Pentium 4, EM64T ATI FireGL V5100 11/05
Windows XP up to 3.6 GHz Driver : 8.163.1

Windows XP up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX3450 10/05(77.56)
Driver 91.85 09/05 (72.13)
Derived
Driver 91.85 09/05 (72.13)
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW4300 Intel Pentium 4, EM64T nVidia 07/07
Driver 91.85 10/05 (77.56)
08/05 (72.13)
Driver 91.85 10/05 (77.56)
08/05 (72.13)
Hewlett Packard HP Mobile Workstation nw8240 Intel Pentium M ATI Mobility 08/05
Windows XP up to 2.13 GHz FireGL V5000
Driver : 8.103.2.1.1
Windows XP up to 3.6 GHz Driver : 8.163.1 07/05 (8.103.2.1.1)
Windows XP up to 3.6 GHz Driver : 8.103.2.1.1
Hewlett Packard HP TabletPC TC 1100 Intel Pentium M nVidia GeForce4 Go 420 06/05
Windows XP 1GHz Driver : 45.74
Windows XP up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX1400 10/05(77.56)
Driver : 91.85 03/05 (71.84)
Derived
Driver : 91.85 03/05 (71.84)
Driver : 91.85 01/05 (70.78)
Driver : 91.85 12/04 (61.82)
Driver : 91.85 11/04 (61.82)
Driver : 91.85 11/04 (61.82)
Derived
Driver : 91.85 09/04 (61.71)
Driver : 91.85 09/04 (61.71)
Derived
Driver : 91.85 09/04 (61.71)
IBM Corporation
Certification
Date
IBM Blade Workstation HC 10 Intel Core 2 Duo E6700, up to nVidia 03/08
Windows XP 2.66 GHz Quadro FX 1600M
Driver : 162.69
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 9229 Intel Quad Core 3220, up to nVidia 08/07
Windows XP 2.67 GHz Quadro FX 3500
Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 9229 Intel Quad Core 3220, up to nVidia 08/07
Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 9229 Intel Core 2 Duo E6700, up to nVidia 02/07
Driver : 91.36
Windows XP 2.67 GHz Quadro FX 4500 02/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 6218, Refresh2 Intel Pentium 4 Dual Core nVidia 07/07
Windows XP EMT6, up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX 4500 12/06 (84.15)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.36
Driver : 91.85 10/06 (84.15)
Driver : 91.85 10/06(84.15)
IBM IntelliStation Z-Pro 9228 Intel Dual Core Xeon 5150 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP 2.67GHz Quadro FX 4500 03/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85 08/06 (84.15)
Driver : 91.85 07/06 (84.15)
Windows XP EMT6, up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX 1500 04/07(91.36)
Driver : 91.85 07/06 (84.15)
Windows XP EMT6, up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX 3500 04/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85 07/06 (84.15)
Driver : 91.85 07/06 (84.15)
Windows XP EMT6, up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX 550
Driver : 84.15
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 6218 Intel Pentium 4, EMT64 nVidia 06/06

Driver : 84.15
Driver : 91.85 05/06 (84.15)
Driver : 91.85 05/06 (84.15)
IBM IntelliStation Z-Pro 6223 Intel Xeon, EMT64 nVidia 07/07
Driver : 91.85

Driver : 91.85

Driver : 91.85

Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 9237 Intel Pentium 4, EMT64 ATI FireGL V3100 02/06
Windows XP 3.6 GHz Driver: 8.193.1

Windows XP 3.6 GHz Quadro FX 1400 01/06 ( 71.84)
Driver : 91.85

Windows XP 3.6GHz Quadro FX 4400
Driver : 71.84

Driver : 91.85
Windows XP 3.8 GHz Driver: 8.193.1 1st certification 10/05 with
driver 8.133.1.1

Driver : 71.84
Windows XP 3.6 GHz Driver: 8.193.1 2nd certification 08/05 with
driver 8.133.1.1
1st certification 01/05 with
driver 8.083
Windows XP 3.8 GHz Driver: 8.163.1

Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation Z-Pro 6223 Intel Xeon, EMT64 ATI FireGL V7100 07/05
Windows XP 3.6GHz Driver: 8.083

Driver : 91.85
Windows XP 3.6 GHz Driver: 8.163.1 1st certification 03/05 with
driver 8.083

Driver : 91.85 02/05 (67.22)

Driver : 91.85 01/05 (61.82)
3.6 GHz Driver: 8.193.1 2nd certification 08/05 with
Windows XP
driver 8.133.1.1
1st certification 01/05 with
driver 8.083
Driver : 91.85 12/04 (61.82)
Driver : 71.84
Driver : 71.84
Lenovo (Formerly included in IBM Corporation)
Certification
Date
Lenovo ThinkStation S10 Intel Core 2 Extreme QX6800 nVidia 05/08
Windows XP processor, up to 2.93 GHz Quadro FX1700 01/08 (162.69)
Driver: 169.55
Lenovo Thinkpad T61p Intel Core 2 Duo T7700, 2.40 nVidia 11/07
Windows XP GHz Quadro FX570M
Driver: 156.79
Lenovo Thinkpad Z61p Intel Core Duo T2500, 2.16 GHz ATI Mobility FireGL V5200 03/07
Windows XP Driver : 8.323
Lenovo Thinkpad T60p MT8741-C3U / MT2007 Intel Core 2 Duo T7600, ATI Mobility FireGL V5250 02/07
Windows XP 2.33GHz Driver : 8.323
Lenovo Thinkpad T60p MT2007-IWU Intel Core Duo T2600, 2.16 GHz ATI Mobility FireGL V5200 04/06
Windows XP Driver : 8.204
Lenovo Thinkpad T43p MT2668-HCU Pentium M 770 ATI Mobility FireGL V3200 07/05
Windows XP 2.13 GHz Driver : 8.133.1-050622a-
024643C-WHQL-IBM
Lenovo Thinkpad T42p MT 2373/2374 Pentium M ( Centrino ) ATI Mobility FireGL T2 1st Certification 06/04 on
Windows XP 1.8 GHz (M10GL) driver 7.93.4.1-031006a1-
Driver : 8.083 012010C
2nd Certif 01/05
Fujitsu Siemens
Certification
Date
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius M460 Intel Core 2 Duo E6850, up to nVidia 05/08
Windows XP 3.0 GHz Quadro FX1700 04/08 (162.69)
Driver: 169.55
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius H250 Intel Core 2 Duo 7500, up to nVidia 02/08
Windows XP 2.20 GHz Quadro FX570M
Driver: 156.87
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius R640 (certified) / R540 (derived) Intel Dual Core Xeon 5150 ATI FireGL V7300 04/07
Windows XP 2.67GHz Driver : 8.323
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius N450 Intel Core 2 Duo E6700, up to nVidia 02/07
Driver: 91.36
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius M450 Intel Core 2 Duo E6700, up to nVidia 02/07
Driver: 91.36
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius M450 Intel Core 2 Duo E6700, up to ATI FireGL V5200 11/06
Windows XP 2.67 GHz Driver : 8.263.0
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius R640 (certified) / R540 (derived) Intel Dual Core Xeon 5150 nVidia 10/06
Windows XP 2.67GHz Quadro FX3500
Driver: 91.36
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius Mobile H240 Intel Core™ Duo T2600, 2.16 ATI Mobility FireGL V5200 08/06
Windows XP GHz Driver : 8.233.0
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius M440 Intel Pentium 4E nVidia 09/05

Windows XP 3.6 GHz, Dual Core Quadro FX1400
Driver: 71.84
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius Mobile H230 Intel Pentium M ATI Mobility FireGL V5000 07/05
Windows XP 2.13 GHz Driver : 8.133.1.1

Driver: 71.84
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius Mobile H210 Intel Pentium M ATI Mobility FireGL T2e 02/05
Windows XP 1.8 GHz Driver : 8.083
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius R630 Intel Xeon, EMT64 nVidia 10/05

Windows XP 3.4 GHz Quadro FX3400 12/04 (61.82)
Driver: 71.84
08/04 (61.82)
Driver: 71.84
Windows 64-bit
Complete list of certified configurations is available at URL : http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/windows/certified-workstations-
list/
The following list of configurations are certified for 32-bit and 64-bit CATIA V5 applications :
List of providers:
● Dell
● Hewlett_Packard
● IBM Corporation
● SUN Corporation
● Fujitsu Siemens
● Lenovo
Dell
Certification
Date
Windows XP x64 Driver: 97.77
2.67 GHz Quadro FX 3450 01/07 (91.36)
2.67 GHz Quadro FX 3500 11/06 (91.36)
Dell Precision Workstation 670 / 470 (derived Intel Xeon, EM64T nVidia 07/07
configuration) 3.4 GHz Quadro FX 4500 02/06 (81.69)
EM64T Quadro FX 4500 02/06 (81.69)
up to 3.4 GHz
EM64T Quadro FX 3450 01/07 (91.36)
up to 3.4 GHz 01/06 (81.69)
configuration) 3.4 GHz Quadro FX 3450 12/06 (91.36)
Windows XP x64 Driver: 91.85 07/06 (84.37)
01/06 (81.69)
configuration) 3.4 GHz Quadro FX 3400 10/06(91.36)
01/06 (81.69)
08/05 (77.56)
IBM Corporation
Certification
Date
IBM Blade Workstation HC 10 Intel Core 2 Duo E6700, up to nVidia 03/08
Windows XP x64 2.66 GHz Quadro FX 1600M
Driver : 162.69
Windows XP x64 2.67 GHz Quadro FX 560
Driver : 91.36
IBM IntelliStation M-Pro 6218 Refresh 2 Intel Pentium 4, EMT64 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 3.0 GHz Quadro FX 3500 02/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85
Windows XP x64 2.67GHz Quadro FX 5500
Driver : 91.36
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation A-Pro 6217 Refresh 5 AMD OPTERON 200 series 2.6 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 Ghz, Dual Core Quadro FX1500 10/06 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85 10/06 (84.15)
Windows XP x64 2.67GHz Quadro FX 4500 10/06 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85
IBM IntelliStation A-Pro 6217 Refresh 5 AMD OPTERON 200 series 2.6 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 Ghz, Dual Core Quadro FX4500 09/06 (81.72)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85 08/06 (84.15)
IBM IntelliStation A-Pro 6217 AMD OPTERON 200 series 2.6 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 Quadro FX4500 06/06 (81.72)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85 06/06 (84.15)
Driver : 91.85

Driver : 91.36 09/05 (77.56)
Driver : 91.85 08/06 (84.37)
02/06 (81.72)
08/05 (77.56)
Driver : 91.85 02/06 (81.72)
08/05 (77.56)
Driver : 91.36
Driver : 91.36
Windows XP x64 3.6 GHz Driver: 8.293.0
Hewlett Packard
Certification
Date
Windows XP x64
Driver 169.55
Windows XP x64
Driver 169.55
3.00 GHz Quadro FX1700 03/08 (162.69)
Windows XP x64
Driver 169.55
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW6400 (certified) / Intel Quad Core Xeon 5345, nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 XW8400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 2.4 GHz Quadro FX1500
Driver 91.85
Windows XP x64 XW6400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX5500
Driver 91.63
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW8200 (certified) / Intel Xeon, EM64T nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 XW6200 (derived) up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX1300 02/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85
Windows XP x64 up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX1300 02/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW9400 AMD OPTERON 2000 series, nVidia 07/07
Driver 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW8400 (certified) / Intel Dual Core Xeon 5100, ATI 10/06
Windows XP x64 XW6400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 3.0 GHz FireGL V7200
Driver : 8.223.4.1
Windows XP x64 XW6400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX3500 01/07 (91.36)
Driver 91.85 08/06 (84.80)
Windows XP x64 XW6400 (derived) EM64T, 1.6 GHz up to 3.0 GHz Quadro FX1500 08/06 (84.80)
Driver 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW9300 AMD OPTERON 200 series 2.6 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 GHz Quadro FX4500 03/06 (81.69)
Driver : 91.85
Hewlett Packard HP Workstation XW8200 / XW6200 Intel Xeon, EM64T nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 (derived configuration) up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX1400 01/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85 03/06 (81.69)

Driver : 91.85
Driver : 91.85
Windows XP x64 GHz Quadro FX3450 01/07 (91.36)
Driver : 91.85 02/06 (81.69)
Driver : 91.85 02/06 (81.69)
Windows XP x64 GHz Quadro FX3400 10/06(91.36)
Driver 91.85 01/06 (81.69)
08/05 (77.56)
Windows XP x64 (derived configuration) up to 3.6 GHz Quadro FX3400 10/06(91.36)
Driver : 91.85 01/06 (81.69)
08/05 (77.56)
Sun Corporation
Certification
Date
SUN Sun Ultra 20 Workstation AMD OPTERON 100 series nVidia 07/07
up to 2.8 GHz Quadro FX 3500 02/07 (91.36)
up to 2.8 GHz Quadro FX 1400
Fujitsu Siemens
Certification
Date
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius X840 AMD Dual Core OPTERON nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 2218 series up to 2.6 GHz Quadro FX3500 04/07 (91.36)
Driver: 91.85
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius V840 AMD Dual Core OPTERON nVidia 04/07
Windows XP x64 2218 series up to 2.6 GHz Quadro FX5500
Driver: 91.36
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius R640 (certified) / R540 (derived) Intel Dual Core Xeon 5150 nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 2.67GHz Quadro FX3500 02/07 (91.36)
Driver: 91.85
Fujitsu Siemens Celsius V830 AMD Dual Core OPTERON nVidia 07/07
Windows XP x64 200 series up to 1.8 GHz Quadro FX4500 12/06 (91.36)
Driver: 91.85 06/06 (81.69)
Lenovo
Certification
Date
Lenovo ThinkStation S10 Intel Core 2 Extreme QX6850 nVidia 05/08
processor, up to 3 GHz Quadro FX1700 03/08 (162.69)
Windows XP x64
Driver: 169.55
OpenGL Shaders & CgFX on Windows

CgFX requires graphic adapters and drivers supporting the following standard OpenGL extensions :
● ARB_vertex_program 1.0
● ARB_fragment_program 1.0
When using CgFX on Windows, Version Cg 1.5 is required and delivered by V5 Release.
Supported Operating Systems

Cg toolkit is only available on Windows platforms :
● Windows XP
● Windows XP x64
Supported Graphic Configurations

Configurations certified with the following graphic adapters are supported with CgFX :
● nVidia:
❍ Quadro FX 1400 Go
❍ Quadro FX 1400
❍ Quadro FX 4400
❍ Quadro FX 4500
❍ Quadro FX 3400
❍ Quadro FX 3450
❍ Quadro FX 1300
❍ Quadro FX 540
❍ Quadro FX Go350M
❍ Quadro FX1500M / FX2500M
❍ Quadro FX 550
❍ Quadro FX 1500
❍ Quadro FX 3500
❍ Quadro FX 5500
❍ Quadro FX 560
❍ Quadro FX 4600
❍ Quadro FX 3500M
❍ Quadro FX 1600M
❍ Quadro FX 1700
❍ Quadro FX 570M
❍ Quadro FX 360M
❍ Quadro FX 1600M
❍ Quadro FX 570M
❍ Quadro FX 1700
❍ Quadro FX 3700
● ATI:
❍ FireGL V7200
❍ Mobility FireGL V5000
Note that new graphic adapters may be added when certified with CgFX and with a new configuration. Please refer to the following link for a list
of supported graphic adapters :
http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/windows/certified-workstations-list/global-release-notes/
Windows Derived Configurations

In addition to certified configurations, configurations indicated as Derived at URL http://www.3ds.com/implementation/technology/windows/
certified-workstations-list/ , are also supported, although they may not be specifically tested in Dassault Systemes, as they are considered
derived from certified configurations. Derived configurations differ from certified configurations with:
● a different clock speed
● different disk
● different network subsystems
● different texture memory configurations
when other main subsystems remain unchanged (processor model, chipset and graphic adapter).
ENOVIA CES Certifications
As of Version 5 Release 19, the status of certifications is the following:
Microsoft AIX HP-UX Sun Solaris

Operating System Windows
Database Manager 2003 Server
IBM DB2 > *** > >

Oracle 10g *** *** > >
***: Certified for the ENOVIA CES Server - Sourcing Hub
>: Will be certified in a later Service Pack release of R19, based on customer
requirements only
DELMIA Certified Third-Party Software
(Windows-based)
Prerequisites Prerequisites Prerequisites Prerequisites

for for for for
Software Version V5 32-bit V5 64-bit
Manufacturing PE 32-bit
Hub Server Client Client Client
● Oracle 10.2.0.2
or higher on
any certified
Oracle platform Yes No No No
Database
● Oracle 10.2.0.3
with Patch 13 is
recommended
● Windows 32-
bit: SUN J2SE
Runtime
Environment
6.0 Update 2 For For
Manufacturing Manufacturing
Java Yes For SSO
● Windows 64- Hub Integration Hub Integration
bit: SUN J2SE and SSO and SSO
Runtime
Environment
6.0 Update 2
for AMD 64
Microsoft Visual J# For SSO and

J# For SSO only For SSO only No
V 2.0 Webservices
FlexLM Version 8.3.b Yes Yes No No

Citrix Presentation No, but certified
Citrix No No No
Server 4.x for PE client
● Microsoft 32-
bit .NET
Framework 3.0
For SSO and For SSO and
.NET Microsoft 64- For SSO only No
●
Webservices Bridge
bit .NET
Framework 3.0
x64
For script-based
MS Office Microsoft Office For DPM Work For DPM Work
No reporting
Excel Excel 2003 Instructions Instructions
functionality
Microsoft Internet For For
Browser No For ErgoCheck
Explorer 7 documentation documentation
Microsoft Visual
For CATVBA For CATVBA
VBA Basic for Yes Yes
scripting. scripting.
Applications 6.4
Notes
● Single Sign-On (SSO): For 64-bit SSO, only JRE is supported. For 32-bit SSO, either JRE or J# with .NET
can be chosen.
● WebServices: Required for Change Management with the ENOVIA Engineering Hub
● Java Run-time Environment (JRE):
❍ For Windows XP, the environment variable JAVA_HOME has to be set on the server if you want
communication between the PE server and V5 clients.
❍ To download the required version, go to: http://java.sun.com/products/archive/index.html.
● To obtain the .NET Framework 3.0 Redistributable, go to: www.microsoft.com/downloads.

● The VBA 6.4 installation package is supplied with DPE; the VBA 6.0 package is supplied with V5. If DPE and
V5 are installed together, VBA 6.4 is required.
Database-Related Prerequisites
● Oracle RDBMS Server Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition
❍ 10.2.0.2 or higher for storage of the data of the Manufacturing Hub
● Oracle RDBMS Client Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition

❍ 10.2.0.2 or higher (only ORACLE 10g client supported for access to ORACLE 10g server) installed on the
PE server.
V5 Installation and Licensing Instructions
This page describes the general information about procedures and known issues for installing and licensing the
following products:
● CATIA
● ENOVIA DMU
● ENOVIA 3d com
● DELMIA Process Detailing & Validation (PLM V5)
● DELMIA Automation
Links to Official Online Documentation

Use the following links to consult the official installation documentation:
Installing the Code on Windows
Installing the Code on UNIX
Installing the Online Documentation
Installation
General Procedure for Windows
1. Log on as an administrator.
You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators
group. Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive.
The installation procedure starts automatically. A full self-explanatory graphical interface appears, in
which you can easily navigate.
3. After installation, a shortcut is created on your desktop. Double-click on it and the session will start.
Additional information can be found in the Infrastructure User's Guide documentation.
General Procedure for Unix

You must be super-user (root) to install this CD-ROM.
After mounting the CD-ROM , change directory to the mount point and enter the command:
./start
After a few seconds, a full self-explanatory graphical interface appears, in which you can easily
navigate.
3. After installation, if you have installed in the default /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19 directory, enter
the following command to start:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/os_name/code/command/
catstart
Additional information can be found in the Infrastructure User's Guide documentation.
Notice about Support of WebSphere MQ on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
WebSphere MQ, a corequisite for running the batch monitor, is not supported on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition.
Registry Corruption on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition

A problem of incompatibility between 32-bit and 64-bit registration is the cause of the problem when a V5R17
GA 64-bit product line has been installed after a V5R15 GA 32-bit product line with two different administrator
users.
This may lead to this type of message during an installation or un-installation:
To repair this registry key, perform the following steps:

● If you know the administrator user which performed the 32-bit installation, go to step (7).
● If you do not know the administrator user which performed the 32-bit installation, perform the following
steps:
1. Get the name of the user which performs the installation:

❍ In the registry editor, double-click on the key, in our case:
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\.CATPart\CATIA.Part\ShellNew
❍ Since the key does not belong to the administrator who is logged onto the workstation, you will get
the following message:
2. To determine the owner of the key, on the key select mouse button 3, then Permissions. The following
message will be displayed:
3. Click OK, then the following dialog box will be displayed:

4. Click on Advanced, then the following dialog box will be displayed:
5. In the Owner tab, the message Unable to display the current owner is displayed. In this case, check the
Replace owner on sub- containers and objects option, then click Apply then OK. The following dialog box
will be displayed:
6. This time, by selecting mouse button 3, then Permissions, you will obtain the owner of the key:
DS\ogg is the administrator user which performed the 32-bit installation.
7. Now you know the administrator user, log off then log on with the administrator user which performed
the installation.
8. To repair the registries, using the V5R15 GA 32-bit installation or also a V5R17 GA 32-bit installation, run
the following command:
Unload_directory/intel_a/code/bin/V5Regserver -unset
Check Integrity Problem during Installation:

You can ignore the problem with the following file if it presents errors during an integrity check under UNIX:
CAAPSNInteroperability.edu
Distributing Code on Windows (DELMIA ONLY)

In the CATIA Installation and Administration Guide, section "Distributing Version 5 on Windows", the scenario
"Accessing the Software From a Thin Client" explains that you can:
● create the runtime environment on the client
● or access the server environment via the network, to avoid creating an environment on the client.
Note that, in either case, you will not be able to run the Batch Management utility or the Settings Management
utility.
Problem Installing Manufacturing When McAfee Anti-Virus is Running (DELMIA ONLY)

If the installation stops during the unloading of the Manufacturing cabinet file and the following dialog box is
displayed:
with the following message in the cxinst.log file:

Unload Manufacturing - CDROM 1
File UnloadDir\intel_a\control\Manufacturing.toc was not found
the problem may be due to the McAfee Anti-virus product.
The bypass is to open the McAfee VirusScan Console window and select "Access Protection" in the Task list.
Then, use the right mouse button or Alt+Enter to display the "Access Protection Properties" window. Select the
tab "File, Share and Folder Protection" and uncheck the option: Prevent access to suspicious startup items(.
exe) **\startup\**\*.exe
Product Prerequisites (DELMIA ONLY)

Due to business process requirements and additional validation testing it is necessary to restate previously
incorrect manufacturing product prerequisites.
● Together with a base configuration the Prismatic Machining Preparation Assistant 2 product (MPA) also
requires that the NC Manufacturing Review 2 product (NCG) be installed along with at least one of the
following: Prismatic Machining 2 product (PMG) or Advanced Machining 2 product (AMG)
● Together with a base configuration the Multi-Pocket Machining 2 product (MPG) also requires that the NC
Manufacturing Review 2 product (NCG) be installed along with at least one of the following: Prismatic
Machining 2 product (PMG), Advanced Machining 2 product (AMG) or 3 Axis Surface Machining 2 product
(SMG).
CORBAServerInfra_post message during installation (DELMIA ONLY)

When installing some CATIA configurations, if an error occurs related to the execution of the
CORBAServerInfra_post module, please, ignore it. It will have no consequence on the usage of the installed
solutions and products.
Documentation Change: Deploying Instant Collaboration in IBM WebSphere Application Server

(DELMIA ONLY)
In the Version 5 Installation and Deployment Guide, section Deploying Instant Collaboration in IBM WebSphere
Application Server, section Phase 1, the paragraph "V5 Collaboration Client" now reads:
Install the V5 runtime view of the VDM code on the V5 collaboration client:
Media: ENOVIA V5 VPM
Configuration: VDM containing VPM Navigator.
Note that you also have to install from the ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator media a configuration containing the DMU
Navigator (for example, DM2). If no DMU license is present, you will not have access to certain functions.
n the following table:
Yes The command is available
No The command is not available or grayed out
NA Not applicable
FUNCTIONS CONFIGURATIONS --> VDM VDM + DM2

Peer-to-Peer mode
INSTANT COLLABORATION TOOLBAR
3D Conferencing icon Yes Yes
3D Conferencing window
● Publish/Listen tab -> Publish / Listen checkboxes Yes Yes
● Publish/Listen tab -> Keep viewpoint sharing active Yes Yes
● Publish/Listen tab -> Activate mouse pointer sharing No Yes
● Publish/Listen tab -> Activate slave mode No Yes
● Annotated Views tab -> Activate No Yes
● Annotated Views tab -> Send No Yes
Client/Server mode
Connectivity icon Yes Yes
Connectivity Toolbar
● Community icon Yes Yes
❍ Community Window
■ Connectivity tab Yes Yes

■ Collaborative Review tab Yes Yes
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Create a 3D
conference No Yes
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Invite others

to the current 3D conference No Yes
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Leave current

3D conference No Yes
● Disconnect icon Yes Yes

Instant Messaging icon Yes Yes
INSTANT MESSAGING TOOLBAR
Create an Audio Meeting Yes Yes
● Invite others to meeting -> Meeting tools -> 3D No Yes
● Invite others to meeting -> Meeting tools -> (Others) Yes Yes
● Invite others to meeting -> Meeting tools -> Secure meeting Yes Yes
● Invite others to meeting -> Meeting tools -> Add/Remove invitees Yes Yes
3D Conferencing icon No Yes
● Publish/Listen tab -> Publish / Listen checkboxes No Yes
● Publish/Listen tab -> Keep viewpoint sharing active No Yes
Meeting Toolbar Yes Yes
● Create a Screen Sharing Meeting -> Invite others to a meeting ->
Meeting tools -> 3D No Yes

Meeting tools -> (Others) Yes Yes

Meeting tools -> Secure Meeting Yes Yes

Meeting tools -> Add/ Remove Invitees Yes Yes
● Create a Whiteboard Meeting -> Invite others to a meeting Yes Yes

● Create a Collaboration Meeting -> Invite others to a meeting Yes Yes
● Create a 3D Conference -> Invite others to a meeting No Yes
Documentation Change: Deploying Instant Collaboration in IBM WebSphere Application Server

(DELMIA ONLY)
The sharing program may not work on the publisher side and the whiteboard may not be displayed on the
listener side:
● because the Sharing Program window cannot be closed on the listener side
● and the whiteboard is not displayed and available on the listener side
● and the commands are no longer available in the sharing window on the publisher side.
The same behavior has been found using the Microsoft Communicator client: it is not possible on the listener
side to close the sharing window. If the listener kills the display sharing process using the Task Manager, the
sharing window is no longer usable.
Single Sign-On (DELMIA ONLY)

If you are using CATIA VPM Navigator in Single Sign-On mode on 32-bit Windows, you need to install the
following packages on each client:
● Microsoft .NET Framework Version 1.1 Redistributable Package
● Microsoft Visual J# .NET Version 1.1 Redistributable Package.
Licensing
The licensing system of the above V5 products is IBM License Use Management. More information on LUM can
be obtained on the IBM web site at http://www.ibm.com/software/lum or in the LUM 4.6.8 CDROM that may
have been distributed with this V5 package.
LUM does not need to be configured if your license is node locked.
For ENOVIA 3d com only:
● when accessing CATIA data, ENOVIA 3d com uses by default a CATIA V5 server, one license is required for
each user.
● ENOVIA 3d com products do not support nodelock licensing. LUM is required to serve concurrent licenses
across a network. A LUM configuration file (i4ls.ini) is required on clients to access concurrent licenses from
these servers. See the ReadMe.txt file located on the CDROM for information on how to get the Windows
target id. Please refer to the LUM documentation you can find in the LUM CDROM.
● IBM License Use Management (LUM) is required to serve licenses across a network.
To use concurrent licenses, you need to install and configure a LUM server and configure LUM clients.
NOTE THAT LUM 5 IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS V5 DELIVERY. 4.6.8 level of LUM is required on all
platforms for all product brands.
LUM 4.6.8 + 4.6.8.3 patch is the latest level certified by Dassault Systemes. It is recommended to migrate your
LUM servers to this level.
IBM License Use Management may be obtained at no charge from:
http://www.ibm.com/software/awdtools/lum/support.html
The LUM license certificate has the following format:
[LicenseCertificate]
CheckSum=2293A23783325F036CCBA9438CC87971
TimeStamp=905414500
PasswordVersion=7
VendorName=Dassault Systemes
VendorPassword=hnj43snv8pr3a
VendorID=5242378dbf8d.02.c0.09.c8.93.00.00.00
ProductName=MD2-CATIA Mechanical Design 2
ProductID=2119
ProductVersion=85SH024
ProductPassword=umd9wvnqdmt9ayzzbdb2xdc4tiam8
ProductAnnotation=85SH0245691-
LicenseStyle=nodelocked
LicenseStartDate=10/01/1999
LicenseDuration=92
LicenseEndDate=12/31/1999
LicenseCount=1
MultiUseRules=
RegistrationLevel=3
TryAndBuy=No
SoftStop=No
TargetType=26
TargetTypeName=MS Win-32 MAC
TargetID=50ebc1e2
ExtendedTargetType=
ExtendedTargetID=
DerivedLicenseStyle=
DerivedLicenseStartDate=
DerivedLicenseEndDate=
DerivedLicenseAggregateDuration=
SerialNumber=85SH0245691
Upgrade=No
The certificate should be saved in a temporary file with the ".LIC" extension, with the first line being
"[LicenseCertificate]".
This is the certificate that the installation procedure prompts you to import. Do not import nodelock certificates
using LUM utilities.
If needed, to import a certificate once the installation has been performed, instead of importing it during the
installation, run "CATNodelockMgt.exe" for Windows or "CATNodelockMgt" for UNIX. This command is located
in the code/bin directory. For Windows, you can access this tool from Start/Programs/Catia/Tools menu and by
running the Nodelock Key Management tool.
See the ReadMe.txt file located on the CDROM for information on how to get the Windows target id.
Incorrect Target ID for Some Users

On Windows computers having more than one network card, it may happen that the Target ID used by
different user accounts be not the same.
The problem can be fixed by setting "Full Control" permission for the registry key {HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
\SOFTWARE\IBM\License Use Runtime}. This permission can be set for individual users or groups, or for
Everyone.
Run Regedit. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IBM\License Use Runtime. Right click on it. Select
Permissions. Select the appropriate user and/or group, and allow Full Control. Or add Everyone group and allow
Full Control.
Concurrent Offline Licensing - Issue with i4_offline_mig

If an abnormal end occurs when running the i4_offline_mig command, you must restart and then stop again
the LUM license server.
For ENOVIA DMU only:
Furthermore, the licenses generated by IBM before December 2003 for the ENOVIA DMU configurations based
on DM1, DM2, DPS and PS1 possess an obsolete format which does not work for concurrent offline licensing.
i4_offline_mig 4.6.7.1 allows these licenses to work. You can find i4_offline_mig 4.6.7.1 at the following URL:
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=886&context=SW860&uid=swg21204240
CATIA Installation Instructions
General Information
Information about installation of the on-line documentation can be found in the "On-line Documentation"
page.
Information about installation and licensing can be found in the "V5 Installing and Licensing Instructions"
page.
Distributing Code on Windows

In the CATIA Installation and Administration Guide, section "Distributing Version 5 on Windows", the
scenario "Accessing the Software From a Thin Client" explains that you can:
● create the runtime environment on the client
● or access the server environment via the network, to avoid creating an environment on the client.
Note that, in either case, you will not be able to run the Batch Management utility or the Settings
Management utility.
Problem Installing Manufacturing When McAfee Anti-Virus is

Running
If the installation stops during the unloading of the Manufacturing cabinet file and the following dialog box
is displayed:
with the following message in the cxinst.log file:

Unload Manufacturing - CDROM 1
File UnloadDir\intel_a\control\Manufacturing.toc was not found
the problem may be due to the McAfee Anti-virus product.
The bypass is to open the McAfee VirusScan Console window and select "Access Protection" in the Task
list. Then, use the right mouse button or Alt+Enter to display the "Access Protection Properties" window.
Select the tab "File, Share and Folder Protection" and uncheck the option: Prevent access to suspicious
startup items(.exe) **\startup\**\*.exe
Product Prerequisites
Due to business process requirements and additional validation testing it is necessary to restate previously
incorrect manufacturing product prerequisites.
● Together with a base configuration the Prismatic Machining Preparation Assistant 2 product (MPA) also
requires that the NC Manufacturing Review 2 product (NCG) be installed along with at least one of the
following: Prismatic Machining 2 product (PMG) or Advanced Machining 2 product (AMG)
● Together with a base configuration the Multi-Pocket Machining 2 product (MPG) also requires that the
NC Manufacturing Review 2 product (NCG) be installed along with at least one of the following:
Prismatic Machining 2 product (PMG), Advanced Machining 2 product (AMG) or 3 Axis Surface Machining
2 product (SMG).
CORBAServerInfra_post message during installation

When installing some CATIA configurations, if an error occurs related to the execution of the
CORBAServerInfra_post module, please, ignore it. It will have no consequence on the usage of the
installed solutions and products.
Documentation Change: Deploying Instant Collaboration in IBM

WebSphere Application Server
In the Version 5 Installation and Deployment Guide, section Deploying Instant Collaboration in IBM
WebSphere Application Server, section Phase 1, the paragraph "V5 Collaboration Client" now reads:
Note that you also have to install from the ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator media a configuration containing the
DMU Navigator (for example, DM2). If no DMU license is present, you will not have access to certain
functions.
In the following table:
NA Not applicable
FUNCTIONS CONFIGURATIONS
VDM VDM + DM2
-->
Peer-to-Peer mode
Client/Server mode

■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Create a
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Invite

others to the current 3D conference No Yes
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Leave

current 3D conference No Yes

● Invite others to meeting -> Meeting tools -> Add/Remove
invitees Yes Yes

● Create a Screen Sharing Meeting -> Invite others to a meeting -
> Meeting tools -> 3D No Yes

> Meeting tools -> (Others) Yes Yes

> Meeting tools -> Secure Meeting Yes Yes

> Meeting tools -> Add/ Remove Invitees Yes Yes


listener side:
The same behavior has been found using the Microsoft Communicator client: it is not possible on the
listener side to close the sharing window. If the listener kills the display sharing process using the Task
Manager, the sharing window is no longer usable.
Single Sign-On
If you are using CATIA VPM Navigator in Single Sign-On mode on 32-bit Windows, you need to install the
following packages on each client:
● Microsoft .NET Framework Version 1.1 Redistributable Package
● Microsoft Visual J# .NET Version 1.1 Redistributable Package.
Documentation Modification
A mistake occurred in the Installation and Deployment Guide, section "About Settings". In the section "On
Windows", the command to run CATOptionsMgt in step 2 is:
catstart -run "CATOptionsMgt -admin" -env envname
ENOVIA V5 VPM Installation Instructions
The following topics are addressed in this document:

● Licensing Information
● JAVA_HOME Variable
● Single Sign-on
● 2D and 3D Viewers
● Misleading Message after PLMDBSetup
● Document Addendum to Migrating from ENOVIA V5 VPM V5R18 to ENOVIA V5 VPMR19 on
UNIX document
● Documentation Change: Data Groups in P and O
● Documentation Change: Erroneous Vault Starter Command
Licensing Information
The licensing system of ENOVIA V5 VPM is IBM License Use Management. More information
on LUM can be obtained on the IBM web site at http://www.ibm.com/software/lum or in the
LUM 4.6.8 CDROM that may have been distributed with this V5 package.
Nodelock license keys are not allowed with ENOVIA V5 VPM. IBM License Use Management
(LUM) is required to serve concurrent license keys across a network. A LUM configuration file
(i4ls.ini) is required on clients to access concurrent license keys from license servers.
NOTE THAT LUM 5 IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS V5 DELIVERY. 4.6.8 level of LUM
is required on all platforms for all product brands.
LUM 4.6.8 + 4.6.8.3 patch is the latest level certified by Dassault Systemes. It is
recommended to migrate your LUM servers to this level.
JAVA_HOME Variable
If you install the ENOVIA_V5_VPM media for the client part, for example, the configuration
DER, the CATIA media must be installed afterwards.
Furthermore, in the CATIA environment file, the JAVA_HOME variable must be set to the
same value as in the ENOVIA_V5_VPM environment file.
Single Sign On
The Installation and Deployment Guide, chapter "Activating Single Sign-On", section
"Activating SSO in the Installation Path Deployed in the Web Application Server (Wintop or
Webtop)" discusses two variables.
The following variables must be set like this:
SSOActivated=yes
SSOSecuredEnvironment=yes
in the SSOClient.properties file in BOTH the installation of the PLM Hub (ENOVIA V5 VPM
server) AND of the Web server.
2D and 3D Viewers
In order to use the 2D or 3D Viewer, you must install and have all necessary licenses for
3dCOM. For more information on installation and licensing, consult 3d COM Classic
Installation and Licensing.
Misleading Message after PLMDBSetup

On UNIX, if you do not perform the PLM Database setup procedure, the following message
appears in the window from which you started the PLMDBSetup procedure:
PLMDBSetup program aborted
This is misleading to users who may have successfully completed the Clash setup procedure
but did not not complete the PLMDBSetup procedure. If this is the case, simply ignore the
message.
Document Addendum to Migrating from ENOVIA V5 VPM

V5R18 to ENOVIA V5 VPM V5R19 on UNIX document.
The correct path for ENVDir is:
The full directory path to the CATEnv directory.
-EnvDir Example:
-EnvDir /usr/DS/LCA17/CATEnv
Documentation Change: Data Groups in P and O

Note: creating data groups which reference to boolean attributes is no longer supported by
the VPMPeopleEdit application.
Documentation Change: Erroneous Vault Starter

Command
In the Installation and Deployment Guide, chapter "Installing the Vault Server Manually",
section "Register the New Vault Server on the Orbix daemon", a backslash was missing from
the vault starter command which should be:
Putit h reverdsy shared ENOVIAVaultServer /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/startup/
orbix/code/command/catstart env \"ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19"\ direnv \"/CATEnv\" -
run /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/startup/orbix/code/command/
runENOVVaultStarter object \"1400 360 ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19 /CATEnv\""
Documentation Change: Modifying the ulimit Data Setting

Add the following to this section:
1024 is just an initial setting and it should be modified differently based on the number of
users in production. You need to consider that every user is consuming between 5-9
connections. And the number of FD should be consistent with the total number of
connections which can be used.
Example: For 200 users the ulimit for the FD should be set to 4096 or higher.
ENOVIA DMU Installation Instructions
General Information
Information about installation of the on-line documentation can be found in the "On-line Documentation"
page.
Information about installation and licensing can be found in the "V5 Installing and Licensing Instructions"
page.
CORBAServerInfra_post message during installation

When installing some DMU configurations, if an error occurs related to the execution of the
CORBAServerInfra_post module, please, ignore it. It will have no consequence on the usage of the
installed solutions and products.

In the Version 5 Installation and Deployment Guide, section Deploying Instant Collaboration in IBM
WebSphere Application Server, section Phase 1, the paragraph "V5 Collaboration Client" now reads:
Note that you also have to install from the ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator media a configuration containing the
DMU Navigator (for example, DM2). If no DMU license is present, you will not have access to certain
functions.
In the following table:
NA Not applicable
FUNCTIONS CONFIGURATIONS
VDM VDM + DM2
-->
Peer-to-Peer mode
Client/Server mode

■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Create a
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Invite

others to the current 3D conference No Yes
■ Collaborative Review -> (contextual menu) -> Leave

current 3D conference No Yes

● Invite others to meeting -> Meeting tools -> Add/Remove
invitees Yes Yes
> Meeting tools -> 3D No Yes

> Meeting tools -> (Others) Yes Yes

> Meeting tools -> Secure Meeting Yes Yes

> Meeting tools -> Add/ Remove Invitees Yes Yes


listener side:
The same behavior has been found using the Microsoft Communicator client: it is not possible on the
listener side to close the sharing window. If the listener kills the display sharing process using the Task
Manager, the sharing window is no longer usable.
ENOVIA 3d com Classic - Installation
Instructions
General Information
Information about installation of the on-line documentation can be found in the "On-line
Documentation" page.
Information about installation can be found in the "V5 Installing and Licensing Instructions"
page.
WARNING: Note that the installation of any Service Packs will re-deliver files that you may
have modified while working with the product. It is strongly recommended that you backup
all .xml files and the entire hierarchy .../startup/ before re-installing.
3d com Interoperability Configuration Recommendations

If using interoperability, the following configuration is recommended:
● ENOVIA DMU (the version of your DMU must be the same as the version of your ENOVIA
3d com installation; no previous version of ENOVIA DMU is supported)
● ENOVIA VPLM ENOVIAVPM 1.6
● Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 (with JVM ≥ 3240)
● Server AIX 5.3
● Client Windows XP
● ENOVIA 3d com 5.18
● ENOVIA VPLM ENOVIAPM 3.3
IMPORTANT: The CATIA level used by ENOVIA VPLM ENOVIAVPM and ENOVIA 3d com must
be the same on a given server.
Note: ENOVIA VPLM ENOVIAVPM 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 and 1.5 are not supported.
NLS Considerations
ENOVIA 3d com Classic is NLS enabled.
For ENOVIA 3d com Classic, documentation is available in English and translated
documentations will be available in German, French, Japanese, Chinese and Korean. Check
availability dates for German, French, Japanese, Chinese and Korean documentation.
Installation Instructions
This chapter describes the installation method to install the functions of ENOVIA 3d com.
The readme.txt file contains the procedures to install . This file can be accessed before
installation by simply mounting the CD-ROM and using a browser with the file path: /cdrom/
readme.txt.
To copy the 3d com Installation guide (pdf format) for use during the installation
1. Insert the Documentation CDROM #2 into the CDROM reader.
2. Mount the CDROM.
3. Copy the installation documentation using the following command:
cp /cdrom/omdpdfbasil_O2/basil.pdf $doc/
where $doc is the location to which you choose to copy this temporary copy of the 3d com
Installation guide.
To install the 3d com code

1. You must be super-user (root) to install the code.
2. Insert the Code CDROM into the CDROM reader.
3. Mount the CDROM, change directory to the mount point and enter the command:
./start
or, if you don't want to hear music
./start -s
A full self-explanatory graphical interface will appear, in which you can easily navigate.
Installing / Customizing MULTIPDM Access Drivers

The installation of the Multi-PDM access drivers only requires the customization of a number
of property files. For details, see the corresponding documentations found on the ENOVIA V5
3d com Documentation homepage:
● Multi-PDM PM Plug-in
● Multi-PDM OP Plug-in
● Multi-PDM CDM/VPM Plug-in
Installation Known Problems

Running batches using the Do not run batches using the root userid on UNIX.
Root userid on UNIX
"Bad options:" Message on On Unix, you need to be root before launching Release Setup in
Unix interactive mode (start or start -s ). Otherwise, you will be
prompted to log on as super-user and after having entered the
password, setup will end with the error message:
Bad options:
You must use option -u to specify where is your GA Installation.

"Cannot save files before If the following message appears:
setup of Release" Message
Cannot save files before setup of Release
Please free space in the temporary directories: /tmp or /var/

tmp
When installing this Release in automatic commit mode, invalid
required disk space is computed and it may be unable to install
it. Even if it won't be used, please free disk space.
Installation of MetaSearch There is a known problem where the installation of the 3d com
on Windows with CATIA V5 MetaSearch server on the same Windows machine as CATIA V5
may cause CATIA default files to be updated. This may change
the expected behavior of CATIA V5. Uninstall does not work
consistently and may not return files to their original state.
Until a fix is available it is recommended that the Metasearch
server not be installed on a Windows machine already installed
with CATIA V5.
Use of VPM with an Oracle You have to re-launch the orbix daemon which is launched
database automatically at the end of the installation. Else, it will be
impossible to load a model stored in VPM in a 3dcom viewer
Setting Correct Authorizations for End Users on Windows

Server environments use by default the folder referenced by the CSIDL_COMMON_APPDATA
path for the .CATUserSettingPath variable. This folder is usually:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data
and is used to contain a variety of files, including user settings located in the Dassault
Systemes folder.
Typically, the authorizations given to the CATUserSettingPath may not be sufficient. By
default, the folder:
does not provide write access for normal end users. The default authorizations on the folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users
and all the subfolders it contains are:
Administrators - Full Control
Power Users - Change (Read/Write)
Everyone - Read
System - Full Control
Consequently, make sure that end users using server-type environments have sufficient
authorizations (MODIFY+WRITE) for at least the folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Dassault Systemes
to be able to write their settings to (and modify their settings in) this folder.
Installing Version 5 Products (Windows and UNIX)

ENOVIA VPLM Vault Client Configuration
In the ENOVIA Vault Client Configuration panel, you should leave the checkbox
unchecked and then click the Next button.
Starting and Stopping the WebSphere Application Server

Note: if the WebSphere Application Server cannot be stopped and a message like this is
displayed:
The server "server1" cannot be reached. It appears to be stopped.
run the following commands to kill the WAS process:
ps -ef | grep java
kill -9 java process
where java process is the name of the appropriate WAS server process.
Furthermore, if the WebSphere Application Server was still running when you launched the
WASSetupUI command, restart the server once the command has been executed.
Apache Server Level 2.2.3

The "Additional Server Software Requirements" under section "Software Requirements" of
the "Installation and Deployment Guide" for 3dcom classic now specifies that the supported
level of Apache is Apache Server 2.2.3.
In the section "Post Installation for 3d com Server on UNIX/Windows", "Configure the HTTP
Server", the lines to be added to the end of the httpd.conf configuration file are now:
Alias /enovia_portal/ %installation_path%/intel_a/docs/
Alias /Views/ "<installation_path>/Views/
ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ %installation_path%/intel_a/docs/cgi-bin/
Misleading Message after PLMDBSetup

On UNIX, if you do not perform the PLM Database setup procedure, the following message
appears in the window from which you started the PLMDBSetup procedure:
PLMDBSetup program aborted
This is misleading to users who may have successfully completed the Clash setup procedure
but did not not complete the PLMDBSetup procedure. If this is the case, simply ignore the
message.
Documentation Change: Erroneous Vault Starter

Command
In the Installation and Deployment Guide, chapter "Installing the Vault Server Manually",
section "Register the New Vault Server on the Orbix daemon", a backslash was missing from
the vault starter command which should be:
Putit h reverdsy shared ENOVIAVaultServer /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/startup/
orbix/code/command/catstart env \"ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19"\ direnv \"/CATEnv\" -
run /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/startup/orbix/code/command/
runENOVVaultStarter object \"1400 360 ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19 /CATEnv\""
General Information
Information about licensing can be found in the "V5 Installing and Licensing Instructions"
page.
ENOVIA CES Installation Instructions
General information
None
None
Concurrent Offline Licensing

None
Online Documentation Installation

None
Online Documentation Full-Text Search

None
D5 Installation - Additional Instructions
This section provides an overview for obtaining a license and installing VMAP and QUEST
onto Windows systems. For information about installing other configurations, see the
installation documentation on the CDs. No license is required to access the installation
documentation.
All DELMIA software is "protected" or "locked" and cannot be run on a computer until the
licensing has been enabled and a special data file called the license.dat file is set up. This
file contains encrypted information, which is used by DELMIA software products to determine
which software programs are allowed to run on the computer and which options are
available for that program.
License File
Licensing keys are based on the i4target.exe result. This executable is supplied by your
salesperson.
Feature Line for Target ID

The license file for a Target ID contains a line that looks similar to the one shown. The
<product name> will specify which DELMIA product is licensed for the workstation.
FEATURE <product name>:6048 deneb 517 15-dec-2006 0 ABCE4B44A8DD466EDFE6
VENDOR_STRING=256 HOSTID=TID=1BD3F7C ck=125
This line specifies which DELMIA product will be allowed to run on the computer and which
options will be available for that product. A file named license.dat will be emailed to your
point of contact via DELMIA's licensing department. If this is an upgrade or there are other
DELMIA products on the computer, the license.dat file will already exist and the file must
be updated.
ID Number – Target ID
The target ID of a computer can be obtained from CATIA Nodelock Key Management
software in V5. Users can also download the LUM software appropriate for their operating
system from the following website:
http://www-306.ibm.com/software/awdtools/lum/component.html
The LUM software can be used as shown:

i4target.exe –h displays help on usage
i4target.exe –O outputs a target ID in the following format:
i4target Version 4.6.8 Windows –LUM Target ID Tool
© Copyright 1995 – 2002, IBM Corporation, All Rights Reserved
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or restricted by GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
© Copyright 1991 – 1998 Gradient Technologies Inc., All Rights Reserved
© Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, Hewlett-Packard Company, All Rights Reserved.
LUM Target ID - - - - -
1bd3f7c win32mac Customer Info
VMAP or QUEST New Installation - Node-Locked License

1. Login as Administrator.
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. Setup should automatically launch. If it does
not, select the Start button and click Run. Enter the following: D:\multi\setupwin.
exe
3. Choose a product installation and follow the instructions that are shown on the screen.
NOTE: Wherever the term <product>.bat is used, the appropriate product name as
shown below should be applied:
IGRIP igrip.bat
ENVISION envision.bat
UltraArc uarc.bat
UltraGRIP ugrip.bat
UltraPaint upaint.bat
UltraSpot uspot.bat
INSPECT inspect.bat
VNC vnc.bat
Create the license.dat File

Copy the license.dat file into the directory C:\deneb\license. If this directory does not
exist, create it.
Designating the Online Docs Viewer

The online documentation is provided as html. This allows the files to be viewed by any web
browser. Edit the <product>.bat file located in the vmap directory and change the
documentation variables to point to and start the preferred viewer.
The following two lines show the default settings used in the <product>.bat file that is
shipped on the DELMIA CD. This will start Netscape Communicator.
set VIEWER_LOC=C:\Progr~1\Netscape\Commun~1\Program\
set DENEB_DOC_VIEWER=%VIEWER_LOC%Netscape.exe
%DENEB_PROD_DIR%\docs\%DENEB_PRODUCT%_HOME\HOMEPAGE.html
The next two lines are an example of how to edit the <product>.bat file to run an installed
version of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
set VIEWER_LOC=C:\Program Files\Plus!\Microsoft Internet\
set DENEB_DOC_VIEWER=%VIEWER_LOC%iexplore.exe
%DENEB_PROD_DIR%\docs\%DENEB_PRODUCT%_HOME\HOMEPAGE.html
Starting a DELMIA Product
1. Select the Start button, point to Programs and point to DELMIA (or double-click on
the DELMIA icon installed on your desktop). Click on the licensed DELMIA software
that you want to run.
2. If any error messages are generated, please refer to Appendix A in the In for possible
reasons and corrections.
Creating User Libraries

NOTE: Wherever the term <productlib> is used, the appropriate configuration library
name as shown below should be applied:
IGRIP SYSlib
ENVISION SYSlib
UltraArc UARClib
UltraGRIP UGRIPlib
UltraPaint UPAINTlib
UltraSpot USPOTlib
INSPECT INSPECTlib
VNC VNClib
After installing the DELMIA product, user libraries should be created for storing projects.
These project files should not be saved in <productlib> because this library is over-written
with each subsequent product upgrade or version change. Please refer to the Configuration
Files Guide, the Creating a Library and Config File section or see online HELP for SYS | FILE
| MAKE LIB. At least one user library should be established.
PE Installation Instructions
To eliminate redundant information, DS DELMIA has included all of its installation and
prerequisite information in this program directory. Use the hyperlinks below to access the
contents of the readme file available in previous releases.
● DELMIA Certified Operating Systems (Windows-based)
● DELMIA Recommended Configurations
● Licensing
● Installing a New Standalone System
● Customizing DELMIA Process Engineer Password Encryption
● Updating an Existing Installation
● Uninstalling Process Engineer
● DELMIA Certified Third-Party Software (Windows-based)
Licensing
Note: A printable copy of this form is available here.
If you use a license server, see the Certified Third-Party Software table to verify that you
have the correct version of FLEXlm software. A more detailed description of how to obtain a
FLEX license can be found on the DELMIA Process Engineer CD in the folder \Support
\FLEXlm.
To get a license, please provide the licensing department at DELMIA (either
[email protected], or [email protected]) with the following licensing
information:
Company:
Location:
Contact:
Phone/Fax:
Email:
1
Computer name:
2
MAC – Address:
DPE Version:
3
Previous license:
Notes: 1You can see your computer (or host’s) name by opening a command window and
entering ipconfig /all.
2On this CD, in the directory \Support\FLEXlm, copy the executable lmutil.exe
onto your machine. In a command window, enter lmutil hostid. The first or only
output is your MAC Address.
3Intended for customers who upgrade from an earlier version. The previous
license number can be obtained from the Help menu.
Installing a New Standalone System

For an ORACLE based installation, you need an ORACLE license. This can be
Notes:
purchased either from DELMIA or directly from ORACLE.
If you are unsure how to create new users in an ORACLE database, please see
Importing Data into the Database in the ORACLE Installation manual (on the
ORACLE disk), where this procedure is described in detail.
Use administrator permissions to install Process Engineer.
The option Poet database for the database type is no longer available.
Please follow the instructions below in the order presented.
PPR Oracle
1. From the Oracle-Dumps folder on this CD, import the .dmp files to the database
users you created as an ORACLE prerequisite for Process Engineer installation.
2. Determine the type of database you want to install:
❍ If you want to install a database containing the newest configuration and scripts
use the dmp-files in the subfolder:
For general availability releases:

..\ Oracle-Dumps\pe5RN_std (where RN=the release number)
For service packs:
..\Oracle-Dumps\pe5RN_n (where n=the current service pack)
❍ If you want to install an empty database, use the .dmp files in the subfolder:
For general availability releases:

..\ Oracle-Dumps\pe5RN_std_e (where RN = the release number)
For service packs:
..\Oracle-Dumps\pe5RN_n_e (where n = the current service pack)
3. Import e5_database.dmp to user e5_database.

4. Run the script compile_procedure.sql, which is provided in the folder:.
DBAssistantTools\Rxx\db_scripts\sql, where Rxx = the current release (i.e.,
R19).
PPR Server
5. Start setup.exe in the folder PPRServer.

6. Reboot the system, if asked to do so. After rebooting, setup.exe restarts
automatically.
7. Choose a path for the installation. (Note: DELMIA recommends D:\DELMIA
\PPRServer and accepting the other default values.)
8. Enter the correct database connect string.
Two dialog boxes appear requesting ORACLE usernames and passwords.
9. Accept the default values for the usernames and passwords.
The next window gives a summary of the settings and options with which PPRServer
will be installed.
10. Please review carefully, and then click the Next button to start the installation.
PPR Client
11. Start setup.exe in the folder PPRClient.

12. Reboot the system, if asked to do so. After rebooting, setup.exe restarts
automatically.
When you have to enter the name of the PPRServer, the local computer name is
displayed.
13. Accept the default setting.
14. Enter the installation path. (Note: DELMIA recommends D:\DELMIA\PPRClient and
accepting the other default values.)
15. Accept the default settings for datasource name, database user name, and
password, as suggested by the setup program.
The setup program displays the choice license file or license server, according to
the present PPRServer installation.
16. Accept the setting to use this license.
17. Select the option Install VBA Integration.
Regarding silent installations: Note that selecting this option temporarily suspends the
Process Engineer Client installation and initiates an independent VBA installation
process. Because of this, it is not possible to execute an embedded installation in
silent mode.
If you are creating a recording for silent installations, do not select this option. In this
scenario, VBA Integration must be installed manually by running \AdditionalTools\VBA
\vba_mergemodule.exe (located on the Process Engineer installation media) after the
Process Engineer Client has been installed.
18. Select Install administration tools.
The next window gives a summary of the settings and options with which PPRClient
will be installed.
19. Please review carefully, and then click the Next button to start the installation.
A window showing several path directories is displayed.
20. Either change the paths or confirm that the paths are correct.
Starting Process Engineer for the First Time

To start Process Engineer, please use the shortcut provided in the Start menu. It appears
under All Programs > Delmia > Process Engineer. When the login window appears, you
can log in as user admin with the password admin. This default password can be changed
afterwards.
Note: In rare cases, Process Engineer fails to start or starts with an error message. If this
occurs, reregister the client and server DLLs. Batch files that allow you to
reregister the COM DLLs delivered with Process Engineer Server and Client are
located in the folders with the runtime binaries (...program\bin... or program
\bin64\...) and named RegServerDlls.bat, RegClientDlls.bat,
RegServer64Dlls.bat or RegClientDlls64.bat
Customizing DELMIA Process Engineer Password

Encryption
DELMIA Password encryption is based on Microsoft CryptoAPI using the machine key set.
Access rights on this key set depends on the file access rights to the key container file. The
key container itself is stored in the directory:
C: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Microsoft\Crypto

\RSA\MachineKeys (English version of the OS)
OR
C:\Dokumente und Einstellungen\All Users\Anwendungsdaten\Microsoft

\Crypto\RSA\MachineKeys (German version of the OS).
If an application uses the machine key set to hash, encrypt or decrypt data, the appropriate
user account must have read and write access on the key container directory and its files.
Therefore, the administrator has to grant access rights to all accounts using the encryption,
decryption, and hash capability. The accounts with these permissions should include at least
the DCOM user account on server machines, and also the account that is used to setup the
PLM application.
All accounts used to start DELMIA Process Engineer on client machines should have the
appropriate access rights.
Updating an Existing Installation

Prerequisites
Process Engineer Versions

Please read MigrationDocumentationAndChecklist.pdf, which is located in the readme
directory of this CD. Pay careful attention to the installation order; you must install
PPRClient 5.19 first.
Updates can be performed for the following versions:
● PE 5.15 all service packs
Note: If you are using a release of Process Engineer older than Release 15, please update to
Release 15 first.
ORACLE Versions
You can only update Process Engineer only if the existing installation is based on an ORACLE
10g database. Please refer to the ORACLE Installation documentation for further details.
Please migrate contents of an earlier database version to 10g first.
FLEXlm Version
Starting with Version 5, Release 12, SP5, if you work with a license server, you need a new
FLEXlm Version. For details on obtaining the new FLEXlm software, please see Licensing.
Obtaining a New Process Engineer License

If you are updating Process Engineer from a version older than Release 19, you need a new
license file. Contact your local support office for a new license file. Without the new license,
the update process will not be executed correctly.
Note: Once you obtain the new license, place it into the folder where the original license
was located, before starting the update.
Poet Database
A Poet database cannot be updated to R19. If you have a Poet database, migrate to ORACLE
before updating Process Engineer. For the appropriate version, please see the Certified Third-
Party Software section.
Updating the ORACLE Database

If necessary, please migrate to the appropriate version of ORACLE before updating Process
Engineer. For the appropriate version, please see the Certified Third-Party Software section.
Once you have migrated the database, the name of the instance changes from
MACHINENNAME_O9ie to MACHINENAME_O10g. As a result, you must modify some
entries in the registry and a control file to run Process Engineer again.
This adaptation can be done with the database assistant tool. To start the tool, select the
entry Database assistant in the setup menu and click the Switch button. A dialog box
appears showing you the last instance chosen for Process Engineer. Click the New button,
and you can create an entry for a new instance.
Enter the name of the new instance (e.g. MACHINENAME_O10g) as well as the names of
the database users ( see picture above for default values ). Once you click OK, you see a
new dialog box, which shows the newly created instance as an option. Choose the newly
created entry and then click OK.
If you have upgraded Process Engineer from a release older than Release12 to this release,
you can, after a successful upgrade, delete the database user containing the rights and
configuration information. (Default name: e5_rightsdata, e5_base.)
Updating Process Engineer

Before you start: The setup process imports an ergoplan.ini configuration file. For this, a
Process Engineer Client is started, with login admin and password admin. If there is no
user admin on your system or the password is other than admin, the setup displays a
Process Engineer login window, awaiting the input of the correct login/password for a user
with admin privileges.
Depending on the size of the database, the setup process can take several hours.
PPR Client
1. Start setup.exe in the folder PPRClient on the installation CD.

After selecting the language, the name of the PPRServer and the installation path of
the existing installation are displayed.
2. Accept these settings.
Depending on the current installation, either license file or license server is displayed.
3. Accept the setting to continue using the current licenses, or enter the path to another
license file or the path of a license server.
4. Select the option Install VBA Integration.
The next window gives a summary of the settings and options with which PPRClient
will be installed.
5. Review the settings and options carefully; if you agree to the settings, click Next to
start the installation.
PPR Server
6. Start setup.exe in the folder PPRServer on the installation CD.
After selecting the language, the installation path of the existing installation is
displayed.
7. Accept these settings.
8. To perform an update of the existing database, select Update.
Service name and database usernames and passwords are displayed.
9. Confirm the preselected values.
10. To make a backup of the database of your current installation, select Export Oracle
Database (default setting).
A dialog box asks whether you want to update your Industrial Engineer database.
11. To update the Industrial Engineer database, click Yes.
A database export and update procedure follows. Then, depending on the current
installation, either license file or license server is displayed.
12. Accept the setting to continue using the current licenses, or enter the path to another
license file or the path of a license server.
The next window gives a summary of the settings and options with which PPRServer
will be installed.
13. Review the settings and options carefully; if you agree to the settings, click Next to
start the installation.
Several windows with information about the progress of the database update will
appear until the installation is complete.
Note: After the update is successfully completed, shut down the DPE processes using
ShutdownPPRServer or the server tools before starting Process Engineer.
Configuration for Load Balancing in Multi-Server Environments

Please see the ServerTools documentation in the Process Engineer help files.
Release Notes
This program directory constitutes the release notes for Process Engineer.
Uninstalling Process Engineer

The following section includes detailed instructions on how to remove a Process Engineer
installation from your computer.
Uninstalling Program Code

To unblock the DLLs used by Process Engineer, shut down all server processes.
Automatically Uninstalling Program Code

Because Process Engineer is installed with Installshield, you can use your operating system’s
automatic uninstall mechanisms. You can access these mechanisms by selecting:
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs
To remove a program, you have to select its name in the list and then choose Remove. The
recommended order is to remove the client first, then the server.
Manually Uninstalling Program Code

If the automatic uninstall mechanism fails, you can remove Process Engineer manually. To
clean your system, you have first to remove the program files which were copied during the
installation. You can do so by deleting the subdirectories containing the Process Engineer
data which can be identified by checking the following registry keys:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\DELMIA\ERGOPlan\PPRClient_Home
and
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\DELMIA\PPRSERVER
\PPRServer_Home
Removing Entries in the Registry

After deleting the program files, then delete the registry key that were created during the
installation. Delete the keys and subkeys found in:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\DELMIA
and
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\DELMIA
Uninstalling ODBC-Datasources
Datasources that were created during the installation of Process Engineer can be removed
by selecting:
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Datasources
(ODBC)
Then select the datasource named ergotime on the system DSN page, and delete it.
Deleting the Database

You can delete the databases used for Process Engineer if you have a database
administrator account for your database. If you are using an ORACLE installation provided
by DELMIA, you can enter the database by typing the following command in a DOS
command shell:
SQLPLUS “SYS/SYSELCARO AS SYSDBA
Once you get a SQL prompt, you can delete the users stored in your database by typing
following commands:
Drop user e5_database cascade
Drop user e5_ergotime cascade
If you want to erase an ORACLE installation completely, consult the documentation Oracle
provides.
DELMIA Process Detailing and Validation
DELMIA-Specific V5 Installation Information
(PLM V5/Automation V5)
There is no DELMIA-specific V5 installation information other than that supplied elsewhere in
this program directory
Installation Instructions
This chapter describes the installation method to install the functions:

● Installing CATIA V5 CAA APIs, DELMIA V5 CAA APIs, ENOVIA VPLM CAA APIs
● Installing CAA RADE V5
● Activating CAA RADE V5
Installing CATIA V5 CAA APIs, DELMIA V5 CAA APIs,

ENOVIA VPLM CAA APIs
Delivery Contents
CATIA V5 CAA APIs, DELMIA V5 CAA APIs and ENOVIA VPLM CAA APIs media contain all
deliveries necessary to install all available APIs.
If you use a CAA vendor-written application, the CATIA V5 CAA APIs, DELMIA V5 CAA APIs
or ENOVIA VPLM CAA APIs level must be at the same level as the applicable CATIA V5 ,
DELMIA V5 or ENOVIA VPLM level installed. In addition, the CAA vendor must supply the
application rebuilt on that level.
Overview
Installation of CATIA V5 CAA APIs, DELMIA V5 CAA APIs, ENOVIA VPLM CAA APIs can be
divided into three main steps:
1. Managing the installation path. On Windows, the path is automatically computed, on

UNIX you should prompt the CATIA, DELMIA, or ENOVIA VPLM installation path
2. Checking on the available disk space
3. Downloading the software.
Windows
You must belong to the administrator group, or have the privileges assigned to the
Administrator group. Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation.
The installation procedure starts automatically. A full self-explanatory graphic
interface appears, where you can easily navigate.
Remark:
The CAA CD APIs contain build time data for both windows 32-bit and 64-bit
platforms. Those CDs can be installed on 32-bit and 64-bit runtime installations.
UNIX
1. Logging on as an administrator is mandatory.

Special CD-ROM mount configuration on HP-UX only:
❍ Insert the CD-ROM into the drive
❍ Mount the CD-ROM with the mount command with following specific options -F cdfs
-o rr . ( example mount -F cdfs -o rr /dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /CDROM)
❍ Change directory to the mount point and enter the command: ./start
Then a full self-explanatory graphic interface appears, where you can easily
navigate.
❍ Use the umount /CDROM command after installation.
Remark:
To build AIX 64-bit CAA applications on top of AIX 64-bit CATIA, DELMIA, or ENOVIA
DMU runtime, the standard CAA UNIX CD must now be used.
Accessing the CAA Online Documentation

The CAA online documentation, also named CAA Encyclopedia, is installed with the CAA
APIs. You can access it with an HTML browser at the following addresses:
<CATIA, DELMIA, or ENOVIA CAA APIs installation path>/CAAV5HomePage.htm
or
<CATIA, DELMIA, or ENOVIA CAA APIs installation path>/CAADoc/Doc/online/
CAACenV5Default.htm
Please refer to the CAA Encyclopedia for information on deprecated APIs.
Interoperability Considerations
Please refer to the homepage.htm file on the CD-ROM.
Installing CAA RADE V5

Delivery contents
CAA RADE V5 medium contains all deliveries necessary to install all available products and
options.
Overview
CAA RADE V5 installation can be divided into three main steps:
1. Choosing the installation path

2. Checking on the available disk space
3. Downloading the software
Windows
● Log on as an administrator.
You must belong to the administrator group, or have the privileges assigned to the
Administrator group. Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation.
● Insert the CD-ROM into the drive.
The installation procedure starts automatically. A full self-explanatory graphic interface
appears, where you can easily navigate.
The installation procedure is described in the CAA Encyclopedia installed with the CAA
APIs CD-ROM. To find this procedure documentation, from the CAA Encyclopedia home
page, click Getting Started, and click Installing CAA RADE V5 Products. To initialize
the TCK which defines the tool configuration you can use, refer to the Tools
documentation in the CAA Encyclopedia. From the home page, click Tools at the bottom
right corner, then click TCK Tool Config, and click Introducing TCK.
● Run <CAA RADE installation path>\intel_a\code\bin\CATVBTSetup.exe to enable access
to the CAA API documentation and possibly to run commands under Unix from Windows.
This is also described in the installation procedure documentation.
Remark:
RADE exists in a 32-bit version only. When developing on a 64-bit machine, since
32-bit and 64-bit run times must be installed in different locations, install RADE in
another place than CATIA, DELMIA or ENOVIA VPLM 64-bit run time installation.
UNIX
1. Logging on as an administrator is mandatory

After mounting the CD-ROM, change directory to the mount point and enter the
command: ./start
The installation procedure starts automatically. A full self-explanatory graphic
interface appears, where you can easily navigate.
The installation procedure is described in the CAA Encyclopedia installed with the CAA
APIs CD-ROM. To find this procedure documentation, from the CAA Encyclopedia
home page, click Getting Started, and click Installing CAA RADE V5 Products. To
initialize the TCK which defines the tool configuration you can use, refer to the Tools
documentation in the CAA Encyclopedia. From the home page, click Tools at the
bottom right corner, then click TCK Tool Config, and click Introducing TCK.
Licensing Considerations
The IBM License Use Management (LUM) software for managing nodelocked licenses is
integrated into the CAA RADE V5 software. If you need to install the complete LUM package,
and if you want to set up a network license server, you can install the rest of the product
from the LUM CD-ROM accompanying the software to avoid having to download the software
over the Internet. Additional information about LUM may be found at: http://www.software.
ibm.com/is/lum
Refer to the Memo to Users for instructions on obtaining keys for CAA RADE V5.
Interoperability Considerations
Please refer to the homepage.htm file on the CD-ROM.
NLS Considerations
CAA RADE V5 is NLS-enabled. It is supplied with the English and French localizations.
CAA RADE V5 supports DBCS.
Activating CAA RADE V5

This procedure describes how to get started with the CAA RADE V5 products.
General Activation Process

Before running any of the CAA RADE V5 products, you must generate the settings file for
license reservation. Run:
● on Windows operating system:
❍ <CAA RADE installation path>\intel_a\code\bin\CATSTART.exe -run CATVBTLicenser.
exe -env <CAA RADE Environment Name> -direnv <CAA RADE Environment Directory>
● on Unix operating systems:

❍ <CAA RADE installation path>/$OS/code/command/catstart -run CATVBTLicenser -env
<CAA RADE Environment Name> -direnv <CAA RADE Environment Directory>
where
$OS is aix_a, hpux_b, or solaris_a for AIX, HP-UX, or Solaris respectively
The available licenses are displayed. Check those that match the configurations and
products you want to use, click Apply, and close the dialog box.
This is described in the CAA Encyclopedia installed with the CAA APIs CD-ROM. From the
home page, click Getting Started, and click Installing CAA RADE V5 Products.
Specific Activation Process

The activation of some products need an additional specific procedure to be executed:
Product to be activated Procedure
● C++ Interactive ● Start Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2005
Dashboard
● On the Tools menu click Add-in Manager...
(CID)
● Among the set of Add-ins that appear, check those
corresponding to the CAA RADE V5 products you need:
❍ CAA V5 CodeGenerator Addin to use CAA - C++
Interactive Dashboard (CID)
❍ CAA V5 Mkmk Addin to use CAA - Multi-Workspace
Application Builder (MAB)
❍ CAA V5 Source Code Manager Manager Addin to use CAA
Source Code Manager (SCM)
● Also check the Startup box to ensure that these add-ins are
activated every time you start Microsoft Visual C++.
● Click OK
● Java Interactive ● Start IBM Rational Application Developer

Dashboard
● Refer to the CAA Encyclopedia installed with the CAA APIs
(JID)
CD-ROM. From the home page, click Tools at the bottom
right corner, then click JID Java Dashboard, and click
Installing RSx to set up plugins.
● From the File menu, access the New->Project menu.
● In the New Project window, expand the Java node and
select Java Project. Click Next.
● In the Project Name field, enter the name of the project and
click Finish.
● From the Window menu, select the Customize Perspective...
command. The Customize Perspective window opens.
● In the Commands tab, check the CAAActionsSets command
groups and click OK.
● Data Model Customizer ● Start either IBM Rational Software Architect or IBM Rational
(DMC) Software Modeler
right corner, then click DMC Data Custom, and click
Installing RSx to set up plug-ins.
● Web Application ● Start IBM Rational Application Developer
Composer
(WAC)
right corner, then click WAC Web App Composer and click
Installing RSx to set up plug-ins.
Operating System Considerations
Allocation of more than 2 Access to more than 2.0 GB for allocations of data and
GB of memory code within a V5 process running on Windows XP is
made possible. This capability requires additional
settings described in Section
Accessing more than 2.0 GB of memory on Windows XP
Search Function on In order to be able to use the Search function on
Internet Explorer Internet Explorer, you must first activate the option IE
Java(Sun) ( plug-in 1.5 update 7 at minimum level).
Otherwise, the Java applet will not appear, and will be
replaced by a grey box.
To do so:
1. Start Internet Explorer.

2. Select Tools->Internet Options...
3. Select the Advanced tab.
4. Check the Java (Sun) option.
5. Click OK and restart Internet Explorer
IBM AIX
Allocation of more than 1 Access to more than 1.0 GB for allocations of data
GB of memory within a V5 32-bit process is made possible. This
capability requires additional settings described in
Section
Accessing more than 1.0 GB of data on AIX
Circle elements displayed If you have a problem with, for instance, circles which
as ellipses on AIX are
represented like ellipse on the screen, you have to set
the real
screen's width and height in mm using smit.
To do so, log on as root. Then, in a terminal window,
type smit and press Enter.
In the smit window:
select "Devices", then "Graphic Display", then "Select
the Display Size" and select the correct graphic
adapter.
Type the real width and height value of the screen in
mm. Then
select "OK", then "DONE", then "CANCEL" and finally
"Exit".
You then have to restart your computer.
Hewlett-Packard HP-UX
Allocation of more than 2 Access to more than 2.0 GB for allocations of data
GB of memory within a V5 process is made possible. This capability
requires additional settings described in Section
Accessing more than 2.0 GB of data on HP-UX
c8000/Fire GL T2, X1, X3 With c8000/Fire GL T2, X1, X3 please uncomment the
option "AccelerateIndirectRendering" "false" in file /etc/
X11/XF86Config to avoid graphic corruption when using
Print/Preview.
V5 VPM Server with When using V5 VPM Server with SSO, it is necessary to
Single Sign-on set LD_PRELOAD as documented on
http://www.hp.com/products1/unix/java/java2/
jdkjre5_0
/infolibrary/jdk_rnotes_5.0.html#TLS.
However, setting the LD_PRELOAD for libjvm.sl
generates runtime errors on other modules :
/usr/lib/dld.sl: Unresolved symbol:

__text_start (data)
from /opt/java1.5/jre/lib/PA_RISC2.0/
server/libjvm.sl
/usr/lib/dld.sl: Unresolved module for

symbol: __shlinit (code) from /usr/lib/
libCsup.2
To limit the impact of this customization, it is
recommended to modify the runServerVPM_CXR1.sh
( in hpux_b/code/command ) in the following way :
● Log as root
● Edit the runServerVPM_CXR1.sh and
❍ add the following lines before "exec
VDO0OrbServer $my_args >> $trace
2>&1" (warning ! the first command line may be
displayed on several lines, but it must be entered
on a single line):
■ export SHLIB_PATH=/usr/lib:$JAVA_HOME/jre/
lib/PA_RISC2.0:
$JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/PA_RISC2.0/server:
$JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/PA_RISC2.0/
native_threads:$SHLIB_PATH
■ export LD_PRELOAD=$JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/
PA_RISC2.0/server/libjvm.sl
❍ add the following lines just after "exec

VDO0OrbServer $my_args >> $trace 2>&1" :
unset LD_PRELOAD
Solaris SUN
Icons on Pull-down Menus Note that icons do not appear on pull-down menus.
When the user exits the menu, the display is redraw,
but on SUN platform, a special technique has been
used to improve display redraw. The use of this
technique prevents icons from appearing on menus. If
you want icons to be visible, export the following
variable before starting a session: SUN_NO_OVL=YES.
Keep in mind, however, that if you are displaying a
large model, this will degrade display performance
when exiting menus.
Common Desktop The standard CDE (common desktop environment)
Environment Configuration configuration displays the motif pop-up windows
behind the application main window. Go in the Style
Manager in the CDE tool bar, window menu, and
change the "Allow Primary On Top" value.
Expert3D Graphics If using an Expert3D graphics adapter, please check
Adapter that attribute Default Visual is set to Non-Linear
Overlay Visual with command 'fbconfig -propt'. If not,
please update this attribute to the right value with
command 'fbconfig -defoverlay true'. A log out is
required to make this update be taken into account
once and for all.
Refresh Issues due to Java When running Java, some refresh issues may be seen
on the roadbook and toolbars , this problem can be
fixed by setting the "NO_J2D_DGA=1" environment
variable or adding it to the user ".profile" file.
Root Directory With More The root directory for installing ENOVIA 3d com should
Than 12 Characters not exceed 12 characters. For example, the default
directory proposed during the installation of the
product, /usr/DassaultSystemes/Bxx, could be
replaced by /usr/DS/Bxx. The PTF delivered for APAR
HC66411 fixes that problem.
ENOVIA CES Operating Systems
Considerations
D5 Operating System Considerations -
There are no special DELMIA D5 operating system considerations for this release.
PE Operating System Considerations -
There are no special DELMIA PE operating system considerations for this release.
CATIA Solutions Version 5 Release 19
Product Enhancement Overview
This document lists both new and enhanced product functionalities for the current release.
Click Product Enhancement Overview to view this document in PDF format.
Click the following links to view the Product Enhancement Overview document from the
previous two releases:
● V5R18 Product Enhancement Overview
Infrastructure Solutions
● CATIA Infrastructure User Guide
● Data Exchange Interfaces
● CATIA - ENOVIA Interoperability
● Photo Studio
● Photo Studio Optimizer
● Product Data Filtering
● Product Structure
● Real Time Rendering
● SMARTEAM - CATIA Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
● SmarTeam - CATIA Integration
● VPM Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
● V4 Integration
Mechanical Design Solutions

● 2D Layout for 3D Design
● 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation
● Assembly Design
● Aerospace Sheetmetal Design
● Cast & Forged Part Optimizer
● Composites Design
● Core and Cavity Design
● Functional Molded Part
● Generative Sheetmetal Design
● Generative Drafting
● Healing Assistant
● Interactive Drafting
● Mold Tooling Design
● Part Design
● Sketcher
● Wireframe and Surfaces
Shape Design & Styling Solutions

● Automotive Body In White Fastening
● Digitized Shape Editor
● FreeStyle Shaper Optimizer & Profiler
● Generative Shape Design
● Imagine & Shape
● Quick Surface Reconstruction
● Realistic Shape Optimizer
Analysis
● Advanced Meshing Tools
● Generative Structural Analysis
Equipment & Systems Engineering Solutions

● Compartment and Access
● Electrical Cableway Routing
● Electrical Connectivity Diagrams
● Electrical Harness Flattening
● Electrical Harness Installation
● Electrical Library
● Electrical Wire Routing
● Equipment Arrangement
● Hanger Design
● HVAC Design
● HVAC Diagrams
● Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
● Piping Design
● Plant Layout
● Raceway and Conduit Design
● Ship Structure Detail Design
● Structure Functional Design
● Systems Routing
● System Space Reservation
● Tubing Design
● Tubing Diagrams
● Waveguide Design
● Waveguide Diagrams
● Circuit Board Design
Machining Solutions
● 3 Axis Surface Machining
● Advanced Machining
● Lathe Machining
● Multi-Axis Surface Machining
● Multi-Pocket Machining
● Multi-Slide Lathe Machining
● NC Machine Tool Builder
● NC Machine Tool Simulation
● NC Manufacturing Infrastructure
● Prismatic Machining
● Prismatic Machining Preparation Assistant
● STL Rapid Prototyping
Product Synthesis Solutions
● Business Process Knowledge Template
● DMU Composites Review
● DMU Kinematics Simulator
● DMU Navigator
● DMU Optimizer
● DMU Space Analysis
● Human Activity Analysis
● Human Builder
● Knowledge Advisor
● Product Engineering Optimizer
● Product Knowledge Template
ENOVIA Solutions Version 5 Release 19
Click the following links to view the Product Enhancement Overview document from the previous two releases:
ENOVIA VPM Product Editor Products

● Application Desktop
● Change Management
● EBOM Detailing and Configuration
● Lifecycle Applications Roles Guide
● Product Interference Management
ENOVIA VPM LifeCycle Products

● Engineering Change Management Web
ENOVIA VPM Administration Products

● Lifecycle Administration
ENOVIA V5 VPM Solutions

● VPM Navigator
● Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
ENOVIA 3d com
● ENOVIA 3d com
● MultiPDM CDM/VPM Plug-in
ENOVIA DMU Products

● Human Builder
● Photo Studio
● DMU Fitting Simulator

ENOVIA MULTICAx Products

● MULTICAx AD Plug-in
● MULTICAx PD Plug-in
● MULTICAx SolidEdge Plug-in
● MULTICAx SolidWorks Plug-in
● MULTICAx Unigraphics Plug-in
ENOVIAVPM
● ENOVIAVPM Installation & Administration
● ENOVIAVPM User
ENOVIA Collaborative Enterprise Sourcing (CES)
Solutions Version 5 Release 19
Click the following link to view the Product Enhancement Overview document from the previous release:
Web Products
● CES Enterprise Catalog Navigator

DELMIA Solutions Version 5 Release 19
Click the following links to view the Product Enhancement Overview document from the
previous two releases:
Process & Resource Detailing (V5)

● 3D Functional Tolerancing and Annotation
● Assembly Design
● DPM Assembly Process Planner
● DPM Fastening Process Planner
● DPM Machining Process Planner
● DPM Process and Resource Definition
● DPM Structure Lofting
● Electrical Harness Simulation
● Manufacturing System Definition
● Part Design
● Part Design Features Recognition
● PPR Navigator
● Sketcher
● Structure Manufacturing Preparation
● Tool Selection Assistant
● Wireframe and Surface
Factory Layout & Robotics (V5)
● Arc Welding
● Device Building
● Device Task Definition
● Manufacturing Resource Layout
● Production System Analysis
● Realistic Robot Simulation
● Robotics Offline Programming
● Standard Robot Libraries
Factory DMU (V5)

● Kinematics Simulator
Ergonomics
● Human Analysis
● Human Builder
● Human Task Simulation
Off-line Programming (V5)

● Lathe Machining
● Multi-Axis Machining
● Multi-Pockets Machining
Work Instructions (V5)
● DPM Work Instructions
● Shop Floor Viewer
● Shop Order Review
MULTICAx (V5)
● DELMIA D5 Integration
DELMIA Automation (V5)

● CSM Module and Block Editor
● CLM Device Logic Design
● CLM SFC Editor
● CLM FBD Editor
● CLM Ladder
● CSM Device Control Connection
DELMIA Infrastructure Solutions (V5)

● 3D Manufacturing for Simulation
● Data Exchange Interface
● Infrastructure
● Installation and Deployment
DELMIA Process Engineer (DPE)

DPE functionalities are listed by the manuals in which they are addressed. In most, but not
all cases, manual names correspond to product names.
● Administrative Tasks
● Automatic Line Balancing
● DPE Pooling Server and Server Tools
● ENOVIA VPM V5 - DELMIA Process Engineer Integration
● Finder
● Graphic Tools
● Manufacturing Change Management
● PPR Navigator
● Printing
● Process Planning for Body-in-White
● Settings
● Work Instructions Composer
CATIA PLM Express
Review & Optimize Manufacture

Layout Engineer Style Engineer Mechanical Engineer Equipment Engineer
Engineer Engineer
Extension Options
Composites Design
(CPX)
Body & Skin Templates

(BTX)
Composites
Animated Product Review
3D Master (FTX) Manufacturing
(PRX)
Preparation (CGX)
Electrical Cable Layout Molded Product Design Human Builder & Simulation Machine Tool Builder
(ECX) for Manufacturing (MPX) (HSX) (MBX)
Knowledge Expert &

Structure Concept to Realistic Dynamic Mechanical Shape Electrical Wire Harness Machine Tool
Engineering Optimization
Design (SDX) Rendering (RRX) Optimization (HCX) Flattening (HFX) Simulation (MTX)
(KOX)
Accommodation Free Style Shape Mechanical Shape Electrical Wire Harness Design FEM & Structural Analysis NC Machining
Layout (ACX) Design (FSX) Design (HDX) (WHX) (FAX) Verification (NVX)
Enabler Options
Jig & Tool Creation (JTE) Flexible PCB Design (CBE)
Mold Tooling Creation Tubing Schematic to Design Technological Specifications Advanced Multi-Axis &
(MTE) (TUE) Review (TRE) Pocket Machining (AME)
Structure & Steel Molded Product HVAC Schematic to Design Multi-Axis Surface
Product Review (PRE)
Work Layout (SSE) Creation (MPE) (HVE) Machining (MME)
Knowledge Templates Reverse Engineering Fabricated Product Piping Schematic to Design Surface Machining
Knowledge Advisor (KAE)
(PKE) (REE) Creation (FPE) (PIE) (SGE)
3D Layout & Concept Product Mechanical Product Electrical 3D Design & Generative Structural Lathe & Prismatic
Annotations (LOE) Creation (CRE) Creation (MCE) Documentation (EDE) Analysis (GAE) Machining (LPE)
Core Configuration
Team PLM (TEM)
Layout Engineer
Option Contents
Structure &
Steel Work
Layout (SSE)
Systems Structure Plant Layout Equipment Hanger Design
Routing Design (PLO) Arrangement (HGR)
(SRT) (SR1) (EQT)
Knowledge
Templates
(PKE) Product Knowledge
Knowledge Advisor
Template (KWA)
Definition
(PKT)
3D Layout &
Annotations
(LOE)
2D Layout for 3D Functional
3D Design Tolerancing
(LO1) and
Annotations
(FT1)
Electrical Cable
Layout (ECX)
Systems Raceway & Electrical Electrical Systems Waveguide Waveguide
Space Conduit Connectivity Cableway Diagrams Design Diagrams
Reservation Design Diagrams Routing (SDI) (WAV) (WGD)
(SSR) (RCD) (ELD) (ECR)
Structure
Concept to
Design (SDX)
Structure Ship Structure
Functional Structure Design
Design Detail Design (SR1)
(SFD) (SDD)
Accommodation
Layout (ACX)
Systems Structure Compartment
Space Functional and Access
Reservation Design (CNA)
(SSR) (SFD)
Style Engineer
Option Contents
Reverse
Engineering
(REE)
Generative Quick Surface Digitized STL Rapid Shape
Shape Design Reconstruction Shape Editor Prototyping Sculptor
(GS1) (QSR) (DSE) (TL1) (DSS)
Concept
Product
Creation (CRE)
Photo Studio FreeStyle Imagine & FreeStyle Generative
(PHS) Shaper Shape Sketch Tracer Shape Design
(FS1) (IMA) (FSK) (GS1)
Realistic
Dynamic
Rendering
(RRX)
Real Time Photo Studio Photo Studio
Rendering Optimizer (PHS)
(RTR) (PSO)
Free Style
Shape Design
(FSX)
FreeStyle FreeStyle FreeStyle FreeStyle
Optimizer Profiler Shaper Sketch Tracer
(FSO) (FSP) (FSS) (FSK)
Mechanical Engineer
Option Contents
Jig & Tool

Creation (JTE)
Structure Tooling Design
Design (TG1)
(SR1)
Mold Tooling
Creation
(MTE)
Core & Cavity Generative Healing Part Design Part Design Tooling Design Mold Tooling Assembly
Design (CCV) Shape Design Assistant Feature (PDG) (TG1) Design Design
(GS1) (HA1) Recognition (MTD) (ASD)
(FR1)
Molded
Product
Creation
(MPE)
Functional Healing STL Rapid Generative Part Design Assembly
Molded Parts Assistant Prototyping Shape Design (PDG) Design
(FMP) (HA1) (TL1) (GS1) (ASD)
Fabricated
Product
Creation (FPE)
Weld Design SheetMetal
(WD1) Design
(SMD)
Mechanical
Product
Creation
(MCE)
Part Design Assembly Generative Functional
(PDG) Design Shape Design Molded Parts
(ASD) (GS1) (FM1)
Composites
Design (CPX)
Composites Generative
Engineering Shape Design
(CPE) (GSD)
Body & Skin

Templates
(BTX)
Automotive Generative
Body in White Shape Design
Templates (GSD)
(ABT)
3D Master
(FTX)
2D Layout for 3D Functional
3D Design Tolerancing &
(LO1) Annotation
(FTA)
Molded
Product
Design for
Manufacturing
(MPX) Cast & Forged Functional Part Design Core & Cavity Generative
Part Optimizer Molded Parts (PDG) Design (CCV) Shape Design
(CFO) (FMP) (GS1)
Mechanical
Shape
Optimization
(HCX) Developed Generative Generative Realistic
Shapes Shape Design Shape Shape
(DL1) (GSD) Optimizer Optimizer
(GSO) (RSO)
Mechanical
Shape Design
(HDX)
Generative FreeStyle Developed
Shape Design Shaper Shapes
(GSD) (FS1) (DL1)
Equipment Engineer
Option Contents
Flexible PCB
Design (CBE)
Circuit Board SheetMetal
Design Design
(CBD) (SMD)
Tubing
Schematic to
Design (TUE)
Tubing Design Systems Tubing
(TUB) Diagrams Diagrams
(SDI) (TUD)
HVAC
Schematic to
Design (HVE)
HVAC Design HVAC Diagrams Systems
(HVA) (HVD) Diagrams
(SDI)
Piping
Schematic to
Design(PIE)
Piping Design Piping & Systems
(PIP) Instrumentation Diagrams
Diagrams (SDI)
(PID)
Electrical 3D
Design &
Documentation
(EDE) Electrical 3D
Design &
Documentation
(EC1)
Electrical Wire
Harness
Flattening
(HFX) Electrical Electrical Electrical Wire
Harness Library Routing
Flattening (ELB) (EWR)
(EHF)
Electrical Wire
Harness
Design (WHX)
Electrical Wire Electrical Electrical
Routing Library Harness
(EWR) (ELB) Installation
(EHI)
Review & Optimize Engineer

Option Contents
Technological
Specifications
Review (TRE) DMU Product Data DMU DMU
Engineering Filtering Fastening Dimensioning
Analysis (DF1) Review & Tolerancing
Review (FAR) Review
(ANR) (DT1)
Product
Review (PRE)
DMU Optimizer DMU Navigator DMU Space
(DMO) (DMN) Analysis
(SPA)
Knowledge
Advisor (KAE)
Knowledge
Advisor
(KWA)
Generative
Structural
Analysis (GAE) Generative Generative
Part Assembly
Structural Structural
Analysis Analysis
(GPS) (GAS)
Animated
Product
Review (PRX)
DMU Fitting DMU Space DMU
Simulator Analysis Kinematics
(FIT) (SPA) Simulator
(KIN)
Human
Builder &
Simulation
(HSX) Human Builder Human Human Human DMU Space
(HBR) Measurements Posture Activity Analysis
Editor Analysis Analysis (SPA)
(HME) (HPA) (HAA)
Knowledge
Expert &
Engineering
Optimization
(KOX)
Product Knowledge
Engineering Expert
Optimizer (KWE)
(PEO)
FEM &
Structural
Analysis (FAX) Generative Generative FEM Surface FEM Solid Generative Elfini
Part Assembly (FMS) (FMD) Dynamic Structural
Structural Structural Response Analysis
Analysis Analysis Analysis (EST)
(GPS) (GAS) (GDY)
Manufacture Engineer
Option Contents
Advanced
Multi-Axis &
Pocket
Machining Advanced Multi-Pocket Prismatic NC Generative NC
(AME) Machining Machining Machining Manufacturing Shape Design Manufacturing
(AMG) (MPG) Preparation Review (GS1) Verification
Assistant (NCG) (NVG)
(MPA)
Multi-Axis
Surface
Machining
Multi-Axis 3-Axis Prismatic Prismatic NC Generative Shape
(MME)
Surface Surface Machining Machining Manufacturing Shape Design Sculptor
Machining Machining Preparation (PMG) Review (GS1) (DSS)
(MMG) (SMG) Assistant (NCG)
(MPA)
Surface
Machining
(SGE)
3-Axis Generative NC Prismatic Prismatic Shape
Surface Shape Design Manufacturing Machining Machining Sculptor
Machining (GS1) Review Preparation (PMG) (DSS)
(SMG) (NCG) Assistant
(MPA)
Lathe &
Prismatic
Machining
Lathe Prismatic NC Prismatic
(LPE)
Machining Machining Manufacturing Machining
(LMG) (PMG) Review Preparation
(NCG) Assistant
(MPA)
Composites
Manufacturing
Preparation
(CGX) Composites Generative
Design for Shape Design
Manufacturing (GSD)
(CPM)
Machine Tool
Builder (MBX)
NC Machine NC
Tool Builder Manufacturing
(MBG) Review
(NCG)
Machine Tool
Simulation
(MTX)
NC Machine DMU Space NC
Tool Analysis Manufacturing
Simulation (SPA) Review
(MSG) (NCG)
NC Machining
Verification
(NVX)
NC NC
Manufacturing Manufacturing
Verification Review
(NVG) (NCG)
DELMIA PLM Express
Options
Spot Welding Programmer

(SWU)
Arc Welding Programmer Human Catalogs Virtual System Setup

(AWU) (HCU) (VSU)
Human Work Analysis

Robot Controller Libraries Robot Controller Libraries Robot Controller Libraries
(HAU)
Solutions
DELMIA Automation - Virtual Control
DELMIA - Workcell Builder DELMIA - Robot Simulation DELMIA - Human Workspace Simulation
Validation
Resource Planning
Option Contents
Device Task Resource Device Building CATIA Plug-in DPM Process D5 Integration Assembly DMU Space
Workcell Definition Layout (DBG) (MCP) Definition (D5I) Design Analysis
Builder (WSU) (MRL) (PRD) (MAS) (MSA)
(WBU)
Part Design STEP Core Wireframe & Real Time Interactive Generative DELMIA Object
(MPD) Interface Surface Rendering Drafting Drafting Manager
(MST) (MWS) (MRT) (MID) (MG1) (DOM)
Robotics Programming
Option Contents
Workcell Device Task DMU Space CATIA Plug-in DPM Process D5 Integration 3D Simulation STEP Core
Sequencing Definition Analysis (MCP) & Resource (D5I) for Interface
(WSQ) (WSU) (MSA) Definition Manufacturing (MST)
Robot (PRP) (DMR)
Simulation
(RSU)
DELMIA
Object
Manager
(DOM)
Spot Welding
Programmer
(SWU)
Tool Selection Robotics OLP 1 RRS I DMU
Assistant (OL1) (RRS) Fastening
(TSA) Review
(MFR)
Arc Welding
Programmer
(AWU)
Arc Welding Robotics OLP 1
(ARW) (OL1)
Ergonomics Planning
Option Contents
Human
Workspace
Simulation
(HSU) DPM Process DMU Space Human Builder Human Task 3D Simulation STEP Core DELMIA
& Resource Analysis (MHB) Simulation for Interface Object
Definition (MSA) (MHT) Manufacturing (MST) Manager
(PRP) (DMR) (DOM)
Human Human Human Task

Catalogs Posture Catalog
(HCU) Catalog (MHC)
(MPC)
Human Work
Analysis
(HAU)
Human Human Human
Activity Posture Preferred
Analysis Analysis Angles Catalog
(MHA) (MHP) (MAC)
Controls Engineering
Option Contents
Production CSM Device DMU Space CLM CATIA Plug-in D5 Integration 3D Simulation CSM Object
Virtual System Control Analysis Simulation (MCP) (D5I) for Modeler
Control Analysis Connection (MSA) Engine Manufacturing (CSM)
Validation (PSY) (DC1) (LS1) (DMR)
(VVU)
CLM Object DELMIA

Modeler Object
(LM1) Manager
(DOM)
Virtual
System Setup
(VSU)
CSM Module HMI Control CLM Device CLM SFC CLM FBD CLM Ladder Workcell
& Block Editor Panel Design Logic Design Editor Editor Logic Editor Sequencing
(LB1) (HP1) (DLD) (LE1) (FB1) (LL1) (WSQ)
Robot Controller Libraries

Available Robot Controller Libraries
Daihen Robot Fanuc Robot Hyundai Robot Kawasaki Robot Kuka Robot Library Motoman Robot Nachi Robot Library Panasonic Robot
Library Library Library Library (KRU) Library (NRU) Library
(DRU) (FRU) (HRU) (WRU) (MRU) (PRU)
CATIA Student
Domain Contents
Infrastructure
CATIA Object Instant IGES Interface
Manager Collaborative (IG1)
(CO1, COM) Design
(CD1)
Rendering
Photo Studio Photo Studio Real Time

(PHS) Optimizer Rendering
(PSO) (RTR)
Mechanical
Part Design Assembly Functional SheetMetal Interactive Generative Structure

(PDG) Design Molded Parts Design Drafting Drafting Design
(ASD) (FMP) (SMD) (ID1) (GDR) (SR1)
Shape
Design &
Styling
Generative FreeStyle FreeStyle Imagine &
Shape Design Shaper Sketch Tracer Shape
(GSD) (FSS) (FSK) (IMA)
Product
Synthesis
DMU DMU Space
Kinematics Analysis
Simulator (SPA)
(KIN)
Analysis
Generative
Part
Structural
Analysis
(GPS)
Equipment &
Systems
Engineering
Plant Layout
(PLO)
Machining
Lathe Prismatic NC STL Rapid
Machining Machining Manufacturing Prototyping
(LMG) (PMG) Review (TL1)
(NCG)
General and Open Issues
This document includes any important or open issues you need to be aware of in a specific
product.
Please note that for GA level V5 ENOVIA SmarTeam and MULTICAx plug-in products are
described in dedicated Program Directories.
● CATIA ● DELMIA PLM

❍ Infrastructure ❍ MBOM
❍ Mechanical Design ❍ Process Detailing
❍ Shape Design & Styling ❍ Resource Detailing
❍ Product Synthesis ❍ Factory Layout
❍ Equipment and Systems Engineering ❍ Factory Flow
❍ Analysis ❍ Factory DMU Solutions
❍ Machining ❍ Robotics
● ENOVIA ❍ Ergonomics
❍ V5 VPM ❍ Logic Based Behavior
■ VPM Navigator Products
❍ Machining
■ VPM Product Editor Products
❍ Off-line Programming
■ VPM Lifecycle Products (formerly LCA
❍ Work Instructions
Navigator Products)
❍ Shop Floor Execution Management &
■ VPM Enterprise Gateway Products
Monitoring
■ VPM Administration Products
❍ PPR Family
Collaboration
DMU
❍
❍
MULTICAx
3d com
❍
❍
PDM Interfaces
MULTICAx - MULTIPDM Products
❍
❍
ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub

VPLM - CATIA Interoperability
❍
❍
Virtual Reality
MatrixOne Interoperability
❍
❍
❍ Cross-Solution Products
● ENOVIA Collaborative Enterprise Sourcing ● DELMIA Automation

(CES) Solutions ❍ CSM Products
❍ All Products ❍ CLM Products
❍ Server ❍ HMI Products
❍ Win Products ❍ Infrastructure and Simulation products
❍ Web Products
● CAA-RADE Products and CAA APIs
*
The red star ( ) before the name of a product means that no issue is documented for the
specified product
For DELMIA products, information is coded as follows:

V5 DELMIA Process Detailing and Validation - PLM Version 5
D5 DELMIA Resource Modeling & Simulation
PE DELMIA Process Planning - Process Engineer
AM DELMIA Automation - Version 5
CATIA Mechanical Design

* Assembly Design
* Weld Design
Part Design
* Sketcher
* Part Design Features Recognition
* Wireframe & Surface
Generative Drafting
* Interactive Drafting
* 2D Layout for 3D Design
* 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation
Tooling Design [P1] / Mold Tooling Design [P2]
* Core & Cavity Design
* Healing Assistant
* Sheetmetal Design
* Sheetmetal Production
* Aerospace Sheetmetal Design
Composites Products
* Structure Design
* Functional Molded Parts
* Cast & Forged Part Optimizer
CATIA Shape Design & Styling

Real Time Rendering
Photo Studio Products
* Shape Sculptor
* Imagine and Shape
Generative Shape Design Products
FreeStyle Products
Digitized Shape Editor
* Realistic Shape Optimizer
Quick Surface Reconstruction
* Automotive Body In White Fastening
* Developed Shapes please refer to Generative Shape Design Products
Automotive Body in White Templates please refer to Generative Shape Design
*
Products
CATIA Product Synthesis

* Knowledge Advisor
* Knowledge Expert
* Product Engineering Optimizer
* Product Knowledge Template [P1] / Template Definition [P2]
* Product Function Definition
* Business Process Knowledge Template
DMU Navigator
DMU Space Analysis
DMU Fitting Simulator
* DMU Kinematics Simulator
* DMU Optimizer
* DMU Engineering Analysis Review
* DMU Composites Review
* DMU Dimensioning & Tolerancing Review
* DMU Fastening Review
* DMU Space Engineering Assistant
* Flex Physical Simulation
Human Products
Vehicle Occupant Accommodation
CATIA Equipment and Systems Engineering

* Circuit Board Design
* Systems Routing
* Systems Space Reservation
Electrical Products
* Electrical for Shipbuilding
* Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams
* HVAC Diagrams
* Systems Diagrams
* Piping Design
* Tubing Design
* Equipment Arrangement
* Compartment & Access
* HVAC Design
Structure Functional Design
* Waveguide Diagrams
* Tubing Diagrams
* Waveguide Design
* Raceway & Conduit Design
* Hanger Design
* Plant Layout
* Ship Structure Detail Design
CATIA Analysis
Generative Part Structural Analysis
Generative Assembly Structural Analysis
* FEM Surface
* FEM Solid
Elfini Structural Analysis
Generative Dynamic Response Analysis
* Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly
CATIA Machining
Lathe Machining
* Prismatic Machining
3-Axis Surface Machining
* Multi-Axis Surface Machining
* Advanced Machining
* Multi-Slide Lathe Machining
Multi-Pocket Machining
* STL Rapid Prototyping
NC Manufacturing Review
* NC Manufacturing Verification
* Prismatic Machining Preparation Assistant
NC Machine Tool Simulation
NC Machine Tool Builder
CATIA Infrastructure
CATIA Object Manager
* Interfaces
* Digital Product Rights Manager
* Product Structure
* V4 Integration
ENOVIAvpm Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
* ENOVIA VPLM/CATIA Interoperability
* Instant Collaborative Design
* PPR PDM Gateway
ENOVIA SmarTeam CATIA V5 Integration
* Product Data Filtering
* Component Catalog Editor
ENOVIA V5 VPM
ENOVIA VPM Navigator Products

VPM Navigator
* VPM Relational Design
* VPM Configured Product Design
* VPM Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
* VPM Electrical Cable Route Management
* VPM Product Design Web Services

* Applications Desktop
* Action Editor
* Product Definition
* EBOM Detailing and Configuration
Product Interference Management
* Structure Penetration Management
* Engineering Hub
* Multi-Tier Enterprise Architecture
* Document Management
* Program Management
* Engineering Change Management
* Supply Chain Exchange
* Product Variant Management
ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle Products (formerly ENOVIA LCA

Navigator Products)
* LifeCycle Administration Guide
* LifeCycle Roles Guide
VPM Lifecycle Navigator Web (formerly known as LCA Navigator)

* Web Viewer (formerly known as LCA Web Viewer)
* Document Management Web (formerly known as LCA Document Management)
*
Engineering Change Management Web (formerly known as LCA Change
Management)
* Workflow Definition Web (formerly known as LCA Workflow Definition)
* Workflow Management Web (formerly known as LCA Workflow Management)
Enterprise Process Management Web (formerly known as LCA Enterprise Process
Management)
*
Enterprise Process Definition Web (formerly known as LCA Enterprise Process
Definition)
*
Lifecycle Management Web Services (formerly known as LCA Product Lifecycle
Management Web Services)
ENOVIA VPM Enterprise Gateway Products

* PPR Hub Gateway
* PPR Hub STEP Part 21 Adapter

* Multisite System Administration Web
* People, Organization & Security Web
* System & Data Administration
* People, Organization & Security
* Vault Server Administration
* ENOVIA CAA Web Services
ENOVIA DMU
DMU Infrastructure
DMU Navigator
DMU Space Analysis
* DMU Digital Plant & Ship Review
* DMU Dimensioning & Tolerancing Review
* DMU Kinematics Simulator
* DMU Optimizer
* DMU Composites Review
* DMU Engineering Analysis Review
* DMU Fastening Review
Human Products
Vehicle Occupant Accomodation
Photo Studio Products

Real Time Rendering
* Digital Product Rights Manager
ENOVIA 3d com
* 3d com Classic Documentation Addendum
* 3d com Classic Products Information
ENOVIA MULTICAx-MULTIPDM Products
Note that for this level, other MULTICAx plug-ins are described in a dedicated Program
Directory.
* MULTICAx CATIA Plug-In
* MULTICAx DELMIA Plug-In
* ENOVIA MULTIPDM Products
ENOVIA VPLM/CATIA Interoperability

* ENOVIA VPLM/CATIA Interoperability
ENOVIA MatrixOne Interoperability

Please refer to ENOVIA MatrixOne release notes about the ENOVIA MatrixOne - CATIA V5
Integration (CT5) product.
CAA-RADE Products and CAA APIs

All CAA-RADE Products
Data Model Customizer
C++ Interactive Dashboard
* Java Interactive Dashboard
Multi-Workspace Application Builder
* C++ Unit Test Manager
* Java Unit Test Manager
* C++ API Document Generator
C++ Source Checker
* Source Code Manager
* Interactive Test Capture
Web Application Composer
CAA APIs
DELMIA PLM Solutions
Running V5 (DELMIA PLM Version 5) / PE (DELMIA Process Engineer) DELMIA PLM Solutions
32 bits on top of Windows XP 64 bits is supported with V5R19.
D5 (DELMIA D5) 32 bits solutions are not supported for running on top of Windows XP 64
bits.
MBOM
PE * Product Viewing
PE * Target Tracking
Process Detailing
PE * Automatic Line Balancing
PE * Workload Balancing
PE * Process & Resource Planning
PE * Standard Time Measurement and Related Time Measurement Products
V5 * DPM Process Definition [P1] / DPM Process & Resource Definition [P2]
V5 * DPM Fastening Process Planner
V5 DPM Assembly Process Simulation
V5 * 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation
V5 * DPM Machining Process Planner
V5 Electrical Harness Process Simulation
V5 * Machining Tolerancing Assistant
V5 * DPM Engineering Requirements Planner
V5 * DPM Assembly Process Planner
V5 Manufacturing System Definition
V5 * DPM Review
V5 * DPM Human Review
V5 Structure Manufacturing Preparation
V5 DPM Structure Lofting
V5 * Part Design Features Recognition
D5 * Assembly Planner
Resource Detailing
V5 * Assembly Design
V5 Part Design
V5 * Sketcher
V5 Real Time Rendering
V5 * Wireframe & Surface
V5 Generative Shape Design
V5 NC Machine Tool Builder
(may also be referred as NC Machine Builder)
V5 * Standard Robot Library
V5 * Tool Selection Assistant
V5 * Composite Review
Factory Layout
D5 * Dynamics
D5 * CLI Device Building
D5 * Envision - Virtual Environment
PE * Plantype Editor
PE * Layout Planning
PE * 3D Resource Layout
V5 * Plant Layout
V5 Resource Layout
V5 * Equipment Arrangement
V5 Device Building
Factory Flow
D5 * QUEST
D5 * QUEST Express
Factory DMU Solutions

V5 * DMU Dimensioning & Tolerancing Review
V5 * DMU Fastening Review
V5 DMU Space Analysis
V5 * DMU Optimizer
V5 DMU Navigator
V5 * DMU Kinematics Simulator
Robotics
D5 * IGRIP
D5 * UltraSpot
D5 * UltraArc
D5 * UltraPaint
D5 * UltraGrip
D5 * ABB Robot Programming
D5 * Cable Simulation
D5 * Calibration and Signature
D5 * Industrial Robot Library
D5 * Realistic Robot Simulation
V5 Workcell Sequencing
V5 * Device Task Definition
V5 * Electrical 3D Design & Documentation
V5 * Arc Welding
V5 Generative Part Structure Analysis
V5 * RRS I
V5 * RRS II
V5 Production System Analysis
Ergonomics
D5 * Ergonomic Analysis
D5 * Ergonomics Option
V5 Human Builder
V5 Human Activity Analysis
V5 Human Posture Analysis
V5 Human Measurements Editor
V5 Human Task Simulation
V5 Human Catalogs
Logic Based Behavior

AM * CLM SFC Editor
AM * CSM Object Modeler
AM CLM Simulation Engine
AM * CLM Object Modeler
AM CLM Device Logic Design
AM CSM Device Control Connection
AM * CLM FBD Editor
AM * HMI Control Panel Design
AM CSM Module & Block Editor
AM CLM Ladder Logic Editor
Machining
D5 * Virtual NC
D5 * Virtual NC Machine Building
D5 * Material Removal
D5 * Deburring/Finishing
Off-line Programming
V5 NC Manufacturing Review
V5 * Prismatic Machining
V5 * Multi-Slide Lathe Machining
V5 Lathe Machining
V5 3-Axis Surface Machining
V5 * Multi-Axis Surface Machining
V5 * NC Manufacturing Verification
V5 * Surface Path Generator
V5 * Prismatic Machining Preparation Assistant
V5 Robotics OLP
V5 NC Machine Tool Simulation
D5 * Offline Programming
Work Instructions
D5 * Review
V5 * Interactive Drafting
V5 Generative Drafting
V5 * DPM Work Instructions
PE Work Instructions Composer
Shop Floor Execution Management & Monitoring

D5 * Low Level Telerobotics Interface
V5 * DPM Shop Floor Viewer
V5 * Shop Order Release
PPR Family
V5 * PPR Manufacturing Hub Navigator
V5 * PPR Manufacturing Life Cycle Management
V5 * PPR Editor
V5 * Process Context Builder
V5 * Electrical Review
Collaboration
D5 * Virtual Collaborative Engineering
MULTICAx
Reminder ! for GA level, other V5 MULTICAx plug-in products are described in a dedicated
Program Directory.
V5 * CATIA Plug-In
V5 * DELMIA Plug-In
V5 * V4 Integration
D5 * UG Direct
D5 * CATIA Direct
D5 Pro-E
D5 * IDEAS
D5 * Batch IGES
D5 * DXF
D5 * VRML1
D5 * STL
D5 * Pro E Render Format
D5 * VDA
D5 * IGES
D5 * GM/DES
D5 * VRML2
D5 * Parasolid Modeling
V5 * D5 Integration
V5 * IGES Interface
V5 * STEP Core Interface
PDM Interfaces
PE * ENOVIA VPM Connection
PE * ENOVIA VPM V5 Connection
ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub (PPR Hub)

PE * Manufacturing Change Management
PE * Configuration and Effectivity
PE * Object Customization
PE * Report Designer
PE PPR Navigator and Editor
PE * ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub Client
PE * ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub Server
PE * Cryptographic Interface
V5 Object Manager
V5 * Manufacturing Hub Integration
Virtual Reality
D5 AXXESS Open Architecture
D5 * Stereo
D5 * QUEST Virtual Reality
Cross-solution Products
V5 3D Simulation for Manufacturing
V5 * Knowledge Expert
V5 * Product Knowledge Template
D5 * Core
DELMIA Automation
AM (DELMIA Automation) 32 bits solutions are supported for running on top of Windows XP
64 bits.
CSM Products
AM CSM Device Control Connection
AM CSM Module & Block Editor
AM * CSM Object Modeler
AM Control Design Exchange
CLM Products
AM * CLM Control Setup
AM * CLM ST Code Generator
AM * CLM SIMATIC Setup
AM CLM Device Logic Design
AM * CLM C Code Generator
AM * CLM SFC Editor
AM * CLM FBD Editor
AM CLM Ladder Logic Editor
AM CLM Simulation Engine
AM * CLM Object Modeler
HMI Products
AM * HMI Control Panel Design
Infrastructure and Simulation Products
AM * SMARTEAM Integration
V5 Production System Analysis
V5 DMU Space Analysis
V5 * Equipment Arrangement
V5 Manufacturing Resource Layout
V5 * Standard Robot Library
V5 * Device Task Definition
V5 Device Building
V5 * D5 Integration
V5 3D Simulation for Manufacturing
V5 Object Manager
V5 * MULTICAx - CATIA Plug-in
ENOVIA CES Solutions
All Products
All CES Products
Server
* CES Sourcing Hub
Win Products
CES Engineering Component Reuse
CES Engineering Catalog Navigator
Web Products
CES Enterprise Catalog Administration
* CES Component Introduction Management
* CES Enterprise Catalog Management
* CES Component Sourcing
* CES Component Reuse
CES Enterprise Catalog Navigator
Closed Issues for GA
This document lists all closed issues for the current release.
FUNCTION BR APAR ABSTRACT SP
2D_3D : TOOLS PALETTES SKETCH TOOLS IS
2D3DDSGN BR10000053758 HD68059 DISPLAYED INCORRECTLY AFTER SWITCHING FROM GA
SKETCH TO LAYOUT
2D-3D - CATIA ABEND WHEN COPY PASTE DRAWING
2D3DDSGN BR10000053958 HD68266 GA
SHEET TO 2D LAYOUT IF V4 DATA IS OPEN.
2D_3D : DRIVING DIMENSION CAN NOT BE CREATED
2D3DDSGN BR10000054286 HD68614 GA
WITH TRIMMED ELLIPSE AND LINE
2D-3D: MEASURE BETWEEN TAKES LONG TIME TO
2D3DDSGN BR10000054532 HD68851 GA
MEASURE ELEMENT IN 2DL.
2D_3D: WHEN CUTTING PLANE IS PERFORMED,
2D3DDSGN BR10000054675 HD68988 GA
ELEMENT IS LOST FROM GEOMETRY AREA
2D_3D: TOOLS PALETTE IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN
2D3DDSGN BR10000054817 HD69143 GA
LAYOUT VIEW OF PRODUCT IS CHANGED DIRECTLY.
AUTOMATIC BACKUP / WARM START: RESTORE OF
2D3DDSGN BR10000054876 HD69203 CATPART FAILS FOLLOWING CRASH IF A 2D LAYOUT GA
VIEW WAS OPEN
PRINT : IN 2D LAYOUT OUTLINE IN A PERSPECTIVE
2D3DDSGN BR10000055033 HD69366 GA
VIEW IS PRINTED IN A THICK LINE
PRINT: IN 2D LAYOUT SOME EDGES OF FACES ARE
2D3DDSGN BR10000055120 HD69453 GA
PRINTED IN THICK LINES.
2D_3D : WRONG CONTROL OF 2D LAYOUT WITH
2D3DDSGN BR10000055271 HD69611 MAGELLAN SPACE MOUSE WHEN THE LAYOUT IS GA
ACTIVATED EVEN IF MOUSE POINTER IS ON THE 3D
2D-3D / MIRROR / MIRROR DOES NOT WORK
2D3DDSGN BR10000055334 HD69676 GA
CORRECTLY ON DERIVED ANGLE DIMENSION
2D3DDSGN BR10000055336 HD69677 2D_3D / MEASURE ITEM / SELECTED MODE NOT KEPT GA
2D3DDSGN BR10000055364 HD69704 PRINT: EDGES OF FACES ARE BROKEN GA
PRINT : PRINT PREVIEW IS NOT CORRECT WITH
2D3DDSGN BR10000055501 HD69846 GA
SPECIFIC SETTINGS ON 64BIT
2D_3D : LOCKED AUXILLARY VIEW CHANGES TO
2D3DDSGN BR10000055519 HD69867 UNUPDATED STATUS AFTER PARENT PLANE OF VIEW IS GA
CHANGED
2D_3D: SPECIFIC POINT CANNOT BE SELECTED WHEN
2D3DDSGN BR10000055882 HD70255 GA
CUTTING PLANE IS ACTIVE.
2D_3D: CATIA ABENDS WHILE SELECTING RANGE
2D3DDSGN BR10000055884 HD70256 AFTER PERFORMING REPLACE REFERENCE TO 2D GA
COMPONENT INSTANCE
2D-3D: FIX TOGETHER - POINTS GENERATED BY TRIM
2D3DDSGN BR10000056431 HD70766 GA
OR BREAK ARE NOT ADDED IN FIX TOGETHER.
2D-3D: HIDE SHOW STATUS IS NOT REFLECTED IN
2D3DDSGN BR10000057023 HD71426 GA
SPECIFICATION TREE ON VIEW IN 3D WINDOW.
2D_3D: WHEN OPTION IN FTA IS CHANGED, THE
2D3DDSGN BR10000057091 HD71491 GA
FILTER OF LAYOUT BECOMES INVALID
THE PRINTED RESULT AND THE DISPLAYED FORM ARE
2D3DDSGN BR10000057187 HD71581 GA
NOT THE SAME
2D3DDSGN BR10000057617 HD72047 2D_3D: CATIA ABENDS WHEN LAYOUT IS UPDATED GA
2D3DDSGN BR10000057677 HD72107 2D_3D: CATIA ABENDS WHEN PRINT PREVIEW IS DONE GA
2D3DDSGN BR10000057724 HD72154 2D_3D: RESULT OF PRINT PREVIEW IS NOT CORRECT GA
2D_3D : MODIFY CLIPPING IS SHOWN IN ENGLISH
2D3DDSGN BR10000057916 HD72376 GA
UNDER JAPANESE ENVIRONMENT
2D3DDSGN BR10000058034 HD72473 2D_3D: RESULT OF PRINT PREVIEW IS NOT CORRECT GA
2D_3D : CLIPPED ELEMENT IN VIEW IS PRINTED IN
2D3DDSGN BR10000058193 HD72677 GA
HIDDEN LINE REMOVAL MODE
2D_3D: WHEN OPTION IN FTA IS CHANGED, THE
2D3DDSGN BR10000059276 HD73828 GA
FILTER OF LAYOUT BECOMES INVALID
2D-3D: WHEN 2D COMPONENT OF INSTANCE IS
2D3DDSGN BR10000059814 HD74390 EXPLODED AGAIN, SPLINE OF 2D COMPONENT GA
DISAPPEARS.
ITEV5CV5 : NOT ABLE TO INSTANTIATE V4 MODEL
3DCOM BR10000050801 HD64689 GA
FROM A CATALOG INTO PRC
FT&A INFORMATION NOT DISPLAYED WHEN THE WORK
3DCOM BR10000051016 HD64937 GA
WITH THE CACHE O PTION IS SWITCHED ON
3DCOM APPLICATION IS FROZEN USING GERMAN
3DCOM BR10000051374 HD65348 GA
LANGUAGE
EMAIL THAT IS GENERATED WHEN TRANSFERRING
3DCOM BR10000052628 HD66763 GA
ACTION OWNERS HAS CHANGED IN R17 SP5
IN 3DLV/THE DATA WILL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN TWO
3DCOM BR10000053112 HD67346 GA
HOUR
REFRESH PROBLEM IN PORTAL WEBTREE WHEN
3DCOM BR10000053132 HD67372 GA
PROMOTING MULTIPLE PAR TS
3DCOM BR10000053208 HD67450 CATDRAWINGS DON GA
BAD PERFORMANCE WHEN SELECTING FIELD TO
3DCOM BR10000054099 HD68409 CREATE A NEW PART INSTANCE IN THE 2ND LEVEL GA
UNDER PRC AFTER MIGRATING V5R18
LCA NAVIGATOR DEFAULTS TO 'FAVORITES' INSTEAD
3DCOM BR10000054118 HD68429 GA
OF 'ENOVIAV5'
PROD EDIT-LCA OPERATION TAKES A VERY LONG TIME
3DCOM BR10000054283 HD68602 GA
FROM AN LCA (CLASSIC) PRODUCT STRUCTURE
PART PROPERTIES ARE NOT DISPLAYED IF SELECTED
3DCOM BR10000054350 HD68660 GA
NODE IS A FEATURE OR REPRESENTATION.
CONTEXTUAL LINK DISPLAYED AS UP-TO-DATE WHEN
3DCOM BR10000054435 HD68749 GA
DE-SYNCHRONISED.
LOAD MODELS OR DOCUMENTS INTO CV5 FROM
3DCOM BR10000054456 HD68773 GA
QUERRY PANEL RESULT/VPMA OF 3COM IS KO.
IMPROPER ERROR MESSAGE WHEN PRODUCT
3DCOM BR10000054483 HD68796 STRUCTURE MODIFICATION (COPY-PASTE) IS NOT GA
AUTHORIZED
PROBLEM OF SLOWNESS IN 3DCOM ON XP-64 BIT
3DCOM BR10000054523 HD68842 GA
MACHINE.
NO REFRESH OF THE ROOT ATTRIBUTES WHEN
3DCOM BR10000054595 HD68913 GA
REFRESHING PSN ATTRIBUTES
FREEZING OF THE 3DCOM PROGRESSION BAR,
3DCOM BR10000054612 HD68934 GA
RANDOMLY.
PRC REPLICATION FROM PRODUCT CLASS VIEW
3DCOM BR10000054644 HD68960 GA
ERASES THE PRODUCT CLASS PATH FROM TARGET SITE
MULTIPLE INTROSPECTION PROCESSES ARE CAUSING
3DCOM BR10000054737 HD69058 GA
DB2 DEADLOCKS ON ENOVFIQ TABLE
VERSIONING OPTION MISSING WITH MULTIPLE (PART)
3DCOM BR10000054743 HD69062 GA
SELE CTIONS
FUNCTION 'ANALYZE > SOLID ANALYSIS' IN 3D LOCAL
3DCOM BR10000054799 HD69121 GA
VIEWER KO
FIRST WORKBOOK TAKES MORE THAN 20 SECONDS TO
3DCOM BR10000054945 HD69264 GA
DISPLAY
3DCOM VPM WEB ACCESS PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
3DCOM BR10000054972 HD69299 GA
UNTIL ROLE SELECTION APPEARS.
IN INTERMEDIATE & ADVANCED QUERY V5 DROPDOWN
3DCOM BR10000055140 HD69473 GA
MENU IS MISSING
3DCOM BR10000055150 HD69483 3DCOM DOES NOT RECOGNIZE A CATIA UPDATE GA
GENERIC ERROR RETURNED BY CATDMUSRMETHOD::
3DCOM BR10000055153 HD69487 GA
OPENGRAPH IN 3DCOM IN ADDITION TO THE UE ERROR
SPECIFIC ATTRIBUTE OF INSTANCE (WHICH IS LINKED
3DCOM BR10000055285 HD69625 ACTION AND CHANGE ORDER )IS NOT DEFINED GA
(BECOMES NULL)
SELECT UNDER EXTENDED FAILS WITH MULTIPLE
3DCOM BR10000055360 HD69699 GA
ENVIRONMENTS ASSEMBLY
UNABLE TO SAVE TO AN ACTION WHEN COPY >
3DCOM BR10000055445 HD69784 GA
REPLACE A CHILD PART BY THE SAME PART
IS NOT POSSIBLE TO VIEW THE PROPOSED
3DCOM BR10000055482 HD69830 EFFECTIVITIES OF AN ACTION - MUST SELECT 'ADD GA
RULE'
MISMATCHING DOCUMENTATION IN R18 ABOUT VAULT
3DCOM BR10000055484 HD69831 GA
MIGRATION
NO EGG-TIMER ICON DURING EXECUTION OF THE NEW
3DCOM BR10000055579 HD69933 GA
COLLAPSE/EXPAND CAPABILITIES
AFTER EXECUTION OF FUNCTIONS 'COLLAPSE', THERE
3DCOM BR10000055582 HD69934 GA
IS A BUG ON THE DISPLAY OF THE RESULT
NEW COLLAPSE CAPABILITIES ARE LONGER THAN OLD
3DCOM BR10000055584 HD69935 GA
ONE
3DCOM BR10000055596 HD69948 THE SECOND CATPART IS DISPLAYED WITH MEASURES. GA
FI:WHEN THE PROCESSING WHICH CREATES PRODUCT
3DCOM BR10000055610 HD69963 CGR IS NOT COMPLETED NORMALLY, AN UNNECESSARY GA
FILE WILL REMAIN INTO
SINCE THE PROCESS OF FILE INTROSPECTION STOPS
3DCOM BR10000055622 HD69977 GA
ON THE WAY, CGR CANNOT BE CREATED
MEMORY ALLOCATION PROBLEM IN 64-BIT CATRPMGRU
3DCOM BR10000055722 HD70092 GA
(WPREPORTS) COMPLEX WIRE HARNESS
TOLERANCING CANNOT BE LOADED DOWN AND
3DCOM BR10000055834 HD70207 GA
DISPLAYED.
3DCOM BR10000055925 HD70297 2DLV,PART IS GARBLED AND IT IS DISPLAYED GA
3DCOM BR10000056008 HD70343 CHECK-IN NOT SHOWING DEFAULT VAULT ALIAS GA
CATIA V5 DOCUMENTS ARE TRANSFERRED TWICE
3DCOM BR10000056090 HD70600 GA
FROM THE HTTP SERVER
NO UPDATE OF THE CGR IN THE LOCAL CACHE FOR THE
3DCOM BR10000056229 HD70612 GA
CV5 CATPARTS
3DCOM BR10000056241 HD70616 3DCOM DID NOT START ON AIX. GA
REFRESH PROBLEM IN PORTAL WEBTREE WHEN
3DCOM BR10000056191 HD70644 GA
PROMOTING MULTIPLE PARTS
RENWASYNCEXTRACTFROMVPM APPLICATION DOES
3DCOM BR10000056333 HD70713 GA
NOT RUN IN R18SP2
LOAD PRODUCT STRUCTURE KO AFTER USING
3DCOM BR10000056428 HD70765 GA
COLLAPSE NODE FUNCTION TO CREATE THE TREE.
3DCOM DOESN'T START IN AN EXTRANET
3DCOM BR10000056435 HD70771 GA
CONFIGURATION
2DLV - A PART OF IMAGE DATA IS MAGNIFIED ON THE
3DCOM BR10000056688 HD71070 GA
SCREEN
3DCOM HANGING DURING A SNAPSHOT CREATION IN
3DCOM BR10000056725 HD71103 GA
'3D LOCAL VIEWER'
UNWANTED BLOCKS ARE SHOWING LCA NAVIGATOR
3DCOM BR10000056871 HD71265 GA
2D VIEWER
ITERATION RELATED FILES STILL PRESENT IN THE
3DCOM BR10000056943 HD71329 GA
VAULT ATFER ITERATION DELETION
SYNCHRONIZATION OF INSTANCE GIVE
3DCOM BR10000056967 HD71360 GA
ENOSDAI_RDBINTERNALERR_2000
3DCOM - SELECTED ELEMENT ALWAYS CENTERED IN
3DCOM BR10000056986 HD71367 GA
PSN
3DCOM BR10000056988 HD71383 THE STANDARD SORT DOESN GA
3DCOM BR10000057014 HD71406 3DCOM - WRONG NODE SEQUENCE IN PSN TREE GA
IMPOSSIBLE TO SELECT ANOHER ENVIRONMENT WHEN
3DCOM BR10000057098 HD71501 GA
CREATING A PART
THE LEGEND IS UNREADABLE IN THE 'COMPARE GRAPH
3DCOM BR10000057102 HD71502 GA
WITH BASE' WINDOW
3DCOM BR10000057141 HD71534 DBLFAIX ERROR ON 3DCOM AND V5 GA
3DCOM - MULTI SELECT WITH CRTL BUTTON NOT
3DCOM BR10000057161 HD71560 GA
POSSIBL E
VIEW REPLICATION TAB DIRECTLY FROM THE CONTENT
3DCOM BR10000057168 HD71567 GA
MANAGEMENT
IN 3DCOM MULTI SELECTION OF PSN NODES IS LOST
3DCOM BR10000057252 HD71652 GA
WHEN ZOOMING BY CLICKING ON ANY SELECTED NODE
LOAD PSN DYNAMIC/SELECTED DIFFERENT IN 3DCOM
3DCOM BR10000057402 HD71821 FROM VPM UNIX AFTER REPLACE PART BY NEW GA
VERSION
THE RESULTS OF FUNCTION 'REPORTING' IN THE
3DCOM BR10000057432 HD71844 GA
3DCOM QUERY PANEL ARE INCOMPLETE
CATPART IS NOT LOADED FROM 3DCOM ON 64-BIT
3DCOM BR10000057489 HD71909 GA
CLIENT M/C
3DCOM PSN MULTI SELECTION IS LOST WHEN
3DCOM BR10000057664 HD72093 GA
DESELECTING A SINGLE ELEMENT
PART DUPLICATION INTER-ENVIRONMENT (VPMENV -
3DCOM BR10000057782 HD72182 ENV01) DONT DISPLAY PARAMETERS IF THE TARGET GA
ENVIRONMENT (ENVO1) ISNT LOADED
SELECT UNDER QUERY HELPER WINDOW POPS BEHIND
3DCOM BR10000057992 HD72449 GA
WHEN THE DOWN ARROW IS SELECTED
ATTRIBUTES VISIBILITY, SETTING IN MODEL,CAD, NOT
3DCOM BR10000058031 HD72486 GA
STORED
3DCOM BR10000058032 HD72492 UNNECESSARY LINE IS DISPLAYED BY 2DLV GA
PSN EXPAND DEPTH LIMIT REMEMBERS THE LAST
3DCOM BR10000058316 HD72789 GA
LEVEL OF EXPANSION SELECTED
AUTOMATIC REFRESH OF LOCK STATUS IN IMPACT
3DCOM BR10000058527 HD73026 GA
GRAPH KO
3DCOM BR10000058646 HD73152 PROBLEMS STARTING NOMAD GA
IF THE 3DCOM SERVER PROCESS CRASHES,
3DCOM BR10000058857 HD73377 SUBSEQUENT SESSIONS FAIL TO LAUNCH GW0SRVCX GA
PROCESS AND VIEWER JUST HANGS
PSN STRUCTURE WITH FEATURE CANNOT BE
3DCOM BR10000059085 HD73625 GA
EXPANDED IN 3DCOM
3DCOM BR10000059202 HD73749 REPLICATION PACKAGE MANAGER LOGIN GA
REPORT INDENTED TEXT TREE DOES NOT WORK FROM
3DCOM BR10000059219 HD73761 GA
QUERY PANEL
REPORT OFFICE HTML REPORT DOES NOT WORK WITH
3DCOM BR10000059220 HD73764 GA
MULTI-SELECTION FROM QUERY PANEL
3DCOM BR10000059356 HD73911 INCORRECT LOCK INFO DISPLAYED AFTER CHECK-IN GA
IN ASYNCHRONOUS WRITE MODE, MML ARE NOT NOT
3DCOM BR10000059364 HD73919 GA
SYNCHRONIZED AFTER UPDATING AN IMPORT
THE EXTRACTION OF A CV5 CATPART FROM VPMWEB BY
3DCOM BR10000060136 HD74725 USING RENWASYNEXTRACTFROMVPM EXE FILE GA
GENERATES ERRORS IN THE ORIGINAL FILE
3DCOM BR10000060364 HD74967 MEASURE BETWEEN EDGE AND VERTEX IS ZERO GA
WI TEXT ACTIVITIES WILL POINT TO A DIFFERENT
3DFTA BR10000055018 HD69333 GA
LOCATION WHEN THEY ARE MODIFIED
IMPROVE DELMIA V5 SIMULATION PERFORMANCE BY
3DFTA BR10000056235 HD70618 GA
USING 3DXML DATA
THE POSITION WHERE THE ANNOTATION IS DISPLAYED
3DFTA BR10000057909 HD72367 GA
AND THE SIZE OF THE FRAME ARE DIF
THE POSITION WHERE THE ANNOTATION IS DISPLAYED
3DFTA BR10000058242 HD72730 GA
AND THE SIZE OF THE FRAME ARE DIF
ERRORMESSAGE DURING RRS-2 BASED ROBOT TASK
3DSIM BR10000057871 HD72325 GA
SIMUL. WITH CARTESIAN TARGET
INFORMATIONS IN ROBOT TASKCHANGES BY USING
3DSIM BR10000059561 HD74115 GA
REPARENT RESOURCE
MACHINING MASMG / MULTI AXIS FLANK CONTOURING
5XMACH BR10000054953 HD69286 GA
VIOLATES PART SURFACE
MACHINING (MASMG) : COLLISIONS DETECTED ON A
5XMACH BR10000055507 HD69856 GA
ISOPARAMETRIC MACHINING OPERATION.
MACHINING (MASMG) / ISOPARAMETRIC 'NOTHING TO
5XMACH BR10000057980 HD72444 MILL' MESSAGE WHEN SQUARE CORNER T- SLOT GA
CUTTER IS USED.
MACHINING (MASMG) / MULTI AXIS CURVE
5XMACH BR10000059762 HD74336 MACHINING / A WARNING MESSAGE APPEARS AND GA
TOOLPATH NOT COMPUTED.
MACHINING (MASMG) / CONTOUR-DRIVEN MACHINING
5XMACH BR10000060371 HD74975 GA
TOOL PATH IS NOT CORRECT.
ABW : SGI : CATIA ABENDS WHILE CHANGING THE
ABFASTEN BR10000051360 HD65332 GA
SUPPORT IN A SPECIFIC DATA
ABIW: CATIA ABENDS WHEN BIW SPOT POINT IS
CREATED.
ABF: LINK OF ASSEMBLY JOINT IS KEPT IF ASEMBLY
JOINT COPY PASTE ONCE.
ABF: BIW JOINT: NOT ABLE TO SELECT PARTICULAR
CATPART
ABF : BIW JOINT BODY : JOINED CONTACT ZONES IS
ABFASTEN BR10000054730 HD69050 NOT UPDATED WHEN BIW JOINT DEFINITION IS GA
MODIFIED.
ABF : AFTER CHANGING THE REGIONAL SETTINGS
ABFASTEN BR10000056881 HD71272 FROM ENGLISH TO SWEEDISH AND VICE VERSA THE GA
ORIENTATION OF WELD POINT DIFFER
UNFOLDED PLANE RETURNED BY SPTECHREQUEST-
ADMIN BR10000054622 HD68903 >GETUNFOLDPLANE(UNFOLDPLANE) IS NOT THE PLANE GA
WHERE LIES THE UNFOLDED FACES OF BENDS !
ADMIN BR10000055575 HD69921 SAT TO CATPART CONVERSION FAIL AT R18GA/SP1/SP2 GA
ADMIN BR10000055714 HD70079 SHAPE CHANGED AFTER CATPART - ACIS CONVERSION GA
CATIA FROZEN AFTER CATDOCUMENTSERVICES::
ADMIN BR10000056109 HD70488 GA
REMOVE
BAD SURFACE SHADING AFTER ACIS->CATPART
ADMIN BR10000056340 HD70687 GA
CONVERSION
ADMIN BR10000056418 HD70809 COPYDOCUMENT PERFORMANCE IS TOO BAD GA
NOCATPART FILE AT THE END OF ACIS-CATPART
ADMIN BR10000056922 HD71303 GA
CONVERSION.
DISABLING/ENABLING GROUPS ON AN IMAGE TAKES
ADMIN BR10000058075 HD72538 GA
MUCH LONGER THAN CREATING THE IMAGE.
ADMIN BR10000058309 HD72801 WRONG COLORS CREATED BY CATMMRINTERPARTCOPY GA
THE METHODS OF CATTLGSERVICESREP2D,
ADMIN BR10000058950 HD73485 GA
CHANGEREP2DTO3D INJUSTICE ON V5R18.
ANIMATION SLOW IN CASE OF PRESENCE OF MANY
ADMIN BR10000059963 HD74549 GA
SPIDER ELEMENTS
CAN NOT SET COLORS BY
ADMIN BR10000060234 HD74827 CATMMRAPPLICATIVEATTRIBUTES:: GA
SETCOLORSONFACES().
ANALYSIS (AMT) / MESHPART ELEMENTS INCORRECT
ADVMESTO BR10000054591 HD68905 GA
WHEN CHANGE MESH SIZE AND RETURN TO ORIGINAL
ANALYSIS (AMT) / CATIA ABENDS WHILE UPDATING
MESH.
ANALYSIS (AMT) / MINIMAL MESHING YIELDS
ADVMESTO BR10000055055 HD69381 DIFFERENT NUMBER OF ELEMENTS DEPENDING ON GA
MESH SIZE.
ANALYSIS (AMT) : THE MERGED SIMPLIFICATION
CURVE HAS SEVERAL CRANKS
ANALYSIS (AMT) / CATIA FREEZES WHEN MESHING
SPECIFIC PART
ADVMESH / LOCAL MESH IS NOT APPLIED TO THE EDGE
ADVMESTO BR10000055460 HD69805 AND VERTEX IF LOCAL MESH SIZE IS LARGER THAN GA
GLOBAL MESH SIZE
ANALYSIS (FEM) / MERGE DISTANCE IS NOT TAKEN IN
ACCOUNT.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / CATIA ABENDS WHEN UPDATE MESH
PART.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / INTERSECTION INTERFERENCE
COMMAND PROVIDES WRONG RESULT.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / SIZE MAP FAILS WHEN EDIT
PARAMETER.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / AN ERROR OCCURS WHEN MESH
PART AFTER EDIT CONSTRAINT.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / TOLERANCE NOT RESPECTED WHEN
USING PROJECTED POINT IN SPECIFIC MESH.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / ENGLISH OPTIONS ARE DISPLAYED
IN QUALITY ANALYSIS PANEL IN JAPANESE CATIA.
MACHINING (AMG) / WHEN IS SET UP BY ,THE DEPTH
ADVPMACH BR10000052025 HD66118 GA
OF MACHINING WHICH WAS SET UP BY IS CHANGED.
FTA (PART) / NO ACCESS TO FTA MANIPULATOR WITH
DELMIA LICENSE PP2.
MACHINING (AMG) / SPIRAL DIRECTION NOT
RESPECTED IN CONTOUR-DRIVEN.
MACHINING (PMPA) / DIFFERENT COUNTER BORE
DIAMETER HOLES ARE CREATED IN SINGLE PATTERN.
MANUFACTURING (AMG): MODIFICATION POINT OF
TOOLPATH IS NOT PROPER ON R17 LEVEL
MACHINING (3ASMG) / THE APPROACH FOR Z LEVEL
ARE INCORRECT.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / SWEEPING INCOMPLETE
MACHINING
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / MESSAGE 'FATAL ERROR'
APPEARS AFTER SELECTING 'CHECK RE ACHABILITY'.
MACHINING (NCMANVERIF) / A MESSAGE IA RECEIVED
ADVPMACH BR10000054701 HD69022 DURING OPENING OF THE CATPROCESS AND MACHINE GA
SIMULATION FATAL ERROR IN MSG .
ADVPMACH BR10000054866 HD69196 MACHINING (PMG) / SWEEPING OPERATION: GOUGE GA
MACHINING (AMG) / ALL VALUES IN THE TOOLS TAB
ADVPMACH BR10000055060 HD69391 PAGE UNDER DRILLING OPERATION ARE DIVIDED BY GA
1000.
MACHINING (PMG) / BACK BORING ERROR MESSAGE
WHEN MODIFY OPERATION.
MACHINING (AMG) / CATIA V5 ABENDS AFTER SOME
TIME AFTER GENERATING THE NC CODE.
AN UNECESSARY CATALOG BROWSER WINDOW IS
DISPLAYED IN A SPECIFIC MACHINING SCENARIO
MACHINING (AMG) / COMPUTE OF MULTI-AXIS FLANK
CONTOURING ON XP64 RESULTS IN AN ERROR.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE TOOL CAN NOT BE
ADVPMACH BR10000056064 HD70445 DISPLAYED ON THE POSITION WHICH THE USER HAS GA
CLICKED.
MACHINING (AMG) / CAN NOT COMPUTE A TOOLPATH
OF ISOPARAMETRIC MACHINING.
MACHINING (MASMG) / WHEN REPLAYING MULTIAXIS
ADVPMACH BR10000056263 HD70630 FLANK CONTOURING ON 64 BIT MACHINE CATIA GA
ABENDS.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / PLUNGE MILLING / LATERAL
RETRACT DISTANCE AND RAISE DISTANCE UNDER
AXIAL TAB ARE NOT RESPECTED AT SOME PASSES OF
TOOLPAT
MACHINING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING / THERE
ADVPMACH BR10000056440 HD70805 ARE NOT 'APPROACH' AND 'RETRACT' FROM THE GA
HALFWAY OF A TOOL PATH.
ADVPMACH BR10000056464 HD70839 CRASH ON EXPLICIT SWITCH TO DESIGN MODE GA
MACHINING (AMG) / ROTABL CAUSES ABNORMAL
TOOLPATH.
ADVANCED MACHINING - MULTI AXIS SPIRAL MILLING
TOOL PATH IS NOT CORRECT
MANUFACTURING (AMG): WRONG TOOLPATH FOR
MULTI-AXIS FLANK CONTOURING
MACHINING (AMG) / Z LEVEL OPERATION TAKES
UNEXPECTED DEPTH OF CUT.
MACHINING (AMG) / ABNORMAL TOOL PATH ON
ADVPMACH BR10000057028 HD71434 ADDING A START EXTENTION VALUE UNDER RADIAL GA
STRATEGY TAB.
MACHINING / TOOL PATH HAS NOT BEEN COMPUTED
FOR REWORK AREA
MANUFACTURING (AMG): TOOLPATH CANNOT BE
COMPUTED AFTER WORKPIECE AUTOMOUNT
MACHINING (AMG) / HOLE CREATED IN V4 SOLID IS
ADVPMACH BR10000057205 HD71605 NOT RECOGNISED IN V5 POCKET MACHINING GA
OPERATION.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / ROUGHING 'BY OFFSET ON
ADVPMACH BR10000057326 HD71740 PART WITH ZIG-ZAG' FAILS TO RESPECT THE PART GA
CONTOUR.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / PROBLEM WITH TOOLS
CATALOG.
MACHINING (PMG) / AUTOMATIC-MOUNT-WORKPIECE
CHANGES TOOLPATH.
MACHINING (MASMG) / WRONG Z COORDINATE IN
MULTI-AXIS FLANK CONTOURING OPERATION.
ADVANCED MACHINING - AFTER CHANGING WINDOW,
CATIA ABEND OCCURS
MANUFACTURING (AMG) : STOCK MOVES ON VIDEO
REPLAY AND MACHINE SIMULATION
CATIA CRASHES WHEN SELECTING A NC TOOL FROM A
CATALOG
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / INSTANTIATING MACHINING
ADVPMACH BR10000058304 HD72792 PROCESSES RESULTS IN REDUNDANT TOOL GA
INTANCIATIONS AND REDUNDANT TOOL CHANGES.
ADVPMACH BR10000058327 HD72815 THE MODAL DIALOG HIDES BEHIND ANOTHER DIALOG. GA
MACHINING (SIMUL) : STOCK DISAPPEARS DURING A
SIMULATION
MACHINING (PMG) / HIDE 'STOCK GEOMETRY' IS NOT
CREATED AND ERROR MESSAGE IS NOT SHOWN
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / TOOL PATH RESULT IS QUITE
ADVPMACH BR10000060273 HD74866 DIFFERENT BETWEEN APT IMPORT AND PROFILE GA
CONTOURING.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / ROUGHING / TOOLPATH
ADVPMACH BR10000060337 HD74940 WRONGLY COMPUTED WITHOUT RESPECTING THE GA
OFFSET ON PART.
ANLBASE BR10000057914 HD72370 NO API AVAILABLE TO CHECK ED2 LICENSE IN CAA GA
ANLINTF BR10000056963 HD71353 MESH COLOR COULD NOT BE SAVED CORRECTLY GA
ANLINTF BR10000060190 HD74781 SURFACE MESH WITH SIZE MAP FAILS GA
MESH OPERATOR IS RE-APPLIED AFTER EACH OPEN/
ANLMESH BR10000056556 HD70935 GA
CLOSE EDITION ON A MESH PART
PICKING/HIGHLIGHT OF MESH PARTS OR CAT
SURFACES NOT WORKING WHEN YOU HAVE A
ANLVISU BR10000055257 HD69598 GA
FEATURES WHICH IMPLEMENTS HIS OWN PICKABLE
REPS USING CATI3DGEOV
APPFRAME BR10000053532 HD67818 SETTING: LOAD REFERENCED DOCUMENTS GA
THE STATE OF CATPRODUCT HAS CHANGED TO
ASDES BR10000060014 HD74596 GA
'MODIFIED' ONLY BY OPENING THE PROPERTY O
ASSEMBLY DESIGN: THE UPDATE ALL ICON IS NOT
ASSEMBLY BR10000050068 HD63860 ACTIVE AFTER THE MODIFICATION OF A CATPART GA
USING A CATVBA MACRO
ASD : SECTIONING : THE COLOR OF VOLUME SECTION
ASSEMBLY BR10000050816 HD64702 GA
CUT DOES NOT CHANGE
ASD: CONSTRAINT - CONSTRAINT IN PART IS
DISPLAYED THOUGH PRODUCT IS ACTIVATED.
ASD: DLNAME STRINGS ARE CHANGED TO FOLDER
STRINGS AFTER EDIT LINKS WITH REPLACE FUNCTION
ASD:SECTIONING:SECTION IS NOT FILLED WITH
PRTICULAR GRAPHICS DRIVER
ASD : BROKEN CONSTRAINTS WHEN MAKE AN
ASSEMBLY FLEXIBLE.
ASD: OPEN - CATIA CRASHES ON OPENING THE
CATPRODUCT.
FILE MENU : PERFORMANCE PROBLEM WITH OPENEING
OF CERTAIN FILES
ASD : INCORRECT MASS CALCULATION WITH MULTI-
SELECTION
ASD: SECTIONING - EDIT POSITION AND DIMENSION
IS NOT KEPT IN SECTION WINDOW.
ASD : NUMBER OF CONSTRAINTS AND NAMES IS
DIFFERENT WHEN OPEN IN NEW WINDOW.
ASD : CONSTRAINTS : CREATION DATE OF
CONSTRAINT IS WRONG WHEN LOADED
ASD : ABEND WHILE SAVING SPECIFIC PRODUCT AS
3DXML ON DESKTOP
ASSEMBLY BR10000053138 HD67379 ASD: SPLIT: SPLIT PREVIEW IS AT WRONG LOCATION. GA
FILE MENU: CATPART WITH DEFAULT NAME IN FRENCH
CANNOT BE SAVED
PROD STRU / SURFACE OF CGR CAN NOT BE REMOVED
FROM SELECTION BY CTRL KEY
ASD : MEASURE BETWEEN : RESULT IS WAITING FOR
UPDATE
ASD: SKETCH IS DISPLAYED AFTER PERFORMING
GENERATE CATPART FROM PRODUCT.
FILE SAVE AS 3DXML IN JAPANESE CATIA : PROBLEM
WITH THE MEASURE BETWEEN TEXT IN A DMU REVIEW
ASD: SYMMETRY - WHEN SUB PRODUCT IS MADE
ASSEMBLY BR10000053659 HD67942 ACTIVE, SYMMETRY PREVIEW IS DIFFERENT THAN GA
ACTUAL RESULT.
ASSEMBLY DESIGN / CATALOG PROBLEM: INSTANTIATE
ASSEMBLY BR10000053766 HD68069 COMPONENT CANNOT BE USED AFTER INSTANTIATE AS GA
NEW COMPONENT
ASSEMBLY BR10000053776 HD68081 ASD: REORDER/ HIGHLIGHT IS NOT DISPLAYED GA
ASD: REFRAME ON IS WRONG BY CHECK ANALYSIS
TOOLBOX OPERATION.
ASD : UPDATE IS IMPOSSIBLE ON A SPECIFIC
ASSEMBLY
PART: COLOUR CHANGES WHEN 'ONLY CURRENT BODY'
TOGGLED OFF IN TOOLS/OPTIONS MENU
ASD : SECTION : DISPLAY DIFFERENT WHEN ALLOW
MEASURE ON SECTION OPTION IS UNCHECKED
ASD: HIDE ELEMENT ALSO CREATED BY GENERATE
CATPART FROM CATPRODUCT
ASD: AN INCORRECT MASSGE APPEARS THROUGH EDIT
LINKS
ASD: MEASURE/SHOWING INCORRECT LENGTH AFTER
UPDATE
VPMV5NAV : AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING HAVE TO BE
UPDATED EVERY TIME AFTER LOADING FROM ENOVIA
ASD: CATIA ABENDS WHILE CLEANING PRODUCTS
WITH CATDUA
ASD: MEASURE BETWEEN - INCORRECT RESULT OF
MEASURE BETWEEN WITH USER SELECTION FILTER.
ASD: WHEN SYMMETRY FUNCTION IS PERFORMED,
SKETCH IS NOT COPIED.
ASD: A CATPART IS INSIDE A CATPART WHEN
PRODUCT IS OPENED
ASD: SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT IS NOT UPDATED
PERMANENTLY.
ASSEMBLY BR10000054565 HD68885 ASD: A PART OF CATLOG CANNOT BE INSTANTIATED. GA
ASD: COMPONENT/INCORRECT LINK IS CREATED IN
DEFINE CONTEXTUAL LINK FUNCTION
ASD: FLEXIBLE/RIGID SUB-ASSEMBLY/ CANNOT
SELECT UPDATE
PART : STATUS OF CATPART IS CHANGED TO MODIFIED
BY LAUNCHING PROPERTIES PANEL
ASD: MEASURE ITEM: AREA RESULTS OF WRL DIFFER
IN R16 AND R17 LEVELS
ASD: CATPART WAS BROKEN WHEN DELETED AND
RESAVED WITH CACHE MODE ON
ASD : AFTER CATDUA SYMMETRY ELEMNTS MISSING
FROM SPECIFIC ASSEMBLY
ASD : CONSTRAINTS : CONSTRAINTS ARE BROKEN
EVEN IF NO REFERENCE IS DELETED
ASSEMBLY BR10000054844 HD69171 ASD: UNABLE TO RESOLVE CORRECT INSTANCE NAMES GA
ASD: MUCH TIME IS NEEDED UNTIL PROCESSING IS
ASSEMBLY BR10000054920 HD69246 COMPLETED, BY COPING PIPE 8 AND TWO GA
COINCIDENCE CONSTRAINTS
ASD: MODEL GIVES A WARNING WHEN UPDATED AND
CANNOT BE CLEANED BY CATDUA
ASD: PROBLEM OF TEXTURE WHEN IMPORTING A WRL
FILE
ASD: MEASURE ITEM/IN VISULIZATION MODE SURFACE
IS ABLE TO SELECT FROM GEOMETRY AREA
ASD: GHOST LINK WILL BE GENERATED WHEN DATA IS
COPIED TO A PRODUCT AS BREAK LINK.
ASD: MEASURE ITEM/MEASURED VALUE IS DISPLAYED
IN EXACT MODE FOR CGR SURFACE.
ASD: MULTI INSTANTIATION - POSITION OF
ASSEMBLY BR10000055052 HD69385 COMPONENT COPIED BY MULTI INSTANTIATION IS GA
INCORRECT.
ASD: PARTS ARE LOST WHEN A CATPRODUCT IS
ASSEMBLY BR10000055185 HD69520 EXPLODED IN CONSTRAINED MODE ON WINDOWS GA
XPX64.
PRODUCT STRUCTURE : A CATPART IS SEEN AS
MODIFIED AFTER BEING INSERTED IN A CATPRODUCT
ASD: SYMMETRY: SYMMETRY DONE ON SUB ASSLY IS
BROKEN
ASD: SYMMETRY - SYMETRY IS INCORRECT BY LOCK
ON OR OFF IN ADMIN MODE.
ASD: IF PERFORM SYMMETRY TO SUB_ASSY, PART
NAME RULE HAS NOT BEEN STANDARDIZED
ASD : REPLACE COMPONENT : WRONG STATUS SHOWN
AFTER REPLACE COMPONENT
ASD : ACCELERATOR FOR HIDE SHOW FUNCTION
MISSING IN KOREAN ENVIRONMENT
DMUSPA:UNDO/REDO RESULTS IN AN ERROR AND
ABEND OCCURS AFTER MEASURE BETWEEN .
ASD: CATIA ABENDS WHILE CLEANING PRODUCTS
WITH CATDUA
ASD / FILTER OF CHECK CLASH RESULT IS NOT
REFLECTED TO EXPORTED TO XML FILE.
ASD: SHOW ON ACTIVATE PRODUCT OPTION IS NOT
EFFECTIVE
VPMV5NAV : AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING HAVE TO BE
UPDATED EVERY TIME AFTER LOADING FROM ENOVIA
ASD: REUSE PATTERN: DOES NOT SYNCHRONISE
CORRECTLY
ASD: CONSTRAINT LINKS ARE NOT FOUND WHEN THE
ASSEMBLY BR10000055767 HD70147 OPTION 'DO NOT ACTIVATE DEFAULT SHAPES ON OPEN' GA
IS SELECTED
ASD : ATTACHMENT NODE DISAPPEARS AFTER
OPENING THE CHILD PRODUCT IN NEW WINDOW
ASD: DESIGN MODE/ TAKING TOO MUCH TIME TO
CHANGE IN DESIGN MODE
ASD - MULTI INSTANTIATION - WHEN UNDO IS
ASSEMBLY BR10000056070 HD70450 PERFORMED AFTER MULTI INSTANTIATION, SHAPE GA
DISPLAY DISAPPEARS.
ASD: THE LOADED ELEMENT IS NOT CORRECTLY
DISPLAYED
ASD: CONSTRIANTS/NOT ABLE TO SELECT PARTS
CREATED BY PATTERN
ASD: FIX CONSTRAINT - FIX CONSTRAINT OF SUB
ASSEMBLY BR10000056151 HD70527 PRODUCT IS BROKEN WHEN IT IS OK IN ROOT GA
PRODUCT.
ASD : MATERIAL FROM SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT CAN
NOT BE DELETED
ASD: THE CATPART CAN NOT BE OPEN IN
VISUALIZATION MODE
ASD - PUBLICATIONS - DISPLAYED PUBLICATION
STATUS IN TREE IS INCORRECT.
ASSEMBLY BR10000056424 HD70801 ASD: SHORTCUT OPERATION CANNOT BE PERFORMED. GA
ASSEMBLY BR10000056396 HD70811 ASD: ASSEMBLY EXPLODED IS INCORRECT GA
ASD: PART NUMBER CONFLICTS DIALOG BOX IS NOT
DISPLAYED BY COPY/PASTE
ASD: THE GEOMETRY IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN
ASSEMBLY BR10000056630 HD71000 OPENING A CATPRODUCT IN AN EXISTING CATIA V5 GA
PRODUCT
WE CAN NOT GET CORRECT DEGREES OF FREEDOM
ASSEMBLY BR10000056648 HD71025 VALUE OF TRANSLATION BY CATIDEGREESOFFREEDOM:: GA
GETDEGREESOFFREEDOM()
PART: PARAMETER - PART BECOMES MODIFIED READ
ONLY ON EXPANDING THE SPECIFICATION TREE.
ASD : AFTER DRAGGING INSTANCE INSIDE PRODUCT
IT CAN BE SELECTED BY TRAP
FILE MENU: IMPOSSIBLE TO SAVE THE DEFAULT PART
CREATED BY CATIA IN FRENCH
CATIA ABENDS WHILE EDITING A PARAMETER IN A
SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT
ASD : GENERATE CATPART FROM CATPRODUCT DO NOT
CONVERT ALL ELEMNTS
DMUSPA: ALTHOUGH THE OPTION 'AUTOMATICALLY
ASSEMBLY BR10000056973 HD71368 REFRAME' IS OFF, 'PREVIEW WINDOW' OF SECTIONING GA
DOES REFRAME AUTOMATICALLY.
UNEXPECTED ERROR OCCURED DURING
INITIALIZATION OF CATDUAV5 PROCESS
ASD : ABEND WHILE SAVING SPECIFIC PRODUCT AS
3DXML ON DESKTOP
ASD: SYMMETRY: SYMMETRY DONE ON SUB ASSLY IS
BROKEN
ASD : ASSEMBLY SYMMETRY : SYMMETRY OF A
ASSEMBLY BR10000057222 HD71628 CATPART IS CHANGED AFTER THE PRODUCT IS GA
CHANGED TO FLEXIBLE
GSD : ABEND WHEN SPECIFIC CATALOG ELEMENT IS
INSTANTIATED
GENERATE CATPART FROM PRODUCT FAILS ON
CATPRODUCT CONTAINING SOME V4 E3D ELEMENTS
ASD: MULTI INSTANTIATION: DOES NOT WORK
CORRECTLY
ASD: COINCIDENCE CONSTRAINT SET BETWEEN TWO
PARTS CAN NOT BE CUT
ASD : ABEND WITH SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT WHILE
CLICKING CANCEL OF SECTIONING COMMAND
PART CANNOT BE INSTANCED TO PRODUCT USING
DRAG & DROP
ASD: FIX - CATIA ABENDS AFTER APPLYING FIX
CONSTRAINT.
ASD : RE USE PATTERN - INSTANCE ATTRIBUTES NOT
KEPT
PART : ABEND WHILE DELETING ADD OPERATION FROM
SPECIFIC CATPART
ASD : WHILE GENERATING CATPART FROM SPECIFIC
PRODUCT CATIA ABEND
ASD: SNAP: THE GDI OBJECT IN WINDOWS TASK
ASSEMBLY BR10000057915 HD72375 MANAGER, IS NOT RELEASED EVEN AFTER CLOSING GA
THE COMMAND
ASD: TAKES TOO TIME TO RE-CONNECT THE
CONSTRAINT
ASSEMBLY BR10000058074 HD72537 ASD: ASSOCIATIVE PART PANEL NAMES TRUNCATED. GA
ASD: ASSOCIATIVE PART - DUPLICATE LINKS CAN BE
CREATED FOR EXISTING INSTANCES.
ASSEMBLY BR10000058125 HD72596 ASD: INCORRECT ASSOCIATIVITY FILTER LIST. GA
ASD: UPDATE/LINKS ARE NOT SYNCHRONIZED
AUTOMATICALLY
ASD: DESIGN MODE: BAD PERFORMANCE WHEN
SWITCHING ASSEMBLY TO DESIGN MODE
ASD: PRODUCT HANGS WHEN BEING OPENED WITH
ASSEMBLY BR10000058326 HD72822 THE OPTION DO NOT ACTIVATE DEFAULT SHAPES ON GA
OPEN
FREEZE OF CATIA V5 GRAPHIC WINDOW (SHARE OF
PMR80849)
ASD: CONSTRAINT CANNOT BE DELETED WHEN
ASSEMBLY BR10000058893 HD73419 EXISTING CONSTRAINT IS RECONNECTED AND GA
CANCELATION IS PERFORMED.
ASD: GEOMETRICAL ELEMENT ON SOLID CANNOT BE
SELECTED AFTER REFERENCE SOLID IS MODIFIED.
ASSEMBLY BR10000059099 HD73637 PART:WHEN ASSEMBLE IS PERFORMED, CATIA ABEND. GA
ASD: IMPOSSIBLE TO UPDATE A COINCIDENCE
CONSTRAINT BETWEEN CURVE AND POINT
ASD : INCORRECT PREVIEW / RESULT WHILE
PERFORMING SYMMETRY
ASD : COMPONENT NOT PART OF THE ASSEMBLY IS
LOADED
ASD : COMPONENTS ARE ALL SITUATED IN THE SAME
PLACE AND NOT IN THEIR ORIGINAL LOCATION
ASD: KEEP LINK WITH SELECTED OBJECT SETTING IS
OVERRIDDEN BY CREATE DATUM.
COMPASS DISTANCE COMMAND DOESN`T WORK AS
DESCRIBED
FILE / OPEN: POOR PERFORMANCE FOR A SPECIFIC
CATPRODUCT WITH CACHE ACTIVE
THE POSITION OF ANALYSIS RESULT DISPLAY IS NOT
CADATRAN BR10000054182 HD68502 GA
CORRECT ON CCD V5R18
WHEN SAVE SPECIFIC CATIA V5 DRAWING AS CCD
FORMAT FILE, LOCATION OF CIRCLE ELEMENT CHANGES
CCDV5 R17 SP05 CLASSIC FUNCTION KEY BUTTON
SIZE BECOMES TOO SMALL TO SELECT
GEOMETRY AND DIMENSION DISTORTED WHILE
SAVING AS CCD FILE
WHEN SAVE DRAWING TO CCD FORMAT WITH 'LINE
SPACING', TEXTS OVERLAP ON CCD
CANNOT EXTRACT CATEGORIES FOR REPLICATION
CATEGORY BR10000056882 HD71277 GA
FROM THE CATEGORY E DITOR
STI: FOLDER CANNOT BE EXPANDED BY DOUBLE CLICK
CATIAST BR10000053751 HD68054 GA
IN SMARTEAM SAVE
STCAI : CATIA LINK ICON NOT SEEN WHEN COPY
PASTE DATA CHECKED IN
STCAI : POSSIBILITY TO HAVE SOME DIRECTORIES
IGNORED BY THE SMARTEAM SAVE COMMAND
STCAI : CATIA FREEZES WHEN OPENING FROM
SMARTEAM FILES WITH NON SYNCHRONIZED CGR
STCAI: V4 MODEL INSIDE CATPRODUCT NOT SEEN
WHEN MODEL IS OPENED AND CLOSED
CATIAST BR10000054989 HD69319 STCAI: CAI HANGS ON PERFORMING SMARTEAM SAVE GA
STCAI : PERFORMANCE PROBLEM WHEN CHECKING
OUT AN ASSEMBLY
CATIAST BR10000055095 HD69427 STCAI : CANNOT TURN OFF USER INTERFACE WITH API GA
STCAI : (SEE) : RECONCILIATOR DOESN'T WORK FOR
V5 PRODUCTS INCLUDING V4 MODELS
STCAI : CGR RE-CREATED AFTER CWI SMARTEAM SAVE
ON NON-MODIFIED CATIA FILES.
STCAI : WHEN ENDING AND RE-CONNECTING TO
CATIAST BR10000055539 HD69888 SMARTEAM, MADE MODIFICATIONS TO A PART ARE GA
LOST IN CHECK-IN
STCAI: PROPERTY MAPPING DOES NOT WORK BOTH
CATIAST BR10000055564 HD69914 WAYS IF THEPARAMETER IS SURROUNDED BY SIMPLE GA
QUOTES.
STCAI : PROFILE CARD PANEL STAYS IN THE
BACKGROUND
CWI : CANNOT SAVE A CATIA DOCUMENT AFTER
CATIAST BR10000056056 HD70434 LOGGING OUT OF WEB EDITOR THROUGH THE PROFILE GA
CARD WINDOW
SMARTEAM CATIA INTEGRATION - CAN NOT CREATE
LINK BETWEEN CATDRAWING AND CATPROCESS
STCAI (SEE) : DOCUMENTS WITH EMPTY TIMESTAMP
ARE SEEN AS MODIFIED BY THE RECONCILIATOR
STCAI : AFTER HAVING ENDED SMARTEAM, THE
CREATION OF A NEW CATPART FREEZES CATIA
ERROR 438 OCCURS BY INSERTING PART LIST INTO
CATDRAWING
CWI : CANNOT CHECK IN A DOCUMENT SAVED ON A
NETWORK DRIVE.
CWI : PROFILE CARD DISPLAY IS NOT CONSISTENT
WITH SMARTEAM WEBEDITOR DISPLAY
STCAI : SMARTEAM CONNECTION LOST CAUSES
STRANGE BEHAVIOR
CATIAST BR10000056636 HD71014 STCAI : REPLACE WITH SELECTED REVISION DOESN GA
STCAI : OPENING A CATPRODUCT IN LIGHTWEIGHT
CATIAST BR10000056794 HD71174 MODE FROM SMARTEAM IS LOADING THE WRONG GA
DESCRIPTION IN CATIA.
STCAI : POOR PERFORMANCE WHEN ACCESSING CATIA
CATALOGS
STCAI : DRAWING NOT PROPERLY UPDATED AFTER A
CHECK IN WITH REPLACE PREVIOUS REVISION
STCAI : CANNOT PROPERLY SET USEGRAPHICALUI TO
TRUE USING CAI API
STCAI: CATIA LINK NOT RE CREATED AFTER A SAVE
OPERATION.
STCAI: CATPRODUCT IS NOT PROPERLY UNLOADED
FROM CATIA SESSION.
STCAI : BULK LOADING FAILS FOR V4 MODEL IF CATIA.
BULK_LOADING_MODEL IS VALUATED
STCAI : CATIA CORE DUMP BY SELECTING THE DESIGN
TABLE IN SMARTEAM
STCAI : UNNECESSARY LINKS CREATED IN SMARTEAM
WHEN SAVING A CATDRAWING WITH BALLOONS
CWI : ERROR MESSAGE DISPLAYED WHEN TRYING TO
CANCEL A CHECK IN OPERATION
CWI : ERROR MESSAGE DISPLAYED WHEN TRYING TO
CANCEL A CHECK IN OPERATION
STCAI : CONTEXTUAL LINKS BROKEN AFTER THE
DUPLICATION OF A PRODUCT.
CDG BR10000054531 HD68850 PB EXECUTEONSERVER/EXECUTECOMMAND GA
S3 CV5 INCONSISTENCIES WITH DESIGN TABLES -
CDG BR10000057418 HD71709 REFRESH PROBLEM : FOR REFRESHITEMINFORMATION GA
ENHANCEMENT ACCEPTANCE SCENARIO 3 - PMR 53777
S2- BROKEN LINKS AFTER LOADING POINTED
DOCUMENTS IN A SECOND STEP :
CDG BR10000057417 HD71711 GA
REFRESHITEMINFORMATION ENHANCEMENT
ACCEPTANCE SCENARIO 2 FOR PMR 558
S1 BROKEN LINKS AFTER LOADING POINTED
DOCUMENTS IN A SECOND STEP
CDG BR10000057419 HD71727 GA
REFRESHITEMINFORMATION ENAHCEMENNT
ACCEPTANCE
CHGMNGT BR10000054455 HD68770 CHANGE MGT: UNABLE TO DELETE AN ACTION GA
SUPPLIERS MUST BE ABLE TO ADD AN EFFECTIVITY
CHGMNGT BR10000054512 HD68830 EXPRESSION USING THE MPUE CATEGORY THAT IS GA
OWNED BY SAC
LOSS OF OWNERSHIP OF MPUE CATEGORY WHEN
CHGMNGT BR10000054514 HD68832 GA
TRANSFERRING OWNERSHIP OF AN ACTION
REPLICATION FAILURE WITH
'REP_RECLAIM_OWNERSHIP=TRUE' FLAG
NEW RELEASED COMPONENT ASSEMBLY NOT SENDING
TO CATIA WHEN SENT AS ASSEMBLY
WHEN DELETING A M-ACTION IN ENOVIA IT DOESN T
DELETE IN DPE(PROJECT LIBRARY)
CANNOT EDIT ATTRIBUTES OF ANALYSIS PACKAGE
AFTER STATUS CHANGE
CANNOT PROMOTE PART REFERENCE TO FINAL STATE
WITHOUT A CHANGE ORDER
LAST APPROVED CONFIG DOMAIN NOT DISPLAYED
WHEN CUT PERFORMED TO NULL EFFECTIVITY
STACK EMPTY ERROR WHEN CUTTING DOCUMENT
FROM PART
SUBSTITUTE PARTS NOT DISPLAYED CONSISTENTLY IN
PRODUCT EDITOR
LCA NOT CHECKING FOR MORE RECENT COMMITTED
ACTION OBJECT UPDATES BEFORE ALLOWING
CHANGE TO ASSEMBLY NOT PROPAGATED TO OTHER
INSTANCES OF SAME ASSEMBLY IN SESSION
DELETING CHANGE ORDERS ATTACHED TO OTHER
CHANGE ORDERS
MODIFICATION OF DOCUMENT ID OF A REVISED
DOCUMENT IS ALLOWED
PARSER OF THE IMAKEFILE CONSIDERS A EMPTY LINE
CID BR10000053898 HD68218 GA
AT THE END OF FILE
RIGHT CLICKING ON A COMPONENT IN DIALOG
CID BR10000054177 HD68515 DESIGNER ADDS THE ITEMS IN THE POP-UP MENU GA
MULTIPLE TIMES
GETALIAS, SETALIAS, AND UNSETALIAS APIS ARE
CID BR10000056155 HD70532 GA
STILL NODOC ON V5R18
ELECTRICAL (CBD) / CATIA ABENDS WHEN READ THE
CIRBOARD BR10000049172 HD62847 PROVIDED IDF ON JAPANESE ENVIRONMENT WITH GA
GIVEN CATIA SETTINGS
CIRCUIT BOARD DESIGN: WRONG PARTS WERE
CIRBOARD BR10000056297 HD70674 GA
COLORED WITH CREATE CONSTRAINT AREA OPTION
ELECTRICAL (CBD) / LAST TWO DECIMAL DIGITS OF
INSTANCE NAMES ARE NOT EXPORTED IN THE IDF FILE
THE IDF FILE IS NOT CORRECTLY EXPORTED WHEN
CREATING A PAD WITH THE UP TO PLANE TYPE
WHEN UNDO IS PERFORMED ON CLICKING CREATE
CIRBOARD BR10000058526 HD73032 BOARD ICON, ICON OF CREATE A PANEL DOES NOT GA
RETURN TO SELECTABLE STATUS
UNDO 'CREATE A PANEL' OPERATION, 'CREATE A PANEL'
AND 'CREATE BOARD' ICONS ARE GRAY OUT
COPY & PASTE PAD, DEFINED CONSTRAINT AREA IS
NOT REFLECTED
CLASSA BR10000057690 HD72120 ACA: MATCH CONSTRAINT: MATCHING IS NOT GOOD GA
ACA: STYLING FILLET - MISSING TRIM SUPPORT WHEN
CLASSA BR10000058056 HD72522 GA
USER CHANGES TO NO APPROXIMATION.
WHEN PRODUCT FILE IS SAVED WITH STRUCTURE
CLEANER BR10000053020 HD67253 EXPOSED MODE INSIDE LCA,FUNCTIONS IN SKETCH GA
TRACER WORKBENCH ARE MADE AVAILABLE
CATDUAV5 PROBLEM WITH A SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT
CLEANER BR10000053232 HD67480 GA
(UAV_1 RULE IS NOT CORRECTLY PROCESSED)
CLN : DOC_4 IS DETECTED AGAIN AFTER CLEANING
AND SAVING THE CATPRODUCT
CLN : NUMBER OF CATDUA ERRORS IS DIFFERENT
WHEN CLEAN AND CHECK.
CLEANER : ABEND WHILE CLEANING SPECIFIC CATPART
WITH CATDUA
CLEANER: CATDUA NOT ABLE TO CLEAN ALL GHOST
LINKS.
CATDUAV5 : THE UAV_29 RULE IS NOT CORRECTLY
PROCESSED
CATDUA : PART NAME IS NOT REPORTED IN HTML FILE
OF CATDUA REPORT - COID AND COMID ARE REPORTED
CLEANER : PWD VARIABLE - UTILITY ABENDS WHEN
PWD IS SET ON ANOTHER MACHINE
CLEANER : UPD_2 RULE CAN NOT BE CLEANED
COMPLETELY FROM SPECIFIC CATPART
CLEANER : UNNECESSARILY EDL_4 CLEANER RULE
CLEANER BR10000055204 HD69543 DETECTED AFTER INSERTING SPECIFIC INSTANCE IN GA
NEW PRODUCT
CLEANER : GHOST LINKS FROM SPECIFIC CATPART CAN
NOT BE CLEANED
ASD: CATDUA/CATDUA TAKING MORE THAN 30 MINS
FOR CLEANING
ASD: CATDUA/CATDUA TAKES LONG TIME FOR CLEAN
PROCESS ON 32 BIT ENVIRONMENT
CLN : EHI4 : EHI4 ERROR IS NOT CLEANED AND
SHOWN EVERYTIME DURING THE CLEAN OPERATION
CLEANER : ERROR OCCURS AND CATDUAV5 BATCH
STOPS WHEN CHECK OR CLEAN IS PERFORMED
CLEANER BR10000056876 HD71263 CATDUA : ELLIPSES DISAPPEAR AFTER CLEAN GA
CLEANER - NUMBER OF FIXED IS GREATER THAN
NUMBER OF CAN BE FIXED OF CATDUA.
CLEANER - CATIA CRASHES WHEN CATDUA IS
PERFORMED TWICE ON SAME COMPONENT.
CLEANER : WITH SPECIFIC CATPART UPD_2 CLEANER
RULE CAN NOT BE CLEANED IN ONE ATTEMPT
CATDUAV5: AN UPD_2 ERROR IS DETECTED IN A NEW
CLEANER BR10000057578 HD72007 CATDRAWING AFTER INSTANTIATION OF A GA
COMPONENT FROM A CATALOG
TOOLS / UTILITY / CATDUAV5: THE BATCH ABENDS
CLEANER BR10000057679 HD72111 WITH A RC=139 WHEN PROCESSING A SPECIFIC GA
CATPRODUCT
CLEANER BR10000057791 HD72229 CLEANER - CATDUA FAILS TO CLEAN THE GHOST LINK. GA
TOOLS / UTILITY / CATDUAV5 FAILS WITH A CODE 8 IF
CLEANER BR10000057807 HD72247 THERE IS A JAPANESE DOUBLE BYTE CHARACTER IN GA
THE PATHNAME
CLEANER : ABEND WHILE CLEANING SPECIFIC
CATPRODUCT
CLEANER : SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT ABEND WHILE
CLEANING WITH CATDUA
BATCH : CLEANERAPPLI : CLEANERAPPLI BATCH
RETURNS AN UPDATE ERROR ON SPECIFIC CATPART
CATDUAV5 : ABEND WHEN CLEANING A SPECIFIC
CATPRODUCT
GSD : SELECTION OF CLOUD OF POINTS FOR
CLOUDEDT BR10000052170 HD66271 TRANSFORMATION OPERATION RESULTS IN MESHED GA
HIGHLIGHT
DSE : WHEN OTHER CUTTING PLANES ARE MOVED
CLOUDEDT BR10000054950 HD69282 THEN THE POSITION OF THE STANDARD CUTTING GA
PLANE OF PLANAR SECTIONS ALSO GETS MOVED
DSE: DIGITIZED MORPHING/INCORRECT RESULT AFTER
CLOUDEDT BR10000055278 HD69618 GA
UPDATE
DSE: CO-ORDINATES SECTION CANT BE SELECTED AS
CLOUDEDT BR10000059130 HD73669 GA
REFERENCE PLANE IN PLANAR SECTIONS COMMAND.
SETSENSIBLE CAUSES JAVA EXCEPTION EDITING
COMPEDIT BR10000056047 HD70426 GA
ATTRIBUTES AFTER ATTRIBUTE LOSES FOCUS
WHEN CUT A PART INSTANCE, "CATVPMVDADELETE" UE
IS CALLED IN UNCONFIGURED MODE
INSERTED INSTANCE PRODUCT STRUCTURE NOT
SAVED, WHEN HAVING ENOVIA CUSTOMIZATION ON
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : WHEN THERE IS AN
COMPODSG BR10000049903 HD63656 ERROR WHEN CONVERTING V4 DATA TO V5, NO ERROR GA
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : DMU CURRENT
COMPODSG BR10000053273 HD67518 SELECTION DOES NOT ALLOW SELECTION OF FLAT GA
PATTERN ENTITIES
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : CREATE MANUFACTURING
COMPODSG BR10000053360 HD67616 GA
PART REORDERS SOLID OPERATIONS
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : WRONG ORIENTATION OF
FLATTEN GEOMETRY
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : IML LEVEL II FUNCTION
COMPODSG BR10000053525 HD67801 CREATES SURFACES WITH CURLING AND WARPING AT GA
THE SURFACE EDGES
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : PROBLEM WHEN
CREATING 3D MULTI SPLICE WITH BUTT ZONE
WIREFRAME: UNFOLD: CANNOT BE DONE AFTER
CLEANING WITH CATDUAV5
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : CREATE MANUFACTURING
PART REORDERS SOLID PARTBODY OPERATIONS
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : IGES3D EXPORT - NEED
TO USE SHORT MATERIAL-ID IN FILE NAMES
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : DXF EXPORT - NEED TO
USE SHORT MATERIAL-ID IN FILE NAMES
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : IGES2D EXPORT - NEED
TO USE SHORT MATERIAL-ID IN FILE NAMES
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : SOLID FROM PLIES NOT
CREATED IN INDUSTRIAL PART
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : PROBLEM WHEN
CREATING A MANUFACTURING DOCUMENT
COMPOSITE PARAMETER LINK STATUS ENOVIA
CATMATERIAL INCORRECT
COMPODSG : AN INTERNAL ERROR OCCURS WHEN
UPDATING
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : SOLID FROM PLIES
PRODUCES NO RESULT
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : DELETED PLIES FROM
COMPODSG BR10000054769 HD69087 PRIMARY PART ARE NOT DELETED IN SYNCHRONIZED GA
MIRROR PART
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : TOP SURFACE FROM PLIES
- FAILS BEFORE COMPLETION
COMP DSG / AN ERROR OCCURS WHEN OPEN PART IN
MD2 CONFIGURATION.
COMPOSITES (COMPO DESIGN) / DIRECTION OF 2D
FLATTENING IS DIFFERNT FROM 3D PLY.
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : DMU CURRENT
COMPODSG BR10000056481 HD70856 SELECTION DOES NOT ALLOW SELECTION OF PLY 3D GA
CONTOUR ONLY
COMPODSG BR10000056838 HD71225 COMPO DSG / CATIA ABENDS WHEN IMPORT PLY TABLE. GA
COMPODSG / COMPOSITE PARAMETERS LINK STATUS
NOT SHOWN CORRECTLY
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) / WRONG PLIES WHEN
CREATING COMPOSITE MANUFACTURING PART.
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG): REROUTE MATERIAL LINK
COMPODSG BR10000058239 HD72728 DOES NOT PROPERLY UPDATE THE LINK TO A GA
CATMATERIAL STORED IN ENOVIA.
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : CANNOT REVERSE
DRAPING DIRECTION OF A PLY
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : REORDERING SEQUENCES
COMPODSG BR10000058394 HD72893 IN AN ENGINEERING PART DOES NOT PROPAGATE TO GA
THE MANUFACTURING PART
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : CREATING PLY IN AN
COMPODSG BR10000058397 HD72894 ENGINEERING PART DOES NOT PROPAGATE TO THE GA
MANUFACTURING PART
COMPOSITE DESIGN / PLY EXPLODER WITH DRAPPED
TESSELLATED SURFACE GIVES INCORRECT RESULT.
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : CREATING PLIES IN NEW
COMPODSG BR10000058551 HD73056 SEQUENCES IN AN ENGINEERING PART DOES NOT GA
PROPAGATE TO THE MANUFACTURING PART
COMPOSITES (COMPODSG) : IML GENERATION FAILING
ON A CATPART
PART:MEASURE DISPLAYS INCORRECT VALUE IN
SPECIFICATION TREE.
COMPOSITE DESIGN / MATERIAL INFORMATION IS NOT
SHOWN WITH HD2 LICENSE.
THE SORT FUNCTION IN THE OPERATIONS PANEL IS
CONFIG BR10000050868 HD64765 GA
CURRENTLY NOT WO RKING AS DESIRED
WRONG EFFECTIVITY ASSIGNED WHEN REPLACE A NEW
CONFIG BR10000057949 HD72407 GA
REFERENCE
CORE_CAVITY: BOUNDING BOX: THE LINE CANNOT BE
CORECAVI BR10000052143 HD66242 GA
SELECTED IN BOUONDING BOX DEFINITION.
BUG INSIDE MKSTOOLKIT VERSION RECOMMENDED BY
CUT BR10000051422 HD65403 GA
DS
CUT BR10000052654 HD66796 MLKTRACKER ISSUE WITH MATERIAL CATALOG GA
STRING ATTRIBUTE ON ROBOT TASK / OPERATION DO
D5I BR10000057396 HD71811 GA
NOT WORK WITH RRS
PDF : COLOR ON FILLET IS LOST AFTER PRODUCT TO
DEC BR10000053175 HD67419 GA
PART FILTERING.
PDFR : FTA ELEMENTS ARE NOT FILTERED IN PART TO
DEC BR10000053450 HD67716 GA
PART FILTERING.
PDF: SOME ANNOTATIONS CHANGE AND/OR APPEAR BY
DEC BR10000053975 HD68286 GA
DATA FILTERING
PDF: PART TO PART: ANNOTATION POSITION MOVES
DEC BR10000053990 HD68302 GA
AFTER FILTERING
PDF: PRODUCT TO PART: GLOBAL RESULT OF COLOR IS
DEC BR10000054062 HD68371 GA
NOT KEPT AFTER FILTERING
PDF: PROPERTIES OF PRODUCT IS NOT KEPT WHEN
DEC BR10000054169 HD68511 GA
PRODUCT TO PRODUCT IS PERFORMED.
PDF: NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IS CHANGED AFTER PART
DEC BR10000054457 HD68775 GA
TO PART - DEACTIVATED FEATURE
PDF: ANNOTATION LINKS ARE BROKEN DURING THE
DEC BR10000054511 HD68829 GA
DATA FILTERING
PDF: PART TO PART: DIMENSION LINK IS BROKEN
DEC BR10000054517 HD68835 GA
AFTER TRANSFER
PDF: PART TO PART: COLOR ALSO CHANGES IF
DEC BR10000054516 HD68836 GA
OPACITY IS CHANGED FOR THE FILTERED PART
PDF A SKETCH IS LOST DURING DATA FILTERING
DEC BR10000054588 HD68908 GA
OPERATION
PDF: TRANSLATED FEATURES ARE LOST AFTER
DEC BR10000054656 HD68980 GA
FILTERING
PDF: PART TO PART: PARTICULAR ROTATE FEATURE IS
DEC BR10000054666 HD68985 GA
NOT TRANSFERED
DEC BR10000054755 HD69073 SOLIDS ARE NOT TRANSFERRED BY DATA FILTERING GA
PDF: AXIS SYSTEM IS LOST THROUGH DATA FILTERING
DEC BR10000054758 HD69074 GA
PROCESS
PDF: FILTERING OF HIDDEN DATA IS PROCESSED IN A
DEC BR10000054839 HD69165 GA
PRODUCT WHICH IS OPENED IN NEW WINDOW.
PDF: PART TO PART: AN UNNECESSARY CHARACTER IS
DEC BR10000054928 HD69255 GA
ADDED TO FTA DIMENSION AFTER TRANSFERING
PDF: DATA FILTERING WITH THE BATCH IS NOT
DEC BR10000055041 HD69370 GA
CORRECTLY PERFORMED
PDF: PART TO PART: SOME ELEMENTS ARE NOT
DEC BR10000055206 HD69549 GA
TRANSFERED
DATA FILTERING / CONSTRUCTION GEOMETRY LOST IN
DEC BR10000055315 HD69657 GA
PART TO PART COMMAND
FEAT_RECO : PART TO PART : DIMENSION IS CHANGED
DEC BR10000055440 HD69786 GA
AFTER PART TO PART TRANSFER MIGRATION
PDF: TWO ILLEGAL POINTS ARE CREATED DURING
DEC BR10000055648 HD70006 GA
FILTERING
PDF: TOP PRODUCT DISAPPEARS IF DATA FILTERING IS
DEC BR10000055672 HD70031 GA
PERFORMED BY BATCH WITH DATA JAPANESE PATH
DEC BR10000055754 HD70132 PDFR: FILLET FEATURE RECOGNISED INCORRECTLY GA
PDFR: PART ANALYSIS - COLOR SPECIFIED IN
DEC BR10000055826 HD70133 VARIABLE RADIUS FILLETS/ROUNDS IS NOT APPLIED GA
TO VARIABLE RADIUS FILLET.
UI: CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS ARE CHANGED AFTER
DEC BR10000055821 HD70166 GA
FILTERING
PDF: PRODUCT TO PRODUCT: SAVE MANAGEMENT
DEC BR10000055909 HD70283 SHOWS AS MODIFIED, JUST BY CHANGING FROM VISU GA
MODE TO DESIGN MODE
PDF: PART TO PART: UNNECESSARY INCORRECT
DEC BR10000055971 HD70357 GA
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
DEC BR10000056108 HD70483 PDF: DATA FILTERING REPORT NOT CLEAR GA
DEC BR10000056215 HD70586 PDF: PART TO PART: ERROR AFTER FILTERING GA
PDF: PART TO PART: SOME ELEMENTS ARE NOT
DEC BR10000056256 HD70635 GA
TRANSFERED
PDF: PART TO PART: PARTICULAR ROTATE FEATURE IS
DEC BR10000056265 HD70641 GA
NOT TRANSFERED
PDF: EXTERNSION OF CATPART FILE IS LOST BY
DEC BR10000056352 HD70733 GA
FILTERING.
PDF : PART TO PART : WHEN ATTRIBUTE LINK EDIT,
DEC BR10000056570 HD70951 GA
PART TO PART FILTERING CANNOT BE PERFORMED
PDF: ANNOTATION CREATED FOR THREAD HOLE WITH
DEC BR10000056642 HD71021 TECHNOLOGICAL RESULT BECOMES INVALID AFTER GA
TRANSFER.
FEAT RECOGNITION: SURFACIC TRANSLATE FEATURE
DEC BR10000056745 HD71127 GA
IS NOT TRANSFERRED WHILE FILTERING.
PDG : PART TO PART : VIEW IS NOT KEPT AFTER THE
DEC BR10000057010 HD71409 GA
PAT TO PART OPERATION
UI: THE DATA CREATED BY BATCH OF DATA FILTERING
DEC BR10000057018 HD71413 GA
OPENS IN DIFFERENT VIEW MODE EVERYTIME.
PDF: PART TO PART: THE POSITION OF DIMENSION
DEC BR10000057151 HD71547 GA
MOVES AFTER FILTERING
PDF: PART TO PART: PART CANNOT BE FILTERED 2
DEC BR10000057244 HD71656 GA
TIMES AND CATIA ABENDS
PDF: ERROR MESSAGE TO MODIFY IN ORDER TO
DEC BR10000057827 HD72275 GA
DISTINGUISH GS AND OGS
PDF: TEXT OF DIMENSION CHANGES AFTER DATA
DEC BR10000057917 HD72377 GA
FILTERING PROCESS.
PDF: EXTRA CONSTRUCTION GEOMETRY IS CREATED
DEC BR10000058033 HD72491 GA
BY FILTERING.
PDF: PART TO PART: SYMMETRY OF CLOUD IS NOT
DEC BR10000058123 HD72588 GA
TRANSFERED AFTER FILTERING
PDF: PRODUCT TO PRODUCT: WITH SPECIFIC
DEC BR10000058208 HD72700 GA
CATSETTINGS, CATIA CRASHES AFTER FILTERING
PDF: PART TO PART: SYMMETRY IS NOT TRANSFERED
DEC BR10000058227 HD72715 GA
AFTER FILTERING
PDF : PART TO PART : SPLIT SURFACE IS LOST AFTER
DEC BR10000058229 HD72718 GA
PART TO PART TRANSFER
PDF: PART TO PART: NON DISPLAYED ELEMENTS ARE
DEC BR10000058303 HD72741 GA
TRANSFERED BY FILTERING.
DEC BR10000058299 HD72770 SOME EDGE FILLETS ARE LOST AFTER DATA FILTERING. GA
PDF : PART TO PART : INCIDENT REPORT IS DISPLAYED
DEC BR10000058662 HD73166 AFTER PART TO PART TRANSFER THOUGH THE SKETCH GA
IS HIDDEN
PDF : PART TO PART : DATUM FEATURE IS MOVED
DEC BR10000058660 HD73168 GA
AFTER PART TO PART TRANSFER
PDF: PART TO PART: ALTHOUGH SHAPE IS NOT
DEC BR10000058669 HD73176 DISPLAYED, INCIDENT REPORT OF NO GEOMETRY IS GA
SHOWN AFTER FILTERING
FEAT RECOGNITION: ERROR IN FILTERING THROUGH
DEC BR10000058817 HD73333 GA
PART TO PART.
PDF: FILTERING CANNOT BE DONE ON NEW VIEW
DEC BR10000058977 HD73511 GA
FROM ELEMENT IN 2DL.
DEC BR10000059011 HD73513 PDF: SKETCH IS LOST AFTER FILTERING. GA
PDFR: ERROR WHILE DOING MANUAL FEATURE
DEC BR10000058990 HD73514 GA
RECOGNITION
PDF: PART TO PART: TEXT OF DIMENSION IS LOST
DEC BR10000059028 HD73557 GA
AFTER FILTERING
DEC BR10000059074 HD73609 PDF: PRODUCT TO PART/PART BODY IS NOT DISPLAYED GA
PDF: PART TO PART: INCIDENT REPORT IS DISPLAYED
DEC BR10000059114 HD73652 GA
AND FILTERING IS NOT PERFORMED
PDF: PRODUCT TO PRODUCT: UNNECESSARY INCIDENT
DEC BR10000059116 HD73654 GA
REPORT IS DISPLAYED FOR FTA TRANSFER
PDF: PART TO PART: UNNECESSARY INCIDENT REPORT
DEC BR10000059117 HD73655 IS DISPLAYED THOUGH FILTERING IS PERFORMED GA
CORRECTLY
DEC BR10000059140 HD73681 GA
AND UN-UPDATED PART IS CREATED AFTER TRANSFER
DEC BR10000059157 HD73699 GA
AND FILTERING IS NOT PERFORMED CORRECTLY
DEC BR10000059190 HD73723 GA
AND POINTS ARE NOT TRANSFERED
DEC BR10000059173 HD73733 GA
AND FILTERING IS NOT DONE PROPERLY
DEC BR10000059182 HD73741 GA
FOR FTA FDEATURES
PDF: PART TO PART: FILTERING NOT PERFOMED AND
DEC BR10000059228 HD73771 GA
INCIDENT REPORT IS DISPLAYED
PDF: ERROR MESSAGE NOT DISPLAYED WHEN MODEL
DEC BR10000059258 HD73809 GA
THAT IS LOST BY FILTERING IS MADE.
PDF: PART TO PART: ERROR MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
DEC BR10000059257 HD73811 AND MANY ELEMENTS ARE IN UN-UPDATED STATUS GA
AFTER TRANSFER
PDF: PART TO PART: A FEATURE IN OGS IS NOT
DEC BR10000059879 HD74244 GA
TRANSFERED
DEC BR10000059684 HD74256 PDF: SKETCH DISAPPEARS AFTER FILTERING. GA
PDF: PRODUCT TO PRODUCT: FILTERING IS NOT
DEC BR10000059722 HD74292 GA
PERFORMED FOR THE LIGHT PROTECTIVE COVERING
SKETCH IS NOT TRANSFERRED BY 'PART TO PART'
DEC BR10000060182 HD74770 GA
OPERATION
DEC BR10000060284 HD74879 PDF: CATIA CRASHES DURING FILTERING. GA
ERROR WITH GETMAXIMUMSIZE METHOD OF
DIALOG BR10000052464 HD66578 GA
CATDLGWINDOW
DMC BR10000055093 HD69422 CAA-RADE - HIDING RELATION (FORMULA) BUG GA
DMUFIT: BAD RESULT RETURNED IN THE EXCEL
DMUFIT BR10000057152 HD71550 FORMAT BY EDIT & PERFORM EXPERIMENT FUNCTION GA
OF DMU FITTING.
DMUFIT: SIMULATON MOTION IS NOT AT CONSTANT
DMUFIT BR10000057810 HD72251 GA
SPEED IF ONE SHOT POINT IS DELETED.
REMOVAL OF THE FUNCTIONALITY FROM THE 'SAVE'
DMUIMMER BR10000053219 HD67462 GA
MENU.
DMUKIN:AN ELEMENT CANNOT BE SELECTED FROM THE
DMUKIN BR10000054287 HD68615 GA
TREE WHEN CREATING JOINT.
DMUKIN:THE POSITION OF CATPARTS IS NOT RESET BY
DMUKIN BR10000054378 HD68691 'RESET POSITIONS' COMMAND AFTER KINEMATIC GA
SIMULATION. (HF12)
A MEASURE DISPLAY BECOMES HIDDEN WHEN
DMUKIN BR10000054427 HD68742 GA
KINEMATICS MECHANISM IS CHANGED.
DMUKIN:THE DISPLAY OF JOINTS VISUALISTION DOES
DMUKIN BR10000054495 HD68814 GA
NOT FOLLOW TO THE MOVEMENT.
DMUKIN:JOINT DIRECTION IS REVERSED USING
DMUKIN BR10000054881 HD69208 GA
SIMULATION WITH COMMAND IN KINEMATIC W/B.
DMUKIN: KINEMATICS UPDATE DOES NOT WORK WITH
DMUKIN BR10000055359 HD69688 GA
3D KINEMATICS.
DMUKIN BR10000055713 HD70082 DMUKIN:MECHANISM CAN NOT BE SIMULATED. GA
DMUKIN:AN ELEMENT CANNOT BE SELECTED FROM THE
DMUKIN BR10000055724 HD70096 GA
TREE WHEN CREATING JOINT.
DMUKIN: MEASURE BETWEEN TAKES LONG TIME TO
DMUKIN BR10000057009 HD71407 SELECT THE EDGES OR SURFACES FOR MEASURE GA
WHICH CAUSES LONG BUT NOT PERMANENT LOCKUP.
DMUKIN:CATIA ABEND WHEN 'MECHANISM' IS EDITED
DMUKIN BR10000057011 HD71408 GA
IN THE VISUALISATION MODE.
DMUKIN: CREATION OF EMPTY EXCEL SHEET WHEN
DMUKIN BR10000057075 HD71469 GA
EXPORTING DATA FROM DMU KINEMATICS.
WRONG VALUE OF ANGULAR SPEED WHEN USING THE
DMUKIN BR10000057123 HD71530 GA
SENSOR
DMUKIN: JOINTS IN THE MECHANISM GETS DELETED
DMUKIN BR10000057296 HD71707 GA
WHEN THE CATDUA IS EXECUTED.
DMUNAV:COORDINATE VALUE IS NOT REFLECTED
DMUNAV BR10000052476 HD66589 WHEN PLANE IS MOVED BY MOUSE IN THE SECTIONING GA
COMMAND
DMU NAV: A CATDRAWING AND A CGM SAVED FORM IT
DMUNAV BR10000052936 HD67155 ARE SHIFTED EACH OTHER WHEN CHECK BY THE ' GA
COMPARE DRAWING '
DMUNAV: SAVE AS FROZEN DOESNOT ALLOW THE
DMUNAV BR10000053018 HD67254 SAVE OF MODIFIED PARTS COMING FROM THE VPM IN GA
THEIR ORIGINAL DATABASE.
DMUNAV BR10000053140 HD67386 VIEW WITH NOTES DOES NOT REMAIN ON A SCREEN GA
FORBIDDEN NULL VOXEL SIZE VALUE AS DEFAULT
DMUNAV BR10000053333 HD67582 GA
VALUE ON A NEW INSTALLATION
DMUSPA:MEASURE BETWEEN RESULT IS WAITING FOR
DMUNAV BR10000053491 HD67760 GA
UPDATE JUST AFTER CREATION.
DMU : MEASURE BETWEEN : INCONSISTENT RESULT OF
DMUNAV BR10000054020 HD68337 GA
MEASURE BETWEEN COMMAND FROM R14 AND R17
UNABLE TO USE POSITIONAL TARGET WHEN
DMUNAV BR10000054114 HD68427 GA
SECTIONING APPLICATION IS REOPENED.
DMUNAV: THE SECTION RESULT OF TWO
DMUNAV BR10000054927 HD69253 INTERSECTING PLANER SURFACES IS CURVES SO GA
UNABLE TO MEASURE ANGLE BETWEEN THEM.
DMUNAV: IT TAKES LONG TIME TO ACTIVATE &
DMUNAV BR10000055005 HD69336 DEACTIVATE AN ENHANCED SCENE IF USER CREATE GA
MANY SECTIONS AS COMPARED TO R16.
PH1:PHOTO STUDIIO 1 INSTALLATION LICENC EIS NOT
DMUNAV BR10000055169 HD69501 GA
ADDED TO AD1 LICENCE.
DMUNAV:BOUNDARY OF THE GEOMETRY CAN BE SEEN
DMUNAV BR10000055348 HD69691 WHEN SELECTING THE INSERTED COMPOMENT (V4 GA
MODEL) ON THE SPECIFICATION TREE.
DMUNAV:CATDMUBUILDER UITILITY FAILS IF '/' GIVEN
DMUNAV BR10000055444 HD69785 GA
IN THE PART NAME.
DMUNAV : 'CTRL' KEY DOES NOT WORK WITH
DMUNAV BR10000055707 HD70075 GEOMETRICAL TARGET OPTION WHEN MOVING THE GA
CURSOR FOR SECTIONAL PLANE IN SECTION COMMAND.
DMUSPA:'MEASURE ITEM' IS NOT DISPLAYED BY THE
DMUNAV BR10000055919 HD70295 GA
EXPONENTIAL NOTATION'.
DMUSPA:MEASUREMENT RESULT IS NOT DISPLAYED
DMUNAV BR10000055926 HD70300 GA
ON AN ELEMENT.
DMUNAV: WHEN THE CAMERA IS PLAYED BY THE
DMUNAV BR10000056307 HD70692 SIMULATION PLAYER, THE CAMERA ROTATES ON THE GA
WAY.
DMUNAV: THE LINE CREATED BY THE MEASURE
DMUNAV BR10000056404 HD70762 BETWEEN RESULT DOES NOT GIVE THE SAME MEASURE GA
VALUE AS THE RESULT OF 'MEASURE BETWEEN' VALUE.
DMUNAV: THE LINE CREATED BY THE MEASURE
BETWEEN RESULT DOES NOT GIVE THE SAME MEASURE
DMUNAV BR10000056410 HD70764 GA
VALUE AS THE RESULT OF 'MEASURE BETWEEN' VALUE
- WIREF
DMUSPA:'MEASURE BETWEEN' DOES NOT MEASURE
DMUNAV BR10000056470 HD70849 GA
DISTANCE FROM THE CURVE.
DMUSPA: AUTOMATIC UPDATE IS NOT WORKING IN
DMUNAV BR10000056476 HD70857 THE SECTIONING COMMAND WHEN MODIFY CATPART GA
IN PRODUCT.
DMUNAV: THE RESULT OF THE MEASURE BETWEEN
DMUNAV BR10000056621 HD70990 GETS CHANGED BY THE SELECTION METHODS OF THE GA
ELEMENTS.
DMUSPA:THE MINIMUM DISTANCE IS 0MM WHEN
DMUNAV BR10000056624 HD70998 GA
SECTION ELEMENT IS MEASURED.
DMUOPT:CGR SAVED BY SILHOUETTE IS NOT
DMUNAV BR10000056627 HD71003 GA
INSERTED IN THE CORRECT POSITION.
DMUSPA:A MINIMUM DISTANCE DIMENSION IS NOT
DMUNAV BR10000056718 HD71099 GA
MEASRUED CORRECTLY.
INSERT AS EXISTING COMPONENT IS NOT POSSIBLE
DMUNAV BR10000057226 HD71629 GA
WITH PARTICULAR V4 MODEL
DMUNAV: MINIMUM DISTANCE CAN NOT BE MEASURED
DMUNAV BR10000057268 HD71677 GA
BY THE MEASURE BETWEEN COMMAND.
DMUSPA:PROBLEM WITH CAPTURE AND CAN NOT
DMUNAV BR10000057697 HD72130 GA
CAPTURE COMPARISION RESULT WINODW
CAPTURE WRONG WITH MATERIAL AND HIGHEST
DMUNAV BR10000057779 HD72216 GA
QUALITY.
DMUNAV: MINIMUM DISCTANCE IS NOT CORRECTLY
DMUNAV BR10000058057 HD72521 GA
MEASURED BY THE MEASURE BETWEEN COMMAND.
DMUNAV:AFTER INITIAL MOVE IS UNDONE.PART CAN
DMUNAV BR10000058081 HD72545 GA
NOT BE MOVED ANYMORE.
DMUNAV: CATIA FREEZES WHEN SELECTING TWO
DMUNAV BR10000058148 HD72617 GA
SURFACES FROM THE TREE USING MEASURE BETWEEN.
DMUNAV BR10000058338 HD72834 DMUSPA:TECH PACKAGE SCENES CANNOT BE VIEWED. GA
THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN EXACT MODE AND
DMUNAV BR10000058403 HD72896 GA
APPROXIMATE MODE ARE T OO LARGE
MEASURE ITEM RESULTS ARE DIFFERENT BETWEEN
DMUNAV BR10000058442 HD72944 GA
R17 AND R18
IN PAD AND POCKET COMMANDS THE MESAURE
DMUNAV BR10000058522 HD73021 BETWEEN FOR THE LENGTH IN NOT WORKING WITH GA
INCH UNITS
DMUNAV BR10000058737 HD73251 MEASURE CREATED FROM EXTRACTED FACES CAN GA
DMUNAV BR10000058746 HD73262 THE RESULT OF 'MEASURE BETWEEN' IS NOT CORRECT GA
DMUNAV: SECTIONING IN ASSEMBLY LEADS TO CATIA
DMUNAV BR10000058761 HD73263 CRASH WHEN A DRAWING IS OPENED GA
SIMULTANEOUSLY.
INFINITE MEASUREBETWEEN IS NOT MEASURING AS
DMUNAV BR10000058778 HD73293 GA
INFINITE PLANAR SURFACE
DMUNAV BR10000058798 HD73318 THE MEASUREMENT RESULT IS DIFFERENT GA
DMUNAV: THE MEASURE BETWEEN RESULTS DIFFERS
DMUNAV BR10000058822 HD73336 GA
BETWEEN R17 & R18.
DMUNAV BR10000058843 HD73363 DMUNAV:CATIA CRASHES FROM EXIT OF DMU VIEW. GA
DMUNAV:SAVE AS FROZEN FUNCTION NOT WORKING
DMUNAV BR10000058929 HD73458 GA
AS DESIGNED.
BAD IMPORT OF ANNOTATED VIEWS IN DMU
DMUNAV BR10000059004 HD73539 GA
NAVIGATOR
DMUNAV BR10000059073 HD73601 MEASURE BETWEEN 'KEEP MEASURE' WILL NOT UPDATE GA
DMUSPA:MEASURE BETWEEN RESULT IS WAITING FOR
DMUNAV BR10000059695 HD74265 GA
UPDATE JUST AFTER CREATION.
R17 PROJECT: DMU DOESN'T SAVE A .CATPART AS .
DMUNAV BR10000060096 HD74687 GA
MODEL
DMUOPT BR10000052647 HD66784 CRASH V5 AT MERGE/SAVE AS STL OF PRODUT OF CGR GA
DMUOPT: WRONG RESULT OF 3D CUT IN DMU WHEN
DMUOPT BR10000054733 HD69052 USING NEGATIVE VALUES IN 'EDIT POSITION & GA
DIMENSIONS'.
DMUOPT: THE POSITION OF THE DATA WHICH
DMUOPT BR10000056676 HD71057 CREATED BY FREE SPACE IS NOT RIGHT IF IT IS GA
INSERTED IN THE PRODUCT.
MEASURE BETWEEN : INCONSISTENT RESULTS WITH A
DMUSPA BR10000052921 HD67141 GA
SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT
THOUGH 1000MM SHOULD BE OBTAINED BY USING
DMUSPA BR10000053126 HD67368 MEASURE BETWEEN, 999 999MM IS OBTAINED GA
ACTUALLY
DMUSPA BR10000053367 HD67622 SECTION ARE NO MORE UPDATED LIKE IN R16 GA
DMU: MEASURE BETWEEN DOES NOT GIVE 0MM
DMUSPA BR10000054028 HD68344 GA
BETWEEN TWO INTERSECTED ELEMENTS
DMUSPA:SECTION DATA CANNOT BE DONE AND SAVE
DMUSPA BR10000054233 HD68550 GA
DONE WITH MODEL.
SHAPE OF THE SECTION DISAPPEAERS WITH CREATION
DMUSPA BR10000054263 HD68593 OF THE 2ND SECTION WITH VOLUME CUT AFTER GA
HIDING FIRST SECTION
DMUSPA BR10000054596 HD68924 THE MEASURING POINTS OF R16 AND R17 DIFFER GA
DMUSPA:THE COLOR OF THE PROPERTIES FOR THE
DMUSPA BR10000054937 HD69270 GA
SECTION CURVE IS INCORRECT.
DMUSPA BR10000055011 HD69340 DMU : RESULT OF MEASURE BETWEEN IS NOT CORRECT GA
DMUSPA: THE FILL AREA OF THE SECTION IS NOT
DMUSPA BR10000055422 HD69770 GA
CREATED CORRECTLY.
DMUSPA: THE MEASURE BETWEEN RESULT OF
DMUSPA BR10000055620 HD69975 GA
SPECIFICATION TREE & DIALOG BOX DIFFERS.
DMUSPA: THE CLASH RESULT IS NOT GIVEN
DMUSPA BR10000055885 HD70249 GA
CORRECTLY.
DMUSPA: RESET POSITION DOES NOT PERFORM FOR
DMUSPA BR10000056048 HD70427 GA
THE VOLUME CUT SECTION.
DMUSPA: THE MINIMUM DISTANCE ALONG Y CAN NOT
DMUSPA BR10000056945 HD71334 GA
BE MEASURED BY DISTANCE & BAND ANALYSIS.
PENETRATION MGT: QUERY PENETRATION FROM
DMUSPA BR10000056965 HD71356 ENOVIA DOES NOT WORK IN CATIA PENETRATION GA
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
DMUNAV:CRASH OF CATDMUBUILDER WITH SPECIFIC
DMUSPA BR10000057073 HD71472 GA
DATA.
DMUSPA:THE CLASH VALUE WHICH IS DISPLAYED IN
DMUSPA BR10000057486 HD71905 GA
'CLASH PUBLISH' IS NOT CORRECT IN XML GENERATED.
DMUSPA: SECTION DATA CANNOT BE SAVED AS MODEL
DMUSPA BR10000057494 HD71915 GA
IN DMU.
DMUSPA:'.MODEL' CANNOT BE SELECTED AS 'FILE
DMUSPA BR10000057549 HD71967 GA
TYPE'.
DMUNAV:CATDMUBUILDER UTILITY DOES NOT OUTPUT
DMUSPA BR10000057984 HD72441 GA
CATPRODUCT VERSION WHEN VERSION IS ---
THE CATDRAWING IS CREATED AS ANSI STANDARD
DMUSPA BR10000057988 HD72446 GA
WHEN SECTION IS EXPORTED AS CATDRAWING.
CATIA ABEND WHEN 'ANNOTATED VIEW' WAS
DMUSPA BR10000058058 HD72523 GA
CHANGED WITHOUT 'EXIT'
PREVIEW OF COMPARE PRODUCTS DOSE NOT WORK
DMUSPA BR10000058191 HD72673 GA
PROPERY.
DMUSPA: IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO MEASURE BY
DMUSPA BR10000058225 HD72713 GA
MEASURE BETWEEN WITH THE PICKING POINT.
DMUNAV: WRONG POSITION OF THE FILE WITH
DMUSPA BR10000058406 HD72917 GA
SPATIAL QUERY WITH ACCURACY 20MM
DISTANCE AND BAND ANALYSIS SAVED AS MODEL ON
DMUSPA BR10000058432 HD72932 GA
WINDOWS XP IS NOT TO OPEN WITH WINDOWS XP.
DMUNAV: EXPLANATION ABOUT THE MEASURE
DMUSPA BR10000058622 HD73922 GA
BETWEEN COMMAND IS WRONG
DMUSPA: SECTION DATA CAN NOT BE CREATED
DMUSPA BR10000058643 HD73148 PROPERLY WHEN SECTION IS EXPORTED AS 'MODEL' GA
OR 'CATPART'.
WINDOWS CLASH SERVER- 3 DIFFERENT
DMUSPA BR10000059845 HD74423 ENOVIACLASHSERVER.EXE PROCESSES ARE RUNNING GA
FOR SINGLE SIMPLE CLASH ANALYSIS PROCESS
WINDOWS CLASH SERVER : NO SUCCESSFUL MESSAGE
DMUSPA BR10000059847 HD74424 FOR SIMPLE CLASH ANALYSIS IS RECEIVED IN GA
INTERACTIVE CLASH ANALYSIS.
WINDOWS CLASH SERVER- AFTER 1ST ANALYSIS, IF
DMUSPA BR10000059849 HD74425 WE LAUNCH 2ND ANALYSIS IT APPEARS HANGED IN GA
CONSOLE.
WRONG TRANSLATION OF ONE DMU SECTIONING
DMUSPA BR10000060120 HD74711 GA
OPTION ON JAPANESE LANGUAGE.
DMU2D:CATDRAWING IS NOT DISPLAYED BY USING
DMUTOL BR10000055030 HD69347 GA
'INSERT 2D DOCUMENT' IN DMU 2D VIEWER W/B.
DOCUMENTATION: GSD: NO DETAILED INFORMATION
DOC BR10000052019 HD66108 GA
ABOUT CONICAL REFLECT LINE
DOCUMENTATION : ALBUM : CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP
DOC BR10000053233 HD67482 FOR TOOLS, IMAGE, ALBUM COMMAND DOES NOT GA
WORK
DOCUMENTATION: F1 HELP ON SKETCHER FUNCTION
DOC BR10000054227 HD68551 GA
HYPERBOLA CREATES AN ERROR
DOC : PDIR NEEDS TO BE UPDATED FOR AIX PRE
DOC BR10000054921 HD69247 GA
REQUISITES
DOCUMENTATION: DMU NAVIGATOR: LINK BREAK
DOC BR10000055232 HD69574 GA
OCCURS WHEN SAMPLE DATA IS OPENED
DOC : PDIR NEEDS TO BE UPDATED FOR AIX PRE
DOC BR10000055842 HD70214 GA
REQUISITES
DOCUMENTATION : DIGITAL RIGHT MANAGEMENT IS
DOC BR10000056793 HD71172 GA
NOT DESCRIBED BY DOCUMENTATION
WHEN A WORK PACKAGE IS VERSIONED, THE NEW
DOCDIREC BR10000052193 HD66300 GA
BOM REPORT IS NOT G ENERATED
THE CHILD UNIQUE PART REFERENCES / DOCUMENTS
DOCDIREC BR10000052530 HD66654 INCLUDING CATSHA PES OF A WORK PACKAGE ARE GA
NOT DELETED WHEN A WORK PACKAGE IS DELETED
DOCDIREC BR10000052887 HD67106 EV5 ITERATION RULES DO NOT WORK FOR CV4 MODELS GA
FILE INTROSPECTION: IN SPITE OF SETTING AN
OPTION, WIREFRAME IS NOT CREATED IN CGR.
IMPOSSIBLE TO UPDATE A CONFIGURATION HANDLER
UNDER A PRC
LCA CLASSIC SHOWS WRONG PREVIEW WHEN
SELECTING NON-PREFERRED DOCUMENT ITERATION
FILE INTROSPECTION: REGENERATE FORMATS UTILITY
SPAWNS TOO MANY REGENERATIONS
PREFERRED ITERATION MISMATCH BETWEEN
DOCDIREC BR10000057560 HD71988 'DOCUMENT REVISION' AND 'DOCUMENT ITERATION' GA
OBJECTS
PREFERRED ITERATION MISMATCH BETWEEN
DOCDIREC BR10000057742 HD72169 'DOCUMENT REVISION' AND ' DOCUMENT ITERATION' GA
OBJECTS - PART 2
GERMAN CATNLS FILE NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT
WHEN ENGLISH CATNLS FILE PRESENT
WHEN 'REFRESH FROM DATABASE' IS USED WITHIN
DOCDIREC BR10000060122 HD74710 THE PRODUCT EDITOR THERE IS AN EXPANSION OF GA
THE PRODUCT STRUCTURE
CHECKIIVALIDITY DOES NOT GIVE THE CORRECT
RESULT
DOM BR10000056778 HD71156 V5 CRASH IN WELD STUDY. GA
MULTIPLE PARAMETER VALUES AREN T DISPLAYED
DOM BR10000057042 HD71435 GA
PROPERLY
DOM BR10000057116 HD71518 CORE DUMP WHEN CONVERTING PRODUCT TO 3DXML. GA
PRODUCT BECOMES TO THE STATE OF 'HIDE' FOR
DOM BR10000057440 HD71853 GA
WELD STUDY.
IF THE ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE OF VBO IS USED, THE
DOM BR10000058278 HD72763 GA
MEMORY INCREASES SIGNIFICANTLY B
REFRAME ON GEOMETRY POINTFACE WILL NOT
DPMASM BR10000052791 HD66991 GA
REFRAME WHEN USED FROM THE PPR TREE.
2D ANNOTATED VIEWS NOT AVAILABLE IN DPM APS
DPMASM BR10000053926 HD68245 GA
WORKBENCH
DPMASM BR10000054009 HD68320 WRONG FAST CLASH DETECTION WITH DELMIA APS GA
ANCHORING PT OF 3D TXT WORK INSTRUCTIONS NOT
DPMASM BR10000054458 HD68776 GA
FOLLOWING LEADER LINE WHEN ROTATING
CROSS HIGHLIGHTING PERFORMANCE IN PROCESS
DPMASM BR10000054577 HD68897 GA
VERIFICATION - THIS IS FOR R18SP1
PROCESS VERIFICATION DOES NOT ADHERE TO
DPMASM BR10000054640 HD68956 GA
VIEWING OPTIONS SET IN THE TOOLS OPTIONS
VIEWING OPTIONS SET IN THE TOOLS OPTION FOR
DPMASM BR10000055191 HD69533 GA
LOD WHILE ZOOMING IN AND OUT
DPMASM BR10000055618 HD69970 SNAP COMMAND AND LINES OF TRIANGLE PATCH GA
WHILE PART SELECTION IS EXECUTED, WE CANNOT
DPMASM BR10000055651 HD70018 GA
INPUT 'DEPTH EFFECT' VALUE.
DPMASM BR10000055726 HD70097 BEHAVIOR CREATED UNDER STATION COULD NOTSAVE. GA
IF THE PPRHUB DATA IS LOADED WITHOUT THE
DPMASM BR10000055733 HD70106 GA
FILTER, THE PRODUCT IS NOT LOADED.
THE BEHAVIOR OF VISUALIZATION SETTINGS(LOD AND
DPMASM BR10000055737 HD70109 GA
PIXEL CULLING) IS DIFFERENT BETWE
THE INTERFERENCE LINE AND THE DISTANCE CAN NOT
DPMASM BR10000055928 HD70303 GA
BE DISPLAYED.
DPMASM BR10000055927 HD70304 ESCAPING A SNAP DIALOG GA
CLASHED PARTS ARE NOT DISPLAYED IN 'CHECK
DPMASM BR10000055929 HD70305 GA
CLASH' WINDOW
CAN NOT DISPLAY DISTANCE OF ANALYSIS ON MULTI-
DPMASM BR10000055955 HD70333 GA
VIEW.
DPMASM BR10000055957 HD70335 CAN NOT PUT COMPASS ON DISTANCE OF ANALYSIS GA
AFTER I MADE THE MOVE ACTIVITY WITH ASSIGNED
DPMASM BR10000055958 HD70336 GA
SECTION, I REVERSED THE PROCESS. IF
V5 CRASHES WHEN SWITCHING FRAME MODE IN IK
DPMASM BR10000056275 HD70650 GA
BEHAVIOR
IF DATA IS SAVED AFTER A COMMAND IS EXECUTED,
DPMASM BR10000056312 HD70697 GA
THE MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED.
UNASSIGNED ENGINEERING INTENT (EI) DISPLAY
DPMASM BR10000056381 HD70757 GA
WHEN RUNNING PROCESS VERIFICATION
DPMASM BR10000056471 HD70851 SPECIFIC DATA AND PERFORMANCE PROBLEM GA
EVEN IF WE OPEN THE PRODUCT DATA, AN INCIDENT
DPMASM BR10000056489 HD70869 GA
REPORT RELATED TO INITIAL STATE IS
PART SELECTION WINDOW EXPERIENCING PROBLEMS
DPMASM BR10000056581 HD70969 GA
WITH THE DISPLAY OF PARTS
PREVIEW WILL CORRUPT WHEN CHANGING
DPMASM BR10000056639 HD71017 GA
CONFIGURATION IN 'MULTI-VIEW CUSTOMIZATION'
RESET ALL FILTERS BUTTON IN DPM IS DELETING
DPMASM BR10000056732 HD71115 GA
ACTION/MOD STATEMENT
THE INTERFERENCE LINE AND THE DISTANCE CAN NOT
DPMASM BR10000056739 HD71120 GA
BE DISPLAYED.
DPMASM BR10000056947 HD71341 USERTECHS GET LOST. GA
DPMASM BR10000057045 HD71440 PROBLEM ON DEVICE MOVE FEATURE GA
WHEN RESOURCE VERIFICATION IS STARTED WITH
DPMASM BR10000057077 HD71475 GA
SYSTEM EDITOR OPENED, THE COLOR OF
DPMASM BR10000057159 HD71528 VOLUME FILTER REFERENCE PRODUCT NOT SAVING GA
IMPROPER 'REFRAME ON' BEHAVIOR WITH
DPMASM BR10000057156 HD71556 GA
ASSIGNMENT ASSISTANT
NOT POSSIBLE TO HAVE INTEGRATION BETWEEN
DPMASM BR10000057227 HD71634 GA
DELMIA V5 AND SMARTEAM
HUMAN TASK SIMULATION AND FEATURE/PRODUCT/
DPMASM BR10000057318 HD71723 GA
DEVICE SELECTION MODE
DPMASM BR10000057323 HD71735 CANNOT SUBSCRIBE HUMAN TASK WITH 3D_STATE. GA
DPMASM BR10000057455 HD71873 V5 FREEZES WHEN WE RUN THE SIMULATION GA
INSTANTIATE FROM TEMPLATE FUNCTION WILL NOT
DPMASM BR10000057889 HD72332 GA
INSERT AN OPERATION OR RESOURCE
DELMIA ASSEMBLY SIMULATION DETACH FROM OBJECT
DPMASM BR10000057997 HD72455 GA
DOES NOT WORK
DPMASM BR10000058048 HD72510 AXIS SENSOR RECORDING CAPTURES 0 DEG GA
TEMPORARY FILTER CREATED IN DPM AND CONTAINS
DPMASM BR10000058114 HD72563 GA
SPACES CANNOT BE MODIFIED IN DPE
V5 IS TERMINATED WHEN EXCUTING PROCESS
DPMASM BR10000058243 HD72731 GA
VERIFICATION AFTER DELETING CONTROL FLOW
DPMASM BR10000058420 HD72918 GHOST LINKE IN PROJECT GA
V5 IS CRASHED WHEN CREATE SHOT IN DISTANCE
DPMASM BR10000058805 HD73321 GA
MODE.
DPMASM BR10000058910 HD73431 NOT POSSIBLE TO CREATE PERSONAL FILTERSETTINGS GA
INSTANTIATE FROM TEMPLATE FUNCTION WILL NOT
DPMASM BR10000058975 HD73506 GA
INSERT AN OPERATION OR RESOURCE
AFTER LOADING AN E5-GRAPHIC INTO V5 THE LABELS
DPMASM BR10000059342 HD73896 GA
ON THE PARTS ARE MISSING.
SCALABILITY OF 'COMPARE PRODUCTS' WINDOW NOT
DPMASM BR10000059450 HD74008 GA
POSSIBLE
INSERTING A INTERFERENCE ZONE AFTER AN ACTION
DPMASM BR10000059475 HD74030 GA
DOES NOT WORK AS EXPECTED
UNASSIGNED ENGINEERING INTENT (EI) DISPLAY
DPMASM BR10000059525 HD74085 GA
WHEN RUNNING PROCESS VERIFICATION
OPTIMIZED VISU MODE IS NOT WORKING BASED ON
DPMASM BR10000059540 HD74098 GA
ATTRIBUTE 'GRAPHICNAME'
RESTORE SELECTED DESIGN STATES - SELECTED
DPMASM BR10000059904 HD74481 GA
PARTS ARE NOT POPULAT ED IN DIALOG BOX
DPMBIW BR10000056182 HD70559 CACHE IS NOT ACCURATELY LOADED. GA
DPMBIW BR10000056486 HD70867 WRONG BEHAVIOUR OF INTERFERENCE ZONES. GA
DPMBIW BR10000057647 HD72063 WELD GUN SEARCH' COMMAND LOCKS GA
UPDATE ISSUE IN V5 PPR TREE AFTER CREATING 3D
DPMBIW BR10000057688 HD72116 GA
POSITION
TOOLBAR POSITION FOR WORKBENCHES IS NOT
DPMBIW BR10000057761 HD72194 GA
SAVED CORRECT
DPMBIW BR10000057767 HD72200 COPY RESOURCE ALSO RENAMES CHILD OBJECTS GA
REGARDING 'REMOVE NON-ASSIGNED FASTNERS'
DPMBIW BR10000057823 HD72262 GA
OPTION
UI LIMITIATION OF 30 CHARATERS FOR RESOURCE
DPMBIW BR10000058178 HD72657 GA
NAME
NO UPDATE AFTER CHANGING ATTRIBUTES IN V5 PPR-
DPMBIW BR10000058232 HD72719 GA
NAVIGATOR
MULTI-SELECTED ICONS ARE POSTIONED ON THE
DPMBIW BR10000058262 HD72752 GA
SAME LOCATION IN SYSTEM EDITOR
POINT IS SELECTED IN THE TREE BUT DOES NOT
DPMPLAN BR10000054231 HD68553 GA
HIGHLIGHT IN THE GRAPHICS VIEW
2ND & 3RD LEVEL OUT OF SYNC ASSEMBLIES RESULT
IN NO INSTANCE DATA FOR SOME PARTS
CROSS-HIGHLIGHTING IN PROCESS VERIFICATION
SOMETIMES NOT ACCURATE
PRODUCTDATAGEN FAILS FOR SOME PRCS WITH SKIP-
SESSION-CLOSE TURNED ON
PV DOES NOT WORK IN APP WORKBENCH FOR SHIP
BUILDING SOLUTION
EXPERIENCING FATAL ERRORS WHEN IMPORTING DATA
INTO PROJECT
IF SUPPORT ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS OF OPTION
IS CHECKED AND V5 IS RESTARTED, IT
DPMPLAN BR10000056637 HD71015 SYSTEM TERMINATED WHEN TRYING TO SAVE A FILTER GA
INVALID CONTAINER ERROR WHEN SAVING MFG ASSYS
IN V5 & MAS NOT SAVED
CORE DUMP WHEN USING VOLUMETRIC FILTER
FUNCTION.
CORE DUMP WHEN USING VOLUMETRIC FILTER
FUNCTION IN WINDOWS X64 MACHINE.
LIST ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES OF PRODUCT BUTTON
NOT CORRECT WHEN CLICKING ON A PART
WHEN RUNNING FULL BRIDGE IMPORTS, RECEIVE
LOGIN FAILURES OR CAN'T START THREAD
WARNING MESSAGE WHEN OPENING MCM PROJECT/
USABILITY ISSUE IN E5/V5 'OPEN PROJECT'
DPMPLAN BR10000059142 HD73673 3D STATE IS NOT LOADED FROM MANUFACTURING HUB GA
SECTION 47 FAIL INCREMENTAL EXPORT BECAUSE OF
BROKEN CHILD INSTANCE IN ENOVIA
SEQUENCE ASSISTANT DOESN T WORK PROPERLY
DPMPWRTN BR10000056272 HD70555 GA
WITH KNOWLEDGE CHECK
V5 DOES ABEND WHEN THE CUSTOMER OPENS
DPMPWRTN BR10000056779 HD71149 GA
CATPROCESS WHICH COPIED MORE THAN ONE CATP.
DPMPWRTN BR10000056819 HD71202 DPM MACHINING PROCESS PLANNER BUG GA
DPMPWRTN BR10000058867 HD73391 COREDUMP DURING GENERATE IPM GA
DPMSTRU BR10000056485 HD70865 GIRTH TAPE OUTPUT FILE LIMITATION GA
DPMSTRU BR10000058144 HD72613 MARGIN CREATION ON COPED FACES FAILS GA
PROCESS VERIFICATION, PARTS WILL BE HIDDEN OR
DPMWKI BR10000053786 HD68089 GA
SHOWN AT THE START DEPENDING ON
DPM WORK DOES NOT ALLOW USER TO CLOSE TEXT
DPMWKI BR10000053878 HD68196 GA
WINDOW RUNNING PROCESS VERIFICATION
3D PTA CHANGES LOCATION AFTER SAVING AND RE-
DPMWKI BR10000054363 HD68673 GA
OPENING AN IP
A WAY TO IMPROVE OR ADJUST THE QUALITY OF THE
DPMWKI BR10000057832 HD72278 GA
JPEG THUMBNAILS USED IN GWI?
A WAY TO IMPROVE OR ADJUST THE QUALITY OF THE
DPMWKI BR10000059445 HD73999 GA
JPEG THUMBNAILS USED IN GWI?
WE CANNOT GET THE CORRECT SELECTIONSET
DRAFTINT BR10000051330 HD65292 GA
ELEMENT
CATDRAWING: VISUALIZATION FILTERS ARE NOT
ALWAYS RETRIEVED SUCCESSFUL
IN CATIA R17 SP06 (DRAFTING WORKBENCH)
DRAFTINT BR10000055931 HD70307 PARAMETERS ATTACHED TO A PICTURE ARE NOT GA
ACCESSIBLE ANYMORE
DRAFTINT BR10000056503 HD70889 CORE SAMPLE OPERATOR ISSUE GA
WE CAN NOT RETRIEVE SOME VISIBLE OBJECTS USING
DRAFTINT BR10000056674 HD71055 CATIINISEARCHENGINE::GETFOUNDOBJECTS WITH GA
'VISIBLEONSCREEN'
PROBLEME DE LINSPIRE DU USE CASE
DRAFTINT BR10000056780 HD71130 CAAPSTPROVIDERS, CET DERNIERE NE FONCTIONNE GA
PAS NON PLUS (VOIR DESCRIPTIF EN BAS).
WHEN WE CREATE A SPLINE IN LARGE DATA, A
CONSUMPTION OF THE MEMORY GROWS LARGE.
DRAFTINT BR10000056935 HD71326 UNDO DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY GA
ECV DOES NOT CALCULATE THE CORRECT PERCENT
ELECCABR BR10000055749 HD70122 GA
FILL FOR MCT PENET RATIONS
ELECDIAG BR10000056045 HD70424 SOCKET FUNCTION ERROR ON HARD-WIRED CABLES GA
WIRES MANAGEMENT USER-INTERFACE COLUMN
ELECDIAG BR10000060205 HD74796 GA
MISALIGNMENT
ELECTRICAL (EFD) - MANUALLY ADDING PINS TO AN
ELECFUNC BR10000054947 HD69278 ELECTRICAL FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM SYMBOL LEADS TO GA
ABEND CLICK OK TO TERMINATE
ELECTRICAL (ELEC ASSEMBLY DESIGN) / CANNOT
ELECFUNC BR10000055692 HD70063 GA
CONNECT ELECTRICAL DEVICES IN CACHE MODE
ELECTRICAL (ELECLIB) / REFERENCE DESIGNATOR
ELECFUNC BR10000057470 HD71893 GA
FIELD RELOCATED IN ELECTRICAL PROPERTY PANEL
ELECTRICAL ( EHI ) - ABEND WHEN EDITING ROUTE OF
ELECHARN BR10000051380 HD65353 GA
BUNDLE
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / AFTER CONSTRAINED LENGTH
SETTING BACK TO SLACK MODE RESULT OF
COMPUTATION CANNOT BE DONE WITH FLEX
ALGORITHM
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / AN UPDATE ERROR OCCURS EVEN
ELECHARN BR10000053555 HD67830 AFTER THE RELATED MULTIBRANCHABLE IS GA
DEACTIVATED.
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO MOVE THE
ELECHARN BR10000053945 HD68259 START EXTREMITY TO A LOCATION THAT IS NOT GA
BETWEEN THE START AND END EXTREMITY
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / UNABLE TO REMOVE CLAMP FROM
BNS ROUTE DEFINITION.
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / AN ERROR OCCURS IN ONE OF THE
ELECHARN BR10000054082 HD68395 BUNDLE SEGMENTS WHILE PERFORMING FLATTENING GA
OPERATION.
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / ERROR MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
ELECHARN BR10000054109 HD68420 AFTER A LONG TIME AFTER PERFOMING GA
SYNCHRONIZATION THUS FAILING SYNCHRONIZATION.
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / AN ERROR OCCURS WHILE
ELECHARN BR10000054119 HD68430 FLATTENING RESULTING IN THE FAILURE OF GA
FLATTENING.
CBD : LIVRAISON INTERFACES CAA POUR
PARTENARIAT AVEC ZUKEN
ELECTRICAL (EWR) - FILTERING WIRES BASED ON
EXTERNAL CONFIGURATION SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL (EXTREF) / CYCLE ISN'T DETECTED WHEN
ELECHARN BR10000054351 HD68661 SELECT POINT WITH EXT REFERENCE FOR ROUTING ON GA
BUNDLE ROUTE DEFINITION.
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - ARRANGE BUNDLE SEGMENTS
PROPAGATE DOES NOT WORK
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / WHEN A ROTATE COMMAND IS
PERFORMED ELECTRICAL SOFTWARE ERROR OCCURS.
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / QUICK ROLL CANNOT BE
ELECHARN BR10000054573 HD68892 PERFORMED WITH SMALL ROLL RADIUS, EVEN THOUGH GA
SMALLER BEND RADIUS VALUE OPTION ON
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / AUTOMATIC WITH SAFETY MARGIN
ELECHARN BR10000054673 HD68990 GIVES INCONSISTENT RESULT IF PROTECTION OF GA
DIFFERENT THICKNESS EXIST
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - RETAINER SUPPORT DOES NOT
WORK CORRECTLY
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / NO WARNING MESSAGE IS
ELECHARN BR10000055038 HD69367 DISPLAYED WHEN UPDATING A WRONG BUNDLE OUT GA
OF THE EHA WORKBENCH.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - BUNDLE SEGMENT BE BROKEN
WHEN ROUTE DEFINITION IS EDITED
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / UNABLE TO REMOVE CLAMP FROM
BNS ROUTE DEFINITION.
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / INSPITE OF RUNNING
ELECHARN BR10000055196 HD69539 SYNCHRONIZE, CHANGE OF BRANCHES IS NOT APPLIED GA
TO FLAT MODEL.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / THE ROUTING POINT OF THE
ELECHARN BR10000055199 HD69540 BRANCHABLE IS ON THE SURFACE EVEN THOUGH THE GA
OFFSET VALUE IS AUTOMATIC
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / SYNCHRONIZE TAKES A LONG
TIME TO COMPLETE
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / SPECIFIC BACKSHELL IS NOT
PORJECTED IN DRAWING
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - PROBLEM TO CREATE BUNDLE
SEGMENT WITH EXTERNAL REFERENCE
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / CURVED SHAPE AFTER ROTATING
FLATTENED BUNDLE
ELECHARN BR10000055324 HD69664 ELECTRICAL (EHA) - SOME LINKED PLACE IS WRONG GA
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - BEND CURVE COMPUTATION
ERROR BY SPLIT OPERATION
ELECHARN BR10000055353 HD69697 ELECTRICAL (EHF) / ROTATE COMMAND ERROR GA
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / CURVED SHAPE AFTER ROTATING
FLATTENED BUNDLE
ELECTRICAL - PRODUCT DATA DOES NOT OPEN IN
VISUALIZATION MODE
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / WHEN ELECTRICAL LINK IS LOST,
ELECHARN BR10000055725 HD70098 RELINK OPERATION IS TIME CONSUMING - NEED GA
FUNCTION SIMILAR TO NETWORK ASSISTANT ON R1
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL DATA IS
OPENED SWITCHED TO DESIGN MODE.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / NAME PROBLEM OF BUNDLE
SEGMENT ON REPLACE OF POINT
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / NO WARNING MESSAGE IS
ELECHARN BR10000055847 HD70223 DISPLAYED WHEN UPDATING A WRONG BUNDLE OUT GA
OF THE EHA WORKBENCH.
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / SPECIFIC CONNECTOR IS
INCLINED ON FLATTENING
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / EDIT/PROPERTIES OF BUNDLE
SEGMENT LACKS LENGTH INFORMATION
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / START AND END POINTS IN THE
ELECHARN BR10000055952 HD70330 BUNDLE SEGMENT DEFINITION DIALOG BOX DO NOT GA
SHOW CORRECT NAMES
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / SPLIT GENERATES NEW BUNDLE-
SEGMENT INSTEAD OF BRANCHABLE
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / PRESELECTED DATUM CURVE IS
ELECHARN BR10000055954 HD70332 NOT SET AS EXTERNAL CURVE IN THE BRANCH GA
DEFINITION DIALOG BOX
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / AFTER DELETING SPLICE AND
ELECHARN BR10000055976 HD70361 PLACE IT AGAIN ON 3D HARNESS, THE GA
SYNCHRONIZATION OF FLATTENING DOES NOT WORK
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / THE POINT SHOULD NOT BE
CREATED IN THE ELECROUTEBODY WHEN SELECTING A
VERTEX OF A LINE AS ROUTING OBJECT OF
BRANCHABLE
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / BUNDLE CAN BE CREATED, IF NON-
PUBLISHED ELEMENT IS PRE-SELECTED
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / BRANCHABLE SWITCHES TO
REGULAR SPLINE AFTER FLATTEN COMMAND
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / WHEN '3D HARNESS MODEL' IS
MODIFIED AND A 'FLATTENING MODEL' IS
SYNCHRONIZED, PART OF MODEL IS DISTORTED IN
THE FLATTEN.
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ARE
ELECHARN BR10000056304 HD70683 LOST WHEN PLACING SAME PART NUMBER CONNECTOR GA
USING THE MANAGE LINKS FUNCTION
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - BUNDLE SEGMENT IS BROKEN BY
ADD A BRANCH POINT
ELECHARN BR10000056395 HD70787 ELECTRICAL (EHF) FLATTEN ERROR IS DISPLAYED GA
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - NO LINK IS CREATED BETWEEN
EXTERNAL CURVE AND BRANCHABLE
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / SPECIFIC BACKSHELL IS NOT
PORJECTED IN DRAWING
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / NON EXISTING BNS ARE
DETECTED BY KWE AND CAA.
MOUNTING EQUIPMENTS ARE NOT FILTERED OUT FROM
HARNESS
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - THE SEGMENT GEOMETRY OF THE
BRANCH IS WRONG BY ADD BRANCH POINT
ELECTRICAL (EHF) - ELECTRICAL SOFTWARE ERROR
INSIDE THE FLATTEN COMMAND
ELECTRICAL (EHF) - ROTATE COMMAND DOES NOT
ELECHARN BR10000056981 HD71378 WORK FOR A BUNDLE SEGMENT WITH A PROTECTION GA
WHICH COVERS A BRANCH.
ELECHARN BR10000057007 HD71405 BAD BEHAVIOUR OF FDBI ON RENAMED REFERENCE GA
THE PROTECTION CANNOT BE GOTTEN FROM THE
BUNDLE
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - AFTER APPLYING THE COMMAND
ELECHARN BR10000057263 HD71669 IGNORE SLACK TO A SEGMENT THE FLEXIBLE CURVE GA
OT THE SEGMENT WILL BE DEFECT
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / WHEN ROUTING A BUNDLE TO
ELECHARN BR10000057413 HD71831 SUPPORTS OUTSIDE THE GBN, SUPPORTS NO LONGER GA
SELECTABLE
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / WRONG SYNCHRONIZATION OF
ELECHARN BR10000057531 HD71961 ADDED/DELETED WIRES IN EWR NODE IN FLATTENING GA
ELECTRICAL CATPRODUCT
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - ABEND DURING BUNDLE CREATION
- PROBLEM SPECIFIC SUN
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / AFTER ROUTING WIRE, BEND
RADIUS RATIO VALUE CHANGES
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / ONE OF THE BUNDLES IN THE
ELECHARN BR10000057605 HD72042 ASSEMBLY BECOMES LOOP SHAPE WHEN MAKING IT GA
FLAT.
API CATIEHIBUNDLESEGMENT LISTLINKEDSUPPORTS
DOES NOT LIST ALL SUPPORTS
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / CATIA ABENDS IF START
EXTREMITY OF PROTECTION IS EDITED
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - PARTS CHANGE FROM
VISUALIZATION REPRESENTATION TO BREP MODE
WHEN MOUSED OVER IN ELECTRICAL WORKBENCH
ROUTE DEFINITION WIN
ELECHARN BR10000057711 HD72141 ELECTRICAL (EHI) / CANNOT COPY ELECTRICAL CURVE GA
ELECTRICAL (EHA) BUNDLE SEGMENT LENGTH OF
PROPERTIES IS WRONG
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / DMENSIONS OF EXTREMITY IS NOT
DISPLAYED WHEN PROTECTIVE COVERING IS EDITED
ELECHARN BR10000057798 HD72242 CONTEXTUAL LINK ARE NOT KEPT ON PART OUT OF VPM GA
ELECTRICAL (EHI) /PROTECTION LENGTH IS CHANGED,
EQUIVALENT_MASS NOT CHANGED
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - UPDATE ERROR WHEN UPDATING
THE DATA AFTER DELETING BRANCHABLE
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - WHEN CREATE OR MODIFY
BUNDLE, CHOICE IS NOT PROPOSED ON LINK CREATION
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / ERROR DUE TO THE CLEANING
WITH CATDUA.
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - END EXTREMITY OF PROTECTIVE
COVERING IS DEFINED IN WRONG POSITION
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / WHEN VALUE OF END EXTREMITY
ELECHARN BR10000057953 HD72410 OF LIGHT PROTECTIVE COVERING IS CHANGED , LIGHT GA
PROTECTIVE COVERING CAN NOT BE CREATED
ELECTRICAL (EAD) / GHOST LINK IS GENERATED IF
ELECHARN BR10000058006 HD72463 DRAG/DROP THE CONNECTOR TO SUB-PRODUCT AFTER GA
PLACING THE CONNECTOR FROM CATALOG
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / WHEN THE VALUE OF PARAMETER
ELECHARN BR10000058085 HD72546 (IN GEOMETRICAL AREA) IS CHANGED THE VALUE OF GA
'LIGHT PROTECTIVE COVERING ' IS NOT UPDATED IM
ELECTRICAL (EHA) - CATIA ABEND IN PROTECTIVE
COVERING WHEN START EXTREMITY IS EDITED
WHEN THE 'CONNECTOR' IS EDITED , THE STATE OF
ELECHARN BR10000058186 HD72667 GRAPHICS OF 'FL EXIBLE CURVE' IS CHANGED TO GA
DEFAULT
ELECTRICAL ( EHI ) - BUNDLE WHICH INVOLVED IN AN
UPDATE CYCLE CAN BE MADE
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / LENGTH TOLERANCE FEATURE IS
NOT HIGH-LIGHTED ON SELECTING BRANCHABLE
ELECTRICAL (EHF) - WHEN ROTATE FUNCTION IS
PERFORMED, KNOWLEDGE REPORT IS DISPLAYED
ELECTRICAL (EWR) - SUPPORTS AND MOUNTING
EQUIPMENTS ARE NOT CORRECTLY FILTERED
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / WRONG SETTING OF THE VALUES
IN THE STEP FOR BUNDLE SEGMENT.
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / WRONG SETTING OF MULTIPLE
VALUES IN A BUNDLE SEGMENT.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / UNABLE TO SELECT SUPPORT OUT
OF THE GEOMETRICAL BUNDLE CONTEXT
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / UPDATE IS SUGGESTED FOR THE
PROTECTION OF R17 IN R18
ELECTRICAL CATSCRIPT GIVES TWO DIFFERENT
RESULTS IN BATCH MODE AND INTERACTIVE MODE
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / LINK DOES NOT WORK FOR A
SPECIFIC BUNDLE.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / BUNDLE SEGMENT CANNOT BE
SELECTED BY THE PUBLICATION LANGUAGE.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / SELECTION IS POSSIBLE EVEN IF
ELECHARN BR10000059102 HD73641 PROTECTION INNER DIAMETER IS LESS THAN THE GA
BUNDLE
INTEROP VPM - CATIA V5 (ELECTRICAL) - CANNOT
ELECHARN BR10000059212 HD73748 VISUALIZE HARNESS IN CATIA V5 WHEN OPENED FROM GA
VPM VEHSYS NODE.
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / MFPARAMETER REMAINS IN
GEOMETRY AREA AFTER UNDO
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / PROTECTION DIAMETER ERROR
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED 3 TIMES
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / SYNCHRONIZE EXTRACT
ELECHARN BR10000059453 HD74012 PROCESSING NEEDS A LOT OF TIME AS COMPARED TO GA
NEW FROM EXTRACT PROCESSING.
UNABLE TO CREATE SECOND BRANCHABLE THROUGH
SUPPORTS
ELECTRICAL CATSCRIPT GIVES INCORRECT RESULTS
WHEN CACHE IS ACTIVATED (VISUALIZATION MODE)
ELECTRICAL (EHF) / CONNECTOR DOES NOT FOLLOW
ELECHARN BR10000059576 HD74137 FLATTEN CORRECTLY AND CONNECTOR IS ADDED GA
NEWLY AT THE TIME OF SYNCHRONIZE
ELECTRICAL (EHI) - AN OPTION ICON OVERLAPS AND
ELECLIBR BR10000051430 HD65416 GA
IS DISPLAYED
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / CANNOT DISCONNECT OR
CONNECT ELECTRICAL DEVICES
ELECTRICAL (EHA) : IMPOSSIBLE TO RECONNECT TWO
DISCONNECTED DEVICES
ELECTRICAL (EHA) / CONSTRAINT ICON COLOR IS
BROWN WITH NO ERROR
ELECTRICAL (EHI) / THE DEVICE USED BEFORE IS
INSERTED FROM CATALOG
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / PERFORMING ANY OPERATION ON
ELECWIRE BR10000054110 HD68421 GA
A WIRE TAKES LONG TIME.
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / CATIA ABENDS ON AUTOMATIC
WIRE ROUTING COMMAND
ELECTRICAL (EWR) - WRONG CALCULATION OF
DIAMETER AFTER WIRE ROUTING
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / 'NOT CONNECTED' IS DISPLAYED
ELECWIRE BR10000055222 HD69566 WHERE EXTREMITY OF BUNDLE SEGMENT DOES NOT GA
EXIST
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / NETWORK ASSISTANT:
ELECWIRE BR10000055417 HD69759 'CONNECTED AT DIFFERENT POSITION' INDICATE GA
WRONG PLACE BY YELLOW LINE
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / IF ROUTING IS NOT EXECUTED
TWICE, ROUTING CANNOT BE DONE.
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / AFTER ROUTING, SOME WIRES DO
NOT HIGHLIGHT
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / MESSAGE DISPLAYED FOR THE
NETWORK ASSISTANT ERROR IS INCOMPREHENSIBLE.
ELECTRICAL CABLE ROUTING REVISIONING
FUNCTIONALITY
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / WIRE AND WIRE GROUP ROUTING
ELECWIRE BR10000057800 HD72236 DIALOG BOX AND AUTOMATIC WIRE ROUTING REPORT GA
DOES NOT SHOW SAME NUMBER OF NEW WIRES
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / SOME HIDDEN 'CONNECTED AT
DIFFERENT POSITION' ARE NOT MAGENTA COLOR
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / AUTOMATIC REPAIR SHOULD NOT
BE DONE IF DISTANCE IS MORE THAN 0.001MM
ELECTRICAL (EWR) / MESSAGE DISPLAYED FOR THE
NETWORK ASSISTANT ERROR IS INCOMPREHENSIBLE.
ENOVWPE : UNABLE TO USE GLOBAL SET
ENOVWPE BR10000056368 HD70738 GA
FUNCTIONALITIES THROUGH THE RECONCIALIATOR.
ENOVWPE BR10000057353 HD71758 ENOVWPE : LOCK ON PRC AFTER RECONCILE GA
NEED SQL FIX FOR APPROVED WPREPORT LINKED TO 2
ENOVWPE BR10000057879 HD72333 GA
BLACK BOXES
STANDARD ATTRIBUTE ONLY DISPLAYS ASTL UNDER
EQT BR10000054618 HD68944 GA
EQUIPMENT TAB IN PROPERTIES PANEL
EQT BR10000055517 HD69865 ATS ATTRIBUTES FOR EQUIMENTS GA
NOMINALSIZE AND NOMINALSIZE2 NOT DISPLAYING IN
EQT BR10000058045 HD72502 GA
THE EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES PANEL
EV5INFRA BR10000054129 HD68442 R17 SSO NOT WORKING GA
ON REPLICATED DATA WITHOUT OWNERSITE
EV5INFRA BR10000055486 HD69833 AUTHORITY , IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO CREATE NEW GA
REFERENCE OF DOCUMENT
ENOVIA CLASSIC CLIENT - 3D VIEWERS GENERAL
EV5INFRA BR10000057429 HD71841 GA
INSTABILITY
WHEN RUNNING THE CATPDMEXTRACTEV5BATCH THE
EV5INFRA BR10000058437 HD72934 PASSWORD IS DISPLA YED TO ANYONE BY JUST GA
RUNNING THE COMMAND PS -EF | GREP PWD
EV5INFRA BR10000058515 HD73012 CANNOT INSTALL SSO USING DS DOCUMENTATION GA
SQL GENERATOR FOR MULTI-ROW ENOVIA QUERIES
EV5INFRA BR10000059125 HD73663 GA
NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY
MISSING JAVA CLASSES WHEN USING REPORTING
EV5PRINT BR10000057775 HD72204 GA
FUNCTION WITH HTML FROM XML STYLE
FTA (PART) / ERROR IS DISPLAYED WHEN UNDO REDO
FDT BR10000043466 HD60783 GA
UNDO ARE PERFORMED.
FTA (PART) / CONSTRUCTED GEOMETRY (PLANE)
FDT BR10000051342 HD65310 GA
CANNOT BE RECONNECTED AFTER PART MODIFICATION
FTA (PRODUCT) - WHEN ADDING CONNECTION TO
FDT BR10000051358 HD65333 GA
DIMENSION, ERROR MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
FTA: LINEAR DIMENSION RELATED TO ORIGIN IS NOT
FDT BR10000052197 HD66302 GA
DISPLAYED WHEN SOLID EDGE IS AN ARC
FTA: DIMENSION IS CREATED AT THE NON SELECTED
FDT BR10000052343 HD66455 GA
PART INSTANCE
FTA (PART) - DIMENSIONS IS NOT CREATED ON THE
FDT BR10000053409 HD67670 GA
CLICKED POSITION
FTA (PART) / THE ANNOTATION IS HIGHLIGHTED IN
FDT BR10000053637 HD67919 GA
THE 3D VIEW BUT NOT IN PPR TREE
FTA (PART) / DATUM ELEMENT LEADER IS
FDT BR10000053972 HD68278 GA
INCORRECTLY POSITIONED.
FTA (PART) / LINEAR SIZE DIMENSION NOT POSSIBLE
FDT BR10000054097 HD68410 IN CASE OF TWO PARALLEL LINE IN TWO DIFFERENT GA
SKETCH
FTA (PART) / WHEN A SHAPE IS SELECTED FROM THE
FDT BR10000054167 HD68490 GEOMETRY AREA, 'LINEAR DIMENSION RELATED TO GA
ORIGIN CREATION' ICON ISN
FTA (PART) / SWITCH TO PERPENDICULAR LEADER IS
FDT BR10000054316 HD68629 GA
NOT SHOWN ON CREATION OF SIMPLE DATUM
FTA (PART) / DIMENSION IS NOT CREATED FOR THE
FDT BR10000054354 HD68665 GA
FIRST SELECTION AFTER REPETATION OF CATDUA.
PART (FTA) / MISSING OPTION FOR GEOMETRIC
FDT BR10000054462 HD68783 GA
FEATURE TYPE FOR SEMANTIC TOLERANCING ADVISOR.
FTA (PART) - CATIA ABEND WHEN THE POSITION OF
FDT BR10000054671 HD68992 GA
DIMENSION IS CHANGED
FTA (PART) / NOA MOVED OUT OF POSITION WHEN
FDT BR10000054738 HD69060 GA
DRAGGED.
FTA (PART) / NOTE FROM CATALOG IS NOT CREATED
FDT BR10000054805 HD69134 GA
AT CURSOR POSITION.
FTA (PART) / SEMANTIC DIMENSION IS NOT CREATED
ON EXISTING PLANE USING VOLUME EXTRUDE
FDT BR10000054828 HD69157 GA
CIRCULAR EDGE BUT POSSILE FOR SKETCH CIRCULAR
EDGE
FTA (PART) / PARENTHESIS OF SEMANTIC DIMENSION
FDT BR10000055010 HD69339 GA
SHOULD NOT BE DELETED
FTA (PART) / 3D ANNOTATIONS HIGHLIGHT DOES NOT
FDT BR10000055039 HD69361 GA
CLOSE WITH 'X' BUTTON.
FTA (PART) / NOA INSTANCE SHIFTS ON ACTIVATION
FDT BR10000055049 HD69383 GA
OF PARALLEL TO SCREEN OPTION
FTA (PART) / ORIENTATION OF DIMENSION VALUE AND
FDT BR10000055088 HD69416 ANNOTATION TEXT ARE NOT SAME AFTER MODIFYING GA
THE ANGLE OF ROTATION.
FTA (PART) / DATUM TARGET CAN NOT BE CHANGED
FDT BR10000055122 HD69454 GA
TO 'NO SYMBOL'
FTA (PART) / CATIA ABEND ON CREATION OF
FDT BR10000055290 HD69631 GA
DIMENSION.
FTA (PRODUCT) / ORIENTED LINEAR DIMENSION
FDT BR10000055421 HD69761 CANNOT BE CREATED BETWEEN A LINE AND A CURVED GA
FACE.
FTA (PRODUCT) - DIMENSION IS DEPARTING FROM
FDT BR10000055728 HD70101 GA
CURSOR
FTA / CAN NOT EDIT CONSTRUCTED GEOMETRIES ON
FDT BR10000055761 HD70143 GA
HP_UX
FTA / ICON MISSING IN THE SPECIFICATION TREE OF
FDT BR10000055766 HD70144 GA
NOTES ON ATTRIBUTES.
FTA / CATIA ABENDS WHEN MOVE CURSOR ON
FDT BR10000055777 HD70145 SPECIFICATION TREE AFTER CLICKING TEXT WITH GA
LEADER COMMAND.
FDT BR10000055781 HD70159 FTA / LARGE MEMORY CONSUMED WHEN EXIT CAPTURE. GA
FTA / PROBLEM WHEN NAVIGATE IN CATALOG
FDT BR10000055782 HD70169 GA
BROWSER
FTA / DIMENSION COLOR IS NOT SAME WHEN CREATED
FDT BR10000055800 HD70181 GA
FOR 2ND TIME
FTA (PART) / APPEARANCE OF DIAMETER SYMBOL
FDT BR10000055828 HD70191 GA
WHILE EDITING THE GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCES.
FTA (PRODUCT) / FTA DOES NOT RESPECT ASME_3D
FDT BR10000055852 HD70226 GA
STANDARD IN SUB-PRODUCT
FTA (PART) / WRONG BEHAVIOR OF THE COOPIED
FDT BR10000055913 HD70285 GA
GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCE.
FTA / ANNOTATION VIEW WHICH IS NOT SET ACTIVE
FDT BR10000056074 HD70447 GA
BECOMES ACTIVE.
FTA (PART) / GEOMETRICAL REPRESENTATION OF
FDT BR10000056193 HD70569 THREAD' CREATED ON R17 AND OPENED ON R18 IS GA
INCORRECT
FTA (PART) / SOME ANNOTATIONS LOSE THEIR
FDT BR10000056382 HD70759 ASSOCIATION WITH THE REFERENCED GEOMETRY GA
WHEN A PARTICULAR CAPTURE IS DISPLAYED.
FTA (PART) / DIFFERENCE IN THE COLOUR OF SECTION
FDT BR10000056744 HD71128 VIEWS WITH THE 3D-ANNOTATION-QUERY SWITCH ON/ GA
SWITCH OFF.
FTA (PART) / TOLERANCE BOX JUMPS WHEN
FDT BR10000056770 HD71147 GA
DIMENSION IS MOVED
FTA (PART) / UNDO ICON IS ACTIVE, THAT DOES NOT
FDT BR10000056805 HD71186 GA
FUNCTION EFFECTIVELY
FTA (PART) / WRONG REPRESENTATION OF
FDT BR10000056858 HD71244 GA
ANNOTATION.
FTA - CPU LOOP WHEN 'UNDER GEOMETRIC NODES'
FDT BR10000056889 HD71267 GA
OPTION IS SELECTED
FTA (PART0 / THE ANNOTATION IS NOT CHANGED TO
FDT BR10000057202 HD71604 GA
REPLACED ELEMENT
FTA (PRODUCT) / POSITION OF DIMENSION IS NOT
FDT BR10000057233 HD71640 GA
MOVED WHEN ASSOCIATED GEOMETRY IS MOVED
FTA / JOIN OPERATION WITH FEDERATED SURFACES
FDT BR10000057347 HD71761 NEEDS TO BE USED TO ATTACH ANNOTATION TO THE GA
DESIRED SURFACE
FTA (PART) / WRONG REPRESENTATION OF THE
FDT BR10000057557 HD71977 GA
CAMERA IN CAPTURE OPTIONS.
PRODUCT FUNCTIONAL TOLERANCING AND
FDT BR10000057564 HD71993 ANNOTATION: PERFORMANCE PROBLEM WHEN GA
ACCESSING CAPTURE EDIT MODE
FTA: ONLY SELECTED ANNOTATION CANNOT BE
FDT BR10000057681 HD72110 GA
MIRRORED WITH MIRROR ANNOTATION COMMAND
V4 FD&T ELEMENTS DISPLAY INCORRECTLY WHEN
FDT BR10000057777 HD72215 GA
VIEWED IN V5
FTA / FOR A LARGE PRODUCT MEMORY USAGE IS TOO
FDT BR10000057805 HD72237 GA
HIGH
FTA / POWERCOPY OF ANNOTATION IS NOT ADDED TO
FDT BR10000057799 HD72238 GA
CURRENT CAPTURE
FTA (PRODUCT) / CATIA ABENDS WHILE EXIT FROM
FDT BR10000057816 HD72261 GA
THE CAPTURE.
FDT BR10000057996 HD72454 OK TO TERMINATE AND NOT SEEING THE GEOMETRY GA
FTA : CATIA FREEZE WHEN CREATING A NEW CAPTURE
FDT BR10000058266 HD72755 GA
ON A SPECIFIC CATPART
FTA: RUNNING CATDUA RESULTS IN ANNOTATIONS TO
FDT BR10000058346 HD72831 GA
GET DISPLACED
FTA/ FRONT VIEW IS NOT CREATED AT THE SAME
FDT BR10000058429 HD72927 GA
POSITION AS SELECTED AXIS SYSTEM
FTA - DIMENSION ANGLE DOES NOT CHANGE WHEN
FDT BR10000058536 HD73036 GA
CHANGE VIEW SUPPORT IS PERFORMED
FTA: DIMENSIONS MISPLACED - APPEARING OUT IN
FDT BR10000058614 HD73122 GA
SPACE AFTER CREATION
FTA/ WHEN DIMENSION IS SELECTED RELATIVE
FDT BR10000058774 HD73282 GA
GEOMETRY NOT CORRECTLY HIGHLIGHTED
FTA / POSITION AND VALUE OF FTA DIMENSION IS
FDT BR10000058934 HD73465 GA
CHANGED BY DRAGGING
FTA / WHEN MEASURE IS FORCE UPDATED THE STATUS
FDT BR10000058937 HD73469 OF MEASURE IS SET TO NOT UPDATED IN GA
SPECIFICATION TREE
3D FTA : STANADARD OF LINE THICKNESS IS
FDT BR10000059051 HD73585 INHERITED BY STANDARD TEXT THICKNESS : 3 GA
OPTIONS INSTEAD OF 55
FTA (PART) / DIMENSIONS MOVE WHEN CHANGE VIEW
FDT BR10000059119 HD73656 GA
SUPPORT IS PERFORMED.
FTA/ DISPLAY IN 3D OPTION NOT WORKING FOR
FDT BR10000059138 HD73682 GA
SPECIFIC CAPTURE
FTA/ RANGE OF FRONT VIEW DOESNOT FIT ALL
FDT BR10000059331 HD73886 GA
ANNOTATION
FTA / VIRTUAL BYTES CONSUMPTION SUDDENLY
FDT BR10000059571 HD74133 GA
INCREASES ON SOME EXIT CAPTURE.
FTA/ MEASURE RESULT CHANGED EVEN IF PART
FDT BR10000059739 HD74316 GA
STATUS UNUPDATED
FTA/ MEASURE RESULT IS INCONSISTENT EVEN IS
FDT BR10000060000 HD74586 GA
STATUS OF PART IS UNUPDATED
FTA / THE COLOR OF A PART OF SURFACE IS CHANGED
FDT BR10000060345 HD74948 GA
WHEN STARTING "CAPTURE"
FSS:DISTANCE ANALYSIS: DISTANCE ANALYSIS GIVES
FREEFSHP BR10000051394 HD65367 GA
WRONG RESULT
FSS: WARM START - DATA IS NOT RESTORED
CORRECTLY AFTER WARM START IS PERFORMED.
FREESTYLE: MATCH CONSTRAINT ONLY SHOWS ZERO
DEVIATION FROM G0 TO G3
FSS : 3D CURVE : DEFINITION OF 3D CURVE
DEVIATION IS APPLIED TO OTHER EXISTING 3D CURVE
FSS - WHEN 3D CURVE PASSES THROUGH ORIGIN
FREEFSHP BR10000054809 HD69141 POINT, POSITION OF SELECTED POINT CANNOT BE GA
MOVED.
PASTE SPECIAL : AS SPECIFIED IN PART DOCUMENT
OPTION IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR 3D CURVE
FSS: DISTANCE ANALYSIS - MAX VALUE IS CHANGED
WHEN TEXTURE OPTION IS ACTIVATED.
FSS: ISOPARAMETRIC CURVE - WHEN CURVE IS MADE
WITH POINT ON EDGE, CATIA ABENDS.
FSS : DISPLAY OF DISTANCE ANALYSIS IS NOT
SUFFICIENT
FSS: THE GHOST ELEMENT APPEARS WHEN 'UNDO/
REDO' IS PERFORMED
FSS: VERY LARGE SEGMENTATION IS CREATED
AUTOMATICALLY.
FSS: WHEN NEXT VIEW COMMAND IS PERFORMED
CATIA IS TERMINATED.
FSS : DISTANCE ANALYSIS RESULT IS NOT DISPLAYED
PROPERLY WITH THE SAME COLOUR
FSS: NEW CONNECT CHECKER DOES NOT FIND GAPS
AND CREASES BETWEEN SURFACES
FSS: PORCUPINE ANALYSIS - CURVATURE AMPLITUDE
AND PARAMETER IS NOT DISPLAYED.
FSS: BAD QUALITY SURFACE IS CREATED USING NET
SURFACE TOOL.
FREEFSHP BR10000057380 HD71797 FSS : CAN NOT MOVE CONTROL POINT GA
FSS: PORCUPINE ANALYSIS - CURVATURE AMPLITUDE
AND PARAMETER IS NOT DISPLAYED.
FSS : MAX DEVIATION VALUE OF STYLING SWEEP IS
NOT KEPT
FSS: PORCUPINE CURVATURE ANALYSIS: NO
INFLECTION POINTS CREATED
FSS : PORCUPINE ANALYSIS RESULT DISAPPEARS
FREEFSHP BR10000057728 HD72159 FROM GEOMETRIC AREA WHEN UNDO / REDO IS GA
REPEATED
FSS : CONNECT CHECK DOES NOT RETAIN THE SET
MAXIMUM GAP VALUE
FSS : ABEND BY SELECTING THE EDGE OF THE SOLID
WHEN CREATING STYLING EXTRAPOLATE
FSS : DISTANCE ANALYSIS : CATIA CRASHES DURING
DISTANCE FUNCTIONALITY RUNNING POINT OPTION
FSS: INCORRECT TANGENT DIRECTION OF THE BLEND
SURFACE CREATED.
FSS: FREESTYLE DISTANCE ANALYSIS DOES NOT
UPDATE INTERACTIVELY IN R18.
FSS : ORDER OF CURVE CAN NOT EDIT THROUGH
CONTEXTUAL MENU
FSS : ORDER OF SURFACE EDGE CAN NOT EDIT
THROUGH CONTEXTUAL MENU
FMP: IF SNAP LOCK IS CREATED BY CANTILEVER LOOP,
FUNMOLDP BR10000053187 HD67437 ANGLE-INSERTION, ANGLE OF CATCH TAB DIFFERS GA
FROM ANGLE OF SHAPE CREATED.
FMP: THICKNESS IS CREATED ALTHOUGH 'USE
FUNMOLDP BR10000053456 HD67720 FEATURE THICKNESS' IS SELECTED WHEN CUTTING GA
FEATURE WITHOUT A THICKNESS VALUE
FMP: LIP RESULT IS WRONG WHEN CLEARANCE IS 1MM
FUNMOLDP BR10000053851 HD68169 GA
FOR PARTICULAR CATPART
FUNMOLDP BR10000054429 HD68745 FMP: UNABLE TO CREATE A SHELL GA
FMP: THE STATUS OF THE INTERSECTION RADIUS
FUNMOLDP BR10000054717 HD69035 OPTION DEPENDS ON THE SELECTION OF THE SHAPE GA
DEFINITION ONCE IT IS ON.
FMP : CORE : STRANGE YELLOW SURFACE THAT LOOKS
LIKE THE CORE APPEARS
FMP - EDITING SHELL PROPERTY CAUSES PART TO
BECOME INVISIBLE.
FMP: UNABLE TO CREATE A UDF CONTAINING A
FUNCTIONAL SOLID SET OR FEATURE.
FUNMOLDP BR10000058549 HD73048 FMP: REVOLVE ANGLE VALUE IS INCORRECT. GA
FMP: PARENT CHILDREN INFORMATION NOT AVAILABLE
FOR INTERNAL IMPORT.
FMP : ABEND WHILE SELECTING FACE FROM SPECIFIC
CATPART
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / SOME DIMENSIONS WITH
GENDRAFT BR10000051159 HD65085 INTERSECTION POINT DETECTION TURN FUCHSIA ON GA
UPDATE INSIDE DETAIL VIEW
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME INFORMATION IS
GENDRAFT BR10000051724 HD65759 MISSING IN THE BILL OF MATERIAL NEWLY INSERTED GA
IN THE DRAWING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT): ERROR DETECTED BY CATDUA
GENDRAFT BR10000052048 HD66141 GA
AFTER PERFORMING SMARTEAM SAVE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / A LINE DISAPPEARS WHEN
GENDRAFT BR10000052052 HD66144 ITS COLOR IS MODIFIED (ANTI-ALIASING SETTING IS GA
CHECKED)
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - WHEN THE TYPE OF A
GENDRAFT BR10000052099 HD66198 PATTERN IS CHANGED INTO NONE FROM HATCHING, GA
THE DISPLAY OF VIEW FRAME IS INCORRECT
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / NON-ASSOCIATIVE
GENDRAFT BR10000052284 HD66391 DIMENSION FOR SECTION CUT OF EXTRACTED GA
SURFACE FROM A FILLETED PART FACE.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CREATION OF PROJECTION
GENDRAFT BR10000052468 HD66582 POINT WRONGLY CREATES ISO-CONSTRAINT ON MULTI GA
INSTANCE OFFSETTED SPLINE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME OF THE PART EDGES
GENDRAFT BR10000052685 HD66848 ARE NOT PROJECTED IN THE DRAWING BUT APPEAR AS GA
HIDDEN WHEN HIDDEN LINES OPTION IS ACTIVATED.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / IMPORT OF SVG FILE INTO
CATIA RESULTS INTO A CORRUPTED DISPLAY OF THE
FILE WHEN USING GERMAN FRENCE OR SPANISH
LOCALE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATDUAV5 FAILS TO CLEAN
GENDRAFT BR10000052882 HD67102 THE GHOST LINK IN THE DRAWING WHICH IS CREATED GA
AFTER SAVING A PART BY RENAMING IT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / GHOST LINKS OCCURS ON
RENAME PARTS DURING SAVE MANAGEMENT
GENDRAFT BR10000052970 HD67195 DRAFTING: THREADS NOT SEEN IN UNFOLDED VIEW GA
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - SOME HIDDEN LINES MOVE
TO HIDE AFTER UPDATE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) VIEW NOT UPDATEABLE ANY
MORE AND/OR IMPOOSSIBLE TO OPEN IT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - DIMENSION IS SUDDENLY
UPDATED AFTER 3D MODIFICATION
GERMAN CATIA UNDER AIX: PROBLEMS WHEN USING
THE COMMA DECIMAL SEPARATOR
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - AREA FILL MOVES TO
ANOTHER AREA IF CHANGE DIMENSION PARAMETER
GENDRAFT BR10000053473 HD67739 DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / OFFSET WORKS WRONGLY. GA
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CHAMFER DIMENSION LEADER
TWO PARTS HAS UNUSUAL DISPLAY
DXF (DXFCAT) - WRONG HATCH ANGLE AFTER DXF
IMPORT
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG DISPLAY OF SPLINE
IN APPROXIMATE VIEW DISPLAY MODE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / A APPROXIMATE DISPLAY OF
SPHERICAL SURFACE IS NOT DISPLAYED CORRECTLY.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / FILLET CREATED IS NOT
TANGENT TO ONE OF THE SELECTED EDGES.
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ VIEW FRAME EXTENDS WHEN
GENDRAFT BR10000053845 HD68158 'HATCHING' PATTERN TYPE IS CHANGED TO 'NONE' IN GA
PROPERTIES.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - BAD PERFORMANCE OF
GENDRAFT BR10000053843 HD68160 DRAWING GENERATION WITH TECHNOLOGICAL GA
RESULTS
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / PART WILL NOT PROJECT
CORRECTLY IN DRAWING. SOME EDGES ARE MISSING
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THREAD DIMENSION IS NOT
GENDRAFT BR10000054151 HD68473 DISPLAYED CORRECTLY FOR A STANDARD THREADED GA
HOLE DEFINED AS UDF.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CIRCLE SHAPE PROJECTED
GENDRAFT BR10000054179 HD68491 ON DRAWING IS SWITCHED TO NO SHOW, AFTER GA
UPDATE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THE MODEL CANNOT BE
GENDRAFT BR10000054199 HD68513 PROJECTED ON A DRAWING WHEN IS PERFORMED TO GA
THE VOLUME
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / AN OFFSET SPACE IS
DIFFERENT BY COMMANDS
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CIRCLE USING CORDINATE
NOT SHOWING CORRECT LINE THICKNESS
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / IMPROPER SELECTION OF 2D
COMPONENTS BY RECTANGLE SELECTION TRAP.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) FRONT VIEW NOT GENERATED
CORRECTLY USING CACHE MANAGEMENT.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / SOME OF THE MULTI
DIMENSION LINES DO NOT MATCH TO ALREADY
EXITING DIMENSIONS LINE AFTER LINE UP OF
DIMENSIONS.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / THERE IS A DIFFERENCE
BETWEEN THE RESULTS OF CHAINED DIMENSIONS
COMMAND AND DIMENSIONS COMMAND WHEN LINE-
UP IS PERFORM
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / DEACTIVATION OF MOVE
GENDRAFT BR10000054409 HD68733 DIMENSION LEADER WHILE CHANGING THE GA
DIMENSION LINE TO LEADER ONE PART.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / AREA FILL IS NOT CREATED
CORRECTLY.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN ANGLE VALUE
FOR DIFFERENT POSITION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS ON VIEW
FROM 3D CREATION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - WHEN CATDUA (CHECK) IS
PERFORMED, THE ELEMENT IN VIEW DISAPPEAR
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WHEN THE CREATE DETECTED
GENDRAFT BR10000054647 HD68963 CONSTRAINT OPTION IS ACTIVATED AND WHEN GA
CORNER IS OFFSET BY 0MM, SHAPE WILL CHANGE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THE VALUE INPUTTED INTO
GENDRAFT BR10000054649 HD68964 DRIVE DIMENSION IS IGNORED AND A WRONG VALUE GA
IS DISPLAYED.
DRAFTING : THICKNESS : DEFINED THICKNESS NOT
TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT FOR IG2 FILE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS WHILE
CREATING SPECIFIC OFFSET SECTION VIEW.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN
GENDRAFT BR10000054780 HD69098 REPRESENTATION OF GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCE FOR GA
DIFFERENT VALUE SCALE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - PIPE IS NOT PROJECTED
CORRECTLY WITH EXACT MODE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / MOVING OF DIMENSION FOR
SURFACE PROJECTION CHANGES THE DIMENSION
VALUE & TURNS THE DIMENSRION INTO NOT-UP-TO-
DATE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CANNOT SHOW THE LETTERS
GENDRAFT BR10000054882 HD69210 IN THE TABLE WHEN CHANGING TO SHOW MODE FROM GA
SWAP VISIBLE SPACE
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / UPDATE ERROR ON DELETING
SPECIFIC VIEW
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / GHOST LINK IS GENERATED
AFTER REPLACING A PART
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / IMPOSSIBLE TO MODIFY
GENDRAFT BR10000054983 HD69314 LOWER LINES OF GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCES ON GA
DELETION OF THE IN BETWEEN LINE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN
GENDRAFT BR10000054994 HD69323 REPRESENTATION OF THE CORNER FOR SECTION CUT GA
PROFILE FOR DIFFERENT METHOD OF GIVING RADIUS.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / PROJECTION VIEW NOT
CREATED PROPERLY USING APPROXIMATE MODE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CENTER LINES WITH
GENDRAFT BR10000055006 HD69338 REFERENCE ON THREADED HOLES ARE LOST AFTER AN GA
UPDATE
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / AREA FILL IS WRONGLY
MODIFIED IF VIEW SCALE CHANGED.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / DIMENSION VALUE CHANGES
GENDRAFT BR10000055050 HD69384 FOR PROJECTED DIMENSION ON MOVING IT IN GA
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL DIRECTION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / UPDATION OF SHEET DUE TO
GENDRAFT BR10000055077 HD69397 ADDITION OF TEXT ON CATPART IN VIEW FROM 3D GA
LEADS TO THE VIEW GENERATION FAILED.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / EXTENSION LINE IS NOT
DISPLAYED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / TANGENT LINE IS NOT
CREATED IN THE VIEW WAITING FOR UPDATE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFTING) / ERROR DISPLAYED WHEN
DIMENSION IS SELECTED.
GENDRAFT / THREAD IS NOT SHOWN IN DRAWING FOR
GENDRAFT BR10000055135 HD69469 BODY WITH TECHNOLOGICAL RESULTS UNDER OGS IN GA
SPEC TREE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS ON DELETION
OF VIEW
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT): WITH KANJ FONT SPECIFIC
GENDRAFT BR10000055147 HD69480 CHARACTER ADDED AFTER DIMENSION VALUE RESULTS GA
BAD VALUE DISPLAY
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) : OFFSET SECTION VIEW
GENDRAFT BR10000055148 HD69481 SHOWS THREADED HOLE WHICH IS NOT PRESENT IN GA
MODEL
CANNOT PERFORM VIEW OPERATION AFTER PASTING
V4 DATA TO CATDRAWING
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / FONT SIZE DOES NOT RETURN
TO THE DEFAULT VALUE FOR A NEW TEXT AFTER
APPLYING A PARTICULAR SIZE AND THEN AGAIN
CANCELLI
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG BEND DIRECTIONS
GENDRAFT BR10000055207 HD69546 IN UNFOLDED VIEW CREATED FROM A SHEETMETAL GA
COMPONENT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / LOAD OF MODIFIED XLS IN
TWO VERSIONED DRAWINGS KO.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) : WRONG UNFOLDED VIEW
AFTER 3D MODIFICATION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / BAD PERFORMANCE DUE TO
QUICK DETAIL VIEW PROFILE WITH GVS STYLE.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / WRONG REPRESENTATION OF
GENDRAFT BR10000055253 HD69592 SMART PICK POINT WHILE USING A 2D COMPONENT BY GA
USING CATALOG BROWSER.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - GENERATIVE TAP IS
GENDRAFT BR10000055259 HD69601 SWITCHED TO THREAD WHEN IT IS COPIED AND GA
PASTED ON INTERACTIVE ELEMENT
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CORRUPTED DISAPPEARED
DATUMS CANNOT BE CLEANEDBY CATDUAV5
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / 2D COMPONENT COLOR NOT
GENDRAFT BR10000055291 HD69628 RIGHT WHEN ' EXPLODE 2D COMPONENT' IS GA
PERFORMED.
DRAFTING (ID): SEARCHING SAME COLORED
ELEMENTS SECOND TIME SEARCHES ALL ELEMENTS
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME USER PATTERN
THREADS NOT VISIBLE IN THE DRAWING
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / VIEW GENERATION IS FAILED
GENDRAFT BR10000055332 HD69679 ON DE-ACTIVATION OF PREVENT GENERATIVE VIEW GA
STYLE USAGE IN TOOLS > OPTION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABEND ON SELECTION
GENDRAFT BR10000055387 HD69730 OF EXTENSION LINE TAB OF DIMENSION EDIT > GA
PROPERTIES.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / LEADER OF DETAIL VIEW
GENDRAFT BR10000055428 HD69768 REMAINS RED AFTER MODIFY PROJECTION PLANE IS GA
PERFORMED.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / HATCHING IS DISPLAYED
WRONGLY
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CREATION OF TRI-TANGENT
GENDRAFT BR10000055496 HD69845 CIRCLE IS NOT POSSIBLE IN CASE OF TWO LINES & A GA
POINT.
AUTOMATIC BACKUP / WARM START: FAILS TO
RESTORE A CATDRAWING WITH A MML LINK
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THE ERROR IS NOT
DETECTED BY CATDUAV5 EVEN THOUGH THE TEXT
LEADER WHICH HAVE POSITIONAL LINK POINT IS NOT
LINKED ELEME
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / VIEW GENERATION FAILED
WHILE CREATING 3D CLIPPING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG REPRESENTATION OF
VIEW IN APPROXIMATE VIEW MODE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABEND WHILE
GENDRAFT BR10000055595 HD69951 MODIFYING THE 2D COMPONENT OF THE DETAIL SHEET GA
ONLY ON 64 BIT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / MISSING ARROW OF SECTION
CALLOUT LINE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / ATTRIBUTE TYPE
GENDRAFT BR10000055607 HD69961 MISMATCHED ERROR OCCURS WHEN A DIMENSION IS GA
SELECTED.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS WHEN
DELETING A SPLINE IN DRAWING
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / MEASURE BETWEEN TOOL
WRONG RESULT FOR ANY GEOMETRY INFINITE
GENDRAFT BR10000055702 HD70070 AXIS TOO LONG FOR PIPE IN 2D GA
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / MULTI UPDATE OF A 2D VIEW
WITH GVS RESULTS IN TO THE ABEND OF CATIA V5.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATDUAV5 FAILS DETECTS
DWE_1 RULE AGAIN.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIMENSION VALUE IS
MOVING ON PAGE UPDATE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME ELEMENTS ARE NOT
PROJECTED IN DRAWING.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / AN EMPTY TOOLBAR APPEARS
ON CREATING A NEW VIEW IN THE DRAWING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME DIMENSIONS ARE NOT
EXPORTED WHEN CREATE VIEW FROM 3D.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / IF CHANGE LINE TYPE OF
BOUNDARY CURVE AREA FILL IS REVERSED.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CORNER NOT CREATED
CORRECTLY WHEN HIDE / SHOW PERFORMED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG RESULTS FOR AREA
FILL.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / BEND AXIS NOT SHOWN
WHILE CREATING UNFOLDED VIEW
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / PROBLEM WITH MISSING
LINE IN SECTION CUT AND SECT ION VIEW.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / ARROW OF THE DIMENSION
NOT VISIBLE AFTER CLIPPING IN DETAILED VIEW.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THE ARROW DIRECTION IS
NOT CHANGED AFTER MOVING THE DIMENSION TO
OUT OF THE CIRCLE IF FORESHORTENED OPTION IS
CHECKED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SECTION CUT – LINES ARE
REPRESENTED AS POINTS WITH 3D POINTS SETTINGS.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DELETION OF SOME
ELEMENTS TAKES A LONG TIME.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / INCORRECT
REPRESENTATION OF SECTION VIEW SYMBOL.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THE REACTION DOES NOT
WORK WHEN UPDATING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CONNECTOR AND BUNDLE
GENDRAFT BR10000055867 HD70241 SEGMENT INFO IS NOT DISLAYED BY AUTOMATIC GA
GENERATION ICON.
GENDRAFT: OPEN MESSAGE BOX NOT SEEN WHEN
GENDRAFT BR10000055890 HD70262 READ ONLY ATTRIBUTE OF THE ALREADY OPEN GA
DRAWING IS CHANGED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THE DRESS UP FEATURES
FOR THREAD IS NOT PROJECTED CORRECTLY
VIEW FRAME.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT): DIMENSION ARROW
GENDRAFT BR10000055923 HD70301 DISAPPEAR WITH CREATE-MODIFY CLIPPING DONE ON GA
HALF DIMENSION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / VIEW IS NOT CREATED AND
THE DRAFTING LATTICE DISAPPEARS.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / NON-ASSOCIATIVE
DIMENSIONS IN BETWEEN TWO CURVE EDGES.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) /ERROR MESSAGE IS
DISPLAYED WHEN SPECIFIC DIMENSION IS SELECTED.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / SOMETIMES THE REFERENCE
GENDRAFT BR10000055970 HD70356 POINT CAN NOT BE SELECTED WHEN ELEMENT IS GA
PALCED BY CATALOG
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / VIEW NOT GENERATED
CORRECTLY.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) A PRODUCT WHICH CONTAINS
TRANSPARENT FACE IS NOT CORRECTLY DISPLAYED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME DIMENSIONS IN THE
DRAWING ARE CORRUPT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DETAIL VIEW CALLOUT
GENDRAFT BR10000056172 HD70550 CHANGES DUE TO THE MODIFICATION OF SECTION GA
CALLOUT.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / ERROR DUE TO THE WRONG
POSITION OF THE TEXT IS NOT DETECTED BY CATDUA.
FTA (PART) / WRONG DISPLAY OF CHAMFER
DIMENSION AFTER EDITING THE DIMENSION VALUE.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / THE POSITION OF THE FIX
TOGETHER INDICATION IS NOT REVERSED BY UNDO
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / MULTI UPDATE OF A 2D VIEW
WITH GVS RESULTS IN TO THE ABEND OF CATIA V5.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATIA ABEND DUE TO THE
GENDRAFT BR10000056279 HD70656 MODIFICATION OF THE 2D COMPONENT ONLY ON 64 GA
BIT.
2D COMPONENT DUE TO THE EXPLODING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIMENSIONS BECOME NOT
UPTO DATE WHEN CHANGE SHEETMETAL WALL.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN
GENDRAFT BR10000056337 HD70716 REPRESENTATION ON C:FORCE UPDATE OF THE GA
DRAWING IN BETWEEN 32 BIT & 64 BIT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - THE POSITION OF THE
GENDRAFT BR10000056345 HD70722 BALLOON WHICH HAVE POSITIONLINK IS NOT RIGHT GA
AFTER UPDATE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / BY SELECTING THE TWO
EDGES FOR DIMENSIONING IN A SECTION VIEW THE
DIAMETER DIMENSION TURNS INTO A NON
ASSOCIATIVE DIME
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN
REPRESENTATION OF ANNOTATIONS FOR VIEW FROM
3D WITH KEEP LAYOUT AND DRESS UP OF
ANNOTATIONS EXTRACTED FR
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT) / INSERTING SYMBOL TO PLACE
GENDRAFT BR10000056474 HD70852 FASTENER SNAPS TO POINTS EVEN WITH SNAP GA
TURNED OFF
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CPU LOOP WHILE UPDATING
A DRAWING ON R17.
DRAFTING (INT DRAFT) / CATDUA RULE GDI_0 IS NOT
IN ONLINE DOCUMENTATION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) THREAD IS NOT DISPLAYED IN
DRAWING IN TECHNOLOGICAL RESULTS CONTEXT
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CHAMFER DIMENSIONS
CANNOT BE CREATED FOR ALIGNED SECTION VIEW.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / NON-ASSOCIATIVITY
BETWEEN HIDE POINT & LEADER.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) AXIS DISAPPEARS WHILE
GENDRAFT BR10000056632 HD71011 UPDATING CATDRAWINGS AFTER SEVERAL 3D GA
MODIFICATION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / ERROR DUE TO THE CHANGE
GENDRAFT BR10000056643 HD71023 IN THE CAA STANDARD IS NOT DETECTED BY THE GA
CATDUA.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) WHEN A DRAWING IS
UPDATED, CATIA ABEND
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) WRONG REPRESENTATION OF
THREAD WHEN USING 'BROKEN VIEW'
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / THE POSITION LINK DOES
NOT BECOME EFFECTIVE FOR A GENERATIVE ELEMENT
BROKEN LINK TO A VPM DOCUMENT CAN NOT BE
REMOVED USING MODIFY LINKS FUNCTION.
GENDRAFT BR10000056712 HD71097 AXIS TOO LONG FOR PIPE IN 2D GA
GENDRAFT BR10000056733 HD71116 ORIGIN SYMBOL SHAPE FOR DIFFERENT VALUE IN GA
STANDARDS FOR CLIPPING CUMULATED DIMENSION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / THREAD CREATION
GENDRAFT BR10000056768 HD71148 EFFICIENCY DROPS WHEN TECHNOLOGICAL RESULTS GA
IS USED
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / TRANSLATE WITH DUPLICATE
GENDRAFT BR10000056786 HD71164 MODE: TEXT WITH LEADER LINKS ORIGINAL 2D GA
COMPONENT INSTANCE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) GENERATING THREAD
DIMENSIONS LEADS TO FAKE DIMENSIONS
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME LINES ARE MISSED IN
PROJECTED TOP VIEW AND BOTTOM VIEW.
VIEW CREATION FROM AN OTHER ASSEMBLY IS NOT
GENDRAFT BR10000056844 HD71229 FORBIDDEN WHEN THE POINTED ASSEMBLY IS NOT GA
LOADED OR LINKS ARE BROKEN.
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / ERROR MESSAGE IS
GENDRAFT BR10000056857 HD71242 DISPLAYED WHEN UNDOING DIMENSIONS WITH GA
INTERRUPTION
GENDRAFT BR10000056864 HD71257 DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATDRAWING IS NOT OPENED. GA
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ PITCH IS NOT CREATED IN
GENDRAFT BR10000056869 HD71262 FRONT VIEW WHEN FRONT VIEW IS CREATED WITH GA
KEEP SPECIFICATION ON
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ IF IGES FILE IS OPENED THE
MINUS SIGN WHICH WAS USED GETS CHANGED.
GENDRAFT BR10000056960 HD71354 DIMENSION FOR BROKEN VIEW WITH INTERSECTION GA
POINT DETECTION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - ABEND CLICK OK TO
GENDRAFT BR10000056971 HD71364 TERMINATE IN ADD 3D CLIPPING WITH PIPING GA
ELEMENTS
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / THE SECTION CUT DONT HAVE
THE SAME COLOR OF THE 3D GEOMETRY
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / INCONSISTENT BEHAVIOR OF
THE DRESS UP FEATURES ON C: FORCE UPDATE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / INCONSISTENT BEHAVIOR OF
THE LAYER FOR CALLOUT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG REPRESENTATION IN
THE SELECT TOOLBAR ONLY IN AIX.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN THE
GENDRAFT BR10000057035 HD71447 REPRESENTATION OF LINE UP IN BETWEEN GA
CUMULATED DIMENSION & DIMENSIONS.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CHAMFER DIMENSION IS
GENDRAFT BR10000057072 HD71471 MOVING DUE TO THE CHANGE OF THE STANDARD IN GA
THE PAGE UPDATE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIFFERENT FONT SIZE FOR
THE PROJECTION VIEW.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS WHILE
OPENING A CATDRAWING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN THE
REPRESENTATION OF THE THREAD WITH
TECHNOLOGICAL RESULTS AS COMPARED TO THE
REPRESENTATION WITH OUT T
GDR: PARTS DISAPPEAR IN VIEW, WHEN OCCLUSION
GENDRAFT BR10000057213 HD71618 CULLING IS ON AND PARTS MOVED IN 3D WITH LARGE GA
VALUE
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / WRONG LOCATION OF THE
GENDRAFT BR10000057236 HD71641 XLS FILE RELATED TO THE CATDRAWING IN THE SENT GA
TO.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WHEN CATDUA (HLV_5) IS
PERFORMED, CATIA ABEND
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIMENSION VALUE CHANGED
WHEN CREATE VIEW FROM 3D.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / VIEW DISAPPEARS AFTER
UPDATE.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / WRONG BEHAVIOR OF LINE-
UP OPTION IN TOOLS > OPTIONS.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / INSTANTIATE ELEMENT IS
CREATED EVEN AFTER THE COMMAND IS CANCELED.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / BAD VALUE OF A PARAMETER
LINKED TO A 2D DIMENSION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - IT TAKES A LONG TIME WHEN
UPDATING DETAIL VIEW
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / FIX TOGETHER DOES NOT
GENDRAFT BR10000057389 HD71802 WORK WHEN EXPLODING 2D COMPONENT INSTANCE GA
OF ANOTHER 2D COMPONENT INSTANCE
DRAFTING : UNABLE TO SET SPECIFIC GRAPHIC
GENDRAFT BR10000057406 HD71824 PROPERTIES TO THE DEFAULT VALUE IN THE STYLE GA
TOOLBAR
GENDRAFT BR10000057443 HD71858 DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / FRONT VIEW IS EMPTY GA
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABEND DURING
DRAWING UPDATE.
CATSCRIPT AUTOMATION- SELECTION OBJECT
(SELECTELEMENT3) NOT BEHAVING AS EXPECTED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - DIFFERENCE OF ARROW
LOCATION BETWEEN V5R16SP4 AND V5R18SP4
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ THE PAINTER COMMAND FAILS
GENDRAFT BR10000057548 HD71971 TO COPY THE GRAPHIC PROPERTY FROM SINGLE GA
DIMENSION TO CHAINED DIMENSION
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/3D POINT IS NOT PROJECTED
ON VIEW
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ CATIA CRASHES DURING
DRAWING UPDATE WITH THREAD OPTION ON
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME VIEW COMMANDS ARE
NOT WORKING FOR CATPRODUCT WITH LIGHTS.
THE DIMENSION IN VIEW FROM 3D FROM LAYOUT.
DRAFTING: BAD PERFO TO OPEN A CATDRAWING
ACCORDING TO THE MACHINES SET IN HOST FILE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA FREEZES WHILE
CREATING TANGENT LINE.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / RED CROSS APPEARS WHILE
GENDRAFT BR10000057672 HD72104 UPDATING THE SECTION VIEW, WHEN THE SKETCH GA
USED TO CREATE THE SECTION CUT IS MODIFIED.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SECTION CALLOUT ARROW
CAN NOT BE EDITTED.
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ WHEN CREATING A SECTION
GENDRAFT BR10000057691 HD72122 VIEW IN APPROXIMATE MODE A PART OF GEOMETRY IS GA
NOT DISPLAYED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / AN ERROR OCCURS WHEN
OPEN SPECIFIC DXF FILE.
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ SMALL CIRCLES ARE NOT
SHOWN DURING ANALYZING INTERFERING ELEMENTS
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIMENSION CHANGES TO
GENDRAFT BR10000057751 HD72181 NOT-UP-TO-DATE WHILE CHANGING THE DIMENSION GA
REPRESENTATION.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / GHOST LINK DUE TO THE
REPLACE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / ERROR DUE TO THE GHOST
GENDRAFT BR10000057771 HD72205 LINK WHILE REPLACE THE COMPONENT IS NOT GA
DETECTED BY CATDUA.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATIA FREEZES WHILE
INSTANTIATING 2D COMPONENT.
DRAFTING (GDR): DELETED DIMENSION REAPPEARS
ON USING GENERATED DIMENSION OPTION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / ABEND RECEIVED WHEN
IMPORTING A DXF FILE ON PLATFORM XP.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ WHEN SEARCH IS PERFORMED
GENDRAFT BR10000058010 HD72469 BY VISIBLE ON SCREEN THEN HIGH BRIGHTNESS IS GA
NOT CREATED ON DETAIL SHEET
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - UNABLE TO GENERATE
BREAKOUT VIEW IN MULTI-BODY MODEL DRAWING
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) LINE NORMAL TO CURVE NOT
AVAILABLE WITH GENERATIVE ELEMENTS.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ WRONG FONT DISPLAYED IN
DRAWING
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ YINYAN SYMBOL IS DISPLAYED
EVEN IF THE PIPE IS NOT CUT
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / NO PATTERN IS SHOWN IN
SECTION VIEW
THE FONT SIZE FROM TOOLS > STANDARDS.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) OFFSET SECTION VIEW IS NOT
DISPLAYED IF LATEST ELEMENT IS NOT CURRENT
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) - CATIA ABEND DURING
DRAWING UPDATE WHEN THREAD OPTION IS ON
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / THE TEXT IS NOT DISPLAYED
GENDRAFT BR10000058209 HD72703 IN CGM FILE WHEN OPENED USING INSERT FILE GA
OPTION IN TOOLS
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ DRAWING ADVANCED BOM :
MASS PARAMETER IS NOT UPDATED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG DIMENSION VALUE
GENDRAFT BR10000058245 HD72734 REPRESENTATION FOR THE VIEW POSITIONING BY GA
USING THE BLUE KNOB.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) BAD PERFORMANCE DURING
FILE OPEN CATDRAWING DOCUMENT
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / DIFFERENCE IN DIMENSION
GENDRAFT BR10000058431 HD72938 VALUE FOR THE VIEW POSITIONING BY USING THE GA
BLUE KNOB.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT) / DIMENSION ON A INTERACTIVE
ELEMENT IN A LOCKED VIEW CAN BE CHANGED
WHEN SYMBOL IS CHANGED, A NEEDLESS DIMENSION
LINE REMAINS
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG FUNCTION OF THE
LINE-UP FOR THE DIMENSION.
DRAFTING / CATIA ABENDS WHEN OPENING SPECIFIC
DWG FILE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS WHILE USING
REPLACE PROFILE COMMAND OF THE CALLOUT.
DRAFTING : EXECUTING DRAW COMMANDS, WE
CANNOT SEE THE WINDOW PROPERLY BUT A FLASH OF
IT. A BLACK SQUARE, AS THE SHADOW OF THE
TOOLBAR.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT) /CATIA V5 TERMINATES WHEN
DXF FILE IS OPENED
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / WRONG FUNCTION OF THE
AREA FILL FOR OFFSET SPLINE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) ABEND DURING PROJECTION
VIEW WITH THREAD ACTIVATION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WEIGHT DOES NOT UPDATE
GENDRAFT BR10000058777 HD73297 IN THE ADVANCED BOM WHILE ANY MODIFICATION IN GA
THE CATPRODUCT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG FUNCTION OF THE
ADVANCED BOM WHILE ADDING A NEW COMPONENT.
GENDRAFT BR10000058789 HD73307 OK TO TERMINATE WHEN DELETING VIEWS GA
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ DIMENSION ARROW DIAPPEARS
GENDRAFT BR10000058794 HD73308 WHEN CREATE/MODIFY CLIPPING COMMAND IS GA
SELECTED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / SOME PARTS ARE LOCATED
IN CGR VIEW INCORRECTLY
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / HORIZONTAL OFFSET OF
GENDRAFT BR10000058823 HD73346 LENGTH / DISTANCE DIMENSION THROUGH TOOLS > GA
STANDARDS WORKS WRONGLY.
THE EXTMAX PARAMETER (GENERATED WHEN DXF IS
WRITTEN) IS NOT ACCURATE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) WRONG BENDING LINE IN
UNFOLDED VIEW AFTER WALL RECOGNITION
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / COMPONENT 2D ARE SET IN
WRONG LAYER
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG PROJECTION OF THE
SPIRAL.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / WRONG BEHAVIOR OF
GENDRAFT BR10000058865 HD73387 ADVANCED BOM WHILE DELETION OF THE PART IN THE GA
CATPRODUCT.
HATCHING PATTERN, PITCH ABOVE 100MM NOT
APPLIED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / VIEW COMMANDS DOES NOT
WORK WITH THE LIGHTS IN CATPRODUCT.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) WRONG ORIENTATION OF
UNFOLDED VIEW AFTER SHEETMETAL SYMETRY
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) /UPDATE NOT WORKING IN
DRAFTING MODE FOR THE WIREFRAME.
IN CATIA V5, OPENED THE V4 MODEL FILE, ALL THE
TEXT WILL BE WITH A SPACE AND '_'
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / NON CREATION OF THE
FRONT VIEW.
GEN DRAFT/GENERATED ELEMENTS DISAPPEAR WHEN
UPDATING THE DRAWING.
BEHAVIOR OF AN ICON DIFFERS BY THE SELECTION
PROCEDURE OF '2D COMPONENT'
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ ORIGIN 0 OF A CUMULATED
GENDRAFT BR10000059147 HD73686 DIMENSION CHANGES TO BOLD WHEN ASSOCIATED GA
TEXT IS ADDED
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ PARTS PROJECTED
INCORRECTLY ON THE DRAWING
GENDRAFT BR10000059186 HD73717 DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / .PRESELECTING DOESN GA
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) DRAWING DOES NOT ASK FOR
UPDATE AFTER HIDE PERFORMED ON GEOMETRICAL SET
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ THE ORIENTATION OF GD AND
TOLERANCE IS NOT CORRECT
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / MISSING ELEMENTS IN THE
SECTION VIEW
GENDRAFT BR10000059380 HD73936 ABEND WHEN CREATE FRONT VIEW GA
UPDATE IS ALWAYS REQUIRED WHEN OPENENING A
CATDRAWING
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / ERROR MESSAGE WHILE
CREATING UNFOLDED VIEW FROM SHEETMETAL.
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ LINE TYPE INCORRECTLY
DISPLAYED
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ DIMENSION NOTASSOCIATED
WITH 3D EVEN THOUGH DRAWING IS ASSOCIATED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT)/VIEW GENERATION IS FAILED
ON R18 THOUGH IT IS GENERATED ON R16.
CANCEL 'INSTANTIATE 2D COMPONENT' COMMAND AND
REPEAT OPERATION --> CLICK OK TO TERMINATE
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / UPDATE ERROR OBTAINED
AFTER THICKNESS IS EDITED
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT)/ FILLET NOT CREATED
CORRECTLY
DRAFTING (CATDUAV5) - WRONG BEHAVIOR
CONCERNING THE GME_1 RULE INTO CATDUAV5.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ DEFAULT VALUE NOT SET AFTER
GENDRAFT BR10000059998 HD74581 UNDO IS PERFORMED WHEN FUNNEL IS ADDED TO GA
CUMULATIVE DIMENSION
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT)/WHEN THE MULTIPLE
GENDRAFT BR10000060035 HD74621 DEFINITION PROPERTY IS USED, A PART OF DISPLAY GA
OF THE CROSS SECTION IS NOT CORRECT.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ LINEUP DIMENSIONS CHANGED
AFTER APPLYING SCALE
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT)/VIEW GENERATION IS FAILED
ON R18 THOUGH IT IS GENERATED ON R16.
GEN DRAFT/WHEN A MODEL IS OPENED IN R18,
GENDRAFT BR10000060241 HD74840 GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCE DIFFERS FROM THE GA
DISPLAY OF R17.
ONLY ON 64 BIT.
ONLY ON AIX.
ANALYSIS (GSA) : WRONG ERROR MESSAGE WHEN
GENERAL BR10000051435 HD65425 GA
UPDATING A MODEL WITH DEACTIVATED MESH
TOOLS / UTILITY / PLMV4TOV5MIGRATION : THE
GENERAL BR10000053743 HD68048 CURRENT LAYER OF THE CATPART NOT DISPLAYED IN GA
GRAPHIC PROPERTIES TOOLBAR
CATALOG EDITOR: IT IS POSSIBLE TO RENAME A
CHAPTER WITH THE SAME NAME AS A FAMILY
ANALYSIS (FEM) / CATIA ABENDS WHEN UPDATE 3D
MESH PART
ANALYSIS (FEM) / WHEN IMPORT .DAT FILE CATIA
DOES NOT ADD CHARACTER,
KWA : INCORECT UPDATE OF CURVE DRIVEN BY
GENKNOWL BR10000054791 HD69112 GA
PARAMETER IN SPECIFIC CATPART
GENSTRES BR10000042452 HD59566 SMALL RADIUS BEAM CANNOT BE PERFORMED GA
DOCUMENTATION: DOCUMENTATION REGARDING 2D
GENSTRES BR10000051332 HD65296 GA
DISPLAY IN ANALYSIS NEEDS TO BE UPDATED
ANALYSIS (GSA) : CANNOT SET A MOMENT OF INERTIA
TO A VALUE LOWER THAN 1E-3 MM4
ANALYSIS (GSA) / MOMENT IS NOT DIVIDED TO THE
GENSTRES BR10000053270 HD67514 EACH POINT BY ADDING IMPORTED MOMENT TO MORE GA
THAN TWO POINTS AT THE SAME TIME
ANALYSIS (AMT) / MESH WARNING MARK DISPLAYS 1
GENSTRES BR10000053295 HD67547 POSITION ONLY, BUT MESH WARNING DIALOG IS GA
DISPLAYED AS 6 POSITIONS
ANALYSIS (GSA) : LOCAL SINGULARITY IMAGES DO
NOT DISPLAY MULTIPLE SINGULARITY DIRECTIONS
ANALYSIS (GSA) : EXTERNAL STORAGE CONFLICT
ERROR WHEN SAVING A CATANALYSIS FILE
ANALYSIS (GSA) / THE ICONS IN THE IMAGE TOOLBOX
GENSTRES BR10000054135 HD68456 IS NOT CHANGE TO LOW LUMINOSITY EVEN IF THE GA
MODEL IS CHANGED
ANALYSIS (GSA) : CORE DUMP WHEN COMPUTING AN
ANALYSIS
GSA / AVAILABLE GROUPS LIST IN IMAGE EDITION BOX
RESCROLLS TO BEGINNING AFTER SELECTION
ANALYSIS (AMT) / MESH COMPUTATION ERROR IS
GENSTRES BR10000054852 HD69176 DISPLAYED FOR FOR A XML MAPPING PROPERTY FILE GA
THAT INCLUDES THE UNION OF TWO MESHPARTS
ANALYSIS (GSA) : CORE DUMP WHEN CHECKING KEEP
ONLY OPTION IN PATHLINE IMAGE
ANALYSIS (GSA) / COMPUTATION IS NOT RESTORED
AFTER WARM START
ANALYSIS (GSA) / LINE FORCE DENSITY IS
GENSTRES BR10000055210 HD69550 INCORRECTLY DEFINED IF APPLY ALONG IMPLICIT AXIS GA
SYSTEM
ANALYSIS (GSA) / IMPOSSIBLE TO SELECT THE MESH
GENSTRES BR10000055426 HD69769 WHEN MEASURE BETWEEN IF ANALYSIS IS IN GA
CATPRODUCT
ANALYSIS (GSA) / NO ERROR APPEARS IF POISSON
GENSTRES BR10000055458 HD69804 RATIO IS CHANGED TO 0.5 OR HIGHER IN MATERIAL GA
PROPERTIES
ANALYSIS (GSA) / MAPPING FILE EXPORT FOR GROUPS
DOES NOT HAVE CORRECT ATTRIBUTES
ANALYSIS (GSA) / RESULT BY 'ENFORCED
DISPLACEMENT' IS INACCURATE
ANALYSIS (FEM) / MESH COMPUTATION IS
INCOMPLETE, CATIA HANGS.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / DOCUMENTATION OF MESH
WARNING.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / REACTION FORCE IS INCORRECT
FOR A SPECIFIC MESH SIZE VALUE.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / WHEN CATELFSLAVEPROCESS IS
INTERRUPTED RECALCULATING GIVES ERROR.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / AN ERROR IS DISPLAYED WHEN
CHOSEN CONTACT CONNECTION WITH PLURAL FACES.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / MESH IS NOT COMPUTED BY
CONNECTION OF SURFACES.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / HARMONIC DYNAMIC RESPONSE
GENSTRES BR10000056246 HD70622 CURVE IS INCORRECT WITH USER DEFINED AXIS GA
SYSTEM.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / WHEN ANALYSIS RESULT OF EACH
PLY ID IS DISPLAYED SOME ELEMENTS ARE MISSING.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / FREQUENCY IS NOT CALCULATED
WHEN COMPUTE
ANALYSIS (GSA) / INCORRECT REACTION OCCURS AT
SPECIFIC SENSOR.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / RESULTS OF MOMENT ARE
DIFFERENT.
ANALYSIS (AMT) : THE MESH IS DIFFERENT BEFORE
AND AFTER HAVING SAVED AND RE-OPENED THE FILE
ANALYSIS (GSA) / CUT PLANE ANALYSIS TOOL SHOWS
VALUES AT DIFFERENT LOCATION.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / DIFFERENCE OF DISPLACEMENT
BECOMES LARGE BY THE MESH SIZE
ANALYSIS (AMT) / SELECTION TRAP IS ACTIVE THOUGH
EXIT MESHER.
ANALYSIS (GSA) : MOMENTS ARE IMPORTED
INCORRECTLY TO POINT SUPPORTS
ANALYSIS (GSA) / ADVANCED REPORT IS NOT
GENERATED.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / GLOBAL ERROR BECOMES LARGER
ON SMALLER MESH VALUES.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / CATIA ABENDS WHEN SAVING
CATANALYSIS FILE
ANALYSIS (GSA) / CUT PLANE ANALYSIS COMMAND
DOES NOT REMEMBER POSITION OF CUT PLANE.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / XML MAPPING PROPERTY WITH REF
ANGLE FAILS.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / ANALYSIS COMPUTATION IS NOT
CORRECT AT SPECIFIC RIGID CONNECTION.
CNEXT ARGUMENT WORKBENCH DOES NOT WORK FOR
JAPANESE CATIA
ANALYSIS (GSA) : MEMORY INCREASES DURING
ANIMATION OF VON MISES STRESS IMAGE
ANALYSIS (GSA) / CATIA ABENDS WHEN COMPUTE
SPECIFIC SOLUTION
ANALYSIS (GSA) / WHEN SYMBOL POSITION IS OTHER
THAN NODE ANIMATION IS NOT EXACT.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / EXTREMA SYMBOL IS NOT
HIGHLIGHTED.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / LINEAR CURSOR DOES NOT MOVE
TO NEXT PEAK ON GRAPH.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / WHEN DATA MAPPING IS USED BY
PRESSURE VON MISES STRESSES ARE NOT DISPLAYED.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / ANIMATION SLIDER STOPS WHEN
GEOMETRY WAS MOVED.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / GRAPH DIFFERS FROM THE DIALOG
GENSTRES BR10000058903 HD73428 BOX WHEN NODE ENTRY IS DELETED AND ENTERED GA
AGAIN.
ANALYSIS (GSA) : INCORRECT PRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION IF PRESSURE MAPPING IS APPLIED
ANALYSIS (GSA) : INCORRECT RESULT AT A RIGID
CONNECTION ON A MODEL WITH BEAM ELEMENTS
ANALYSIS (GSA) / ABEND WHEN SAVING CATANALYSIS
WITH SPECIFIC CATSETTINGS.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / RESULT OF PRESSURE IS DIFFERENT
BY BOTH CONTACT FACE.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / BALL JOINT DIALOG BOX NAME
SHOWS INCORRECT NAME.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / INCORRECT RESULT WHEN CHANGE
AXIS OF ROTATION TO COMPUTE.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / ABEND OCCURS WHEN SELECTING
GENSTRES BR10000059593 HD74154 CRACKS TAB ON BOUNDARY SPECIFICATIONS GA
DEFINITION.
ANALYSIS (GSA) : INCORRECT PRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION IF PRESSURE MAPPING IS APPLIED
ANALYSIS / CATIA ABENDS WHEN COMPUTE SPECIFIC
CASE.
ANALYSIS (GSA) / POST PROCESSED DATA CAN NOT BE
EXPORTED AS XLS ON 64 BIT.
ANALYSIS (FEM) / SOME OPTIONS ON OCTREE MESH
PANEL MISSING
ANALYSIS (GSA) / FRICTION OPTION MISSING IN
CONTACT CONNECTION PROPERTIES.
ISSUE WITH CATPROJECTIONPTSUR CREATED BY THE
GEOOPE BR10000054349 HD68659 GA
GLOBAL METHOD CATCREATEPROJECTION.
GEOOPE BR10000054493 HD68812 CATDISTANCEMINPTSUR IS FAILING GA
CATDISTANCEMINPTSUR CAA GEOMETRICAL OPERATOR
GEOOPE BR10000056475 HD70854 PRODUCES WRONG OUTPUT FOR A CERTAIN POINT IN GA
A CERTAIN CATPART.
A SYSTEM CRUSH OCCURS IN
GEOOPE BR10000056635 HD71013 GA
CATCREATETOPSPLITSHELL.
GEOOPE BR10000056800 HD71181 THE RESULT OF INTERSECTION IS NOT CORRECT. GA
GEOOPE BR10000056803 HD71185 WRONG RESULT OF CATCREATEINTERSECTION GA
HANGDSGN BR10000058505 HD73004 FLIP HANGERS NO LONGER WORKING GA
HEALING ASSITANT: FACE CHECKER/THIN FACES ARE
HEALASST BR10000057713 HD72142 GA
NOT IDENTIFIED
A TREE CANNOT BE EXPANDED WHEN CATIA HAS A
HUMNBLD BR10000051932 HD66016 GA
LICENSE
HUMNBLD BR10000055670 HD70037 THE COPY & PASTE FOR LOS IS NOT ENABLED GA
HUMNBLD BR10000055687 HD70050 THE LOAD PANEL IS NOT DISPLAYED GA
APPLY GRASPING POSTURE OFFSET' IS NOT ACTIVE TO
HUMAN OF OLD VERSION.
HUMNBLD BR10000056611 HD70984 DMUHBA:MANIKIN WITHOUT HEAD IN V5R18. GA
DMUHBA:'INSERT A NEW REPORT' DOES NOT WORK
PROPERLY.
THE ARROW OF MANIKIN JOINT IN HUMAN BUILDER
CAN NOT BE DISPLAYED.
VISION WINDOW FOR A HUMAN BUILDER MANIKIN
WILL NOT RESIZE ON AIX MACHINES
VISION WINDOW FOR A HUMAN BUILDER MANIKIN
WILL NOT RESIZE ON AIX MACHINES
HUMNSIM BR10000055677 HD70040 CANNOT SUBSCRIBE HUMAN TASK WITH 3D_STATE. GA
HUMNSIM BR10000055680 HD70042 TIME SET IS NOT KEPT IN HAG. GA
ISSUES OF HUMAN ACTIVITY GROUP HAS NOT BEEN
HUMNSIM BR10000055705 HD70073 GA
FIXED IN R18SP1
HUMNSIM BR10000055745 HD70117 WRONG COLOR OF CONSTRAINT SYMBOL GA
THE BEHAVIOR OF MANIKIN DOESN'T BEHAVE
CORRECTLY WITHOUT PICK CONSTRAINT
LOADIND HUMAN CATALOG IS NOT CORRECT AFTER
CONFLICT ERROR IN SAVING
CANNOT THE REPLAY OF THE SIMULATION CREATED BY
'COMPILE SIMULATION'.
HUMNSIM BR10000057478 HD71898 V5 HUMAN MODULE GA
HUMNSIM BR10000057686 HD72115 FIX ON CONSTRAINT ON PELVIS NOT WORK CORRELTY GA
RULEBASED WALK IS NOT REFRAMED ON THE WALK
PATH
HUMNSIM BR10000057872 HD72316 HAND IS NOT OPENED GA
TRYING TO SYNCHRONIZE 3D MODEL, AN ERROR
MESSAGE APPEARS THOUGHT MANIKINS HAND
HUMNSIM BR10000057964 HD72422 NECK IS LOCKED GA
TRACK LINE OF MOVE ACTIVITY IS NOT UPDATED
CORRECTLY
HUMNSIM BR10000058054 HD72518 SPINNER INCREMENTS THE SPEED BY 100% GA
HUMNSIM BR10000058095 HD72561 V5 IS CRASHED AFTER EXIT PROCESS. GA
HUMNSIM BR10000058221 HD72690 CONSTRAINT BEHAVIOR OF STANDARD POSE GA
HUMNSIM BR10000058205 HD72693 STRANGE BEHAVIOR OF VISION WINDOW GA
HUMNSIM BR10000058238 HD72727 POSTURE IS NOT APPLIED FOR A MANIKIN CORRECTLY. GA
HUMNSIM BR10000058269 HD72757 AUTOWALK IS NOT SHOWN CORRECTLY IN 3D VIEW GA
THE COMPASS RETURNS TO THE POSITION OF DEFAULT
OF HAND BY UPDATE IF THE CONSTRAI
HUMNSIM BR10000059675 HD74238 HAG NAME IS CHANGED GA
WHEN THERE IS A DELAY ACTIVITY BETWEEN MTP AND
MTP, WE CAN'T CREATE ACTIVITY GRO
REUSE MTP WITH CONSTRAINTS IN HAG FROM
CATALOG
HVACDES BR10000054589 HD68909 LIGHT DUCT DOES NOT INHERIT THE RUN SIZE GA
UNABLE TO UPDATE (SHOW) THE INSULATION
HVACDES BR10000055370 HD69711 GRAPHICS AFTER A MODI FICATION IS MADE TO THE GA
RUN USING RUN DEFINITION OR RESIZE/RESPEC
HVACDES BR10000059104 HD73642 HVAC INSULATION MALFUNCTION W/ ENOVIA GA
HVACDES BR10000059523 HD74083 HVAC: CANNOT BREAK RADIUS CORNER RUN GA
DXF : INCORRECT TRANSLATION WITH SPECIFIC
IGES BR10000054786 HD69105 DRAWING FROM DRAWING TO SEMANTIC DXF TO GA
DRAWING
DXF : POINTS ARE NOT EXPORTED WITH SEMANTIC
IGES BR10000054891 HD69218 GA
OPTION
IGES: DIMENSION OF 3D DATA CONVERTED FROM IGES
IGES BR10000055721 HD70094 IS NOT CREATED WITH CORRECT POSITION AND GA
CORRECT VALUE
ISSUE WITH MKMK COMMAND (THIS DEFECT IS BASED
IGES BR10000056150 HD70528 GA
ON HOT LINE ISSUE 042110).
DRAFTING (DXF) / WRONG REPRESENTATION OT TEXT
IGES BR10000056816 HD71195 GA
WHILE EXPORTING AS DXF.
IGES : DIMENSION : IN DRAWING CREATED FROM IGES
IGES BR10000057127 HD71532 IMPORT DATA RADIUS DIMENSION CANNOT BE GA
POSITIONED CORRECTLY
DXF : KOREAN ENV : SPECIFIC DXF FILE CANNOT OPEN
IGES BR10000058314 HD72788 GA
WITH 2 BYTE CHARACTER FOLDER NAME
IGES 2D - THE LENGTH OF POLYLINE IMPORTED FROM
IGES BR10000058807 HD73324 GA
IGES2D IS NOT MEASURED CORRECTLY
DXF : KOREAN ENV : SPECIFIC DXF FILE CANNOT OPEN
IGES BR10000059711 HD74281 GA
WITH 2 BYTE CHARACTER FOLDER NAME
IGRIPARC BR10000057689 HD72118 AUTOPOSITIONER WITH AMP PRIMITIVE GA
F RUNNING AMP WHICH INCLUDED
IGRIPARC BR10000058870 HD73394 'AUTOPOSITIONERDIRECTION', 'CLICK OK TO GA
TARMINATE'
IGRIPDEV BR10000055578 HD69930 GEOMETRICAL DIFFERENCES IN ROBOTLIB R18 VS R17 GA
IGRIPDEV BR10000056088 HD70464 LINK ERROR INCATPRODUCT GA
AFTER DRESSUP PART TO IMPORTED MECHANISM, WE
IGRIPDEV BR10000056465 HD70844 GA
CANNOT TOUCH THE PART BY 'JOG MECHA
IGRIPDEV BR10000056491 HD70870 RESULT OF DYNAMIC COLLISION DETECTION GA
TMC CONFIDENTIAL V5 KINEMATICS DEVICE CANNOT
JOG MOVE CORRECTLY.
CIRCULAR MOTION WILL BE STRANGE AFTER TAG
JOINT CONVERSION
V5 JOG PANEL OPERATION TAKES LONG TIME COMPARE
TO D5IGRIP
IGRIPDEV BR10000057685 HD72114 HOME POSITION IS NOT UPDATE GA
IGRIPDEV BR10000058216 HD72705 V5 CRASHES WHEN WE MOVE A FRAME. GA
MEASUREMENTS' BY MEASURE BETWEEN IS NOT
DISPLAYED ON SHAPE.
IT IS NG THAT TAG IS CREATED BY THE SAME NAME
UNDER TAG_GROUP.
IGRIPDEV BR10000058996 HD73504 CANNOT COPY STANDARD OPERATIONS IN V5 GA
CANNOT DEFINE ACCURATE SPEED AND ACCELERATION
FOR MOVEHOME ACTIVITY
IGRIPDEV BR10000059645 HD74209 PROBLEMS WITH DRESSUP IN R16 R17 AND R18 GA
CATIKINMECHANISM :ADDCOMMAND API DOESN'T
PROVIDE ACCURATE STATUS ABOUT MECHANISM
IGRIPOLP BR10000055646 HD70008 GENERATED PROGRAM NAME IS WRONG. GA
MOTION PROFILES NOT DISPLAYED EVEN THOUGH THE
IGRIPOLP BR10000056741 HD71122 GA
MOTION TYPE IS CHANGED IN V5 PROPE
IGRIPOLP BR10000057940 HD72372 APPLICATIVE PROFAILS DISPLAY ERROR GA
IGRIPOLP BR10000058459 HD72956 REGARDING LIMIT COMMAND OF MOTOMAN INFORM. GA
IGRIPOLP BR10000058966 HD73495 REAGRDING ARCON COMMAND IN NRLTEACH GA
IGRIPOLP BR10000059187 HD73711 BEHAVIOR OF TPE TRANSLATOR ABOUT IO PARAMETER. GA
IGRIPOLP BR10000059473 HD74028 REGARDING MOTION OPTION OF TPE TRANSLATOR. GA
IGRIPOLP BR10000059940 HD74521 REGARDING ACCURACY OF NACHI/AW GA
DOWNLOAD ARC COMMAND FOR NACHI-AW/AX NOT
IGRIPOLP BR10000059941 HD74525 GA
OUTPUTTED.
IGRIPOLP BR10000060005 HD74590 CAN NOT UPLOAD MOVEX FOR NACHI-AX GA
IGRIPOLP BR10000060211 HD74803 THE CYCLE TIME IS DIFFERENT BY UPLOAD GA
CANNOT SEE GRAPHICS WHEN USING SIMULATION
IGRIPWSQ BR10000055614 HD69967 GA
REPORTING TOOLS IN R18
IGRIPWSQ BR10000055658 HD70022 CANNOT DISPLAY DEVICE'S INFO IN IO MONITORING GA
CANNOT SEE GRAPHICS WHEN USING SIMULATION
IGRIPWSQ BR10000056827 HD71201 GA
REPORTING TOOLS IN R18.
IGRIPWSQ BR10000058507 HD73005 PART LOCATION CHANGES UNEXPECTEDLY GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000055369 HD69710 TRACKTAG IN TEACH DIALOG RUNS INTO UNREACHABLE GA
THE DEVICE DEFINED FIRST DOESN'T WORK
IGRIPWSU BR10000055647 HD70004 GA
CORRECTLY WHEN THE MECHANISM NAME OF A AUX
IGRIPWSU BR10000055678 HD70041 REGARDING ADD A SPOTWELD ACTION FEATURE. GA
THE OPTION SETTING OF 'SNAP RESOURCE TO WHERE
BY USING POSITION TOOLBAR' IS NOT
WHEN A ROBOT HAS AN EXTERNAL RAIL DEVICE, WE
CHANGED THE MOTION TYPE FROM TAG TO
THE OPTION SETTING OF 'SNAP RESOURCE TO WHERE
BY USING POSITION TOOLBAR' SHOULD
THE COPIED PROCESS DOESN'T SUCCEED THE CONFIG
OF ROBOT IN AN ORIGINAL PROCESS.
IGRIPWSU BR10000055830 HD70208 MODIFY COMMAND IN TEACH MAKE V5FREEZE. GA
R17SP6 MOTION PLANNER CANNOT SIMULATE THE
LINEAR MOTION AT SAME LOCATION
IN TASKLIST, MATCH THE LANGUAGE OF ROBOTTASK
TO THE LANGUAGE OF OPERATION.
[GENERATE STACK OF 2D SECTIONS/3D SLICES AT THE
SELECTED WELDS] BREAK THE MOUNTE
AFTER SNAPPING COMPASS, THE SETTING OF [SNAP
RESOURCE] IS STRANGE.
WHEN THE ROBOT IS SELECTED, THE GUN IS CHANGED
INTO THE CYANOGEN COLOR IN 'ANALY
IT IS STRANGE THAT THE RANGE WHERE ROBOT
FOLLOWS TO GUN BY 'CLOCKWISE' AND 'ANTI
THE PRODUCT WITH 1000 CHILD PRODUCTS CANNOT
BE MOVED BY USING THE COMPASS.
CORE DUMP WHEN 'COMPUTE' OF 'ANALYSE WELDS
FOR ROBOT' IS EXECUTED TWICE CONTINUO
THE CATPROCESS CANNOT BE OPENED IF CACHE IS
NOT CREATED.
IGRIPWSU BR10000056843 HD71228 JOG MECHANISM GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000056891 HD71276 ATACHMENT LINE IS NOT ACCURATELY CREATED. GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000056985 HD71377 DRAFTING ELEMENTS. GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000057273 HD71644 ACTION LIBRARIES IN R18SP3 GA
CONTROL LOCATION OF SNAP COMPASS DOESNT
AFFECT CORRECTLY
LIST OF THE TCP PROFILE IN THE NEW TAG ON TCP
FUNCTION IS EMPTY
ROBOT START TASK SIMULATION FROM STORED
INITIAL STATE POSITION WHEN SELECT PLAY
AFTER 'REPLACE RESOURCE', UNNECESSARY MOUNTED
INFORMATION REMAINS IN ROBOT NODE.
PROBLEMS WITH V5 DEVICE WITH USER DEFINED
INVERSE KINEMATICS
THE CONTEXT MENU COLLAPSES IN THE FILE SAVED BY
3DXM FORM IN JAPANESE ENVIRONMEN
AFTER IMPORTING SUB-MECHANISM, ST TOOL
COMMAND DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY
IGRIPWSU BR10000057785 HD72221 THE POSITION OF TCP IS WRONG. GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000057788 HD72225 OPEN DA2 PROCESS FILE IN PLM EXPRESS GA
CAA: SOME OF THE RRS II OPERATION I/F IS SET AS
PROTECTED.
CRASH WHEN YOU USE REGIONAL SETTING SET AS
FRENCH
MANIKIN NECK HAS BIG SPACE WHEN I DO THE
SCENARIO WHICH I WRITE ON DESCRIPTION
CATPRODUCT WHICH IS REPLACED REMAINS TO BE ON
[SAVE MANAGEMENT..].
IGRIPWSU BR10000058181 HD72661 INSERT ACTION PROGRAM UPLOAD ERROR. GA
R18 REPLACE RESOURCE CANNOT REMOVE OLD
RESOURCE ON PPR HUB INTEGRATION
THE RESULT (TREE/3D VIEW/DESK) OF 'REPLACE
RESOURCE' IS NOT CORRECT
CONTROLLER PROFILES UNITS / USER CANNOT ENTER
A VALUE IN AN EDIT BOX
CREATING MOVE JOINT ACTIVITY, A VALUE OF DOF IS
CHANGED TO A STRANGE ONE
OBJECT PROFILE CREATION AND LOCATION
DEFINITION NO UPDATE OF LOCATION
IGRIPWSU BR10000058474 HD72968 PROGRAM CORRUPTION DURING DOWNLOAD GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000058510 HD73007 PRODUCTS DISAPPEAR AFTER EXECUTING CATDUA. GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000058608 HD73114 ATTACHMENT IS BROKEN AFTER REPLACERESOURCE. GA
IGRIPWSU BR10000058717 HD73227 HOW CAN WE HANDLE THE SETTING? GA
THE CONTEXT MENU COLLAPSES IN THE FILE SAVED BY
3DXM FORM IN JAPANESE ENVIRONMEN
IGRIPWSU BR10000058819 HD73334 TCP IS NOT CORRECTLY CHANGED. GA
WHY IS THE 'INTERPOLETION MODE' OF LINEAR ROBOT
MOTION WILL BE CHANGED AFTER SEL
IGRIPWSU BR10000058900 HD73423 SNAPPING TCP IN JOG MODE. GA
THE BEHAVIOR OF 'CUMULATIVE SNAP' IS DIFFERENT
IN R18SP3 AND R17SP3HF43.
BEHAVIOR FROM WHICH THE DEVICETASK IS CREATED
TO MANIKIN IS NG.
THE REPLACED CATPRODUCT REMAINS IN [SAVE
MANAGEMENT] AND [DESK].
PART COLOUR CHANGES TO WHITE ON CLICKING OK IN
THE EDIT TRACK DIALOG
GRAPHIC PROPERTIES (COLOR) OF A RESOURCE ARE
MODIFIED ON INSERTING THE RESOURCE
INTERFERENCE AND DISTANDE ARE BROKEN AFTER
REPLACERESOURCE
NAME OF SUB ROBOTTASK WILL BE INCLUDED MAIN
ROBOTTASK BY FANUC TRANSLATOR
BEHAVIOR OF FANUC RJ TPE TRANSLATOR ABOUT
MACRO COMMAND.
IT IS STRANGE TO BE LOST OF THE PROPERTY OF TAG
THAT THE USER DEFINED ONLY IN CU
IGRIPWSU BR10000059567 HD74116 SNAPPING TCP IN JOG MODE. GA
THE LIMIT VALUE OF THE JOINT ON THE ROBOT
CHANGES.
PARENTCHILD RELATIONSHIP CONNECTION IS BROKEN
AFTER REPLACE RESOURCE
HAND PRODUCT IS BROKEN WHEN WE DO PLAYALL IN
TEACH
REGRESSION ABOUT JUMP BEHAVIOR IN R18SP4 VS.
R16SP3
IGRPRRS2 BR10000057581 HD72010 7TH JOINT ROBOT RRS TEST ISSUE GA
IGRPRRS2 BR10000057768 HD72201 DELMIA VRC CAN'T BE CONNECTED WITH ROBOT MODEL GA
V5 IS DOWNED BY JOG OPERATION AFTER RRS2
IGRPRRS2 BR10000059366 HD73922 GA
CONNECTION
RRS 1 + CENIT SPRAY GUN ACTIONS + FLYBY (ACTION
IGRPRRS2 BR10000059368 HD73923 GA
EXECUTED NOT ON CORRECT POS.)
SUBSTITUTE PART XML FOR CREATED JOBS DOES NOT
INSPNOFL BR10000058189 HD72670 GA
INCLUDE THE CORRECT INFORMATION
INST : CATDELTAINSTALL : CATDELTAINSTALL
INSTADMN BR10000051468 HD65465 OPERATION IS NOT COMPLETED AND ARCHIVING IS GA
NOT DONE
LICENSING: THE OPTIONS PANEL IS CLOSED
INSTADMN BR10000054626 HD68933 GA
AUTOMATICALLY WHEN CLICKING ON ANOTHER TAB
LICENSE : FMP SHARABLE LICENSE : CANNOT SWITCH
INSTADMN BR10000054708 HD69027 TO FMP WORKBENCH WHEN SHARABLE LICENSE IS GA
SELECTED IN OPEN PART
INSTALL : R18GA IN BATCH MODE ON 32 BITS FAILS -
INSTADMN BR10000054756 HD69075 ADMINISTRATION HAS ENCOUNTERED A PROBLEM AND GA
NEEDS TO CLOSE
INSTALLATION : SPECIFIC LICENSING CONTENTS ARE
EXPOSED AFTER INSTALLING AB3 CONFIGURATION
INSTALL : BATCH INSTALLATION - SOME PRIVILEGES
FOR CURRENT USER ARE MISSING
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / COORDINATE DIMENSION
INTDRAFT BR10000051461 HD65460 VALUES ARE NOT DISPLAYED CORRECTLY IN THE GA
DRAWING.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / IN CHINESE INTERFACE THE
INTDRAFT BR10000052028 HD66119 USER CANNOT GENERATE BOM WITH CORRECT GA
NUMBER.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) DRIVE DIMENSION CANNOT BE
INTDRAFT BR10000053490 HD67752 CREATED FOR THE SHAPE CREATED BY TRANSLATE GA
(DRAWING)
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - ABEND BY UNDO AFTER USING
INTDRAFT BR10000054761 HD69079 CREATE INTERRUPTION FOR DIMENSION OF THE GA
DRAWING
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - WHEN RADIUS DIMENSION IS
INTDRAFT BR10000054768 HD69088 GA
CREATED, CATIA ABEND
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - THE SYMBOL ARROW OF THE
INTDRAFT BR10000054877 HD69202 RADIUS DIMENSION DISAPPEARS AFTER CREATE / GA
MODIFY CLIPPING
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATIA ABENDS ON OPEN AN
CLOSE OF SPECIFIC DRAWING
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - ABEND CLICK OK TO
TERMINATE WHEN USING WELD COMMAND
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / THE WHOLE VIEW IS
INTDRAFT BR10000055262 HD69604 SELECTED IF AN ORIGIN IS SELECTED WHEN VIEW GA
FRAME IS NOT DISPLAYED
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / SNAPPING OF POINT WORKS
INTDRAFT BR10000055374 HD69716 WRONGLY WHILE USING A 2D COMPONENT IN GA
CATALOG.
INTDRAFT - WHEN CREATING THE DIMENSION, AN
ELEMENT MOVES
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / MIRROR OPTION WORKS
WRONGLY FOR CONSTRAINT ELEMENTS WITH CREATE
DETECTED CONSTRAINT OPTION IS IN ACTIVATED
CONDITION.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - THE POSITION OF THE TEXT
WHICH HAVE POSITIONLINK IS NOT RIGHT
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / ABNORMAL BEHAVIOR OF
CONTINIOUS AREA FILL.
INTDRAFT: OFFSET CREATED WRONGLY FOR
2DCOMPONENT ON WHICH SYMMETRY PERFORMED
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) /SMART PICK BECOMES ACTIVE
EVEN THOUGH THERE IS NO ELEMENT
DRAFTING (INTDRAF) IT BECOMES IMPOSSIBLE TO DO
INTDRAFT BR10000056130 HD70508 REDO WHEN HIDE/SHOW OF AREAFILL IS DONE IN GA
UNDO (HISTORIC OPERATION IS LOST)
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - ABEND OCCURS OCCURS
WHEN ACTIVATING THE RADIUS DIMENSION ICON
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - WHEN ADDING A NEW ROW IN
INTDRAFT BR10000056430 HD70783 A TABLE, ITS WIDTH DOESN'T BECOME SAME AS GA
EXISTING ROWS.
DRAFTING (INT DRAFT) / POSITION OF TRITANGENT
CIRCLE IS INCORRECT.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - THE ROTATED 'INSTANTIATE
INTDRAFT BR10000056554 HD70933 2D COMPONENT' FROM CATALOG IS NOT REFLECTED IN GA
NEXT INSTANCE.
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT) / CATDRAWING STATE
BECOMES MODIFIED AFTER LAUNCHING F(X).
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) THE SHEET WHICH IS NOT
INTDRAFT BR10000056683 HD71065 ACTIVATED IS PRINTED DRW_2 ERROR DETECTED GA
DURING CATDUAV5
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - DIMENSION TEXT DISAPPEARS
AFTER MODIFY FONT
DRAFTING(GENDRAFT) / ARROW OF DIFFERENT
THICKNESS FROM A SET OF STANDARD IS CREATED
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT)- INCORRECT BEHAVIOR DURING
INSTANTIATE 2D COMPONENT
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) CHANGING STANDARD BY PAGE
SETUP CAUSES A ROUGHNESS SYMBOL REVERSED
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) THE LEADER OF THE
INTDRAFT BR10000056910 HD71308 DIMENSION DISAPPEARS AFTER CHANGING ANGLE TO GA
90 DEG
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / WHEN SELECT MORE THAN 50
ELEMENTS HIGHILIGHT IS NOT CORRECT.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) DIAMETER SYMBOL IS NOT
SHOWN IN DIMENSION, UNDERSCORE IS SHOWN
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) 'SEND TO' KEEPS THE INSERTED
BACKGROUNDVIEW LINK
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT)/ BI-TANGENT LINE CAN BE
CREATED WITHOUT ERROR
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / CATIA FREEZES WHILE
CREATING A SPLINE.
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) / PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
WHILE MOUSE POINTER MOVES OVER POLYLINE.
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT)/ NESTED STRUCTURE IS NOT
INTDRAFT BR10000058698 HD73210 KEPT WHEN 2D COMPONENT IS COPIED TO ANOTHER GA
LAYOUT).
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT) / DIMENSION CREATION NOT
INTDRAFT BR10000058731 HD73240 POSSIBLE BETWEEN LINES FOR DRAWING IMPORTED GA
FROM DWG FORMAT
INT DRAFT/NUMERICAL OF FAKE DIMENSION IS HIGH
LIGHTED IN SPITE OF FAKE DIMENSION=OFF
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) - INCORRECT ORIENTATION OF
THE GEOMETRICAL TOLERANCE
DRAFTING(INTDRAFT) / ARROW OF DIFFERENT
THICKNESS FROM A SET OF STANDARD IS CREATED
DRAFTING (GENDRAFT)/ THE ARROW CAN BE DRAGGED
EVEN AFTER SELECTING RIGID
DRAFTING (INTDRAFT) CHANGE TO BACKGROUND
INTDRAFT BR10000059728 HD74298 VIEW BRINGS CATIA CRASH OR LOOP CPU GA
(INTERACTIVE MODE)
LOADING A CATPRODUCT FROM PSN IN AN EXISTING
INTV4-V5 BR10000049214 HD62889 GA
CATIA V5 PRODUCT WILL NOT UPDATE THE V5 TREE.
V4-V5 TRANSITION CAN CONNECT TO ENOVIA LCA
INTV4-V5 BR10000051466 HD65468 GA
THROUGH DATALIFECYCLE TOOL ONLY ONCE
PART : EDGE FILLET : EDGE FILLET FAILS AFTER V4 TO
INTV4-V5 BR10000052083 HD66181 GA
V5 MIGRATION
INTEROP V4 - V5 (ELECTRICAL) - V4 SPT ELEMENTS
INTV4-V5 BR10000052310 HD66419 GA
ARE NOT MIGRATED
V4IDR - GEOMETRY AND LAYER CANNOT CONVERTED
INTV4-V5 BR10000053422 HD67685 GA
CORRECTLY
WHEN V4 DATA IS MIGRATED TO V5 BY CATIA SPEC,
INTV4-V5 BR10000053850 HD68168 AN ERROR IS DISPLAYED AND V4 DATA IS NOT GA
MIGRATED.
V43DI : THOUGH CONTOUR IS IN ERROR WARNING
INTV4-V5 BR10000053908 HD68224 GA
MESSAGE DOES NOT APPEAR
WHEN CHANGED MODEL FROM V4 TO V5,EDGE FILLET
INTV4-V5 BR10000054011 HD68321 GA
DOSE NOT CREAT
CATIA V4 DRAWING WITH RASTER IMAGES RESULTS IN
INTV4-V5 BR10000054018 HD68335 GA
COREDUMP WHEN OPENED IN CATIA V5.
DMUOPT:WRONG NUMBER OF TRAINGLES SHOWN
INTV4-V5 BR10000054076 HD68386 GA
WITH SIMPLIFICATION.
PASTE AS SPEC FROM MODEL DOES NOT PASTE SOME
INTV4-V5 BR10000054821 HD69142 GA
BODIES
V4V5MIGRATION: GEOMETRY MISSING IN V4 MODEL
INTV4-V5 BR10000054883 HD69209 GA
THAT IS OPENED IN V5
WHEN V4V5 MIGRATION IS PERFORMED, AN ERROR
INTV4-V5 BR10000054955 HD69289 GA
(NULL) OCCURS AND SOME DIMENSIONS ARE LACKING
V43DI / THE POSITION OF GRAPHICAL DIMENSION NOT
INTV4-V5 BR10000055094 HD69423 GA
CORRECT BY V4-V5 CONVERSION
GENERATION OF TWIN MODEL FROM CATIA V5 DATA
INTV4-V5 BR10000055187 HD69521 GA
CRASH WITH CATV5TOV4 COMMAND (2)
AFTER TRANSFERRING V4 MODEL, TEXT POSITION IS
INTV4-V5 BR10000055542 HD69892 CHANGED AUTOMATICALLY AND ANCHOR IS SET AS GA
POINT SYMMETRY
THE TEXT OF THE DATA OPENED ON R17SP6 IS NOT
INTV4-V5 BR10000055573 HD69924 GA
DISPLAYED CORRECTLY
INTV4-V5 BR10000055581 HD69932 V4_3DI / ABEND WHEN SAVE AS .MODEL GA
V4_3DI : CATIA ABENDS WHILE READING SPECIFIC
INTV4-V5 BR10000055586 HD69940 GA
MODEL FILE
V43DI: CHAMFER GIVE UPDATE ERROR ON MIGRATED
INTV4-V5 BR10000055664 HD70029 GA
DATA FROM V4
V4/V5 INTEGRATION: FILE/ OPEN OF A SPECIFIC CATIA
INTV4-V5 BR10000055716 HD70084 GA
V4 MODEL FAILS UNDER WINDOWS
GRAPHIC PROPERTIES MODIFICATION ON 2D SECTION
INTV4-V5 BR10000055896 HD70268 GA
OF V4 MODEL CAUSE V5 CRASHES
CMP: SESSION SAVED ON V5R17SP7 CANNOT BE READ
INTV4-V5 BR10000055941 HD70320 GA
ON V4
V4_2DI : SOME FONTS INCORRECTLY DISPLAYED
INTV4-V5 BR10000055944 HD70324 GA
AFTER READING SPECIFIC MODEL FILE
**V4-V5** CAN'T CONVERT .MODEL TO CATPART WITH
INTV4-V5 BR10000056335 HD70715 GA
BATCHMONITOR PLMV4TOV5MIGRATION
INTEROP V4 V5 3D - THE NO SHOW ELEMENTS OF THE
INTV4-V5 BR10000056344 HD70719 V4 DRAWING APPEAR IN THE SHOW AREA OF THE GA
V4VIEWER OF THE V5
V4I : CATIA ABENDS WHILE OPENING A SPECIFIC
INTV4-V5 BR10000056346 HD70723 GA
MODEL
INTEROP V4 V5 3D - THE VIEW SCALE OF THE
INTV4-V5 BR10000056347 HD70724 GA
V4VIEWER OF THE V5 IS DIFFERENT FROM V4 DRAWING
ABEND WHEN OPENING THE V4 DATA WHICH HAVE A
INTV4-V5 BR10000056649 HD71027 GA
PROBLEM ON THE FACE (1)
ABEND WHEN OPENING THE V4 DATA WHICH HAVE A
INTV4-V5 BR10000056651 HD71029 GA
PROBLEM ON THE FACE (2)
V4_3DI : ABEND WHILE SAVING SPECIFIC FILE AS
INTV4-V5 BR10000057387 HD71801 GA
MODEL
V4_3DI: CATIA V5 ABENDS WHEN ACTIVATING THE
INTV4-V5 BR10000057410 HD71827 GA
DRAFT TAB IN AN OPENED SPECIFIC V4 MODEL.
REGRESSION SAVING THIS CATPART AS A MODEL
INTV4-V5 BR10000057522 HD71952 GA
CAUSES CLICK OK TO TERMINATE
WHEN V4 DATA WHICH HAS A PROBLEM IN FACE IS
INTV4-V5 BR10000057717 HD72146 GA
MIGRATED INTO V5, CATIA ABEND (2)
V4 INTEGRATION/ABEND IF USER SAVE THE DATA AS
INTV4-V5 BR10000058450 HD72949 GA
V4(.MODEL) TWO TIMES.
INTV4-V5 BR10000058475 HD72976 CATIA ABEND WHEN PASTING V4 DATA TO V5 GA
INTEROP V4/V5: CATIA CRASHES WHEN SWITCHING
INTV4-V5 BR10000059022 HD73547 TO THE *DRAFT TAB OF A CATIA V4 MODEL GA
CONTAINING A RASTER IMAGE
WHEN V4 DRAWING IS MIGRATED INTO V5, THE
INTV4-V5 BR10000059241 HD73789 GA
POSITION OF TEXT WILL SHIFT
AFTER AEC CONVERSION, V5 TUBE IS OFF CENTER
INTV4-V5 BR10000059310 HD73863 GA
WITH END FITTING CONNECTION POINT
PLMV4TOV5MIGRATION VIEW FILTER FROM V4 NOT
INTV4-V5 BR10000059502 HD74063 GA
RESPECTED
INTEROPV4/V5 : TOOLS / UTILITY /
INTV4-V5 BR10000060116 HD74709 PLMV4TOV5MIGRATION FAILS TO PROCESS SPECFIC GA
MODELS NAMED WITH JAPANESE CHARACTERS
IT3DCDM BR10000055592 HD69949 PB OF REFRAME IN 3DCOM DURING VPM EXPAND. GA
ERROR MESSAGE RETURNED BY
CATVPMPEUSRMETHOD::LOGINVPMSESSION DURING
IT3DCDM BR10000056970 HD71363 GA
RE-CONNECT AFTER 1ST SUCCESSFUL LOGIN IS NOT
TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT
CATPART IS LOADED UNNESSARILY SEVERAL TIMES
IT3DCDM BR10000057566 HD71995 GA
FROM 3DCOM WITH DBLFAIX.UNIX PATH
IT3DCDM BR10000058879 HD73403 QUANTITY FILTER MECHANISM ISSUE GA
HELP VALUES ARE NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN 3D
IT3DCDM BR10000059287 HD73837 GA
COM INTERMEDIATE SEARCH PANEL
LOCK INFO NOT DISPLAYED WHEN FEATURE ATTACHED
IT3DCDM BR10000059400 HD73958 GA
TO V5 DOCUMENT.
THE XML FILE CANNOT BE TAKEN INTO DPE WITH
ITDE5EV5 BR10000057849 HD72295 GA
PPRLOADER.
WITH RECONCILATOR IN BATCH, THE OPTION -
ITEV5CMM BR10000055386 HD69712 GA
PUBLICATION IS NOT WORKING
BLACKBOX SAVED WITH COID/COMPID AS DOCNAME
ITEV5CMM BR10000056929 HD71322 GA
AFTER EXTRACTION IN BATCH
RECONCILED BLACKBOX DOCUMENT HAS NO MML LINK
ITEV5CMM BR10000059795 HD74371 GA
TO THE POINTED CATPART.
ITEV5CV5 / CATIA ABENDS WHEN A PRODUCT WITH
ITEV5CV5 BR10000034560 HD54033 CONSTRAINTS IS SAVED TO ENOVIA AND SENT TO GA
CATIA V5 WITH KOREAN ENVIRONMENT
ITEV5CV5 : CAN NOT SAVE CHANGES TO A
ITEV5CV5 BR10000053171 HD67413 COMPONENT ASSEMBLY WHEN OTHER USER HAS GA
INSTANCE LOCKED
ANY EXTERNAL LINKS TO UNPUBLISHED ELEMENTS IN
ITEV5CV5 BR10000053519 HD67795 GA
IRM/ARM
ITEV5CV5: ENOVIA V5 VPM SERVER CRASH WHEN
ITEV5CV5 BR10000054709 HD69029 GA
SAVING CATPART FROM CATIA UNDER A GCO
SEND TO CATIA V5 AS ASSEMBLY FOR SPECIFIC
ITEV5CV5 BR10000055078 HD69405 GA
CATPRODUCT FAILED WITH ERROR
ITEV5CV5 / CATIA CRASHES WHEN AN ANALYSIS FILE
ITEV5CV5 BR10000055138 HD69440 GA
SENT TO CATIA WITHOUT THE NECESSARY LICENSE
NEW P&O PROCESS DOES NOT TAKE INTO ACCOUNT
ITEV5CV5 BR10000055254 HD69595 GA
THE LOCK SITUATION
ITEV5CV5 BR10000055322 HD69662 PERFORMANCE DECREASE WITH MULTI INSTANCES GA
ITEV5CV5 BR10000055448 HD69791 ITEV5CV5 : INCORRECT INSTANCE IDS IN CATIA GA
ITEV5CV5 : CATIA - ELECTRICAL - EXTERNAL SYSTEM :
ITEV5CV5 BR10000056129 HD70507 GA
LOADING ERROR PROBLEM
THE ENOVIA LOCK PROPAGATION TOOL DOES NOT
ITEV5CV5 BR10000057552 HD71984 DISTINGUISH BETWEEN DEPENDENCY LINKS AND GA
INSTANCES
NOT ABLE TO SAVE CATPARTS FROM CATIA TO ENOVIA
ITEV5CV5 BR10000057826 HD72266 GA
IF EXTERNAL REFERENCES EXIST.
ITEV5CV5 BR10000057979 HD72429 ITEV5CV5 : UNABLE TO ESTABLISH CONTEXTUAL LINKS GA
UNABLE TO SAVE CATIA SESSION TO ENOVIA, IF
ITEV5CV5 BR10000057972 HD72430 GA
COMPONENTS ARE CHANGED BY ANOTHER USER.
UNABLE TO SWITCH TO DESGIN MODE - CLICK OK TO
ITEV5CV5 BR10000058359 HD72849 GA
TERMINATE
LOAD UNLOAD FUNCTIONALITY IN FILE DESK CRASH
ITEV5CV5 BR10000058486 HD72980 THE CONNECTION CATBASEERROR NULLHANDLER GA
131073
ITEV5CV5 BR10000058500 HD73001 ERROR WHEN SAVING NC PROCESSES TO ENOVIA GA
CATIA/NAVI WINDOW CLOSES WITHOUT ASKING USER
ITEV5CV5 BR10000059045 HD73562 GA
TO SAVE PRODUCT
ITEV5CV5 BR10000059277 HD73826 VPMV5NAV : INCONSISTENT DISPLAY IN SAVE-PANEL. GA
ITEV5CV5 : LINK TO CATMATERIAL FILE IS NOT
ITEV5CV5 BR10000059529 HD74091 GA
RECONCILED WITH DATABASE .
INCREMENTAL BACKUP DOES NOT WORK WHEN CATIA
ITVPMCV5 BR10000050091 HD63884 GA
V5 IS LAUNCHED FROM VPM
CV5: NECESSARY SAVE OPERATION WORKS ONLY IN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000052821 HD67021 GA
EVERY SECOND ATTEMPT
THE 'EXTRACT SAVE' FOR THE FIRST PART DOES NOT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000053704 HD68000 GA
UPDATE THE INS TANCE NAME CORRESPONDINGLY
AFTER DUPLICATE, RELATION IN PRODUCT LEVEL
ITVPMCV5 BR10000053839 HD68152 GA
CANNOT RETRIEVE THE CATPART
VPM_LINK: LINK STATUS INCORRECT IN VPM FOR REF-
ITVPMCV5 BR10000053903 HD68211 GA
REF LINK WITHOUT PUBLICATION
CATPDMRECONCILEEV4BATCH DESTROYS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054108 HD68418 ASSOCIATIVITY IF STRUCTURE HOLDS A V4 MODEL GA
AND A V5 COMPONENT
CANCELING THE PUBLICATION WINDOW CORRUPTS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054122 HD68431 GA
THE PUBLICATION DAT A IN THE DATABASE
INTEROP VPM CATIA V5 SESSION HANGS WHILE
LOADING TWO
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054171 HD68486 GA
ELECTRICALGEOMETRICALBUNDLECATPRODUCTS IN
THE SAME CATIA SESSION
NO UPDATE TRIGGERED IN CATIA V5 FOR DE-
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054304 HD68523 GA
SYNCHRONIZED LINK
CLICK OK TO TERMINATE WHEN ADDING APPLICATION
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054326 HD68636 BOX TO EXISTING PRODUCT W CONSTRAINTS FROM GA
VPM .
WRONG LINK (REF-REF) STATE AFTER RE-DIRECTION
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054367 HD68678 GA
OF PUBLISHED EN TITIES IN THE SAME SESSION
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054584 HD68880 CATIA CRASHES WHEN SAVING A DRAWING IN VPM GA
GHOST LINK IN CATIA V5 AFTER REMOVAL OF LINK ON
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054604 HD68921 GA
PUBLISHED ENT ITY
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054634 HD68951 LOAD OF DATA UNDER DLFM CONTROL KO GA
MAPPING BETWEEN SESSION AND DABATASE
DOCUMENTS NOT POSSIBLE IN RECONCILIATOR WHEN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054690 HD69008 GA
ATTRIBUTE C_TYPE_REP IS NOT FILLED WITH DEFAULT
VALUES.
WHEN OPENING DRAWING AND 3D, 3D IS IN STATUS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054688 HD69009 GA
MODIFIED
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054718 HD69036 SAVE FAILS IN CATIA IN CERTAIN SITUATION GA
SAVE OF AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING AFTER AN UPDATE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054721 HD69037 GA
NOT POSSIBLE
SET PDM PROPERTIES WILL OVERWRITE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054742 HD69059 GA
REPRESENTATION IN VPM
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054735 HD69064 MML DESYNCHRONIZED WITH A KWOLEDGE PARAMETER GA
PERFORMANCE PROBLEM WHEN SAVING A
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054751 HD69068 CATDRAWING WITH AN EXTERNAL LINK TO AN OTHER GA
DRAWING.
CATIA ABEND WHEN TRYING TO ATTACH AN ASSEMBLY
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054770 HD69086 GA
DRAWING WITH NO N UPDATED VIEWS
VPM CACHE PATH AS UNC PATH RESULT IN CRASH IN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054785 HD69101 GA
CATIA DURING LOAD OF DOCUMENT OR MODEL.
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054963 HD69276 CONSTRAINTS ARE DELETED AFTER A CUT IN CATIA V5 GA
LINK OF ASSOCIATIVE ASSEMBLY DRAWING IS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054985 HD69310 GA
CORRUPTED
ASSOCIATE CATDRW AS SECOND DOC IN PSN LEADS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000054981 HD69313 TO ERROR MSG AN INTERNAL ERROR HAS OCCURED GA
UNABLE TO SAVE THE DATA ERR 20818
CATPART PROPERTIES NOT UPDATED AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055107 HD69433 GA
RECONCILIATION WITH FBDI USEREXIT
NO LONGER ERROR MESSAGE IN VPM/3DCOM ON SAVE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055164 HD69497 GA
OF FROZEN DOCUME NT
UPDATE AND SAVE ARE ALWAYS ASKED FOR A
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055190 HD69531 PRODUCT THAT HAS BEEN LOADED TWICE TO THE GA
SAME CATIAV5 SESSION.
ITVPMCV5: LINK NOT DESYNCHRONIZED WHEN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055211 HD69552 GA
RENAMING PUBLICATION
VPM INTEROP : PSA MTBF : READ A CATPART FROM
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055218 HD69560 GA
VPM INTO CATIA V5 LEADS TO CATIA CRASH
VPM INTEROP : MTBF PSA : FILE SAVE LEADS TO CATIA
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055236 HD69578 GA
CRASH
PRODUCT WILL BE OPENED 'MODIFIED BY
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055258 HD69599 GA
SYNCHRONIZATION' WHEN OPENED FROM CACHE MODE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055451 HD69793 MARKED CATPARTS CAN NOT BE DETECTED. GA
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055452 HD69798 FILE BASE DESIGN IMPORT FAILED WITH PUBLICATION GA
DECIMAL VALUES ARE NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055461 HD69810 WITH FBDI/EPE IN VPM BASE IN ENGLISH AND OS IN GA
FRENCH
UPDATE REQUIRED FOR UP-TO-DATE DOCUMENT AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055561 HD69909 GA
UNDO ON ENTITIE S
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055633 HD69988 MISSING MML ON SAVE GA
INTEROP VPM - CATIA V5 (DRAFTING) - DRAWING WILL
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055645 HD70003 NOT SHOW CORRECT LINE THICKNESS AT OPEN FROM GA
VPM
INCORRECT MML GRAPH FOR REF-REF LINKS AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055665 HD70030 GA
DELETION OF A PUBLISHED PARAMETER
INTEROP VPM - CATIA V5 (ELECTRICAL) / THERE IS A
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055674 HD70038 DELAY WHEN THE ROUTE DEFINITION WINDOW IS GA
MOVED.
THE EXISTED RESULT OF THE CLASH COMPUTATION IS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055691 HD70057 NOT DISPLAY WHILE THE CLASH COMPUTATION IS GA
DOING ON R17
INTEROP VPM - CATIA V5 (ELECTRICAL) / BUNDLE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055697 HD70064 GOES THROUGH THE SUPPORT RETAINER - GA
IMPOSSIBLE TO USE SUPPORT AS RETAINER.
NOMAD SESSION IS CORRUPTED BY A CATIAV5 CRASH
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055698 HD70067 GA
DURING SAVE.
INTEROP VPM / CATIA V5 (ELECTRICAL) - PUBLICATION
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055701 HD70068 ARE MISSING WHEN UPDATING POSITION ON A GA
BUNDLE ROUTED THROUGH A RETAINER SUPPORT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000055975 HD70358 CATIA V5 AND VPM CRASH WHILE SAVING GA
LINKS STATUS INCORRECT IN VPM FOR
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056093 HD70468 SYNCHRONIZED LINKS IN CATIA V5 AFTER EXTRACT GA
SAVE WITH NEW DOCUMENT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056114 HD70496 NOTHING LOADED IN CATIA V5 AFTER COLLAPSE NODE GA
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056132 HD70510 SAVE PANEL WILL BLINK AFTER MODEL CLOSING GA
CATPART-CATDRAWING LINK REMOVED WHEN SAVING
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056164 HD70541 GA
CATDRAWING FROM CATIA DRAWING SESSION ONLY
INCORRECT LINKS STATUS FOR CONTEXTUAL LINKS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056185 HD70564 WITH OR WITHOUT PUBLICATION AFTER A MOVE OF GA
THE SOURCE PART .
BAD BEHAVIOUR OF MML LINKS WITH FLEXIBLE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056282 HD70659 GA
ASSEMBLIES
INCONSISTENT CATIA V5 BEHAVIOR WHEN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056367 HD70744 REDIRECTING A PUBLICATION AFTER DELETING A GA
PUBLISHED ENTITY FOR A REF-REF LINK
PUBLICATION DATA CORRUPTION IN VPM DB WHEN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056371 HD70748 GA
ERROR IS RETURNED BY AUTHORIZEDCATIAV5SAVE
CONTEXTUAL LINK WITH OR WITHOUT PUBLICATION IS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056451 HD70822 WRONGLY SHOWN AS UP-TO-DATE IF ERROR DURING GA
SAVE
INCORRECT LINK STATUS FOR CONTEXTUAL LINK WITH
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056477 HD70860 OR WITHOUT PUBLICATION AFTER MOVE OF RESULT GA
PART.
INCORRECT LINK STATUS WHEN SAVING PRODUCT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056483 HD70862 GA
CHANGES WITH SAVE M ANAGEMENT
WHEN WORKING IN CACHE MODE, DRAWING VIEWS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056660 HD71038 GA
WILL NO ASK FOR UPDATE
TO OPEN 2 WINDOWS IN CV5 FROM THE SAME PSN IS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056772 HD71150 GA
NOT POSSIBLE WI TH R18 SP2 AND ENOVIAVPM16 PTF7
INCORRECT STATUS IN VPM FOR REF-REF LINKS AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056781 HD71159 GA
RECONNECTION TO RENAMED PUBLICATION
NEW UID AFTER EXTRACT SAVE WITH NEW DOCUMENT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056830 HD71216 NOT TAKEN INTO A CCOUNT WHEN CHECKING STATUS GA
OF REF-REF LINK WITHOUT PUBLICATIONS
BAD PERFORMANCES WHEN SWITCHING A PRODUCT IN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056845 HD71230 GA
PROD MODE
CONTEXTUAL LINK STATUS INCONSISTENT BETWEEN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000056896 HD71290 GA
CATIA AND VPM
MISSING PARTS IN ASSEMBLY STRUCTURE AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057169 HD71566 GA
POSITIONING IN 'ASSEMBLY DESIGN'
ITEV5CV5 : ASSERTIONFAILEDERROR WHILE SAVING
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057341 HD71747 GA
CATALOG BACK TO ENOVIA AFTER RESOLVING PARTS.
UNNECESSARY LINK CREATION IS ADDED TO THE SAVE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057342 HD71754 GA
OPERATION FOR A CATPART HAVING A REFREF LINK.
INTEROP VPM - CATIA V5 (ELECTRICAL) / ALL BUNDLES
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057338 HD71756 GO THROUGH THE SAME ENTRY POINT AFTER GA
COMMAND.
BAD RENAME OF SUBPRODUCTS STORED FROM V5 IN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057454 HD71872 GA
VPM
MISSING INSTANCES IN PSN AFTER A COPY/PASTE IN
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057580 HD72008 GA
CATIA V5
ASSEMBLY AND DRAWING SAVED IN VPM AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057579 HD72009 RECONCILIATION WHILE ONLY DRAWING SHOULD BE GA
SAVED
EVEN IF LOCK IS DONE, VPM INTEROPERABILITY
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057786 HD72222 ADMINISTRATION CAN BE CHANGED BY THE GENERAL GA
USER
CATIAV5 CRASHES DURING CLOSE OF A CATPART
ITVPMCV5 BR10000057874 HD72324 GA
AFTER A SAVE TO VPM.
EXTERNAL REFERENCE NOT DELETED WHEN ERROR
ITVPMCV5 BR10000058041 HD72503 GA
RETURNED DURING SAVE.
CONTEXTUAL LINK WITH OR WITHOUT PUBLICATION IS
ITVPMCV5 BR10000058158 HD72643 WRONGLY SHOWN AS UP-TO-DATE IF ERROR DURING GA
SAVE
CHECKING TIMESTAMP INCREASES ABOUT TWICE
ITVPMCV5 BR10000058253 HD72739 GA
LOADING TIMES
WARNING MESSAGE ATTEMPT TO ACCESS SOME DATA
ITVPMCV5 BR10000058356 HD72845 FROM THE DATABASE INTERNAL ERROR DISPLAYED IN GA
CATIAV5.
ASSOCIATIVITY ON DIMENSION IS LOST AFTER
ITVPMCV5 BR10000058897 HD73421 GA
VERSIONNING.
USE A PART TEMPLATE ALL PARTS OF THE CATPRODUCT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000059216 HD73757 GA
ARE LOADED
INCORRECT STATUS FOR REF-REF LINKS WITHOUT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000059518 HD74076 GA
PUBLICATION.
ITVPMCV5 BR10000059750 HD74328 ERROR 20828 DURING EXTRACT SAVE OF DRAWING GA
COPY/PASTE OPERATIONS IN CATIA ARE NOT
ITVPMCV5 BR10000059948 HD74530 GA
CORRECTLY SAVED IN VPM.
ERROR MESSAGE DURING RECONCILIATION IN BATCH
ITVPMCV5 BR10000060119 HD74707 GA
WITH EWE
CANNOT OPEN 2 PRODUCTS IN DIFFERENT CATIA
ITVPMCV5 BR10000060328 HD74938 GA
WINDOWS FROM 1 PSN
ITVPMNT BR10000053802 HD68109 OPEN IN A NEW WINDOW PERFORMANCE PROBLEM GA
RECONCILIATOR / GHOST LINK GENERATED WHEN A
ITVPMNT BR10000055047 HD69378 GA
PART SAVED TO LOCAL DISC IS TRIED TO RECONCILE
PUBLISH SUBSCRIBE PRODUCES EXTRA INFO,
JDESKTOP BR10000052739 HD66917 GA
CONSUMING CPU AND AFFECTING PERFORMANCE
SEARCH RESULTS MISLABELED WHEN ATTRIBUTE
FILTER HAS 2 ENTRIES
USER CAN REPLACE PART ON ASSEMBLY RELATION
LOCKED TO ANOTHER USER.
FI: WHEN STARTING THE FILE INTROSPECTION IN
JDESKTOP BR10000057778 HD72217 DBQMODE ON A SERVER, ONE TWO PROCESSES ARE GA
STARTED AND USE 100% OF 1 OR 2 CPUS
NEW WORKPACKAGE REFERENCE OPTION CAUSES WPR
LINKED TO 2 BLACK BOXES
JDESKTOP BR10000059541 HD74097 ELECCABLEDBBATCHREPORTER FAILS WITH LARGE PRC GA
KNOWLADV BR10000051831 HD65879 KWA: RULE - RULE IS NOT ADAPTED FOR A DIMENSION. GA
KNOWLADV BR10000053647 HD67932 KWA : RULE IN A UDF DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY. GA
KWA : RENAME ACTION IS LOST WHEN SAVE -
KNOWLADV BR10000054423 HD68738 GA
PROPERTIES - VBSCRIPT
KWA : AN ERROR OCCURS WHEN CREATING A
FORMULA AT PRODUCT LEVEL
KWA : CATIA HANGS WHEN INVALID PARAMETER TYPE
IS ENTERED WHILE CREATING FORMULA.
KWA : EDIT FORMULA IS NOT ACCESSIBLE FROM
DEFINE OTHER PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX
KWA: REACTION DEFINITION CHANGES WHEN
SPECIFIC CATPART IS OPENED IN FRENCH INTERFACE.
PART: EXTERNAL PARAMETERS UNABLE TO
SYNCHRONIZE AFTER LINKING TO A NEW CATPART
KNOWLADV BR10000055264 HD69606 KA : FORMULA IS BROKEN AFTER PROPERTIES EDITION GA
KNOWLADV BR10000056142 HD70520 KWA : PARAMETER SET CAN NOT BE HIDDEN GA
KWA: RULE - UPDATE RELATION AT GLOBAL UPDATE
COMMAND NOT ACTIVATED.
KWA: UPDATE OPTION IS NOT ACTIVATED FOR ALL
RELATIONS
KWE: SOME ATTRIBUTES MISSING IN LANGUAGE
BROWSER WINDOW OF ELECTRICAL DISCIPLINE.
KWA : REACTION CREATED BY KNOWLEDGEWARE
ACTION IS NOT PERFORMED CORRECTLY
KWA: RULE - IMPOSSIBLE TO CREATE RULE ON
SPECIFIC PARAMETER OF EXTREMUM.
REACTION ISN'T CREATED IN THE TREE WHEN
OPTIMIZATION IS SET AS DESTINATION
KWA : ABEND WHILE DOUBLE CLICKING BLACK LINE
FROM FORMULA EDITOR DIALOG BOX
KWA: RULE CREATED ON R17 LEVEL DOES NOT WORK
CORRECTLY
KWA: RULE CREATED ON R17 LEVEL DOES NOT WORK
CORRECTLY
KWA: ASSOCIATION IS REMOVED WHEN A DESIGN
TABLE IS REPLACED.
KWA : CATIA ABEND WHILE SAVING AFTER URLS &
COMMENT IS PERFORMED
KWA: THE NUMBER OF INSIDE ELEMENTS ARE
CHANGED
KWA: UNABLE TO USE = SYMBOL TO CREATE
ASSOCIATIVITY WITH PARAMETERS
ASD : UPDATE : CAPART CANNOT BE UPDATED WHEN
UPDATE ICON IS CLICKED
KWA : RUNNING ACTION(KWA) DOES NOT UPDATE
GEOMETRY ELEMENTS
KWA: THE CHARACTER OF A PARAMETER IS NOT
DISPLAYED CORRECTLY
KNOWLADV BR10000059139 HD73679 KWA: INCORRECT VALUE IS DISPLAYED GA
KWA : ABEND WHILE CHANGING PARAMETER FROM
SPECIFIC CATPART
KWA: CATIA ABENDS IF RULE IS APPLIED TO THE
SURFACE.
KWA: CATIA ABENDS WHEN RULE OF ASSEMBLE IS
UPGRADED.
KWA: UNDO CANCEL ERROR MAKES THE KNOWLEDGE
RULE WORK INCORRECTLY.
INCOHERENCE IN VPM AND CATIA AFTER EDIT LINKS
KNOWLADV BR10000060286 HD74872 ON EXTERNALS PARAMETERS (REF-REF LINKS WITH OR GA
WITHOUT PUBLICATION)
KNOWLEXP BR10000053662 HD67946 KWE : RULES IN NC STARTER MODEL ARE NOT APPLIED. GA
KWE : CATIA ABEND WHEN A 'NO DIMENSION'
KNOWLEXP BR10000054397 HD68716 GA
PARAMETER IS ADDED TO A DESIGN TABLE
KWA : UNIT CONVERSION : KILOGRAM-FORCE TO
NEWTON CONVERSION IS WRONG
KWE: RUKES - MANY RULE ERRORS AND WARNINGS
DISPLAYED AND PART CANNOT BE MODIFIED.
KWE: DISTANCEDIR - WHEN PAD IS SELECTED BY
DISTANCEDIR, IT BECOMES ERROR.
KWE : ABEND WHILE DOUBLE CLICK ON CERTAIN
ATTRIBUTE FROM OBJECT BROWSER OF CHECK EDITOR
KWE : FTA DIMENSION : CHECK DOES NOT WORK IF
FTA DIMENSION VALUE IS USED TO DEFINE CONDITION
PART : UDF : WRONG OPTION OF A RULE WHEN
INSTANCIATED THROUGH A UDF
KNOWLEXP BR10000059295 HD73844 KWE: CATPART UNABLE TO UPDATE GA
PART EDITOR DOES NOT DISPLAY AFFECTING ACTIONS
L_CHGMGT BR10000054389 HD68703 GA
ON WHERE USED TAB
ADDITION OF ACTION HISTORY OBJECT CAUSES THE
L_CHGMGT BR10000054575 HD68894 GA
ACTION OBJECT TO APPEAR UPDATED
L_DOCMGT BR10000055679 HD70043 SPACEMAP FILTER IS LOCKING ENOVIA OBJECTS GA
L_DOCMGT BR10000059086 HD73578 CEG - NO BOUNDING BOX CREATED GA
L_LCANAV BR10000056001 HD70411 ADVANCED SEARCH COUNT FAILURE GA
CATIAV4 2D & 3D MODELS DO NOT CONSISTENTLY
L_RELNAV BR10000053437 HD67700 GA
OPEN IN LCA NAVIGATOR 2D & 3D VIEWERS
ABSTRACT: TIMESTAMP ON AR AND II NOT MANAGED
L_RELNAV BR10000054344 HD68655 GA
PROPERLY AT STEP IMPORT
WRONG PASSWORD ERROR MESSAGE IS NOT
L_RELNAV BR10000054522 HD68845 GA
REMOVED WHEN PROBLEM IS SOLVED
EDIT V_MATRIX10-12 BY ATTRIBUTE VIEW, DIGIT
L_RELNAV BR10000054637 HD68953 GA
NUMBER BECOMES 6
ENOVIA BROWSER IS NOT WORKING AFTER
L_RELNAV BR10000057257 HD71643 GA
INSTALLING JAVA 1 5 0
DIFFERENT CHILD PARTS IN DIFFERENT INSTANCES OF
L_RELNAV BR10000057475 HD71878 GA
THE SAME PART REFERENCE
L_RELNAV BR10000057658 HD72074 WORKFLOW ACTIVITY NAME GA
BEFORECHECK() AND AFTERCHECK() ARE NOT CALLLED
L_RELNAV BR10000057829 HD72272 FOR DATE, MVA, MULTI-LINE OR AT SWITCH FROM GA
TEXT FIELD TO COMBO BOX
L_RELNAV BR10000058097 HD72562 REMOVAL OF VISUAL DUPLICATES OF ASSEMBLIES GA
DIFFERENT CHILD PARTS IN DIFFERENT INSTANCES OF
L_RELNAV BR10000058110 HD72581 GA
THE SAME PART REFERENCE
PRODUCT EDITOR DOES NOT DISPLAY THE SEARCH
L_RELNAV BR10000059166 HD73709 GA
SCREEN FOR PENETRA TIONS
BEFORECHECK() AFTERCHECK() IS NOT CALLED FOR
L_RELNAV BR10000059614 HD74176 SENSIBLE ATTRIBU TE DISPLAYED AS COMBO BOX GA
WITH HELP VALUES (BUILT WITH VPMIQATTRIBUTE:
AFFECTED OBJECT IS CREATED INCORRECTLY AND HAS
L_WFLDEF BR10000051405 HD65384 GA
WRONG SOURCE
INCORRECT MSG UNDER OPERATION IN HISTORY TAB
L_WFLDEF BR10000051469 HD65462 GA
USING CATICFGMODIFICATION::MODIFY()
SPLIT ACTION DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY WHEN
L_WFLDEF BR10000052461 HD66551 GA
AFFECTED OBJECT HAS WRONG SOURCE
L_WFLDEF BR10000054320 HD68632 CONNECTION ERROR AFTER FILTERING GA
L_WFLDEF BR10000055302 HD69642 ENOVIA PORTAL SETTINGS PANEL LOCKS UP ENOVIA GA
ACTION ATTACHMENTS LEFT IN TABLE EVEN WHEN
L_WFLDEF BR10000059063 HD73574 GA
OBJECT IS DELETED FROM ENOVIA
MACHINING (LMG) / INCORRECT FEEDRATE ON
LATHMACH BR10000052020 HD66106 GA
APPROACH MACRO.
MACHINING (LMG) / GOUGING PRODUCED WHEN
LATHMACH BR10000054703 HD69024 CIRCULAR TYPE LIFTOFF IS SET AT MORE TH AN 90 GA
DEGREES
MACHINING (LMG) / GROOVE ROUGHING-INCORRECT
TOOL POSITION WHEN SWITCHING FROM P9 TO P9R.
MACHINING (LMG) / INCORRECT VISUALIZATION OF
THE TOOL TIP AFTER REPLAYING THE TOOLPATH.
MACHINING (LMG) / GROOVE FINISH TURNING
OPERATION:WRONG TOOLPATH.
MACHINING (LMG) / TOOL DISPLAY PROBLEM IN
SEQUENTIAL OPERATION WHEN USING NEXT BUTTON.
MACHINING (LMG) / MISSING MOVE WHEN SWITCHING
FROM P9 TO P9R IN GROOVE BY LEVEL.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / THE PART IS DESTROYED
DURING ROUGHING.
MACHINING (LMG) / RAPID MOVES TO WALL
GENERATED WHEN ROUND INSERT IS USED.
MACHINING (LMG) / OUTPUT POINT AT WRONG
POSITION IN PROFILE FINISH TURNING.
MACHINING / WHEN CHANGE WORKBENCH TO
MACHINING SHAPE DISAPPEARS.
MANUFACTURING (LMG): NO VALUE IS SEEN IN
SEARCH TOOL ASEMBLY QUERY
MANUFACTURING (PMG): PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
WITH VIDEO REPLAY
MACHINING (LMG) / IN THREAD TURNING NO MACROS
OUTPUT/DISPLAYED.
MACHINING ( MSLMG) / TURNING TOOL CHANGE
LATHMACH BR10000058345 HD72832 EDITION OR ROUGH TURNING COMPUTATION CATIA GA
ABENDS.
MANUFACTURING (LMG): SELECTION OF LATHE TOOL
ASSEMBLY RESULTS IN DIALOG BOX CORRUPTION
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / STOCK PROFILE SKETCH NOT
CREATED FOR SPECIFIC MACHINE.
MACHINING (LMG) / WRONG TOOL MOTION WHEN
RETURNING FROM A LINKING MACRO.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / PATH IS NOT CORRECT WITH '
TRACUT DISPLAY MODE '.
THE FIND- HIGHLIGHT ROWS AND SORT FUNCTIONS IN
LIFECYCL BR10000051247 HD65187 THE OPERATIONS PANEL ARE CURRENTLY NOT GA
WORKING AS DESIRED
WHEN UTILIZING THE OPERATIONS PANEL IN ENOVIA
LIFECYCL BR10000053857 HD68161 LCA IT IS NECES SARY TO USE THE FIND HIGHLIGHT GA
ROWS COMMAND
LIFECYCL BR10000057943 HD72399 CHILDREN OF AFFECTED OBJECT SHOWN AS IN ACTION GA
USING CATDUA IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE
LIFECYCL BR10000058016 HD72478 CHECKBLACKBOXLINKVALIDIT Y UTILITY NEGATES THE GA
RESULTS OF CHECKBLACKBOXLINKVALIDITY
LIFECYCL BR10000058328 HD72812 CANNOT PROMOTE A RELEASE ACTION TO COMPLETE GA
WHEN SET PWD VARIABLE TO SHARED FOLDER,
MAB BR10000054552 HD68870 GA
UTILITY DOES NOT START
MAB BR10000056549 HD70930 MKMK FAILS IN VISUAL STUDIO GA
CMP : IR FOR COMPILATION ERROR ON PERSISTENT
MAB BR10000056886 HD71283 GA
CELL MODULE
FAULT LIST DOESN'T SHOW TOOL NAME WITH MILL-
MACHTSIM BR10000056532 HD70913 GA
TURN MACHINE
MISSING CGR ERROR OCCURS AFTER BATCH MODE
MACHTSIM BR10000058175 HD72612 GA
EXECUTION
MACHTSIM BR10000058899 HD73425 INCREASE FILE SIZE DUE TO CHANGE TREE STRUCTURE GA
REQUEST FOR EXPOSITION OF CAA APIS OF
MANUINTF BR10000054938 HD69271 GA
FRAMEWORK DNBEKPINTERFACES
CRASH IN PARTIAL SIMULATION (DNBIVNCTPMODIFY),
WHEN STARTDOF IS NOT EQUAL 1 (R17SP6, R18SP1)
CATIMFGACTIVITYMACROMOTION ::
GETCLEARANCEMODE CAN T RETURN THE RIGHT MODE
MANUINTF BR10000056924 HD71306 THE NEW CATIA BEHAVIOR DIDN T WORK AT CAA MO GA
CATALOG : PROBLEM WHEN SYNCHRONIZING
MECGEN BR10000056899 HD71295 GA
CATALOGS
SYNCHRONIZATION PROCESS DOES NOT FINISH AFTER
MECMOD BR10000053807 HD68111 GA
4 DAYS
MECMOD BR10000054375 HD68682 CAN NOT GET CORRECT IMPORTED PART. GA
MECMOD BR10000056813 HD71197 CANNOTPROPAGATECOLORATTRIBUTES GA
MECMOD BR10000057718 HD72149 CATIA CRASHED IF AFTER SYNCHRONIZATION PROCESS GA
CATIMECHANICALMODELER REPLACEMENT - GHOST
MECMODIN BR10000051576 HD65594 GA
LINK CHECK
THE LINE ELEMENT NOT INCLUDED IN THE DATA TREE
MECMODIN BR10000057174 HD71573 GA
CAN BE ACQUIRED IN CATIBODYREQUEST::GETRESULTS
MEQ BR10000057362 HD71775 DESIGNFASTENERS LOOSE ASSIGNMENT TO PROCESS GA
REQUEST FOR USER DEFINED PRODUCT CADPATH
MEQ BR10000059480 HD74037 GA
LOCATION FOR STORING IPM, STAGE DRAWING
MHUBNAV BR10000058808 HD73325 OPEN IN READ ONLY MODE GA
I CANNOT IMPORT IDI FILE INTO V5R16SP3 AND
MID BR10000056892 HD71278 GA
R17SP3.
MTD : TECHNOLOGICAL RESULTS : EORRO MESSAGE
MOLDTOOL BR10000052121 HD66216 GA
WITH TECHNOLOGICAL RESULTS EXECUTION
MTD : UPDATE SUMMARY ICON IS NOT CHANGED TO
THE GRAY-OUT : THIS IS WRONG
MTD : WORK IS LOST WHEN UNDO AFTER A SPLIT
OPERATION.
MTD: SPLIT- EXTERNAL REFERENCE NOT DELETED
WHEN SIMULTANEOUSLY TWO COMPONENTS DELETED.
MOLDTOOL BR10000054752 HD69063 MTD : INTERSECT : INTERSECT FAILS ON UPDATE GA
MTD: FEATURE SELECTION ERROR WHILE INSERTING A
GEOMETRICAL SET TO CORE PLATE OF MOLD TOOL.
MTD : CATIA IS CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY WHILE
MOLDTOOL BR10000054834 HD69160 SPLITTING THE CORE SURFACE WITH 200 EJECTOR GA
PINS
MTD: SPLIT SYNCHRONIZATION: TOOL SPLITS ARE NOT
FOUND WHEN COMPONENT IS MOVED
MTD : DELETE COMPONENT : WHEN A COMPONENT IS
MOLDTOOL BR10000055014 HD69346 DELETED THE REFERENCE ELEMENTS ASSOCIATED TO GA
IT ARE NOT DELETED
MTD : UNDO : THE UNDO HISTORY LOST WHEN
EJECTOR PLACEMENT
MTD: USER COMPONENT - PREVIEW POSITION IS
INCORRECT.
MTD: USER COMPONENT - CONSTRAINT CREATED AT
WRONG POINT.
MTD: CANCEL/ALL UNDO HISTROY IS LOST THEN
CANCEL COMMAND IS USED
MTD : SPLIT SUFACE CAN NOT BE HIDDEN PROPERLY
IN JAPANESE OS
MTD: LONG TIME FOR CREATION OF EJECTOR AFTER
MOLDTOOL BR10000057439 HD71854 CHANGING THE WORKBENCH FROM PART TO MACHINE GA
TOOL DESIGN
MTD: INCORRECT REFERENCE NUMBER OF MISUMI-
GBHEZ BUSHING.
MTD: BETWEEN FROM AND TO LIST LOST WHILE
EDITING THE COMPONENT.
MOLDTOOL BR10000057794 HD72230 MTD : ABEND WHILE EDITING INSERTED SLEEVE GA
MTD: CRASH WHEN WE PLACE MTD COMPONENT WITH
UPDATE ERROR
MTD: ALL THE FACES ARE SELECTED DESPITE ONE
FACE IS POINTED
MTD: INCORRECT CONTEXTUAL DISPLAY ON
CAPSCREW COMPONENT.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / ERROR MESSAGE LOADING A
MTBLDR BR10000055163 HD69496 GA
D5 DEVICES IN CATIA.
MACHINING (NCMACSIMU) / MATERIAL REMOVAL IN
MTBLDR BR10000055559 HD69908 MACHINE SIMULATION IS OK WITH A 0 HOME GA
POSITION, BUT KO WITH THE REAL ONE.
NCREVIEW BR10000057912 HD72368 CAT V5 DL1 UNFOLD VERSUS DELMIA SMP FLATTENING GA
MACRO : DELETED MACRO APPEARS IN THE COMMAND
OBJMOD BR10000052188 HD66295 GA
LIST
OBJMOD BR10000053061 HD67304 INCORRECT DOCUMENTATION OF CATDUA RULE UAV_0 GA
OBJECT MANAGER: SAVE MANAGEMENT / WRONG
OBJMOD BR10000053069 HD67307 GA
LINKS AFTER SAVE MANAGEMENT APPLY PATTERN.
OBJMOD BR10000053170 HD67412 CATIA ABENDS WHILE OPENING A SPECIFIC CATPART GA
FILE PATH OF THE DESIGN TABLE EXCEL BECOMES A
OBJMOD BR10000053592 HD67869 GA
FOLDER PATH EVEN IF THE ENVIRONMENT IS DL NAME
TOOLS / OPTIONS / INFRASTRUCTURE / PRODUCT
OBJMOD BR10000053999 HD68311 STRUCTURE / TREE CUSTOMIZATION CRASHES UNDER GA
SOLARIS
FILE : SAVE : CATPART GETS CORRUPTED WHILE
OBJMOD BR10000054048 HD68359 GA
SAVING ON DISK OF INSUFFICIENT CAPACITY
UI: EDIT LINKS: ATTRIBUTE LINK IS REPLACED, THE
OBJMOD BR10000054064 HD68376 GA
FILE REPLACED LINK REMAINS
UI: THE TOP OF TREE DOES NOT HAVE THE NAME BY
OBJMOD BR10000054140 HD68455 GA
CREATION FROM OS.
MEASURE BETWEEN - CATIA HANGS ON SELECTING
OBJMOD BR10000054197 HD68477 GA
TWO SURFACES IN MEASURE BETWEEN.
MEASURE BETWEEN : MEASURE BETWEEN OPERATOR
OBJMOD BR10000054207 HD68521 GA
YIELDS INCORRECT RESULT INSIDE A DRAWING
UI: BLANK MESSAGE WINDOW APPEARS AND MARK OF
OBJMOD BR10000054345 HD68656 GA
UPDATE ALL ICON DOES NOT CHANGE TO GRAY-OUT
OBJMOD BR10000054417 HD68736 OM: CATIA ABENDS ON OPENING CATPART. GA
OM : CATIA ABENDS WHILE PERFORMING CATDUAV5 IN
OBJMOD BR10000054566 HD68884 GA
A SPECIFIC CATPRODUCT.
IN DLNAME ENVIRONMENT, BAD RESPONSE TIME TO
OBJMOD BR10000054723 HD69041 GA
DISPLAY THE OPEN WINDOW
SDD MODEL CAN NOT OPEN AFTER A NORMAL &
OBJMOD BR10000054728 HD69047 GA
SUCCESS SAVE
FILE / OPEN : CATIA HANGS WHEN OPENING A
OBJMOD BR10000054802 HD69126 SPECIFIC CATPART WHEN THE 3D CURVES ACCURACY GA
RATIO IS SET TO 0.1
OM: CANNOT OPERATE VIEW BY MOUSE OPERATION
OBJMOD BR10000054842 HD69167 AFTER THE SPECIFICATION TREE IS HIDDEN WHEN GA
ACTIVE.
OM: THE NEW DIALOG BOX IS LOCATED AT THE
OBJMOD BR10000054862 HD69186 BOTTOM RIGHT OF THE SECOND DISPLAY, EVEN IF GA
CATIA IS ON PRIMARY DISPLAY
OPTIONS : LINKED DOCUMENT LOCALIZATION : NAMES
OBJMOD BR10000054898 HD69224 OF FOLDERS CREATED WITH FULL WIDTH CHARACTERS GA
ARE NOT KEPT CORRECTLY
MACRO : CATIA HANGS WHILE RUNNING A MACRO TO
OBJMOD BR10000054930 HD69256 GA
SET COLORS TO FACES
TOOLS / MACRO START RECORDING: CANNOT BE
OBJMOD BR10000054946 HD69277 GA
REPEATED UNDER WINDOWS 64-BIT
PART : DOC_6 : PART CONTAINING DOC_6 RULE
OBJMOD BR10000055273 HD69615 GA
CANNOT BE SAVED WHEN OPENED BY NEW FROM
IMAGE CAPTURED CAN ONLY BE SAVED IN BMP AND
OBJMOD BR10000055321 HD69660 GA
QUALITY ALSO DETERIORATES
OM: PASTE - CATIA ABEND WHEN PASTE IS
OBJMOD BR10000055338 HD69670 GA
PERFORMED.
UI: SHOW SCREEN COLOR BECOMES A HIDE SCREEN
OBJMOD BR10000055343 HD69684 GA
COLOR
WHEN 'LOCK TOOLBAR POSITION'IS ACTIVE AND IT IS
OBJMOD BR10000055474 HD69822 GOING TO MOVE TOOLBAR,THE TOOLBAR DISPLAY GA
WILL BREAK
OM: FILE OPEN - WHEN FILE IS OPENED, CATIA
OBJMOD BR10000055521 HD69870 GA
TERMINATED.
UI: CATIA DISAPPEARS AFTER EXITING FROM FULL
OBJMOD BR10000055783 HD70161 GA
SCREEN IF DISPLAY IS SET AS DUAL MODE
PRODUCT: NO MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED TO INFORM
OBJMOD BR10000056078 HD70455 THAT CGR NOT CORRECTLY CREATED AND THEN THAT GA
GEOMETRY NOT DISPLAYED
OM: CATIA ABEND WHILE CHANGING 3D ACCURACY
OBJMOD BR10000056115 HD70491 GA
VALUE IN A SPECIFIC CATPART.
FILE OPEN : DRAWING WITH LINK TO VPM DATABASE
OBJMOD BR10000056378 HD70755 GA
CAN NOT BE OPENED.
UI OPTIONS ACTIVE STATUS NOT DISPLAYED IN
OBJMOD BR10000056397 HD70781 GA
LINKED DOCUMENT LOCALIZATION FIELD
OM: SAVE - DATA CANNOT BE SAVED AFTER PASTING
OBJMOD BR10000056388 HD70810 EXISTING BODY IN SAME CATPART AND OSM ERROR IS GA
DISPLAYED.
OM: RENDER STYLE - INCORRECT VIEW TYPE FOR R17
OBJMOD BR10000056590 HD70963 GA
DATA OPENED IN R18.
UIN: THE TOOLBAR MOVES TO DEFAULT POSITION ON
OBJMOD BR10000056582 HD70964 GA
CHANGING WORKBENCH
THE ACCESS PATH OF A FILE IS NOT KEPT BY THE
OBJMOD BR10000056625 HD71002 GA
COMMAND
OBJMOD BR10000056672 HD71053 FILE OPEN - CATIA ABENDS WHEN OPENING CATPART. GA
ASD : VISU MODE: ABEND WHILE OPENING SPECIFIC
OBJMOD BR10000056678 HD71060 GA
CATPART WITH CACHE AND SPECIFIC 3D ACCURACY
CATIA HANGS WHEN OPENING SOME CERTAIN
OBJMOD BR10000056841 HD71206 GA
CATPARTS
OM: SAVE/SAVE OPERTAION FAILS WITH ERROR
OBJMOD BR10000056855 HD71241 GA
MESSAGE
CONSOLE : MESSAGE APPEARS IN CONSOLE WINDOW
OBJMOD BR10000057060 HD71464 GA
WHILE OPENING DRAFTING WORKBENCH
UI : CGR : CGR DATA CANNOT BE DELETED WHEN IT IS
OBJMOD BR10000057221 HD71627 GA
REPLACED
OM: HIGH MEMORY IS CONSUMED WHEN NO FILE IS
OBJMOD BR10000057229 HD71636 GA
OPENED
OM: SEARCH - AFTER SEARCH IS USED BY
OBJMOD BR10000057332 HD71749 FAVOURITES, RESULT OF GENERAL SEARCH IS NOT GA
DISPLAYED.
ASD : ABEND WHILE RECOVERING SPECIFIC
OBJMOD BR10000057357 HD71769 GA
CATPRODUCT BY WARM START
3DXML FILE CANNOT BE OPENED IF INCREMENTAL
OBJMOD BR10000057509 HD71936 GA
BACKUP IS ACTIVE
UI : SELECTED ELEMENTS COLOR IS CHANGED FROM
OBJMOD BR10000057683 HD72108 GA
BLACK INTO GREEN
CAPTURE OBJECT PROPERTY CANNOT BE SET
OBJMOD BR10000057705 HD72127 GA
PROGRAMMATICALLY
OM: WHEN CATNAVIGATIONMANAGER IS INPUTTED IN
OBJMOD BR10000057790 HD72227 GA
POWER INPUT, CATIA CRASHES.
OM: ICONS ON TOOLBAR ARE NOT DISPLAYED WHEN
OBJMOD BR10000057793 HD72231 GA
WORKBENCH IS CHANGED.
OM: CATIA ABENDS WHILE OPENING CATPRODUCTS
OBJMOD BR10000058128 HD72595 GA
COMING FROM V6 THROUGH DOWNWARD UTILITY
ASD : POSITION OF WORKBENCH ICON WAS MOVED
OBJMOD BR10000058153 HD72624 GA
AUTOMATICALLY WHILE SWITCHING WORKBENCH
OBJMOD BR10000058322 HD72814 PROBLEM WITH THE KN UNIT SPELLING. GA
INFRA : TOOLBAR : DISPLAY - NONDISPLAY SETTING
OBJMOD BR10000058538 HD73037 OF EACH TOOLBAR IS PRESERVED ONLY ONE TIME AT GA
EACH CATIA START
DOCDIREC INSTANCE FOR SINCE, SELECE AND
OBJMOD BR10000058653 HD73157 BETWEEN IN SELECT BY MODIFICATION OPTION ARE GA
NOT TRANSLATED
CATDUAV5: INCONSISTENT RESULTS FOR THE EDL_2
OBJMOD BR10000058652 HD73162 GA
RULE
OBJMOD BR10000058703 HD73214 PART : ABEND WHILE OPENING SPECIFIC CATPART GA
ADMIN : ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES IN CATSETTINGS
OBJMOD BR10000058739 HD73247 GA
KO - REPORTING (BACKGROUND IMAGE)
OBJMOD BR10000058748 HD73264 OM: WARMSTART FAILS WITH SPECIFIC CATSETTINGS. GA
OM: A DRAWING FILE CANNOT BE OPENED ONCE
OBJMOD BR10000058836 HD73355 GA
SAVED.
RESET COMPASS' DOES NOT EXIST IN COMMANDS
OBJMOD BR10000058951 HD73483 GA
COLUMN OF CUSTOMIZE DIALOG BOX
OBJMOD BR10000058994 HD73527 OM: SAVE - IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO SAVE PART. GA
CERTAIN PARTS CRASH CATIA5 WHEN LOADING THEM
OBJMOD BR10000059037 HD73570 GA
ON AIX IN 64-BIT MODE
WARM START: WARM START FAILS AND CATIA IS
OBJMOD BR10000059151 HD73690 GA
FORCED TO TERMINATE.
OBJMOD BR10000059301 HD73851 GSD: CATIA ABEND WHEN PART IS UPDATED GA
OM : OPEN : CATDRAWING CANNOT BE OPENED IN
OBJMOD BR10000059322 HD73880 GA
CATIA.
UI OPTIONS ACTIVE STATUS NOT DISPLAYED IN
OBJMOD BR10000059381 HD73938 GA
LINKED DOCUMENT LOCALIZATION FIELD
FILE-CLOSE: CATIA FREEZES WHEN FILE CLOSE IS
OBJMOD BR10000059392 HD73948 GA
PERFORMED.
SAVE MANAGEMENT : SAVE MANAGEMENT OPERATION
OBJMOD BR10000059546 HD74105 GA
SHOWS INCORRECT STATUS
OM: BATCH MODE INSTALLATION OF SP LEVEL FAILS IF
OBJMOD BR10000059638 HD74203 GA
SYNTAX IS IN LOWER CASE.
WRONG PATH HARCODED IN
OBJMOD BR10000059639 HD74204 GA
CATCLOGENERATERESOLVEPARTS
OM: RESTORED DATA BY WARM START IS NOT
OBJMOD BR10000059717 HD74284 GA
DISPLAYED CORRECTLY.
OM: DATA IS NOT DISPLAYED CORRECTLY AFTER
OBJMOD BR10000059713 HD74290 WARMSTART WHEN CATIA IS ABEND IN GA
VISUALIZATION MODE.
OM: ONE OF THE PART IS NOT DISPLAYED IN NON-
OBJMOD BR10000059753 HD74335 GA
CACHE MODE
PERFORMANCE DEGRATION IF SETTING MULTIPROCESS
OBJMOD BR10000059841 HD74418 GA
VISUALIZATION M ODE ON LOCAL CACHE IS MADE
OBJMOD BR10000059942 HD74503 CAN'T OPEN THE DOCUMENT. GA
WHEN IDF FILE IS OPENED, CONTEXT MENU IS NOT
OBJMOD BR10000060287 HD74885 GA
DISPLAYED CORRECTLY
CATIXPDMPRODUCTITEM API NOT RETURNING
OBJMODBA BR10000050705 HD64582 GA
EXPECTED RESULTS
OBJMODBA BR10000054636 HD68952 PROBLEMS IN CATALOG BROWSER. GA
OBJMODBA BR10000055600 HD69955 CANNOT OPEN A CATPRODUCT CORRECTLY GA
RENAMING OF INSTANCE-NAMES USING APIS =>
OBJMODBA BR10000056544 HD70925 GA
IMPACTED KNOWLEDGE LINKS ARE NOT RECONNECTED
METHOD SAVEAS OF PUBLIC CLASS
OBJMODBA BR10000056990 HD71385 CATDOCUMENTSERVICES DOES NOT SAVE CGR FILE IN GA
BATCH MODE
CAA API CATIOSMEXTENSION / CATIOSMEXTENDABLE
OBJSPMOD BR10000057047 HD71439 GA
CANNOT ACCESS CATIDRWTEXT FEATURES
PD : CATIA ABENDS WHILE COPYING A PUBLICATION
PART BR10000048505 HD62081 GA
IN A SPECIFIC CATPART
FEAT RECOGNITION : WHEN OPENING THE DATA WITH
PART BR10000049585 HD63307 THE CACHE SYSTEM, THE UNNEEDED MESSAGE IS GA
DISPLAYED
PD : VALUE WITH 8 DIGITS AFTER A DECIMAL POINT
PART BR10000049984 HD63746 GA
CAN NOT BE EDITED
PART : PUBLICATION : CATIA CRASHES WHEN CURSOR
PART BR10000051350 HD65324 IS MOVED ON THE LEFT BORDER OF PUBLICATION GA
WINDOW
PART: WHEN DLNAME PATH IS DEFINED BY WINDOWS
PART BR10000051371 HD65341 VARIABLE, FILES CANNOT BE DETECTED BY SEARCH GA
FUNCTION
PART : SPECIFIC UDF INSTANTIATION FAILED WHEN
PART BR10000051448 HD65443 GA
CHANGE UPDATE COMPONENT IN UDF REFERENCE.
PART: EDIT- SEARCH: SOME PARAMETERS ARE NOT
PART BR10000051731 HD65773 GA
FOUND WHEN SEARCH IS PERFORMED.
PART : COLOR PROPAGATION DOES NOT WORK WHEN
PART BR10000051979 HD66062 GA
ACTION OBJECT PATTERN OF UDF IS DONE.
PART : PUBLICATION : PUBLICATION HIGHLIGHT IS
PART BR10000052756 HD66953 GA
INCORRECT AFTER DELETION
V4/V5 INTEROP : DLC / MIGRATEV4TOV5 GIVES
PART BR10000052933 HD67145 GA
INCORRECT RESULT WITH A SPECIFIC MODEL
PART : THICKNESS : CANNOT ADD THICK SURFACE TO
PART BR10000053326 HD67578 GA
A SPECIFIC SURFACE
PART : INCORECT MEASURE BETWEEN RESULT WITH
PART BR10000053334 HD67585 PICKING POINT OPTION WHEN FIRST ELEMNT HIDE GA
AFTRE SELECTION
PART: NAME OF NEW DOCUMENT (PART OR PRODUCT)
PART BR10000053380 HD67633 GA
IS GIVEN IN JAPENESE AND NOT IN ENGLISH
PART BR10000053403 HD67661 PART : PERFORMANCE REGRESSION ON INSTANTIATION GA
PART : ABEND WHILE EDITING HOLE FROM SPECIFIC
PART BR10000053442 HD67705 GA
CATPART
PART BR10000053672 HD67962 PART: TRIM - IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO REMOVE FACES. GA
PART: IF UDF IS EDITED, MULTI OUTPUT IN NO-SHOW
PART BR10000053698 HD68003 GA
MODE TURNS TO SHOW MODE
PART: COPY PASTE AS RESULT WITH LINK BODY NEEDS
PART BR10000053716 HD68017 UPDATE AFTER REPOINTING AND MODIFYING GA
ORIGINAL.
PART : LAST PART FEATURE LOST IF MATERIAL APPLIED
PART BR10000053757 HD68058 GA
INCORRECTLY ON PREVIOUSL MATERIAL
PART: VISIBILITY OF AXIS SYSTEMS OF SKETCHES
PART BR10000053852 HD68170 GA
CREATED ON R 14
PART: THE DIRECTION OF POWERCOPY GETS CHANGED
PART BR10000053966 HD68281 GA
WHEN THE DIRECTION IS REVERSED BACK.
PART: UPDATE ERROR OCCURS BY THE ORDER OF
PART BR10000054029 HD68338 GA
UPDATE.
PART : WHEN FILE CREATED BY R16 IS OPENED ON R17
PART BR10000054090 HD68398 GA
THE POSITION OF CONSTRAINT CHANGES
PART : RESULT IS NOT DISPLAYED ON MEASURE
PART BR10000054158 HD68471 GA
INERTIA PANEL.
PART: GRAPHICAL DISPLAYED POINTS NOT
PART BR10000054163 HD68482 GA
REPRESENTED IN SPECIFICATION TREE.
PART BR10000054192 HD68489 PART: WRONG GAS THREADING SYMBOL GA
PART: UPDATE ERROR IN SKETCH PROJECTION AFTER
PART BR10000054209 HD68520 GA
MODIFICATION
PART: ERROR IN UPDATE OF MIRROR FEATURE AFTER
PART BR10000054219 HD68534 GA
MODIFICATION OF SKETCH.
PART: DRAFT: WHEN AXIS SYSTEM IS DEFINED AS
PART BR10000054284 HD68603 PULLING DIRECTION, FEATURE DEFINITION ERROR GA
OCCURS
PART : SPECIFIC CATPART NEEDS UPDATE AGAIN
PART BR10000054300 HD68619 GA
THOUGH UPDATED AND SAVED.
PART: GROOVE- INCORRECT RESULT WHEN DELETE
PART BR10000054324 HD68634 GA
LINE FROM THE SKETCH.
PART: POLYGON SELECTION TRAP DOES NOT GET
PART BR10000054346 HD68657 GA
TURNED OFF WHEN WORKBENCH IS CHANGED.
PART : SPLIT SURFACE DOES NOT HIGHLIGHT
PART BR10000054436 HD68746 GA
CORRECTLY WITH SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: DEFINED THICKNESS OF EDGE CHANGES WHEN
PART BR10000054466 HD68786 GA
INSTANTIATE FROM DOCUMENT PERFORMED.
PD: PARAMETER NAME IS NOT CHANGING AFTER
PART BR10000054470 HD68790 GA
REORDER
PDG : CATALOG INSTANTIATION : CATALOG
PART BR10000054525 HD68844 INSTANTIATION DOESNT WORK WHILE USING DLNAME GA
ENVIRONMENT
PART BR10000054540 HD68858 PART : IMPOSSIBLE TO REPLACE MAIN UDF OUTPUT GA
PART: EDIT SEARCH: PARAMETER IS NOT DISPLAYED
PART BR10000054538 HD68859 IN TYPE WITH KNOWLEDGEWARE WORKBENCH ON GA
JAPANESE CATIA
PART: PASTE SPECIAL AS RESULT - ERROR MESSAGE
PART BR10000054543 HD68862 GA
DISPLAYED AND CAN NOT BE PASTED
PART: DRAFT: FEATURE FROM ANOTHER PART CANNOT
PART BR10000054615 HD68937 GA
BE SELECTED FOR PULLING DIRECTION
PART: CHECKER RULE SSS_1 ABOUT SELECTION SET
PART BR10000054639 HD68955 GA
DOES NOT WORK ON AN CATIA INSTALLATION
IN CATIA JAPANESE MODE, THE TOP PARTS NAME OF
PART BR10000054683 HD68999 GA
PDG WORK BENCH IS JAPANESE NAME
PART : WRONG DISPLAY OD MEASURE BETWEEN
PART BR10000054710 HD69028 GA
OPERATION RESULT
PART : EDGE FILLET : CATIA ABENDS HWILE CREATING
PART BR10000054774 HD69089 GA
EDGE FILLET WITH KEEP WITH OPTION
PART: FIX CONSTRAINTS FROM ALL SKETCHES ARE IN
PART BR10000054849 HD69175 GA
SHOW WHEN CAT PART IS READ
PKT: POWER COPY: ADD ALL AUTHORIZED INPUTS
PART BR10000054903 HD69230 GA
DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY
PART: INCORRECT CLOSED BODY IS DISPLAYED AFTER
PART BR10000054912 HD69236 GA
REMOVE FACE OPERATION.
PART BR10000054913 HD69242 PART: SEW FEATURE FAILS AND ERROR IS DISPLAYED. GA
PART : SHELL : CRASH OCCURS WHILE CREATING
PART BR10000054918 HD69243 GA
SHELL IN A SPECIFIC CATPART
SKETCHER : RECTANGLE SELECTION TRAP DOES NOT
PART BR10000054948 HD69280 GA
WORK PROPERLY
MEASURE BETWEEN : MEASURE DOES NOT DISPLAY
PART BR10000054949 HD69281 GA
ANGLE VALUE UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS
PART: THICKSURFACE: THE ERROR MESSAGE IS
PART BR10000055007 HD69337 DISPLAYED WHILE PERFORMING THICKSURFACE IN GA
SPECIFIC CATPART.
PART: INSTATIATE FROM DOCUMENT: DESIGN TABLE
PART BR10000055016 HD69344 GA
NOT FOUND WHEN CHANGING CONFIGURATION
PART: CATALOG BROWSER: DESIGN TABLE IS NOT
PART BR10000055013 HD69349 GA
LINKED TO UDF
PART: EQUIVALENT DIMENSIONS: THE VALUES OF
PART BR10000055061 HD69389 DIMENSIONS IN THE SKETCH ARE NOT KEPT WHEN GA
ADDED.
PART : THICK SURFACE : WRONG GEOMETRY IS
PART BR10000055069 HD69406 GA
CREATDE BY THICK SURFACE
PART: MULTI-SECTION SOLID: SURFACE OF PAD AND
PART BR10000055089 HD69417 GA
MULTI-SECTION SOLID DOES NOT MATCH
PART : POWER COPY : REFERENCE ELEMENTS ARE
PART BR10000055123 HD69456 CREATED WHEN ENABLE HYBRID DESIGN OPTION IS GA
DEACTIVATED
PART BR10000055133 HD69471 PART: BAD VISULAZATION OF SOLID GA
PDF: COLOR OF TEXT DEPENDS ON GRAPHIC
PART BR10000055177 HD69517 GA
PROPERTIES TOOLBAR ON/OFF
PART: UPDATE IS REQUIRED AFTER REOPENING THE
PART BR10000055213 HD69554 GA
SAVED PART
PART: PROBLEM IN GRAPHIC PROPERTIES OF COPIED
PART BR10000055230 HD69571 GA
OBJECT PASTED WITH AS RESULT WITH LINK
PART : ABEND AFTER CHANGING THE VALUE OF THE
PART BR10000055234 HD69573 GA
THICKNESS WITH SPECIFIC CATPART
PART : FEATURE DEFINITION ERROR IS ENGLISH EVEN
PART BR10000055252 HD69593 GA
THOUGH JAPANESE ENV
PART: CATIA ABENDS AFTER PERFORMING MEASURE
PART BR10000055261 HD69603 GA
BETWEEN
PART : ABNED WITH SPECIFIC CATPART WHILE
PART BR10000055266 HD69609 GA
PERFORMING THICK SURFACE
CATIA CRASHES AT V5R17SP3 LEVEL WHEN OPENING
PART BR10000055281 HD69620 GA
SPECIFIC CATPARTS CREATED AT V5R14SP5 LEVEL
PDG / FILE OPEN / TAKES A LOT OF TIME TO OPEN
PART BR10000055317 HD69658 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: EDGE FILLET - CATIA ABENDS ON EDITING EDGE
PART BR10000055326 HD69667 GA
FILLET.
PART: PASTE SPECIAL - CANNOT PASTE THE SOLID AS
PART BR10000055331 HD69672 GA
RESULT.
PART : VIEW / COMPASS COMMAND REMAINS ACTIVE
PART BR10000055341 HD69678 GA
AFTER SWAPPING VISIBLE SPACE
PART: BAD PERFORMANCE TO CLOSE A FILE AND
PART BR10000055371 HD69714 GA
IMPOSSIBLE TO RE-OPEN IT
PART: POWERCOPY - POWERCOPY IS INSERTED
PART BR10000055423 HD69764 GA
REVERSELY AFTER CHANGING DIRECTION TWICE.
PART: HELIX VISU IS KO ON CHANGING THE PITCH
PART BR10000055462 HD69806 GA
VALUE
PART : ABEND WHILE CREATING EDGE FILLET WITH
PART BR10000055457 HD69809 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: SOME HOLES OF THE HOLEPATTERN HAS A
PART BR10000055504 HD69853 GA
WRONG DEPTHLIMIT
PART : SPECIFIC CATPART CAN NOT BE OPENED ON
PART BR10000055520 HD69868 GA
V5R17
DMUSPA: IT TAKES LONG TIME TO SELECT THE FACE
PART BR10000055540 HD69889 OF THE SOLID WHEN USING MEASURE BETWEEN GA
COMMAND.
DMUNAV:MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM 1 TO 2 WITH
PART BR10000055588 HD69942 GA
SELECTION INFINIT DID NOT WORK AS EXPECTED.
DMUSPA:THE LENGTH MEASURED WITH 'MEASURE
PART BR10000055597 HD69947 GA
BETWEEN' FUNCTION IS WRONG.
PART BR10000055634 HD69989 PART: THE DATA CANNOT SAVE IT AS MODEL GA
PDG : PUBLICATIONS : CATIA ABENDS WHEN CATPART
PART BR10000055636 HD69991 WITH NEWLY ADDED PUBLICATION IS LOADED FROM GA
3DCOM
PART : WRONG DISPLAY OD MEASURE BETWEEN
PART BR10000055708 HD70077 GA
OPERATION RESULT
PART: THICKNESS - CATIA ABEND WHEN EXTRACTING
PART BR10000055717 HD70085 GA
ERROR SURFACE WHEN THICKNESS IS IN ERROR.
PART BR10000055753 HD70129 PART: UDF: ERROR WHEN INSTANTIATING UDF. GA
PART BR10000055762 HD70135 PART: POWER COPY - IMPOSSIBLE TO INVERT ARROW. GA
PART - REMOVE - WHEN BOOLEAN IS PERFORMED
PART BR10000055771 HD70141 GA
CATIA IS FORCED TO TERMINATE.
PART BR10000055790 HD70162 PART: IMPOSSIBLE TO SAVE CATPART WITH OSD_S244 GA
PART BR10000055809 HD70183 PD: ADD/INCORRECT RESULT IS DISPLAYED GA
PART: PART DOCUMENT PROPERTY SETTING IN COLOR
PART BR10000055912 HD70282 GA
MANGEMENT TAB IS NOT KEPT
PART : THICK SURFACE IS NOT CREATED PROPERLY IN
PART BR10000055936 HD70311 GA
A SPECIFIC CATPART
PART BR10000056053 HD70433 PART: INCORRECT RESULT WITH AUTOMATIC UPDATE GA
PART: UNDO: INCONSISTENT BEHAVIOR FOR UNDO
PART BR10000056063 HD70442 COMMAND BETWEEN SAVED ACTIVE AND NON ACTIVE GA
PARTS IN SESSION
PART BR10000056076 HD70452 PART : ABEND WHILE REMOVING PUBLICATIONS GA
PART BR10000056167 HD70540 CATIA CRASHES WHILE OPENING SPECIFIC IGS DATA GA
PART: ADD: CATIA ABENDS ON ADD BOOLEAN
PART BR10000056187 HD70566 GA
OPERATION ON SOLID.
PART : UPDATE : PART : NO UPDATE REQUESTED
PART BR10000056207 HD70576 AFTER REDIRECTION OF PUBLICAT ION ON PUBLISHED GA
PARAMETER
PART : ABEND WHILE CREATING EDGE FILLET AFTER
PART BR10000056323 HD70700 GA
COPY PASTE AS RESULT WITH SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: AUTO FILLET COMMAND DOES NOT CREATE
PART BR10000056354 HD70737 GA
FILLET SHAPE CORRECTLY
PART: UPDATE: NO CATPART UPDATE REQUESTED BY
PART BR10000056446 HD70826 CATIA V5 WHEN RECREATING A PREVIOUSLY DELETED GA
PUBLICATION WITH CONTEXTUAL LINK
PART : UNEXPECTED UPDATE ERROR AFTER
PART BR10000056455 HD70828 GA
MODIFICATION
PART: INCORRECT STATUS INFORMATION IN CATIA V5
PART BR10000056453 HD70829 WHEN REMOVING PUBLICATION FROM PARAMETER GA
WITH CONTEXTUAL LINK
PART: DRAFT - UNABLE TO CREATE DRAFT WITH
PART BR10000056498 HD70876 GA
BOUNDARY ELEMENT.
PART : AN ERROR OCCURS WHEN INSTANCIATING AN
PART BR10000056596 HD70971 GA
UDF FROM THE NETWORK DRIVE
PART : ABNED WHILE EXPLODING RECTANGULAR
PART BR10000056603 HD70976 GA
PATTERN CONSISTING PAD AND HOLE
PART : REMOVE FACE OPERATION FAILS WITH
PART BR10000056613 HD70986 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: UPDATED AND SAVED CATPART REQUIRES
PART BR10000056628 HD71004 GA
UPDATE AGAIN.
PDG:EDGE FILLET/UNABLE TO CREATE EDGE FILLET ON
PART BR10000056655 HD71036 GA
ONE SYMMETRICAL EDGE.
PART: CATIA ABENDS WHEN SKETCH POSITIONING
PART BR10000056670 HD71051 GA
COMMAND IS PERFORMED CONTINOUSLY.
PART: REMOVE FACE CATIA ABENDS ON DELETING
PART BR10000056673 HD71054 GA
REMOVE FACE.
PART: AXIS SYSTEM - WHEN CLICKING ORIGIN FIELD
PART BR10000056687 HD71069 SEVERAL TIMES AFTER CHANGIN AXIS SYSTEM TYPE, GA
CATIA ABENDS.
PART BR10000056693 HD71074 ASD : ABEND WHILE SELECTING ELEMENT BY TRAP GA
PD: EDGE FILLET/EDGE FILLET IS NOT CREATED WHEN
PART BR10000056754 HD71140 GA
DRAFT ANGLE IS CHANGED
PART: CATIA HANGS WHEN OPENING SOME CERTAIN
PART BR10000056839 HD71208 GA
CATPARTS
CATALOG : WINDOWS PATH FOR CATALOG IS
PART BR10000056832 HD71217 GA
DISPLAYED EVEN WITH DLNAME BEING ACTIVE
PART : SPECIFIC CATPART TOOK MORE TIME TO OPEN
PART BR10000056831 HD71218 GA
ON R17SP06 LEVEL
SKETCHER : THE MODIFIED VALUE IS NOT RETAINED IF
PART BR10000056852 HD71237 GA
CONSTRAINT ICON IS CLICKED
PART: FEATURE OTHER THAN DELETED ALSO
PART BR10000056902 HD71292 GA
DISAPPEARS FROM THE 3D SPACE.
PART : ABNED WHILE EXPLODING RECTANGULAR
PART BR10000056997 HD71395 GA
PATTERN CONSISTING PAD AND HOLE
PART BR10000057004 HD71402 PART: CATPART CAN NOT BE OPENED ANYMORE GA
PART : ABEND WHILE INSTANTIATING WITH SPECIFIC
PART BR10000057095 HD71495 GA
CATPART
PART BR10000057153 HD71554 PD: COLOR OF SELECTED FACES IS NOT CHANGED GA
PART: MEAN DIMENSION - MEAN DIMENSION DOES
PART BR10000057179 HD71579 NOT WORK WITH A PAD USING A PARAMETER WHICH GA
HAVE SET TOLERANCE IS COPIED.
PART : AFTER SAVE AND REOPEN CATPART SHOWS
PART BR10000057223 HD71632 GA
STATUS AS UNUPDATED
OM : FLY OUT MENU DISAPPEAR AFTER LEAVING THE
PART BR10000057281 HD71684 GA
WORKBENCH
CATDUA : MGN_7 : MGN_7 IS DETECTED AGAIN EVEN
PART BR10000057345 HD71759 GA
FIRST CATDUA CLEANING SHOW ERROR FIXED
PART : THICK SURFACE OPERATION FAILS WITH
PART BR10000057405 HD71820 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: GEOMETRY FAILS TO UPDTATE AFTER
PART BR10000057427 HD71852 GA
MODIFICATION
PART : CENTER POINT OF HOLE IS NOT DISPLAYED
PART BR10000057442 HD71857 GA
AFTER MAKING SKETCH UNHIDE
PART: THE RESPONSE OF CHANGE OF A COLOR IS
PART BR10000057441 HD71861 GA
WRONG
PD: THE ELEMENT ON THE SAME PLNAE IS NOT
PART BR10000057463 HD71888 GA
RECOGNIZED BY 2D VISULIZATION MODE
PART:SPECIFIED OUTSIDE THICKNESS OF SHELL IS
PART BR10000057624 HD71966 GA
NOT REFLECTED TO RESULTING SHAPE
PART BR10000057538 HD71968 PART: 3D CONSTRAINTS FAIL TO WORK GA
PART : WHEN PERFORMING THE REMOVE OF A FACE,
PART BR10000057561 HD71990 GA
AN UPDATE ERROR OCCURS AND THIS IS NOT NORMAL
PART BR10000057621 HD72051 PART: REPLACE FACE DOES NOT WORK AND FAILS. GA
PART : 3D GEOMETRY IS NOT VISUALIZED IN
PART BR10000057638 HD72066 GA
GEOMETRY AREA
SKETCHER - CATIA ABENDS ON CREATING
PART BR10000057653 HD72079 GA
CONCENTRIC CONSTRAINT BETWEEN RWO ELEMENTS.
PART: GRAPHIC PROPERTIES - PAINTER COMMAND
PART BR10000057651 HD72085 PROMPTS ARE NOT CLEAR IN PART WB AS COMPARED GA
TO DRAFTING.
PART BR10000057740 HD72164 ASD : ABEND WHILE UPDATING SPECIFIC CATPART GA
PART : ABEND WHILE PERFORMING LOCAL UPDATE OF
PART BR10000057755 HD72186 GA
CATPART AFTER SKETCH CREATION
PART: CATIA ABENDS WHEN ASSEMBLE IS PERFORMED
PART BR10000057796 HD72234 GA
IN A SPECIFIC CATPART.
PDG : UPDATE : EDGES ARE LOST DURING THE PART
PART BR10000057837 HD72282 GA
UPDATE
SKTCHER : LINE COINCIDENT WITH INFINITE LINE
PART BR10000057839 HD72283 GA
SEEN APART
PART : AFTER RELOADING, THE STATE OF THE PART IS
PART BR10000057877 HD72329 GA
WRONG
MATERIAL LIBRARY - SCROLL POSITION IS INCORRECT
PART BR10000057881 HD72334 GA
IN MATERIAL CATALOG.
PART: REMOVED MULTI-SECTION SOLID: PREVIEW IS
PART BR10000057884 HD72337 GA
INCORRECT IN HYBRID DESIGN
PART - RECTANGULAR PATTERN - CATIA ABENDS WHEN
PART BR10000057883 HD72338 CANCELLING SPLIT OPERATION WITH RECTANGULAR GA
PATTERN.
PART: BAD PERFO TO UPDATE A CATPART AFTER A
PART BR10000057894 HD72348 GA
GEOMETRICAL MODIFICATION RULED BY A PARAMETER
PART : ABEND WHILE UPDATING UDF FROM SPECIFIC
PART BR10000057974 HD72432 GA
CATPART
PART : AMBIGUOUS ERROR MESSAGE WHILE
PART BR10000058024 HD72483 GA
MODIFYING DRAFT FROM SPECIFIC CATPART
PART BR10000058078 HD72535 PART: TIMEOUT NOT WORKING AS EXPECTED GA
ASD: ASSOCIATIVE PART - WARNING SHOULD BE
PART BR10000058077 HD72542 DISPLAYED FOR UNLINKED INSTANCES WITHOUT GA
PUBLISHED GEOMETRY.
PART BR10000058079 HD72543 PD: EDGE FILLET/EDGE FILLET CAN'T BE CREATED GA
PART: DELETE: THE POPUP WINDOW CANNOT BE
PART BR10000058102 HD72569 GA
RESIZED
PART: COPY/PASTE WITH LINK IGNORES THE STATUS
PART BR10000058104 HD72571 OF THE OPTION INHERIT COLORS FROM THE GA
REFERENCE FEATURE
PART: INCORRECT STATUS INFORMATION IN CATIA V5
PART BR10000058137 HD72603 WHEN REMOVING PUBLICATION FROM PARAMETER GA
WITH CONTEXTUAL LINK
PART BR10000058149 HD72619 PD: SHELL/INCORRECT DISPLAY GA
PART : CATIA ABEND WHEN SKETCHER FROM SPECIFIC
PART BR10000058201 HD72687 GA
CATPART EDITED AND UPDATED
PART BR10000058231 HD72720 PDG : CATIA CRASHES WHEN OPEN DATA GA
PART : EDGE FILLET : EDGE FILLET CANNOT BE
PART BR10000058256 HD72744 GA
CREATED AFTER CATDUA
PART BR10000058289 HD72776 PART : ABEND : CATIA ABENDS DURING PART UPDATE GA
PART: A BODY CONTAINING TRITANGENT FILLET
PART BR10000058382 HD72876 GA
CANNOT BE PASTED IN NEW CATPART.
PART : UPDTE REQUIRES AFTER OPENING CATPART
PART BR10000058400 HD72900 GA
EVEN AFTER LAST SAVED IT IN UPDATED STATUS
PART : THICK SURFACE NOT POSSIBLE WITH SPECIFIC
PART BR10000058491 HD72994 GA
CATPART
PART BR10000058528 HD73031 CHAMFER IS NOT CORRECTLY CREATED GA
PART : ABEND WHILE PERFORMING SPLIT SOLID WITH
PART BR10000058571 HD73076 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PDF: AUTO FILLET IN INCORRECT ERROR AFTER
PART BR10000058578 HD73077 GA
UPDATE.
PART : ABEND WHILE PERFORMING REMOVE
PART BR10000058579 HD73082 GA
OPERATION WITH SPECIFIC CATPART
PART: EDGE FILLET: EXTRA GEOMETRY IS CREATED
PART BR10000058584 HD73087 GA
AFTER COMMAND EXECUTION
PART: SOME COLORS OF SHAPE PASTED AS RESULT
PART BR10000058664 HD73170 GA
WITH LINK ARE NOT KEPT.
PART: COLOR OF FACE CANNOT BE RESET BY RESET
PART BR10000058663 HD73172 GA
PROPERTIES COMMAND.
PART : WITH POWER COPY, THE INSERT OBJECT
PART BR10000058706 HD73217 GA
DIALOG DOES NOT APPEAR
PART: SEW SURFACE: GAP CREATED IN THE
PART BR10000058770 HD73289 GA
RESULTANT SURFACE
PART BR10000058791 HD73305 PART: REPLACE: IMPOSSIBLE TO REPLACE AXIS SYSTEM GA
PART : ABEND WHILE PERFORMING UNION TRIM WITH
PART BR10000058876 HD73400 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PART DESIGN/ THE PULLING DIRECTION OF THE DRAFT
PART BR10000059047 HD73583 GA
IS NOT RIGHT(1)
PART BR10000059159 HD73698 SURFACE OPERATOR RETURN INTERNAL ERROR GA
PART: HOLE - EXTRAPOLATE WITH CURVATURE
PART BR10000059188 HD73714 CONTINUITY USED AS DIRECTION CAUSES HOLE GA
ERROR.
PART: THICK SURFACE OPERATOR RETURN SHELL
PART BR10000059179 HD73722 GA
OPERATIOR: INTERNAL ERROR.
PART: PART DESIGN FEATURE IS CREATED IN ORDERED
PART BR10000059198 HD73740 GA
GEOMETRICAL SET.
PDG : THICK SURFACE : CATIA CRASHES WITH CLICK
PART BR10000059293 HD73842 OK TO TERMINATE MESSAGE DURING THICK SURFACE GA
OPERATION
PART : ABEND WHILE ACTIVATING EDGE FILLET FROM
PART BR10000059314 HD73867 GA
SPECIFIC CATPART
PART BR10000059517 HD74075 PART: FACE IS NOT DISPLAYED THOUGH IT EXISTS. GA
PART : AFTER OPENING THE CATPART, THE TOOL BAR
PART BR10000059522 HD74081 GA
DISAPPEARS WITH SOME OPERATIONS
PDG: THICKNESS/FACE COLOR IS NOT RETAINED
PART BR10000059652 HD74217 GA
AFTER THICKNESS
PART BR10000059773 HD74346 PART DESIGN / ABEND WHEN ASSEMBLE BODY ABEND GA
PART : WHEN EDITING PART PROPERTIES OPTION
PART BR10000059900 HD74477 FROM TOOLS OPTIONS NOT TRANSLATED IN JAP GA
LANGUAGE
PART BR10000059913 HD74490 PDG: HOLE: UPTO SURFACE CANNOT BE CREATED GA
PART : WITH SPECIFIC CATPART ABEND WHILE
PART BR10000059945 HD74528 GA
PERFORMING ADD OPERATION
PART DESIGN / MODEL IS NOT DISPLAYED AND CATIA
PART BR10000059999 HD74582 GA
SESSION ABNORMALLT ENDS
PART : IN SPECIFIC CATPART SOLID FACE MISSING
PART BR10000060003 HD74584 GA
AFTER PERFORMING ASSEMBLY
PART: INCORRECT CLOSED BODY IS DISPLAYED AFTER
PART BR10000060013 HD74595 GA
REMOVE FACE OPERATION.
PART: PROPERTIES CAPABILITY IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR
PART BR10000060153 HD74741 GA
THE FACE PRODUCED BY SEW SURFACE
PART : ABEND WHILE WORKING WITH SPECIFIC
PART BR10000060265 HD74861 GA
SETTINGS AND PUBLICATION
ATTRIBUTES NEEDED FOR IMPORT FILTERING NOT
PARTDES BR10000055562 HD69911 GA
AVAILABLE RUNNING INCREMENTAL BRIDGE
ENOVIA HANGS FOR 2 - 5 MINUTES WHEN ENTERING
PARTEDIT BR10000054726 HD69043 GA
ATTRIBUTE VALUES
REGRESSION WITH ARRAY OUT OF BOUNDS ISSUE
PARTEDIT BR10000056373 HD70750 GA
INTRODUCED
CATIA CRASHES WHEN SEARCHING PHOTO STUDIO
PHOTOSTD BR10000057243 HD71657 GA
SATELLITE
TARGET POSITION CHANGES AUTOMATICALLY WHEN
PHOTOSTD BR10000058107 HD72575 GA
ORIGIN IS MODIFIED
COPY COMMON ATTRIBUTES' DIALOG CANNOT CLOSE
PIP BR10000051363 HD65336 GA
WITH 'X' BUTTON
THE WALLTHICKNESS VAULE IS NOT SET CORRECTLY
PIP BR10000054878 HD69204 GA
FROM PIPEDIMENSION TXT
PIP BR10000055219 HD69561 CANNOT DELETE COMPONENT FROM THE ASSEMBLY GA
PIP BR10000055454 HD69799 PIPING CUTTING SYMBOL IN 2D DOESN GA
WE CANNOT SWITCH THE VALUE OF ATTRIBUTE ADDED
PIP BR10000055571 HD69922 GA
WHEN WE APPLY TRUE OR FALSE OF ATTRIBUTE VALUE
PIP BR10000055572 HD69923 CMP : PROBLEM OF INSTANCIATION OF FLAGES GA
THE RUNTIME PANEL APPEARS WHEN CREATE RUN
PIP BR10000057368 HD71778 GA
THEN PERFORM UNDO/REDO
WE CLICK OK BUTTON BUT A DIALOG BOX IS NOT
PIP BR10000057563 HD71994 GA
CLOSED AS USUAL
PIP BR10000058094 HD72558 A RUN IS SPLIT INTO TWO GA
ALL DESIGN VALIDATION REPORT WINDOWS ARE
PIP BR10000058501 HD72996 GA
CLOSED
SOME DESCRIPTIONS OF VALIDATION CHECKS
PIP BR10000058617 HD73124 GA
COLUMN ARE DISPLAYE D INCORRECTLY
PIP BR10000058723 HD73236 PCF FILE DOES GIVE RIGHT RESULT GA
WE CANNOT SWITCH THE VALUE OF ATTRIBUTE ADDED
PIP BR10000059055 HD73593 GA
WHEN WE APPLY TRUE OR FALSE OF ATTRIBUTE VALUE
PIP BR10000059206 HD73750 REDUCER PART BETWEEN A TEE AND A RUN GA
PIP BR10000059209 HD73751 CROSS AND REDUCER PLACEMENT GA
PIP BR10000059461 HD74018 DIFFERENT RESULT FOR 'DESIGN VALIDATION REPORT' GA
NEW LINE ID CREATION STILL POSSIBLE WHEN
PIP BR10000059556 HD74117 GA
CATALOG STATUS IS APPROVED.
WHEN I PLACE A RUN, CONNECTOR ON A POINT IS NOT
PIP BR10000059851 HD74431 GA
DISPLAYED IN 3D VIEW
PIP BR10000060030 HD74613 LOOSE PARTS IMPACTS TO ENOVIA SAVES: GA
MANUFACTURING (PMG): GLOBAL FEATURE
PPMAMACH BR10000055467 HD69813 RECOGNITION FAILS TO IDENTIFY CONCENTRIC DRILL GA
AND TAP WHEN CREATING MACHINING FEATURES
MANUFACTURING (PMG):TOOL QUERY NOT CREATED
PPMAMACH BR10000055479 HD69823 FOR TAPPED HOLES CREATED BY DEFINE COMPONENT GA
AND MPA
MANUFACTURING (PMG): MPA CREATES MACHINABLE
PPMAMACH BR10000055860 HD70237 FEATURE WITH WRONG HOLE AXIS DIRECTION FOR GA
CONCENTRIC HOLES
MACHINING (PMG) / MACHINED HOLE DEPTH IS
PPMAMACH BR10000055877 HD70250 INCORRECT ON SOME MACHINABLE AXIAL FEATURES GA
CREATED BY MPA.
PRINT:IMAGE CAPTURE: BANNER IS NOT PRINTED ON
PRINT BR10000051872 HD65899 GA
THE CAPTURED IMAGE
PRINT : CATIA ABENDS WHILE OPENING SPECIFIC PS
PRINT BR10000052338 HD66449 GA
FILE
IF THE JAPANESE PRINTER NAME IS USED, CATIA
PRINT BR10000053161 HD67406 GA
CANNOT PRINT BY 'PRINTBATCH'
PRINT : DECLARATION PART IS MISSING IN A SPECIFIC
PRINT BR10000053165 HD67408 GA
CFG SCRIPT
PRINT : CAPTURE : THE ASSIGNMENT BOUNDARY FOR
PRINT BR10000053883 HD68198 CAPTURE IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN ANTI-ALISING SET GA
TO FULL MODE
PRINT BR10000054275 HD68583 PRINT : ERROR WHILE SAVING AS PDF GA
PRINT : VISUALIZATION FILTER NOT REFLECTED IN
PRINT BR10000054767 HD69085 GA
PRINTBATCH
PRINT - 2D_3D - FACE LINES IN CLIPPING FRAME ARE
PRINT BR10000054971 HD69300 GA
THICK.
PRINT - 2D_3D - PRINT IS DIFFERENT FROM SCREEN
PRINT BR10000054975 HD69306 GA
(WHEN CUT).
PRINT : IN 2D LAYOUT SECTION VIEW AND CUT VIEW
PRINT BR10000055036 HD69364 GA
ARE PRINTED IN THICK LINES
PRINT : CAPTURE : DISPLAY IN 3D AREA AND PREVIEW
PRINT BR10000055144 HD69478 GA
OF CAPTURE IS DIFFERENT WITH SPECIFC SETTINGS
PRINT: OPTION OF PRINTING IS NOT APPLIED
PRINT BR10000055223 HD69564 GA
CORRECTLY.
PRINT : PRINT PREVIEW : DIMENSION LINES NOT
PRINT BR10000055227 HD69568 GA
PRINTED CORRECTLY
PRINT : ABNED WHILE CAPTURE IN VECTOR MODE
PRINT BR10000055346 HD69689 GA
WITH SPECIFIC CATSETTINGS
PRINT : A2 ISO OPTION CAN NOT BE SELECTED FROM
PRINT BR10000055690 HD70056 GA
PAGE SET UP PRINT DIALOG BOX
PRINT : PRINTER ADDED BY SAM COMMAND ON HP-UX
PRINT BR10000056199 HD70580 GA
IS NOT LISTED IN CATIA PRINT MENU
PRINT : VIDEO RECORDER : NAME OF LAST SAVED
PRINT BR10000056250 HD70626 CODEC COMPRESSOR IS NOT KEPT FOR SECOND TIME GA
IN SAME CATIA SESSION
PRINT : ERROR IN ACROBAT WHILE READING PDF
PRINT BR10000056255 HD70631 GA
DOCUMENT CREATED WITH SPECIFIC CATDRAWING
PRINT BR10000056393 HD70761 PRINT - BACK CLIPPING PLANE IS CANCELLED IN PRINT. GA
PRINT : ELEMENT ON REFERENCE AXIS LINE IS NOT
PRINT BR10000056495 HD70878 PRINTED WITH DYNAMIC HIDDEN LINE REMOVAL GA
OPTION SET IN PRINT
PRINT : CATIA FREEZE WHILE PERFORMING PRINT
PRINT BR10000056692 HD71076 GA
PREVIEW WITH SELECTION IN 2D LAYOUT
SETFONT METHOD OF CATPRINTTEXTIMAGE CLASS
PRINT BR10000056933 HD71324 GA
CAUSES FAILURE
PEN NUMBER OF POINT ELEMENT IS SPECIFIED AS 7
PRINT BR10000057188 HD71584 GA
WHEN DRAWING FILE IS PRINTED AS HPGL FORMAT
PRINT : IN AIX A2 PAGE FORMAT CAN NOT BE
PRINT BR10000057206 HD71612 GA
SELECTED EASILY FROM DROP DOWN LIST
PRINT : PRINT PREVIEW IS INCORRECT AFTER
PRINT BR10000057254 HD71655 GA
APPLYING ROTATAION
PRINT : CANNOT GENERATE A WORKING XML FILE
PRINT BR10000057541 HD71970 GA
WITH HP DESIGNJET1000 SERIES DRIVER
PRINT BR10000057841 HD72286 PRINT : FORM NAME OF PAGE SETUP IS NOT KEPT GA
PRINT: SOME OUTLINES MISSING FROM THE PDF FILE
PRINT BR10000058146 HD72618 GA
CREATED FROM A SPECIFIC CATPART.
PRINT: DASHED LINES ARE DRAWN AS SOLID LINES IN
PRINT BR10000058156 HD72634 GA
THE PDF FILE CREATED FROM A SPECIFIC CATPART.
PRINT : GL2 : TIFF IMAGE IN DRAWING IS NOT
PRINT BR10000058159 HD72642 GA
CORRECTLY TRANSLATED IN GL2 FILE
PRINT BR10000058247 HD72738 PRINT: SIZE OF THE PRINT SHEET IS NOT AS SPECIFIED GA
PRINT : THE PRINTED RESULT AND THE DISPLAYED
PRINT BR10000058284 HD72774 GA
FORM ARE NOT THE SAME
PRINT: HPGL2 FILE WHEN IMPORTED, CAUSES CATIA
PRINT BR10000058377 HD72872 GA
TO CRASH.
PRINT: WHEN PRINT PREVIEW IS SELECTED, CATIA
PRINT BR10000058380 HD72873 GA
CRASHES.
PRINT : PRINT TO FILE : INCORRECT LINE TYPE IS
PRINT BR10000058393 HD72889 GA
CREATED IN THE PRINT OPERATION
MACHINING (PMG) / TRACUT DISPLAY IN TOOLPATH
PRISMACH BR10000051462 HD65461 REPLAY IS NOT OK AND THE SETTING IS NOT GA
RETAINED IF TOOLPATH IS REPLAYED AGAIN.
PMG / VIDEO REPLAY / CATIA CRASHES ON FORWARD
PRISMACH BR10000053434 HD67698 GA
REPLAY AFTER FORCE COMPUTATION
MANUFACTURING (PMG): MISSING LINES IN APT
OUTPUT GENERATED FROM RUNMFGBATCH.EXE
MANUFACTURING (PMG): MFG PARAMETERS NOT SEEN
CORRECTLY IN APT FILE
MACHINING (PMG) / FEATURE RECOGNIZED FROM
WRONG MACHINING SIDE.
MACHINING (NCMANVERIF) / WHEN USING MANAGE
PRISMACH BR10000054574 HD68891 BATCH QUEUE, RETRACT LINKING MACRO MOTION GA
USED IN DRILLING OPERATIONS IS IGNORED
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / WHEN SWITCHED TO PMG
THE PART IS NOT ZOOMED AUTOMATICALLY.
MACHINING (PMG) / HELIX APPROACH IS NOT TAKEN
INTO ACCOUNT BY FULL VIDEO.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / PROBLEM WITH 'CHECK TOOL
LENGTH' OPERATION AFTER COMPUTING TOOL PATH.
PMG / INCORRECT VIDEO RESULT / VIDEO SHOWS A
GOUGE BUT TOOLPATH IS OK
MACHINING (PMG) / COLLISION IN THE ROUGHING
PRISMACH BR10000054859 HD69184 OPERATION NOT DETECTED WITH VIDEO OPTIONS/ GA
COLLUSION DETECTION STOP
MACHINING (PMG) / IN PROFILE CONTOURING A
PRISMACH BR10000054889 HD69213 LINEAR MOVE IS GENERATED INSTEAD OF CIRCULAR GA
INTERPOLATION WHEN USING SMALL OVERLAP VALUES.
MACHINING (PMG) / A CYCLE IS SPLIT INTO MORE
PRISMACH BR10000054959 HD69292 NUMBER OF CYCLES DEPENDING ON LD GENERATING GA
LESS EFFICIENT APT
MACHINING (3ASMG) / ERROR IN ROUGHING
TOOLPATH COMPUTATION.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / V4-V5 TRANSITION: APT
IMPORT CREATES INACCURATE TOOL PATHS
MACHINING (3ASMG) / FUNCTION ROUGHING-
CONTOURING IS WRONG. THE PART IS DESTROYED.
MACHINING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING
COMPUTATION IS INCORRECT.
MACHINING PMG APT FILE IN BATCH MODE IS
PRISMACH BR10000055308 HD69646 INCORRECT DUE TO INCORRECT UNUPDATED STATUS GA
OF MO.
MACHINING ( PMG ) - AFTER NC SIMULATION, MENU
TOOLBARS ARE DOUBLED AND CATIA ABENDS.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / RAPID IS NOT APPLIED IF
PRISMACH BR10000055339 HD69680 START ELEMENT IS A CIRCLE WITH RAPID FEEDRATE GA
AT START OPTION
MACHINING (PMG) / CIRCULAR MILLING PREDEFINED
MACROS MISSING WHEN SWITCHING MODES.
MACHINING (PMG) / WHEN EDITING A PROFILE
PRISMACH BR10000055405 HD69746 CONTOURING THE DIRECTION VECTOR IS INVERTED GA
FROM THE PREVIOUS CONDITION.
MACNINING (PMG) / WHEN POSTPROCESSING A
PRISMACH BR10000055473 HD69820 MANUFACTURING PROGRAM USING IMS, PROCESSING GA
FAILS BECAUSE IT CANNOT FIND THE LICENSE.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): NO CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION IF FIRST PART OPERATION IS DELETED
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE OUTPUT NAME IS NOT
UPDATED WHEN SELECTED FROM THE PROCESS TREE.
MACHINING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING WITH TOOL
PATH STYLE HELIX IS COMPUTED INCORRECTLY.
MACHINING (AMG) / WORKPIECE AUTOMATIC MOUNT
IS NOT CORRECT
MACHINING (PMG) / CURVE FOLLOWWING / RETRACT
PRISMACH BR10000056072 HD70449 MOTION IS NOT COMPUTED FOR CERTAIN DEPTH OF GA
CUT.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / CANNOT OPEN A SUB TREE OF
ANY GEOMETRIC SET WITH AN NC PROCESS OPEN.
MACHINING (PMG) / THE CIRCLE STATEMENTS ARE
PRISMACH BR10000056249 HD70605 NOT CORRECT IF A TOOL DIAMETER IS CHANGED BY GA
0.1 MM.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): COMPUTED STATUS OF MO IS
REMOVED ON REMOVING LINKING MACRO
MACHINING (PMG) / FORCE COMPUTE CAUSES MEMORY
PROBLEM ON XP64 MACHINE.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): START POINT IS NOT
CONSIDERED IN FACING OPERATION
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / A 'TOOL PATH' IS DELETED
PRISMACH BR10000056506 HD70885 ARBITRARILY IF SAVED AND OPENED AFTER EDITING GA
AND UNLOCKING.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / AFTER EXITING FROM
PRISMACH BR10000056539 HD70917 MACHINE SIMULATION USING TOOLPATH THE MEMORY GA
IS NOT FREED.
MACHINING (PMG) / COMPENSATION PROBLEM FOR
MACROS IN PROFILE CONTOURING.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): TOOLPATH REVERSES
DIRECTION ON SELECTED PROFILE
MACHINING (PMG) / PART DESTROYED IN ROUGHING
OPERATION USING PART CONTOURING OPTION
MANUFACTURING (PMG): PART DESTROYED WITH
ROUGHING OPERATION
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / CATIA ABENDS IF NCCODE IS
GENERATED WITH IMS POSTPROCESSORS.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): INCORRECT UPDATE STATUS
ON POINT TO POINT OPERATION
MACHINING (PMG) / ROUGHING OPERATION WHEN
COPY PASTED AND A NEW TOOL SELECTED DOESN'T
HOLD ITS COMPUTED TOOL-PATH AND REVERTS BACK
TO UNUPDA
PRISMACH BR10000057330 HD71744 MACHINING (3ASMG) / ROUGHING DESTROYED PART. GA
MACHINING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING / TOOL
PATH AT END IS NOT CORRECT.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / NO UPDATE STATUS SHOWN
PRISMACH BR10000057391 HD71803 IN MACHINING OPERATION AFTER GEOMETRY GA
MODIFICATION.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): BAD VIDEO REPLAY RESULT
WITH AM2 LICENSE
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / BATCH QUEUE MANAGMENT
PRISMACH BR10000057669 HD72095 DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY NAME OF SELECTED GA
PROGRAM IS NOT CORRECT.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / MACHINING TIME
CALCULATION ERROR IN TOOLPATH REPLAY.
DESIGN VIEWER GRAPHIC WINDOW DOESNT SHOW
THE DIMENSIONS WHEN WORKBENCH IS SWITCH
MACHINING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING / TOOL
PATH AT END IS NOT CORRECT.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / GENERATE NC OUTPUT
INTERACTIVELY - CATIA ABENDS.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / VIDEO REPLAY IS KO FOR
TRACUT OPERATOR.
MACHINING (PMG) / ERROR MESSAGE WHEN
CHOOSING 'MANUAL' IN DRILLING OPERATION
MACHINING (PMG) / THE CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
PRISMACH BR10000058757 HD73273 PATH IS NOT GENERATED BY THE HELIX TOOL PATH GA
STYLE OF PROFILE CONTOURING
MACHINING (PMG) / CATIA ABENDS ON REVERSE
MACHINING CONDITIONS FOR SPECIFIC PROCESS
MACHINING (PMG) / FACING / TOOLPATH IS NOT
PRISMACH BR10000059069 HD73604 COMPUTED TO REMOVE THE DESIRED MATERIAL GA
COMPLETELY.
MANUFACTURING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING /
PRISMACH BR10000059113 HD73648 TOOL PLUNGES INCORRECTLY AND CUTCOM IS SET ON GA
AND OFF MANY TIMES
MACHINING (PMG) / PROFILE CONTOURING WITH
PRISMACH BR10000059111 HD73650 STYLE HELIX COMPENSATION IS NOT APPLIED NOR GA
OUTPUTTED CORRECTLY.
MANUFACTURING (PMG): APPROACH OF TOOLPATH FOR
PROFILE CONTOURING STARTS FROM INSIDE THE PART
MANUFACTURING (PMG): APPROACH OF TOOLPATH FOR
PROFILE CONTOURING STARTS FROM INSIDE THE PART
MANUFACTURING (PMG) : CHOOSING THE BOTTOM
PRISMACH BR10000059224 HD73767 ELEMENT FOR DRILLING FROM SPEC TREE DOES NOT GA
RESULT IN CORRECT DEPTH PARAMETER
MACHINING (AMG) / THERE IS OVER CUT AT CORNER
IN MULTI-AXIS CURVE MACHINING.
MACHINING (PMG) / TOOLPATH COMPUTATION ERROR
PRISMACH BR10000059233 HD73779 APPEARS WHEN REPLAYING THE TOOLPATH, NOT GA
DURING THE COMPUTATION.
MANUFACTURING (NCINFRA) : REWORK AREA LOOSES
GEOMETRY AFTER COPY-PASTE
PRODCLAS BR10000052860 HD67060 EV5 CLASH SERVER DOES NOT DETECT VALID CLASHES GA
PRODCLAS BR10000055031 HD69350 EXISTING INSTANTIATION IS REUSED GA
PRODCLAS BR10000055293 HD69629 DMU SEARCH POOR PERFORMANCE GA
UNABLE TO DELETE CATEGORY CREATED AS CATEGORY
PRODCLAS BR10000056469 HD70850 GA
TYPE OF PRODUCT
WHEN PIM CLASH SERVER PROCESS (ITFCHECK)
ABENDS, ALL QUEUED S ERVER REQUESTS ALSO ABEND
ENOVCLASHUPDATE -COMPUTE STOPS WORKING (NO
CPU USAGE, NO MEMO RY CHANGES) APPEARS HUNG
PRODPLAN BR10000060127 HD74716 STM BUG CLASSIFICATION GA
ACCESS TO CUSTOM ACTION OBJECT WHEN CREATING
PRODEDIT BR10000051392 HD65369 GA
CONFIG HANDLER
ATTACHING OBJECTS TO CATEGORYSPECIFICATIONS
TAKES TOO LONG
ISSUE ON CONFIGURATION HANDLER DEFINITION AND
UTILISATION
VPM FILTER CRASHES WHEN USING PART+ACCURACY
FILTER
PRODEDIT BR10000054021 HD68334 CHILD SYNCHRONIZATION FLAG IS NOT DISPLAYED GA
COMPOUND FILTER EXECUTION RESULTS IN
CONNECTION ERROR
ENOVIA_SYNC_STATUS_CHECK=FALSE FORCES
UNWANTED SYNCHRONIZATION OF ASSEMBLY NODE.
ORPHANED CONFIG HANDLER CHILD CAUSES LCA
ERROR WHEN REVISING AIRPLANE PROD SPEC
MANUAL SYNCHRONIZATION:PART VERSIONS MORE
THAN 2, CHILD MORE THAN 2, ERR
3DMAP NOT USED AT FILTERING WITH ACCURACY FOR
WORKPACKAGES (PUBLICATION EXPOSED ASSY)
UTILITY/INSTRUCTIONS NEEDED TO UPDATE/CORRECT
PRODEDIT BR10000055156 HD69489 TIMESTAMP INFORMATION OF EXISTING PRODUCT GA
STRUCTURE.
LOCK ICON ON A UNSYNCH PART VANISHES AFTER
REFRESH IN PRODUCT EDITOR.
EDITING A COMPONENT ASSEMBLY IN PRODUCT
EDITOR AND SHEET EDITOR PRODUCES DIFFERE
WHEN LCA PORTAL IS STARTED WITH A SERVER
PRODEDIT BR10000055624 HD69978 MACHINE, AN UNNECESSARY ERROR MESSAGE IS GA
DISPLAYED
CREATING A STATIC CONFIGURATION HANDLER ( SAVE
PRODEDIT BR10000055961 HD70344 AS IN THE CH INTERFACE) FAILS AFTER A SEARCH GA
WITH *
UNNECESSARY EXPAND AFTER REFRESH, REFRESH
FROM DATABASE OR SY NCHRONIZE COMMAND
PROBLEM: WHEN USING THE REPLACE NEW REFERENCE
IT IS CHANGING ONE OF THE ATTRIBUT
DOES NOT WORK IN THE INSTANCE VIEW OF PRODUCT
EDITOR FOR SCROLL DOWN
ITEM INSTANCE NODE COLOR IS CHANGED TO AFTER
REFRESH
PRODEDIT BR10000057458 HD71874 PARTIAL CONFIGURATION FILTER DOESN GA
PRODEDIT BR10000057696 HD72135 BAD PERFORMANCE ON BUILDING TREE GA
THE SIZE OF 'REPLACE-NEW REFERENCE' POP-UP
PRODEDIT BR10000058012 HD72470 WINDOW IS SMALL TO DISPLAY ALL CUSTOMIZED GA
ATTRIBUTES
CANNOT RUN CHECKIIVALIDITY UTILITY TO CLEAN UP
ORPHANED INSTA NCES
PRODUCT EDITOR: THE WIDTH OF GCO VIEW IN
PRODEDIT BR10000058435 HD72933 PRODUCT EDITOR IS TOO SMALL TO SHOW GCO GA
STRUCTURE WITHOUT USER INTERACTION.
SYNCH BEHAVES DIFFERENTLY WHEN PERFORMING
ADD AND DELETE
PRODUCT : ACTIVATE TERMINAL NODE 6 WRONG
PRODSTRU BR10000050172 HD63994 GA
MESSAGE FOR V4 MODEL WITHOUT READ ACCESS
PRODUCT : BAD INSTANCE NAMING AFTER INSERTION
OF AN EXISTING COMPONENT
PROD STRU: THE INSTANCE NAME IS NOT GENERATED
ACCORDING TO THE RENAMED INSTANCE NAME.
PROD STRU : CONTEXTUAL LINK IS NOT
SYNCHRONISED AFTER EDITING SOURCE PART.
PROD_STRU : COPY PATE : CONFLICT NOT DETECTED
PRODSTRU BR10000052403 HD66521 WHEN TWO COMPONENTS WITH SAME PART NUMBER GA
AND FILE NAME ARE BE PASTED INTO AN ASSEMBLY
PS: WHEN SUB-PRODUCT IS UNLOADED, THE
UNLOADED PRODUCT CANT BE LOADED.
PS: GRAPH TREE REORDERING - WHEN THERE IS
PRODSTRU BR10000053209 HD67453 DEACTIVATED ELEMENT IN PRODUCT, REORDER GA
COMMAND WORKS INCORRECTLY.
PRODSTRU BR10000053370 HD67625 PRODUCT : AN USELESS LINK IS LISTED IN EDIT-LINKS GA
PS: SHAPE OF SUB PRODUCT IS NOT DISPLAYED WHEN
DRAWING IS OPENED AFTER SUB PRODUCT.
PS : CACHE MODE : FILE LOADED IN DESIGN MODE
EVEN WHEN CACHE OPTION IS ACTIVATED
PS : ERROR MESSAGE IS NOT DISPLAYED EVEN IF A
PRODSTRU BR10000054793 HD69116 PART WHICH HAS THE SAME PART NUMBER IS GA
INSERTED IN PRODUCT
PS: CONTEXTUAL LINKS - CONTEXTUAL PROBLEM IN
CASE OF MULTIPLE INSTANCES.
PROD STRU: UNDO/UNDO IS NOT AVAILABLE AFTER
DELETION OF PART
PROD STRU : CATIA CRASHES DURING SWITCH FROM
PRODSTRU BR10000056224 HD70599 DESIGN TO VISUALISATION MODE IN VPM NAV GA
CONTEXT
PROD STRU : PUBLICATION BROKEN WHEN CHANGING
THE LANGUAGE
OM: DESIGN MODE/OPENING PRODUCT AFTER
DRAWING NOT ABLE TO CHANGE TO DESING MODE
PRODSTRU BR10000058276 HD72768 OM: OPEN: CATIA CRASHES ON FILE OPEN GA
PS: ACTIVATE TERMINAL NODE: CATIA GOES INTO A
LOOP
PROD STRU : INSTANCE ID NOT INCREMENTED
PRODSTRU BR10000059641 HD74206 CORRECTLY WHEN DOING COPY OR CUT INSTANCES GA
FROM A LEVEL TO THE SAME LEVEL
PDF : PART TO PART CONVERSION TAKES TOO MUCH
PROENOPT BR10000053070 HD67306 GA
TIME BAD PERFORMANCE
PROD ENG OPTIMIZER : THE TARGET VALUE FIELD IN
PROENOPT BR10000055079 HD69402 GA
OPTIMIZER IS SMALL AS COMPARED TO R14 LEVEL
CAD TO MATRIX ATTRIBUTE MAPPING DOES NOT WORK
PRTFEARE BR10000054931 HD69257 GA
FOR SYS:VERSION FOR CATIA V5 R16 SP5
NEED CATIA V5 INTEGRATION (CT5) TO WORK WITH
64-BIT VERSION OF WINDOWS XP
PRTFEARE BR10000055813 HD70185 PROBLEM OF CHECKOUT DUE TO TIME OUT OF CV5 GA
CHECKIN PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION IN MXCATIA
10.7.SP1(CT5).
UPDATE ASKED AFTER HAVING CHECKED OUT THE
CATDRAWING OF A CATPRODUCT
OBJECT NOT GETTING LOADED, WHEN THE FIRST NODE
PRTFEARE BR10000059413 HD73972 ALONE IS CHECKED OUT AND LOADED (INCIDENT GA
352861).
PSNINTER BR10000055497 HD69847 OBJECTNAME_MISSING_IN_INCIDENT_REPORT GA
ICONS NOT SELECTABLE IN FILTER COMPOUND
QUERY BR10000051337 HD65304 GA
FILTERS PANEL
QUERY BR10000054879 HD69205 ENOVIA LCA : SEARCHING PART BY DATE DOESN GA
WHEN CREATING A PRODUCTS(OR APPLYING ) A
QUERY BR10000056705 HD71087 CONFIGURATION HANDLE R IT FAILS AFTER A SEARCH GA
WITH ' *'
REPORTING EDITOR DOES NOT DISPLAY AS EXPECTED
QUERY BR10000056782 HD71160 GA
IN BROWSER WINDOW
QUEST BR10000060463 HD75076 SOURCE IAT RETURNS TO ITS DEFAULT VALUE GA
TRANSFERRING A PART INSTANCE / PART REFERENCE
REPLICAT BR10000052152 HD66251 FAILS WHEN TRAN SFERRED WITH SITE OWNERSHIP GA
TO AN EXTERNAL SITE
VISUAL DUPLICATES OF ASSEMBLIES AFTER
REPLICAT BR10000055410 HD69751 GA
REPLICATION
REPLICATION: DB2 ERROR WHEN EXTRACTING
CONFIGURED PRODUCT STR UCTURE WITH A LARGE
REPLICAT BR10000055550 HD69899 GA
NUMBER OF EFFECTED OBJECTS ON THE ACTIONS
(APPRO
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : INCORRECT POSITIONING OF
REVWMACH BR10000053810 HD68117 GA
TOOL WHEN EXPORTING TO GEOMETRY
MACHINING (3ASMG) / INCORRECT TOOL PATH
CREATION AT SWEEPING MO.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : WHEN IMPORTING AN APT
REVWMACH BR10000054214 HD68524 FILE, FIRST POINT OF TOOL PATH IS LAST POINT OF GA
PREVIOUS PATH
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : INCONSISTANT BEHAVIOR OF
V4 APT SOURCE IMPORT.
MACHINING (PMPA) / COUNTER BORE HOLES ARE NOT
RECOGNISED CORRECTLY.
MACHINING (NCMANREV) / TAKES TIME TO CHANGE
REVWMACH BR10000055075 HD69400 MACHINING FEATURE IN GEOMETRY TAB IF DEFINED GA
MANY F(X) IN CATPROCESS.
MANUFACTURING (NC INFRA): TOOL NUMBER
REVWMACH BR10000055114 HD69442 DEFINITION BEHAVIOR IS INCONSISTANT BETWEEN GA
TOOL ASSEMBLY AND TOOLS TABPAGE
MANUFACTURING (NC INFRA) : BORING BAR TOOL
PARAMETERS ARE NOT OUTPUT IN APT FILE
MANUFACTURING (NC INFRA): ROTABL INSTRUCTION
ARE NOT CONSIDERED IN APT
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : CORE DUMP WHEN
IMPORTING A V4 APT FILE
MANUFACTURING(NC INFRA): CERTAIN PP OPTIONS
NOT AVAILABLE IN 64 BIT CATIA WITH 64 BIT OS
MANUFACTURING (NCINFRA) : TOOLPATH DISAPPEAR
ON MOVING THE MOUSE CURSOR ON IT
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : V4 BLANK AUX STATEMENTS
REVWMACH BR10000055719 HD70087 IN NCMILL CONVERT TO UNRECOGNIZABLE GA
CHARACTERS IN V5
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE SIZE OF DOCUMENT
REVWMACH BR10000055738 HD70110 INCREASES WITH CUT & PASTE OF MACHINING GA
OPERATION.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE STATUS OF OPTION
SELECTED IS UNCHECKED.
DPM (MACHINE PROCESS PLANNER) / IPM NOT
CORRECTLY UPDATED AFTER PROCESS MODIFICATION.
MACHINING (NCINFRA): V4 TO V5 TRANSITION CALL
STATEMENTS WILL NOT IMPORT INTO V5
MACHINING (AMG) / RAPID SHOULD NOT BE USED
WHEN ANGLE APPROACH WAS IGNORED.
MACHINING NCINFRA - V4-V5 TRANSITION DATA
MISSING FROM IMPORTED APTSOURCE
MACHINING NCINFRA - V4-V5 TRANSITION DATA
MISSING FROM IMPORTED APTSOURCE
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : SEQUENCE NUMBERS FROM
APT FILE ARE WRONGLY IMPORTED IN CATIA
MANUFACTURING (NCINFRA) : TOOLPATH
SYNCHRONIZATION FAILS IN JAPANEASE OS
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : THE GOTO POINT VALUES ARE
NOT THE SAME AFTER APT IMPORT
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE PREVIEW DISPLAY OF
REVWMACH BR10000056473 HD70853 TOOLPATH IS WRONG AFTER EXECUTING UNDO OF GA
CATIA MIRROR.
REVWMACH BR10000056591 HD70965 MACHINING TOOL IMAGE DIDN T UPDATE GA
MACHINING (NCMACSIMU) / SIMULATE MACHINE
REVWMACH BR10000056623 HD70996 USING NC CODE THE SIMULATION IS NOT STARTING GA
AND CATIA CRASHES.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE ANALYSE DISPLAY IS NOT
CORRECT IN MACHINING FEATURE PART.
REVWMACH BR10000057017 HD71414 MACHINING (NCINFRA) / THE AXIS DOESN GA
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : WHEN IMPORTING AN APT
REVWMACH BR10000057382 HD71792 FILE, FIRST POINT OF TOOL PATH IS LAST POINT OF GA
PREVIOUS PATH
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / 3/5 AXIS CONVERTER IS NOT
ACTIVE FOR FLAT ENDMILLS.
MACHINING (NCREVIEW) : INCONSISTENT BEHAVIOR
REVWMACH BR10000057847 HD72300 WHEN READING MANUFACTURING DATA FROM A V4 GA
MODEL
MACHINING (AMG) : SPOT DRILLING WRONGLY SHOWS
UPDATE STATUS
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / WARNING MESSAGE SHOULD
REVWMACH BR10000058342 HD72836 BE DISPLAYED WHEN THE REFERENCE PART USED GA
OVER 2 POS WAS CHANGED.
MACHINING (NCMANVERIF) / COPY OPERATIONS ARE
REVWMACH BR10000058493 HD72993 NOT VISUALLY SIMULATED DURING TIME BASED GA
REPLAY.
MANUFACTURING (NC REVIEW) : CHANGE IN
REVWMACH BR10000058645 HD73135 FINISHING FEDERATE IS NOT REFLECTED IN THE GA
TOOLPATH REPLAY
MACHINING (MASMG) / MULTI-AXIS FLANK
CONTOURING TOOL PATH IS NOT CORRECT AT FILLET.
MACHINING (NCMANVERIF) / COPY OPERATIONS ARE
REVWMACH BR10000058625 HD73138 NOT VISUALLY SIMULATED DURING TIME BASED GA
REPLAY.
MANUFACTURING ( NCR): VIDEO RESULT CATPRODUCT
ARE CREATED OF HUGE SIZE
MACHINING (SIMUL) : STOCK DISAPPEARS OR CATIA
FREEZES
MANUFACTURING(NC INFRA): OPTION OF ICAM NOT
REVWMACH BR10000058800 HD73315 AVAILABLE IN OUTPUT TAB WITH 64 BIT CATIA AND 64 GA
BIT OS
MACHINING (MASMG) / MULTI-AXIS FLANK
REVWMACH BR10000059093 HD73634 CONTOURING TOOL PATH IS NOT CORRECT AT FILLET. GA
TANGENCY MOTION JUMPS AWAY FROM DRIVES - PART.
REVWMACH BR10000059235 HD73781 WRONG TOOL PATH AFTER A V4 APT FILE IMPORT GA
MACHINING (NCINFRA) : CORE DUMP WHEN
IMPORTING A V4 APT FILE
MANUFACTURING - MULTI-AXIS FLANK CONTOURING -
PROBLEMS DRIVING CORNERS
MANUFACTURING(PMG): MANUFACTURING ERROR
REVWMACH BR10000059799 HD74373 WINDOW IS SEEN WHEN CHANGING POINT TYPE FOR GA
AXIAL MACHINING OPERATION
MANUFACTURING (NCREVIEW): RUNNING CATDUA
REVWMACH BR10000059866 HD74445 RESULTS IN THE OFFSET VALUES NOT CONSIDERED GA
FOR BOTTOM
NCINFRA / STORE AT SAME LOCATION IS NOT TAKEN
INTO ACCOUNT.
RTREND BR10000057735 HD72171 WELDGUNSEARCH PERFORMANCE PROBLEM GA
SCM BR10000052612 HD66742 MKMK-ERROR: DIS M AND DISCONNECT M GA
ABSTRACT: STEP IMPORT DEGRADES PRECISION IN
SCM BR10000054348 HD68658 GA
POSITIONAL MATRICES LEADING TO NON-ISOMETRY
CAA PROGRAM WITH API CATIDESCENDANTS
SCM BR10000054377 HD68690 GA
GETALLCHILDREN USES MORE AND MORE MEMORY
ABSTRACT: CHECK TIMESTAMPS ON CGR NOT
SCM BR10000054625 HD68928 MANAGED PROPERLY WHEN DOCUMENT HAS BEEN GA
UPDATED WITH A STEP IMPORT
IF TRYING TO GET CATANALYSISCHARACCOLLECTOR
SCM BR10000055283 HD69622 FROM ANALYSIS SOLUTION WHICH IS NOT IN CURRENT GA
CASE, CATIA ABENDS
PSPCONNECTABLE LIST CONNECTABLE FAILING
SCM BR10000055992 HD70392 GA
PROBLEM
SCM BR10000056059 HD70439 SUPP CHAIN: EXPORT FAILS FOR PARTICULAR PRC GA
SCM BR10000056401 HD70817 R18 RADE 'ADD INTERFACE' CRASH GA
DRAWING WILL BE CHANGED WHEN THE STANDARD IS
SCM BR10000056468 HD70848 GA
REPLACED USING CAA
PRODUCTRENAMEIMPACTBATCHMODE ENVIRONMENT
SCM BR10000056484 HD70864 VARIABLE VALUE IS NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT WHEN GA
ITS VALUE IS CHANGED AFTER CATIA STARTED
PART IS MISSING IN STRUCTURE EXPOSED PRODUCT
SCM BR10000056633 HD71008 IF IT IS LOADED IN SEPERATE WINDOWS IF CACHE IS GA
ON
CATIVISUFILTER::ISVISIBLE FUNCTION IS NOT
SCM BR10000057530 HD71957 PERFORMED CORRECTLY WHEN CURRENT FILTER OF GA
THE DOCUMENT OPTION IS SET TO ON
SCM BR10000057923 HD72382 CMP : IR REG PART ACTIVATION TAKES LONG TIME GA
CPD API CATICCICORESAMPLE DOES NOT WORK
SCM BR10000058499 HD72998 GA
CORRECTLY ON R18SP02
THE THUMBNAIL OF DOCUMENT ISN'T CREATED WHEN
SCM BR10000058763 HD73278 THE DOCUMENT IS SAVED BY GA
CATDOCUMENTSERVICES::SAVEAS()
SCM BR10000058931 HD73455 CANNOT CREATE SECTION CUT VIEW TYPE OF THE 2DLO GA
SHAPE SCULPTOR : GRID MODELING : NUMERICAL
SCULPTOR BR10000054789 HD69111 INPUT CANNOT DEFINE THE POSITION OF CHANGING GA
POINT
HOW IS TRANSACTIONCOMMIT INTENDED TO BE USED
SDEVSUIT BR10000057854 HD72308 GA
WHEN PROGRAMMING VIA TH API?
SDEVSUIT BR10000058681 HD73187 CHECKOUT FAILS THROUGH API CALL GA
SDEVSUIT BR10000059084 HD73620 API TO ADD A SMOBJECT ON THE DESKTOP GA
SAVE PART DOES NOT RESPECT THE ADDCHILD
SECURITY BR10000054557 HD68874 GA
INSTANCE PRIVILEGE DATAGROUP RESTRICTION
P&O DELETING AN ENTITY IN THE MASK CAUSES
SECURITY BR10000054732 HD69053 ERROR MESSAGE AND DOESN'T PERFORM THE DELETE GA
COMMAND
CONTENT MGT. MULTI VAULT:WHEN CHECK IN
SECURITY BR10000058135 HD72578 DOCUMENTS THE DOCUMENTS WILL NOT USE THE GA
DEFAULT VAULT
ERRORS 01181 AND 01190 ON VAULT SERVER
SEDIT BR10000033391 HD51079 GA
REQUESTS (LYFE CYCLE O PERATIONS)
FILE OPEN WINDOW STARTS IN C:PROGRAM
SEDIT BR10000038882 HD54527 FILESSMARTEAMBIN IN STEAD OF USER S DEFAULT GA
FOLDER
SEDIT BR10000044140 HD61558 DESIGN COPY' CAN NOT COPY THE CHILD PARTS GA
SEDIT BR10000044201 HD61648 DESIGNCOPY KEEPS OLD LINK TO PART GA
SEDIT BR10000044202 HD61649 IR FOR UNDO CHECK OUT DOES NOT WORK GA
AN OBJECT CREATED BY DESIGN COPY IS NOT LINKED
SEDIT BR10000048438 HD62013 GA
TO A PROJECT
DMT TREE ISN'T REFRESH AFTER RELEASING THE
SEDIT BR10000048616 HD62203 GA
CHECKEDIN OBJECTS
ERROR NO: 00062 APPEARS WHEN USING CTRL-C IN A
SEDIT BR10000048655 HD62247 GRID VIEW WHEN LOOKUP TABLE OR REFERENCE TO GA
CLASS ATTRIBUTES ARE DISPLAYED
IF DELETE WORK FILE BY ST FILE EXPLORER,
SEDIT BR10000048771 HD62373 SOMETIMES DOCUMENT IS ERASED DIRECTLY GA
WITHOUT MOVING IT TO TRUSH
EXPAND A PROJECT TREE WHICH INCLUDE THE CHILD
SEDIT BR10000049029 HD62666 GA
PROJECT OF 3434 OVER' REQUIRES MUCH TIME
WHEN IS STARTING WORD OR EXCEL SMARTEAM
SEDIT BR10000049325 HD63012 GA
SHOW AN ERROR
CURSOR DOES NOT MOVE IN THE ORDER ASSIGNED BY
SEDIT BR10000049330 HD63019 GA
TABORDER
IN SPITE OF HAVING ASSIGNED THE SCRIPT TO
SEDIT BR10000049574 HD63297 GA
'SCREEN EXIT', IT STARTS AT 'SCREEN START UP'
SEDIT BR10000049630 HD63349 LOGO IS NOT CORRECT GA
THE WIDTH OF LABEL CONTROL WILL BE FIXED BY THE
SEDIT BR10000049739 HD63481 GA
FORM DESIGNER
SAVE AS' IS EXECUTED, THIS EXCEL FILE WILL BE
SEDIT BR10000049777 HD63518 GA
CLOSED
SEDIT BR10000049813 HD63557 FLOWCHART DESIGNER IS NOT CLOSED GA
UNABLE TO VIEW OBJECTS IN DOCUMENTS TREE IN
SEDIT BR10000049838 HD63581 RESTRICTED PROJEC TS UNLESS THE VIEW OBJECT GA
AUTHORIZATION IS GRANTED AT GLOBAL LEVEL
ACTIVATE SMARTEAM IS EXECUTED, SMARTEAM MENU
SEDIT BR10000049985 HD63749 GA
IS NOT DISPLAYED.
SEDIT BR10000050143 HD63963 SEARCH BY EXAMPLE GIVES ERROR MESSAGE GA
SEDIT BR10000050215 HD64039 CATIA LINKS TABLE NOT INDEXED GA
1 ) SOME DIALOGS IN A COPY TOOL MAPPING UTILITY
SEDIT BR10000050266 HD64121 COULD NOT BE TRANSLATED TO NON-ENGLISH GA
LANGUAGE
2 ) SOME CONTROLS IN A COPY TOOL MAPPING
SEDIT BR10000050267 HD64126 UTILITY COULD NOT BE TRANSLATED TO NON-ENGLISH GA
LANGUAGE
SEDIT BR10000050491 HD64344 DELETE FUNCTION EXTREMELY SLOW GA
:INCIDENT REPORT OCCURS AS SELECTING CURRENT
SEDIT BR10000050669 HD64541 GA
TEMPLATE PROJEC
CATIA INTEGRATION NOT INSTALLED DURING SILENT
SEDIT BR10000050726 HD64571 GA
INSTALLATION
IF ADD OBJECT BY SMARTBASICSCRIPT EDITOR,
SEDIT BR10000051582 HD65567 GA
SCRIPT IS HANG
LINK TO ASSEMBLY IS LOST AS SAVE IN SMARTEAM
SEDIT BR10000051683 HD65634 GA
SOLIDWORKS INTE
API: OPERATION IN SCRIPT INPUT NOT CORRECT WHEN
SEDIT BR10000052417 HD66520 GA
SCREEN_EXIT ADD_AS_COPY
VISIBLE OPTION DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY IN
SEDIT BR10000052435 HD66537 GA
MENU EDITOR
CASE SENSITIVE OPTION DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY
SEDIT BR10000052434 HD66546 GA
IN USER MAINTE
SEDIT BR10000052987 HD67216 CHECK IN OPERATION FAILS GA
THE WORK TIME OF THE ITEMS IN THE PROCESS
SEDIT BR10000053374 HD67629 GA
HISTORY LIST ARE INCORRECT.
OBSOLETE-OPERATION DOESN'T CHECK STATUS OF
SEDIT BR10000053393 HD67648 GA
DESTINATION OBJECTS
SMARTEAM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION EDITOR SHOW
SEDIT BR10000053547 HD67819 TWO POSSIBILITIES FOR THE SAME ENTRY OF GA
ATTRIBUTE
FAIL TO LOGIN WITH USER WHO INCLUDES SLASH
SEDIT BR10000053571 HD67848 GA
SYMBOL AS USER NA
ST-INT: CHECKIN PROBLEM WHEN TREE FILTER SET TO
SEDIT BR10000053580 HD67856 GA
LAST PUBLIC REVISION
OPTIONS SHOWS INCORRECT DESCRIPTION OF
SEDIT BR10000053920 HD68239 GA
FUNCTIONALITY
CMP : WRONG LOCATION DISPLAYED IN ADMIN
SEDIT BR10000053922 HD68241 GA
CONSOLE
SEDIT BR10000053923 HD68243 CMP : ERROR MESSAGE WHEN EXITING VAULTSETUP GA
SEDIT BR10000053967 HD68284 TREE PROPERTIES - DISPLAY GENERAL LINK PARTS GA
WORD OR EXCEL INTEGRATION REMOVES SMARTEAM
SEDIT BR10000054105 HD68416 GA
APPLICATION FROM RUNNING OBJECT TABLE
CLICK HELP IN ADMIN CONSOLE, THEN ERROR NO
SEDIT BR10000054141 HD68447 GA
01050 OCCURS
SEDIT BR10000054144 HD68462 WINDOW IS NOT MAXIMIZED COMPLETLY GA
TEXT IN COLUMNS IN PRINT OUTPUTS FROM GRIDS IS
SEDIT BR10000054225 HD68543 VERY SMALL WHE N THE ALIGNMENT IS SET TO GA
CENTER FOR THE COLUMNS
WHEN EXPAND LEVEL OF TREE PROPERTIES IS
SEDIT BR10000054347 HD68649 SELECTED AS 1, THE DOCUMENT IN THE ADDED GA
FOLDER IS NOT DISPLAYED TEMPORARILY
PROPAGATION OF USER/ROLE ASSIGNMENT AND
RESTRICTION STATUS FA ILS IF USER IS NOT
SEDIT BR10000054747 HD69065 GA
ASSIGNED AS PROJECT MANAGER TO EACH OF THE
LINKED
CANNOT LINK DOC TO TO RESTRICTED PROJECT
SEDIT BR10000055082 HD69411 GA
WITHOUT UPDATE PERMISSION
USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS NOT ACCESSIBLE WHEREAS
SEDIT BR10000055091 HD69420 GA
THEY ARE AUTHORIZED
ERROR OCCURS BY CLICKING HELP/ABOUT OF ADMIN
SEDIT BR10000055162 HD69491 GA
CONSOLE
TECHNICAL/USER DOCUMENTATION FOR FREETEXT
SEDIT BR10000055159 HD69492 GA
SEARCH
AN UNHANDLED EXCEPTION OCCURS WHEN SELECTING
SEDIT BR10000055229 HD69567 HELP, ABOUT IN S MARTEAM ADMIN CONSOLE OR IN GA
TRANSLATION UTILITY
SESSION MANAGEMENT TIME OUT CHANGE NOT TAKEN
SEDIT BR10000055255 HD69597 GA
IN ACCOUNT
TOOLTIPS IN SMARTEAM TREE FILTER WINDOW ARE
SEDIT BR10000055351 HD69698 NOT TRANSLATED UN TIL OPENING BOM EDITOR ON GA
SOME ITEM
SOME CONTEXT MENUS IN MENU EDITOR ARE NOT
SEDIT BR10000055354 HD69700 GA
TRANSLATED
LABEL TOTAL: IS NOT TRANSLATED IN SMARTEAM
SEDIT BR10000055391 HD69734 GA
ICON BROWSER
SOME MENUS&DIALOGS IN ST EDITOR ARE
SEDIT BR10000055393 HD69737 GA
TRANSLATED INCOMPLETELY
SEDIT BR10000055531 HD69877 MY TASKS VIEW WINDOW TITLE IS NOT TRANSLATED GA
PRESSING CTRL-C OR CTRL-V IN TRANSLATION TOOL
SEDIT BR10000055536 HD69880 GA
CAUSES AN EXCEP TION
SEDIT BR10000055956 HD70334 UPGRADE PROBLEM V5R18 IN THE TEST ENVIRONMENT. GA
SOME STRINGS ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN
SEDIT BR10000056023 HD70349 GA
INTEGRATION TOOLS SETUP
SEDIT BR10000056026 HD70365 WHEN ADDING A NEW PROJECT, INFO IS MISSING GA
AFTER APPLIED A NEW SERVICE PACK TO SMARTEAM,
SEDIT BR10000056012 HD70370 GA
ST VIEWER DOESN
ATTRIBUTES ARE NOT DISPLAYED AFTER QUERY BY
SEDIT BR10000056073 HD70384 GA
EXAMPLE
CLASS NAME IS NOT DISPLAYED IN THE PROJECTION
SEDIT BR10000055990 HD70389 GA
DETAILS WINDOW
SOME CONTEXT MENUS ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN COPY
SEDIT BR10000056022 HD70391 GA
TOOL MAPPING UTILITY
WHEN VISTA MODE IS SELECTED IN BOM, COLOR OF
SEDIT BR10000055998 HD70393 CHARACTER DOES NOT TURN OVER AND IT BECOMES GA
DIFFICULT TO IDENTIFY CHARACTERS
IN SPITE OF HAVING ASSIGNED THE SCRIPT TO
SEDIT BR10000056018 HD70395 GA
"SCREEN EXIT", IT STARTS AT "SCREEN START UP"
THE DIRECTION OF ANIMATION AT CHECK-IN/REMOVE
SEDIT BR10000056025 HD70398 GA
IS REVERSED
WHEN PERFORM DRAG ON TRANSITION OF ITEM
SEDIT BR10000056029 HD70400 GA
STATUS, ERROR OCCURS
AN OBJECT CREATED BY DESIGN COPY IS NOT LINKED
SEDIT BR10000056040 HD70414 GA
TO A PROJECT
BACKGROUND COLOR IN TREE VIEW NOT DISPLAY
SEDIT BR10000056060 HD70437 GA
CORRECTLY WHILE USE MOUSE'S SCROLLING
THE VAULE OF DISABLEATTRIBUTESSETBYSCRIPT KEY
SEDIT BR10000056139 HD70517 GA
IS NOT CLEAR
DISABLE LIFECYCLE WINDOW PROPERTIES ASSIGNED
SEDIT BR10000056154 HD70530 GA
BY A SCRIPT' DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY
SCROLLBAR WILL MOVE TO WRONG PLACE AFTER
SEDIT BR10000056175 HD70544 GA
RESIZE APPLICATION TOOL BAR S WIDTH
THE MEANING OF A DISPLAY OF 'ENGLISH MODE' AND
SEDIT BR10000056225 HD70601 GA
'JAPANESE IS DIFFERENT IN CHECK-IN OF CWI
THE 'GOTO STATE' MENU NAME OF THE LIFE CYCLE
SEDIT BR10000056234 HD70607 GA
RULE IS STRANGE
SEDIT BR10000056268 HD70647 IT IS NOT POSSIBLE ADD AN ICON TO A DEFINED VIEW GA
THE CREATION DATE IS INCORRECT WHEN INSERTING
SEDIT BR10000056276 HD70649 GA
SDE TITLE BLOCK AS YYYY/MM/DD
IN USER MAINTENACE TOOL, 'USER DETAILS' PANEL IS
SEDIT BR10000056317 HD70680 GA
NOT COMPLETE ACTIONS BUTTONS ARE MISSING
RETRIEVEALLREVISIONS GIVES WRONG OBJECTS BACK
SEDIT BR10000056384 HD70770 GA
WHEN USING ISMOBJECTS.
CANNOT PERFORM ADD AS COPY OPERATION ON ROOT
SEDIT BR10000056524 HD70877 GA
OBJECTS IN SEPAR ATE TREE VIEWS
SEDIT BR10000056578 HD70959 LICENSE DO NOT BE RELEASED IF USER CANCEL LOGIN GA
WRONG TEXT IN EXIT MESSAGE WINDOW: 'EDIT' MUST
SEDIT BR10000056698 HD71077 GA
BE 'EXIT'
SEDIT BR10000056700 HD71083 ALTHOUGHIS SETTING,IT DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY GA
WHEN CHANGE THE VALUE OF DESIGNTABLE FILET
SEDIT BR10000056717 HD71094 GA
MOVE THAT FILE AND FAILS TO UPDATE ITS CATIA LINK
THOUGH THE LABEL IS EDITED AND SAVED, LABEL IS
SEDIT BR10000056750 HD71134 GA
NOT DISPLAYED
SEDIT BR10000056810 HD71192 ERROR ON LINKS GA
SEDIT BR10000056860 HD71235 SOME TOOLS IN ADMIN CONSOLE MISSING GA
SEARCH FUNCTION 'FIND IN LEFT LIST' DOES NOT
SEDIT BR10000056853 HD71239 GA
WORK ALWAYS
SEDIT BR10000057036 HD71425 SECURITY HOLE GA
SEDIT BR10000057055 HD71454 FLOWCHART DESIGNER TOOL ERRORS GA
THE CELL WITH A PROPERTY VALUE JUMPS UP ON
SEDIT BR10000057065 HD71461 GA
SELECTION IN FORM DESIGNER PROPERTIES WINDOW
TAB CAPTION IS NOT TRANSLATED IN THE OBJECT
SEDIT BR10000057092 HD71488 GA
AUTHORIZATION REPORT WINDOW
GRID PROPERTY POPUP MENU IS NOT TRANSLATED IN
SEDIT BR10000057100 HD71493 GA
THE COPY LINKS WINDOW
TOOLTIP IS NOT TRANSLATED IN SMARTEAM FILE
SEDIT BR10000057101 HD71497 GA
EXPLORER
TOOLTIPS TO THE TAB BUTTONS NEXT, PREVIOUS IN
SEDIT BR10000057104 HD71498 THE GRID VIEW WITH THE SEARCH RESULTS ARE NOT GA
TRANSLATED
SEDIT BR10000057105 HD71500 SMARTEAM IMPORT LOG APPEARS ALL IN ENGLISH GA
THE USER LOGIN STATUS BAR IS TOO SHORT IN ST
SEDIT BR10000057107 HD71503 EDITOR R18SP3: M ORE LONG USER LOGINS ARE NOT GA
DISPLAYED
OBJECT IMPORT STATUS MESSAGES IN THE IMPORT
SEDIT BR10000057108 HD71511 GA
STATUS WINDOW ARE NOT TRANSLATED BY NLS
SEDIT BR10000057182 HD71577 INFORMATION ABOUT RUNQUERYMODE GA
SEDIT BR10000057184 HD71578 SMARTEAM API. EXPLENATION OF SELECTMODEENUM GA
PROFILE CARD IS DISPLAYED INCORRECTLY IN FORM
SEDIT BR10000057181 HD71580 GA
DESIGNER (R18SP 3)
CANNOT RUN DMD ON DB2 DATABASE DEFINED AS
SEDIT BR10000057189 HD71594 GA
32KBYTE OF PAGESIZE
SMARTEAM SETTINGS NOT CONSIDERED FOR DESIGN
SEDIT BR10000057251 HD71658 GA
COPY
SHOW INHERITED AUTHORIZATIONS BOX IS GRAYED
SEDIT BR10000057264 HD71663 GA
OUT IN USERS MAINTENANCE.
SOME MESSAGES IN DMD ARE NOT TRANSLATED BY
SEDIT BR10000057255 HD71664 GA
NLS
EXECUTEOPERATIONONOBJECTTREE() - BUG OR
SEDIT BR10000057270 HD71666 GA
EXPECTED NEW BEHAVIOUR?
DB DESIGNATION DIALOG IN DMD IS NOT TRANSLATED
SEDIT BR10000057259 HD71668 GA
BY NLS
SEDIT BR10000057267 HD71678 PROJECT ROLE AUTHORISATION PROBLEM GA
SELECTED DEFAULT VALUE FIELD IS NOT REFRESHED
SEDIT BR10000057283 HD71688 GA
WHEN SCROLLING IN DEFAULT VALUES
SEDIT BR10000057303 HD71713 VIEW OPTIONS DIALOG IS NOT TRANSLATED IN BWB GA
SEDIT BR10000057433 HD71848 BROWSER TOOLBAR POSITION ERROR GA
ERROR OCCURS AT CHECK-OUT METHOD OF
SEDIT BR10000057444 HD71860 SMSESSIONUTIL BY USING SMARTEAM API AND CHECK- GA
OUT FAILS
"ADD AS COPY" DOES NOT WORK ALTHOUGH
SEDIT BR10000057480 HD71894 GA
PERMISSIONS FOR PROJECTTREE ARE GIVEN
SEDIT BR10000057492 HD71913 PROBLEM WITH TREE EXPAND MENU GA
QUICK FIND + PROJECTION DOES NOT SHOW THE
SEDIT BR10000057493 HD71914 GA
RIGHT RESULT
ISSUE WITH PROFICECARDIMAGE.VISIBLE AND
SEDIT BR10000057496 HD71921 GA
PROFICECARDIMAGE.PATH SETTINGS.
SMARTEAM API FOUND CONFLICTS BETWEEN
SEDIT BR10000057601 HD72016 GA
DIFFERENT VERSIONS OF THE SAME DEPENDENT AS
SEDIT BR10000057594 HD72017 SILENT INSTALL OF SMARTEAM CLIENT GA
QUICKFIND ADVANCED SEARCH RESULT WILL NOT BE
SEDIT BR10000057817 HD72256 GA
OVERTAKEN INTO THE INVOKING PROFILECARD
SEDIT BR10000057842 HD72289 ADD NOTES DOES NOT WITH SMARTEAM R17 SP7 GA
SMARTEAM COULD NOT INSTALL INTO 'C:Â¥PROGRAM
SEDIT BR10000057859 HD72310 GA
FILESÂ¥SMARTEAM' FOLDER
SEDIT BR10000057870 HD72322 VIEW TOOLBAR SORTING GA
MENU EDITOR,SYSTEM PROFILES CONTAINS
SEDIT BR10000057904 HD72362 GA
DIFFERENT PROFILES THEN SMARTEAM MANUAL
SEDIT BR10000057903 HD72364 RESPONSE TIME ISSUE IN PRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT GA
ST R18 FLOWPROCESS INDEX IS NOT CUSTOMISABLE -
SEDIT BR10000057934 HD72389 GA
2 OF 2
CANNOT LINK THE ITEMS VIA DRAG&DROP IF THE
SEDIT BR10000057932 HD72391 GA
LEHGTH OF A CHILD ITEM ID IS GREATER THAN 48
THE TAB CAPTION 'ATTRIBUTE' IS NOT TRANSLATED IN
SEDIT BR10000057944 HD72404 GA
THE FORM DESIGNER
SMARTEAM OFFICE INTEGRATION CRASH IF THE
SEDIT BR10000057954 HD72411 GA
EXTERNAL FILE NAME EXCEEDS FILE_NAME SI
SOME STRINGS ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN THE FORM
SEDIT BR10000057957 HD72418 GA
DESIGNER MESSAGE DIALOGS
BOOLEAN VALUES (TRUE, FALSE) IN THE SMARTEAM
SEDIT BR10000057962 HD72420 GA
GRID ARE NOT TRANSLATED BY NLS
THE 'CLOSE' BUTTON IS DISPLAYED INCORRECTLY IN
SEDIT BR10000057963 HD72421 GA
THE 'LEGEND' DIALOG (LFC RULES SETUP)
ONLY TOP PART OF THE BUTTONS OK, CANCEL, HELP IS
SEDIT BR10000057968 HD72423 GA
DISPLAYED IN THE EDIT SEQUENCES DIALOG
VALIDATION BUTTON IS ALWAYS DISABLED IN THE
SEDIT BR10000057970 HD72425 GA
COPY TOOL MAPPING UTILITY
THE STRING CONNECTING TO DATABASE IS NOT
SEDIT BR10000057965 HD72426 GA
TRANSLATED IN THE DBREGISTRATION TOOL
CANNOT QUERY BY ATTRIBUTE FROM DOCUMENTS
SEDIT BR10000058252 HD72740 GA
SUPER CLASS LEVEL
EDITOR CANNOT BE STARTED ON CLIENT SIDE AFTER
SEDIT BR10000058361 HD72851 SMARTEAM V5R17 SP8 IS INSTALLED TO THE MACHINE GA
WHICH IS INSTALLED FOUNDATION AND EDIT
SEDIT BR10000058362 HD72852 USER LOGIN NAME DON'T APPEAR. GA
SEDIT BR10000058363 HD72854 FLOWCHART DESIGNER CTRL+ TOOL ERRORS GA
FIELD NAMES ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN THE 'REVIEW
SEDIT BR10000058365 HD72855 GA
AND APPROVE MOD IFICATIONS' WINDOW
DROPDOWN LISTBOXES ARE SHIFTED UP ON
SEDIT BR10000058371 HD72857 SELECTION IN THE FORM DESIGNER PROPERTIES GA
WINDOW
THE 'CLOSE' BUTTON IS DISPLAYED INCORRECTLY IN
SEDIT BR10000058368 HD72860 GA
THE 'LEGEND' D IALOG (WORKFLOW VIEW)
QUICKFIND SEARCH ATTRIBUTES DO NOT APPEAR IN
SEDIT BR10000058369 HD72861 GA
THE GRID VIEW OF QUICKFIND RESULT SET
STARTING NEW WFL PROCESS ON ITEMS STRUCTURE
SEDIT BR10000058373 HD72863 GA
LEADS TO ERROR
SINGLELINKOBJECT API METHOD RETURNS A WRONG
SEDIT BR10000058374 HD72864 RESULT WHEN TWO OBJECTS ARE LINKED MORE THAN GA
ONE TIME
PERIODICAL FAILURE - COMMANDS IN MENU IS NOT
SEDIT BR10000058375 HD72865 GA
ACCESSABLE
THE LAYOUT DEFINED WITH 'FORM DESIGNER' IS NOT
SEDIT BR10000058657 HD73164 GA
NORMALLY DISPL AYED
THE ITEM STATE ICONS FOR PROTOTYPE, RELEASE,
SEDIT BR10000058658 HD73165 ACTIVE ARE DISPLAYED DIFFERENTLY IN THE GA
DIFFERENT LFC RULES DIALOGS
BOOLEAN VALUES (TRUE, FALSE) ARE NOT
SEDIT BR10000058688 HD73192 GA
TRANSLATED IN THE BRIEFCASE GRID
TOP BOUNDS OF BUTTONS YES, NO, YES TO ALL ARE
SEDIT BR10000058695 HD73203 OVERLAPPED BY SECURE CHECKBOX SCOPE IN THE GA
SMARTEAM DIALOG
CLIENT SIDE HOOKS, BEFORE LOAD LIFE CYCLE
SEDIT BR10000058909 HD73434 GA
SCREEN FOR PARTS
NAVIGATION BUTTON TOOLTIPS NEXT, PREVIOUS ARE
SEDIT BR10000058980 HD73515 NOT TRANSLATED IN THE PROPERTIES WINDOW (FORM GA
DESIGNER)
NEXT, PREVIOUS BUTTON TOOLTIPS ARE NOT
SEDIT BR10000059006 HD73516 GA
TRANSLATED IN ST NAVIG ATOR BAR
MISSING THE PRODUCT NAME IN THE ABOUT DIALOG
SEDIT BR10000058997 HD73517 GA
OF SEQUENCE DESI GNER TOOL
COLOR THEME NAMES ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN THE
SEDIT BR10000058982 HD73521 GA
GENERAL OPTIONS D IALOG
MISSING ICONS FOR ALL TOOLBAR BUTTONS IN THE
SEDIT BR10000058998 HD73522 GA
MENU EDITOR TOOL
TOP-LEVEL MENUS ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN SOME
SEDIT BR10000058979 HD73525 GA
SMARTEAM UTILITIES
PROJECT EXPAND LEVEL AFFECTS VAULT MAINTENCE
SEDIT BR10000059030 HD73559 GA
TREE
ICON DISSAPEAR WHEN PROJECT BASED
SEDIT BR10000059471 HD74025 GA
AUTHORIZATION IS USED IN SMARTEAM R18 SP2HF2
SMARTEAM USER MAINTENANCE LEADS TO CRASH
SEDIT BR10000059649 HD74215 GA
AFTER CTRL+A AND CTRL+C
MATERIAL CHANGE IN SPLIT PLATE CHANGES THE
SFD BR10000054291 HD68616 GA
NOMENCLATURE
SFD BR10000055304 HD69645 ERROR WHILE SPLITTING PLATE GA
FUNCTIONALVOLUME/WEIGHT AND COG VALUES ARE
SFD BR10000056087 HD70463 GA
KO
FUNCTIONALVOLDEC/ERROR HAVING STANDARD
SFD BR10000056226 HD70602 GA
OPENING REFERENCING OTHER PLATES
SFD BR10000056232 HD70608 FUNCTIONALVOLDEC/ PROPAGATION KO GA
SFD BR10000057354 HD71762 SPLITTING SKETCH FOR STIFFENER ON FREE EDGE GA
LENGTH_WIDTH UNITS ARE NOT GETTING
SFD BR10000057390 HD71806 GA
RECOGNISED IN CUSTOMISED CREATED CLASSES
SFD BR10000057856 HD72297 NEW ATTRIBUTES ARE NOT SEEN IN SDD WORKBENCH GA
COPYPASTE/DISCRETE ATTRIBUTES ARE NOT RETAINED
SFD BR10000058916 HD73440 GA
ON PASTED PLATE ON CUSTOM CLASS.
UPDATE OF SEAMED PLATE HAVING ITS COG OUTSIDE
SFD BR10000059876 HD74452 GA
ITS SHAPE LEADS TO AN ERROR MESSAGE
SHAPEDSG BR10000050767 HD64648 GSD : DELETION OF SPECIFIC PLANE TAKES LONG TIME. GA
GSD: VARIABLE FILLET: INCORRECT FILLET WHEN
SHAPEDSG BR10000051460 HD65458 LENGTH OF PARENT ELEMENT IS INCREASED BEYOND A GA
CERTAIN LIMIT
GSD: COPY-PASTE - IT TAKES A LOT OF TIME TO PASTE
SHAPEDSG BR10000052082 HD66179 GA
SPECIAL AS RESULT.
GSD : HELIX CURVE CAN NOT BE CREATED AT 50MM
HEIGHT.
GSD: CIRCULAR PATTERN OF PLANES IS SHOWN IN
RED COLOR AND DOES NOT REQUIRE UPDATE
GSD : WHEN AN ELEMENT RELATED TO PUBLICATION
IS DELETED, THERE IS NO WARNING
GSD : THE JOIN PERFORMANCE IS VERY BAD WITH THE
CHECK CONNEXITY OPTION
GSD: WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED EVEN WHEN
THE CURVE IS ON SUPPORT.
GSD : PROJECTION : PROJECTION GENERATED IS NOT
CORRECT
GSD: WYSIWYG COMMAND IS NOT APPLIED
CORRECTLY.
GSD: SOLID BODY CANT BE INSERTED IN THE
DESTINATION POSITION.
GSD : SPECIFICATION TREE AND GEOMETRY CAN NOT
BE SELECTED WHEN SCALE PLANE IS ACTIVE
GSD: 3D CORNER - CATIA ABENDS WHILE CREATING
3D CORNER.
PART : SPECIFIC PART CAN NOT BE OPENED WHEN
ISOPARAMETRIC OPTION IS ACTIVE
GSD: FORMULA IS ALSO REPLACED WHEN THE
ELEMENT CREATED BY FORMULA IS REPLACED.
GSD: SUB CONTEXT MENU IS NOT DISPLAYED IF
DATUM ELEMENT IS SELECTED.
GSD: OFFSET: UNNECESSARY CREASE IS CREATED ON
RESULTANT SURFACE
GSD : MANY FACES ARE NOT DISPLAYED WHEN ENABLE
ISOPARAMETRICS GENERATION.
GSD: MEASURE BETWEEN - DISTANCE OF MEASURE
BETWEEN IS NOT RIGHT.
GSD: SHAPE FILLET PROBLEM WITH MD2
CONFIGURATION
SHAPEDSG BR10000053911 HD68231 GSD : TRANSLATE - ABEND WITH JAPANESE LANGUAGE GA
GSD: EXTRUDE - EVEN WITH SAME GEOMETRY,
EXTRUDE IS IN ERROR.
GSD: POWERCOPY - CATIA TERMINATES WHEN
POWERCOPY IS SELECTED AS DESTINATION.
GSD: REFLECT LINE - REPEAT OF REFLECT LINE IS NOT
CREATED BY NEAR SELECTION.
GSD: THE PARALLEL CURVE WITH LAW IS NOT
GENERATED AND CATIAV5 GOES INTO LOOPS.
GSD: VOLUME IS CREATED DIRECTLY UNDER
PARTBODY BY COPY AND PASTE.
GSD: VOLUME IS CREATED DIRECTLY UNDER
PARTBODY BY COPY AND PASTE.
GSD : ABEND WHILE UPDATING EXTRCT FROM
SPECIFIC CATPART DESIGNED CONTEXTUALY
GSD: PLANE - PLANE IS CREATED ALTHOUGH POINTS
ARE IN COLLINEAR DIRECTIONS.
SHAPEDSG BR10000054162 HD68478 GSD: CIRCLE IS NOT CORRECTLY MADE. GA
GSD: IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO ADD AN EXTRACT TO A
MULTI-RESULT OUTPUT.
GSD: PARALLEL CURVE- INCORRECT RESULT OF
PARALLEL CURVE WHEN A SPECIFIC LAW IS APPLIED.
GSD : WITH CIRCLE FUNCTION HIGHLIGHTED RESULT
IS DIFFERENT THAN ACTUAL RESULT
GSD : A CIRCLE CANNOT BE CREATED AND AN UPDATE
ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYS
SMD: CIRCULAR HOLES ARE TOO SMALL AND ON
WRONG LOCATION
GSD: TEXT WITH LEADER IS BLACK WHEN DISPLAY
ACCURACY IS CHANGED.
GSD: CORNER/NO NUMBERING FOR MULPILE
SOLUTION & NO MULTIPLE SELECTION
SHAPEDSG BR10000054273 HD68589 GSD : DEVELOP RESULT IS NOT CORRECT. GA
GSD : SKETCH GOES IN UPDATE ERROR WHEN
SHAPEDSG BR10000054339 HD68650 CREATED WHILE CHANGING THE TYPE OF VOLUME GA
EXTRUDE
GSD: SURFACE CREATED IN GEOMETRIC SET DO NOT
INHERIT THE COLOR OF SET
GSD : CONNECT CHECKER : CONNECT CHECKER
ANALYSIS DOESNT GIVE CORRECT RESULT
GSD: PASTE COMMAND IS NOT PROCESSED AFTER AN
ERROR MESSAGE DISPLAYED
CMP : WRONG SIZE OF FILE WHEN ADDING A LAW TO
A SWEEP SURFACE
GSD: REFLECT LINE - AXIS SYSTEM CANNOT BE
SELECTED FROM EDIT COMPONENTS.
GSD: ISOLATE COMMAND IS NOT DISPLAYED IN
SHAPEDSG BR10000054475 HD68791 CONTEXTUAL MENU OF ELEMENT PASTED BY AS GA
RESULT WITH LINK.
GSD: SURFACE CREATED IN GEOMETRIC SET DO NOT
INHERIT THE COLOR OF SET
GSD: POINTS/ POLAR EXTRMUM IS NOT CREATED
CORRECTLY
GSD : INCORRECT HIGHLIGHT FOR CIRCLE WITH NEXT
SOLUTION FUNCTION
GSD : WHEN EMPTY OGS IS SET TO DEFINE IN WORK
OBJECT FEATUES BELOW IT CAN BE SEEN.
GSD : REPLACE : SURFACE NOT DISPLAYED AND
EXTRACT CHANGES TO WIRE FORM.
GSD : THE EXTRUDE SURFACES GET DELETED FROM
GEOMETRY AREA WHEN EMPTY OGS ARE DELETED.
GSD : ABEND WHEN SPLIT FEATURE CREATED BY PC
INSTANTIATION IS EDITED
SHAPEDSG BR10000054705 HD69025 GSD: INTERSECTION/INCORRECT INTERSECTION GA
GSD : VOLUME REVOLVE IS NOT CREATED CORRECTLY
FOR A SPECIFIC CATPART
FILE / SAVE AS MODEL: MIGRATED V4 SURFACE IS
INCOMPLETE
GSD : SWEEP : SWEEP SURFACE IS NOT CREATED AND
WRONG ERROR MESSAGE IS GIVEN
GSD : PARALLEL CURVE : SUPPORT OF 'PARALLEL' IS
RESET ON EDITING
GSD : CONTEXTUAL MENU DO NOT DISPLAY ALL
COMMANDS - INSTANCIATE FROM DOCUMENT
GSD: EDGE FILLET: WITH CREATE DATUM ORIGINAL
SURFACE DOES NOT HIDE.
GSD : EXTRAPOLATE : LENGTH OF EXTRAPOLATE IS
NOT CORRECT WITH SUPPORT IS SELECTED
GSD: COPY-PASTE - IT TAKES A LOT OF TIME TO PASTE
SPECIAL AS RESULT.
GSD: UPDATE ERROR IS DISPLAYED WHEN
PROJECTION IS PERFORMED IN SPECIFIC CATPART.
PDF: THE GEOMETRICAL ELEMENT IS LOST WHEN 'PART
TO PART' COMMAND IS PERFORMED
GSD : VOLUME : VOLUME IS CREATED TO DIRECTLY
UNDER WHEN MULTIPLE ELEMENTS ARE PASTED
GSD: POWERCOPY - INSTANCE DIRECTION OF
POWERCOPY BECOMES REVERSE.
GSD : DIFERENT BEHAVIOR WITH WARNING MESSAGE
SHAPEDSG BR10000054884 HD69212 WHEN UPDATE MODE SWITCHED BETWEEN MAUNAL GA
AND AUTOMATIC
GSD: PARALLEL CURVE - PARALLEL CURVE CANNOT BE
CREATED.
GSD: CONNECT CHECKER FAILS TO RECOGNIZE THE
GAP IN THE SPECIFIC CATPART.
GSD : TWO OR MORE ELEMENTS AND GS OF THE SAME
NAME CAN CREATE
SHAPEDSG BR10000054917 HD69241 GSD: MEASURE BETWEEN/ INCONSISTENT RESULTS GA
GSD / UNECESSARY LINE DISPLAYED WITH
PARTICULAR 3D ACCURACY SETTING
GSD: MULTI-SECTION SURFACE/ERROR MESSAGE
WHILE CREATING MULTI-SECTION SURFACE
GSD: MINIMUM DISTANCE IS INCORRECTLY MEASURED
BY THE MEASURE BETWEEN COMMAND.
GSD: PICKABLE OPTION IS CANCELLED AFTER ERROR
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED.
SHAPEDSG BR10000054967 HD69301 GSD: JOIN/TWISTED SURFACE IS DISPLAYED GA
GSD: WHEN EXTRACT IS EDITED, CATIA IS FORCED TO
TERMINATE
GSD : APPROXIMATE MEASURE OF GSD JOIN ELEMENT
IS NOT CORRECT
GSD : CONTROL POINTS ARE NOT CREATED WITH
AFFINITY OPERATION
SHAPEDSG BR10000055004 HD69332 GSD : SPLIT PLY - REPLACE . BY , - CATIA CRASH GA
GSD : POWER COPY : UPDATE VALUES DOES NOT
EXIST IN INSTANTIATED PARAMETER
GSD: POWERCOPY INSTATIATION: ERROR WINDOW IS
SHOWN AND CANNOT BE INSTATIATED
SHAPEDSG BR10000055087 HD69418 GSD: TRIM: RESULTANT SURFACE IS NOT CORRECT GA
GSD: MEASURE/MEASURE BETWEEN GIVES INCORRECT
RESULT
GSD: CATIA ABEND IF THE POINT CREATED IN OTHER
SHAPEDSG BR10000055112 HD69438 CATPART IS SELECTED AS AXIS WHILE PERFORMING GA
ROTATE.
GSD: HELIX: EDITING PITCH VALUE IMPACTS
PERFORMANCE
FSS: CATIA CRASHES WHEN TRIED TO CREATE
GEOMETRY EXTRACTION
GSD: THICK SURFACE - THICK SURFACE CANNOT BE
CREATED FOR A SURFACE.
SHAPEDSG BR10000055180 HD69515 GSD: EDGE FILLET IS NOT CREATED NORMALLY GA
GSD: COLOR OF SELECTED EDGE CHANGES TO COLOR
OF SELECTED ELEMENT WHEN PERFOMED FILL.
SHAPEDSG BR10000055239 HD69580 GSD: THE FORMULA IS UPGRADED TWO TIMES GA
GSD : VISUALIZATION OF TRANSLATE PRIVIEW DOES
NOT DISAPPEAR AFTER CANCEL
GSD: REORDER: ELEMENTS DISAPPEAR WHEN OGS IS
REORDERED OUTSIDE PARTBODY
GSD: CANNOT SELECT A FACE FROM A THICKNESS
FEATURE
GSD: MEASURE BETWEEN / CATIA HANGS ON
PERFORMING MEASURE BETWEEN.
GSD: MEASURE BETWEEN OF GEOMETRIES CREATED
BY MEASURE BETWEEN LEADS TO CRASH.
SHAPEDSG BR10000055337 HD69675 GSD: CANNOT EXTRACT THE SOLID AS DATUM. GA
GSD: SPLIT - WHEN AN ELEMENT IS INPUT AS ELEMENT
TO KEEP, ERROR IS NOT DISPLAYED.
GSD: GRAPHIC PROPERTIES: SURFACE COLOR APPLIED
SHAPEDSG BR10000055376 HD69721 TO GEOMETRICAL SET DOES NOT RETURN BACK BY GA
UNDO
GSD: SPLIT - ELEMENTS TO JOIN TURN INTO HIDE
WHEN EXECUTE SPLIT.
GSD : SHAPE MORPHING : SHAPE CREATED BY
MORPHING IS NOT CORRECT
GSD: INSERTADDVOLUME - IN NONHYBRID DESIGN
ENVIRONMENT WHEN INSERTADDVOLUME IS
PERFORMED FOR VOLUME OF OGS, HYBRID BODY IS
CREATED.
GSD : UNWANTED LINK GETS CREATED WHILE
INSTANTIATING IN A SPECIFIC WAY
GSD: MEASURE ITEM/SURFACE IS DISPLAYED AS
SELECTION
GSD : THE MULTI-SECTIONS SURFACE IS DISTANT
FROM THE SHAPE OF THE GUIDE CURVE
GSD: EDGE FILLET: CATIA ABENDS FOR PARTICULAR
CATPART
GSD: BLEND - TENSION VALUE DIFFERS FROM ACTUAL
TENSION VALUE.
GSD : OFFSET : EVEN WITH SAME OFFSET INPUTS,
SUB-ELEMENT TO REMOVE IS DIFFERENT
GSD: ACTIVE PART BECOMES BACKGROUND AND SAME
COLOR.
GSD: PASTE SPECIAL AS RESULT - FEATURE CANNOT
BE PASTED AS RESULT.
GSD: INSERTADDVOLUME - IN NONHYBRID DESIGN
ENVIRONMENT WHEN INSERTADDVOLUME IS
PERFORMED FOR VOLUME OF OGS, HYBRID BODY IS
CREATED.
GSD: TRIM - TRIM ELEMENT CANT BE PASTED AS
RESULT.
SHAPEDSG BR10000055856 HD70231 GSD: BLEND/DEFAULT IS CONFUSING IN BEND PANEL GA
GSD: TRANSLATE - MULTI OUTPUT IS NOT CREATED
CORRECTLY.
GSD: EDGE FILLET/EDGE FILLET FAILS WITH WARNING
MESSAGE
GSD : FILLET CREATED WITH SPECIFIC SURFACES ON
R16 LEVEL FAILS ON R18SP01
GSD: PARALLEL CURVE- INCORRECT RESULT OF
PARALLEL CURVE WHEN A SPECIFIC LAW IS APPLIED.
GSD : TRIM CAN NOT BE CREATED WITH A SPECIFIC
ORDER OF SELECTION
GSD : THE SEW SURFACE IS NOT HIGHLIGHTED
COMPLETELY
GSD : JOIN : JOIN CANNOT BE CREATED WITH
SPECIFIC DATA
GSD : ABEND WITH DISASSEMBLING CURVE FROM
SPECIFIC CATPART
GSD : OFFSET : CATIA ABENDS DURING OFFSET
OPERATION
GSD : PROJECTION : CATIA CRASHES DURING
PROJECTION OPERATION
GSD: DATA IS OPENED IN THE STATE OF THE WAITING
FOR UPDATE
GSD: EXTRAPOLATED FEATURE TOPOLOGY CHANGES
ACCORDING THE SUPPORT SURFACE LENGHT
GSD : SHAPE FILLET : SHAPE FILLET IS NOT CREATED
BY THE SELECTION ORDER OF SUPPORT
GSD : EXTRACT : REPLACING 'ELEMENT(S) TO
SHAPEDSG BR10000056425 HD70779 EXTRACT' TO A SURFACE FROM 'EDGE', PARAMETERS IN GA
SECIFICATION TREE ARE NOT UPDATED
GSD: CRASH AFTER CHANGING A PARAMETER OF A
SWEEP FEATURE
GSD : IT TAKES TOO LONG TO FINIS THE 'SELECTION
SETS EDITION' OPERATION
SHAPEDSG BR10000056463 HD70840 CRASH WHEN PROJECTING ELEMENTS IN GSD GA
GSD : THE COLOR OF SYMMETRY SHAPE IS DIFFERENT
FROM THE COLOR DISPLAYED IN GRAPHIC PROPERTIES
GSD : THICK SURFACE :THICK SURFACE IS NOT
COMPUTED AND ERROR MESSAGE IS THROWN
GSD: CATIA ABENDS WHEN LOADING TWO EXTERNAL
REFERENCES AT THE SAME TIME.
SHAPEDSG BR10000056515 HD70896 GSD : TRANSLATE - ABEND WITH JAPANESE LANGUAGE GA
GSD: PORCUPINE ANALYSIS - CURVATURE PLOT WILL
HAVE AN AREA THAT DROPS TO INFINITE CURVATURE.
GSD: PORCUPINE ANALYSIS - CURVATURE PLOT WILL
HAVE AN AREA THAT DROPS TO INFINITE CURVATURE.
GSD: SYMMETRY - CATIA ABENDS ON PERFORMING
SYMMETRY WITH DATUM OPTION ON.
SHAPEDSG BR10000056617 HD70994 MULTI-SECTIONS SURFACE - TANGENCY PROBLEM. GA
GSD: ANALYSIS/CONNECT CHECKER ANALYSIS/
INCORRECT RESULT
SHAPEDSG BR10000056799 HD71182 GSD: INCORRECT MEASURE BETWEEN RESULT. GA
GSD: INCORRECT RECOGNITION OF SURFACE CREATED
BY FORMULA
GSD: SPLIT: UNSTABLE BEHAVIOR OBSERVED IN A
SPECIFIC CATPART.
GSD: PORCUPINE CURVATURE ANALYSIS - CATIA
ABENDS ON PERFORMING THIS ANALYSIS.
GSD: WORK ON SUPPORT - WHEN DATA WITH GRID
TYPE NONE IS OPENED, CATIA ABENDS.
SHAPEDSG BR10000057274 HD71680 GSD : SPECIFC PART TAKES LONG TIME FOR OPENING GA
GSD: CATIA CRASHES WHEN FEATURE IN ERROR IS
EDITED.
GSD: DEVELOP: IMPOSSIBLE TO CREATE A DEVELOP
CURVE
GSD : ERROR MESSAGE NOT TRANSLATED IN GERMAN/
FRENCH LANGUAGE
VISU : CURVATURE ANALYSIS RESULT IS NOT CORRECT
UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS
GSD : COPY PASTE : CANNOT COPY PASTE BI-TANGENT
SHAPE FILLET
GSD: MULTI SECTION SURFACE: GAP IS CREATED
WHEN INPUT ELEMENT IS REVERSED
SHAPEDSG BR10000057481 HD71897 GSD: SWEEP/UPDATE ERROR WITH MD2 LICENSE GA
GSD : CATIA GOT ABEND WHEN 'SWITCH TO
GEOMETRICAL SET ' IS PERFORME D
GSD: INCORRECT RESULT OF SHAPE FILLET USING YM2
LICENSE
GSD: LINE: ERROR SHOWN WHEN USING AXIS VECTOR
FOR POINT DIRECTION TYPE
GSD: MULTIPLE OGS CANNOT SWITCH TO GS
SIMULTANEOUSLY.
GSD : THE GAP IS NOT MEASURED BY 'CONNECT
CHECKER ANALYSIS' CORRECTLY
GSD: THE RANGE OF ANGLE DEFINED IN THE SWEEP
RESETS WHEN EDITED AGAIN.
GSD: OFFSET FAILS WHEN THE CURVE IS REPLACED BY
ITS SMOOTHED CURVE.
GSD : 0MM IS MEASURED WHEN 0.001 OR LESS
MEASUREMENT IS PERFORMED
GSD : THE INTERSECTION FEATURE CAN NOT BE
SELECTED FROM GEOMETRY AREA
GSD: CATIA CRASHES WHEN 3D CURVE OFFSET
COMMAND IS CANCELLED.
GSD: WARNING MESSAGE WAS DISPLAYED WHEN
CREATE A BLEND SURFACE FROM IGES ELEMENT
GSD : SPLIT SURFACE DEVIATES FROM TRIMMING
CURVE
GSD: ONE SOLUTION IS LOST FOR SWEEP AFTER
CREATING SHAPE FILLET ON IT.
PART: UNION TRIM: ERROR IS DISPLAYED FOR FACES
TO REMOVE
GSD : INCORRECT HIGHLIGHT OF SELECTED EDGE
SHAPEDSG BR10000057887 HD72342 WITH SPECIFIC CATPART AFTER COPY PASTE AS GA
RESULT WITH LINK
GSD: INTERSECTION/INTERSECTION GIVES
INCORRECT RESULT
GSD: HELIX: FAILS TO UPDATE WHEN ITS DRIVING
PARAMETERS ARE CHANGED
GSD: SWEEP: WITH SPECIFIC VALUE, ERROR OCCURS
ON LAW
GSD: A PART OF GRID OF WORK ON SUPPORT 3D IS
NOT DISPLAYED.
GSD: REORDER - EDGES ARE NOT FOUND AFTER
REORDER.
SHAPEDSG BR10000058021 HD72482 GSD: REPLACE - CATIA ABENDS DURING REPLACE. GA
SHAPEDSG BR10000058028 HD72490 GSD: CORNER/INCORRECT RESULT GA
GSD: OFFSET/UNNECESSARY MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
MANY TIMES
GSD: CURVE CONNECT CHECKER: THE DISPLAY OF
RESULTS IS BLACK WITH TRANSPARENT VIEW MODE
GSD : REORDER IS NOT POSSIBLE WITH FEATURE NOT
HIGHLIGHTED AS PROHIBITED
VISU : VALUE OF GRID LINES ARE NOT DISPLAYED AS
Y0,Z0 WHEN ZOOM OUT IS PERFORMED
GSD : FEATURE CANNOT BE UPDATED CORRECTLY DUE
TO TGTINTERSEDGE
GSD : AN EDGE CANNOT BE SELECTED WHEN THE
REROUTE OPERATION IS PERFORMED
GSD : GEOMETRIC PROPERTIES : CORNER CREATED
BETWEEN LINES IS IDENTIFIED AS PARAMETRIC SPLINE
GSD: REPLACE: CANNOT BE DONE DUE TO
ANNOTATION ON TANGENT EDGE
GSD : WARNING MESSAGE IS NOT IN JAPANESE WHILE
INSTANTIATING IN JAPANESE OS
GSD: POINT: POSITION OF POINT CHANGES AFTER
SKETCH OF PARENT PAD IS MODIFIED
GSD: PARENT ELEMENTS ARE NOT DISPLAYED WHEN
DELETING CHILD ELEMENT AFTER CATDUA.
GSD: CATIA CRASHES WHEN EDGE FILLET IS
PERFORMED ON A PARTICULAR GEOMETRY.
GSD: CATIA CRASHES ON CREATING EDGE FILLET ON A
PARTICULAR GEOMETRY.
GSD:INVISIBLE ELEMENT IS DISPLAYED WHEN ACTIVE
WINDOW IS CHANGED
GSD: THE RESULT OF INTERSECTION DIFFER BY ORDER
OF SELECTION
GSD : ELEMENT DISAPPEAR WHEN GEOMETRICAL SET
IS DELETED FROM SPECIFIC CATPART
GSD: CONNECT CHECKER: TAKES MORE TIME ON R18
LEVEL
SHAPEDSG BR10000058516 HD73014 GSD: EXTRAPOLATE CANNOT BE PASTED AS RESULT. GA
GSD: REFLECT LINE IS NOT CREATED FOR A CERTAIN
ANGLE VALUE, ON THE SYMMETRY SURFACE.
GSD: THICKSURFACE FAILS WHEN SPLIT DIRECTION IS
INVERTED.
GSD: INTERNAL DIRECTION OF INPUT CANNOT BE
SHAPEDSG BR10000058661 HD73169 REVERSED MORE THAN TWO TIMES DURING EDIT GA
INPUT.
GSD : ABEND TRACE GENERATED WHILE EDITING
CONIC FROM SPECIFIC CATPART
GSD: SURFACIC CURVATURE ANALYSIS: WHITE COLOR
CANNOT BE DISPLAYED IN ANALYSIS RESULT
GSD: SURFACIC CURVATURE ANALYSIS: BAD REFRESH
OF THE COLOR SCALE
GSD:INVISIBLE ELEMENT IS DISPLAYED BY CHANGING
WORKBENCH
GSD: REVOLUTE DEPARTS FROM PROFILE ALTHOUGH
ONE ANGLE IS 0 DEG.
SPLIT' IS NOT CREATED WITH THE INSIDE SURFACE
BOX
GSD: VOLUME REVOLVE OF SKETCH CANNOT BE
CREATED.
GSD : SUB-ELEMNTS TO REMOVE - OFFSET -
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN R16 AND R17
GSD: HELIX - CATIA ABENDS IF REVOLUTION VALUE OF
HELIX IS CHANGED.
GSD:EXTRACT TAKES LONG TIME AND ERROR MERROR
IS DISPLAYED.
GSD : CATIA FREEZE AFTER DELETING CERTAIN
FEATURE FROM SPECIFIC CATPART
GSD : SWEEP EXPLICITS THAT THE PROFILE AND THE
TRANSVERSE SECTION DOES NOT FIT
GSD: INCORRECT RESULT OF SHAPE FILLET USING
LICENSE
DIGITIZED MORPHING : IMPOSSIBLE TO SELECT TXT
FILE FROM DLNAME ENVIRONEMENT
SHAPEDSG BR10000059096 HD73633 GSD: REVOLVE/INCORRECT RESULT GA
GSD : CAN NOT SELCT ANY ELEMNTS AFTER
ASSIGNING FORMULA TO LINE
GSD : THE GSM INTERSECTION OPERATION FAILS
WITH SPLIT.2 AND EXTRACT.3 ON THE PART
SHAPEDSG BR10000059144 HD73680 GSD: OFFSET/OFFSET OPERATION FAILS WITH ERROR GA
GSD: MULTI-OUTPUT - ELEMENT CANNOT BE SELECTED
SHAPEDSG BR10000059194 HD73727 WHEN KEEP ONLY ONE ELEMENT USING EXTRACT IS GA
USED.
GSD: CATIA CRASHES AFTER CLICKING ON PREVIEW
BUTTON OF INTERSECTION COMMAND TWICE.
SHAPEDSG BR10000059201 HD73758 GSD: JOIN OF SKETCH CAN'T BE CREATED WITH ERROR GA
GSD : INTERSECTION : INCORRECT RESULT CREATED
DURING INTERSECTION OPERATION
GSD: CATIA ABENDS WHEN PART IS UPDATED AFTER
CHANGING EDGE FILLET PARAMETER
GSD : WITH SPECIFIC CATPART WHEN PARALLEL
CURVE IS PERFORMED, CATIA ABEND
DUC: SWEEP - UPDATE CAUSES SWEEP TO GO IN
ERROR.
GSD: CONNECT CHECKER: DOES NOT DISPLAY ALL
NODES OF CONNECTION
GSD/SIZE ON SCREEN IS NOT CORRECT ON
MULTI_VIEW
GSD: EDGE FILLET/CATIA ABEND WHEN EDGE FILLET
IS CREATED
SHAPEDSG BR10000059592 HD74157 GSD: VOLUME REVOLVE IN ERROR AFTER REPLACE. GA
GSD: ERROR IS DISPLAYED WHEN SKETCH IS
REPLACED
GSD: DRAFT ANALYSIS/INCORRECT RESULT IS
DISPLAYED
GSD: VISUALIZATION: INCORRECT TRIANGLE MESHES
SHAPEDSG BR10000059960 HD74544 WITH ISOPARAMETERICS GENERATION VALUE FROM GA
TOOLS OPTIONS.
SHAPEDSG BR10000060145 HD74735 GSD: FACE CANNOT BE PARTIALLY SELECTED GA
GSD / EDGE FILLET / CLEAR SELECTION - > CATIA
ABEND
GSD : WHEN THE SURFACE CREATED WITH FORMULA
IS EDITED, THE RECO GNITION OF A FACE IS CHANGED
ASMD: ELEMENTS ARE NOT CORRECTLY IDENTIFIED AS
SHMAERO BR10000053781 HD68086 LINKED WHEN PERFORMING TOOLS-DELETE USELESS GA
ELEMENTS FROM THE PART DESIGN WORKBENCH.
ASMD : DIALOG BOX FOR SURFACIC FLANGE SHOWS
SHMAERO BR10000054281 HD68595 GA
VARIABLE NAME INSTEAD OF REAL PARAMETERS.
ASMD : SURFACIC FLANGE : FLANGE COULD NOT BE
CREATED
GSD : TRIM CAN NOT BE TRANSFERED THROUGH
UNFOLD COMMAND IN A SPECIFIC CATPART
ASMD : JOGGLE : JOGGLE COMPENSATION IS BEING
APPLIED INCORRECTLY FOR DOUBLE DEEP JOGGLES
SHMAERO BR10000057600 HD72020 ASMD: CORNER IS MISSING IN UNFOLDED VIEW GA
ASMD: JOGGLE: IMPOSSIBLE TO CREATE JOGGLE ON
SURFACIC FLANGE
SMD: PASTE SPECIAL- EXTRA BODY IS INSERTED IN
SHTMETAL BR10000051339 HD65305 THE TREE AFTER PASTE AS SPECIFIED IN PART GA
DOCUMENT.
SMD: MENU ICON NOT SEEN WHEN A SHARABLE
SHTMETAL BR10000052031 HD66123 GA
LICENSE IS ADDED
MEASURE BETWEEN : THE RESULT IS NOT CORRECT
FOR AN UNFOLDED PART
GSMD : PATTERN : PATTERN CANNOT BE CREATED ON
WALL
SMD: BRIDGE STAMP- LENGTH PARAMETER FROM
STANDARD FILE IS IGNORED ON GERMAN INTERFACE.
GSMD : USER PATTERN : USER PATTERN FAILS EVEN IF
ANCHOR POINT IS SELECTED
GSMD : CYLINDRICAL BEND : CYLINDRCIAL BEND
FAILS ON UPDATE
GSMD: CATDUA - THE SHEETMETAL BEND FEATURE GO
IN ERROR AFTER CLEANING DATA.
GSMD: STAMPING/STAMP WITH RADIUS ZERO GIVES
ADDITIONAL RADIUS
SMP : DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 'SAVEAS DXF' COMAND
AND THE UNFOLDED VIEW
SHTMETAL BR10000055734 HD70107 SMD: SHEETMETAL PART ADD FEATURE FREEZES CATIA GA
SMD: THE BEHAVIOR OF VIEW MANAGEMENT IS
DIFFERENT IN PART AND PRODUCT
SHTMETAL BR10000055905 HD70277 SMD: FOLD/UNFOLD/INCORRECT VIEW GENERATED GA
SMD: UNFOLDING : INCORRECT RESULTS WHILE
PERFORMING UNFOLDING IN A SPECIFIC CATPART.
GSMD : PATTERN : PATTERN CANNOT BE CREATED ON
WALL
SMD: SXF - UNFOLDED VIEW USING SAVE AS DXF IS
INCORRECT.
SMD: CUTOUT FAILS AFTER CHANGING THE ANGLE OF
FLANGE
SMD : WITH SPECIFIC CATPART SELECT ALL COMMAND
OF UNFOLDING DEFINITION RESULTS IN ABEND
SHTMETAL BR10000058145 HD72614 SMD: BEND FAILS BELOW A CERTAIN ANGLE VALUE. GA
GSMD: FLANGED HOLE CANNOT BE CREATED EVEN
WITH VALID INPUTS.
SHTMETAL BR10000058943 HD73460 GSMD: USER STAMP IN ERROR AFTER A MODIFICATION GA
SHTMETAL BR10000059008 HD73530 SMD: INCORRECT CUTOUT FACE SELECTION. GA
SMD: BEND - BODY IS DUPLICATED WHEN
CYLINDRICAL BEND IS EDITED.
GSMD: WHEN INPUT K FACTOR PATTERN CUTOUT
CANNOT BE CREATED.
GSMD: ROLLED WALL ERROR DUE TO CONSTRUCTION/
REF ELEMENTS IN SKETCH.
GSMD: CUTOUT/CUTOUT OPERATION FAILS WITH
UPDATE ERROR
GSMD: DXF SAVED WITH TOLERANCE 0MM IS
DIFFERENT AS COMPARED TO UNFOLDED VIEW.
GSMD : PLANE : UPDATING R16 CATPART ON R18
SHTMETAL BR10000059928 HD74506 LEADS TO PLANE FAILURE DUE TO CHANGE IN GA
GEOMETRIC DEFINITION OF CUTOUT FACE
ASMD : WEB : CANNOT CREATE A WEB WITH SURFACE
AS SUPPORT AND SKETCH AS PROFILE
ASMD : CUTOUT : CUTOUT FAILS WITH MAPPING
ERROR ON UPDATING R14 CATPART TO R18
ASMD : CUTOUT : CUTOUT FAILS WITH TRIM BY THICK
OPERATOR ERROR ON UPDATING R14 CATPART TO R18
SHEETMETAL STANDARDS : STAMPING FILES PROBLEM
IN A GERMAN CATIA SESSION
SIMINT BR10000055096 HD69449 CONVEYOR TRACKING REQUIRES I/O SIGNAL GA
ANIMATION OF ANALYSIS SET BASED ON
SIMINT BR10000057162 HD71562 GA
CATISIMAGENT SHOWS NULL HANDLER ERROR
CPU LOOP WHEN USING BAND ANALYSIS IN DPM
SIMINT None HD71828 ASSEMBLY AFTER USING CATVISMANAGER:: GA
GENERATEREPPATHFROMPATHELEMENT
SKETCHER : ISO-CONSTRAINTED ELEMENT DOES NOT
SKETCHER BR10000051714 HD65747 GA
BECOME GREEN
SKETCHER : OUTPUT DEFINITION DIALOG BOX
SKETCHER BR10000051921 HD65995 APPEARS INSTEAD OF PROFILE DEFINITION DIALOG GA
BOX UNDER SPECIFIC CONDITIONS
SKETCHER: CONSTRAINT OF SKETCH CANNOT
RECONNECT BY EDIT FROM TREE.
SKETCHER BR10000054241 HD68535 SKETCHER : NEGATIVE OFFSET VALUE IS IGNORED. GA
SKETCHER : INCONSISTENT BEHAVIOR OF DATUM
MODE
SKETCHER: RELATION ERROR OF DIAMETER INSIDE OF
SKETCH CIRCLE
SKETCHER : ABEND WHILE EXITING SKETCH IN
SPECIFIC CATPART
SKETCHER: OUTPUT FEATURES FROM HOLE SKETCHES
ARE NOT VISIBLE
SKETCHER - REFERENCE POINTS - THE VALUES IN THE
SKETCH FOR THESE POINTS IS NOT CHANGED.
SKETCHER - REFERENCE ELEMENTS CANNOT BE
REPLACED AS PAD BY INTERSECT 3D ELEMENTS.
SKETCHER - ONLY ONE INTERSECTION ELEMENT IS
CREATED.
SKETCHER: CATIA ABENDS WHEN EXITING SKETCHER
AFTER FIXING TOGETHER 1000 LINES
SKETCHER : CONSTRAINTS WHICH ARE NOT
DISPLAYED ARE GETTING SELECTED
SKETCHER BR10000056559 HD70939 SKETCHER - EDIT SKETCH LEADS TO CATIA LOOP. GA
SKETCHER - CATA ABENDS ON DELETING A LINE AND
TRYING TO RECREATE IT.
SKETCHER : CHANGE OF THE SECOND CONSTRAINT
DEFINITION ANGLE DOESNT WORK FOR A CONIC CURVE
DMUSPA:SKETCH OFFSET OF A CURVE RETURNS
INACCURATE RESULTS.
SKETCH: EXCLAMATION SYMBOL REMAINS ON POINTS
NO MORE IN ERROR
PART : VISULIZATION : DISPLAY OF INFINITE LINE
COINCIDENT WITH OTHER LINE SHOWS GAP
SKETCHER : SKETCH BECOMES OVER CONSTRAINED
AFTER PERFORMING SKETCH ANALYSIS
DUC : SKETCHER - PROJECTION ORIENTATION
SKETCHER BR10000057484 HD71887 REVERSED ON UPDATE MAKING THE SPLIT FEATURE TO GA
GO IN ERROR.
SKETCHER : TRIM CANNOT BE DONE CORRETLY WITH
ANGLE BETWEEN 2.07 AND 1.83 DEGREE
SKETCHER: CATIA ABEND WHEN OFFSET CURVE IS
TRANSLATED.
SKETCHER : ABEND WHILE EDITING SKETCH FROM
SPECIFIC CATPART
SKETCHER BR10000058468 HD72964 SKETCHER: WRONG SYMBOL IN THE CONCEPTION TREE GA
SKETCHER: AFTER REPLACE OF AXIS, SOLID NOT
UPDATED AND SKETCH NOT IN ERROR.
SKETCHER: ELEMENTS ARE NOT MOVED WHEN OFFSET
PARAMATER OF PARENT PLANE IS CHANGED
SKETCHER - OFFSET CONSTRAINT OF SKETCHER IS
BROKEN BY UNDO.
CRASH WHEN READING A CLASH DEFINITION WITH A
SPAINTF BR10000055644 HD70002 GA
CAA APPLICATION
SPROGMGT BR10000049815 HD63558 PGM ICONS ARE MISSING GA
SPROGMGT BR10000050030 HD63811 PGM TASK DISPLAY ORDER INCORRECT GA
THE DATA IN THE PROFILE CARD IS NOT PERSISTENT
SPROGMGT BR10000053392 HD67644 GA
WHICH IS CREATED BY 'ADD AS COPY'
THE HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SCROLL BARS DO
NOT WORK CORRECTLY
THE HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SCROLL BARS DO
SPROGMGT None HD69530 GA
NOT WORK CORRECTLY
SOME STRINGS IN PGM WINDOWS ARE NOT
TRANSLATED
SPROGMGT BR10000056169 HD70547 UPDATE DISABLE IN TREE VIEW GA
CMP: BAD MANAGEMENT OF SHOW / NO SHOW FOR
SR1 BR10000055688 HD70051 GA
SR1 PLATED DRAFTING REPRESENTATION
SR1 BR10000057333 HD71746 FUNCTIONALVOLDEC/ PROPAGATION KO GA
WELDCUT WAS CREATED WITH AN ANGLED NOT A
SR1 BR10000057346 HD71760 GA
VERTICAL EDGE. MITER CUT IS FLIPPED OUT
PROPERTIES CHANGE CHANGES THE NOMENCLATURE
SR1 BR10000057361 HD71772 GA
OF THE PLATES
SR1 BR10000058228 HD72714 PLATE LENGTH AND WIDTH IS INCORRECT IN REPORT GA
IN A JAPANESE ENVIRONMENT, SMALL ASSEMBLIES
SR1 BR10000059107 HD73645 GA
ICON DOESN'T FUNCTION
SR1 BR10000060163 HD74754 PPG ERROR OF SKETCH OPENING ON V5R18SP05 GA
SRT BR10000054750 HD69069 RUN CLAS WITH ITSELF IN RUNS GROUPING. GA
CREATION DATE ATTRIBUTE IS RESET WHEN USING
STBOM BR10000008602 HD23919 GA
BOM VIEW
LINKED TO BUTTON CAPTION IS NOT TRANSLATING TO
STBOM BR10000044103 HD61519 GA
OTHER LANGUAGE
SOME CONTROLS IN A BOM COPY TOOL ARE NOT
STBOM BR10000048331 HD61884 GA
TRANSLATING INTO OTH ER LANGUAGE
SOME CONTROLS IN A BOM EDITOR HAVE NOT
STBOM BR10000048335 HD61891 GA
TRANSLATIONS
CONTEXT MENU OPTIONS ON A BOM EDITOR GRID
STBOM BR10000048344 HD61898 GA
HAVE NOT TRANSLATIO NS
CUSTOMIZATION DIALOGS ON A BOM EDITOR HAVE NO
STBOM BR10000048345 HD61900 GA
TRANSLATIONS
TOOLTIPS IN A BOM EDITOR WINDOW HAVE NOT
STBOM BR10000048348 HD61913 GA
TRANSLATIONS
TOOLTIPS IN A BOM EDITOR FILTER WINDOW HAVEN'T
STBOM BR10000048350 HD61914 GA
TRANSLATIONS
CHECKBOX OPTION TREE IS NOT TRANSLATING TO
STBOM BR10000048355 HD61917 GA
OTHER LANGUAGE.
A FILE WITH EXTENSION IS NOT SAVED FROM
STBOM BR10000049490 HD63195 GA
SMARTEAM BOM
STBOM BR10000049558 HD63272 ST EDITOR BOM ISSUES IN V5R17SP4 GA
READ AHEAD LEVLES' OF DRILL DOWN'S OPTION IS
STBOM BR10000050150 HD63971 GA
NOT WORK CORRECTLY
STBOM BR10000050177 HD64003 SMARTEAM BOM BRIEFCASE DOESN GA
WHEN USING 'COPY TOOL MAPPING UTILITY' THE
STBOM BR10000050513 HD64370 GA
LICENSE IS NOT RELEASED ON CLOSING IN V5R17SP5
SOLIDWORKS/SMARTEAM CHRASHES WHEN DRAWEING
STBOM BR10000053391 HD67646 GA
WITH VISIO COMPONENTS IS OPENED
LEAF CLASS ATTRIBUTES IS NOT REFLECTED TO MAKE/
STBOM BR10000053844 HD68157 GA
BUY FIELD
STBOM BR10000055390 HD69732 TWO TOOLTIPS IN BOM EDITOR ARE NOT TRANSLATED GA
FRAME CAPTIONS IN BOM EDITOR WINDOWS ARE NOT
STBOM BR10000055395 HD69735 TRANSLATED UNTIL ACTIVATION TREE FILTER DIALOG GA
IN SMARTEAM
OPTIONS DIALOG IN BOM EDITOR IS TRANSLATED
STBOM BR10000055392 HD69736 GA
INCOMPLETELY
THE VALUE OF 'DOCUMENT CLASSES' IS NOT
STBOM BR10000056011 HD70346 GA
TRANSLATED INTO JAPANESE
BRIEFCASE CAN NOT BE SYNCHRONIZED FOR A
STBOM BR10000056010 HD70385 GA
SPECIFIC VIEW
BRIEFCASE : ERROR MESSAGES AT LOGIN ARE
STBOM BR10000056024 HD70388 GA
GARBLED
INCORRECT BWB BEHAVIOR IN SINGLE LEVEL -
STBOM BR10000056572 HD70954 GA
INSTANCES MODE
HOOKING A SCRIPT BEFORE PROMOTE WILL BE RUN
STBOM BR10000057046 HD71438 GA
TWICE
INCORRECT BEHAVIOR OF BOOLEAN FIELDS IN BOM
STBOM BR10000057061 HD71457 GA
EDITOR
BOOLEAN VALUES (YES, NO) ARE NOT TRANSLATED IN
STBOM BR10000057063 HD71458 GA
BOM EDITOR GRID
STRING IS NOT TRANSLATED BY NLS IN BOM EDI TOR
STBOM BR10000057089 HD71492 GA
(SUMMARY MODE)
BWB WITH INSTANCES IS NOT SYNCHRONIZED TO THE
STBOM BR10000057115 HD71510 GA
DATABASE
WRONG VALUE THE THICK SURFACE WHICH COME
STD BR10000053942 HD68255 GA
FROM PLATE OPERATION
USE OF AUTOMATIC NIBBLING OPTION WHEN
STD BR10000055040 HD69362 GA
CONVERTING SDD TO SR1
INCORRECT PLATELENGTH IN STRUCTURE DESIGN
STD BR10000055111 HD69443 GA
REPORT
STD BR10000057076 HD71474 GRAPHIC REPLACEMENT OF SHELL PLATE GA
STD BR10000058044 HD72501 ISSUE WITH TTRS FACTORY ERROR MANAGEMENT GA
THE MARKUP MONITOR DOES NOT COPY REDLINE FILES
STDESK BR10000014257 HD24386 FROM THE VAULT TO THE MARKUP SHARED DIRECTORY GA
ON THE WEB VIEWER
WINDOWS INSTALLER COMES UP AFTER INSTALLING
STDESK BR10000054602 HD68919 GA
V19.2 OF THE SMARTEAM VIEWER.
CANNOT SHOW ATTACHED 'PRODUCT VIEW ITEMS' IN
STDESK BR10000055732 HD70105 GA
PROCESS LINKED GRID VIEW.
STDROBLB BR10000056916 HD71299 INCORRECT GEOMETRY ERROR IRB2400.10 GA
TRAVEL LIMITS OF SOME ROBOTS ARE WRONG.
STDROBLB BR10000057709 HD72139 GA
(MOTOMAN/XRC/PX1850, PX2050)
MODEL SHAPE OF UP120E IN V5 IS DIFFERENT FROM
STDROBLB BR10000059664 HD74235 GA
D5 MODEL.
STEP : WHEN EXPORT A SPECIFIC STEP FILE SOLID IS
STEP BR10000052542 HD66670 GA
NOT CREATED.
DMUSPA: MEASURED VALUES FOR THE AREA AND
STEP BR10000056604 HD70978 GA
VOLUME ARE DIFFERENT BEFORE AND AFTER STEP.
STEP : EXPORT : SOME PROPERTIES LOST AFTER
STEP BR10000058986 HD73512 GA
EXPORTING CATPART AS STEP
NUMERICAL INPUT CAN ONLY BE DONE BY THE KEYS IN
STFLOW BR10000052272 HD66377 GA
THE QWERTY KEYBOARD.
STFLOW BR10000052757 HD66947 IN WORKFLOW, WE CAN GA
INCORRECT DUE DATES IN SMARTBOX IN WEB EDITOR/
STFLOW BR10000053806 HD68113 GA
NAVIGATOR
WORKFLOW - TASK MALFUNCTION, INTERNAL ERROR
STFLOW BR10000053965 HD68274 GA
NO: 00040
SOME INTERFACE ITEMS IN FLOWCHART DESIGNER
STFLOW BR10000055356 HD69701 GA
ARE NOT TRANSLATED
WORKFLOW WILL ONLY ONE USER WITH EACH LAST
STFLOW BR10000057112 HD71509 GA
NAME
MISSING ICONS FOR SOME TOOLBAR BUTTONS IN THE
STFLOW BR10000058851 HD73374 GA
FLOWCHART DESIGNER TOOL
DURING AN "INTERMEDIATE" QUERY THE CHOICE OF
STPENGMT BR10000057804 HD72243 MENU STAY PERSEVERING SINCE A VALUE OF THE GA
MENU WASN`T SELECTED
STSITE BR10000013529 HD24407 QUERY BY ATTRIBUTE - INVALID NUMERIC CONSTANT GA
WORD INTEGRATION MAPPING HAVE STRANGE
STSITE BR10000036613 HD56392 GA
BEHAVIOUR ON LOAD PROPE RTIE
NOT ABLE TO ADD 11TH DB TO MULTISITE ORACLE
STSITE BR10000044153 HD61574 GA
REPLICATION
MULTI-SITE DATA MODEL WIZARD REQUIRES ST -
STSITE BR10000056897 HD71284 GA
MULTI-SITE LICENSE
ORACLE 10G R2 DOCUMENTATION SHOWS INCORRECT
STSITE BR10000057306 HD71602 GA
SCREENSHOTS AND INSTALL OPTIONS
THE PARAMETER ,WHICH IS DESCRIBED ON
STSITE BR10000059355 HD73912 'SMARTEAM - MULTI-SITE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE', IS GA
INCORRECT
STTEAM BR10000021014 HD24455 LOGO IS NOT CORRECT GA
BROWSE KEYS DON'T WORK IN SYSTEM
STTEAM BR10000007998 HD24702 GA
CONFIGURATION EDITOR
A LABEL TEXT CAN DEFINE ONLY TO 40 BYTES IN FROM
STTEAM BR10000015512 HD27576 GA
DESIGNER
PULLDOWN LIST FOR CHOOSING A PROJECT IN
STTEAM BR10000048347 HD61813 GA
PROJECT MANAGER WINDO W IST TOO SMALL
STTEAM BR10000048751 HD62350 SMARTEAM SAVE FAILED IN UPDATING TDM_LINKS GA
STTEAM BR10000050189 HD64015 EXPAND LEVEL CAN NOT BE CHANGED IN DMT GA
WHEN COPYING FILE FROM CMT THE ZIP FILE IS
STTEAM BR10000051667 HD65690 GA
CORRUPT
SMARTEAM CRASHES WHEN OPENING A TABLE IN
STTEAM BR10000052866 HD67087 GA
DRAWING WITH EXCEL
CMP : WRONG COMMAND IN ORACLE INTALLATION
STTEAM BR10000054078 HD68383 GA
MANUAL
CFO'S - WRONG CONFIGURATION IS OPENED IN
STTEAM BR10000054075 HD68387 GA
SOLIDWORKS
OPTIONS.LINKVIAADD NOT EXECUTING DOMAIN,
STTEAM BR10000055667 HD68544 GA
SYSTEM OR USER SETTINGS
STTEAM BR10000054964 HD69295 CLASS ICON IS NOT UPDATED IN SOLIDWORKS DMT GA
STTEAM BR10000055154 HD69472 DESCRIPTION FOR IS CONFUSING GA
STTEAM BR10000055240 HD69583 ATHORIZATION SOLIDWORK-INTEGRATION, SAVE AS GA
WHEN OPENING A DRWAING WITH THE SMARTEAM
STTEAM BR10000055380 HD69725 GA
AUTOCAD INT. DIALOG IS NOT SHOWN
SOME INTERFACE ITEMS IN VAULT MONITOR ARE NOT
STTEAM BR10000055388 HD69728 GA
TRANSLATED
DESIGN COPY: SETTINGS ARE NOT TAKEN INTO
STTEAM BR10000055984 HD70402 GA
ACCOUNT
POSSIBLE ISSUE WITH P-INTEGRATION V5 R17 SP7
STTEAM BR10000056178 HD70551 GA
AND WILDFIRE 3.0 M100
STTEAM BR10000056369 HD70746 VAULTSERVICE DOESN'T INDICATE LICENSE ERROR GA
STTEAM BR10000056562 HD70941 ERROR: FAILED TO CLOSE SERVICE CONTROL MANAGER GA
CAN NOT OPEN CONFIGURATION OF CFO SPECIFIED IN
STTEAM BR10000057131 HD71520 GA
DMT TAB
LOOKING FOR DOCUMENT 'ORACLE 9I DATABASE
STTEAM BR10000057192 HD71592 GA
MIGRATION'
PROJECT BASED AUTHORIZATION, UNABLE TO
STTEAM BR10000057275 HD71679 GA
REGISTER CATIA PART FROM CATIA INT.
STTEAM BR10000057366 HD71781 ERROR MESSAGE TDM_CAT_REF_LNK GA
STTEAM BR10000057403 HD71817 PROBLEM WITH DESIGNTABLE IN SMARTEAM GA
STTEAM BR10000057428 HD71846 FILE OPERATION -> OPEN DOES NOT START AUTOCAD GA
SMARTEAM SAVE AS.. GENERATES AN ERROR TEST FOR
STTEAM None HD71864 GA
REPLICATING SR1932
SMARTEAM SAVE AS.. GENERATES AN ERROR TEST FOR
STTEAM None HD71868 GA
REPLICATING SR1932
STCAI : ERROR LOADING LINKED DOCUMENTS AFTER
STTEAM BR10000057485 HD71904 GA
FILENAME MIGRATION
STV5R18 UPGRADE QUESTION - PROCEEDURE FOR
STTEAM BR10000057503 HD71930 GA
STOPPING CORE SERVI CES IS NOT DEFINED
OVERWRITE PREVIOUS REVISION IN RELEASE
STTEAM BR10000057603 HD72015 GA
OPERATIONS
STTEAM BR10000057613 HD72037 PROPERTY IS NOT AFFECTED IN DATABASE USING CAI GA
ISSUES WITH SMARTEAM TOOLBAR ICONS IN
STTEAM BR10000057609 HD72039 GA
SOLIDWORKS
CMT COPY FILE DOESN'T COPY THE VIEW FILE WHEN
STTEAM BR10000058984 HD73540 GA
EXECUTED FROM A FOLDER
ERROR MESSAGE WAS DISPLAYED AS 'JAVA APPLET
STWEB BR10000019820 HD23442 GA
RESTART'
THE CONVERSION OF 03/22/2004 IN TIME-STAMPING
STWEB BR10000014267 HD23769 GA
HAS FAILED
STWEB BR10000008501 HD24458 CHECK IN DELETES FILE ON MY HARDDRIVE IN ERROR GA
TWO PEOPLE CAN NOT SHARE SAME OBJECT IN
STWEB BR10000014387 HD25268 GA
FAVORITE OBJECT LIST
ERROR 31200 APPEARS WHEN LAUNCHING WEB FO RM
STWEB BR10000027286 HD39640 GA
DESIGNER - SMARTEAM V5 R14 SP4
SPLIT FUNCTION IN WEB FORM DESIGNER DOESN'T
STWEB BR10000038437 HD54756 GA
BEHAVE AS EXPECTE D
STWEB BR10000048230 HD61750 ST WEB FORM DESIGNER CHARACTER ESCAPE GA
CHECKING 'IN SEARCHES, BY DEFAULT RETRIEVE ONLY
STWEB BR10000049326 HD63014 LAST PUBLIC R EVISIONS' DOES NOT CHECK 'LAST GA
PUBLIC REVISION' BOX IN QUICK SEARCHES
WHEN 'IN SEARCHES, BY DEFAULT RETRIEVE ONLY
STWEB BR10000049327 HD63015 LAST PUBLIC REVIS IONS' IS CHECKED, THE 'LAST GA
PUBLIC REVISION' BOX IN WED IS GRAYED OUT
SELECTION OF A CHILD'S OBJECT CAUSES AN ERROR
STWEB BR10000049447 HD63147 GA
01504
STWEB BR10000049830 HD63579 WORKFLOW IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY GA
WEB EDITOR CAN NOT DISPLAY THE PHRASE Â¿?
STWEB BR10000050125 HD63934 GA
PROCESS CONTENTSÂ¿¿ IN TRADITIONAL CHINESE
UNEXPANDS THE GENERAL TAB, THE CREATION DATE
STWEB BR10000053554 HD67827 GA
AND MODIFICATION DATE ARE DISAPPEAR
UNABLE TO CHANGE EXPIRED PASSWORD IN WEB
STWEB BR10000053796 HD68101 EDITOR WHEN USERACCO UNTMANAGEMENT GA
NOUSERNAMEINPASSWORD IS SET TO YES
STWEB BR10000053943 HD68253 FILE OPEN IN IE7 DOES NOT WORK GA
STWEB BR10000054160 HD68463 COMMAND 'SHOW PROFILE CARD' IN WEBEDITOR FAILS GA
WITHOUT FILLING MANDATORY FIELDS, THE ERROR
STWEB BR10000054428 HD68741 GA
MESSAGE OCCUPIES THE ENTIRE SCREEN
NUMBER OF CONCURRENT LICENSES EXCEEDED, THEN
STWEB BR10000054497 HD68809 GA
CREATE OBJECT IS MISSING
LINK OBJECT' FUNCTION IN WEB EDITOR ONLY WORKS
STWEB BR10000054624 HD68945 FOR FOLDER > DOCUMENTS TREE LINKS IF YOU GA
SELECT THE TOP LEVEL DOCUMENTS CLASS
WHEN USER CREATES A NEW OBJECT WITHOUT
STWEB BR10000055066 HD69407 FILLING MANDATORY FIELDS, THE ERROR MESSAGE GA
OCCUPIES THE ENTIRE SCREEN
STWEB BR10000055243 HD69581 WEB FORM DESIGNER ALWAYS APPEARS IN ENGLISH GA
LIST VIEW HEADERS AND STATUS BAR TEXT ARE NOT
STWEB BR10000055362 HD69702 GA
TRANSLATED IN W EB EDITOR FILE EXPLORER
LIFE CYCLE FOR DOCUMENT IS NOT DISPLAYED IN
STWEB BR10000055382 HD69719 GA
JAPANESE
SPECIFIC ITEM OF MENU IS DISPLAYED IN ENGLISH
STWEB BR10000055383 HD69722 GA
THOUGH PERFORMED IN JAPANESE MODE
THE ATTRIBUTE OF THE WEBEDITOR CATIA DOCUMENT
STWEB BR10000055377 HD69724 GA
IS AN INTERNAL NAME
HISTORY TAB MISSING FROM WORKFLOW PROFILE
STWEB BR10000055565 HD69913 GA
CARD
ON WED, 'ADVANCED SETTING' IS NOT TRANSLATED
STWEB BR10000056027 HD70348 GA
TO JAPANESE
SPECIFIC ITEM 'ASSIGN GROUP' IS DISPLAYED IN
STWEB BR10000056032 HD70350 GA
ENGLISH THOUGH PERFORMED IN JAPANESE MODE
WHEN THE OBJECT SCREEN USED RECENTLY IS
STWEB BR10000055999 HD70354 DISPLAYED, JAPANESE IS NOT DISPLAYED TO THE GA
HEADER
IN PGM THE TASKS TAB IS NO LONGER THERE WITH
STWEB BR10000056034 HD70363 GA
SP7
TOO NARROW LABEL WIDTH OF WEB EDITOR PROFILE
STWEB BR10000055996 HD70364 GA
CARD
WEBEDITOR JAPANESE LANGUAGE PROBLEM, ALL
STWEB BR10000056033 HD70375 GA
QUERIES AND UNASSIGNED QUERIES
WEBEDITOR : ERRORS OF TEXT SEARCH ARE NOT
STWEB BR10000055985 HD70376 GA
TRANSLATED IN JAPANESE
LIFE CYCLE MENU ICON FOR DOCUMENT IS DISPLAYED
STWEB BR10000056006 HD70379 GA
IN ENGLISH THOUGH PERFORMED IN JAPANESE MODE
STWEB BR10000056007 HD70380 DEFAULT GROUP' IS NOT DISPLAYED AS JAPANESE GA
WEBEDITOR : ASSIGNED GROUPS AND SELECTED
STWEB BR10000056015 HD70383 GA
GROUPS ARE NOT TRANSLATED TO JAPANESE
THE WIDTH OF 'CREATION DATE' IS NOT DISPLAYED
STWEB BR10000056016 HD70387 GA
CORRECTLY
DEFAULT' AND 'COPY' ARE NOT DISPLAYED AS
STWEB BR10000056014 HD70394 GA
JAPANESE
WEBEDITOR JAPANESE LANGUAGE PROBLEM, PUBIC
STWEB BR10000055991 HD70401 GA
GROUP
STWEB BR10000056052 HD70435 CAN'T SEE OBJECTS IN CLIPBOARD GA
THE DISPLAYS ON 'CREATION DATE' AND 'LAST
STWEB BR10000056075 HD70453 MODIFICATION DATE AND TIME' ARE DIFFERENT ON GA
'WEB EDITOR'AND 'EDITOR '
WHEN ATTRIBUTE SET TO 'MANDATORY', CANNOT
STWEB BR10000056204 HD70561 GA
CREATE PROFILE CARD ON WEBEDTIOR
FLOWPROCESS GETWORKINGNODES SEEMS TO WORK
STWEB BR10000056460 HD70836 GA
IMPROPERLY
PROFILE CARD TABS LINE VERTICALLY IN WEB EDITOR
STWEB BR10000056699 HD71079 GA
SEARCH RESULT PANEL
SEARCH IN WEB USING A CREATION DATE RETURNS A
STWEB BR10000056703 HD71085 GA
DATE NOT SPECIFIED
PROFILE CARD IS DISPLAYED BUT PRINT ICON IS NOT
STWEB BR10000056875 HD71251 GA
DISPLAYED IN
SCROLL IS MISSING FROM SOME DOCUMENT VIEWS
STWEB BR10000056952 HD71347 GA
ON WEBEDITOR
ERROR WITH TDM_CAD_DIRTYFLAG ATTRIBUTE IN WEB
STWEB BR10000056976 HD71371 GA
EDITOR.
PERFORMANCE ON R18 WEBEDITOR IS 5X WORSE
STWEB BR10000057002 HD71396 GA
THEN R16
STWEB BR10000057050 HD71446 WEB VIEWER 19 2 DOES NOT DISPLAY 3D MODELS GA
ERRORS WITH PROCESS ADD OPERATION (INITIATE
STWEB BR10000057113 HD71512 PROCESS) - CAN NO T EXPAND FLOWCHART, CAN NOT GA
ASSIGN USERS, CREATE AND FINISH DOES NOT
ON NEW PROCESS OBJECTS EDIT AND PROMOTE ARE
STWEB BR10000057216 HD71622 GA
DISABLED
ST R18 WEB PAGE (FORM) AUTOMATICALLY REFRESH
STWEB BR10000057269 HD71647 GA
AND OVERWRITE THE MODIFIED FIELD.
STWEB BR10000057256 HD71665 WF COLORS ARE NOT PROPERLY SHOWN IN SUB-WF GA
WEB EDITOR USERS CAN INITIATE A FLOW PROCESS
STWEB BR10000057284 HD71689 GA
WITH VIEW OBJECT AUTHORIZATION.
CANNOT READ FILE_NAME ATTRIBUTE IN JAVA SCRIPT
STWEB BR10000057479 HD71879 GA
IN UPDATE MODE OF THE PROFILE CARD
DEFAULT VALUE ALWAYS PASSED IN FIRSTRECLIST OF
STWEB BR10000057482 HD71880 GA
AFTER ADD HOOK
SMARTEAM WEB EDITOR IS NOT FIRING BEFORE
STWEB BR10000057633 HD72059 GA
LIFECYCLE STAGE 2 SCRIPT HOOK
ONE MORE OBJECT IS CREATED FOR SAME DOCUMENT
STWEB BR10000057890 HD72344 GA
IN SMARTEAM
SPECIFIC ITEM OF MENU IS DISPLAYED IN ENGLISH
STWEB BR10000058426 HD72926 GA
THOUGH PERFORMED IN JAPANESE MODE
SPECIFIC ITEM 'ASSIGN GROUP' IS DISPLAYED IN
STWEB BR10000058441 HD72935 GA
ENGLISH THOUGH PERFORMED IN JAPANESE MODE
JAPANESE EXPRESSION DISPLAYED ON POPUP MENU
STWEB BR10000058433 HD72936 GA
ISN
STWEB BR10000058452 HD72945 DUPLICATION OF PROCESS OBJECTS THROUGH API GA
FIX FOR PERFORMANCES ISSUES WITH SMARTWEB IN
STWEB BR10000059227 HD73774 GA
WAN ENVIRONMENT
FIX FOR PERFORMANCES ISSUES WITH SMARTWEB IN
STWEB BR10000059227 HD73774 GA
WAN ENVIRONMENT
MACHINING (SMG): CHECK IS NOT RESPECTED WITH
SURFMACH BR10000052056 HD66151 GA
ISOPARAMETRIC MACHINING
MACHINING (3ASMG) / CATIA V5 CRASHES AFTER
TOOL PATH SIMULATION.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / SWEEPING / TOOLPATH IS NOT
COMPUTED CORRECTLY.
MACHINING (SMG) / REWORK AREA: INCORRECT
SURFMACH BR10000054494 HD68813 HORIZONTAL PATH WHEN OFFSET ON PART IS SET TO - GA
0.3MM
MACHINING (3ASMG) / COLLISIONS ARE PRODUCED
EVEN THOUGH THE MACRO MOVEMENTS ARE MODIFIED.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / WRONG POSITION OF LIMIT
LINES AFTER AUTOMATIC MOUNT.
MACHINING (PMG) / TOOLPATH COMPUTATION IS NOT
CORRECT
MACHINING (3ASMG) / ROUGHING DESTROYS PART
FOR SPECIFIC TOLERANCE.
MFG : UNREADABLE CATIA PANELS IF LANGUAGE IS
CZECH.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / ROUGHING OPERATION:
HORIZONTAL AREA NOT AUTOMATICALY DETECTED.
SMG (MULTI AXIS CURVE) / SET OFFSET ON OUT
LIMITS IS NOT RESPECTED.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / DRIVE OF THE MACRO IS NOT
UNIDIRECTIONAL.
MANUFACTURING (SMG): TEXTS OVERLAPPING IN THE
AXIAL MACHIING DIALOG BOX
MACHINING (3ASMG) / IN CONTOUR-DRIVEN
OPERATION THE TOOLPATH GOUGES THE PART.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / TOOL GOUGES IN CONTOUR-
DRIVEN OPERATION.
MACHINING (AMG) / INCORRECT PITCH IN APT FILE
FOR THREAD DRILLING OPERATION.
MACHINING (SMG) / APPLY/MODIFY IS NOT POSSIBLE
SURFMACH BR10000056823 HD71209 AT MODIFICATION OF APPROACHES AND RETRACTS GA
WHEN INCLUDING INVALID FACES
MACHINING (PMG) / ACCORDING TO THE MACHINING
SURFMACH BR10000056895 HD71280 TOLERANCE, UNDERCUT HAPPENS AT DIFFERENT GA
POSITION.
MACHINING (3ASMG) / IN ROUGHING PART IS
DESTROYED WHEN A LIMITING CONTOUR IS SELECTED.
MANUFATURING (SMG): START AND END POINT ARE
NOT SAME ON CHANGING MACHINING TOLERANCE
MANUFACTURING (SMG): TOOLPATH RECOMPUTES
EVEN AFTER COMPUTATION DONE THROUGH NC BATCH
MANUFACTURING (SMG): NC BATCH MANAGEMENT
SURFMACH BR10000057344 HD71743 SYNCHRONIZATION DOES NOT WORK IN GERMAN GA
LANGUAGE
MACHINING (NCINFRA) BATCH MANAGEMENT: CREATE
VIDEO FROM LAST SAVED RESULT DOES NOT WORK.
MACHINING (SMG) / TOOLPATH JUMPS IN SPECIFIC
SITUATION.
MACHINING (NCMACSIMU) / WRONG MATERIAL
REMOVAL RESULT ON SIMULATION IN FULL MODE.
MACHINING (SMG) / ROUGHING TOOL PATH IS NOT
CORRECT.
MACHINING (25M) / OVERCUT HAPPEN AT CORNER
WHILE CHOOSING HSM.
MACHINING (SMG) / ROUGHING TOOL CRASHES IN
WORKPIECE
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / VIDEO FROM LAST SAVED
SURFMACH BR10000058747 HD73265 RESULT WITH TOOL PATH REPLAY DOES NOT SHOW GA
THE VIDEO RESULT.
MACHINING (AMG) : MACHINING TIME NOT UPDATED
AFTER A MACHINING FEEDRATE MODIFICATION
MACHINING (3ASMG) / SPIRAL MILLING / CHECK
ELEMENTS LEADS TO JUMPS INSIDE THE TOOL PATH.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / WHEN 'VIEW IN
SURFMACH BR10000059231 HD73778 ALPHANUMERIC ORDER' IS PERFORMED, THE DISPLAY GA
ON TREE IS NOT ALPHABETIC ORDER
MACHINING (3ASMG) / THE HORIZONTAL PART IS NOT
RECOGNIZED BY SLOPE AREA.
MACHINING (PMG) / WRONG TOOLPATH DEPTH IN Z-
LEVEL MO
MANUFACTURING (SMG): Z LEVEL MACHINING /
CUTTING TOOL PLUNGES TO AXIS ORIGIN
MACHINING (NCINFRAREVIEW) / UNABLE TO REORDER
TOOLS IN RESOURCESLIST
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / NUMBER OF NCCODE FILES
GENERATED IS KO.
FUNCTION 'DRAWINGCOMPONENT1
SYSTEM BR10000051900 HD65968 EXPLODEANDSELECT' DOES NOT WORK W ELL ON A GA
DXF FILE
OSM : ERROR AND WARNING MESSAGES IN THE
SYSTEM BR10000053134 HD67373 ALPHANUMERIC WINDOW : OMC-USRID USELESS , GA
INVALID TIE CATISPECOBJECT , CANNOT OPEN LIBRARY
MACRO DIRECTION RESULT DIFFERENT VS
SYSTEM BR10000053679 HD67980 GA
MEASUREMENT
EVEN IF THE MACRO IS EXECUTED, THE SCREEN
SYSTEM BR10000053784 HD68092 GA
DISPLAY OF SAVE MANAGEMENT IS 'OPEN'
WRONG BEHAVIOR ON MANUF OPERATION GENERATED
SYSTEM BR10000053803 HD68107 GA
BY MACRO
CATIA V5 R17 SP6 ABENDS ON PASTE-OPERATION IN
SYSTEM BR10000053856 HD68171 GA
VBS-SCRIPT
SYSTEM BR10000054093 HD68405 COPY FACE BY MACRO DOES NOT WORK GA
ADMIN : FILE OPEN STEP FILES - CRASH DURING AN
SYSTEM BR10000054124 HD68436 GA
IGS SAVE - WINDOWS 64 BITS JAPANESE DEPENDANT
SYSTEM BR10000054156 HD68465 COMPANION: DESKTOP BUTTON NAMES INCORRECT. GA
SYSTEM BR10000054153 HD68467 COMPANION: ENGLISH COMMENT INCORRECT. GA
SYSTEM BR10000054205 HD68516 CONSTRAINTS IN THE MACRO CANNOT BE PROCESSED GA
SETTINGS IN GENERATE NC CODE INTERACTIVELY OR
SYSTEM BR10000054211 HD68526 MFGNCOUTPUT CAT SETTINGS HAVE IMPACT ON THE GA
OUTPUT
ITEV5CV5 / A DOCUMENT SEND TO CATIA CAUSES
SYSTEM BR10000054232 HD68533 CATIA TO HANG IF THE PRC CONTAINS MORE THAN GA
60000 PART INSTANCES
LINK STATUS REF-REF LINK WITH PUBLICATIONS
SYSTEM BR10000054222 HD68538 GA
WRONG AFTER UNDO.
CMP : WRONG BEHAVIOUR WHEN REPLAYING A
SYSTEM BR10000054392 HD68712 GA
RECORDED MACRO
COMPANION: THE KANJI DOES NOT APPEAR
SYSTEM BR10000054404 HD68724 GA
CORRECTLY IN JAPANESE ENVIRONMENT.
VPM WHEN CREATING A PRODUCT SPEC WITH
SYSTEM BR10000054503 HD68824 GA
CREATEPRODUCTSPECIFICATION API
WARMSTART: ERROR MESSAGE APPEARS CONCERNING
SYSTEM BR10000054510 HD68828 AUTOSAVE (INCREMENTAL BACKUP) WHILE SAVING GA
DATA
SYSTEM BR10000054544 HD68866 SEND TO' FUNCTION DOESN GA
SYSTEM BR10000054616 HD68941 DUPLICATION_OF_MENU_ENTRIES GA
ONLY 'LOCAL SENSOR' IS CREATED THROUGH MACRO
SYSTEM BR10000054651 HD68972 GA
'VON MISES' CAN NOT BE SPECIFIED THROUGH MACRO
SYSTEM BR10000054660 HD68977 OPTIMIZATION DOES NOT BECOME HIDE BY REACTION GA
SYSTEM BR10000054745 HD69055 SR1 SMALL ASSEMBLIES NAMING SCHEMA ERROR GA
ADMIN : TOOLS - OPTIONS - DOCUMENT -
SYSTEM BR10000054778 HD69099 GA
UNEXPECTED BEHAVIOR WITH FOLDER DURING SAVE
THE MACRO PROGRAM WHICH EXTRACTS RUN LENGTH
SYSTEM BR10000054855 HD69185 INFORMATION WI H REFERENCE TO LINE ID OF GA
PRODUCT CANNOT DO IT
ADMIN : DLNAME ENVIRONEMENT - PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM BR10000055074 HD69396 GA
DECREASE WHEN OPEN CATDUA
SYSTEM BR10000055490 HD69836 VB MINIMUM DISTANCE WRONG RESULTS GA
ADMIN : DLNAME ENVIRONEMENT - PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM BR10000055557 HD69906 GA
DECREASE WHEN OPEN CATDUA
MACRO TO OPEN CATDRAWING , SAVE AS PDF AND
SYSTEM BR10000055593 HD69952 EXIT ABENDS WITH MSG: APPLICATION ERROR : THE GA
INSTRUCTION AT REFERENCED MEMORY AT
TOOLS :OPTIONS : INDUSTRY SPECIFIC OPTIONS
SYSTEM BR10000055845 HD70215 MISSING IN COMPATIBILITY 3DXML COLUMN IF USING GA
MD2 LICENSE
AUTOMATION ERROR WHEN GETTING HIDDEN
SYSTEM BR10000055977 HD70359 GA
ATTRIBUTE IN PARTIAL SCENE
ADMIN : CATSCRIPT SCRIPTING ENGINE IN NOT
SYSTEM BR10000056042 HD70422 GA
PROPERLY INSTALLED
LIST IS APPENDED TO LIST WHEN MEMORY IS FULL.
SYSTEM BR10000056101 HD70479 GA
THEN THE SIZE OF LIST DOES NOT INCREASE.
ADMIN : IMPOSSIBLE TO OPEN CATPRODUCT -
SYSTEM BR10000056111 HD70494 GA
OSM_AL080 AND OSM_DA878 ERRORS
CMP:WRONG COMPUTATION OF MASS WITH VB WHEN
SYSTEM BR10000056113 HD70495 GA
USING EQUIVALENT I NERTIA
SYSTEM BR10000056212 HD70588 CATIA V5R18 CANNOT BE STARTED IN ADMIN MODE GA
SYSTEM BR10000056269 HD70646 ABEND WHEN OPENING THE V4 DATA GA
SYSTEM BR10000056377 HD70751 GETGUIDE API OCCURS ERROR FOR LOFT SURFACE GA
VISUAL BASIC API GETMINIMUMDISTANCE PRODUCES
SYSTEM BR10000056383 HD70774 WRONG INTERSECTION POINT COORDINATES WHEN GA
USING SEMI-CIRCLE FACE
SYSTEM BR10000056645 HD71022 EXECUTE MACRO -> IMPOSSIBLE TO CONTROL WINDOW GA
VISU : INPUT LAYERS ARE NOT SHOWN PROPERLY
SYSTEM BR10000056668 HD71049 GA
AFTER REOPENING THE DOCUMENT
VBA : SELECTION1 ON R17 TAKES MORE TIME THAN
SYSTEM BR10000056723 HD71108 GA
ON R15
THOUGH USERACCESSMODE OF USERPROPERTY
SYSTEM BR10000056734 HD71114 (PARAMETER) IS CONFIGURED TO READONLY, IT IS GA
POSSIBLE TO DELETE USERPROPERTY
IMPOSSIBLE TO CREATE NEW CAA V5 WORKSPACE DUE
SYSTEM BR10000056756 HD71141 GA
TO LICENSING ISSUE
SYSTEM BR10000056790 HD71168 SOME CRASHES DON'T GENERATE ANY ABEND TRACE GA
AUTOMATION API SETVIEWNAME OF OBJECT
SYSTEM BR10000056974 HD71369 DRAWINGVIEW FAILS FOR PID CREATED BY GA
WORKBENCH PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
CATIA FREEZED WHEN RUNNING MACRO AT IE6.0 PLUS
SYSTEM BR10000057064 HD71460 GA
R18SP2
CATIA FREEZED WHEN RUNNING MACRO AT IE6.0 PLUS
SYSTEM BR10000057064 HD71460 GA
R18SP2
COMPANION : COURSES OF CIS - SMARTEAM CATIA
SYSTEM BR10000057208 HD71614 INTEGRATION DOES NOT APPEAR IN COMPANION GA
AFTER INSTALLING SUS AND CIS
SYSTEM BR10000057304 HD71712 COMPATIBILITY PB BETWEEN VBA AND CATSCRIPT GA
SYSTEM BR10000057616 HD72048 HOW TO USE ASSIGN 3D COLOR INHERITANCE VIA VBA GA
THE NUMBER OF DEGREES OF FREEDOM BY
SYSTEM BR10000057699 HD72132 CATIDEGREESOFFREEDOM INTERFACE IN R18SP3 IS GA
DIFFERENT FROM R18SP2
RENDER METHOD IN PHOTO STUDIO VB API DOES NOT
SYSTEM BR10000057787 HD72224 GA
WAIT
SYSTEM BR10000058103 HD72572 BUGS WITH INDICATE2D METHOD GA
ADDING A CATDLGBARMENU (WITH SUB MENU AND
SYSTEM BR10000058177 HD72654 GA
ITEM) IN MY COMMAND DIALOG.
SYSTEM BR10000058273 HD72762 SYSTEM DOWN IN CAA:CATTOPPARALLEL OPERATOR. GA
SELECTION OF CONICAL FACE RETURNS CYLINDRICAL
SYSTEM BR10000058396 HD72887 GA
FACE
ADMIN: IMPOSSIBLE TO OPEN LARGE DATA - CNEXT
SYSTEM BR10000058590 HD73093 GA
PROCESS MORE THAN 20GB
SYSTEM BR10000058641 HD73128 VBA DOESNT OPERATE BY V5R18(32BIT) GA
DMC PUBLISH SCRIPT CORRUPTS VANILLA TABLES
SYSTEM BR10000058754 HD73268 UPON CREATION OF CUSTOMIZED TABLES FOR ECO GA
AND ACTION
CAN'T OPEN CATIA V5R18SP03 CATDRAWINGS ON
SYSTEM BR10000059046 HD73582 GA
64BIT AIX
SYSTEM BR10000059292 HD73846 SELECTING OBJECTS VIA VB IS PROGRESSIVELY SLOW GA
WHEN A MACRO IS RUN BY VB EDITOR, CATIA GETS
SYSTEM BR10000059610 HD74172 GA
ABEND
COPY AND TRACUT OPERATIONS NOT PROCESSED
SYSTEM BR10000059631 HD74196 GA
WHEN USING VB API MA NUFACTURINGAPTGENERATOR
IF IT USE CATIINIINTERACTIVESESSION::OPEN
SYSTEM BR10000059692 HD74263 GA
METHOD, CATIA MENU WAS CORRUPTED
NOT ALL TABS ARE VISIBLE BY DEFAULT IF NOT THE
SYSTEM BR10000059850 HD74429 GA
LEFTMOST ONE IS VISIBLE BY DEFAUL
IF VIEW WAS GENERATE BY CAA WITH FTA,
SYSTEM BR10000059920 HD74499 GA
GENERATED FILTER DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY
UNEXPECTED PROGRESS BAR APPEARS WHEN UPDATE
SYSTEM BR10000060011 HD74594 GA
ERROR OCCORS ON V5R17.
SYSTEM BR10000060146 HD74736 PATHLINE IMAGE IS NOT RESPECTING GROUPS GA
SYSTEM BR10000060179 HD74769 VIEW SELECTION FAILED IN CATSCRIPT GA
OPEN CATPRODUCT CONTAINING CONTEXTUAL DESIGN
SYSTEM BR10000060571 HD75186 VIA API CATIINIINTERACTIVESESSION OPEN HANGS IF GA
CACHE IS ACTIVE AND EMPTY
FTA - DIMENSION ANGLE DOES NOT CHANGE WHEN
TOLANCAS BR10000056292 HD70660 GA
CHANGE VIEW SUPPORT IS PERFORMED
TSASST BR10000057167 HD71565 REGARDING PIE CHART OF GUN SEARCH. GA
REGARDING MEASURE BETWEEN WITH SECTION
TSASST BR10000058506 HD73003 GA
WINDOW
WHEN WE TRY TO DO WELD STUDY , V5 IS FREEZED
TSASST BR10000058821 HD73335 GA
ON DUAL CPU MACHINE
TANGENCY PROBLEM WITH THE NEW FLEXIBLE
TUB BR10000054056 HD68367 GA
ALGORITHM
FILTERING WHICH IS NOT IN COMPATIBILITY RULE
TUB BR10000054154 HD68464 GA
WILL BE PERFORMED
CREATE AN OFFSET SEGMENT CONNECTION' DOES NOT
TUB BR10000054191 HD68505 GA
WORK CONTINUOUSLY
TUBING CONNECTORS DOES NOT GENERATE
TUB BR10000054513 HD68831 GA
CONTEXTUAL LINKS
TRANSFER ELEMENTS USING AUTO BREAK RUN INTO
TUB BR10000054594 HD68895 GA
EXISTING DOCUMENT - ERROR MESSAGE
TUB BR10000054576 HD68896 BENDABLE PART CREATION NOT POSSIBLE GA
TUB BR10000054641 HD68957 OVERRIDE PARAMETERS NOT FUNCTIONAL IN R17 GA
TUB BR10000054643 HD68959 IMPOSSIBLE TO ROUTE A FLEXIBLE TUBE GA
R17 INITIAL TUBING RUN PATH INCONSISTENT WITH
TUB BR10000054724 HD69044 GA
R16
THE ROUTE SHOWN AFTER OFFSET SEGMENT
TUB BR10000055101 HD69436 GA
EXECUTION IS NOT CORRECT
GREEN BOX IS DISPLAYED ALTHOUGH TOGGLE
TUB BR10000055516 HD69862 GA
MANIPULATION HANDLE MODE IS OFF
CONNECTOR TO CONNECTOR OPTION OF A COPY/
TUB BR10000055549 HD69895 PASTE 3D SYSTEMS FUNCTION DOES NOT WORK GA
CORRECTLY
FLEXIBLE TUBING CREATION FAILS WHEN USING
TUB BR10000055656 HD70021 GA
SUPPORTS WITH 2 POINTS
PRESS TO USE RULE OPTION IS ACTIVE IN SPITE OF
TUB BR10000056081 HD70457 GA
BEING DIFFERENT FROM TURN RULE
WHEN THE OPTION OF THE EXISTING RUN IS CHANGED,
TUB BR10000056082 HD70458 GA
CHANGE OF THE OPTION IS INHERITED TO NEW RUN
WHEN BUILD CONNECTOR IS PERFORMED, THE COLOR
TUB BR10000056083 HD70459 GA
OF A CONNECTOR IS CHANGED
TUBING DESIGN - CURSOR ORIENTATION WHEN
TUB BR10000056084 HD70460 GA
ROUTING A RUN AND REPOSITIONING COMPASS
V4 TO V5 MIGRATION MAPPING TABLE NOT
TUB BR10000056394 HD70793 GA
FUNCTIONAL
OFFSET PLANE DOES NOT ALL TO ROUTE IN POSITIVE
TUB BR10000056416 HD70796 GA
DISTANCE OFF THE PLANE
V4 TO V5 TUBING MIGRATION DOES NOT RESPECT PRM
TUB BR10000056641 HD71020 GA
FLAG
THE RESULT MEASURED BY THE MEASURE DISTANCE/
TUB BR10000056664 HD71045 GA
ANGLE OF 3D SYSTEMS FUNCTION IS NOT CORRECT
DRAFTING ISSUES WITH SPACE RESERVATION OR
TUB BR10000056753 HD71123 GA
SYSTEMS ROUTING DATAWITHSMALLTURNANGLE
FLEXIBLE TUBING CREATION FAILS WHEN USING
TUB BR10000056849 HD71233 GA
SUPPORTS WITH 2 POINTS
PUBLISHED ELEMENTS ARE NOT CREATED INTO
TUB BR10000057320 HD71732 GA
'EXTERNAL REFERENCE' ISHED BY THE TUBING
THE REFERENCE LINE ID OF THE PLACED NUT PARTS IS
TUB BR10000057424 HD71839 GA
NOT CONFORMABLE WITH NOMINAL SIZE
THE PIPE PART ARRANGED ON THE RUN DOES NOT
TUB BR10000057506 HD71932 GA
FOLLOW THE RUN MODIFICATION
TUB BR10000057806 HD72244 MIN OFFSET DOES NOT FUNCTION GA
CANNOT CREATE A CATALOAG REPORT ON THE TUBING
TUB BR10000057995 HD72453 GA
LINE CATALOG
TUB BR10000058319 HD72810 UNABLE TO CONNECT REDUCING ELBOW. GA
RUN AND TUBING PARTS CAN BE COPIED INTO PART
TUB BR10000058810 HD73326 GA
USING A COPY/PASTE 3D SYSTEMS COMMAND
A NODE CANNOT BE INSERTED IN RUN COPIED BY THE
TUB BR10000058814 HD73329 GA
COPY/PASTE 3D SYSTEMS COMMAND
A CONTINUATION ROUTE CANNOT BE CREATED FOR
TUB BR10000058813 HD73330 RUN COPIED BY THE COPY/PASTE 3D SYSTEMS GA
COMMAND
A SEGMENT CANNOT BE CREATED FOR RUN COPIED BY
TUB BR10000058971 HD73501 GA
THE COPY/PASTE 3D SYSTEMS COMMAND
AFTER RUNNING THE CATDUAV5 BATCH A TUBING RUN
TUB BR10000059044 HD73577 GA
CANNOT BE MODIFIED
NOT ALL TYPES AVAILABLE DURING REPORT
TUB BR10000059426 HD73984 GA
DEFINITION
THE EXPLANATION ABOUT CONNECTION OF TUBING
TUB BR10000059464 HD74021 GA
DESIGN DOES NOT EXIST IN ONLINE DOCUMENTATION
TUB BR10000059470 HD74022 AFTER AEC CONVERSION, V5 FITTING IS INVERTED GA
CATIA REPORTING DOES NOT ALLOW MORE THAN ONE
TUB BR10000059553 HD74111 GA
UNIQUE REPORT TO BE GENERATED
2D-3D VALIDATION REPORT - PART TYPED CHECK
TUBDIAGM BR10000055076 HD69373 GA
FAILED
VALIDATION REPORT FAILED TO RECOGNIZE 3D PART
TUBDIAGM BR10000055104 HD69435 GA
ON A RUN NOT CONNECTED TO THE RUN
MIGRATION ERROR-VPMV4 TO LCA WITH VAULT
VAULT BR10000052787 HD66987 GA
SHARING
VAULTMASTER FILE CORRUPTED BY DOCCATCHER
VAULT BR10000052873 HD67097 GA
THREAD
VAULT BR10000054364 HD68674 RUNENVVAULTSERVER SCRIPT GA
VAULT BR10000055295 HD69635 DMC ERROR GA
CLEAN UP TOOL NEEDED TO REMOVE ITERATION
VAULT BR10000058654 HD73161 GA
RELATED FILES REMAINING IN THE VAULT
MACHINING (PMG) / IMPROPER STOCK ORIENTATION
VERMACH BR10000057558 HD71987 GA
ON SUBSEQUENT OPERATIONS.
MACHINING (NCINFRA) / MILL-TURN MACHINE
VERMACH BR10000058172 HD72650 GA
SIMULATION PROBLEM WITH TOOL CHANGE POINTS.
GSD : GRAPHIC PROPERTIES : GEOMETRY IS CREATED
VISU BR10000051351 HD65323 BY GRAPHIC SETTING WHICH IS DIFFERENT FROM GA
ORIGINAL
VISUALIZATION : INCORRECT TRIANGLE MESHES WITH
VISU BR10000053303 HD67560 GA
ISOPARAMETERICS GENERATION
VISU-GEOMETRY: BAD TESSELATION DISPLAYED ON
VISU BR10000053421 HD67684 GA
SPEHERE SURFACE
VISU : PS FILE CREATED BY IMAGE/CAPTURE IS EMPTY
VISU BR10000053521 HD67799 GA
IN ANOTHER VIEWER THAN V5 PRODUCTS
VISU BR10000054030 HD68339 WE CANNOT RECEIVE NOTIFICATION OF CLICK. GA
VISUALIZATION - DISPLAY OF PART IS INCORRECT
VISU BR10000054433 HD68750 GA
AFTER PARAMETER MODIFICATION.
VISU : NO LIGHT MODE NOT REMEMBERED FOR NEW
VISU BR10000054492 HD68810 GA
CATPART IN SAME SESSION
VISU : VIEW TOOLBAR DISAPPEARED WHEN RUN
VISU BR10000054797 HD69120 GA
VBSCRIPT
VISU : CATIA IS BLOCKED WITH SPACE MOUSE
VISU BR10000054829 HD69156 GA
BUTTONS
CAA INCLUDE FILE CAT2DGEOMTEXTSTRUCTURES.H
VISU BR10000055000 HD69328 GA
DOES NOT CONFORM TO C++ STANDARD
UI : TOOLTIPS DISAPPEAR AFTER WINDOWS SEARCH
VISU BR10000055197 HD69538 GA
FOR FILE OR FOLDERS IS OPENED
VISUALIZATION: DATA CANNOT BE OPENED WITH
VISU BR10000055220 HD69562 GA
SETUP OF 3D ACCURACY.
DEAD-LOCK' IN MULTI-THREADING MECHANISM OF
VISU BR10000055488 HD69834 GA
SIMULATION INFRASTRUCTURE
VISU BR10000055844 HD70219 ISSUE WITH CATGRAPHICELEMENTNORMALE GA
UI: THE PREVIEW DISPLAY OF MATERIAL ISN'T
VISU BR10000055922 HD70302 GA
DISPLAYED CORRECTLY
UI: TEAR OFF MENUS SHOW IN WRONG WORKBENCH
VISU BR10000055935 HD70310 GA
AND COVER UP ICONS
VISU : IN SPECIFIC CATPART INTERSECTION ELEMENTS
VISU BR10000056258 HD70634 GA
CAN NOT BE SELECTED EASILY WITH MOUSE
ASD: REGRESSION TO LOAD ASSEMBLY IN VISU MODE
VISU BR10000056942 HD71328 BETWEEN V5R17SP3 AND V5R17SP5 WHEREAS CGR GA
FILES ARE ALREADY GENERATED
VISUALIZATION: IMAGE CAPTURE: PIXEL MODE
VISU BR10000057154 HD71557 GA
SETTING NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT
VISU: BAD GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION WHEN USING
VISU BR10000057388 HD71800 GA
SECTIONING FUNCTION IN ASD WORKBENCH
RTR : SHADOW STICKER FAILS UNDER SPECIFIC
VISU BR10000057544 HD71982 GA
CONDITIONS
VISU : SOME PARTS DISAPPEAR WHILE CHANGING THE
VISU BR10000057540 HD71983 GA
WORKBENCH
THE 'CAT3DCYLINDERGP' CONSTRUCTOR METHOD
VISU BR10000057977 HD72436 GA
CRASHES WHEN THE SAG VALUE IS TOO SMALL
TRANSPARENCY CANNOT BE SET WITH
VISU BR10000058275 HD72767 GA
CATIVISPROPERTIES:: SETPROPERTIESATT
VISU : THE MAGNIFICATION OF THE CAPTURE
VISU BR10000058818 HD73338 GA
FUNCTION IS NOT REFLECTED
VISU BR10000059066 HD73602 VISU : ALL ICON DISAPPEAR ON AIX 32 BITS GA
VISU : IF SPECIFICATION TREE IS HIDDEN, ABEND
VISU BR10000059094 HD73630 GA
WHEN OPENING SPECIFIC PRODUCT WITH PHS LISENCE
VISUALIZATION: DISPLAY OF SOLID IS WRONG AFTER
VISU BR10000059218 HD73765 GA
BOOLEAN
ADMIN : LARGE DATA COULD NOT BE OPENED IN
VISU BR10000059240 HD73787 GA
WINDOWS 64 BITS
2D_3D: CANNOT REPRESENT HIDDEN EDGES
VISU BR10000060075 HD74663 GA
CORRECTLY
SAVE OF MML LINK'S MODIFICATIONS IN CATIAV5 WILL
VPM BR10000058336 HD72823 GA
CAUSE A VPM CRASH.
VPMINTF BR10000054380 HD68701 CATIA CRASH WHEN CLOSING CATPART (PART3) GA
PERFORMANCE ISSUE IN STEP2 USE-CASE
VPMINTF BR10000055594 HD69950 CONFIGURATION USE-CASE (14-1-3) DOESN Ã Ã0 T GA
REACH HONDA
CATPDMINTEROPSERVICES::
VPMINTF BR10000056403 HD70767 EXTRACTDOCUMENTSETTOFILEDIRECTORY WRONG GA
DOCUMENT NAME
API
VPMINTF BR10000057280 HD71685 OPENPARTANDDOCUMENTFROM_V_ID_AND_V_VERSION GA
IS FAILING
RECONCILIATOR SUCCESSFUL, BUT SAVE TO ENOVIA
VPMV5NAV BR10000050419 HD64266 GA
FAILING
VERSION A PROMOTED STRUCTURE-EXPOSED
VPMV5NAV BR10000051381 HD65356 GA
ASSEMBLY
VPMV5NAV / ACTIVATE DEACTIVATE COMPONENT
VPMV5NAV BR10000051739 HD65775 COMMAND NOT AVAILABLE IN PRODUCT STRUCTURE GA
WORKBENCH
VPMV5NAV : ERRONEOUS WARNING MESSAGE WHEN
VPMV5NAV BR10000051833 HD65884 GA
OPENING TO NEW WINDOW
VPMV5NAV : WHEN SEARCHING USING PARTVERSION,
VPMV5NAV BR10000052718 HD66887 A RESULT IS NOT DISPLAYED ON RESULT WINDOW GA
(DMC ENVIRONMENT ONLY)
VPMV5NAV : 'INSTANTIATE AS NEW COMPONENT'
VPMV5NAV BR10000053260 HD67502 CANNOT BE USED AFTER THE 'INSTANTIATE GA
COMPONENT' FOR CATALOG SAVED IN ENOVIA.
VPMV5NAV : CATIA CRASHES - COPY-PASTE PRODUCT -
VPMV5NAV BR10000053331 HD67579 LOAD REFERENCED DOCUMENTS NOT ACTIVATED GA
CYCLE DETECTED
VPMV5NAV : STATE OF NODE BECOMES INSTEAD OF
VPMV5NAV BR10000053553 HD67828 GA
WITH PERFORMING AFTER LOADING
VPMV5NAV : WHEN LOGON VPM NAVI, IMPOSSIBLE TO
VPMV5NAV BR10000053608 HD67888 GA
SELECT ROLE ON AIX .
VPMV5NAV BR10000053724 HD68015 PVR DOSE NOT SAVE IN VPM GA
VPMV5NAV / USER IS ABLE TO CONFIGURE A PRC IN
VPMV5NAV BR10000053771 HD68077 GA
VPM NAV EVEN IF THE PRIVILEGE IS REVOKED
THE INCIDENT REPORT THAT APPEARS WHEN
VPMV5NAV BR10000053862 HD68177 PROBLEMS OCCUR DURING SAVE IN ENOVIA DISPLAYS GA
THE WRONG INSTANCE NAME
VPMV5NAV : CAN NOT UNLOAD PART MODIFIED BY
VPMV5NAV BR10000053924 HD68246 GA
ANOTHER USER .
ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLE'CV5_EV5_OPTIMIZE_DRAWING_SENDTO=1'
VPMV5NAV BR10000053976 HD68287 GA
IS SET UP AND WHEN ENOVIA SEND TO, THE FORM OF
RUN WILL
VPMV5NAV BR10000054003 HD68314 CAN NOT SAVE A PVR BACK TO ENOVIA DATABASE GA
SYNCHRONIZE TO ANY REVISION DOES NOT WORK ON
VPMV5NAV BR10000054299 HD68609 AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING WHICH POINTS TO A PVR GA
CATPRODUCT
VPMV5NAV BR10000054298 HD68612 RECONCILIATION-GLOBAL QUERY MAPPING FAILS GA
VPMV5NAV / IMPOSSIBLE TO SET DATE EFFECTIVITY IN
VPMV5NAV BR10000054331 HD68642 GA
VPM NAVIGATOR ON GERMAN REGIONAL OPTION
VPMV5NAV BR10000054341 HD68652 FILTER GIVES DIFFERENT RESULTS GA
VPMV5NAV : THE BLANK IS NOT DISPLAYED IN THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000054437 HD68758 GA
SEARCH CONDITIONS PANEL BY REPLACE COMPONENT.
THE RESULT OF THE IMPACT BY BECOMES THUMB
VPMV5NAV BR10000054481 HD68797 GA
DOWN AFTER OVERWRITING THE THUMB UP DATA
VPMV5NAV : RESPONSE TIME OF CENTER GRAPH IS
VPMV5NAV BR10000054509 HD68827 SLOWER WHEN DATA ARE OPENED FROM ENOVIA THAN GA
FILE
CONFIGURATION DOMAIN NAMES GET STORED IN
VPMV5NAV BR10000054674 HD68991 JAPANESE CHARACTERS IN THE ENOVIA DATABASE GA
WHEN WORKING IN A JAPANESE.
ATTRIBUTEMAPPING OF INSTDESCRIPTION IS NOT
VPMV5NAV BR10000054731 HD69051 GA
WORKING WITH AM OPTIMIZATION ACTIVATED
VPMV5NAV BR10000054749 HD69070 BY THE PVR ON PRC TO PRC FUNCTION, A CHILD GA
VPM-NAVIGATOR SAVE PANEL ONLY DISPLAYS 4/3
VPMV5NAV BR10000054762 HD69080 GA
ROWS OF DATA
VPM-NAVIGATOR SAVE PANEL IS FLICKERING /
VPMV5NAV BR10000054763 HD69081 GA
REFRESHING
SAVING FROM CATIA TO ENOVIA A BIG NEWLY
VPMV5NAV BR10000054773 HD69090 CREATED STRUCTURE EXPOSED ASSEMBLY CAUSES A GA
SERVER CRASH
VPMV5NAV : THE COMMAND WHICH IS SELECTED FROM
VPMV5NAV BR10000054772 HD69092 CONTEXTUAL MENU DOES NOT WORK EVEN IF DATA IS GA
HIGHLIGHTED.
APPLY EFFECTIVITY TO INSTANCE WITH CATEGORY
VPMV5NAV BR10000054826 HD69153 SPECIFICATION BRE AKS SESSION IF CATEGORY IS GA
NOT ATTACHED TO ASSEMBLY NODE
THE COPY INSTANCE IS NOT RECOGNIZED FOR
VPMV5NAV BR10000054831 HD69159 GA
TECHNOLOGICAL PACKAGE
VPMV5NAV : ABEND OCCURRS ON CLIENT SIDE WHEN
VPMV5NAV BR10000054836 HD69163 GA
SAVING DATA TO VPM NAVIGATOR
FILTERING CRITERION OF DATE MODIFIED ATTRIBUTE
VPMV5NAV BR10000054869 HD69195 GA
SAVED IN DB IS WRONG
ENOVWPE : SINGLE PARTS ARE NOT FOUND IN QUERY
VPMV5NAV BR10000054873 HD69201 GA
WHILE RECONCILIATING .
VPMV5NAV : WARM START FAILS TO RESTORE THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000054899 HD69223 GA
DATA IF THE DATA INCLUDE A MODEL DATA (V4)
VPMV5NAV : VPM NAVIGATOR CLIENT ABEND WHEN
VPMV5NAV BR10000054929 HD69254 'WHERE USED' COMMAND IS USED ON A CUSTOMIZED GA
DMC
VPMV5NAV BR10000055073 HD69410 PVR SYNCHRONIZATION OVERWRITE PART NUMBER GA
VPMV5NAV : WITH PARTIAL SAVE ENABLE A DOCUMENT
VPMV5NAV BR10000055157 HD69490 IS ABLE TO SAVE BY USER WHICH HAS A ONLY A GA
LOGON PRIVILEGE
THE RESULT OF SEARCH RESULT IS NOT STORED ON
VPMV5NAV BR10000055189 HD69529 GA
THE SCREEN
CATIA INTERNAL ERROR WHEN SAVING CATPART
VPMV5NAV BR10000055256 HD69596 GA
INCLUDING ANNOTATIONS
VPMV5NAV BR10000055268 HD69602 VPM NAV: MEMORY ISSUE WHEN SAVING GA
NEEDS TO DISPLAY THE OWNER OF A PART IN CATIAV5
VPMV5NAV BR10000055276 HD69617 ATTRIBUTE MAPPING HAS BEEN SET UP TO MAP GA
V_USER FROM THE PV OBJECT
VPMV5NAV : USER SHOULD NOT LOCK THE OTHER
VPMV5NAV BR10000055287 HD69627 GA
PARTS IN GCO, WHEN SAVING A NEW CATPRODUCT .
VPMV5NAV : SAVE IN ENOVIA PROCESS LEADS TO
VPMV5NAV BR10000055296 HD69636 GA
CHANGE VISUALIZATION MODE TO DESIGN MODE
PVR SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTIONALITY FAILED AFTER
VPMV5NAV BR10000055306 HD69647 GA
THE PVR RECONC ILIATION
ENTERING DATE USING CALENDAR BUTTON FAILS
VPMV5NAV BR10000055424 HD69766 GA
USING FRENCH REGIONAL SETTINGS
CATIA ABENDS WHEN THE DATA WHICH HAVE A GHOST
VPMV5NAV BR10000055468 HD69817 GA
LINK IS OPENED THROUGH VPMNAVI
PVS:CAPTURED FILTER, PARTINSTANCES:ATTRIBUTE:
VPMV5NAV BR10000055471 HD69818 GA
PARTNO IS NOT D SPLAYED IN JAPANESE ENV
VPMV5NAV : LOCK/UNLOCK FROM VPMNAV NOT
VPMV5NAV BR10000055554 HD69904 GA
REFELCGED IN ENOVIA HISTORY TAB.
VPMV5NAV : WHEN UNLOADING THE DATA OF VPM
VPMV5NAV BR10000055563 HD69915 GA
NAVI, THE 1ST OPERATION IS FAILED .
VPMV5NAV : WHEN SIMULATION WITH COMMANDS IS
CHOSEN AS THE KINEMATICS DATA CONTAINING V4
VPMV5NAV BR10000055574 HD69927 GA
DATA SAVED AT VPM NAVIGATOR , PERFORMANCE
BECOMES
VPMV5NAV : CREATING A NEW DOCUMENT CRASHES
VPMV5NAV BR10000055609 HD69962 GA
USING A CUSTOMIZED DATABASE
VPMV5NAV : ATTRIBUTES MODIFICATION OF
VPMV5NAV BR10000055682 HD70045 GA
EQUIPMENT CATALOG PART IN VPLM ARE NOT SAVED
CRASH WHEN LOADING A STRUCTURE AFTER DELETING
VPMV5NAV BR10000055920 HD70299 GA
A COMPONENT.
THE PERFORMANCE WHICH OPENS THE DATA WITH
VPMV5NAV BR10000056128 HD70505 GA
WHICH LINK BROKE IS LATE
VPMV5NAV BR10000056144 HD70521 VPMV5NAV: PARTS IN CONTEXT FLAG ASSEMBLY SAVE GA
VPMV5NAV : ORBIX MEMORY EXCEPTION WHEN
VPMV5NAV BR10000056216 HD70591 GA
CREATING A PVR FROM FILTERED STRUCTURE.
CONTEXTUAL LINKS ARE NOT SYNCHRONIZED WHEN
THE POSITION OF PRODUCT IS CHANGED,AND
VPMV5NAV BR10000056313 HD70701 GA
UPDATED INFORMATION IS NOT REFLECTED AFTER
REOPEN.
CATPART CANNOT SAVE BY NOT USING THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000056365 HD70743 GA
PROHIBITION CHARACTER TO ENOVIA.
INSERTING AN INSTANCE BELOW A PUBLICATION
VPMV5NAV BR10000056436 HD70786 EXPOSED ASSEMBLY TRIGGERS INVALID WARNING GA
MSG WHEN THE ASSEMBLY INSTANCE IS NOT LOCKED
VPMV5NAV / PRODUCT WITH RELATION OPENS IN
VPMV5NAV BR10000056450 HD70834 DESIGN MODE EVEN WHEN CACHE OPTION IS GA
ACTIVATED
ASSEMBLY CONSTRAINTS ARE NOT LOADED WHEN
VPMV5NAV BR10000056505 HD70888 GA
USING LOAD CHILDREN COMMAND
IN PRODUCT EDITOR INTERFACE, LOCK/UNLOCK OF
VPMV5NAV BR10000056547 HD70929 PVR DOCUMENT INVOKES LOCK/UNLOCK OF THE GA
RELATED DOCUMENTS
CONTEXT DOES NOT DISPLAY THE UPDATED VIEW
VPMV5NAV BR10000056573 HD70955 GA
CORRECTLY
ATTRIBUTES FOR CATIA V5 DATA ARE NOT VISUALIZED
VPMV5NAV BR10000056579 HD70961 GA
IN THE TREE WITHOUT SELECTION
SYNCHRONIZING PVR DELETES ALL CHILDREN PART
VPMV5NAV BR10000056647 HD71026 INSTANCES AFTER REPLACING AN ASSEMBLY WITH GA
NEW REFERENCE
VPMV5NAV BR10000056684 HD71064 CNEXT CLASH WITHOUT ABEND LOG GA
THE HIGHLIGHT OF PRODUCT CANNOT BE CANCELED
VPMV5NAV BR10000056694 HD71081 WHEN THE DATA OF STRUCTURE EXPOSED MODE IS GA
LOADED
WHEN OVERWRITE SAVE OF THE DATA WHICH IS IN A
VPMV5NAV BR10000056724 HD71106 LOAD STATE IS CARRIED OUT INTO NAVI, AN INTERNAL GA
ERROR COMES OUT AND SAVE
VPMV5NAV : -SERVER AND -USER PARAMETER FOR
VPMV5NAV BR10000056730 HD71110 CATEV5PVRSYNCHRO BATCH UTILITY WAS REMOVED GA
FROM V5R18SP3 .
FILE EXTENSION - RESULT WINDOW AND PROPERTY
VPMV5NAV BR10000056792 HD71173 GA
WINDOW ARE DIFFERENT
VPMV5NAV : ABEND WHEN LAUNCHING COMMAND:
VPMV5NAV BR10000056872 HD71269 ATTACH DOCUMENT ON CUSTOMIZED DOCUMENT GA
OBJECT
IF THERE IS UNLOADED DATA, CANNOT SAVE THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000056884 HD71282 GA
DATA TO NAVI
VPMV5NAV : “EXECUTE CAPTURE & OPEN” MAKES
VPMV5NAV BR10000056968 HD71361 GA
CATIA ABEND.
SWITH TO VISU MODE WITH ENOVIA DATA IS LONGER
VPMV5NAV BR10000057109 HD71516 GA
THAN FILE DATE
VPMV5NAV : IF A BLANK IS CONTAINED IN DOCUMENT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057171 HD71570 GA
NAME, IT CANNOT SAVE THROUGH VPM NAVIGATOR.
VPMV5NAV : IF THE MODEL OPENED FROM NAVI IS
VPMV5NAV BR10000057207 HD71610 CLOSED WHILE PERFORMING THE CAPTURE FUNCTION, GA
CATIA ABENDS.
REARRANGEMENT OF THE SEARCH RESULT IS NOT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057374 HD71788 LOCATED IN A LINE IN ORDER OF THE TIME SAVED TO GA
ENOVIA.
VPMV5NAV : ATTACH DOCUMENT ON CUSTOMIZED
VPMV5NAV BR10000057505 HD71933 DOCUMENT OBJECT (WITH A DOCUMENT DOMAIN GA
NAME IN MIXED CASE) DOES NOT WORK.
VPMV5NAV : IMPROVEMENT OF MEMORY STOPPER
(ENOVIA SAVE): TRIGGER THE MEMORY IN CASE
VPMV5NAV BR10000057508 HD71935 GA
MEMORY CONSUMPTION IS ALREADY ABOVE THE
THREESHOLD
VPMV5NAV : ATTRIBUTES MAPPING DOES NOT WORK
VPMV5NAV BR10000057529 HD71959 GA
FOR CUSTOM INSTANCE IN A PVR
VPMV5NAV / ENOVIA CONNECTION BREAKS ON
VPMV5NAV BR10000057542 HD71978 GA
APPLYING EFFECTIVITY TO A PART AND OPENING IT
VPMV5NAV / SERVER IS DISCONNECTED WHEN DATE
VPMV5NAV BR10000057539 HD71980 CONFIGURATION IS APPLIED AND THE PRODUCT IS GA
FILTERED
CRASH WHEN TRYING TO OPEN ASSEMBLY
VPMV5NAV BR10000057593 HD72032 GA
CONTAINING V4 MODEL
WARNING MESSAGE WITH SAVE AFTER ATTRIBUTE
VPMV5NAV BR10000057625 HD72055 GA
CHANGE
VPMV5NAV : IF A LOGIN PASSWORD IS SURROUNDED
VPMV5NAV BR10000057756 HD72184 WITH A DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK, ANOTHER LOGIN GA
WINDOW WILL START.
VPMV5NAV : UNABLE TO SAVE BY CTRL-S WHEN MML
VPMV5NAV BR10000057753 HD72185 LINK MADE BETWEEN DRAWINGS IN ENOVIA AND GA
LOCAL DIRECTORY.
IMPOSSIBLE TO LOAD COPIED PART FROM PVR AND ITS
VPMV5NAV BR10000057764 HD72195 GA
INSTANCE
VPMV5NAV : CANNOT CONFIRM PUBLISHED EVENT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057833 HD72274 GA
AGAINST DMC PART
EVEN IF IT DELETES CATPART FROM PRC,
VPMV5NAV BR10000057885 HD72340 GA
SYNCHRONIZE OF PVR CAN NOT MOVE.
VPMV5NAV : IF A BLANK IS CONTAINED IN DOCUMENT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057933 HD72395 GA
NAME, IT CANNOT SAVE THROUGH VPM NAVIGATOR.
VPMV5NAV : NO ATTRIBUTE ON PVR SUB-ASSEMBLIES
VPMV5NAV BR10000057942 HD72396 GA
THAT ARE TURNED INTO COMPONENTS.
ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER OF PVR IS NOT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057948 HD72405 GA
SYNCHRONIZED AFTER REPLACE NEW REFERENCE
VPMV5NAV : SHOW-NO SHOW PERSITENCY IS NOT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057960 HD72414 GA
WELL MANAGED BY MULTI-INSTANCIATION
VPM NAVIGATOR 'SHOW DOCUMENTS' AND 'IMPACTED
VPMV5NAV BR10000057971 HD72433 GA
BY' FUNCTIONALITIES NOT RELIABLE.
VPMV5NAV : POSSIBLE TO UNLOCK WITHOUT
VPMV5NAV BR10000057975 HD72435 GA
PERMISSION.
VPMV5NAV : REFRESH OF VERSIONED INSTANCE IS
VPMV5NAV BR10000058113 HD72579 NOT COMPLETE - USER HAS TO REFRESH FROM UPPER GA
LEVEL TO SEE NEW VERSION APPEAR CORRECTLY.
VPMV5NAV : CATIA V5 64BITS CRASHES WHEN TRYING
VPMV5NAV BR10000058111 HD72580 GA
TO CREATE A FILTER CAPTURE
VPMV5NAV : UNLOCKED DOCUMENT NOT SHOWN IN
VPMV5NAV BR10000058118 HD72584 GA
SAVE PANEL.
VPMV5NAV BR10000058120 HD72589 NO OPTION TO LOCK AN INSTANCE IN SAVE PANEL GA
VPMV5NAV BR10000058121 HD72590 PANEL LOCKS DO NOT REFRESH AUTOMATICALLY. GA
AFTER RE-SIZING THE COLUMN WIDTHS, THE SAVE
VPMV5NAV BR10000058126 HD72592 GA
PANEL ITSELF SHRINKS.
CATIA SESSION TERMINATES WITHOUT ERRORS OR
VPMV5NAV BR10000058164 HD72635 GA
WARNING WHEN USING THE NEW FILTER TOOLS.
VPMV5NAV : IF PART IS UPDATED BY LCA CLASSIC,
VPMV5NAV BR10000058170 HD72652 GA
CONTEXT LINK CAN NOT BE SYNCHRONIZED.
IF NO CONNECTION TO LCA SERVER, ERROR MESSAGE
VPMV5NAV BR10000058213 HD72706 GA
IS DISPLAYED TWICE INCORRECTLY
PARTIAL SAVE IS NOT WELL SUPPORTED FOR CUT
VPMV5NAV BR10000058287 HD72775 GA
OPERATION
VPMV5NAV BR10000058293 HD72777 VPMV5NAV : VISUALISE IN BILL OF MATERIALS. GA
VPMV5NAV / IMPOSSIBLE TO UNLOCK AND LOCK IN
VPMV5NAV BR10000058285 HD72783 SHEET EDITOR FOR A SPECIFIC CONTEXT WITH GA
REQUIRED PREVILEGES
VPMV5NAV BR10000058296 HD72786 VPMV5NAV : PRODUCT MODE SWITCH FLAGS SAVE. GA
A FALSE WARNING MESSAGE IS GENERATED BUT THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000058298 HD72787 GA
CHANGE IS COMMITED IN THE SAVE PANEL
VPMV5NAV BR10000058323 HD72818 VPM NAV FILTER SELECTION IN CATIA FAILS. GA
VPMV5NAV : CHARACTERS LESS THANOR QUOTAION
VPMV5NAV BR10000058329 HD72821 MARK FOR DOCUMET ID AND NAME ARE DISAPPEARED GA
IN VPM NAV PROPERTIES PANEL.
PARTVERSION MODIFY PERMITS PROPERTY
VPMV5NAV BR10000058335 HD72824 GA
MODIFICATION
VPMV5NAV BR10000058333 HD72825 PARTVERSION P&O RULES NOT RESPECTED GA
CONSTRAINTS CAN BE SAVED WITHOUT LOCKING THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000058343 HD72828 GA
ASSEMBLY REFERENCE
SYNCHONIZE IS NOT DONE THOUGH SYNCHONIZATION
VPMV5NAV BR10000058448 HD72943 GA
SUCCSSFULLY IS DISPLAYED
VPM NAVIGATOR CONNECTION PREVENTS INSERTING A
VPMV5NAV BR10000058453 HD72950 GA
STEP FILE
CATIA ABENDS DURING SAVE FROM VPM NAV ON MOST
VPMV5NAV BR10000058477 HD72973 OF THE PARTS OF THE MIGRATED HOMAG R18 GA
DATABASE
VPMV5NAV : ATTRIBUTES MAPPING DOES NOT WORK
VPMV5NAV BR10000058480 HD72974 GA
FOR THE ROOT OF THE PVR ASSEMBLY.
VPMV5NAV : PVR CAN NOT BE CREATED BY
VPMV5NAV BR10000058509 HD73006 CATEV5PVRSYNCHRO BATCH UTILITY FROM MIGRATED GA
DATA.
VPMV5NAV / IMPOSSIBLE TO RESIZE THE WINDOW OF
VPMV5NAV BR10000058552 HD73054 GA
CONFIGURATION HANDLER DIALOG BOX
CHANGES DONE IN SPECIFICATION TREE ARE NOT
VPMV5NAV BR10000058606 HD73108 GA
REFLECTED IN SAVE PANEL.
VPMV5NAV / UNECESSARY WARNING OCCURS ON
VPMV5NAV BR10000058621 HD73127 GA
SAVING A PART AFTER REPLACE OPERATION
VPMV5NAV BR10000058815 HD73331 ENOVIA VPM NAV - BOM EXPLOSION GA
VPMV5NAV : VISUALIZATION IN BOM DESELECTION
VPMV5NAV BR10000058889 HD73414 GA
DOESN'T REFLECT IN ANALYSE BOM PANEL.
VPMV5NAV : SAVE WARNINGS GENERATED WITH
VPMV5NAV BR10000058969 HD73500 GA
PARTIAL SAVE
SPURIOUS PART ASSEMBLY SAVE WARNING
VPMV5NAV BR10000058995 HD73545 GA
FOLLOWING DETAIL MOVE.
VPMV5NAV / APPLYING EFFECTIVITY TO SECOND LEVEL
VPMV5NAV BR10000059079 HD73615 ASSEMBLY CAUSES SERVER CRASH WITH SPECIFIC GA
DATE FORMAT
PERFORMANCE IS VERY SLOW WHEN CREATING OR
VPMV5NAV BR10000059160 HD73703 SYNCHRONIZING PVR B Y CATEV5PVRSYNCHRO BATCH GA
UTILITY
VPMV5NAV : CLICK OK TO TERMINATE WHEN OPENING
VPMV5NAV BR10000059298 HD73850 GA
PRC USING VDM LICENSE
VPMV5NAV BR10000059316 HD73874 VPMV5NAV : SHRINKING BOUNDING BOX IN VPM NAV. GA
VPMV5NAV : PVR DOES NOT SYNCHRONIZE INSTANCE
VPMV5NAV BR10000059339 HD73892 GA
POSITION CHANGE.
VPMV5NAV : VPM SEARCH TAKES TIME WITH NO HIT
VPMV5NAV BR10000059431 HD73994 GA
OF ENOVIA SEARCH RESULT.
REFRESH FUNCTION IN ENOVIA LCA CLEANS OUT THE
VPMV5NAV BR10000059460 HD74017 ATTACHED DOC UMENT LINKED DIRECTLY UNDER A GA
GCO WHEN A DOCUMENT OF A WP IS LOCKED
VPMV5NAV : ASSOCIATIVITY ON ALL CATPART IS LOST
VPMV5NAV BR10000059622 HD74186 AFTER SECOND PVR SYNCHRONISE - ONLY WHEN GA
USING GERMAN USER INTERFACE
VPMV5NAV BR10000059793 HD74367 ADD TO ASSOCIATED PART LINKS NOT CREATED GA
VPMV5NAV : PVR SYNCHRONISE FAILS USING GERMAN
VPMV5NAV BR10000059805 HD74376 GA
USER INTERFACE.
PRODUCT EDITOR ATTRIBUTE TAB SHOWS
VPMV5NAV BR10000059806 HD74380 GA
SUBSTITUTES 2 BUT SUBSTITUTES TAB LISTS 1
VPMV5NAV : MODIFYING ONE INSTANCE UNDER A PRC
VPMV5NAV BR10000059864 HD74443 BY CHANGING ITS POSITION, ALL OTHER INSTANCES GA
ARE MARKED AS MODIFIED.
COMPUTED EFFECTIVITY UNDER 2ND LEVEL PART
VPMV5NAV BR10000060040 HD74625 GA
INSTANCE IS SHOWN AS OF 1ST LEVEL PART INSTANCE
VPMV5NAV : PVR SYNCHRONISE FAILURE ON A CUT
VPMV5NAV BR10000060094 HD74684 GA
SCENARIO.
WAVGDSGN BR10000056665 HD71046 BENDABLE WAVEGUIDE DOES NOT FOLLOW RUN GA
WHEN OPENING A GRAPH FOR A WORKFLOW PROCESS,
WFL_DES BR10000054886 HD69215 GA
THERE IS RUNTIME ERROR IN INTERNET EXPLORER
ENOVWPE : THE DISPLAY OF THE LINK INFORMATION
WFL_DES BR10000054944 HD69275 LOST BY IMPACT GRAPH AFTER USING THE RECONCILE GA
FUNCTION
ENOVWPE : UNABLE TO USE GLOBAL SET
FUNCTIONALITIES THROUGH THE RECONCILIATOR
WFL_DES BR10000056206 HD70573 GA
WHEN AN OBJECT IS SELECTED IN THE CATIA VIEW
WINDOW.
APPLICATION ACTIVITY IS ABORTED IF USER IS NOT
WFL_DES BR10000058090 HD72551 GA
THE OWNER OF THE ACTION
NO TYPE FOR CREATING PARTICIPANT DEFINITION IN
WFL_DES BR10000058422 HD72911 GA
WORKFLOW TEMPLATE DEFINITION
DIMENSION OF PLANE ANGLE IS SHOWED OPPOSITE
WRFRM BR10000056640 HD71018 GA
SIDE
Patents, Trademarks and Copyrights
CATIA, ENOVIA, DELMIA, SMARTEAM and the 3DS logo are registered trademarks
of Dassault Systèemes or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries and are
used under license by IBM.
CATIA software products are protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 5,615,321;
5,774,111; 5,821,941; 5,844,566; 6,233,351; 6,292,190; 6,360,357; 6,396,522;
6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,545,680; 6,573,896; 6,597,382; 6,654,011; 6,654,027;
6,717,597; 6,745,100; 6,762,778; 6,828,974; 6,904,392; 6,918,095; 6,993,461;
7,003,363; 7,016,821; other patents pending.
ENOVIA software products are protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 6,396,522;
6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,573,896; 6,597,382; 6,828,974; 6,993,461; other patents
pending.
ENOVIAVPM copyright Dassault Systèmes, 1998-2008, all rights reserved.
DELMIA® software products are protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 5,179,653;
5,844,562; 6,396,522; 6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,597,382; 6,762,778; 6,993,461; other
patents pending.
Any of the following terms may be used in this publication. These terms are trademarks or
registers trademarks of the owners mentioned in the right column:
Wildcat 3DLabs Inc.

ABB ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd Corp.
Switzerland
Adobe, Reader Adobe Systems Inc.
AMD, Opteron Advanced Micro Devices Inc.
Apache Apache Software Foundation
ATI, Radeon ATI Technologies Inc.
AutoCAD Autodesk Inc.
Compaq Compaq Trademark BV / Compaq
Information Technology Group
Autovue, Cimmetry Cimmetry
Dell, Precision Dell Inc.
Elsa Elsa Technology Inc.
Elsa Gloria Elsa GmbH llc
Metasearch Ex libris Inc.
Fujitsu Fujitsu Ltd
Celsius Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH
Hewlett-Packard, HP, HP-UX, HP 9000 Series 700 Hewlett-Packard Development
Company
ImpactXoft, IX Functional Modeling, IX ImpactXoft
Development, IX, IX Design, IXSPeeD, IX Speed
Connector, IX Advanced Rendering, IX
Interoperability Package, ImpactXoft Solver
Intel, Pentium, Xeon, Centrino, Intel Core Intel Corp.
IMSpost Intelligent Manufacturing Software
IBM, RISC System/6000, RS/6000, POWER, International Business Machines Corp.
POWER2, POWER3, POWER4, POWER4+, POWER5,
POWER5+, POWER6, POWER6+, AIX, DB2,
Websphere, PureCoverage, Rational, Rational Rose,
Purify, RETAIN, Domino, Lotus, Sametime,
IntelliStation
Iona, Orbix Iona Technologies plc
Lenovo Legend Limited Corporation China
ThinkPad Lenovo Pte (Singapore)
Logitech, Mouseware Logitech International SA
Strim Matra-Datavision SA
Microsoft, Visual Basic, Windows, Windows XP, Microsoft Corp.
Windows Vista, DirectX, Excel, Internet Explorer,
MSN, Visual Studio, Win32, Windows NT,
MKS, MKS Toolkit MKS Inc.
Firefox Mozilla Foundation
NEC NEC Corp.
Netscape, Netscape Navigator, Mozilla Netscape Communications Corp.
NVidia, GeForce NVidia Corp.
Oracle, SQL*NET Oracle International Corp.
Siemens Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Corp
SGI, Irix, Onyx, Silicon Graphics Fuel, Tezro, Silicon Graphics Inc.
OpenGL, Silicon Graphics, Silicon Graphics O2,
Silicon Graphics Octane
SolidWorks SolidWorks Corp.
Sun, Solaris, Sun Blade, Java, JVM, JDK, Ultra, Sun Microsystems
JavaBeans
Unix The Open Group
All other company names and product names mentioned are the property of their respective
owners.
Certain portions of this product contain elements subject to copyright owned by the
following entities:
Copyright © Dassault Systemes of America
Copyright © SmarTeam Corporation Ltd
Copyright © Spatial Corp.
Copyright © 1996-2000 Autonomy, Inc.

Copyright © Bitstream Inc.
Copyright © Boeing Company
Copyright © Cenit 1997-2000
Copyright © Cogito Inc.
Copyright © Compaq Computer Corporation
Copyright © D-Cubed Ltd., 1997-2000
Copyright © Distrim2 Lda, 2000
Copyright © GALAXIA 2004
Copyright © Gensym Corporation, 1997-1999
Copyright © Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2001
Copyright © IBM Corp.
Copyright © IBM Corporation 1994-2007. All rights reserved.
Copyright © ILOG, 2001
Copyright © 2001-2002 ImpactXoft. All rights reserved.
Copyright © Installshield Software Corp., 1990-2000
Copyright © Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique (INRIA)
Copyright © Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc., 2000
Copyright © Invention Machine Corporation
Copyright © IONA Technologies PLC
Copyright © ITI 1997-2000
Copyright © LightWork Design Limited 1995-2000
Copyright © LMS International 2000, 2001
Copyright © Mainsoft Corp.
Copyright © Mental Images Gmbh & Co KG, Berlin/Germany 1986-2000
Copyright © Microsoft Corporation
Copyright © NCCS 1997-2000
Copyright © 2002-2003 Novell, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © Oracle Corporation. All rights reserved.
Copyright © RogueWave Software Inc.
Copyright © SGI Silicon Graphics Inc.
Copyright © Silverstream Software Inc., 2000
Copyright © Tech Soft America
Copyright © Weber-Moewius, D-Siegen
Copyright © WindRiver AS 2000
Copyright © Xerox Engineering Systems
Copyright © SolidWorks Corporation, 2000. All rights reserved. Portions of this software and
related documentation are copyrighted by and are the property of Unigraphics Solutions.
Portions of the Software Products contained in this media include
Viewing Technology © Copyright 1993-2008 Cimmetry Systems, Inc. All
rights reserved. www.cimmetry.com.
CAM-POST ® Version 2001/14.0 © ICAM Technologies Corporation 1984-2001. All rights
reserved
The 2D/2.5D Display analysis function is based on LMS International technologies and have
been developed by LMS International
This software contains portions of Lattice Technology, Inc. software. Copyright © 1997-2004
Lattice Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001
Portions of this software and related documentation are copyrighted by and are the property
of Unigraphics Solutions.
Other portions of the Software Products belong to their respective owners.
Any use of the Software Products contained in this media, is subject to the LICENSED
SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS accompanying this media. The Software Products are
protected by international copyright laws and international treaties. Unauthorized use,
reproduction and/or distribution of any of the Software Products, or any part thereof, may
result in severe civil and/or criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum
extent possible under the law.
Copyright © 1999 - 2008, Dassault Systeèmes. All rights reserved.
Copyright 1997 - 2008, SmarTeam Corporation Ltd. All rights reserved.
Installing the Online Documentation After Installing
the Software
On Windows
This task explains how to install the online documentation after installing the code.
The online documentation is provided on a suite of CD-ROMs. Once the documentation files on the
first CD-ROM have been installed, you will be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM, and click OK to
continue the installation until you have inserted the last CD-ROM.
Note that you must install all the documentation CD-ROMs: you cannot, for example, install only
one out of the whole suite. If you click the Cancel button before installing the final CD-ROM, the
documentation files previously installed will be uninstalled.
Installing the Online Documentation On Your Computer
Follow this procedure if you did not install the documentation during the code unloading procedure.
Installing the online documentation is very similar to installing the Version 5 code.
1. Log onto your computer.
You need to have administrator privileges to install the online documentation.
2. Insert the CD-ROM.
Unlike when installing the software, the documentation installation procedure does not start
automatically.
3. Use the Windows Explorer to explore the documentation CD-ROM, and double-click the Setup.
exe program on the CD-ROM to start the installation.
Do not use "My Computer" to access the CD-ROM: this will not work.
From this point onwards, the installation procedure is the same as the online documentation
installation procedure within the code unloading phase. Refer to Installing the Online Documentation
for full details.
To access the documentation using your browser, locate and open the documentation homepage for
your product brand.
When installing additional documentation for the same version (or in another language), after the
Welcome dialog box, a dialog box lists the documentation you already installed. Clicking the Next
button will then display a list of preselected documentation reflecting the software you installed, but
the documentation already installed obviously does not appear in the list. The additional
documentation will be installed in the same folder.
Online documentation for all product brands is installed in the same location.
Uninstalling the Online Documentation
1. On the Windows desktop, select the Start > Control Panel, then double-click the Add/Remove
Programs control.
2. In the Change or Remove Programs dialog box, you can choose to uninstall the documentation.
This removes the documentation for all brands.
Note: you can install online documentation for different brands, but all in the same directory (and
not in different directories). Installing documentation for different brands in the same directory does
not stop you from selectively uninstalling the documentation for one brand: if you do so, the
documentation for the remaining brand remains intact.
Installing the Online Documentation on a Server
You may want to install the documentation files on a server to save disk space.
1. Install the documentation files on a computer as explained above.
2. Log onto another computer where there are no documentation files.
3. Select the Start > Programs > Windows Explorer command to run the Explorer.
4. Select Tools > Map Network Drive... and map the appropriate network drive before starting a
session.
5. Start a session and use one of the commands for obtaining help.
For example, press F1 for contextual help. A dialog box will prompt you to specify the online
documentation path.
6. In the dialog box, specify the path where the documentation is located.
Wherever you install the documentation, if you attempt to activate the sample documents from
within the online documentation without first installing the code, the samples will not work.
You can also access online documentation if it is installed on a http server (for example, Apache).
If you do so, in the Apache server configuration file (usually httpd.conf) replace the line:
#DefaultType text/plain
with the line:
DefaultType application/octet-stream
Note: The same type of MIME type configuration must be performed on other types of HTTP servers
on which online documentation is to be deployed.
On UNIX
This task explains how to install the online documentation after installing the code. On UNIX, you
cannot install the online documentation directly from within the code installation procedure (unlike
on Windows).
The online documentation is provided on a suite of CD-ROMs. Once the documentation files on the
first CD-ROM have been installed, you will be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM, and click OK to
continue the installation until you have inserted the last CD-ROM.
one out of the whole suite. If you click the Cancel button before installing the final CD-ROM, the
documentation files previously installed will be uninstalled.
Installing the Online Documentation On Your Computer
For illustration purposes, this section describes the installation of online documentation
for the CATIA product line. Note, however, that the principle is the same for all product
lines.
1. Logon as root.
2. Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive.
If you are running Solaris, inserting the CD-ROM declares and mounts the CD-ROM automatically
(unless you disabled this feature).
3. If you are running AIX or HP-UX, check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared.
On AIX, run the command:
lsdev -C -c cdrom
If a line like this is not displayed:
cd0 Available 00-01-00-30-CD-ROM Drive
you need to add the CD-ROM drive by using the smit AIX command, for example.
Then, check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted. If the CD-ROM drive is not mounted, you will
have to mount it before proceeding. You can determine if the drive has already been mounted by
typing the command:
mount
In the output lines, you should see a list of mounted file systems. The CD-ROM drive has already
been mounted on your local system if a line similar to one of the following lines appears in the list:
/dev/cd0 cdrom cdfrs "date" ro

where "date" is the current date.
Then, mount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, by typing the command:
mount -v cdrfs -r /dev/cd0 /cdrom
On HP-UX, run the command:
cat /etc/fstab
/dev/dsk/c201d1s0 /CDROM cdfs ro 0 0 0
you need to add the CD-ROM drive, by using the sam HP-UX command, for example.
Create an entry in /etc/pfs_fstab, for instance:
/dev/dsk/c0t0d0 /CDROM pfs-rrip ro,suid 0 0
Check if the pfs_mountd and pfsd daemons are running. If not, execute the commands:
/usr/sbin/pfs_mountd& and /usr/sbin/pfsd&
Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. Mount the CDROM with the command /usr/sbin/
pfs_mount, for example:
/usr/sbin/pfs_mount /CDROM
After installation, enter the command:
/usr/sbin/pfs_umount /CDROM
and then remove the CD-ROM.
4. On all UNIX platforms, change directory to the CD-ROM mount point.

5. Check that the DISPLAY variable is exported appropriately before continuing, then enter the
command:
./start
The V5Doc Setup program starts, then the Welcome dialog box appears:
When installing additional documentation for the same version (or in another language), after the
Welcome dialog box, a dialog box is displayed listing the documentation you already installed.
Clicking the Next button will then display a list of preselected documentation reflecting the software
you installed, but the documentation already installed obviously does not appear in the list. The
additional documentation will be installed in the same directory.
6. Click the Next button to proceed.
The Code Installation Folder dialog box appears:

You must specify whether CATIA is installed or not.
7. If it is not already checked, check the option CATIA P3 is installed to indicate that CATIA is
already installed, if this is the case.
8. If CATIA is already installed, the name of the installation folder will be detected and displayed.
If not, click the Browse... button, navigate to the installation folder, then double-click the folder
name and click OK.
The dialog box will now display the name of the installation folder. In this case, it is:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19
The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears:
The default folder in which the documentation will be installed is:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19doc
Note: you can install online documentation for different brands either in the same directory or in
different directories. Installing documentation for different brands in the same directory does not
stop you from selectively uninstalling the documentation for one brand: if you do so, the
documentation for the remaining brand remains intact.
10. Click the Browse... button to select a new folder if the default folder is not suitable, or click the
Next button to proceed.
The Select Documentation dialog box appears:

The setup program detects which products are installed and preselects the corresponding manuals
in the list, along with any additional prerequisite manuals.
Note that the BAS - Infrastructure and CFY - Common Functionalities documentation sets are
prerequisites for all other online documentation and are always installed, even if you do not select
them explicitly in the list.
This means that if you select the manual for a specific application (for example, PRT - Part Design),
both this manual and the associated prerequisite documentation will be installed.
At this stage, you can:

● deselect manuals in the list
● select additional manuals in the list
● toggle the All / Nothing button to select either all documentation or no documentation
respectively
● press the Reset button to return to the original list of preselected manuals.
11. Once your selection is final, click the Next button to proceed.
The Start Copying Files dialog box appears listing the online documentation you are about to
install:
12. Click the Install button to install the documentation.
Depending on your product line, the online documentation may be provided on a suite of up to five
CD-ROMs. Once the documentation files on the first CD-ROM have been installed, and depending on
which products you selected, you may be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM. In this case, click
OK to continue the installation until you have inserted the last CD-ROM.
one out of two. If you click the Cancel button before installing the final CD-ROM, the documentation
files previously installed will be uninstalled.
13. Once the documentation has been installed, click the Finish button in the Setup Complete
dialog box:
We recommend that you install the documentation in the default location. Note that installing the
online documentation in the default location updates the path of the CATDocView environment
variable using the online documentation installation path.
If you decide to install the documentation elsewhere than in the default location, you must update
the value for the CATDocView variable in your default environment to specify the location of the
documentation files. Otherwise, you will not be able to access the documentation.
To do so, use the setcatenv command to change the value of the CATDocView variable to point to
the location where the CD-ROM contents were copied. For more information, refer to Managing
Environments.
Using your browser, locate and open the documentation homepage for your product line.
Installing the Online Documentation on a Server

Copy the contents of the CD-ROM into a directory on the server with sufficient free disk space.
You set up a documentation server the same way as you set up a Version 5 code server. For more
information, refer to Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network.
You can also access online documentation if it is installed on a http server (for example, Apache).
If you do so, in the Apache server configuration file (usually httpd.conf) replace the line:
#DefaultType text/plain
with the line:

DefaultType application/octet-stream
Uninstalling Online Documentation

1. Logon as root.
2. Run the command:
rm -rf /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19doc
to remove the documentation directory.

Unloading Your Product Code on Windows
This task explains how to unload the CATIA Version 5 code from scratch on a single computer running a supported
Windows operating system and set up your nodelocked licenses.
If you want information about subjects such as:

● installing Version 5 on several computers
● setting up network licensing
refer to Distributing Code and Licensing.
Installation and de-installation rely on Windows-compliant tools enabling anyone familiar with Windows procedures and
concepts to install the software without assistance.
Before starting the installation, check you have all the hardware and software prerequisites.
Furthermore, to prevent the installation from hanging due to concurrently running programs such as screen savers or
virus scanning programs, we recommend that you first shut down any such programs.
You must also have your license enrollment certificate (in electronic format) provided by your vendor. If you have the
certificate, you will be able to register your license during the installation procedure.
Note also that, if an IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM) license server is running on the computer on which you
are installing Version 5, you must stop the server before starting the installation.
Installation Log
An installation log will be created in the current temporary directory, in one of the following locations:
● The path specified by the TMP environment variable
● The path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined
● The path specified by the USERPROFILE environment variable, if TEMP is not defined
in a file named:
cxinst.log
If not created in any of these locations, it will be created here:
C:\cxinst.log
The following lines are added at the beginning of the installation log:
32-bit installation of PRODUCT_LINE on Windows XP | Windows XP 64-bit
or:
64-bit installation of PRODUCT_LINE on Windows XP 64-bit
where PRODUCT_LINE is the name of the product line you are installing.
How To Display the Target ID of Your Computer Before Ordering Your Products
Before ordering a nodelock license, you need to obtain the target ID of your computer. The target ID must accompany
the license order. The license certificate is generated using the target ID of your computer.
Before installing the software, the application has no way of determining the target ID. In this case, if you have installed
IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM), you can use the tools provided by LUM to obtain the target id.
For example, you can run the command:
i4target -O
located in:
C:\ifor\win\bin
How To Display the Target ID of Your Computer Once You Have Received the CD-ROM
There are two executable programs provided on the CD-ROM:

● i4target.exe (Intel platform)
● i4tgtid.exe (Intel platform).
The latest versions of each can be found at:
If you double-click on i4tgtid.exe, a message box displaying the win32mac target ID of the machine will be presented.
The target id is a number represented in hexadecimal notation. Make sure that the string win32mac is also displayed
alongside with the target id.
Depending on the network configuration of your machine, the win32mac target ID might not be available. This is when
i4target.exe in command-line mode is needed:
1. Open a Command Prompt window and set the directory to your CD-ROM drive.
2. Run:
i4target -z
This will list network adapters that can be used for the target ID.
3. Run:
i4target -d xxx
where "xxx" is one the network adapters listed in step 2.
4. Run:
i4target
or:
i4tgtid
You should obtain the same target ID as in step 2.
NOTE: Do not repeat step 2 once you have a valid win32mac target ID.
The Target ID of your computer is also displayed:

● in the Import Certificate dialog box when installing the software
● at the top of the License Manager dialog box, access via the Tools > Options... command when running the
application
● by the Nodelock Management tool, from the
Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools menu.
Installing the Version 5 Files

You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group.
Otherwise, you will not be able to start the installation.
A normal installation on a machine without a previous LUM environment creates the following directory if you
import a license during the installation:
COMMON_APPDATA\IBM\LUM
which is typically:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\LUM
If the following file:
C:\ifor\Ls\Conf\Nodelock
already exists on your machine and you import a nodelock license during the installation, this nodelock file will be
updated during the installation.
Note: if a nodelock file exists in both locations, the file:
will be used. To avoid problems, we recommend that you use ONLY ONE nodelock file in the following directory:
The following dialog box then appears before the installation (on the x86 platform):
while the VC8 runtime prerequisite is being installed. Dassault Systemes Software Prerequisites x86 (or x64)
contains the Microsoft Visual C++ Runtime files needed by the Dassault Systemes software.
Note that on a 64-bit platform, x86 is replaced by x64. In the Add/Remove Programs control, the item
Dassault Systemes Software Prerequisites x86 (or x64) appears like this:
The Welcome dialog box is then displayed on a background window. Note that the screenshots illustrating the
installation procedure were taken without the background window:
3. Click the Next button to move to the next step.
The V5R19 License dialog box for your product brand appears, asking you if you want to enter a nodelock license
key for the computer on which you are installing the software.
Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed after the dialog
box title.
4. If you want to enter a nodelock license, click the Import Nodelock License button to access the Import
Certificate dialog box.
This dialog box lets you import the license certificate (that is, if you received your license certificate by electronic
mail, and provided you detached it and stored it on your disk).
5. Explore your environment containing the license certificate (ending with the suffix .lic), then click Open.
This creates a nodelock file on your computer, and stores your license by default in the nodelock file in:
C:\ifor\Ls\Conf\nodelock
if this file exists already.
If the nodelock file is new, it will be created in:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\IBM\LUM\Nodelock
If you already installed LUM elsewhere, the nodelock file will be updated in the correct LUM environment.
If you decide to skip the licensing step, or if you have a license enrollment certificate in paper format only (and not
in electronic format), you can enroll your licenses later, after the installation has been completed. For more
information, refer to Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation.
The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears. The default destination folder:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19
is the same if you are installing:

❍ 32-bit code on Windows XP
❍ 64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition.
However, if you are installing 32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the default destination folder is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19
Note that the next level folder for 32-bit code on Windows XP is still:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a
but if you are installing 64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the default destination folder is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64
However, if you are installing 32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the default destination folder is:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a
Note: throughout the rest of this guide, the installation path will be described like this:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a (Windows XP Pro)
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64 (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
7. If the default destination folder is suitable, click the Next button to move to the next step, or click the Browse...
button and navigate to select another folder and click OK.
The folder you choose must be empty. You can also specify a new folder: if the folder does not exist, you will be
prompted to specify that you want the folder to be created, in which case you must click the Yes button to create
the folder.
Installing Several Identical Releases in Different Locations on the Same Computer
Providing you have enough disk space, you can install several identical releases in different locations on the same
computer.
For example, you may want to install the same V5R19 GA release in two places. Your first installation could be, for
example, the production version. Then, once a V5R19 service pack becomes available, you could apply it to the
second installation which would then become the test version, enabling you to test it before it becomes the official
production version.
Furthermore, the different releases you can install can belong either to the same product line, or to different
product lines. For example, you could install CATIA V5R19 and DELMIA V5R19 in different locations.
To install another identical release, when you reach the Choose Destination Location dialog box, this time click the
Browse... button, specify the new destination folder, then click OK. You will be prompted to create the folder if it
does not already exist, so click Yes.
Click Next to display the dialog box entitled Enter Ident for your new installation:
Enter an identifier which will enable you to identify all the components of your new installation. The string must
contain uppercase characters or numbers, and must not exceed 20 characters.
The identifier for your new installation is preceded by an underscore and is visible:
❍ in the environment name
❍ in the appropriate registry entries
❍ in the Start > (All) Programs > MyProductLine menu, and new entries for the corresponding tools are
created in the Start > (All) Programs > MyProductLine > Tools menu
❍ in the Add/Remove Programs control.
If identical releases belonging to the same product line are installed, the OLE behavior is the same for both.
However, if the installations involve different product lines, the OLE behavior registered for the last installation
takes priority.
Note also that two identical product lines installed in different locations share the same nodelocked license: no new
license is needed for the second installation.
The Choose Environment Location dialog box appears:

A default destination folder is already proposed:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv
9. If the default folder is suitable, click the Next button to move to the next step, or click the Browse... button and
navigate to select another folder and click OK.
You can choose any folder, or specify a new folder: if the folder does not exist, you will be prompted to specify that
you want the folder to be created, in which case you must click the Yes button to create the folder.
For more about environment files, refer to About the Environment Created on Your Computer on Windows.
The Setup Type dialog box appears:

This dialog box lets you specify whether you want to install all of the software on the CD-ROM, or select the
configurations and/or products to be installed:
❍ Complete: specifies you want to install all the software, and moves on to the next installation step (installation
of online documentation files) when you click Next
❍ Custom: lets you choose the configurations and/or products to be installed.
11. If you want to choose which configurations and/or products to install, check the Custom option and click the Next
button to move to the next step.
The Install Language-Specific File and Fonts dialog box appears:
Check the buttons to install the user interface files for the appropriate language(s) and/or to install language-
indexed fonts. Uncheck the buttons for the language files you do not want to install. This will let you skip the
installation of unnecessary language files and fonts and enable you to save disk space.
The following language-indexed fonts are all installed by default:

❍ Simplified Chinese
❍ Traditional Chinese
❍ Japanese
❍ Korean
❍ SSS4 (miscellaneous).
If you intend to access data containing language-indexed fonts for a specific language environment, for example,
drawing documents, if you have not installed the fonts beforehand, you will obtain a message when opening the
document, saying that a font is missing and that it will be replaced by another font.
To avoid this problem, we recommend that you check the option to install the language-indexed fonts.
Russian fonts are not removed. If you uncheck Language-indexed fonts, only SICH.font, TRCH.font , KANJ.font,
KOHG.font and SSS4.font.
Note that the choice you make at installation is definitive: you cannot add or remove languages or fonts later when
installing additional configurations and/or products.
The Select Software dialog box appears:
13. Choose whether you want to install configurations and/or products by using the list box provided.
Depending on what you chose, the list will display the names of all the configurations or products on the CD-ROM.
14. Click on the configurations and/or products to select them.
In our example, we chose to install the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 configuration and the MD2 - CATIA -
Mechanical Design 2 configuration:
The dialog box specifies the space available for the installation. Clicking on each configuration or product also
specifies the amount of space required for installing those configurations or products; the space required is updated
progressively as you select from the list.
Depending on the configurations and/or products you chose, the Install Extra Products dialog box may appear:
An extra product is a standard product associated with certain configurations and products. You can choose to
install or not to install an extra product.
For more information, refer to Extra Products.

17. If your configuration requires you to configure Orbix, the Choose Orbix Configuration dialog box appears:
Leave the default values as is for Orbix.
Note that the default values are set to 1570/1590/200. If CATIA or DMU have been installed previously, these
values are already taken. If this is the case, use different values than the CATIA and DMU port numbers.
For Port Number for Orbix daemon, the default is 1570. A check is performed to determine if the port is free. If
it is not free, the port number proposed is incremented by "1" until a free port is found.
For Starting port number for daemon-run servers, the default is 1590. No check is performed to determine if
the port is free. If it is not free, the port number proposed is incremented by "20".
The installation procedure checks that the administrator performing the installation has the correct privileges
required for running Orbix and the server manager. Note that the option Add required privileges for current
user is grayed out, which means that the privileges are correct. If the privileges are not correct, the option will be
accessible. Check the option before proceeding with the installation to add the required privileges to the
administrator user performing the installation. If not, the installation will fail.
Server Timeout
The Server Timeout Configuration dialog box is displayed if your configuration uses servers run by the server
manager:
This value corresponds to the duration in ms after which the server exits if it has not been contacted by the
associated client.
You enter a value in minutes, then the value is internally transformed into ms and stored in the
CATIAServerManager.imp file. When launching a server under its responsibility, the server manager passes the
timeout value to it. The default value is 60 mn. The value can be increased up to 35.700 mn (1 month). The value
can be decreased down to 2 mn. The increment is 1 mn.
This behavior is valid for all servers run by the server manager: ENOVIA V5 VPM, 3dcom, and the settings server
for example. Only servers managed by the server manager take into account the timeout parameter. For example,
the workbook server is not impacted by the timeout value.
You can customize this value by editing the SERVER_TIMEOUT parameter in the appropriate file after the
installation and setting it to a value different from the default one (1 hour).
Modifying Server Timeouts
This task explains how to modify the timeout of the ENOVIA V5 VPM, 3d com and Settings servers. Note that the
Settings server is common to both ENOVIA V5 VPM and 3d com. You can control the timeout settings either
globally or individually for each server.
Controlling the Timeout of all Servers
To control the timeout of all servers globally, add the following line:
export SERVER_TIMEOUT=<value in milliseconds>
to the beginning of the file:
$install_path\code\command\runServerManager
Note: The default value is 3600000 milliseconds. The maximum value is 2142000000 milliseconds.
All processes started by the server manager then inherit the same environment.
Controlling the Timeout of Servers Individually
You can override the timeout value defined in the runServerManager file to control the timeout of servers
individually.
To control the Settings server timeout, add the following line:

$install_path\code\command\runServerSettingEnv
Note: The maximum value is 2142000000 milliseconds.
To control the ENOVIA V5 VPM server timeout, add the following line:
$install_path\code\command\runServerVPM_CXR1.sh
To control the 3d com server timeout, add the following line:
$install_path\code\command\runServerCXEnv.sh

The Vault Client Configuration dialog box is displayed.
When installing a Version 5 product which contains a potential vault client, this dialog box prompts you to indicate
if you want to configure a vault client once the code has been installed. If you choose to configure a vault client,
you will be prompted to do so in another dialog box which will be displayed before the PLMDBSetup process is
started.
After installation, you can run the VaultClientSetup command in order to catalog another vault server, modify the
parameters of an existing one, or remove an existing one. The VaultClientSetupB command provides the same
functionalities in batch mode.
Note: you can only install a vault server by using a configuration belonging to the ENOVIA V5 VPM brand.
For more detailed information about the vault, refer to Installing Vault Servers and Clients.
20. Check the appropriate option if you want to set up the vault client at the end of the installation.
The Choose Communications Ports dialog box is displayed:
This allows you to set up on your computer:

❍ a port reserved for the communications backbone process
❍ a port reserved for starting the communications backbone process automatically
❍ a port reserved for processing events when using peripheral devices (spaceball, spacemouse, joystick).
By default, the "Set up communication ports" option is checked because it is strongly recommended.
A backbone daemon is created as a service and started. You can monitor the daemon by selecting
Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. The name of the service is Backbone Service.
The name of the executable program that corresponds to the backbone service is CATSysDemon.exe, which you can
track using the Task Manager.
This installation step adds three lines to a system file. For more information about the communications backbone
and which file is concerned, refer to Communications Backbone Files. The installation setup then analyses the file in
question. If the three lines are present (for example, due to a previous installation), the dialog box will not appear.
Furthermore, if the backbone service is already running, it is stopped then restarted. You can check which services
are running by selecting the Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools command and selecting the
Services control.
The Shortcut Creation dialog box appears:

This dialog box gives you the choice whether to create:
❍ a startup icon on the desktop
❍ a startup shortcut in the Start menu
❍ entries in the Start menu for the administration tools.
Not installing the desktop shortcuts allows you to minimize the number of registry entries during the installation.
Check the appropriate options.
The Select CATIA V5R19 Documentation dialog box appears:
23. Check the I want to install Online Documentation check box only if you want to install the online
documentation during the code installation procedure: this choice is optional.
If you check this box, you will be prompted later on in the installation (after the software has been copied to your
computer) to remove the code CD-ROM and insert the first documentation CD-ROM.
24. Clicking the Next button displays the Start Copying Files dialog box.
The central area lists the current settings you set in the previous steps:
❍ configuration and product names and documentation
❍ destination folder.
The result looks something like this (depending on which software you chose to install).
Note that the dialog box reflects our choice to install the MD2 - CATIA - Mechanical Design 2 Configuration and the
DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 configuration:
There is nothing to prevent you from installing all the configurations and products on the CD-ROM. However, you
will be able to use only the software for which you have enrolled licenses, except if you are using a demo mode
license as explained in Running in Demo Mode.
With Windows XP Professional 32-bit operating systems, if LUM is already installed on your machine, and the LUM
license server has been started, you will be prompted to stop the LUM server before proceeding. If you choose not
to stop the LUM server, the installation will be stopped.
25. Click the Install button to start copying the files to your computer.
A progression indicator appears, and an animated sequence starts showing you some of the products that you will
be able to create with the software.
Warning: During the installation, and depending on the configuration, an Orbix daemon may be installed and a
Server Manager is registered on the daemon. On Windows systems, and specifically machines running Windows XP
SP2, this call can trigger a Windows Security alert, giving a registered domain name on the machine, because it is
occurring on a non-HTTP port with an unknown application. The connection is harmless for client systems.
However, the installation may not terminate successfully.
What typically happens is that the following dialog box appears:

If this is the case, click the Unblock button to continue the installation.
Furthermore, when you start the application, if dialog boxes like the following appear:
for CATIA or ENOVMetaSearch (if you enabled the metasearch proxy), click the Unblock button again to continue.
To prevent this problem from occurring, you can deactivate the Windows Firewall. For instructions about how to
deactivate the firewall, refer to the Microsoft documentation.
26. If you indicated earlier that you want to set up a vault client, the Vault Client Setup dialog box appears:
27. Click the Add... button to display the following dialog box:
28. Specify the Vault alias name, server hostname and Orbix daemon port, then click OK.
This information is added to the VaultClient.properties file.
The Vault Client Setup dialog box is now updated like this:
29. Use the Modify... and Delete... buttons to modify or delete the selected configuration.
For more detailed information about the vault, refer to Setting Up Vault Servers and Clients.
30. Click the Close button to continue.
Installing the Online Documentation

Once the files have been copied, and only if you decided to install the online documentation, the Enter
Documentation CD-ROM dialog box appears:
31. Click Next to install the documentation.
If you have several online documentation CD-ROMs (one for each supported language), you can only install one of
these CD-ROMs at this stage of the installation.
If you do not want to install the online documentation immediately, press the Cancel button. You can always install
it later. For more information, refer to Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Software.
For illustration purposes, this section describes the installation of online documentation for the CATIA
product line. Note, however, that the principle is the same for all product lines.
The documentation describing the interface between CATIA and SmarTeam is located on the SmarTeam
documentation media CD-ROM.
32. If you still want to install the online documentation, remove the product CD-ROM from the drive, insert the first
online documentation CD-ROM for your language (or browse to the documentation folder), and click OK to restart
the Setup program, this time to install the online documentation files.
Note that the dialog box also provides a path for specifying another drive or folder from which you can install the
online documentation. The default path is the drive name (usually C:) on the computer from which you are
performing the installation.
Modifying this path is useful if:

❍ you already inserted the online documentation CD-ROM into another drive
❍ you copied the online documentation files from the online documentation CD-ROM to a folder. The advantage of
installing from a folder is that you will not be prompted to change CD-ROMs if the documentation you are
installing is distributed on several CD-ROMs.
If this is the case, click the Browse... button and specify the appropriate drive or folder. Select the folder named
"disk1", then click OK.
The following dialog box appears:
The Welcome dialog box appears:

33. Click Next to proceed.
The Code Installation Folder dialog box appears:
If CATIA is not installed, make sure that the CATIA P3 is not installed button is checked before proceeding.
If CATIA is installed, check the CATIA P3 is installed button and enter the installation path, or click the
Browse... button and navigate to select the path:
The Existing installation folders field lists the code installations detected on your machine.
34. In both cases, click the Next button to proceed.
The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears:
The default folder in which the documentation in English will be installed is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19doc\English
35. Click the Browse... button to select a new folder if the default folder is not suitable, or click the Next button to
proceed.
The default folder in which the documentation in English will be installed is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19doc\English
Click the Browse... button to select a new folder if the default folder is not suitable.
The Select Documentation dialog box appears.
If CATIA has been installed, the setup program detects which products are installed. Move the scrollbar up or down
to see the manuals:
If CATIA P3 has not been installed, all the manuals in the list will be preselected:
The list contains all the manuals related to the configurations you installed, along with any additional prerequisite
documentation. Note that the BAS - Infrastructure and CFY - Common Functionalities documentation sets are
prerequisites for all other online documentation and are always installed.
This means that if you select the manual for a specific application (for example, PRT - Part Design), both this
manual and the associated prerequisite documentation will be installed.
At this stage, you can:

❍ deselect manuals in the list
❍ select additional manuals in the list
❍ toggle the All / Nothing button to select either all documentation or no documentation respectively
❍ press the Reset button to return to the original list of preselected manuals.
37. Once your selection is final, click the Install button to install the documentation.
The Start Copying Files dialog box appears listing the online documentation you are about to install:
A progress bar is displayed:
Depending on your product line, the online documentation may be provided on a suite of up to six CD-ROMs. Once
the documentation files on the first CD-ROM have been installed, and depending on which products you selected,
you may be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM. In this case, click OK to continue the installation until you have
inserted the last CD-ROM.
Note that you must install all the documentation CD-ROMs: you cannot, for example, install only one out of two. If
you click the Cancel button before installing the final CD-ROM, the documentation files previously installed will be
uninstalled.
If you interrupt the installation, the documentation files will be uninstalled automatically. If the uninstallation has
already started, the message:
Uninstallation is running. Please wait...
appears. It will disappear once the uninstallation is completed. So you must wait for the end of the uninstallation
before trying to reinstall the documentation.
38. Once the online documentation files have been copied, the Setup Complete dialog box informs you that the
installation has been completed:
If you have already installed documentation for several brands, one line will appear for each product brand when
you select the Start > Settings > Control Panel and double-click the Add/Remove Programs control to access
the Install/Uninstall dialog box, for example:
Dassault Systemes Doc English CATIA P3 B19
Note that installing the online documentation updates the path of the CATDocView environment variable using the
online documentation installation path.
39. To exit the documentation installation phase, click the Finish button.
A dialog box informs you that the setup procedure has finished installing Version 5 on your computer, and prompts
you to launch your product now. To do so, click the Finish button.
For example, for CATIA it looks like this:
Furthermore, installing CATIA also automatically installs Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), Version 6.0.
However, note that VBA is supported on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition with Version 5 32-bit code.
The Setup Complete dialog box will then appear, informing you that you must restart your computer, otherwise you
will not be able to run Version 5.
40. To restart, leave the default setting "Yes, I want to restart my computer now" and click the Finish button to restart
your computer now.
If you do not want to restart your computer now, click the option "No, I will restart my computer later" then click
the Finish button. But you will not be able to run Version 5.
If Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) Version 6.0 is already installed, a different dialog box will appear
prompting you to click the Finish button, this time to start a Version 5 session now.
41. After restarting, you must then relog onto the computer using the same administrator logon, then start Version 5.
Importance of Setting IT_LOCAL_DOMAIN Variable for ENOVIA V5 VPM
The IT_LOCAL_DOMAIN variable located (in a default installation) in the files:
install_path\startup\orbix\Orbix.cfg
install_path\startup\orbix\config\common.cfg
references the network domain in which the machine is operating. For any networked machine, this variable should have
a value. This value is determined by system calls at during the automatic post-installation phase, reading the value from
the registry on Windows, for example.
The local domain value which is queried during installation is written in both file locations Orbix.cfg and config\common.
cfg. When manually submitted, this value must be included in both files.
As specified in the Orbix documentation, both the CATIA client and the ENOVIA server in the context of an ENOVIA V5
VPM installation must reference the same IT_LOCAL_DOMAIN value in order to be able to communicate correctly. If not,
the CORBA communication cannot be guaranteed to occur without error. Moreover, when the post-installation process is
running, an error occurs when the network domain can not be determined. This information concerns Orbix 3.0.1 and
Orbix 3.3.
Installing Multiple Versions of Version 5 on the Same Computer

You can install several levels of Version 5 on the same computer, for example V5R16 and V5R19.
However, all levels point by default to the same settings environment. This can lead to a problem because downward
compatibility of settings is not guaranteed: only upward compatibility is guaranteed. For example, if you first work on the
V5R17 level, then work on the V5R19 level, V5R19 will be able to read and use your V5R17 settings. However, working
first on V5R19 then on V5R17 with the same settings will lead to problems.
To avoid such problems, we recommend, for example, when you install the latest level of Version 5, that you customize
the values of the CATUserSettingPath environment variable (and the CATReferenceSettingPath variable if necessary).
We also recommend that you set different settings for the CATTemp and CATErrorLog variables.
The objective is to have the runtime environment for each level pointing to its own settings.
Furthermore, you can only have one OLE link. This means that when you double-clicking on a Version 5 document using
the Windows Explorer, for example, you will not be able to choose the level to run: the last level that you installed is run
(in other words, if you installed V5R17 after V5R19, then V5R17 will be run).
This limitation is due to the operating system, not to Version 5. You can change which level you want to associate as
follows:
1. Log on as administrator.
2. Open a command prompt window.
3. Go to the folder containing the level of Version 5 you want to run when double-clicking Version 5 documents, then
to the \code\bin folder.
4. Run the following command once only:
cnext /regserver
Unloading Your Product Code on UNIX
This task explains how to unload the CATIA Version 5 code from scratch on a single workstation running UNIX.
The concepts, procedures and look and feel of the installation procedure for Windows have been carried over to the UNIX environment in
order to provide a common Version 5 installation interface for all supported operating systems.
This installation procedure steps you through a CATIA installation, for illustration purposes. The installation steps are the same
for installing ENOVIA DMU Navigator and DELMIA configurations.
Before starting the installation, check you have all the hardware and software prerequisites.
How To Display the Target ID of Your Computer Before Ordering Your Products
Before ordering a nodelock license, you need to obtain the target ID of your computer. The target id must accompany the license order. The
Certificat.lic file is generated using the target ID of your computer.
Before installing the software, the application has no way of determining the target ID. In this case, if you have installed IBM License Use
Management Runtime (LUM), you can use the tools provided by LUM to obtain the target ID.
For example, you can run the following command to obtain the "PREFERRED LUM Target ID":
i4target -O
located in:
/usr/opt/ifor/ls/os/aix/lum (AIX)
/opt/lum/ls/os/hpux/bin (HP-UX)
/opt/lum/ls/os/solaris/bin (Solaris)
The Target ID of your computer is also displayed:

● in the "Import Certificate" dialog box when installing the software
● at the top of the License Manager dialog box, access via the Tools > Options... command when running the application
● by the Nodelock Management tool.
Officially Supported Tools for Obtaining Target IDs
On AIX, the CATNodelockMgt tool displays a target ID different from what is displayed by the uname -m AIX command. This command is not
the correct way for getting the AIX target ID. Given that it has never been documented, it is not supported. The correct ways are listed above.
Note that, by chance, the results obtained by running both the uname -m and i4target -O command were identical until V5R10 or LUM 4.6.5.
This is no longer the case on subsequent levels because IBM LUM changed the algorithm which is used to compute the AIX target ID.
However, even if V5R11 displays an AIX target ID different from the one displayed by V5R10, for backward compatibility reasons V5R11 and
above continue to consider as valid the licenses generated with a target ID equal to that obtained by running the command uname -m. This
compatibility will be removed in a future release.
Additional information about obtaining target IDs can be found in the description of the i4target command in the manual Using License Use
Management Runtime.
Phase 1: Mount and Declare the CD-ROM

Note: before proceeding, you must first must create a filesystem into which the ENOVIA V5 VPM product files will be unloaded (the filesystem
must be dedicated to ENOVIA V5).
1. Logon as root.
2. Enter the command:
df -k
in order to verify that you have enough free disk space in the file system in which you intend to unload the code.
3. Insert the CD-ROM for your UNIX operating system into the drive.
If the software is on a suite of CD-ROMs, insert the first CD-ROM.
If you are running Solaris, inserting the CD-ROM declares and mounts the CD-ROM automatically (unless you disabled this feature).
If you are running AIX or HP-UX, check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared.
On AIX, run the command:
lsdev -C -c cdrom
cd0 Available 00-01-00-30-CD-ROM Drive
you need to add the CD-ROM drive by using the smit AIX command, for example.
On HP-UX, run the command:
cat /etc/fstab
/dev/dsk/c201d1s0 /CDROM cdfs ro 0 0 0
you need to add the CD-ROM drive, by using the sam HP-UX command, for example.
If you are running Solaris, inserting the CD-ROM declares and mounts the CD-ROM automatically (unless you disabled this feature).
4. If you are running AIX and HP-UX, check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted.
If the CD-ROM drive is not mounted, you will have to mount it before proceeding. You can determine if the drive has already been
mounted by typing the command:
mount
In the output lines, you should see a list of mounted file systems. The CD-ROM drive has already been mounted on your local system if
a line similar to one of the following lines appears in the list:
❍ /dev/cd0 cdrom cdfrs "date" ro (AIX)
❍ cdrom on device readonly on "date" (HP-UX)
where "date" is the current date.

5. If you are running AIX and HP-UX, mount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary, by typing the commands:
mount -v cdrfs -r /dev/cd0 /cdrom
If you are running HP-UX, mount the CD-ROM drive like this:
mount /cdrom
You are now ready to begin the installation.

6. On all UNIX platforms, change directory to the CD-ROM mount point.
Phase 2: Unload the Files From the CD-ROM

7. Check that the DISPLAY variable is exported appropriately before continuing, then enter the command:
./start
to start the installation procedure.
The start command checks you have the correct prerequisites. Then, the Version 5 setup program is run and the Welcome dialog box
greets you. The setup program invokes a full self-explanatory graphical interface which walks you through the installation.
The Welcome dialog box is then displayed on a background window. Note that the screenshots illustrating the installation procedure
were taken without the background window:
The License dialog box appears, asking you if you want to enter a nodelock license key for the computer on which you are installing
the software.
Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed after the dialog box title.
If you want to enter a nodelock license, click the Import Certificate button to access the Import Certificate dialog box.
This dialog box lets you import the license certificate (that is, if you received your license certificate by electronic mail, and provided
you detached it and stored it on your disk).
Explore your environment containing the license certificate (ending with the suffix ".LIC"), then click OK.
This creates a nodelock file on your computer, and stores your license by default in the nodelock file on all UNIX platforms in:
/var/ifor/nodelock (AIX)
/opt/lum/ls/conf/nodelock (HP-UX, Solaris)
If you decide to skip the licensing step, or if you have a license enrollment certificate in paper format only (and not in electronic
format), you can enroll your licenses later, after the installation has been completed. For more information, refer to Enrolling Nodelock
Licenses After the Installation.
The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears. A default destination folder is already proposed:
10. If the default destination directory is suitable, click the Next button to move to the next step.
Click Yes if prompted to create the directory if it does not exist. Or, click the Browse... button and navigate to select another folder
and click OK.
The folder you choose must be empty. You can also specify a new folder: the folder will be created after confirmation.
The Choose Environment Location dialog box appears:

A default destination folder is already proposed:
/CATEnv
12. If the default directory is suitable, click the Next button to move to the next step, or click the Browse... button and navigate to select
another folder and click OK.
You can also specify a new folder: the directory will be created after confirmation.
For more about environment files, refer to About the Environment Created on Your Workstation on UNIX.
The Setup Type dialog box appears:

This dialog box lets you specify whether you want to install all of the software on the CD-ROM, or select the configurations and/or
products to be installed:
❍ Complete: specifies you want to install all the software, and moves on to the next installation step (installation of online
documentation files) when you click Next
❍ Custom: lets you choose the configurations and/or products to be installed.
14. If you want to choose which configurations and/or products to install, check the Custom option and click the Next button to move to
the next step.
The Install Language-Specific File and Fonts dialog box appears:

Check the buttons to install the user interface files for the appropriate language(s) and/or to install language-indexed fonts. Uncheck
the buttons for the language files you do not want to install. Uncheck the buttons for the language files you do not want to install. This
will let you skip the installation of unnecessary language files and fonts and enable you to save disk space.
The following language-indexed fonts are all installed by default:

❍ Simplified Chinese
❍ Traditional Chinese
❍ Japanese
❍ Korean
❍ SSS4 (miscellaneous).
If you intend to access data containing language-indexed fonts for a specific language environment, for example, drawing documents, if
you have not installed the fonts beforehand, you will obtain a message when opening the document, saying that a font is missing and
that it will be replaced by another font.
To avoid this problem, we recommend that you check the option to install the language-indexed fonts.
Note that the choice you make at installation is definitive: you cannot add or remove languages or fonts later when installing additional
configurations and/or products.
The Select Software dialog box appears:
By default, the list of all the configurations on the CD-ROM is displayed.

16. Choose whether you want to install configurations and/or products by using the list box provided.
Depending on what you chose, the list will display the names of all the configurations or products on the CD-ROM.
17. Click on the configurations and/or products to select them.
The selected configurations and/or products are listed in the Selected Software list.
In our example, we chose to install the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 and MD2 - CATIA - Mechanical Design 2 configurations:
The dialog box specifies the space available for the installation. Clicking on each configuration or product also specifies the amount of
space required for installing those configurations or products; the space required is updated progressively as you select from the list.
At this stage, and depending on the space required for the configurations you are installing, you may be informed that there is not
enough space in the destination directory. If so, go back and choose another destination directory where this enough space.
There is nothing to prevent you from installing all the configurations and products on the CD-ROM. However, you will be able to use
only the software for which you have enrolled licenses, except if you are using a demo mode license as explained in Running in Demo
Mode.
Depending on the configurations and/or products you chose, the Install Extra Products dialog box may appear:
An extra product is a standard product associated with certain configurations and products. You can choose to install or not to install an
extra product.
For more information, refer to Extra Products.
If your configuration requires you to configure Orbix, the Choose Orbix Configuration dialog box appears.
Orbix is used for server-client communications. You can accept the default values.
Note that the default values are set to 1570/1590/200. If CATIA or DMU have been installed previously, these values are already taken.
If this is the case, use different values than the CATIA and DMU port numbers.
For Port Number for Orbix daemon, the default is 1570. A check is performed to determine if the port if free. If it is not free, the
port number proposed is incremented by "1" until a free port is found.
For Starting port number for daemon-run servers, the default is 1590. No check is performed to determine if the port if free. If it is
not free, the port number proposed is incremented by "20".
Check the option Boot Orbix daemon at restart if you want the Orbix daemon to be restarted the next time you reboot your
workstation.
The Server Timeout Configuration dialog box is displayed if your configuration uses servers run by the server manager:
This value corresponds to the duration in ms after which the server exits if it has not been contacted by the associated client.
You enter a value in minutes, then the value is internally transformed into ms and stored in the CATIAServerManager.imp file. When
launching a server under its responsibility, the server manager passes the timeout value to it. The default value is 60 mn. The value
can be increased up to 35.700 mn (1 month). The value can be decreased down to 2 mn. The increment is 1 mn.
This behavior is valid for all servers run by the server manager: ENOVIA V5 VPM, 3dcom, and the settings server for example. Only
servers managed by the server manager take into account the timeout parameter. For example, the workbook server is not impacted
by the timeout value.
You can customize this value by editing the SERVER_TIMEOUT parameter in the appropriate file after the installation and setting it to a
value different from the default one (1 hour).
Modifying Server Timeouts
This task explains how to modify the timeout of the ENOVIA V5 VPM, 3d com and Settings servers. Note that the Settings server is
common to both ENOVIA V5 VPM and 3d com. You can control the timeout settings either globally or individually for each server.
Controlling the Timeout of all Servers
To control the timeout of all servers globally, add the following line:

$install_path/code/command/runServerManager
Note: The default value is 3600000 milliseconds. The maximum value is 2142000000 milliseconds.
All processes started by the server manager then inherit the same environment.
Controlling the Timeout of Servers Individually
You can override the timeout value defined in the runServerManager file to control the timeout of servers individually.
To control the Settings server timeout, add the following line:
$install_path/code/command/runServerSettingEnv
To control the ENOVIA V5 VPM server timeout, add the following line:
$install_path/code/command/runServerVPM_CXR1.sh
To control the 3d com server timeout, add the following line:
$install_path/code/command/runServerCXEnv.sh

The Vault Client Configuration dialog box is displayed.
When installing a Version 5 product which contains a potential vault client, this dialog box prompts you to indicate if you want to
configure a vault client once the code has been installed. If you choose to configure a vault client, you will be prompted to do so in
another dialog box which will be displayed before the PLMDBSetup process is started.
After installation, you can run the VaultClientSetup command in order to catalog another vault server, modify the parameters of an
existing one, or remove an existing one. The VaultClientSetupB command provides the same functionalities in batch mode.
Note: you can only install a vault server by using a configuration belonging to the ENOVIA V5 VPM brand.
If you are installing from scratch, the Choose Communications Ports dialog box is displayed:
This allows you to set up on your computer:
❍ a port reserved for the communications backbone process
❍ a port reserved for starting the communications backbone process automatically
❍ a port reserved for processing events when using peripheral devices (spaceball, spacemouse, joystick).
By default, the Set up communication ports option is checked because it is strongly recommended.
This installation step adds lines to various system files. For more information about the communications backbone and which files are
concerned, refer to Communications Backbone Files.
The installation setup analyses the file in question. If the three lines are present (for example, due to a previous installation), the dialog
box will not appear.
Furthermore, if the installation path is different, the installation path referenced in the /etc/inetd.conf file is updated. This means that
the most recent installation takes priority.
This displays the Start Copying Files dialog box.

The central area lists the current settings you set in the previous steps. The result looks something like this (depending on which
software you chose to install):
24. Click the Install button to start copying the files to your computer.
A progression indicator appears:
Depending on your UNIX platform, the software may be provided on a suite of CD-ROMs. Once the software on the first CD-ROM has
been installed, you will be prompted to insert the next CD-ROM, and click OK to continue the installation until you have inserted the last
CD-ROM.
Note that you must install all the software CD-ROMs: you cannot, for example, install only one out of two. If you click the Cancel button
before installing the final CD-ROM, the software previously installed will be uninstalled.
Vault Client Setup
25. If you indicated earlier that you want to set up a vault client, the Vault Client Setup dialog box appears:
26. Click the Add... button to display the following dialog box:
27. Specify the Vault alias name, Server hostname and Orbix daemon port, then click OK.
The Vault Client Setup dialog box is now updated like this:
28. Use the Modify... and Delete buttons to modify or delete the selected configuration.
29. Click the Close button to continue.
30. Once the product files have been copied, the Setup Complete dialog box informs you that the installation has been completed.
31. Click the Finish button to start a Version 5 session.
The Version 5 window will look like this, for example, if you installed the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 and MD2 - CATIA -
Mechanical Design 2 configurations:
An installation log is created (or the existing log is updated) in the current temporary directory, located by default in:
$HOME/CXINST.log
If you did not import a NODELOCK license certificate
If you chose to run Version 5 now, but did not import a nodelock license certificate, a message window appears informing you that you
have not yet requested a configuration or product license:
Click the OK button.
The License Manager dialog box is then displayed in front of the application window, and contains a list of the names of installed
software. The configuration/product names are grayed out.
In our example, we installed the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 and MD2 - CATIA - Mechanical Design 2 configurations.
Note that the field below each license specifies: "Not Granted". This is because this is the first time you are starting Version 5, and you
have not yet reserved any licenses.
At this stage, if you click the OK button, a session will still be started, but you will not be able to work with the product: menu
commands will be grayed out, and you will only be able to use the File > Exit command.
Resetting the Server Manager After Installing Different Product Lines in the Same Location
When you install configurations including orbix software, you also install software components which run the orbix daemon. During this
process, the Server Manager is registered to the orbix daemon, and the following file is created:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/startup/orbix/config/Repositories/ImpRep/CATIAServerManager.imp
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
This file contains:
server_path -env environment_name -direnv environment_directory
If, for example, you first install another product line (CATIA, DELMIA, ENOVIA DMU Navigator or 3d com) and the configurations you install
include orbix, and you then install ENOVIA V5 VPM in the same installation directory, the name of the environment referenced in the
CATIAServerManager.imp file will be (if you installed CATIA, for example):
CATIA.V5R19.B19
and not:
ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19
which will lead to problems.
You have two solutions to avoid this problem.
You could install ENOVIA V5 VPM first before installing any other product lines.
Or, if you installed other product lines first, perform the following steps as "root":
1. Regenerate the CATIAServerManager.imp file by running the following command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/runRegisterServerManager -env ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19

2. Stop the orbix daemon.
3. Restart the orbix daemon running the following command:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run runOrbix
Special Notice
The information expected to be on this page can be found on the CD containing this Program
Directory. We regret any inconvenience this may cause you.
Accessing more than 2.0 GB of memory on
Windows XP
This section describes necessary settings to get access to more than 2.0 GB of memory on
Windows XP within a V5 process.
Background
By default, Version 5 processes on Windows can allocate up to 2.0 GB of memory for storing
data and code. The 4 GB address space offered by the operating system being split in two
areas of 2 GB each, first 2 GB for user mode, 2 other GB being reserved by the kernel. On
Windows XP, it is possible to increase the default allocation capabilities up to 3.0 GB (3 GB
for user mode, 1 GB reserved for kernel). Such capability requires additional tunings in order
to be effective :
● From an operating system standpoint
● From a Version 5 standpoint
Operating System requirements

● Windows XP Professional is required.
● A modification of boot.ini file is needed to activate this capability at the system level. The
boot.ini switch /3GB needs to be added in order to make 3 GB available for user mode
applications. For example :
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINDOWS="Microsoft Windows XP
Professional 3GB" /fastdetect /3GB
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINDOWS="Microsoft Windows XP
Professional" /fastdetect
Notes :
❍ Improper modification of the boot.ini file can cause the operating system to be
inoperable.
❍ For testing purposes of a given hardware configuration, it might be preferable to create
several entries in the [operating systems] stanza, as documented in above example,
as well as leave a non zero timeout, to allow user selection at boot time between
regular boot and boot with the /3GB option; this can allow easy recovery in case
the /3GB option causes a problem described in section Additional Operating
Considerations below.
❍ Modification of the boot.ini file requires administrative privileges.
❍ boot.ini file can me modified using bootcfg.exe utility delivered with Windows XP (see
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;Q291980 for further details
on bootcfg.exe utility) or by editing the file :
1. boot.ini is generally found at the root of C: drive; in a command session (cmd.
exe), make file editable :
attrib C:\boot.ini -r -s
2. edit, modify and save file
3. reset file attributes :
attrib C:\boot.ini +r +s
4. reboot system to make the change effective
● Amount of Real memory and paging space should be sized accordingly.

● See the "Additional Operating System consideration" section in this page to size the
number of free System Page Table Entries
Version 5 required customizations

Since R14, the Version 5 main executable is already "Large Address Space Aware", to get
access to the 3GB of address space .
To disable the use of the "Large Address Space" :
● Customers having access to Microsoft Visual Studio 6 development environment or
Microsoft Visual .Net or higher environment can use editbin.exe (generally found in C:
\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 8\VC\bin), the syntax is as follows :
❍ edibin.exe /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO CNEXT.exe
Note: CNEXT.exe is given here as an example, one should replace it by the appropriate
Version 5 executable.
To go back to the initial behavior after disabling the large address space capability, one can
use :
● run imagecfg.exe on CNEXT.exe
❍ in a command session, execute imagecfg.exe -l CNEXT.exe
❍ output of above command should be similar to :
CNEXT.exe contains the following configuration information:
Subsystem Version of 4.0
Stack Reserve Size: 0x100000
Stack Commit Size: 0x1000
CNEXT.exe updated with the following configuration information:
CNEXT.exe contains the following configuration information:
Subsystem Version of 4.0
Image can handle large (>2GB) addresses
Stack Reserve Size: 0x100000
Stack Commit Size: 0x1000
❍ imagecfg.exe utility can be found on the Windows Server Resource Kit Supplement One.
● or editbin.exe /LARGEADDRESSAWARE CNEXT.exe
Additional Operating System considerations

● Some driver may not load correctly when /3GB switch is added to boot.ini. One would
need to tune /3GB configurations with /USERVA switch in boot.ini file. See : Driver May
Not Be Loaded with the /3GB Switch "http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;
EN-US;Q319043 "
● Microsoft recommends that the number of free PTEs must be greater than
24000 . You can monitor the PTE consumption by using the System Monitor tool or
perfmon. The object to monitor is "Free System Page Table Entries." When using the /3GB
option and if the value observed is less that 24,000, you should reduce this value in 64
MB steps until values larger than 24 kilobytes (KB) to 26 KB are observed . You can do
that by setting the /USERVA value to 3GB - (n x 64 MB) in the boot.ini . See Microsoft
article "How to use the /userva switch with the /3GB switch to tune the User-mode space
to a value between 2 GB and 3 GB" http://support.microsoft.com/?kbid=316739 .
● If you upgrade your computer to Windows XP Service Pack 2 ( SP2) and you are using
the /3GB switch, CATIA may crash when using macro . KB890048 is correcting this
problem see http://support.microsoft.com/kb/890048/. This fix can be provided by
Microsoft on demand.
Accessing more than 1.0 GB of data on AIX
This section describes necessary settings to get access to more than 1.0 GB on AIX for
allocations of data within a V5 process.
Background
This behavior is only applicable to 32-bit Version 5 processes.
By default, Version 5 processes (32-bit) on AIX can allocate up to 1.0 GB. It is possible to
override the default allocation capabilities up to 2.0 GB. Such a capability requires additional
tunings in order to be effective :
Operating System required customizations

To get access to more than 1.0 GB for allocating data, the X server must be configured to
use extended shared memory. To enable this support, do the following :
1. Modify /usr/lpp/X11/defaults/xserverrc shell script to add :

EXTSHM=ON
export EXTSHM
before execution of the X process in the shell script (for example, just before
environment variable EXTENSIONS is set in the shell script).
2. Reboot workstation or restart the X server to take modification into account.

Large Memory Model
The capability to allocate more than 1.0 GB on AIX is controlled by an environment
variable : V5MEM. This environment variable can take an integer value from 5 to 8 , and
controls the number of 256 MB segments that Version 5 can allocate. By default, this
environment variable is not set. When set, the environment variable is checked by catstart
shell script, which will set the environment accordingly.
● When V5MEM is not set, Version 5 will be able to allocate up to 1.0 GB (operating system
customizations are not required)
● When V5MEM is set, operating system customizations are required; V5MEM=5 will give
access to 1.25 GB; V5MEM=8 will give access to 2.0 GB of address space for data allocated
during the Version 5 session. In all cases, it is recommended to have the paging space
sized accordingly.
Very Large Memory Model
Under AIX 5.2 and AIX 5.3 running the 64-bit kernel, Version 5 will be able to allocate up
to 2.25 GB, but the following customization is required:
● required patch : IY53656

● before launching CNEXT :
❍ export V5MEM=8
❍ catstart -run /bin/ksh
❍ export LDR_CNTRL=PREREAD_SHLIB@MAXDATA=0xD0000000@DSA
❍ export MW_GMA_VADDR to 0xD8000000
❍ export DISPLAY=<hostname>:0
❍ export EXTSHM=ON
❍ start CNEXT
Additional Operating System considerations

● One cannot execute a Version 5 session with V5MEM set simultaneously with another
Version 5 session for which V5MEM is not set. When several session need to run
simultaneously on the same workstation, they should share the same V5MEM setting, or
be executed with V5MEM unset.
● This behavior is only applicable to 32-bit Version 5 processes, those V5 customizations
should be removed for a 64-bit Version 5 process.
Accessing more than 2.0 GB of memory on
HP-UX
This section describes necessary settings to get access to more than 2.0 GB of memory on
HP-UX within a V5 process.
Background
By default, Version 5 processes on HP-UX can allocate up to approximately 1.9 GB of
memory for storing data. The 4 GB address space offered by the operating system being
split into 4 quadrants of 1 GB each; most of first 2 quadrants are reserved for private data
allocations, most of last 2 quadrants are reserved for shared objects. It is possible to
increase the default data allocation capabilities up to approximately 3.0 GB (1 GB remains
for shared objects). Such capability requires additional settings in order to be effective :
Operating System settings

● The maxdsiz kernel parameter, which controls the amount of private data each process
can handle, should be sized to accommodate up to 3 GB of data. Therefore maxdsiz
should be set to 0xC0000000 through sam or kmtune utilities.
● Amount of Real memory and swap space should be sized accordingly. Increasing
maxswapchunks kernel parameter may be necessary to accommodate additional swap
space.
● Increasing swap space and changing kernel parameters require root authority.
● If running in the POSIX shell (/usr/bin/sh) make sure that ulimit data parameters is set to
unlimited.

Since R14 the V5 main executables are already flagged to enable the use of the third
quadrant. One can disable it by using the chatr command ( this operation requires root
authority on default installation) :
● Locate and make a backup copy of the main executable (say, for example, CNEXT,
generally found in /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/hpux_b/code/bin; the same pattern is
applicable for DMU or DELMIA main executables, or other V5 main executables).
● get write access on CNEXT executable :
chmod +w CNEXT
● run chatr command on CNEXT, in order to enable use of third quadrant for private data
chatr +q3p disable CNEXT
Output of above command should be similar to :
...
data segment locking disabled
third quadrant private data space disabled
fourth quadrant private data space disabled
third quadrant global data space disabled
data page size: 1M
instruction page size: 1M
nulptr references disabled
shared library private mapping disabled
shared library text merging disabled
● reset permissions on file to original permissions
chmod -w CNEXT
One can go back to initial behavior by restoring the original copy or enabling the use of the
third quadrant :
● run chatr command on CNEXT, in order to enable use of third quadrant for private data
chatr +q3p enable CNEXT
Output of above command should be similar to :
...
lazy swap allocation disabled
text segment locking disabled
data segment locking disabled
third quadrant private data space enabled
fourth quadrant private data space disabled
third quadrant global data space disabled
data page size: 1M
instruction page size: 1M
nulptr references disabled
shared library private mapping disabled
shared library text merging disabled
● reset permissions on file to original permissions
chmod -w CNEXT
Product Enhancement Overview Version 5 Release 19 Page 1
CATIA Solutions Version 5 Release 19

Infrastructure Solutions
● CATIA Infrastructure User Guide
● Data Exchange Interfaces
● CATIA - ENOVIA Interoperability
● Photo Studio
● Photo Studio Optimizer
● Product Data Filtering
● SMARTEAM - CATIA Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
● SmarTeam - CATIA Integration
● VPM Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
● V4 Integration
Mechanical Design Solutions

● 2D Layout for 3D Design
● 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation
● Assembly Design
● Aerospace Sheetmetal Design
● Cast & Forged Part Optimizer
● Composites Design
● Core and Cavity Design
● Functional Molded Part
● Generative Sheetmetal Design
● Healing Assistant
● Mold Tooling Design
● Part Design
● Sketcher
● Wireframe and Surfaces

Shape Design & Styling Solutions

● Automotive Body In White Fastening
● Digitized Shape Editor
● FreeStyle Shaper Optimizer & Profiler
● Imagine & Shape
● Quick Surface Reconstruction
● Realistic Shape Optimizer
Analysis
● Advanced Meshing Tools
● Generative Structural Analysis
Equipment & Systems Engineering Solutions

● Compartment and Access
● Electrical Cableway Routing
● Electrical Connectivity Diagrams
● Electrical Harness Flattening
● Electrical Library
● Electrical Wire Routing
● Hanger Design
● HVAC Design
● HVAC Diagrams
● Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
● Piping Design
● Plant Layout
● Raceway and Conduit Design
● Ship Structure Detail Design
● Structure Functional Design
● Systems Routing
● System Space Reservation
● Tubing Design
● Tubing Diagrams
● Waveguide Design
● Waveguide Diagrams
● Circuit Board Design
Machining Solutions
● Advanced Machining
● Lathe Machining
● Multi-Axis Surface Machining
● Multi-Pocket Machining
● STL Rapid Prototyping
Product Synthesis Solutions

● Business Process Knowledge Template
● DMU Composites Review
● DMU Navigator
● DMU Optimizer
● Human Builder
● Knowledge Advisor
● Product Engineering Optimizer
● Product Knowledge Template

Infrastructure User's Guide

Enhanced Functionalities
Selecting Using the Selection Traps
The Polygon Selection Mode now lets you select concave polygons.
Ability to pan or zoom the model when working in Polygon Selection Mode.
Capturing Simple Images
You can now choose the monochrome filter to be applied when capturing images in monochrome
color mode.
Dragging and Dropping Objects onto Objects
You can now drag an element from one location and drop it onto another location without changing
its name.
Knowledgeware
Read-only design table edition

You can now open a design table document (in read-only mode)
whenever you want to refer to the file. By clicking Edit button available
in design table editor dialog box, you can access the design table file even if you do not have
write access to the file or if it is locked by another user.
Excel 2007 support

Now the new Excel extensions (.xlsx and .xlsm) of Microsoft Excel
2007 will be supported in the entire existing Knowledge GUI dealing
with Excel worksheet documents.
Data Exchange Interface

Customizing Settings
STEP
Cloud Of Points Properties (COPS) are available.
You can decide to use Geometric or Assembly Validation Properties.
Large Scale is taken into account by STEP settings.
Export supports light assemblies.
IGES
Large Scale is taken into account by IGES settings.
DXF
Click here to read about the impact of changing scales.
AutoCAD 2004 and AutoCAD 2007 are now supported.
The semantic of 2D component (Detail/Ditto) can be exported.
IGES 2D
ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability
Display Lock Owner in save messages
Whenever a Save operation fails due to insufficient lock privileges, an error message is displayed
indicating that the object has been locked. The name of the user who has locked the object is also
displayed.
Improve Session Refresh command
The enhanced capability of Refresh command allows you to retrieve the document from the
database even if you have the modified the document in the session. Also you can visualize the
iteration status of the document in the database before you retrieve the document.
Memorize error list window size
Whenever you change size of the Reporting dialog box the changes will be stored in the CATSetting
and consequent Reporting dialog box will be opened with settings preferred by you.
Improve Search and Filter in error list
when an error message is displayed indicating insufficient lock privileges on an object, you can
perform the Lock/Unlock operations from the Reporting dialog box using contextual menu.
Lock/Unlock object from Reporting dialog box
Also you can search the impacted object in the database from the Reporting dialog box by using
Search in DB button.
Move taken into account in refresh
The enhanced capability of Refresh Documents command updates the modified position of an
instance of a CATPart in an assembly while refreshing the document in the session.
Memory Management
Memory Warning and Memory Stopper are used to warn you (the user) if maximal allowed use of
memory is reached when saving a large data to ENOVIA V5 VPM, and opening of the data from the
ENOVIA V5 VPM.
Saving Child Components Without Locking the Parent
The CV5EV5_ADD_WITHOUT_PARENT_LOCK parameter is replaced by the new
CV5EV5_PARENT_LOCK_REQUIRED parameter.
Photo Studio
Rendering Images
Allows you to store your favorite scenes, or customize a scene and save it.
Using Materials for Rendering
Allows you to apply different types of materials to an object.
Photo Studio Optimizer

No enhancements in this release.
Product Data Filtering

Product Structure
Enhanced Functionality
Impacts Handling on Instance Name or Publication Name Change
You can handle impacts on publication or product instance renaming.
Real Time Rendering

New Functionalities
Material Variants
Allows you to apply material variants to an object and also to browse variant for interactive reviews.
It can also be store in a DMU Review allowing complex scenario where materials, colors and shapes
can we switches all together.
Environment Selector
A new dedicated command available in the workbench allows you to change de default reflection
map by choosing a new one in a thumbnail list.
Pre-computed Lightmaps
With this enhancement you can compute shadow maps (ambient occlusion and various shadows
computed with ray tracing algorithms). Those shadow maps can be applied in real time onto the
model or sub-part of the model thanks to a new type of Sticker called "shadow stickers".
Architecture & Design Materials
New advanced materials are available in the material user interface. They are more focused on
Architecture & Design usage. They are classified by type (plastic, glass, metal,...) and comes with
dedicated parameters easiest t tune. They can be visualized both in real time and ray tracing.
Environment Editor
Allows you to edit all the environment's parameters including textures from a single frame.
Light shadows on objects
Allows you to activate real time shadows onto the models with multiple lights and over advanced
materials such as shaders providing highly realistic real time rendering
Resources & Content

Advanced Material library
A new library of materials is available. This library is filled with several CgFX shaders providing
advanced and realistic material effects.
SMARTEAM - CATIA Supply Chain Engineering

Exchange
GUI enhancements which improve Reconciliator’s usability:
- Reconciliator window size & position are remembered
- Global-Set may be run by double-clicking
Reconciliation of CATShape documents:
The Reconciliator helps the customer to simulate and to prepare the data to be saved into the
database. The Reconciliator supports a set of document types. The current enhancement extends
the document types recognized by the Reconciliator to include the CATShape. This development
extends the Reconciliator scope to applications such as Piping and tubing.
Exposed Reconciliator CAA APIs
Enables the development of CAA applications which integrate Reconciliator functionality and enables
the customization of existing Reconciliator functionality by adding new criteria or implementing
existing user criteria.
Save & Restore Reconciliation session
Saves and restores settings that were previously defined for mapping & rules of the
interactive Reconciliator application.
SMARTEAM - CATIA Integration

SmarTeam – CATIA integration enables suppliers to handle several CATIA environments. This allows
suppliers to meet OEM requirements to work in a specific CATIA environment release, service pack and
hotfix settings.
Customization of toolbars/menus allows the administrator to remove the SmarTeam menu and work with
toolbars only
Added the ability to create a new folder from within the Project Manager window.
Open dialog enhancements:
- Added Items shortcut: enables users to browse items and open related AutoCAD documents
- Related documents pane: using the new Items shortcut, users can browse items, and the related
documents appear in the Related Documents pane
- Open dialog Quick Search: added the ability to define the order of classes in the Quick Search and
any class for Quick Search and Save last used class option
Added the ability to map text in title blocks
Support for VISTA 64-bit
VPM Supply Chain Engineering Exchange

New Functionality
Partial Replication Process Management
You can now create and simulate Replication Packages in VPM Navigator.
V4 Integration
2D Layout for 3D Design

New Functionality
Setting Large Scale in CATIA V5 Session
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in kilometers. In 2D Layout
there are a few points, which you should consider.
Making an Existing Annotation Associative by Creating Rigid Positional Links
The Positional Link capability allows you to create rigid positional links between the annotation and
another element. The annotation cannot be moved manually relative to the reference element.
Element Visualization in Specification Tree (Fix Together, 2D Component

Instances, Use-edges)
Visualizing the Fix Together Constraints in the Specification Tree

The elements constrained together using the Fix Together constraint can be visualized under the Fix
Together Constraints node in the specification tree.
Visualizing the 2D Component Reference in the Specification Tree
The 2D Component instances can be visualized under the Component Instances node in the
specification tree.
Visualizing the Associative Use-Edges in the Specification Tree
The use-edges created along with the creation types can be visualized under the Use Edges node in
the specification tree.
General
The Display features under views option allows you to display in the specification tree the
representation for fixed elements, 2D component instances and use-edges.
Annotation and Dress-Up
The Create rigid positional link option allows you to create rigid positional links whenever new
positional links are created for text, table and geometrical tolerance annotations.
3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation

New Functionality
Migration of V4 data to CATIA V5
CATIA V4 dimensioning, tolerancing and annotation data can be converted to CATIA V5 FTA data
part level. The converted data is associative to the converted CATIA V5 geometry.
Save 3D Annotations Defined at Product Level as 3D XML
This capability takes into account the 3D annotations defined at product level while saving a product
as 3D XML.
Upgrade of Annotation Set
You can upgrade pre-R18 annotation sets using Upgrade contextual menu command, so that the
FTA features have the same behavior as those annotation sets created in R18 or later.
Managing 3D Annotations in Result Annotation Set
The FTA result features are light features that are dedicated for review and are not editable. From
R18 they are generated by Multi-cad applications or by exporting V6 products and 3D shape
representations to CATIA CATProduct and CATPart documents using the downward compatibility
tool. The Result Annotation Sets can be saved as .cgr and as .3dxml. They can also be kept in the
filtered document when using the product data filtering capabilities.
Assembly Design
New Functionalities
Associativity
This capability allows you to modify CATPart geometry in assembly context without modifying the
reference CATPart. The Associativity command results in the creation of a new CATPart instantiated
in the assembly, containing a copy obtained by Copy/Paste As Result With Link operation of a
chosen geometry from all/ customized components of the active assembly.
Define Variant Generic Product
The Define Variant Generic Product command allows to create a new variant and select the
components as per the required configuration.
Instantiate Variant
The Instantiate Variant command allows to instantiate variant generic product from file.
Replace Variant
The Replace Variant command replaces the existing solved by a new variant of another generic
product.
Add To Associated Part
When the assembly is saved in EV5 after the creation of assembly feature and associated part, the
assembly feature is not saved in EV5. In this case, the Add to Associated Part command aids to add
bodies from existing/new source parts in the product into the associated Part and maintains their
Associatively.
Publication in Associated Part
The Allow publication in Associative Part allows for publication of the pasted bodies in the associated
part in case they are published in the source part. When Only Published Features option is selected,
only published geometries from the set of selected geometry options or custom list of geometries
are imported in the associated part.
Associativity With PRC Context
The context of import of bodies and geometries is PRC. In case of structure exposed mode (mode of
the active product), the feature is not created.
Redundancy Constraint Check
The option Disable redundancy check allows you to enable/disable the redundancy check performed
while constraint creation.
Aerospace Sheetmetal Design

Managing the Joggle Parameters
This capability allows you to manage the joggle parameters valuated by a length (Depth, Runout,
Start Radius, End Radius, Clearance) with pre-defined formulas stored in Design Tables.
Cast & Forged Part Optimizer

New Functionality
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the part feature allows the activation of the last
evolutions of the code available on the current level. Thus the feature is updated by manually
upgrading it.
Wall Thickness Analysis
The Wall Thickness Analysis capability analyzes and provides a graphical feedback of the thickness
of a part. You can measure the thickness of a part and easily adjust it to fit your needs as per the
requirements of the manufacturing process.
Composites Design
New Functionalities
Plies:
Check Contours to check the validity of plies contours or flattening contours.
Data export:
XML export to export ply information (stacking and ply description) in a XML file.
Flattening:
GSD commands Unfold and Transfer are now directly accessible from the Composites Design
workbench.
Unfold Composite Entity proposes a fast and associative alternative to Flattening.
Integration with 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation:
You can create annotations with associative attribute links to Composites Design features.
Materials:
They can be defined as NCF, and used as such,
A value range can be added to material parameters,
Material parameters can be edited within that range.
On the Fly Information:
Selection filters have been added.
Limit Contour:
A Limit Contour Group is now created to enable global modification of limit contours.
Solid from Plies:
It now accepts multi-selection of edges of parts.
Skin swapping:
It now accepts edges of parts as input,
It provides two swapping modes,
It enables to reorder the stacking while swapping.
Numerical Analysis:
You can analyze zones in a CATPart context.
Creating a drawing with GVS Files:
More Composites attributes can be customized.
Ply Book has been rewritten.
Core & Cavity Design

Fillet Radius Reduction
Creates now specific CCVFilletSurface features.
Functional Molded Part

Generative Sheetmetal Design

New Functionalities
Integration of Unfolded Curve in Drawing
During the creation of an unfolded curve, this capability allows you to specify if the element to be
created is needed in the sheetmetal process or if it is only a construction element. The four options
Construction element, Characteristic element, Marking or Engraving are available to put a semantic
on the unfolded curve feature. It is represented in the drawing according to a standard which allows
the parameter the visibility and the graphic properties according to the type of the curve or its
position (top or bottom).
Extrusion Explode Improvement
You can explode extrusion feature into sketch based wall on edge and sub extrusion (extrusion with
a sub profile of the initial profile). This extrusion feature can be connected or not connected to the
sheet metal part.
Stamp Recognize Improvement
It is not necessary to have a planar and single support to recognize a stamp geometry for creating a
Generative Sheetmetal Design stamping feature. Stamps that are impacting bends except sharp
stamps, opened stamps and stamps on the border can be recognized. You may need to force the
faces to be recognized as stamps as all the possible stamps are not automatically recognized
because of the confusion they can create with a combination of walls and bends.
Generative Drafting
New Functionality
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in kilometers. In drafting
Propagating View Modifications
The Synchronize View Definition capability allows you to synchronize view from 3D (Functional
Tolerancing and Annotation workbench and 2D Layout from 3D Design workbench) during the
update process when the support plane in 3D is changed.
3D Clipping
The Add 3D Clipping capability has been enhanced to allow you to select 2D or 3D geometry (point,
line, edge, planer face, plane) as 3D clipping object to modify the view.
View
This option allows you to synchronize the view generated from 3D, during the update process, when
the supporting plane is changed in 3D.
Healing Assistant
Interactive Drafting
New Functionalities
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in kilometers. In Drafting
Visualizing Broken Constraints between 2D and Generated Elements
The broken constraints are visualized as a red warning symbol above the 2D geometry when a
generative geometry is modified or deleted.
The Positional Link capability allows you to create rigid positional links between the annotation and
another element. The annotation cannot be moved manually relative to the reference element.
Element Visualization in Specification Tree (Fix Together, 2D Component

Instances)

The elements constrained together using the Fix Together constraint can be visualized under the Fix
Together Constraints node in the specification tree.
specification tree.
General
The Display features under views option allows you to display in the specification tree the
representation for fixed elements and 2D component instances.
The Create rigid positional link option allows you to create rigid positional links whenever new
positional links are created for text, table and geometrical tolerance annotations.
What's New?
New Functionalities
Icons
You can affect a customized icon to a Tooling component.
SmarTeam
You can manage the editability of impacts.
Technological results
You can display and export them.
Part Design
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the part feature allows the activation of the last
evolutions of the code available on the current level.
Controlling Top Diameter of Tapered Hole
This capability allows you to control a top diameter of a tapered hole by selecting
Top in the Type tab, and then entering the desired value in the Extension tab of a Hole Definition
dialog box. Further geometry is computed by the end conditions.
Contextual Menu of Blend Corner(s)
For editing an edge fillet containing at least one blend corner, the Reframe On, Create by edges,
Create by vertex, Edit and Remove options are available in the Blend corner(s) contextual menu.
When no corner is created, only the Create by edges and Create by vertex commands are displayed
in the contextual menu.
Intersection Fillets
The new Intersection selection mode allows the definition of edge fillets at the intersection of the
selected features with current solid.
Displaying and Editing Parameters in Specification Tree
This capability allows you to edit the parameters of a feature from the specification tree by double-
clicking it and changing its value in the Edit Parameter dialog box. Dress-Up features and Advanced
Dress-Up features have their parameters displayed under their respective nodes in the specification
tree.
Sketcher
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the sketch feature allows the activation of the last
evolutions of the code available on the current level.
Exploding Sketch
The Explode... contextual command allows you to modify a sketch obtained by Copy/Paste As Result
With Link. It converts all its as result with link geometry into regular sketched curves and points.
Positioning Sketch Created Using Copy/Paste As Result With Link Operation
You can now specify your own position of a sketch feature obtained by Copy/Paste As Result With
Link OR retrieve its associativity in position with its sketch reference by using the new Positioned as
reference option.
Wireframe and Surface

New Functionality
Operation Constructors
Additional constructors are added to the formula editor.
Creating Multiple Points and Planes
Allows you to select any point as a reference point while creating multiple points and allows you to
preview the multiple point instances.
Creating Planes Between Other Planes
Allows you to preview the multiple planes.
Wireframe Constructors
Surface Constructors
Reordering elements using Drag and Drop
Allows you to drag an element from one location and drop it at another location without changing its
name.
Automotive Body In White Fastening


New Functionalities
Mesh edition tool bar:
Edit meshes (Add point, Move point, Remove element, Collapse element, Flip edge).
Scan Edition:
Edit scans.
Discretize Curves:
Discretizes curves.
Extract Data:
Extracts visible points from a cloud of points to create a new one.
Disassemble Data:
Disassembles multi-cells clouds into several mono-cell clouds.
View Management Toolbar:
Now available.
Import:
Ascii User Format has been added.
3D Curve on Mesh:
Curve optimization can be cleared,
Constraints can be applied on end points.
Mesh Cleaner:
A new tab has been added, Edition, to collapse thin triangles.
Graphic properties:
They are now available from the Properties menu.
Two tabs are now available:
General, that defines the Command Behavior and Warm Start,
Display Modes that defines display modes for clouds of points.
FreeStyle Shaper, Optimizer & Profiler

New Functionalities
Filtering Trimmed and Untrimmed Curve and Surface
A new toolbar Custom selection filters with two new icons Trimmed element Filter and No Trimmed
element Filter has been added. These commands allow you to filter trimmed and untrimmed curve
and surface and use this selection to perform any other command.
Displaying and Modifying Dress-Up Features
The Dress-Up capability allows you to display and modify the dress-up options for curves, surfaces
and faces.
Cutting Plane Analysis
New options have been added to Cutting Plane Analysis dialog box that informs you about the
surfaces selected for analysis and further lets you add, remove or replace these surfaces. The new
multi-selector field changes depending on the selection mode and allows you to select the reference
elements.
Creating a Matching Constraint
The Matching Constraint capability with the Mean Surface Solver option selected allows you to get
better continuity in case of multiple constraints surface. The mean surface created is a the mean
result of the two constraint results.
Styling a Fillet
This Styling Fillet capability has been enhanced that displays the deviation values of continuity in the
3D area and Styling Fillet dialog box.
New 2D Diagram for 3D Curve Analysis
Performing a Curvature Analysis

The 2D Diagram of Porcupine Curvature Analysis has been enhanced to allow 3D analysis (the
magnitude curvature or radius) according to the position of a point on a 3D curve in a 2D graphical
space.
Analyzing Distances Between Two Sets of Elements
The 2D Diagram of Distance Analysis has been enhanced to allow analysis of the distance between
any two geometric elements in a 2D graphical space.
Mean Surface Solver
This option allows you to compute a result between multiple constraints surface as a mean surface
between each constraint result.
Generative Shape Design, Optimizer,

Developed Shapes & BiW Templates
New Functionality
Creating Blended Surfaces
Allows you to avoid twists in geometry by automatically computing the coupling points.
Creating Swept Surfaces/Volumes
Allows you to compute canonical portions for surfaces and volumes
Reshaping Corners
Improves the blend corner(s) capability for the Edge Fillet and the Variable Fillet commands.
Autofilleting
Allows you to fillet and round the edges of a part in one go.
Allows you to select any point as a reference point while creating multiple points and allows you to
preview the multiple point instances.
Allows you to drag an element from one location and drop it at another location without changing its
name.
Imagine & Shape

New Functionalities
Moving Surfaces and Curves Using the 3D Compass
You to manipulate (move and rotate) the subdivision surface and styling curve using the compass.
The features can be manipulated using mouse and compass by dragging and dropping the compass
onto the feature to be manipulated. The features can also be manipulated by using the Edit...
contextual menu command of compass.
Selecting Elements
A new edge selection mode is available where you select two edges and the path between
(including) these two edges depending on set of criteria.
Selecting Specific Color for Selected Elements
The Use specific color for all selected elements capability allows you to select color for the selected
elements (edges and vertices) from a list.
Merging Subdivision Surfaces
The Merge capability allows to merge two subdivision surfaces at their open edges.
Creating Subdivision from Curves
Subdivision Revolve
The Revolve capability allows you to create subdivision surfaces by revolving a curve around an
axis.
Subdivision Extrude
The Extrude capability allows you to create subdivision surfaces by extruding a curve along a
direction.
General Ergonomic Improvements
Modifying the Weight of Vertices or Edges

The weight of an elements is shown only when it is highlighted.
Validation while using the edition command (Extrude, Subdivide, Erase or Cut)
Validation for extrusion, cutting, subdividing and erasing a subdivision can be done by reselecting
the same element again. This information is also given in the help text when in detailed mode.
Scaling a Surface
During scaling, the dimension corresponding to the selected manipulator is highlighted. This makes
it easier to identify the dimensions being changed and also see its value.
Selecting Multiple Surfaces
During selection of multiple subdivision surfaces, each subdivision mesh is displayed in different
color for easy identification.
Selecting Visible Elements
When using the View and Selection mode command, a new intermediate state is available which
allows visualization of hidden edges, which are not selectable.
Associating Elements
When two elements are associated, icon is displayed in the specification tree to represent the linked
and linking elements along with tooltips indicating the one parent-child relationship.
Smart Selection of Multiple Surfaces
The Modification capability has been enhanced to allow you to select multiple subdivision surfaces
for modification in case a feature has more than one parent. Multiple selection can be made by using
Ctrl key.
Projection and Dimension representation enhancements
In case of Aligning Vertices the manipulators can be deactivated using the Ctrl key for easier
element selection. The manipulator cannot be manipulated near the axis. The display of the
projection plane while Aligning Vertices, Dimensioning of Subdivisions and Performing Symmetry
depends on the option selected for transparency in Tools > Options > Display > Performance tab,
Transparency Quality area.
Displaying Coordinates
The Show Coord capability allows you to control the manipulation by displaying compass coordinates
during translation, translating vertices along their normal, rotation and scaling.
Using Cyclic Toolbar and Menu Toolbar
There are two options Cyclic Menu and the Toolbar Menu that allow the visualization of the certain
command levels cyclically in the same icon or in a separate expandable toolbar.
General Algorithms Improvements
Extruding Faces and Edges

The Extrusion capability has been enhanced to allow you to a compute a symmetric fill wherever the
zone to be filled is symmetrical.
Erasing Faces and Edges
The Erasing capability allows you to erase multiple edges at the same time using Ctrl and Shift keys.
Performing A Symmetry
The Symmetry capability allows you to add weight to the intersection (scar) of symmetry between 0
and 100. You can select to have a sharp or smooth edge.
Dimensioning Subdivisions Along Half Axis
The Dimension capability allows you to modify the dimensions of subdivisions along half the axis.
The Convert Into Subdivision command allows you to convert a symmetry feature into a into a
subdivision surface.
Selecting Multiple Surfaces in different colors
This option allows you to display each subdivision mesh in a different color in case of multiple
selection of subdivision surfaces.
Displaying Selected Elements in Different Color
This options allows you to display elements with specific colors.
Show hidden lines in dashed lines
This option displays the hidden lines of subdivision surfaces as dashed lines.
Command Options Menu Mode
This option allows you visualize certain command levels in the same icon cyclically (Cyclic Menu) or
in a separate expandable toolbar (Toolbar Menu).

New Functionality
Curvature Mapping
Segmentation by Curvature Criterion
The parameter Influent Radius has been added to improve the result.
A temporary curvature mapping is available.
3D Curve on Mesh
constraints can be applied on end points.
Graphic properties
View Management Toolbar
is now available.
Realistic Shape Optimizer

New Functionality
Displacement Optimization
Optimizes the computation of a vectors field from a deviation analysis.
Advanced Meshing Tools

Creating 1D Mesh Parts
You can use the minimal mesh method.
Solid Meshing
Creating Octree 3D Mesh Parts

You can add a size distribution.
A new option is available: global split.
Surface Meshing

General
Automatic naming of groups created under mesh parts.
Generative Structural Analysis

Analysis Cases
Assembled Solutions
You can assemble frequency solutions.
Model Manager

Creating 2D Properties
You can define a thickness offset both in a 2D property and in a local 2D property.
Importing Composite Properties
You can define a thickness offset and take into account a draping direction defined in the Composite
Design workbench.
Mapping File Syntax
A new keyword is available in the element identification of the XML mapping file.
You can define an offset value for shell, inhomogeneous composite and and homogeneous
composite properties in the XML mapping file.
Connection Properties
Contact Connection Properties

You can take into account the friction in the computation of contact elements.
Result Visualization
Animating Images
You can define and impose the duration of a full animation.
Editing Images
The current occurrence and its associated value are displayed in the color map.
You can define new conditions to filter values.
Generating Images
Available Images
Instantaneous Von Mises stress and element centroid images are now available.
Information
The content of the Information box has been enhanced.
Exporting Data
You can export entities with no associated value in a .txt or .xls file.
General
Compartment and Access

Electrical Cableway Routing

You need to set an environment variable to display the error message "180 degree turn is found in the
cableways connected to the cableway element", while routing from the database.
The analyze cross document connections and manage document links functions now have an Open button
that allows users to open linked documents that are in ENOVIA.
Electrical Connectivity Diagrams

Electrical Harness Flattening

General Parameters
The Regular mode calculates angles in predefined target directions depending upon the number of
bundle segments and branches.
Electrical Harness Installation

Adding Light Protective Coverings
After customization, the parameters and relations are displayed in a separate node in the
specification tree.
Arranging Bundle Segments in Supports
Allows you to show or hide the parameters of the of the bundle segment in the geometry area.
Migrating Step by Step...
The migration mode is automatically switched to As Result when migration causes shape or length
modifications in the As Spec mode in case of a flexible curve of the bundle segment.
Electrical Library
Electrical Process Interfacing
Allows you to access filebased XML files even in the ENOVIA environment.
Stores the part number of the CATPart in its file name after the migration process.
Deletes all the unnecessary created files after the migration from V4 to V5 process.
Creating Protective Coverings
Allows you to customize the parameters and attributes for protection parts.
Allows you to migrate V4 protections as V5 internal protections.
Editing Electrical Properties
The Reference Designator attribute can be synchronized using a knowledgeware rule when it is
changed in either electrical or mechanical application systems.
Electrical Wire Routing

Allows you to access filebased XML files even in the ENOVIA environment
Automatically Routing Wires and Wire Groups
Allows you to route wires though devices and assemblies.
Electrical Package in Knowledge Expert
Returns the name/part number of the end device connected from or to the wire. Also, checks for the
validity of the bundle segment diameter.
Equipment Arrangement
The Update feature allows you to update insulation after the base part has been modified.
A setting allows you to find parts during parts placement by using the compatibility table, or by using
values in your design.
Hanger Design
HVAC Design
The option "Update adjacent segments direction" in the Offset Segment dialog box allows you to change the
direction of adjacent segments when you are making a segment parallel to a reference plane.
HVAC Diagrams
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams

Piping Design
When you are generating an isometric drawing, the generated object obtains nominal size from the pipe
dimension table. The column IsoGenSize needs to have values added to it.
Plant Layout
Raceway and Conduit Design

Ship Structure Detail Design

New Functionalities
During ENOVIA Integration, the Applicative Domain and Applicative Type attributes are assigned
specific values. These values can be used for searching, querying, and filtering data.
You can use the End Cut command to Place End Cuts on profiles, such as stiffeners, stiffeners on a free
edge, and beams. You can also Edit and Delete End Cuts and Place End Cuts on Multiple Profiles by using
this command.
You can Define Built-in End Cuts by assigning appropriate values to the built-in end cut parameters.
You can now add built-in end cuts to the catalog.
While creating a stiffener, you can select the Fast Preview check box in the Stiffener Dialog Box, which
lets you preview stiffener creation.
The Effect of Openings on Stiffeners explains how openings are organized and how these impact the
stiffeners.
When generating Graphic Replacement for Beams, Plates, and Stiffeners you can compute AcrossSide
parameters in Logical and FTA section modes. The end cut symbol applied on the extremity of a beam
depends on the 3D parameter value.
When Placing Small Assemblies, such as chocks, you can use the Display all inputs check box to manually
select the faces of the shape required as input.
You can define and modify the orientation of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams by Using Section
Manipulators in your design.
You can also Multi-edit Material Properties of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams. You can also Multi-edit
Material Properties of Plates.
When defining standard or contextual End Cuts based on a User Defined Feature, you need to follow the
naming conventions.

New Functionalities
Mesh Parts, Properties, and Materials task explains how you can obtain section parameters of mesh parts
for analysis by using the Manage Section CATPart command.
The computed attributes, IsASuperObject, SupportOffset, and SupportedPlate are added to the List of
Attributes. These attributes help in filtering your search results.
During ENOVIA Integration, the Applicative Domain and Applicative Type attributes are assigned
specific values. These values can be used for searching, querying, and filtering data.
You can Generate Shell Expansion Drawings by using the Shell Expansion drawing command. This drawing
is generated by expanding the shell plate surfaces in the transverse direction.
You can use the End Cut command to Place End Cuts on profiles, such as stiffeners, stiffeners on a free
edge, and beams. You can also Edit and Delete End Cuts and Place End Cuts on Multiple Profiles by using
this command.
You can Define Built-in End Cuts by assigning appropriate values to the built-in end cut parameters.
While creating a stiffener, you can select the Fast Preview check box in the Stiffener Dialog Box, which
lets you preview stiffener creation.
The Effect of Openings on Stiffeners task explains how openings are organized and how these impact the
stiffeners. In SFD, a stiffener is not split into more child stiffeners as a result of the opening.
When generating Graphic Replacement for Beams, Plates, and Stiffeners you can compute AcrossSide
parameters in Logical and FTA section modes. The end cut symbol applied on the extremity of the beam
depends on the 3D parameter value.
You can define and modify the orientation of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams by Using Section
Manipulators in your design.
You can also Multi-edit Material Properties of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams. You can also Multi-edit
Material Properties of Plates.
When defining standard or contextual End Cuts based on a User Defined Feature, you need to follow the
naming conventions.
Systems Routing
System Space Reservation

Tubing Design
Tubing Diagrams
Waveguide Design
Waveguide Diagrams
Circuit Board Design

3 Axis Surface Machining

New Functionalities
Part Operation:
You can now use the Part defined at the Part Operation level.
Collision Checking is available at the Part Operation level.
Four probing operations:
Holes or Pins Probing,
Slots or Ribs Probing,
Corner Probing,
Multi-Points Probing.
3/5-Axis Converter:
it is now available for all End Mill tools, TSlotters and Lollipops,
a new strategy guide is available: Normal to drive surface,
an Angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy mode,
ZLevel tool path can be optimized.
Tool Path Editor lets you now:
edit feedrates of tool paths, either locally or globally,
edit PP Words in tool paths,
edit V4 NCMill operations.
Roughing
management of start point is enhanced,
you can choose to compute a tool path free of collision with the tool holder,
for pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular approach for
automatic macros,
you can skip small holes in the rough stock, instead of avoiding them.
Plunge Milling
a new grid type has been added: By Offset,
you can visualize plunging points before computing the tool path,
a new parameter is available for retract motions: Axial corner radius,
you can modify the feedrate of the clearance macro.
Contour-Driven machining operations:
improved guide definition for parallel contour mode
(guide defined by faces boundaries, zig-zag motif defined by either two points or one point and an
axis),
new Strategy side parameter for parallel contour mode,
Option Reference now available in mode Parallel contour with Constant 3D strategy,
improved selection of faces in a polygon trap: new option to select visible faces only,
in Between contours mode, with a constant 2D stepover, the offset on guides can be applied to
stops.
ZLevel machining operations:
an offset on tool path in the machining plane is now available,
you can compute a circular interpolation of the tool path, or approximate one,
the Reverse Machining Conditions command inverts the Climb and Conventional cutting modes.
Spiral Milling
a new strategy mode has been added: Back and Forth,
a new option Always stay on bottom has been added to the Helical tool path style,
Face Mill Tool is now available,
clearance feedrate management via a contextual menu,
new Ramping up to a plane macro is available.
Advanced Machining
New Functionalities
Intermediate Stock Management
It is now possible to compute and visualize the input/output intermediate stock for milling and
turning operations.
The computed stock is taken into account to optimize and secure the tool path.
Part Operation
Corner Probing,
Enhancements brought to multi-axis machining operations
Tool axis guidance for multi-axis machining operations

A Lead angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy for multi-axis sweeping
operations, multi-axis isoparametric operations, multi-axis contour-driven operations and multi-axis
curve operations.
A new strategy Normal to drive surface has been added to multi-axis sweeping operations, multi-
axis isoparametric operations and multi-axis contour-driven operations.
Multi-axis Contour-Driven
In Between contours mode, the offset on guides can be applied to stops.
Macros for 5-axis machining operations
Additional macros are now available for 5-axis machining operations:
Add normal motion helps avoiding collisions in the linking macros of tube machining.
Add Circular motion is very useful in return in a level macros of tube machining, when the Guiding
strategy is set to Along guide.
Enable 5-axis simultaneous motion.
An additional clearance option is available: Smooth tool axis moves.
Enhancements brought to 3-axis machining operations
3/5-Axis Converter:
Roughing
for pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular approach for
automatic macros,
Plunge Milling
(guide defined by faces boundaries, zig-zag motif defined by either two points or one point and an
axis),
in Between contours mode, with a constant 2D stepover, the offset on guides can be applied to
stops.
the Reverse Machining Conditions command inverts the Climb and Conventional cutting modes.
Spiral Milling
Enhancements brought to 2.5-axis machining operations
Helical Interpolation Output for Machining Operations

A helical interpolation instruction can now be generated in the output file (APT source and Clfile) for
machining operations which support helical tool motion. These operations are Thread Milling,
Circular Milling in Helical mode, Sequential Groove with Helical motions, and Profile Contouring
defined with a Helix tool path style.
Multiple Radial Passes for Thread and Circular Milling Operations
This enhancement allows the user to create multiple passes (rough and finish) for Thread Milling and
Circular Milling in Helical mode, and provides capability to create a spring pass. The user no longer
needs to create separate operations for rough, finish and spring passes.
Support Multiple Tool Axis in Point to Point Operation
This enhancement enables the user to select different tool axes for multiple points in a single
operation, and simplifies the selection procedure.
Extended Tool Type Support for Machining Operations
This enhancement gives user a wider selection of cutting tools on the following machining
operations: Circular Milling, Countersinking, Counter Boring, Sequential Axial, Sequential Groove,
and Pocketing.
Lathe Machining
B-axis management for turning operations
New capability to define a tool axis on each Turning operation. This allows the B-axis orientation to
be managed and eliminates the need for a tool change activity.
Turret C-axis management for turning operations
A new C-axis inversion option on the Strategy tab page of the Machining Operation editor enables a
C-axis rotation (0/180 degrees) without requiring a tool change activity. This allows machining of
different areas (front and back areas of a part, or part on main spindle and part on a counter-
spindle) using the same tool assembly. Only the tool orientation (inversion) differs when machining
the different areas or parts.
Automatic Generation of ROTABL and TLAXIS for Changeover from Lathe to Mill
This enhancement allows automatic generation of ROTABL and TLAXIS statements whenever there
is change-over between Turning and Milling Operations.
Multi-Axis Surface Machining

Part Operation:
You can now use the Part defined at the Part Operation level,
Collision Checking is available at the Part Operation level.dd>
Tool axis guidance:
A Lead angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy for multi-axis sweeping
operations, multi-axis isoparametric operations, multi-axis contour-driven operations and multi-axis
curve operations.
A new strategy Normal to drive surface has been added to multi-axis sweeping operations, multi-
axis isoparametric operations and multi-axis contour-driven operations.
Contour-Driven
Macros
Add Circular motion is very useful in return in a level macros of tube machining, when the Guiding
strategy is set to Along guide.
Multi-Pockets Machining
New Functionality
Multi-Pocket Flank Contouring
Power Machining:
You can choose to compute a tool path free of collision with the tool holder,
For pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular approach for
automatic macros,
You can skip small holes in the rough stock, instead of avoiding them.
Part Operation
Multi-Slide Lathe Machining

Improvement of output based on Counter Spindle
This enhancement is provided by the Use Spindle Axis system according to the Spindle
involved on the Machining Operation checkbox in the Option tab of the Part Operation editor for
a Multi-slide lathe machine or a Mill-Turn machine.
If this check box is selected, tool tip points are computed based on the spindle that is set on the
machining operation.
If this check box is not selected, the main spindle axis is used. This is determined by the default
reference machining axis system set on the Part Operation.

New Functionalities
Defining Machines with Interchangeable Heads
Previously, the creation of Milling Machines and Milling Heads, with the capability to do a head
change during simulation, was not supported. This functionality enables to create such machines to
be used in simulation. It allows to create a new Milling Machine Head, which can then be inserted
into the milling machine CATProduct.
Defining Tool and Work-piece Mount Points
This section describes how to create, modify and delete multiple tool and work-piece mount points
on milling machines, using the Create Mount Point command.

New Functionality
Simulation with Interchangeable heads
This functionality allows you to simulate Milling machines with interchangeable heads, thus enabling
to verify NC tool paths for travel limits, collisions and modify if necessary.
User-selectable Machining Axis System for Workpiece automount
This provides the ability to mount the workpiece on a Milling machine bed or Mill-Turn machine with
respect to a user-selected machining axis system.
Machine Instruction Support for Turrets
For Mill-Turn Simulation, this enhancement allows you to define Machine Instruction activities on
Turrets.
Machine configuration management for Machining Operation
This functionality allows you to associate and persist a machine configuration with a particular tool
path point, from within the Modify Tool Path dialog box. This machine configuration will be applied
during machine simulation, when that particular tool path point is to be reached.
Simulating Machine Motion for Milling and Mill-Turn Machines
This provides support to simulate machine motion with Integrated Material Removal for Milling and
Mill Turn machines.
NC Manufacturing Infrastructure
ToolPath Editor: Feedrate Modification
This enhancement to feedrates is integrated to the Area Modification command of the tool path
editor and works on one or several tool paths. Tool path editor is available on APT imports and
milling operations. Tool paths can be modified partially or globally.
ToolPath Editor: V4 NC Mill Support

This enhancement enables Tool Path edition on manufacturing data from V4 NC MILL models.
ToolPath Editor: PP Word Management

This enhancement enables merging several PP instructions and editing PP words inside a tool path.
Video Mode: Usability Improvements

This enhancement provides a number of usability improvements such as improved error messages;
open fixtures support; extended support of turning tool holders; save CATProduct at the same
location as the Process; interruptible progress bar; capability to disconnect non cutting diameter;
and support of probing operations.
Feed Support for Transition Paths

This enhancement provides a number of improvements for transition feedrates. In particular, you
can now locally set the feedrate for a transition path to a machining operation B from a machining
operation A or from a tool change activity. This is done by selecting the Transition check box in the
Machining Operation dialog box for operation B.
Head Change Activity

This enhancement provides a new Head Change command in the Auxiliary Operations tool bar.
Clicking on this command inserting a new Head Change activity in the program, if an NC machine
with at least one head is assigned to the Part Operation.
This enhancement allows automatic generation of ROTABL and TLAXIS statements whenever there
is change-over between Turning and Milling Operations.
Ordered List of PP Tables in Machine Editor

Prior to this release, Post Processor (PP) word table names were not listed in an order, thus making
it difficult for the user to locate a PP word table. This enhancement addresses this usability issue
and lists the PP word tables in an alphanumerically sorted order. Controller Emulator and Post
Processor selections are also listed in sorted order.
Improved Error Messages for Output Generation

This highlight improves the message issued after NC data output generation by quantifying the
number of errors/warnings along with success/failure information.
Replace the Tool Assembly of Multiple MOs

Prior to this release, the Replace Tool contextual command could be used to replace the tool of
selected Machining Operations. This enhancement allows the tool assembly of selected operations to
be replaced.
Tool Number in Process Table

This enhancement allows the following additional parameters to be accessed in the Process Table:
Tool Number, Corrector Id, Corrector Number, and Radius Number. The tool number can be edited.
Prismatic Machining
New Functionality
It is now possible to compute and visualize the input/output intermediate stock for milling and
turning operations.
A helical interpolation instruction can now be generated in the output file (APT source and Clfile) for
machining operations which support helical tool motion. These operations are Thread Milling,
Circular Milling in Helical mode, Sequential Groove with Helical motions, and Profile Contouring
defined with a Helix tool path style.
This enhancement allows the user to create multiple passes (rough and finish) for Thread Milling and
Circular Milling in Helical mode, and provides capability to create a spring pass. The user no longer
needs to create separate operations for rough, finish and spring passes.
This enhancement enables the user to select different tool axes for multiple points in a single
operation, and simplifies the selection procedure.
This enhancement gives user a wider selection of cutting tools on the following machining
operations: Circular Milling, Countersinking, Counter Boring, Sequential Axial, Sequential Groove,
and Pocketing.
Prismatic Machining Preparation Assistant

New option to recognize features based on Technological Results
This enhancement provides the capability to create axial machinable features corresponding to
existing Technological Results of holes of the selected body.
STL Rapid Prototyping

New Functionality
is now available.
Graphic properties
Business Process Knowledge Template

DMU Composites Review

Kinematics Simulator
Deleting Joints
The Delete All Children option is now selected by default in the Delete dialog box.
Copying and Pasting a Mechanism

You can now copy and paste a dress-up.
DMU Navigator
No enhanced functionalities in this release.
DMU Optimizer
DMU Space Analysis

Sectioning
Exporting Section Results

You can now export sectioning results to VPM Navigator using the Open and Export command
available in the Result tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
Polyline results have been improved and thus increased the quality of a smoothed curve.
DMU Space Analysis Interoperability
Performing DMU Space Analysis Tasks with VPM Navigator

Interference object is now integrated within VPM Navigator (you can thus perform open, send to and
delete operations).
Human Activity Analysis

New Functionalities
3D Display of Biomechanics Results
A better way to display the results in 3D, each segment results are highlighted in the list when the
related segment in the 3D model is selected.
Defining Loads on Other Segments
This provides a more realistic behavior of the Biomechanics Analysis by allowing the use of loads
positioned on segments other then just the hands. Therefore, Biomechanics Analysis can be applied
on manikin having loads on shoulders, forearms and back.
Increased the number of analyzed joints - wrists
For a more complete analysis of the human biomechanics Results a new analysis will cover both
wrists in flexion-extension and Radial-Ulnar deviation
Human Builder
New Functionalities
Displaying Balance
This displays the support polygon of manikin's balance in the viewer. The color of the support
polygon will change from green to red if the manikin loses his balance.
Defining the color of the Manikin Referential
Choosing the color of the manikin referential for each manikin enables the client to differentiate
them and to make sure that it doesn't blend with the environment.
Auto Grasp Offset
The need for this highlight comes from wanting more control over an existing function that
automatically generates a grasp posture of the hand by checking the collision between the hand and
one or several objects to be grasped. A new option would allow you to edit the offset that control
the reaching position of the hand which is currently automatically set to a default value.
Knowledge Advisor
R19-Knowledge Language improvements
The improvement adds new functions/methods in the Engineering Knowledge Language. With the
new Knowledge functions you will be able to add two lists, create a list by extracting information
from existing list, sort, delete and remove the duplicate element from the list.
Product Engineering Optimizer

Product Knowledge Template

Infrastructure User's Guide
You can now choose the monochrome filter to be applied when capturing images in
monochrome color mode.
You can now drag an element from one location and drop it onto another location
without changing its name.
Knowledgeware

You can now open a design table document (in read-only mode) whenever you want
to refer to the file. By clicking Edit button available in design table editor dialog box,
you can access the design table file even if you do not have write access to the file or
if it is locked by another user
Excel 2007 support
Now the new Excel extensions (.xlsx and .xlsm) of Microsoft Excel 2007 will be
supported in the entire existing Knowledge GUI dealing with Excel worksheet
documents.
STEP
IGES
DXF
IGES 2D
ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability
Display Lock Owner in save messages
Whenever a Save operation fails due to insufficient lock privileges, an error message
is displayed indicating that the object has been locked. The name of the user who has
locked the object is also displayed.
Improve Session Refresh command
The enhanced capability of Refresh command allows you to retrieve the document
from the database even if you have the modified the document in the session. Also
you can visualize the iteration status of the document in the database before you
retrieve the document.
Memorize error list window size
Whenever you change size of the Reporting dialog box the changes will be stored in
the CATSetting and consequent Reporting dialog box will be opened with settings
preferred by you.
Improve Search and Filter in error list
when an error message is displayed indicating insufficient lock privileges on an object,
you can perform the Lock/Unlock operations from the Reporting dialog box using
contextual menu.
Lock/Unlock object from Reporting dialog box
Also you can search the impacted object in the database from the Reporting dialog
box by using Search in DB button.
Move taken into account in refresh
The enhanced capability of Refresh Documents command updates the modified
position of an instance of a CATPart in an assembly while refreshing the document in
the session.
Memory Management
Memory Warning and Memory Stopper are used to warn you (the user) if maximal
allowed use of memory is reached when saving a large data to ENOVIA V5 VPM, and
opening of the data from the ENOVIA V5 VPM.
Photo Studio
Rendering Images
Photo Studio Optimizer
Product Data Filtering
Product Structure
Real Time Rendering
New Functionalities
Material Variants
Allows you to apply material variants to an object and also to browse variant for
interactive reviews. It can also be store in a DMU Review allowing complex scenario
where materials, colors and shapes can we switches all together.
Environment Selector
A new dedicated command available in the workbench allows you to change de default
reflection map by choosing a new one in a thumbnail list.
Pre-computed Lightmaps
With this enhancement you can compute shadow maps (ambient occlusion and
various shadows computed with ray tracing algorithms). Those shadow maps can be
applied in real time onto the model or sub-part of the model thanks to a new type of
Sticker called "shadow stickers".
Architecture & Design Materials
New advanced materials are available in the material user interface. They are more
focused on Architecture & Design usage. They are classified by type (plastic, glass,
metal,...) and comes with dedicated parameters easiest t tune. They can be visualized
both in real time and ray tracing.
Environment Editor
Allows you to edit all the environment's parameters including textures from a single
frame.
Light shadows on objects
Allows you to activate real time shadows onto the models with multiple lights and over
advanced materials such as shaders providing highly realistic real time rendering
Resources & Content

Advanced Material library
A new library of materials is available. This library is filled with several CgFX shaders
providing advanced and realistic material effects.
SMARTEAM - CATIA Supply Chain Engineering
Exchange
GUI enhancements which improve Reconciliator’s usability:
- Reconciliator window size & position are remembered
- Global-Set may be run by double-clicking
Reconciliation of CATShape documents:
The Reconciliator helps the customer to simulate and to prepare the data to be saved
into the database. The Reconciliator supports a set of document types. The current
enhancement extends the document types recognized by the Reconciliator to include
the CATShape. This development extends the Reconciliator scope to applications such
as Piping and tubing.
Exposed Reconciliator CAA APIs
Enables the development of CAA applications which integrate Reconciliator
functionality and enables the customization of existing Reconciliator functionality by
adding new criteria or implementing existing user criteria.
Save & Restore Reconciliation session
Saves and restores settings that were previously defined for mapping & rules of the
interactive Reconciliator application.
SMARTEAM - CATIA Integration
SmarTeam – CATIA integration enables suppliers to handle several CATIA environments.
This allows suppliers to meet OEM requirements to work in a specific CATIA environment
release, service pack and hotfix settings.
Customization of toolbars/menus allows the administrator to remove the SmarTeam menu
and work with toolbars only
Added the ability to create a new folder from within the Project Manager window.
Open dialog enhancements:
- Added Items shortcut: enables users to browse items and open related AutoCAD
documents
- Related documents pane: using the new Items shortcut, users can browse items,
and the related documents appear in the Related Documents pane
- Open dialog Quick Search: added the ability to define the order of classes in the
Quick Search and any class for Quick Search and Save last used class option
Added the ability to map text in title blocks
Support for VISTA 64-bit
New Functionality
V4 Integration
2D Layout for 3D Design
New Functionality
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in kilometers.
In 2D Layout there are a few points, which you should consider.
The Positional Link capability allows you to create rigid positional links between the
annotation and another element. The annotation cannot be moved manually relative
to the reference element.
Element Visualization in Specification Tree (Fix Together, 2D

Component Instances, Use-edges)

The elements constrained together using the Fix Together constraint can be visualized
under the Fix Together Constraints node in the specification tree.
The 2D Component instances can be visualized under the Component Instances node
in the specification tree.
Visualizing the Associative Use-Edges in the Specification Tree
The use-edges created along with the creation types can be visualized under the Use
Edges node in the specification tree.
General
The Display features under views option allows you to display in the specification tree
the representation for fixed elements, 2D component instances and use-edges.
The Create rigid positional link option allows you to create rigid positional links
whenever new positional links are created for text, table and geometrical tolerance
annotations.
New Functionality
CATIA V4 dimensioning, tolerancing and annotation data can be converted to CATIA
V5 FTA data part level. The converted data is associative to the converted CATIA V5
geometry.
This capability takes into account the 3D annotations defined at product level while
saving a product as 3D XML.
You can upgrade pre-R18 annotation sets using Upgrade contextual menu command,
so that the FTA features have the same behavior as those annotation sets created in
R18 or later.
The FTA result features are light features that are dedicated for review and are not
editable. From R18 they are generated by Multi-cad applications or by exporting V6
products and 3D shape representations to CATIA CATProduct and CATPart documents
using the downward compatibility tool. The Result Annotation Sets can be saved as .
cgr and as .3dxml. They can also be kept in the filtered document when using the
product data filtering capabilities.
Assembly Design
New Functionalities
Associativity
This capability allows you to modify CATPart geometry in assembly context without
modifying the reference CATPart. The Associativity command results in the creation of
a new CATPart instantiated in the assembly, containing a copy obtained by Copy/
Paste As Result With Link operation of a chosen geometry from all/ customized
components of the active assembly.
The Define Variant Generic Product command allows to create a new variant and
select the components as per the required configuration.
Instantiate Variant
The Instantiate Variant command allows to instantiate variant generic product from
file.
Replace Variant
The Replace Variant command replaces the existing solved by a new variant of
another generic product.
When the assembly is saved in EV5 after the creation of assembly feature and
associated part, the assembly feature is not saved in EV5. In this case, the Add to
Associated Part command aids to add bodies from existing/new source parts in the
product into the associated Part and maintains their Associatively.
The Allow publication in Associative Part allows for publication of the pasted bodies in
the associated part in case they are published in the source part. When Only Published
Features option is selected, only published geometries from the set of selected
geometry options or custom list of geometries are imported in the associated part.
The context of import of bodies and geometries is PRC. In case of structure exposed
mode (mode of the active product), the feature is not created.
The option Disable redundancy check allows you to enable/disable the redundancy
check performed while constraint creation.
Aerospace Sheetmetal Design
Managing the Joggle Parameters
This capability allows you to manage the joggle parameters valuated by a length
(Depth, Runout, Start Radius, End Radius, Clearance) with pre-defined formulas
stored in Design Tables.
Cast & Forged Part Optimizer
New Functionality
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the part feature allows the activation
of the last evolutions of the code available on the current level. Thus the feature is
updated by manually upgrading it.
Wall Thickness Analysis
The Wall Thickness Analysis capability analyzes and provides a graphical feedback of
the thickness of a part. You can measure the thickness of a part and easily adjust it to
fit your needs as per the requirements of the manufacturing process.
Composites Design
New Functionalities
Plies:
Check Contours to check the validity of plies contours or flattening contours.
Data export:
XML export to export ply information (stacking and ply description) in a XML file.
Flattening:
GSD commands Unfold and Transfer are now directly accessible from the Composites
Design workbench.
Unfold Composite Entity proposes a fast and associative alternative to Flattening.
Integration with 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation:
You can create annotations with associative attribute links to Composites Design
features.
Materials:
They can be defined as NCF, and used as such,
A value range can be added to material parameters,
Material parameters can be edited within that range.
On the Fly Information:
Selection filters have been added.
Limit Contour:
A Limit Contour Group is now created to enable global modification of limit contours.
Solid from Plies:
It now accepts multi-selection of edges of parts.

Skin swapping:
It now accepts edges of parts as input,
It provides two swapping modes,
It enables to reorder the stacking while swapping.
Numerical Analysis:
You can analyze zones in a CATPart context.
Creating a drawing with GVS Files:
More Composites attributes can be customized.
Ply Book has been rewritten.
Core & Cavity Design
Fillet Radius Reduction
Creates now specific CCVFilletSurface features.
Functional Molded Part
Generative Sheetmetal Design
New Functionalities
Integration of Unfolded Curve in Drawing
During the creation of an unfolded curve, this capability allows you to specify if the
element to be created is needed in the sheetmetal process or if it is only a
construction element. The four options Construction element, Characteristic element,
Marking or Engraving are available to put a semantic on the unfolded curve feature. It
is represented in the drawing according to a standard which allows the parameter the
visibility and the graphic properties according to the type of the curve or its position
(top or bottom).
Extrusion Explode Improvement
You can explode extrusion feature into sketch based wall on edge and sub extrusion
(extrusion with a sub profile of the initial profile). This extrusion feature can be
connected or not connected to the sheet metal part.
Stamp Recognize Improvement
It is not necessary to have a planar and single support to recognize a stamp geometry
for creating a Generative Sheetmetal Design stamping feature. Stamps that are
impacting bends except sharp stamps, opened stamps and stamps on the border can
be recognized. You may need to force the faces to be recognized as stamps as all the
possible stamps are not automatically recognized because of the confusion they can
create with a combination of walls and bends.
Generative Drafting
New Functionality
In drafting there are a few points, which you should consider.
The Synchronize View Definition capability allows you to synchronize view from 3D
(Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench and 2D Layout from 3D Design
workbench) during the update process when the support plane in 3D is changed.
3D Clipping
The Add 3D Clipping capability has been enhanced to allow you to select 2D or 3D
geometry (point, line, edge, planer face, plane) as 3D clipping object to modify the
view.
View
This option allows you to synchronize the view generated from 3D, during the update
process, when the supporting plane is changed in 3D.
Healing Assistant
New Functionalities
In Drafting there are a few points, which you should consider.
The broken constraints are visualized as a red warning symbol above the 2D geometry
when a generative geometry is modified or deleted.

Component Instances)

The elements constrained together using the Fix Together constraint can be visualized
The 2D Component instances can be visualized under the Component Instances node
in the specification tree.
General
The Display features under views option allows you to display in the specification tree
the representation for fixed elements and 2D component instances.
annotations.
What's New?
New Functionalities
Icons
You can affect a customized icon to a Tooling component.
SmarTeam
You can manage the editability of impacts.
Technological results
You can display and export them.
Part Design
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
of the last evolutions of the code available on the current level.
This capability allows you to control a top diameter of a tapered hole by selecting Top
in the Type tab, and then entering the desired value in the Extension tab of a Hole
Definition dialog box. Further geometry is computed by the end conditions.
For editing an edge fillet containing at least one blend corner, the Reframe On, Create
by edges, Create by vertex, Edit and Remove options are available in the Blend corner
(s) contextual menu. When no corner is created, only the Create by edges and Create
by vertex commands are displayed in the contextual menu.
The new Intersection selection mode allows the definition of edge fillets at the
intersection of the selected features with current solid.
This capability allows you to edit the parameters of a feature from the specification
tree by double-clicking it and changing its value in the Edit Parameter dialog box.
Dress-Up features and Advanced Dress-Up features have their parameters displayed
under their respective nodes in the specification tree.
Sketcher
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the sketch feature allows the
activation of the last evolutions of the code available on the current level.
Exploding Sketch
The Explode... contextual command allows you to modify a sketch obtained by Copy/
Paste As Result With Link. It converts all its as result with link geometry into regular
sketched curves and points.
You can now specify your own position of a sketch feature obtained by Copy/Paste As
Result With Link OR retrieve its associativity in position with its sketch reference by
using the new Positioned as reference option.
New Functionality
Allows you to select any point as a reference point while creating multiple points and
allows you to preview the multiple point instances.
Allows you to drag an element from one location and drop it at another location
Automotive Body In White Fastening
New Functionalities
Mesh edition tool bar:
Edit meshes (Add point, Move point, Remove element, Collapse element, Flip edge).
Scan Edition:
Edit scans.
Discretize Curves:
Discretizes curves.
Extract Data:
Extracts visible points from a cloud of points to create a new one.
Disassemble Data:
Disassembles multi-cells clouds into several mono-cell clouds.
View Management Toolbar:
Now available.
Import:
Ascii User Format has been added.
3D Curve on Mesh:
Constraints can be applied on end points.
Mesh Cleaner:
A new tab has been added, Edition, to collapse thin triangles.
Graphic properties:
FreeStyle Shaper, Optimizer & Profiler
New Functionalities
Filtering Trimmed and Untrimmed Curve and Surface
A new toolbar Custom selection filters with two new icons Trimmed element Filter and
No Trimmed element Filter has been added. These commands allow you to filter
trimmed and untrimmed curve and surface and use this selection to perform any
other command.
Displaying and Modifying Dress-Up Features
The Dress-Up capability allows you to display and modify the dress-up options for
curves, surfaces and faces.
Cutting Plane Analysis
New options have been added to Cutting Plane Analysis dialog box that informs you
about the surfaces selected for analysis and further lets you add, remove or replace
these surfaces. The new multi-selector field changes depending on the selection mode
and allows you to select the reference elements.
Creating a Matching Constraint
The Matching Constraint capability with the Mean Surface Solver option selected
allows you to get better continuity in case of multiple constraints surface. The mean
surface created is a the mean result of the two constraint results.
Styling a Fillet
This Styling Fillet capability has been enhanced that displays the deviation values of
continuity in the 3D area and Styling Fillet dialog box.
New 2D Diagram for 3D Curve Analysis
Performing a Curvature Analysis

The 2D Diagram of Porcupine Curvature Analysis has been enhanced to allow 3D
analysis (the magnitude curvature or radius) according to the position of a point on a
3D curve in a 2D graphical space.
Analyzing Distances Between Two Sets of Elements
The 2D Diagram of Distance Analysis has been enhanced to allow analysis of the
distance between any two geometric elements in a 2D graphical space.
Mean Surface Solver
This option allows you to compute a result between multiple constraints surface as a
mean surface between each constraint result.
Generative Shape Design, Optimizer,
Developed Shapes & BiW Templates
New Functionality
Reshaping Corners
Improves the blend corner(s) capability for the Edge Fillet and the Variable Fillet
commands.
Autofilleting
Imagine & Shape
New Functionalities
Moving Surfaces and Curves Using the 3D Compass
You to manipulate (move and rotate) the subdivision surface and styling curve using
the compass. The features can be manipulated using mouse and compass by dragging
and dropping the compass onto the feature to be manipulated. The features can also
be manipulated by using the Edit... contextual menu command of compass.
Selecting Elements
A new edge selection mode is available where you select two edges and the path
between (including) these two edges depending on set of criteria.
Selecting Specific Color for Selected Elements
The Use specific color for all selected elements capability allows you to select color for
the selected elements (edges and vertices) from a list.
Merging Subdivision Surfaces
The Merge capability allows to merge two subdivision surfaces at their open edges.
Creating Subdivision from Curves
Subdivision Revolve
The Revolve capability allows you to create subdivision surfaces by revolving a curve
around an axis.
Subdivision Extrude
The Extrude capability allows you to create subdivision surfaces by extruding a curve
along a direction.
General Ergonomic Improvements
Modifying the Weight of Vertices or Edges

The weight of an elements is shown only when it is highlighted.
Validation while using the edition command (Extrude, Subdivide, Erase or Cut)
Validation for extrusion, cutting, subdividing and erasing a subdivision can be done by
reselecting the same element again. This information is also given in the help text
when in detailed mode.
Scaling a Surface
During scaling, the dimension corresponding to the selected manipulator is
highlighted. This makes it easier to identify the dimensions being changed and also
see its value.
Selecting Multiple Surfaces
During selection of multiple subdivision surfaces, each subdivision mesh is displayed
in different color for easy identification.
Selecting Visible Elements
When using the View and Selection mode command, a new intermediate state is
available which allows visualization of hidden edges, which are not selectable.
Associating Elements
When two elements are associated, icon is displayed in the specification tree to
represent the linked and linking elements along with tooltips indicating the one parent-
child relationship.
Smart Selection of Multiple Surfaces
The Modification capability has been enhanced to allow you to select multiple
subdivision surfaces for modification in case a feature has more than one parent.
Multiple selection can be made by using Ctrl key.
Projection and Dimension representation enhancements
In case of Aligning Vertices the manipulators can be deactivated using the Ctrl key for
easier element selection. The manipulator cannot be manipulated near the axis. The
display of the projection plane while Aligning Vertices, Dimensioning of Subdivisions
and Performing Symmetry depends on the option selected for transparency in Tools >
Options > Display > Performance tab, Transparency Quality area.
Displaying Coordinates
The Show Coord capability allows you to control the manipulation by displaying
compass coordinates during translation, translating vertices along their normal,
rotation and scaling.
Using Cyclic Toolbar and Menu Toolbar
There are two options Cyclic Menu and the Toolbar Menu that allow the visualization of
the certain command levels cyclically in the same icon or in a separate expandable
toolbar.
General Algorithms Improvements
Extruding Faces and Edges

The Extrusion capability has been enhanced to allow you to a compute a symmetric fill
wherever the zone to be filled is symmetrical.
Erasing Faces and Edges
The Erasing capability allows you to erase multiple edges at the same time using Ctrl
and Shift keys.
The Symmetry capability allows you to add weight to the intersection (scar) of
symmetry between 0 and 100. You can select to have a sharp or smooth edge.
Dimensioning Subdivisions Along Half Axis
The Dimension capability allows you to modify the dimensions of subdivisions along
half the axis.
The Convert Into Subdivision command allows you to convert a symmetry feature into
a into a subdivision surface.
Selecting Multiple Surfaces in different colors
This option allows you to display each subdivision mesh in a different color in case of
multiple selection of subdivision surfaces.
Displaying Selected Elements in Different Color
This options allows you to display elements with specific colors.
Show hidden lines in dashed lines
This option displays the hidden lines of subdivision surfaces as dashed lines.
Command Options Menu Mode
This option allows you visualize certain command levels in the same icon cyclically
(Cyclic Menu) or in a separate expandable toolbar (Toolbar Menu).
New Functionality
Curvature Mapping
Segmentation by Curvature Criterion
The parameter Influent Radius has been added to improve the result.
A temporary curvature mapping is available.
3D Curve on Mesh
constraints can be applied on end points.
Graphic properties
is now available.
Realistic Shape Optimizer
New Functionality
Displacement Optimization
Optimizes the computation of a vectors field from a deviation analysis.
Advanced Meshing Tools
Solid Meshing

Surface Meshing

General
Generative Structural Analysis
Analysis Cases
Assembled Solutions
You can assemble frequency solutions.
Model Manager

Creating 2D Properties
You can define a thickness offset both in a 2D property and in a local 2D property.
Importing Composite Properties
You can define a thickness offset and take into account a draping direction defined in
the Composite Design workbench.
Mapping File Syntax
A new keyword is available in the element identification of the XML mapping file.
You can define an offset value for shell, inhomogeneous composite and and
homogeneous composite properties in the XML mapping file.
Connection Properties
Contact Connection Properties

You can take into account the friction in the computation of contact elements.
Result Visualization
Animating Images
You can define and impose the duration of a full animation.
Editing Images
You can define new conditions to filter values.
Generating Images
Available Images
Instantaneous Von Mises stress and element centroid images are now available.
Information
The content of the Information box has been enhanced.
Exporting Data
You can export entities with no associated value in a .txt or .xls file.
General
Compartment and Access
Electrical Cableway Routing
You need to set an environment variable to display the error message "180 degree turn is
found in the cableways connected to the cableway element", while routing from the
database.
The analyze cross document connections and manage document links functions now have an
Open button that allows users to open linked documents that are in ENOVIA.
Electrical Connectivity Diagrams
Electrical Harness Flattening
General Parameters
The Regular mode calculates angles in predefined target directions depending upon
the number of bundle segments and branches.
Electrical Harness Installation
Adding Light Protective Coverings
After customization, the parameters and relations are displayed in a separate node in
the specification tree.
Arranging Bundle Segments in Supports
Allows you to show or hide the parameters of the of the bundle segment in the
geometry area.
The migration mode is automatically switched to As Result when migration causes
shape or length modifications in the As Spec mode in case of a flexible curve of the
bundle segment.
Electrical Library
Allows you to access filebased XML files even in the ENOVIA environment.
Stores the part number of the CATPart in its file name after the migration process.
Deletes all the unnecessary created files after the migration from V4 to V5 process.
Creating Protective Coverings
Allows you to customize the parameters and attributes for protection parts.
Allows you to migrate V4 protections as V5 internal protections.
Editing Electrical Properties
The Reference Designator attribute can be synchronized using a knowledgeware rule
when it is changed in either electrical or mechanical application systems.
Electrical Wire Routing
Allows you to access filebased XML files even in the ENOVIA environment
Automatically Routing Wires and Wire Groups
Allows you to route wires though devices and assemblies.
Electrical Package in Knowledge Expert
Returns the name/part number of the end device connected from or to the wire. Also,
checks for the validity of the bundle segment diameter.
A setting allows you to find parts during parts placement by using the compatibility table, or
by using values in your design.
Hanger Design
HVAC Design
The option "Update adjacent segments direction" in the Offset Segment dialog box allows
you to change the direction of adjacent segments when you are making a segment parallel
to a reference plane.
HVAC Diagrams
Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
Piping Design
When you are generating an isometric drawing, the generated object obtains nominal size
from the pipe dimension table. The column IsoGenSize needs to have values added to it.
Plant Layout
Raceway and Conduit Design
Ship Structure Detail Design
New Functionalities
During ENOVIA Integration, the Applicative Domain and Applicative Type attributes are
assigned specific values. These values can be used for searching, querying, and filtering
data.
You can use the End Cut command to Place End Cuts on profiles, such as stiffeners,
stiffeners on a free edge, and beams. You can also Edit and Delete End Cuts and Place End
Cuts on Multiple Profiles by using this command.
You can Define Built-in End Cuts by assigning appropriate values to the built-in end cut
parameters.
While creating a stiffener, you can select the Fast Preview check box in the Stiffener Dialog
Box, which lets you preview stiffener creation.
The Effect of Openings on Stiffeners explains how openings are organized and how these
impact the stiffeners.
When generating Graphic Replacement for Beams, Plates, and Stiffeners you can compute
AcrossSide parameters in Logical and FTA section modes. The end cut symbol applied on
the extremity of a beam depends on the 3D parameter value.
When Placing Small Assemblies, such as chocks, you can use the Display all inputs check
box to manually select the faces of the shape required as input.
You can define and modify the orientation of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams by Using
Section Manipulators in your design.
You can also Multi-edit Material Properties of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams. You can
also Multi-edit Material Properties of Plates.
When defining standard or contextual End Cuts based on a User Defined Feature, you need
to follow the naming conventions.
New Functionalities
Mesh Parts, Properties, and Materials task explains how you can obtain section parameters
of mesh parts for analysis by using the Manage Section CATPart command.
The computed attributes, IsASuperObject, SupportOffset, and SupportedPlate are added to
the List of Attributes. These attributes help in filtering your search results.
During ENOVIA Integration, the Applicative Domain and Applicative Type attributes are
assigned specific values. These values can be used for searching, querying, and filtering
data.
You can Generate Shell Expansion Drawings by using the Shell Expansion drawing
command. This drawing is generated by expanding the shell plate surfaces in the transverse
direction.
You can use the End Cut command to Place End Cuts on profiles, such as stiffeners,
stiffeners on a free edge, and beams. You can also Edit and Delete End Cuts and Place End
Cuts on Multiple Profiles by using this command.
You can Define Built-in End Cuts by assigning appropriate values to the built-in end cut
parameters.
While creating a stiffener, you can select the Fast Preview check box in the Stiffener Dialog
Box, which lets you preview stiffener creation.
The Effect of Openings on Stiffeners task explains how openings are organized and how
these impact the stiffeners. In SFD, a stiffener is not split into more child stiffeners as a
result of the opening.
When generating Graphic Replacement for Beams, Plates, and Stiffeners you can compute
AcrossSide parameters in Logical and FTA section modes. The end cut symbol applied on
the extremity of the beam depends on the 3D parameter value.
You can define and modify the orientation of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams by Using
Section Manipulators in your design.
You can also Multi-edit Material Properties of profiles, such as stiffeners and beams. You can
also Multi-edit Material Properties of Plates.
When defining standard or contextual End Cuts based on a User Defined Feature, you need
to follow the naming conventions.
Systems Routing
System Space Reservation
Tubing Design
Tubing Diagrams
Waveguide Design
Waveguide Diagrams
Circuit Board Design
New Functionalities
Part Operation:
Corner Probing,
3/5-Axis Converter:
Roughing
for pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular
approach for automatic macros,
Plunge Milling
(guide defined by faces boundaries, zig-zag motif defined by either two points or one
point and an axis),
in Between contours mode, with a constant 2D stepover, the offset on guides can be
applied to stops.
the Reverse Machining Conditions command inverts the Climb and Conventional
cutting modes.
Spiral Milling
Advanced Machining
New Functionalities
It is now possible to compute and visualize the input/output intermediate stock for
milling and turning operations.
Part Operation
Corner Probing,
Enhancements brought to multi-axis machining operations
Tool axis guidance for multi-axis machining operations

A Lead angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy for multi-axis
sweeping operations, multi-axis isoparametric operations, multi-axis contour-driven
operations and multi-axis curve operations.
A new strategy Normal to drive surface has been added to multi-axis sweeping
operations, multi-axis isoparametric operations and multi-axis contour-driven
operations.
Multi-axis Contour-Driven
Macros for 5-axis machining operations
Add Circular motion is very useful in return in a level macros of tube machining, when
the Guiding strategy is set to Along guide.
Enhancements brought to 3-axis machining operations
3/5-Axis Converter:
Roughing
for pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular
Plunge Milling
point and an axis),
in Between contours mode, with a constant 2D stepover, the offset on guides can be
applied to stops.
the Reverse Machining Conditions command inverts the Climb and Conventional
cutting modes.
Spiral Milling
Enhancements brought to 2.5-axis machining operations

A helical interpolation instruction can now be generated in the output file (APT source
and Clfile) for machining operations which support helical tool motion. These
operations are Thread Milling, Circular Milling in Helical mode, Sequential Groove with
Helical motions, and Profile Contouring defined with a Helix tool path style.
This enhancement allows the user to create multiple passes (rough and finish) for
Thread Milling and Circular Milling in Helical mode, and provides capability to create a
spring pass. The user no longer needs to create separate operations for rough, finish
and spring passes.
This enhancement enables the user to select different tool axes for multiple points in a
single operation, and simplifies the selection procedure.
This enhancement gives user a wider selection of cutting tools on the following
machining operations: Circular Milling, Countersinking, Counter Boring, Sequential
Axial, Sequential Groove, and Pocketing.
Lathe Machining
New capability to define a tool axis on each Turning operation. This allows the B-axis
orientation to be managed and eliminates the need for a tool change activity.
A new C-axis inversion option on the Strategy tab page of the Machining Operation
editor enables a C-axis rotation (0/180 degrees) without requiring a tool change
activity. This allows machining of different areas (front and back areas of a part, or
part on main spindle and part on a counter-spindle) using the same tool assembly.
Only the tool orientation (inversion) differs when machining the different areas or
parts.
This enhancement allows automatic generation of ROTABL and TLAXIS statements
whenever there is change-over between Turning and Milling Operations.
Part Operation:
Tool axis guidance:
operations.
Contour-Driven
Macros
New Functionality
Power Machining:
For pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular
Part Operation
This enhancement is provided by the Use Spindle Axis system according to the
Spindle involved on the Machining Operation checkbox in the Option tab of the
Part Operation editor for a Multi-slide lathe machine or a Mill-Turn machine.
If this check box is selected, tool tip points are computed based on the spindle that is
set on the machining operation.
If this check box is not selected, the main spindle axis is used. This is determined by
the default reference machining axis system set on the Part Operation.
New Functionalities
Previously, the creation of Milling Machines and Milling Heads, with the capability to do
a head change during simulation, was not supported. This functionality enables to
create such machines to be used in simulation. It allows to create a new Milling
Machine Head, which can then be inserted into the milling machine CATProduct.
This section describes how to create, modify and delete multiple tool and work-piece
mount points on milling machines, using the Create Mount Point command.
New Functionality
This functionality allows you to simulate Milling machines with interchangeable heads,
thus enabling to verify NC tool paths for travel limits, collisions and modify if
necessary.
This provides the ability to mount the workpiece on a Milling machine bed or Mill-Turn
machine with respect to a user-selected machining axis system.
For Mill-Turn Simulation, this enhancement allows you to define Machine Instruction
activities on Turrets.
This functionality allows you to associate and persist a machine configuration with a
particular tool path point, from within the Modify Tool Path dialog box. This machine
configuration will be applied during machine simulation, when that particular tool path
point is to be reached.
This provides support to simulate machine motion with Integrated Material Removal
for Milling and Mill Turn machines.
This enhancement to feedrates is integrated to the Area Modification command of the
tool path editor and works on one or several tool paths. Tool path editor is available
on APT imports and milling operations. Tool paths can be modified partially or globally.

This enhancement enables Tool Path edition on manufacturing data from V4 NC MILL
models.

This enhancement enables merging several PP instructions and editing PP words inside
a tool path.

This enhancement provides a number of usability improvements such as improved
error messages; open fixtures support; extended support of turning tool holders; save
CATProduct at the same location as the Process; interruptible progress bar; capability
to disconnect non cutting diameter; and support of probing operations.

This enhancement provides a number of improvements for transition feedrates. In
particular, you can now locally set the feedrate for a transition path to a machining
operation B from a machining operation A or from a tool change activity. This is done
by selecting the Transition check box in the Machining Operation dialog box for
operation B.

This enhancement provides a new Head Change command in the Auxiliary
Operations tool bar.
Clicking on this command inserting a new Head Change activity in the program, if an
NC machine with at least one head is assigned to the Part Operation.

Prior to this release, Post Processor (PP) word table names were not listed in an order,
thus making it difficult for the user to locate a PP word table. This enhancement
addresses this usability issue and lists the PP word tables in an alphanumerically
sorted order. Controller Emulator and Post Processor selections are also listed in
sorted order.

This highlight improves the message issued after NC data output generation by
quantifying the number of errors/warnings along with success/failure information.

Prior to this release, the Replace Tool contextual command could be used to replace
the tool of selected Machining Operations. This enhancement allows the tool assembly
of selected operations to be replaced.

This enhancement allows the following additional parameters to be accessed in the
Process Table: Tool Number, Corrector Id, Corrector Number, and Radius Number.
The tool number can be edited.
Prismatic Machining
New Functionality
and spring passes.
This enhancement provides the capability to create axial machinable features
corresponding to existing Technological Results of holes of the selected body.
New Functionality
is now available.
Graphic properties
DMU Composites Review
Deleting Joints

DMU Navigator
No enhanced functionalities in this release.
DMU Optimizer
DMU Space Analysis
Sectioning

You can now export sectioning results to VPM Navigator using the Open and Export
command available in the Result tab in the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
Polyline results have been improved and thus increased the quality of a smoothed
curve.

Interference object is now integrated within VPM Navigator (you can thus perform
open, send to and delete operations).
New Functionalities
A better way to display the results in 3D, each segment results are highlighted in the
list when the related segment in the 3D model is selected.
This provides a more realistic behavior of the Biomechanics Analysis by allowing the
use of loads positioned on segments other then just the hands. Therefore,
Biomechanics Analysis can be applied on manikin having loads on shoulders, forearms
and back.
For a more complete analysis of the human biomechanics Results a new analysis will
cover both wrists in flexion-extension and Radial-Ulnar deviation
Human Builder
New Functionalities
Displaying Balance
This displays the support polygon of manikin's balance in the viewer. The color of the
support polygon will change from green to red if the manikin loses his balance.
Choosing the color of the manikin referential for each manikin enables the client to
differentiate them and to make sure that it doesn't blend with the environment.
Auto Grasp Offset
The need for this highlight comes from wanting more control over an existing function
that automatically generates a grasp posture of the hand by checking the collision
between the hand and one or several objects to be grasped. A new option would allow
you to edit the offset that control the reaching position of the hand which is currently
automatically set to a default value.
Knowledge Advisor
R19-Knowledge Language improvements
The improvement adds new functions/methods in the Engineering Knowledge
Language. With the new Knowledge functions you will be able to add two lists, create
a list by extracting information from existing list, sort, delete and remove the
duplicate element from the list.
Product Engineering Optimizer
Product Knowledge Template
ENOVIA Solutions Version 5 Release 19
● Application Desktop
● Change Management
● EBOM Detailing and Configuration
● Lifecycle Applications Roles Guide
● Product Interference Management
ENOVIA VPM LifeCycle Products

● Engineering Change Management Web

● Lifecycle Administration
ENOVIA V5 VPM Solutions

● VPM Navigator
● Supply Chain Engineering Exchange
ENOVIA 3d com
● ENOVIA 3d com
● MultiPDM CDM/VPM Plug-in
ENOVIA DMU Products

● Human Builder
● Photo Studio
ENOVIA MULTICAx Products

ENOVIAVPM
● ENOVIAVPM Installation & Administration
● ENOVIAVPM User
Print Solution
New Functionalities
Customizing Search Drop-Down Objects
The search type list for parts, documents and change management objects can be modified to
remove the default object types and/or add new customized types. For more information, refer
to:
● Customizing Search Drop-Down Objects

Change Management
Enhancements
Creating a New Version of a Change Order
You must have permission to create a change order, and to version a change order, in order to
create a new version of a change order.
Creating a Product Specification Affected Object

A product specification linked to a change order of type Servicehas a special lifecycle. This
lifecycle now includes a new Not Incorporated stage.
Engineering Lifecycle
New Functionalities
Load Impacting Instances - All Levels
When working with Assembly Requirements Model (ARM) instances it is
helpful to determine which instances are impacted by various parts, or other
ARM instances. Now you can find out all the impacted instances, not just the
first level. For more information, refer to Loading Impacting Instances in
ENOVIA.
Deleting Multiple Configuration Handlers

Occasionally, you may need to delete several configuration handlers. Having
to delete each configuration handler individually is inconvenient and time-
consuming. If you have permission to delete configuration handlers, you can
delete multiple configuration handlers from the search results at one time.
For more information, refer to Deleting Multiple Configuration Handlers.
Customizing the Operations Panel to Include a Keep

Column
Occasionally, you may move or replace numerous part instances, and want to
keep the existing effectivity for the new part instances. As a result, you will
be assigning a null effectivity to the original part instances. This operation
could be performed manually, but you would have to generate each
modification and effectivity separately. Instead, you can customize the
Operations Panel to include a "Keep" column in the Operations window. You
can make a selection in this column and have the system automatically
generate a modification with the same effectivity of the object that has been
moved or replaced in your product structure. For more information, refer to
Customizing the Operations Panel.
Wide Cut Support when Cutting Part Instances

When cutting a part instance from a configured product, you may perform a
wide cut, in which the starting point of the cut, the ending point of the cut, or
both fall outside the boundaries of the effectivity or action associated with
that part instance. For more information, refer to Copying, Cutting, and
Pasting part Instances.
Enhancements
Larger Description Field
The Description field in the Part Editor and the Product Editor now displays 39
characters instead of 24.
Parent PRC and Parent II Attributes are Public

The Parent PRC and Parent II attributes are now public and can be viewed on
the Part Instance properties page and in the Search Results for Part
Instances.
Working with NULL Effectivities

You can perform the following functions on part instances having NULL
effectivity:
● Replace
● Create a New Version
● Move a part instance within CATIA
Document Links
The type of link connecting a document to its parent object can be
determined visually in the Documents Tab. For more information, refer to
Inserting a Document into the Product Structure.
Extend Effectivity Security

To use the Extend Effectivity functionality, you must have the proper
privilege. For more information, refer to Extend Instance Effectivity.
Translating Effectivity Domain Information

Effectivity domain information is stored in the database in language-neutral
form (ENGLISH). When this domain information is displayed, it is converted
to the user's specific language settings. This allows users with different
language environments to use the same domain or configuration information.
For more information, refer to Translating Effectivity Domain Information.
Ignore Unsolved Operations

While working with a product, you can filter the instances contained in the
product based on the various configurations. Occasionally, this may include
instances that have unsolved operations. When defining the configuration
filter, you can use the Ignore Unsolved Operations option to determine
which instances with unresolved operations are filtered in and which are
filtered out. For more information, refer to Ignoring Unsolved Operations
When Filtering.
Deleting CATIA Reports

When you delete a CATIA workpackage report, the Template document and
Query document are not deleted. The Template and Query documents are
still present in the database and are available for generating other CATIA
workpackage reports. For more information, refer to Deleting CATIA Reports
and Generating and Viewing CATIA Reports.
Roles Guide
The Licensing Matrix spreadsheet for new licensing information has been
updated.
Using Product Interference Management in Batch Mode (ENOVClashUpdate)
The ENOVClashUpdate batch now supports the -delete option as well as
the following arguments:
-group1, -group2, -context1, -context2, -length1, -length2.
Supported Scenarios
The work package mode is now fully supported with -clean, -fullclean, -
check and -delete options.
64-bit Architecture Support for both the Clash Server and Client on UNIX/AIX
The ENOVIA clash server is now supported on a 64-bit architecture (32
bits on a 64-bit computer) and launches the ITFCheck process (64 bits
on a 64-bit computer).
32-bit Architecture Support for both the Clash Server and Client on Windows
The ENOVIA clash server is now supported on 32-bit architecture (32
bits on a 32-bit computer and launches the ITFCheck process (32 bits
on a 32-bit computer).
New Functionalities
Managing Groups and Contexts with the ENOVClashUpdate Batch
You can now take advantage of the group and context capabilities
(respectively GCO and PVS) when running the ENOVClashUpdate batch.
Installing the Clash Server on Windows (under construction)
The PIM installation procedure is now fully implemented.
Installing the Clash Server on Unix (under construction)
Engineering Change Management Web
Product
Enhancements
A product specification linked to a change order of type Service has a special lifecycle. This
lifecycle now includes a new Not Incorporated stage.

You must have permission to create a change order, and to version a change order, in order to
create a new version of a change order.
Lifecycle Administration Guide
New Functionality
VPM Product Editor Administration Guide
Iteration Filtering for Document Replication
Iteration filtering allows the exchange of the latest iteration of a design

between the two sites (emitting and receiving) without the older iterations of
that same design.
Adding Parent Info to the Properties Page and Search Results
Part Instance or a Product Instance can be made available for viewing in the
properties view, search results, etc, by including one or both attributes in
masks defined in the APPLI.custo file. Refer to the link above for more
information.
Using the Configuration Prefilter
When an expand/filer process is performed with a configuration filter, first, all

instances that pass other non-configuration filters such as attribute, volume,
etc. are retrieved from the database. Refre to the link above for more
information.
ReplicationPackageManage process
This process allows you to change the status, delete and examine the
contents of replication packages without having an administrator privileges.
New information is also displayed in the Replication Package Manager
window:
● Target Site information has been added in Replication Packages.
● Site Transfer Ownership information has been added in Replication
Requests.
VPM Lifecycle Navigator Web Administration

Supporting CATProduct Schematic
In order to generate CATProduct Schematic (light objects) properly at

opening in the 3D viewer, the DMU3DXMLTESSEL variable must be created by
an administrator.
VPM Navigator
New Functionalities
Creating a New Revision with New Revision Command
You can now create a revision to non-CATIA documents using this new
contextual menu command.
Saving CATIA Instance Information in ENOVIA V5 VPM

This task shows you how the following aspects of the instances in your CATIA
session can be saved in ENOVIA V5 VPM using attribute mapping.
● Hidden objects.
● Color of objects.
● Visualize in Bill of Materials setting.
● Visualize the product or part instances in a drafting view.
Memory Management
Memory Warning and Memory Stopper are used to warn you (the user) if
maximal allowed use of memory is reached when saving a large data to
ENOVIA V5 VPM, and opening of the data from the ENOVIA V5 VPM.
Creating and Using Customized Non-CATIA Documents

See this topic for information on creating and managing customized non-
CATIA documents.
Linking Revisioning of Documents with Revisioning of Part

Versions|
You can now forbid the revisioning of a Document Revision without also
revisioning the Part Version. This option is controlled by a checkbox under
the ENOVIA V5 VPM Options.
Filtering on Attributes Directly from the VPM Navigator Tree
This command gives you the ability to make a direct selection in the VPM
Navigator or CATIA Product Structure tree of part instances for use as filter
attributes.
Alternate Save: Saving Documents as Alternatives to the

Original
See this topic for information on saving a document in ENOVIA that has been
modified from the original as a new document while leaving the original one
intact.
Discard Save
Using the Discard Save command, you will have the option to select or
reject part of your data that is available for saving. See the above link for
more information.
Locate Instances from the Save Panel

New options are introduced in the Save Dialog box that will provide more
information about the objects being saved.
Automatic Data Save/Backup

When working with documents saved as Publications Exposed in ENOVIA V5
VPM, you have an option to have your data automatically backed up in a
temporary directory in the case your session is unexpectedly interrupted.
See this topic for more information.
Changing Status
Promote/Demote functionality is available for part versions, part instances
and document revisions and can be found in the contextual menu of an object
displayed in VPM Navigator or search results window.
Authorize Document Revision According to Status

A new setting for authorizing revision according to status of documents is available. See this
topic for more information.
VPM Subscriptions Toolbar

A new toolbar has been added to include:
● Publish/Subscribe
● Unsubscribing from an Event.
● Retrieving Published Events.
Update Links to exclude documents

You have the ability to make the intersite transfer of a subset assembly by
determining which document has changed since the last exchange, and only
sent the delta of the modified document instead of the whole assembly. All
the pointers of the document will be resolved on the receiving side without
breaking the structure layout.
Forbid the Revisioning of Documents without the Versioning

of its Parts
A new ENOVIA V5 VPM option was created which will enforce the versioning of a Part in case its
own document is being revisioned. See ENOVIA V5 VPM Options to learn more about this
function.
Working with DMU Applicative Data

You can save DMU applicative data directly under the PVR. See this topic for
more information.
The CV5EV5_ADD_WITHOUT_PARENT_LOCK parameter is replaced by the
new CV5EV5_PARENT_LOCK_REQUIRED parameter.
Editing Filter and Search Captures
You can now edit or re-use an existing filter or search capture by executing
and loading it, changing the search or filter settings, and then saving the
modified capture under the same name or a different name.
MultiSite History tab

MultiSite History tab is provided for you to view the owner sites of a
particular object in your tree.
The name of the current lock owner is provided in the error

message dialog box when Save operation fails due to the
insufficient lock privileges.
Displaying Maturity in the Save Panel
The maturity status of objects can now be viewed in the VPM Navigator Save
panel.
Sending GCO's to new VPM Navigator sessions

Functionality of the Send to new VPM Navigator command was extended
to include GCO's.
Most Recently Used PVS's and Documents

Each time the Execute Capture and Open command is run, the used PVS is
added to the most recently used list where it can be easily accessed later.
Documents are similarly stored when using Open>Out of
Context>Document commands.
Opening Objects with and without visible children

Functionality is enhanced to allow you to open objects for editing in context
with only visible children or with all children.
Execute and Open Command for Filter Captures

From search results, it is now possible to execute a saved filter capture and
open it from one command. See Creating, Editing and Using Saved Filters
from the above link.
Editing and Overwriting Captures (PVS's)

Saved filters can now be edited and overwritten. See this topic for more
information.
Unlocking Instances Only in the Save Dialog Box

See this topic for information on unlocking instances and references from
within the Save dialog box.
Force Lock/Unlock Choice at Save

A new option is available in ENOVIA V5 VPM Options that defines if the user
will be required to select the lock policy at the time of a save of data. In
addition to the above link, also see Saving Objects for more information.
Document Management Enhancements

Several new enhancements to how documents are managed in VPM Navigator
were added:
● The Documents tab under Part Properties now has the same
contextual menu as search results and from this tab you may now
Attach and Detach documents from the product structure as well
as Refresh the list of objects. See Showing Documents in Part
Properties.
● Non-CATIA documents are open and viewed in their native editor
through the Open command. See Opening Objects.
● In a VPM Navigator session, you can hover over a highlighted
document attached to a part to see information about that
document. See Attaching an Existing Document.
Product View Result Enhancements

Several new enhancements were added to improve the usability of Product
View Results:
● Create a new PVR from an existing PVR

● Product View Results tab for PVR creation options
● Create Nested PVR's
● Expanded PVR usability in Batch Mode
Customize Mask Definition to Display Parent PRC and Item

Instance Information
Parent PRC and Parent ItemInstance information can be displayed in Search
Results and Properties view instead of in a VPM Navigator or Product Editor
session by modifying mask definition files. See this topic for more
information.
Improve Session Refresh Command

The enhanced capability of Refresh command allows you to retrieve the
document from the database even if you have the modified the document in
the session. Also you can visualize the iteration status of the document in the
database before you retrieve the document.
Memorize Error List Window Size

Whenever you change size of the Reporting dialog box the changes will be
stored in the CATSetting and consequent Reporting dialog box will be
opened with settings preferred by you.
Improve Search and Filter in Error List

When an error message is displayed indicating insufficient lock privileges on
an object, you can perform the Lock/Unlock operations from the Reporting
dialog box using contextual menu. Also you can search the impacted object in
the database from the Reporting dialog box by using Search in DB button.
Move Taken into Account in Refresh

The enhanced capability of Refresh Documents command updates the
modified position of an instance of a CATPart in an assembly while refreshing
the document in the session.
Displaying and Modifying Object Attributes

The Properties panel has been enhanced to allow the attaching and detaching
of documents as well as a preview of 3D geometry.
Forcing the versioning of Parts when making revisions to

associated Documents
Under Revision Options in the ENOVIA V5 VPM Options tab, you have the
option to force part versioning when saving revised Documents. See
information under Considerations About Saving under the above link.
Separate Layout Customization for Result Windows

You can also select the type of search window to which customizations can be applied. See this
topic for more information.
Lock Reference by Default

In the Lock dialog, Reference is now selected by default. See this link for
more information.
Defining Configuration Filter dialog box has been modified.

Perform Lock/Unlock functionality directly from the Error
Dialog box
Via contextual menu options, you can lock/unlock objects directly from the
Error dialog box.
Customized Actions
VPM Navigator now supports the creation and use of Customized Actions.
Display Action/Modification Chooser
You can choose an Action/Modification when you save or synchronize in VPM
Navigator. See the above link for more information.
Insert a Component from ENOVIA

The Replace Component command available in the Product Structure
workbench is enhanced to allow the selection of Parts Versions in the
document chooser when the user is connected to the database. Also, you can
now replace a component with a stored stand alone Part Version.
VPM Supply Chain Engineering
Exchange
New Functionalities
ENOVIA 3d com
In order to generate CATProduct Schematic (light objects) properly at

opening in the 3D viewer, the DMU3DXMLTESSEL variable must be created by
an administrator.
MultiPDM CDM/VPM Plug-in User Guide
New Functionalities
Working with the PSN
Using the Space Mouse in the PSN
You can now use the SpaceMouse to explore the Product Structure in
the PSN and the impact graph.
Versioning
Managing Versioning in MML Links
You can now manage versioning in MML links using the three options
Upissue, Accept and Ignore.
Configuration
Defining Effectivities Link by Link
When you want to modify the effectivity of an Action, you can check,
before validating, the compatibility of this new effectivity with the
effectivity already defined on the link concerned.
New Functionalities
A better way to display the results in 3D, each segment results are
highlighted in the list when the related segment in the 3D model is
selected.
This provides a more realistic behavior of the Biomechanics Analysis by
allowing the use of loads positioned on segments other then just the
hands. Therefore, Biomechanics Analysis can be applied on manikin
having loads on shoulders, forearms and back.
For a more complete analysis of the human biomechanics Results a new
analysis will cover both wrists in flexion-extension and Radial-Ulnar
deviation
Human Builder
New Functionalities
Displaying Balance
This displays the support polygon of manikin's balance in the viewer.
The color of the support polygon will change from green to red if the
manikin loses his balance.
Choosing the color of the manikin referential for each manikin enables
the client to differentiate them and to make sure that it doesn't blend
with the environment.
Auto Grasp Offset
The need for this highlight comes from wanting more control over an
existing function that automatically generates a grasp posture of the
hand by checking the collision between the hand and one or several
objects to be grasped. A new option would allow you to edit the offset
that control the reaching position of the hand which is currently
none
Real Time Rendering
New Functionality
Variant Management
Allows you to apply material variants to an object and also to browse for
a variant.
Car Paint and External Shader
Allows you to define Car Paint and External shaders.
Creating a Standard Environment
Allows you to select and apply wall textures to an environment.
Applying a Material
Allows you to apply complex materials to objects.
Applying and Rendering Shadow Stickers
With this enhancement you can apply shadow stickers to the models
Creating Object-to-Object Shadows
Allows you to project several shadows at the same time.
Applying Material Properties
Object shadows are now compatible CgFx shaders on Windows platform.
Photo Studio
Rendering Images
Allows you to store your favorite scenes, or customize a scene and save
it.
New Functionality
Generate Track command has been added
Users can select edges on the geometry, and generate tracks from the
edges. Once the initial track has been generated from the edges, the
track can be modified.
Dragging the slider on the Player pop-up toolbar enables users to see the
track simulation
In previous releases, users could not see the effects of attaching a
section to a track until after a simulation was run; now users can see it
as they move the slider.
The Player toolbar has a distance parameter
Users can interpolate along the track with a set distance. Also, the
Sampling Step option in the Player Parameters dialog box can be set
for distance as well as time.
When you select Shuttle, the Preview window now has a Tree tab
This tab enables users to see the names of all parts selected as part of
the shuttle. Users can still preview the graphical representations of the
parts via the 3D tab.
Shuttles may contain multiple groups and manufacturing assemblies
In previous releases, shuttles could only contain one group and a parent
shuttle could reference another shuttle. In this release, each group is
treated as an object, and users can select as many objects as they like.
Similarly, users can include manufacturing assemblies within shuttles.
When you click the Activate Analysis button from the Track dialog box, you
can edit the analysis object
Users have the option to edit one analysis object at a time while using
the Track command; they do not have to exit the Track command and
use the analysis commands.
The format options for Generate a Video have changed
VFW Codec and DirectShow Filter have replaced Microsoft AVI and
Microsoft MPEG.
Snap Sensitivity in the DMU Manipulation tab has been altered
The default value for the Orientation option has been changed to 20
deg.
Deleting Joints
The Delete All Children option is now selected by default in the Delete
dialog box.
DMU Space Analysis
Sectioning
You can now export sectioning results to VPM Navigator using the Open
and Export command available in the Result tab in the Sectioning
Definition dialog box.
Polyline results have been improved and thus increased the quality of a
smoothed curve.

Interference object is now integrated within VPM Navigator (you can
thus perform open, send to and delete operations).
MULTICAx AD Plug-in
ACIS R16 and R17 are now supported on Windows 32 bits.
MULTICAx PD Plug-in
Indirect Mode is no longer available.
MULTICAx SE Plug-in
Parasolid V17 and V18 and SolidEdge 20 are now supported on Windows 32 bits.
SolidEdge .psm files are supported.
MULTICAx SolidWorks Plug-in
Parasolid V17 and V18 and SolidWorks 2007 and 2008 are now supported on Windows 32 bits.
MULTICAx UD Plug-in
Parasolid V17 and V18 are now supported on Windows 32 bits.
ENOVIAVPM Installation &
Administration Guide
New Functionalities
Multisite Management
Delta Replication
For both CATIA V5 and CATIA V4, you can define what open modes are
to be selected by default (depending on their availability).
New Declaration Parameters

catcdma.VPM.INTEROP.SINGLE_CONF
catcdma.VPM.MML.LOST_PUBLICATION_EVOLUTION
ENOVIAVPM User Guide
New Functionalities
Using CATIA V5 Multimodel Link Dependencies
Icon Display
A declaration parameter allows a more consistent approach to the
display, in the PSN and the MML graph, of a broken link to a published
V4 entity or V5 Publication.
Interoperability
Mapping CDMA and Assembly Attributes
You can now declare new attributes in addition to the five attributes you
can map under PART_LIST and the three attributes you can map under
CATIA_MODEL.
Print Solution
New Functionalities
Customizing Search Drop-Down Objects
The search type list for parts, documents and change management objects can be
modified to remove the default object types and/or add new customized types. For more
information, refer to:
● Customizing Search Drop-Down Objects

Change Management
Enhancements
You must have permission to create a change order, and to version a change order, in
order to create a new version of a change order.
A product specification linked to a change order of type Servicehas a special lifecycle.

This lifecycle now includes a new Not Incorporated stage.
Engineering Lifecycle
New Functionalities
Load Impacting Instances - All Levels
When working with Assembly Requirements Model (ARM) instances it is helpful to determine
which instances are impacted by various parts, or other ARM instances. Now you can find
out all the impacted instances, not just the first level. For more information, refer to Loading
Impacting Instances in ENOVIA.
Deleting Multiple Configuration Handlers
Occasionally, you may need to delete several configuration handlers. Having to delete each
configuration handler individually is inconvenient and time-consuming. If you have
permission to delete configuration handlers, you can delete multiple configuration handlers
from the search results at one time. For more information, refer to Deleting Multiple
Configuration Handlers.
Customizing the Operations Panel to Include a Keep Column
Occasionally, you may move or replace numerous part instances, and want to keep the
existing effectivity for the new part instances. As a result, you will be assigning a null
effectivity to the original part instances. This operation could be performed manually, but
you would have to generate each modification and effectivity separately. Instead, you can
customize the Operations Panel to include a "Keep" column in the Operations window. You
can make a selection in this column and have the system automatically generate a
modification with the same effectivity of the object that has been moved or replaced in your
product structure. For more information, refer to Customizing the Operations Panel.
Wide Cut Support when Cutting Part Instances
When cutting a part instance from a configured product, you may perform a wide cut, in
which the starting point of the cut, the ending point of the cut, or both fall outside the
boundaries of the effectivity or action associated with that part instance. For more
information, refer to Copying, Cutting, and Pasting part Instances.
Enhancements
Larger Description Field
The Description field in the Part Editor and the Product Editor now displays 39 characters
instead of 24.
Parent PRC and Parent II Attributes are Public
The Parent PRC and Parent II attributes are now public and can be viewed on the Part
Instance properties page and in the Search Results for Part Instances.
Working with NULL Effectivities
You can perform the following functions on part instances having NULL effectivity:
● Replace
● Create a New Version
● Move a part instance within CATIA
Document Links
The type of link connecting a document to its parent object can be determined visually in the
Documents Tab. For more information, refer to Inserting a Document into the Product
Structure.
Extend Effectivity Security
To use the Extend Effectivity functionality, you must have the proper privilege. For more
information, refer to Extend Instance Effectivity.
Translating Effectivity Domain Information
Effectivity domain information is stored in the database in language-neutral form

(ENGLISH). When this domain information is displayed, it is converted to the user's specific
language settings. This allows users with different language environments to use the same
domain or configuration information. For more information, refer to Translating Effectivity
Domain Information.
Ignore Unsolved Operations
While working with a product, you can filter the instances contained in the product based on
the various configurations. Occasionally, this may include instances that have unsolved
operations. When defining the configuration filter, you can use the Ignore Unsolved
Operations option to determine which instances with unresolved operations are filtered in
and which are filtered out. For more information, refer to Ignoring Unsolved Operations
When Filtering.
Deleting CATIA Reports
When you delete a CATIA workpackage report, the Template document and Query document
are not deleted. The Template and Query documents are still present in the database and
are available for generating other CATIA workpackage reports. For more information, refer
to Deleting CATIA Reports and Generating and Viewing CATIA Reports.
Roles Guide
The Licensing Matrix spreadsheet for new licensing information has been updated.
Using Product Interference Management in Batch Mode (ENOVClashUpdate)
The ENOVClashUpdate batch now supports the -delete option as well as the following
arguments:
-group1, -group2, -context1, -context2, -length1, -length2.
Supported Scenarios
The work package mode is now fully supported with -clean, -fullclean, -check and -
delete options.
64-bit Architecture Support for both the Clash Server and Client on UNIX/AIX
The ENOVIA clash server is now supported on a 64-bit architecture (32 bits on a 64-
bit computer) and launches the ITFCheck process (64 bits on a 64-bit computer).
32-bit Architecture Support for both the Clash Server and Client on Windows
The ENOVIA clash server is now supported on 32-bit architecture (32 bits on a 32-bit
computer and launches the ITFCheck process (32 bits on a 32-bit computer).
New Functionalities
Managing Groups and Contexts with the ENOVClashUpdate Batch
You can now take advantage of the group and context capabilities (respectively GCO
and PVS) when running the ENOVClashUpdate batch.
Installing the Clash Server on Windows (under construction)
Installing the Clash Server on Unix (under construction)
Engineering Change Management Web Product
Enhancements
A product specification linked to a change order of type Service has a special lifecycle.
This lifecycle now includes a new Not Incorporated stage.

You must have permission to create a change order, and to version a change order, in
order to create a new version of a change order.
Lifecycle Administration Guide
New Functionality
Iteration Filtering for Document Replication
Iteration filtering allows the exchange of the latest iteration of a design between the two
sites (emitting and receiving) without the older iterations of that same design.
Adding Parent Info to the Properties Page and Search Results
Part Instance or a Product Instance can be made available for viewing in the properties
view, search results, etc, by including one or both attributes in masks defined in the APPLI.
custo file. Refer to the link above for more information.
Using the Configuration Prefilter
When an expand/filer process is performed with a configuration filter, first, all instances that
pass other non-configuration filters such as attribute, volume, etc. are retrieved from the
database. Refre to the link above for more information.
ReplicationPackageManage process
This process allows you to change the status, delete and examine the contents of replication
packages without having an administrator privileges.
New information is also displayed in the Replication Package Manager window:
● Target Site information has been added in Replication Packages.
● Site Transfer Ownership information has been added in Replication Requests.
VPM Lifecycle Navigator Web Administration

In order to generate CATProduct Schematic (light objects) properly at opening in the 3D
viewer, the DMU3DXMLTESSEL variable must be created by an administrator.
VPM Navigator
New Functionalities
Creating a New Revision with New Revision Command
You can now create a revision to non-CATIA documents using this new contextual menu
command.
Saving CATIA Instance Information in ENOVIA V5 VPM
This task shows you how the following aspects of the instances in your CATIA session can be
saved in ENOVIA V5 VPM using attribute mapping.
● Hidden objects.
● Color of objects.
● Visualize in Bill of Materials setting.
● Visualize the product or part instances in a drafting view.
Memory Management
Memory Warning and Memory Stopper are used to warn you (the user) if maximal allowed
use of memory is reached when saving a large data to ENOVIA V5 VPM, and opening of the
data from the ENOVIA V5 VPM.
Creating and Using Customized Non-CATIA Documents
See this topic for information on creating and managing customized non-CATIA documents.
Linking Revisioning of Documents with Revisioning of Part Versions|
You can now forbid the revisioning of a Document Revision without also revisioning the Part
Version. This option is controlled by a checkbox under the ENOVIA V5 VPM Options.
Filtering on Attributes Directly from the VPM Navigator Tree
This command gives you the ability to make a direct selection in the VPM Navigator or CATIA
Product Structure tree of part instances for use as filter attributes.
Alternate Save: Saving Documents as Alternatives to the Original

See this topic for information on saving a document in ENOVIA that has been modified from
the original as a new document while leaving the original one intact.
Discard Save
Using the Discard Save command, you will have the option to select or reject part of your
data that is available for saving. See the above link for more information.
Locate Instances from the Save Panel
New options are introduced in the Save Dialog box that will provide more information about
the objects being saved.
Automatic Data Save/Backup
When working with documents saved as Publications Exposed in ENOVIA V5 VPM, you have
an option to have your data automatically backed up in a temporary directory in the case
your session is unexpectedly interrupted. See this topic for more information.
Changing Status
Promote/Demote functionality is available for part versions, part instances and document
revisions and can be found in the contextual menu of an object displayed in VPM Navigator
or search results window.
Authorize Document Revision According to Status
A new setting for authorizing revision according to status of documents is available. See
this topic for more information.
VPM Subscriptions Toolbar
A new toolbar has been added to include:

● Publish/Subscribe
● Unsubscribing from an Event.
● Retrieving Published Events.
Update Links to exclude documents
You have the ability to make the intersite transfer of a subset assembly by determining
which document has changed since the last exchange, and only sent the delta of the
modified document instead of the whole assembly. All the pointers of the document will be
resolved on the receiving side without breaking the structure layout.
Forbid the Revisioning of Documents without the Versioning of its Parts
A new ENOVIA V5 VPM option was created which will enforce the versioning of a Part in
case its own document is being revisioned. See ENOVIA V5 VPM Options to learn more
about this function.
Working with DMU Applicative Data
You can save DMU applicative data directly under the PVR. See this topic for more
information.

Editing Filter and Search Captures
You can now edit or re-use an existing filter or search capture by executing and loading it,
changing the search or filter settings, and then saving the modified capture under the same
name or a different name.
MultiSite History tab
MultiSite History tab is provided for you to view the owner sites of a particular object in
your tree.
The name of the current lock owner is provided in the error message
dialog box when Save operation fails due to the insufficient lock
privileges.
Displaying Maturity in the Save Panel
The maturity status of objects can now be viewed in the VPM Navigator Save panel.
Sending GCO's to new VPM Navigator sessions
Functionality of the Send to new VPM Navigator command was extended to include
GCO's.
Most Recently Used PVS's and Documents

Each time the Execute Capture and Open command is run, the used PVS is added to the
most recently used list where it can be easily accessed later. Documents are similarly
stored when using Open>Out of Context>Document commands.
Opening Objects with and without visible children
Functionality is enhanced to allow you to open objects for editing in context with only visible
children or with all children.
Execute and Open Command for Filter Captures
From search results, it is now possible to execute a saved filter capture and open it from one
command. See Creating, Editing and Using Saved Filters from the above link.
Editing and Overwriting Captures (PVS's)
Saved filters can now be edited and overwritten. See this topic for more information.
Unlocking Instances Only in the Save Dialog Box
See this topic for information on unlocking instances and references from within the Save
dialog box.
Force Lock/Unlock Choice at Save
A new option is available in ENOVIA V5 VPM Options that defines if the user will be required
to select the lock policy at the time of a save of data. In addition to the above link, also see
Saving Objects for more information.
Document Management Enhancements
Several new enhancements to how documents are managed in VPM Navigator were added:
● The Documents tab under Part Properties now has the same contextual menu as
search results and from this tab you may now Attach and Detach documents
from the product structure as well as Refresh the list of objects. See Showing
Documents in Part Properties.
● Non-CATIA documents are open and viewed in their native editor through the
Open command. See Opening Objects.
● In a VPM Navigator session, you can hover over a highlighted document attached
to a part to see information about that document. See Attaching an Existing
Document.
Product View Result Enhancements

Several new enhancements were added to improve the usability of Product View Results:
● Create a new PVR from an existing PVR

● Product View Results tab for PVR creation options
● Create Nested PVR's
● Expanded PVR usability in Batch Mode
Customize Mask Definition to Display Parent PRC and Item Instance

Information
Parent PRC and Parent ItemInstance information can be displayed in Search Results and
Properties view instead of in a VPM Navigator or Product Editor session by modifying mask
definition files. See this topic for more information.
Improve Session Refresh Command
The enhanced capability of Refresh command allows you to retrieve the document from the
database even if you have the modified the document in the session. Also you can visualize
the iteration status of the document in the database before you retrieve the document.
Memorize Error List Window Size
Whenever you change size of the Reporting dialog box the changes will be stored in the
CATSetting and consequent Reporting dialog box will be opened with settings preferred by
you.
Improve Search and Filter in Error List
When an error message is displayed indicating insufficient lock privileges on an object, you
can perform the Lock/Unlock operations from the Reporting dialog box using contextual
menu. Also you can search the impacted object in the database from the Reporting dialog
box by using Search in DB button.
Move Taken into Account in Refresh
The enhanced capability of Refresh Documents command updates the modified position of
an instance of a CATPart in an assembly while refreshing the document in the session.
Displaying and Modifying Object Attributes
The Properties panel has been enhanced to allow the attaching and detaching of documents
as well as a preview of 3D geometry.
Forcing the versioning of Parts when making revisions to associated
Documents
Under Revision Options in the ENOVIA V5 VPM Options tab, you have the option to
force part versioning when saving revised Documents. See information under
Considerations About Saving under the above link.
Separate Layout Customization for Result Windows
You can also select the type of search window to which customizations can be applied.
See this topic for more information.
Lock Reference by Default
In the Lock dialog, Reference is now selected by default. See this link for more
information.
Defining Configuration Filter dialog box has been modified.

Perform Lock/Unlock functionality directly from the Error Dialog box
Via contextual menu options, you can lock/unlock objects directly from the Error dialog box.
Customized Actions
VPM Navigator now supports the creation and use of Customized Actions.
Display Action/Modification Chooser
You can choose an Action/Modification when you save or synchronize in VPM Navigator. See
the above link for more information.
Insert a Component from ENOVIA
The Replace Component command available in the Product Structure workbench is

enhanced to allow the selection of Parts Versions in the document chooser when the user is
connected to the database. Also, you can now replace a component with a stored stand
alone Part Version.
New Functionalities
ENOVIA 3d com
In order to generate CATProduct Schematic (light objects) properly at opening in the 3D

viewer, the DMU3DXMLTESSEL variable must be created by an administrator.
MultiPDM CDM/VPM Plug-in User Guide
New Functionalities
Working with the PSN
Using the Space Mouse in the PSN

You can now use the SpaceMouse to explore the Product Structure in the PSN and the
impact graph.
Versioning
Managing Versioning in MML Links

You can now manage versioning in MML links using the three options Upissue, Accept
and Ignore.
Configuration
Defining Effectivities Link by Link

When you want to modify the effectivity of an Action, you can check, before
validating, the compatibility of this new effectivity with the effectivity already defined
on the link concerned.
New Functionalities
and back.
Human Builder
New Functionalities
Displaying Balance
Auto Grasp Offset
none
Real Time Rendering
New Functionality
Variant Management
Allows you to apply material variants to an object and also to browse for a variant.
Applying a Material
Photo Studio
Rendering Images
New Functionality
Users can select edges on the geometry, and generate tracks from the edges. Once
the initial track has been generated from the edges, the track can be modified.
Dragging the slider on the Player pop-up toolbar enables users to see the track simulation
In previous releases, users could not see the effects of attaching a section to a track
until after a simulation was run; now users can see it as they move the slider.
Users can interpolate along the track with a set distance. Also, the Sampling Step
option in the Player Parameters dialog box can be set for distance as well as time.
This tab enables users to see the names of all parts selected as part of the shuttle.
Users can still preview the graphical representations of the parts via the 3D tab.
In previous releases, shuttles could only contain one group and a parent shuttle could
reference another shuttle. In this release, each group is treated as an object, and
users can select as many objects as they like. Similarly, users can include
manufacturing assemblies within shuttles.
When you click the Activate Analysis button from the Track dialog box, you can edit the
analysis object
Users have the option to edit one analysis object at a time while using the Track
command; they do not have to exit the Track command and use the analysis
commands.
VFW Codec and DirectShow Filter have replaced Microsoft AVI and Microsoft MPEG.
The default value for the Orientation option has been changed to 20 deg.
Deleting Joints
DMU Space Analysis
Sectioning

curve.

MULTICAx AD Plug-in
MULTICAx PD Plug-in
MULTICAx SE Plug-in
Parasolid V17 and V18 and SolidWorks 2007 and 2008 are now supported on Windows 32
bits.
MULTICAx UD Plug-in
ENOVIAVPM Installation & Administration Guide
New Functionalities
Multisite Management
Delta Replication
For both CATIA V5 and CATIA V4, you can define what open modes are to be selected
by default (depending on their availability).
New Declaration Parameters

catcdma.VPM.INTEROP.SINGLE_CONF
catcdma.VPM.MML.LOST_PUBLICATION_EVOLUTION
ENOVIAVPM User Guide
New Functionalities
Using CATIA V5 Multimodel Link Dependencies
Icon Display
A declaration parameter allows a more consistent approach to the display, in the PSN
and the MML graph, of a broken link to a published V4 entity or V5 Publication.
Interoperability
Mapping CDMA and Assembly Attributes
You can now declare new attributes in addition to the five attributes you can map
under PART_LIST and the three attributes you can map under CATIA_MODEL.
ENOVIA Collaborative Enterprise Sourcing (CES)
Solutions Version 5 Release 19
Web Products
● CES Enterprise Catalog Navigator
CES Enterprise Navigator
New Functionalities
QML Attachments
You can now manage QML attachments in the Manufacturer Information.
CES Enterprise Navigator
New Functionalities
QML Attachments
You can now manage QML attachments in the Manufacturer Information.

DELMIA Solutions Version 5 Release 19
Process & Resource Detailing (V5)
● 3D Functional Tolerancing and Annotation
● Assembly Design
● DPM Assembly Process Planner
● DPM Fastening Process Planner
● DPM Machining Process Planner
● DPM Process and Resource Definition
● DPM Structure Lofting
● Electrical Harness Simulation
● Manufacturing System Definition
● Part Design
● Part Design Features Recognition
● PPR Navigator
● Sketcher
● Structure Manufacturing Preparation
● Tool Selection Assistant
● Wireframe and Surface
Factory Layout & Robotics (V5)

● Arc Welding
● Device Building
● Device Task Definition
● Manufacturing Resource Layout
● Production System Analysis
● Realistic Robot Simulation
● Robotics Offline Programming
● Standard Robot Libraries
Factory DMU (V5)

● Kinematics Simulator

Ergonomics (V5)
● Human Analysis
● Human Builder
● Human Task Simulation
Off-line Programming (V5)

● Lathe Machining
● Multi-Axis Machining
● Multi-Pockets Machining
Work Instructions (V5)

● DPM Work Instructions
● Shop Floor Viewer
● Shop Order Review
MULTICAx (V5)
● DELMIA D5 Integration
DELMIA Automation (V5)

● CSM Module and Block Editor
● CLM Device Logic Design
● CLM SFC Editor
● CLM FBD Editor
● CLM Ladder
● CSM Device Control Connection

DELMIA Infrastructure Solutions (V5)
● 3D Manufacturing for Simulation
● Data Exchange Interface
● Infrastructure
● Installation and Deployment
DELMIA Process Engineer (DPE)

DPE functionalities are listed by the manuals in which they are addressed. In most, but not all cases, manual names correspond to
product names.
● Administrative Tasks
● Automatic Line Balancing
● DPE Pooling Server and Server Tools
● ENOVIA VPM V5 - DELMIA Process Engineer Integration
● Finder
● Graphic Tools
● Manufacturing Change Management
● PPR Navigator
● Printing
● Process Planning for Body-in-White
● Settings
● Work Instructions Composer

3D Functional Tolerancing and Annotation
New Functionality
CATIA V4 dimensioning, tolerancing and annotation data can be converted to CATIA V5 FTA data part level. The converted
data is associative to the converted CATIA V5 geometry.
This capability takes into account the 3D annotations defined at product level while saving a product as 3D XML.
You can upgrade pre-R18 annotation sets using Upgrade contextual menu command, so that the FTA features have the
same behavior as those annotation sets created in R18 or later.
The FTA result features are light features that are dedicated for review and are not editable. From R18 they are generated
by Multi-cad applications or by exporting V6 products and 3D shape representations to CATIA CATProduct and CATPart
documents using the downward compatibility tool. The Result Annotation Sets can be saved as .cgr and as .3dxml. They
can also be kept in the filtered document when using the product data filtering capabilities.
Assembly Design
New Functionalities
Associativity
This capability allows you to modify CATPart geometry in assembly context without modifying the reference CATPart. The
Associativity command results in the creation of a new CATPart instantiated in the assembly, containing a copy obtained
by Copy/Paste As Result With Link operation of a chosen geometry from all/ customized components of the active
assembly.
The Define Variant Generic Product command allows to create a new variant and select the components as per the
required configuration.
Instantiate Variant
The Instantiate Variant command allows to instantiate variant generic product from file.
Replace Variant
The Replace Variant command replaces the existing solved by a new variant of another generic product.
When the assembly is saved in EV5 after the creation of assembly feature and associated part, the assembly feature is not
saved in EV5. In this case, the Add to Associated Part command aids to add bodies from existing/new source parts in the
The Allow publication in Associative Part allows for publication of the pasted bodies in the associated part in case they are
published in the source part. When Only Published Features option is selected, only published geometries from the set of
selected geometry options or custom list of geometries are imported in the associated part.
The context of import of bodies and geometries is PRC. In case of structure exposed mode (mode of the active product),
the feature is not created.
The option Disable redundancy check allows you to enable/disable the redundancy check performed while constraint
creation.
DPM Assembly Process Planner
Progress bar for AST Editor
Because the AST Editor can take awhile to open, a progress bar opens immediately after you click AST Editor. The progress
bar continuously updates the percentage of the opening that is complete, as well as providing the time remaining.
Curve fastener lengths shown in the AST Editor
The fastener lengths appear in the fastener folder names and in the PODs for fasteners in the ASG. For multiple curves,
the total length of all curves is given as the length.
DPM Fastening Process Planner
New Functionality
Display Fastener ID and Hide Fastener ID commands added
In previous releases, the command Show Fastener ID enabled you to see the fastener IDs in the 3D viewer. These two
commands have replaced that command, and enable you to show the fastener IDs associated with a product, resource,
fastener group, AST manufacturing assembly, or activity.
Curve fasteners may now be exported to a CATDrawing
In previous releases, all fasteners except curve fasteners could be exported to a CATDrawing; now all fastener types may
be exported.
DPM Machining Process Planner
Extended tool support for IPM Generation in Profile Contouring
This enhancement consists in generating the correct IPM primitive volume for a Profile Contouring operation with a conical
tool or user-representation tool.
Multi-body selection/creation for Generic Operation
This enhancement consists in offering the capability to associate several IPM primitive volumes to a Generic machining
operation.
Create IPM Part from user-defined template CATPart
This enhancement provides the capacity to initialize the IPM CATPart document from a user-defined template CATPart
document.
DPM Process and Resource Definition
New Functionalities
PRD
You can import an AST from the Manufacturing Hub

This command, available from the context menu, enables you to select on or more MAs from the Applications node, and to
import ASGs associated with the manufacturing assemblies from the Manufacturing Hub. This command does not import
child ASTs.
You can import an AST completely from the Manufacturing Hub
This command, available from the context menu, enables you to select on or more MAs from the Applications node, and to
import ASGs associated with the manufacturing assemblies and all child ASTs from the Manufacturing Hub.
Process Verification Across Resources
A new command has been added that enables you to verify resource behaviors. If the resources are linked with product
control links, you can see the behavior.
Manufacturing Hub
Multiple selection on import

Multiple items may now be selected when using Open products, resources, manufacturing assemblies and manufacturing kit
from Manufacturing Hub command.
Incremental product loading based on volume
Product, resource, manufacturing assembly and manufacturing kit data to be loaded can be selected incrementally by
specifying a volume of interest to load.
Loading the Planning Context
The Load Planning Context command allows you to quickly load products within a specified volume in DPM.
Backdrop for volume filter
A semi-transparent image of the complete end product can be displayed in the 3D window to assist in product selection
when defining a volumetric filter.
Optional display of siblings after search
When performing a search for PPR objects, a checkbox determines whether siblings are displayed in the browser window.
Change modification statements
Modification statements can be switched after loading MCM project data from the Manufacturing Hub.
Process Engineer icons in PPR tree
Process Engineer icons are now shown in the PPR tree when selecting Processes, Products, Resources, Manufacturing
Assemblies, Manufacturing Kits and Plantypes from the Manufacturing Hub.
Reordering is possible in a Resource Gantt

When you open a resource Gantt chart, the resources appear by default in order in which they are added to the PPR tree.
You can re-order the child resources of a common parent resource. The changed order remains in effect when you save
the process, either as a flat file or back to the Manufacturing Hub.
Changes you make to the column width or row height in the Gantt chart persist
When you customize the appearance of the Gantt chart, your changes remain in effect from V5 session to V5 session or
until you change them.
You can multi-select ASTs when inserting them
You can select multiple ASTs from the Insert AST dialog box.
The Compare Tool has been improved
The dialog box displays the names of the two processes being compared. A Summary tab has been added; you can alter
the order in which data in the Summary tab is displayed. Two attributes used for wire harnesses can be listed: wire gage
and harness.
Exporting Manufacturing Assemblies
When exporting a Manufacturing Assembly structure, an option is also provided to export into a hierarchy of external
products.
Copying Processes and Resources allows the copying of resource behavior
You can now copy resource behaviors as well as processes.
Show Assigned Activities command allows selection of TSAs and resource behaviors
You can select TSAs and resource behaviors when using this command. You can also now multi-select items.
List Products, Resources, and Unassigned Product commands better enable you to focus on the items in the list
Each command now enables you to right-click on a list item and select from a context menu that enables you recenter the
graph on the item, to reframe on the item, or to hide or show the item. All items you select in the list are highlighted in
the 3D view and in the PPR tree. In addition, you can use the Part Selection command in conjunction with the these list
commands to view an item or items in the the Part Selection window.
Export as CATProduct is available as a command
The Export as CATProduct command was previously only available as a context menu command; it is now available in the
DPM Planner toolbar (in DPM Process and Resource Definition) and in the PPR Tools toolbar (in DPM Process Definition). You
can now select manufacturing assemblies with this command.
Navigation option added for the Verification tab

In the past, when you were in process verification and navigated to the child level, you went to the last activity in the
level. You can elect to go to the first activity.
Output Process added to the Verification tab
Process verification now supports the relation Product Creates Product.
Consider Process Flow option added for Gantt Chart tab
You can choose to take into account the timing of resource usage in analyzing processes.
Manufacturing Hub
Optional save to the Manufacturing Hub for control flows

When you select Partial Read Only mode for a project, you have previously been required to save control flows and
detailing back to the Manufacturing Hub. This option allows you to determine whether projects opened in Partial Read
Only mode will have their control flows saved back to the Manufacturing Hub.
Specify default open mode
The default open mode (Read-Write, Partial Read Only, Read Only) can now be specified in Tools > Options.
DPM Structure Lofting
New Functionalities
You can create multiple text templates for drawing documents
You can associate different text templates with different layers.
You can generate a job order report
This new command enables you to create a job order report on an entire AssembleMacro activity.
The girth table generation has been expanded
You can select profiles that do not intersect with the datum edges; you can select multiple edges; you can use non-planar
profiles, such as twisted and rolled profile, and you can select the seam edges as reference elements.
You can save the drawings, DXFs, and XMLs in folders
You can create a new folder or use an existing one.
New options provided for tabbed openings
You can specify the tab width, lead in/lead out lengths, and the lead side when creating tabbed openings.
You can flatten multi-surfaced curved plates and create manufacturing features of the roll line items
This completes the creation flattened plate with required forming information. Once the IPM update is done, user can
extract the 2D drawings of the 3D flattened plated using Workshop Document Extraction command.
You can create an alignment mark to mark a manufacturing feature
These alignment marks are part of the joining operation.
You can create positive or negative margin items on surfaces previously containing margin items
This feature enables you to add a bevel or added material.
Customizing
The Features tab
You can select a nesting package for bevel extraction.
Electric Harness Simulation
New Functionalities
Control Points
The actions to assign, change, add and delete control points on a bundle segment have been modified. The control points
are named based on their position in the bundle segment definition curve. Two types of control points are used: user-
created and engineered.
Moving Multiple Cables
The Move Multiple Cables will allow you to manipulate the position of connectors, clamps, and routed products. As these
components are manipulated through space, the harnesses connected to these components will also move to follow the
components through space within limits of solvability.
The new functionality is available through the new Move Multiple Cables Toolbar.
Generative Shape Design
New Functionality
Reshaping Corners
Improves the blend corner(s) capability for the Edge Fillet and the Variable Fillet commands.
Autofilleting
Allows you to select any point as a reference point while creating multiple points and allows you to preview the multiple
point instances.
Allows you to drag an element from one location and drop it at another location without changing its name.
Manufacturing System Definition
Show/Refresh Hide Show Status in the System Editor
The system editor provides symbols that show whether specific resources' graphic representations are in hide or show
mode.
The Show/Refresh Hide-Show Status command displays and updates icons on in the system editor that documents the
hide/show status for parts and manufacturing Assemblies in the PPR tree/3D viewer window
New Functionalities
Replacing a Resource
Now you can replace resources with different plan types. For MSD workbench the command Replace Resource has been
added. You can replace resources with different plan types. After starting the command all authorized plan types
(associated with the father plan type) of the resource are displayed and can be replaced by each other e.g. the authorized
child plan types associated with the father plan type are a, b, and c so the resource can be replaced by resources with the
plan type a, b, or c.
Find a Fitting Resource
It is possible to search for a fitting logical resource (e.g. station, workplace). This is used to search for a fitting logical
resource (for e.g. station and workplace). It displays all resources below the selected resource on which the selected
process can be executed. The resource list can be sorted according to the remaining time. The remaining time is the
difference between the resource cycle time and the resource busy time. The resource busy time is the sum of all durations
of processes assigned to a resource.
Edit Resource Attributes
You can now edit attribute properties for the selected resource.
Part Design
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the part feature allows the activation of the last evolutions of the code
available on the current level.
This capability allows you to control a top diameter of a tapered hole by selecting in the Type tab, and then entering the
desired value in the Extension tab of a Hole Definition dialog box. Further geometry is computed by the end conditions.
For editing an edge fillet containing at least one blend corner, the Reframe On, Create by edges, Create by vertex,
Edit and Remove options are available in the Blend corner(s) contextual menu. When no corner is created, only the
Create by edges and Create by vertex commands are displayed in the contextual menu.
The new Intersection selection mode allows the definition of edge fillets at the intersection of the selected features with
current solid.
This capability allows you to edit the parameters of a feature from the specification tree by double-clicking it and changing
its value in the Edit Parameter dialog box. Dress-Up features and Advanced Dress-Up features have their parameters
displayed under their respective nodes in the specification tree.
Part Design Features Recognition
Colorization of Corners
If limiting faces of a corner have same radius, the color relative to this radius is also applied to the corner and default color
for corners is not taken into account in this case.
PPR Navigator
New Functionalities
Open and edit templates
Template projects saved in the Manufacturing Hub can now be loaded with PPR Navigator.
Process preview
The Set Process Preview options command allows you to specify options that determine which products and resources are
shown in the Preview tab when a process is selected in the PPR tree.
Applying Modification Statements when opening CMC projects
Modification Statements, Actions and Manufacturing Change Orders can be applied when opening a Change Management
Controlled (CMC) project in PPR Navigator.
Volume filtering during load
When loading a process or resource, the products loaded can now be limited by specifying a volume of interest.
Filtering products by Change Order in MCM Projects
Products in MCM projects can be filtered based on calculation models, change orders and their relations.
Creating and editing planning contexts
The Create/Edit Context command opens an empty CATProcess document in Partial Read Only mode, where the Load
Planning Context command can then be used to define and save a planning context.
Real Time Rendering
New Functionality
Variant Management
Applying a Material
Sketcher
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the sketch feature allows the activation of the last evolutions of the code
available on the current level.
Exploding Sketch
The Explode... contextual command allows you to modify a sketch obtained by Copy/Paste As Result With Link. It
converts all its as result with link geometry into regular sketched curves and points.
You can now specify your own position of a sketch feature obtained by Copy/Paste As Result With Link OR retrieve its
associativity in position with its sketch reference by using the new Positioned as reference option.
Structure Manufacturing Preparation
New Functionalities
This new command enables you to create a job order report on an entire AssembleMacro activity.
You can select profiles that do not intersect with the datum edges; you can select multiple edges; you can use non-planar
profiles, such as twisted and rolled profile, and you can select the seam edges as reference elements.
You can specify the tab width, lead in/lead out lengths, and the lead side when creating tabbed openings.
You can flatten multi-surfaced curved plates and create manufacturing features of the roll line items
This completes the creation flattened plate with required forming information. Once the IPM update is done, user can
extract the 2D drawings of the 3D flattened plated using Workshop Document Extraction command.
You can create positive or negative margin items on surfaces previously containing margin items
Customizing
The Features tab
Tool Selection Assistant
New Functionalities
Support all axis for weld gun approach direction
This option will apply to all the commands of Tool Selection assistant. Biggest impact will be seen in the way Pie reports
and section planes are positioned. The pie report and section planes will be positioned as per the approach direction defined
in the application setting.
In case of Pie report: if a particular orientation of the weld gun is accessible then, the Axis of approach will lie in the green
zone of the pie report.
In case of Section plane: By positioning the section plane as per the approach direction, you will always see the right view
in the section result window.
Capability to update Robot Posture after changing the Robot Configuration in Generate stack of 2D Sections/3D Slices at the selected
welds command
In Generate stack of 2D sections/ 3D slices at the selected weld, in current scenario once the user changes the Robot
configuration using the Robot Configurations Combo box in the dialog, the corresponding change is not reflected. This
highlight provides the functionality of changing the Robot configuration using the Robot Configuration Combo box in the
Dialog.
Change Pie report colors for Analyze Welds for Robot command
Currently, it is difficult to properly analyze the pie charts if the pie chart color resembles that of the surrounding resources
color. This enhancement would help to properly analyze the results of the welds, by changing the color.
User Interface Capabilities for Generate stack of 2D sections/ 3D slices at the selected weld
In Generate stack of 2D sections/ 3D slices at the selected weld command, currently you can't change the manufacturing
location. This highlight allows user to move the manufacturing location with a compass manipulation.
User Interface Capabilities for Analyze Welds for Robot
In the Analyze Welds for Robot command, you are able to select multiple welds by multi acquisition.
Performance improvement for Auto Gun Search Command
Auto gun search is the entry point command in process planning. It enables user to minimize amount of new tooling design
for a new product. This command performs search over very large no. of weld guns and welds to enable validation. The
improvement of performance of this command gives a significant value as; it directly reduces the time required to validate
a new product.
Support gun position changes and moving manufacturing location, during manual weldgun search
With this option, you can lock the manufacturing location by using Lock Location check box. After manipulating the
manufacturing location using compass manipulation and on checking Lock Location check box, the compass disappears and
you can't modify the manufacturing location with out un-checking the Lock location check box.
New Functionality
Allows you to select any point as a reference point while creating multiple points and allows you to preview the multiple
point instances.
Allows you to drag an element from one location and drop it at another location without changing its name.
Arc Welding
AMP Enhancements
This will provide a complete AMP solution that will allow the you to create robot-ready arc trajectories with minimal effort.
Hence, significantly improving your productivity.
Device Building
New Functionalities
Define Auxiliary Device
The Define Auxiliary Device functionality has been added to this workbench. This shows you how to add auxiliary devices to
a device, such as a rail or track. "Define Auxiliary devices" and "Attach" commands are only available if Device Task
Definition (WSU) is available."
Attach
The Attach command allows selection of Products, and the Manufacturing Assemblies. You will be able to select a
Manufacturing Assembly for attachment in addition to a product or resource.
Device Task Definition
New Functionalities
Modify Tags Orientation
Currently there is no command for orienting Manufacturing tags based on the orientation of a reference tag. Therefore this
address this issue by providing a command though which the target tags can be re-oriented based on the orientation of a
reference tag.
MT Jog Device
This shows how to efficiently analyze the position of a robot itself, that of a target Weld Tag, or that of a product having a
Weld Tag under a constraint where one or more robots or IK devices need to reach the Weld Tags, while the users can see
the changed state at real time.
Robot Cable Toolbar
This enhancement allows you to build, synchronize a Simulation module. Using Penetration Avoidance, this will avoid
penetrating into, a product during a simulation, by modifying its own shape.
Mirroring a Tag Group or Robot Task
The Mirror Tag command now gives you the capability to define the right "approach" axis by selecting the axes to mirror.
Configuration support in Auto Place
This aims at providing configuration support in Auto place. Currently Robot configuration is not considered when finding the
reachability of the Tag targets. It aims to improve the functionality of finding the reachability of the Tag targets (excluding
Robot Task) by taking the configuration into consideration.
VB API's for Move Activities
This provides flexibility to tune processes primarily driven on Forward Kin devices. You will be able to use VB API's and
subsequently modify created device move activities.
A setting allows you to find parts during parts placement by using the compatibility table, or by using values in your design.
The analyze cross document connections and manage document links functions now have an Open button that allows users to open
linked documents that are in ENOVIA.
Manufacturing Resource Layout
New Functionalities
VB Exposition of Attachments
This allows you to create attachments between products or manufacturing assemblies or between product and a
manufacturing assembly (MA) through VB script in a product/process document. This allows you to export this information
so that you can perform an analysis outside V5.
Modifying and Viewing a Resource's Footprint
This shows how to modify and view a resource's footprint. A footprint is the specification of the area occupied by the
resource on the floor.
The "Display Resource Area on Footprint" in the Edit footprint dialog box
The area will be displayed on the resource footprint in the Edit footprint dialog box.
Attaching / Detaching a Drafting View
You can visualize the resource locations residing in a 2d CATDrawing file on a footprint which benefits you to position
Robots and other objects with precision using the 2D drafting view of plant layout.
Cumulative Snap icon
The Cumulative Snap icon has been added to the Snap sub-toolbar.
VB Automation Support for V5 Attachments
This will allow you to extract information about the Parent and Child Product of any attachment within a Process or Product
Document.
Attaching Elements
The Attach command in Resource Layout Workbench, allows selection of Products, and the Manufacturing Assemblies. You
will be able to select a Manufacturing Assembly for attachment in addition to a product or resource.
Production System Analysis
Improving the Quality Reports
This highlight ensures that the SystemStatistics XML will have information for all runs run in the current session and also
improves the readability of the report generated by the "Display Statistics" command.
Saving SystemStatistics
This highlight ensures that the SystemStatistics XML will be placed in a temp folder and this XML will have to be saved
before closing the document
Realistic Robot Simulation
RRS Operations: Define, Cancel, Display
Three new V5 shared commands (operating on a user selected RRS-I connected robot) will be added to the RRS Connect
toolbar.
General Spot Activity Model
The Fanuc RRS-I interface is updated so that it internally implements the complete Fanuc Spot model when the robot is
RRS connected to a Fanuc RCS version that does not implement the Fanuc Spot model (i.e. pre-v6.31 RCS versions).
Robotics Offline Programming
New Functionalities
Saving XML Directory and File Names
This allows you to identify a default directory or file for exported Robot tasks in XML format.
Supporting Panasonic CSR Translator
This provides upload and download support for Panasonic CSR programs in DELMIA OLP.
Supporting Kawasaki AS Translator
This provides upload and download support for Kawasaki AS programs in DELMIA OLP.
Uploading Multiple Programs Simultaneously
This allows you to upload multiple programs simultaneously.
Creating Tags
To allow unambiguous tag creation, two XML attributes are available for "Tag" XML element: "PathToPart" and
"AttachmentType".
Identifying Frames of Reference for Tag Targets
A frame of reference for a tag target, relevant for both upload and download, depends on the values of both object and tool
frame profiles associated with the robot motion activity that contains that tag. There are four different cases explained in
the task.
Standard Robot Library
New Libraries
Hyandai
Panasonic
Kawasaki
New Functionality
Users can select edges on the geometry, and generate tracks from the edges. Once the initial track has been generated
from the edges, the track can be modified.
In previous releases, users could not see the effects of attaching a section to a track until after a simulation was run; now
users can see it as they move the slider.
Users can interpolate along the track with a set distance. Also, the Sampling Step option in the Player Parameters
dialog box can be set for distance as well as time.
This tab enables users to see the names of all parts selected as part of the shuttle. Users can still preview the graphical
representations of the parts via the 3D tab.
In previous releases, shuttles could only contain one group and a parent shuttle could reference another shuttle. In this
release, each group is treated as an object, and users can select as many objects as they like. Similarly, users can include
When you click the Activate Analysis button from the Track dialog box, you can edit the analysis object
Users have the option to edit one analysis object at a time while using the Track command; they do not have to exit the
Track command and use the analysis commands.
Deleting Joints
DMU Space Analysis
Sectioning

You can now export sectioning results to VPM Navigator using the Open and Export command available in the Result tab
in the Sectioning Definition dialog box.
Polyline results have been improved and thus increased the quality of a smoothed curve.

Interference object is now integrated within VPM Navigator (you can thus perform open, send to and delete operations).
New Functionalities
A better way to display the results in 3D, each segment results are highlighted in the list when the related segment in the
3D model is selected.
This provides a more realistic behavior of the Biomechanics Analysis by allowing the use of loads positioned on segments
other then just the hands. Therefore, Biomechanics Analysis can be applied on manikin having loads on shoulders, forearms
and back.
For a more complete analysis of the human biomechanics Results a new analysis will cover both wrists in flexion-extension
and Radial-Ulnar deviation
Human Builder
New Functionalities
Displaying Balance
This displays the support polygon of manikin's balance in the viewer. The color of the support polygon will change from
green to red if the manikin loses his balance.
Choosing the color of the manikin referential for each manikin enables the client to differentiate them and to make sure
that it doesn't blend with the environment.
Auto Grasp Offset
The need for this highlight comes from wanting more control over an existing function that automatically generates a grasp
posture of the hand by checking the collision between the hand and one or several objects to be grasped. A new option
would allow you to edit the offset that control the reaching position of the hand which is currently automatically set to a
default value.
Human Task Simulation
New Functionalities
Editing MoveToPosture Activities with constraints
A new command will be provided under the contextual menu of MTP and also accessible from /Edit /MoveToPosture object /
Synchronize 3D Model.
Manikin Motion speed
This highlight provides the capability to set default joint speed for each manikin segment based on ergonomic data and also
provides the capability to specify a rating on Human Task, Human Activity Group and Walk Activity.
Opening a Active Task tree
Users modify the task and child activities from within the active task set on process activity (in the Process List). Modifying
the task in the process tree provides the position of objects in the process sequence. In the current release, when users
want to modify the active task in a process activity, it is very difficult to find the active task since all tasks under the
manikin resource are displayed. This makes the selection of active task not only cumbersome but also error prone.
Reassigning Human Operations
This provides the ability to re-assign human operations within the same process document or across different process
documents.
Structural change of Operate
This highlight fits into the final assembly workflow of the user and helps in providing dependable & consistent simulation
time and reduces the time required for creating Operate activities thereby improving productivity.
Line Balancing with Human
This highlight provides the ability to set the HAG as an active task freely without any restrictions.
Collision Free Walk enhancements
True collision free walk or absolute collision free walk and indicates the collision free algorithm will account for arm
swinging, picked part (if any), current body posture for computing the walk path.
Move to Posture Activities enhancement
3D state is displayed in the MTP node under the PPR tree. The icon of MTP will be changed to indicate a 3D state has been
assigned to the MTP. Upon removing the 3D state assignment, the icon will be restored to normal.
Operate Walk with Device Move
The Operate Walking command can be used to define Operate Walking with Robot Tasks and Device Tasks.
New Functionalities
Part Operation:
Corner Probing,
3/5-Axis Converter:
Now available for all End Mill tools, TSlotters and Lollipops,
A new strategy guide is available: Normal to drive surface,
An Angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy mode,
Edit feedrates of tool paths, either locally or globally,
Edit PP Words in tool paths,
Edit V4 NCMill operations.
Roughing
Management of start point is enhanced,
For pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular approach for automatic macros,
Plunge Milling
A new grid type has been added: By Offset,
You can visualize plunging points before computing the tool path,
A new parameter is available for retract motions: Axial corner radius,
You can modify the feedrate of the clearance macro.
Improved guide definition for parallel contour mode,
(guide defined by faces boundaries, zig-zag motif defined by either two points or one point and an axis),
New Strategy side parameter for parallel contour mode,
Improved selection of faces in a polygon trap: new option to select visible faces only,
In Between contours mode, with a constant 2D stepover, the offset on guides can be applied to stops.
An offset on tool path in the machining plane is now available,
You can compute a circular interpolation of the tool path, or approximate one,
The Reverse Machining Conditions command inverts the Climb and Conventional cutting modes.
Spiral Milling
A new strategy mode has been added: Back and Forth,
A new option Always stay on bottom has been added to the Helical tool path style,
Clearance feedrate management occurs via a contextual menu,
New Ramping up to a plane macro is available.
Lathe Machining
New capability to define a tool axis on each Turning operation. This allows the B-axis orientation to be managed and
eliminates the need for a tool change activity.
A new C-axis inversion option on the Strategy tab page of the Machining Operation editor enables a C-axis rotation
(0/180 degrees) without requiring a tool change activity.
This allows machining of different areas (front and back areas of a part, or part on main spindle and part on a counter-
spindle) using the same tool assembly. Only the tool orientation (inversion) differs when machining the different areas or
parts.
This enhancement allows automatic generation of ROTABL and TLAXIS statements whenever there is change-over between
Turning and Milling Operations.
Part Operation:
Tool axis guidance:
A Lead angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy for multi-axis sweeping operations, multi-axis
isoparametric operations, multi-axis contour-driven operations and multi-axis curve operations.
A new strategy Normal to drive surface has been added to multi-axis sweeping operations, multi-axis isoparametric
operations and multi-axis contour-driven operations.
Contour-Driven
Macros
Add Circular motion is very useful in return in a level macros of tube machining, when the Guiding strategy is set to Along
guide.
New Functionality
Power Machining:
For pockets, you can create engagements from external zones, and add a circular approach for automatic macros,
Part Operation
This enhancement is provided by the Use Spindle Axis system according to the Spindle involved on the Machining
Operation checkbox in the Option tab of the Part Operation editor for a Multi-slide lathe machine or a Mill-Turn machine.
If this check box is selected, tool tip points are computed based on the spindle that is set on the machining operation.
If this check box is not selected, the main spindle axis is used. This is determined by the default reference machining axis
system set on the Part Operation.
New Functionalities
Previously, the creation of Milling Machines and Milling Heads, with the capability to do a head change during simulation,
was not supported. This functionality enables to create such machines to be used in simulation. It allows to create a new
Milling Machine Head, which can then be inserted into the milling machine CATProduct.
This section describes how to create, modify and delete multiple tool and work-piece mount points on milling machines,
using the Create Mount Point command.
New Functionality
This functionality allows you to simulate Milling machines with interchangeable heads, thus enabling to verify NC tool paths
for travel limits, collisions and modify if necessary.
This provides the ability to mount the workpiece on a Milling machine bed or Mill-Turn machine with respect to a user-
selected machining axis system.
For Mill-Turn Simulation, this enhancement allows you to define Machine Instruction activities on Turrets.
This functionality allows you to associate and persist a machine configuration with a particular tool path point, from within
the Modify Tool Path dialog box. This machine configuration will be applied during machine simulation, when that particular
tool path point is to be reached.
This provides support to simulate machine motion with Integrated Material Removal for Milling and Mill Turn machines.
This enhancement to feedrates is integrated to the Area Modification command of the tool path editor and works on one or
several tool paths. Tool path editor is available on APT imports and milling operations. Tool paths can be modified partially
or globally.
This enhancement enables Tool Path edition on manufacturing data from V4 NC MILL models.
This enhancement enables merging several PP instructions and editing PP words inside a tool path.
This enhancement provides a number of usability improvements such as improved error messages; open fixtures support;
extended support of turning tool holders; save CATProduct at the same location as the Process; interruptible progress bar;
capability to disconnect non cutting diameter; and support of probing operations.
This enhancement provides a number of improvements for transition feedrates. In particular, you can now locally set the
feedrate for a transition path to a machining operation B from a machining operation A or from a tool change activity. This
is done by selecting the Transition check box in the Machining Operation dialog box for operation B.
This enhancement provides a new Head Change command in the Auxiliary Operations tool bar.
Clicking on this command inserting a new Head Change activity in the program, if an NC machine with at least one head is
assigned to the Part Operation.
This enhancement allows automatic generation of ROTABL and TLAXIS statements whenever there is change-over between
Turning and Milling Operations.
Prior to this release, Post Processor (PP) word table names were not listed in an order, thus making it difficult for the user
to locate a PP word table. This enhancement addresses this usability issue and lists the PP word tables in an
alphanumerically sorted order. Controller Emulator and Post Processor selections are also listed in sorted order.
This highlight improves the message issued after NC data output generation by quantifying the number of errors/warnings
along with success/failure information.
Prior to this release, the Replace Tool contextual command could be used to replace the tool of selected Machining
Operations. This enhancement allows the tool assembly of selected operations to be replaced.
This enhancement allows the following additional parameters to be accessed in the Process Table: Tool Number, Corrector
Id, Corrector Number, and Radius Number. The tool number can be edited.
Prismatic Machining
New Functionality
It is now possible to compute and visualize the input/output intermediate stock for milling and turning operations.
A helical interpolation instruction can now be generated in the output file (APT source and Clfile) for machining operations
which support helical tool motion. These operations are Thread Milling, Circular Milling in Helical mode, Sequential Groove
with Helical motions, and Profile Contouring defined with a Helix tool path style.
This enhancement allows the user to create multiple passes (rough and finish) for Thread Milling and Circular Milling in
Helical mode, and provides capability to create a spring pass. The user no longer needs to create separate operations for
rough, finish and spring passes.
This enhancement enables the user to select different tool axes for multiple points in a single operation, and simplifies the
selection procedure.
This enhancement gives user a wider selection of cutting tools on the following machining operations: Circular Milling,
Countersinking, Counter Boring, Sequential Axial, Sequential Groove, and Pocketing.
This enhancement provides the capability to create axial machinable features corresponding to existing Technological
Results of holes of the selected body.
DPM Work Instructions
New Functionalities
Generate Template has been added
The Generate Template command enables you to create a template for a printable work instructions document.
Generate Document has been added
The Generate Document command enables you to create printable and customizable documentation from a work process.
Update Documentation has been added
The Update Documentation command enables you to update documentation when a work process or the product data
within it changes.
Generative Drafting
New Functionality
Setting Large Scale in V5 Session
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in kilometers. In drafting there are a few points,
which you should consider.
The Synchronize View Definition capability allows you to synchronize view from 3D (Functional Tolerancing and
Annotation workbench and 2D Layout from 3D Design workbench) during the update process when the support plane in 3D
is changed.
3D Clipping
The Add 3D Clipping capability has been enhanced to allow you to select 2D or 3D geometry (point, line, edge, planer
face, plane) as 3D clipping object to modify the view.
View
This option allows you to synchronize the view generated from 3D, during the update process, when the supporting plane is
changed in 3D.
New Functionalities
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in kilometers. In Drafting there are a few
points, which you should consider.
The broken constraints are visualized as a red warning symbol above the 2D geometry when a generative geometry is
modified or deleted.
The Positional Link capability allows you to create rigid positional links between the annotation and another element. The
annotation cannot be moved manually relative to the reference element.
Element Visualization in Specification Tree (Fix Together, 2D Component Instances)

elements constrained together using the Fix Together constraint can be visualized
The
specification tree.
General
The Display features under views option allows you to display in the specification tree the representation for fixed
elements and 2D component instances.
The Create rigid positional link option allows you to create rigid positional links whenever new positional links are
created for text, table and geometrical tolerance annotations.
Shop Floor Review
Analysis Window Viewpoint and tabs
The Analysis Window now has four radio buttons for viewing the data. The viewpoint stays the same when flipping through
different windows.
Shop Order Review
New Functionalities
Performance and Quality in SOI Generation Service: Dedicated EXE for SOI Generation
You will be able to automate the SOI generation service with improved performance in terms of elapsed/CPU time. Your
third party applications would call COM Application and place request for SOI generation.
Image Capture based on the Process Verification
This allows you to have a way to visualize the build up of products as the process progresses. You can display Cross
highlighting based on Parts or EI consumption in the captured images. This is generated by using the command, Image
Capture for a Process in DPM Shop Order Release.
Support for batch generation of process 3D XML in Create Shop Order API
3DXML's initiative aims at providing a generic file format and associated tools to support the efficient use, distribution and
visualization of 3d data.
SOI-Generation-Services through Web services
Web services are based on the concept of service-oriented architecture (SOA). SOA is the latest evolution of distributed
computing, which enables software components, including application functions, objects, and processes from different
systems, to be exposed as services.
Service Orientated Architecture (SOR) Web services
To improve the deploy ability & scalability, this project aims in launching the SOR functionalities through state-of-art Web
Services which are developed over the DS Web Services Infrastructure and are deployable in packaged format.
Steps to deploy the Web services
This section explains if, and how, the user or the administrator is given the opportunity to change the way the highlight
behaves.
DELMIA D5 Integration
Within Tools > Options > Compatibility > DELMIA D5, the user can retain the D5 visibility settings that were created for tags
and/or paths.
MULTICAx AD Plug-in
MULTICAx PD Plug-in
MULTICAx SE Plug-in
Parasolid V17 and V18 and SolidWorks 2007 and 2008 are now supported on Windows 32 bits.
MULTICAx UD Plug-in
CSM Module and Block Editor
Partial Import
Some data can be added to a block using the partial import.
Ergonomics Improvements
New icon in the Product tree for the Internal Logic, Control Logic and Runtime view
The user can sort names and types by alphanumerical order in the dialog box
The user can add comments in the different editors (the comment are represented by a kind of post-it).
CLM Device Logic Design
Automatic Internal Logic Generation
A new command allows the user to generate automatically the code of the internal logic that manages Device Tasks, Robot
Tasks and Robotic IO's.
Refer to Generating Internal Logic Automatically.
New Commands Replacing the External Functions

The 3D interaction functions in the SmartDeviceLib library are now replaced by commands. It is no longer necessary to
enter the name of the function and its parameters in an SFC action.
Refer to:
Piloting a Device Task
Getting and Setting the Joints of a Device
Moving a Device to a Home Position
Setting a Device Color
Tracking the Click on a Device
Selecting a Home Position
Getting and Setting TCP values
Reading and Writing Robotic IO's
Defining a Device Motion from the DOF Values
Partial Import
Ports, instances, signals, connections and SFC behaviors can be updated/added to an existing block using the command
Partial Import. Refer to Using Partial Import.
New Management of the Resource Sensors

In order to ease the management of the data returned by the sensors, the behavior of the signals Detected and Value has
been changed. Refer to Creating a Resource Sensor.
CLM SFC Editor
Usability Improvement
The user can add comments in the SFC+ and Block editors (the comments are represented by a kind of Post-it).
CLM FBD Editor
The user can add comments in the FBD editor (the comment are represented by a kind of post-it).
CLM Ladder
The user can add comments in the Ladder editor (the comment are represented by a kind of Post-it).
CSM Device Control Connection
New OPC parameters
External block (OPC protocol): two new parameters have been added to monitor the OPC server read and write modes. The
write mode can be synchronous or asynchronous. The read mode can be cache or device.
Check block definition
This new Check command allows you to verify that the definition of the external block (OPC protocol) is compliant with the
tags defined on the OPC server.
3D Manufacturing for Simulation
New Functionality
Exporting analysis results and device messages to a file
Analysis results and messages related to various devices/robots obtained when running simulations can be saved to
external files.
STEP
IGES
DXF
IGES 2D
Infrastructure
You can now choose the monochrome filter to be applied when capturing images in monochrome color mode.
You can now drag an element from one location and drop it onto another location without changing its name.
Knowledgeware

Excel 2007 support
documents.
Installation and Deployment
New and Enhanced Functionalities
Support of 64-bit mode for offline licensing
Offline licensing is now supported on Windows laptops running a 64-bit operating system.
Enhanced user interface for PLM database and vault server setup
The user interface for setting up the PLM database and vault server has been enhanced on both Windows and UNIX.
Enhanced user interface for online documentation installation
The user interface for installing the online documentation has been enhanced on both Windows and UNIX.
Product Structure
Administrative Tasks
New Functionalities
Automatic termination for Lock and Update Managers
To help avoid excessive memory fragmentation for long processes, the Lock Manager and Update Manager can be
terminated automatically when there are no IPD server connections. Once terminated, these processes are then restarted
when the next IPD server process is started.
Variant filtering
Variant filtering is based on the selection of a calculation model, and considers the relation relationship_component_variant.
If this relation exists between the selected calculation model and a process, the process will be visible and no additional
filtering by effectivity will be applied.
Resource-centric Supplier Integration
Supplier projects can be created starting with a list of resources. Selected resources can be merged into the original project
as new alternatives.
Automatic Line Balancing
New Functionalities
PMS Features: Parallel Stations
Now you can show parallel stations in ALB – indicated by color and the number of duplicates. Furthermore the moving of
processes with owned containers to and from those stations is also possible. When storing the data to the hub, the part
bins and all other material planning data are automatically multiplied for the parallel stations.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Takt Time per Variant

Now you can optimize a balancing by its takt time and its layout planning. you can balance the same variant in one
balancing with different takt times.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Merge Part Bins

Now you can look for same parts within the complete line, inside one station or inside a material area. Until now, the
complete line was considered when a same part was searched. That means, if Part 1 is manufactured in station 1, and
another part 1 is manufactured in station 10, the algorithm would have put only one part bin in station 1, and the process
in for Part 1 in station 10 would have to use the part bin in station 1.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Merge Tools

You can calculate the right number of necessary tools at the line. When saving the data to the hub, it create instances of
the tools. From now on, the tool information is used by ALB to instantiate the right number of tools at the right place in the
line. That means, if Tool 1 is required by Process 1 in Station 1/Workplace1 (S1/WP1), and another Tool 1 is required by
Process 2 in the same workplace, the algorithm has to put only one tool in S1/WP1.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Use Template Processes

You can create non-value adding processes inside ALB. Standard processes are loaded from a standard process library. The
processes created are copies of the standard processes.
PMS Features: Multiple Activity Chart: One Worker working in different workplaces
You can create, delete, and assign active resources to stations from within ALB. Now worker can work on two different
workplaces. In PMS there are no real workplaces anymore. In the 2D View there are two rectangles, previously used as
workplaces which are now used to represent the work content of a machine or a worker in that station.
PMS Features: Multiple Activity Chart: Worker Bar Chart View

Now there is Active Resource oriented View in ALB, where the processes for each worker and machine (= Active Resource)
are shown.
PMS Features: Variant Matrix: Load Processes for Product Variants

You can load the data in a different way by loading a tree of processes and also their relations to Calculations Models
(which represent a PV).
PMS Features: Variant Matrix: Honor Process Sequence

You can start a new balancing but not using the automatic balancing algorithm. ALB put all processes in the list of
unbalanced processes. It create the first station automatically. In PMS area, the process planners often plan their processes
in the sequence which is used for manufacturing. That means the sequence of the processes in the product variant matrix
could also be used as manufacturing sequence of the processes. The list of unbalanced processes is customized. The
processes can be sorted according to their order in the variant matrix. When selecting processes (single selection or
multiple selection) the sum of the process times is displayed in the status bar of that view. By selecting the first process
and the using Shift+Cursor-Down keys, you can select processes that fit into the takt time. You can then can do a Drag and
Drop of the selected processes in the first workplace. You can repeat the selection procedure and balance the processes to
the second workplace and can continue until all processes are balanced.
DELMIA Process Engineer Pooling Server and Server Tools
Global Emergency Mode
Global Emergency Mode is raised when a master process runs into a critical error state that affects functionality used by
other processes. Critical errors are then resolved automatically, such that Process Engineer does not require a manual
restart.
Improved Server monitoring
A set of resource indicators continuously monitor system resources to detect potential resource overloads. This new
resource control mechanism monitors available physical memory, available virtual pagefile memory, server machine CPU
utilization, the number of active IPDServer processes, the total number of processes and total number of allocated handles.
ENOVIA VPM V5 - DELMIA Process Engineer Integration
New Functionalities
64-bit PPRLoader
The importing LCALoader application (and it’s underlying DLLs) are migrated to 64-bit technology, thus extending the
current memory limitations (2/3GB) tremendously up to 8TB on Windows 64-bit OS.
Support Product Maintenance Lifecycle
Data necessary to support Product Maintenance in the Manufacturing Hub is transferred from the Engineering Hub. In the
Engineering Hub the list of Product Specifications of a given Product Root Class is extracted by ProductDataGen into XML
files (for each Product Specification one XML file is generated).
Increase Export Capacity on 32-bit platforms
In previous releases, the maximum capacity of the exporter ProductDataGen is about 50000 instances per 1 GB virtual
address space. The address space of such an application is technically constrained to a maximum of 4 GB. Depending on
the operating system, an even lower value, e.g. a maximum of 2GB virtual address space may be available.
Finder
New Functionality
Setting Search Options
Now through componenet finder you can set search options in the project i.e. search condition value, string search, and
attribute serach criteria.
Graphic Tools
New Functionalities
Geometry Catching
Enable the setting Tools < Settings < Change < Maintenance Tool < Global < Set graphic/not_copy_cad_files value to 1,
and then there is no need to copy the geometry of resources if:
● The referenced file already is in the cadpath or in the product_cadpath directory no path is used in the graphicname, only
the name of the file is used.
● The referenced file already is in a subdirectory of cadpath or product_cadpath the absolute path is changed to a relative
path.
● Other source files get copied if this setting is not set.
Manufacturing Change Management
New Functionalities
Improved Usability via Switch Button
This provides the usability to switch the Action through component properties dialog box. The Switch Action button appears
on Properties dialog for the component.
Creating Versions for CCZ
Now you can create versions for PPR-components, which are indicated with option CCZ Owner or No CCZ Member. You can
create versions with help of the options Check Out, Create, Check Out (Deep). or Create (deep).
PPR Navigator
New Functionalities
Variant Matrix
Now PPR navigator supports variant matrix. You can select and assign calculation models of interest in the available list of
calculation Model. The assigned calculation Models of Interest are further displayed in the Variant Matrix window.
Variant Matrix Main UI
With variant matrix you can assign weightings for different calculation models.
Variant Matrix Printing
You can export the items in the grid view into an excel sheet. This could be subsequently used for printing.
Variant Matrix Customization
You can create a profile and load the profile while opening the variant matrix. Profiles are recommended to store the
settings. Also, for entering weightings, Variant matrix provides multiple ways. ‘X’ is a way of entering 100% weight. Also
based on setting it should be possible to enter fractions.
Variant Matrix Capabilities
Now you can edit attributes of the plan types and weights on calculation model. You can also assign and copy weights from
one calculation model to another as well as copy values of attributes between processes.
Printing
Enhancements in Object Wizard
Now you can specify the desired relation when selecting an entry in the Search to Plan Type field in Object wizard.
New Functionality
Inserting Logo and Copyrights in Print Form
Now you can insert the DELMIA logo and copy rights in print forms via Tools < Settings < Change < Printing < Insert
DELMIA logo and copy rights in print forms. You can also modify the print forms and reports.
Process Planning for Body-in-White
New section describing how to extend the fastener and fastening process model
This section includes information on both point and curve fasteners. Because the addition of this new section expands the
overall content of this document, its name has been changed to Process Planning for Body-in-White to reflect its more
comprehensive role.
Settings
Expand Mode for "Find in Tree"
This setting in Browser and Menu Items tab allows you to can expand your search in finder when you search for a
component in tree.
Show Relation in Object Wizard
This setting in Printing tab allows you to enable the relation combobox in Author Object Wizard.
Disable MCM Warning Message
This setting in Miscellaneous tab enables to disable the display of warning message while opening MCM projects if Mod
statement is not selected.
Open Maximized
This setting in Other DS Software Modules tab enables to launch the DPE application in maximized mode otherwise it get
launched in normal mode.
Work Instructions Composer
The DELMIA Process Engineer Work Instructions Composer is a new product that allows you to load a process plan with its assigned
products and resources, and then author work instructions for each of the processes in the process plan. The robust tools of 3DVIA
Composer allow you to annotate, mark-up on the products and resources, and save all the work instructions back to the
Manufacturing Hub.
3D Functional Tolerancing and Annotation
New Functionality
CATIA V4 dimensioning, tolerancing and annotation data can be converted to CATIA
V5 FTA data part level. The converted data is associative to the converted CATIA V5
geometry.
This capability takes into account the 3D annotations defined at product level while
saving a product as 3D XML.
You can upgrade pre-R18 annotation sets using Upgrade contextual menu command,
so that the FTA features have the same behavior as those annotation sets created in
R18 or later.
The FTA result features are light features that are dedicated for review and are not
editable. From R18 they are generated by Multi-cad applications or by exporting V6
products and 3D shape representations to CATIA CATProduct and CATPart documents
using the downward compatibility tool. The Result Annotation Sets can be saved as .
cgr and as .3dxml. They can also be kept in the filtered document when using the
product data filtering capabilities.
Assembly Design
New Functionalities
Associativity
This capability allows you to modify CATPart geometry in assembly context without
modifying the reference CATPart. The Associativity command results in the creation
of a new CATPart instantiated in the assembly, containing a copy obtained by Copy/
Paste As Result With Link operation of a chosen geometry from all/ customized
components of the active assembly.
The Define Variant Generic Product command allows to create a new variant and
select the components as per the required configuration.
Instantiate Variant
The Instantiate Variant command allows to instantiate variant generic product from
file.
Replace Variant
The Replace Variant command replaces the existing solved by a new variant of
another generic product.
When the assembly is saved in EV5 after the creation of assembly feature and
associated part, the assembly feature is not saved in EV5. In this case, the Add to
Associated Part command aids to add bodies from existing/new source parts in the
The Allow publication in Associative Part allows for publication of the pasted bodies in
the associated part in case they are published in the source part. When Only Published
Features option is selected, only published geometries from the set of selected
geometry options or custom list of geometries are imported in the associated part.
The context of import of bodies and geometries is PRC. In case of structure exposed
mode (mode of the active product), the feature is not created.
The option Disable redundancy check allows you to enable/disable the redundancy
check performed while constraint creation.
DPM Assembly Process Planner
Progress bar for AST Editor
Because the AST Editor can take awhile to open, a progress bar opens immediately
after you click AST Editor. The progress bar continuously updates the percentage of
the opening that is complete, as well as providing the time remaining.
Curve fastener lengths shown in the AST Editor
The fastener lengths appear in the fastener folder names and in the PODs for
fasteners in the ASG. For multiple curves, the total length of all curves is given as the
length.
DPM Fastening Process Planner
New Functionality
Display Fastener ID and Hide Fastener ID commands added
In previous releases, the command Show Fastener ID enabled you to see the fastener
IDs in the 3D viewer. These two commands have replaced that command, and enable
you to show the fastener IDs associated with a product, resource, fastener group, AST
manufacturing assembly, or activity.
Curve fasteners may now be exported to a CATDrawing
In previous releases, all fasteners except curve fasteners could be exported to a
CATDrawing; now all fastener types may be exported.
DPM Machining Process Planner
Extended tool support for IPM Generation in Profile Contouring
This enhancement consists in generating the correct IPM primitive volume for a Profile
Contouring operation with a conical tool or user-representation tool.
Multi-body selection/creation for Generic Operation
This enhancement consists in offering the capability to associate several IPM primitive
volumes to a Generic machining operation.
Create IPM Part from user-defined template CATPart
This enhancement provides the capacity to initialize the IPM CATPart document from a
user-defined template CATPart document.
New Functionalities
PRD
You can import an AST from the Manufacturing Hub

This command, available from the context menu, enables you to select on or more
MAs from the Applications node, and to import ASGs associated with the
manufacturing assemblies from the Manufacturing Hub. This command does not
import child ASTs.
You can import an AST completely from the Manufacturing Hub
This command, available from the context menu, enables you to select on or more
MAs from the Applications node, and to import ASGs associated with the
manufacturing assemblies and all child ASTs from the Manufacturing Hub.
Process Verification Across Resources
A new command has been added that enables you to verify resource behaviors. If the
resources are linked with product control links, you can see the behavior.
Manufacturing Hub
Multiple selection on import

Multiple items may now be selected when using Open products, resources,
manufacturing assemblies and manufacturing kit from Manufacturing Hub command.
Incremental product loading based on volume
Product, resource, manufacturing assembly and manufacturing kit data to be loaded
can be selected incrementally by specifying a volume of interest to load.
Loading the Planning Context
The Load Planning Context command allows you to quickly load products within a
specified volume in DPM.
Backdrop for volume filter
A semi-transparent image of the complete end product can be displayed in the 3D
window to assist in product selection when defining a volumetric filter.
Optional display of siblings after search
When performing a search for PPR objects, a checkbox determines whether siblings
are displayed in the browser window.
Change modification statements
Modification statements can be switched after loading MCM project data from the
Manufacturing Hub.
Process Engineer icons in PPR tree
Process Engineer icons are now shown in the PPR tree when selecting Processes,
Products, Resources, Manufacturing Assemblies, Manufacturing Kits and Plantypes
from the Manufacturing Hub.
Reordering is possible in a Resource Gantt

When you open a resource Gantt chart, the resources appear by default in order in
which they are added to the PPR tree. You can re-order the child resources of a
common parent resource. The changed order remains in effect when you save the
process, either as a flat file or back to the Manufacturing Hub.
Changes you make to the column width or row height in the Gantt chart persist
When you customize the appearance of the Gantt chart, your changes remain in effect
from V5 session to V5 session or until you change them.
You can multi-select ASTs when inserting them
You can select multiple ASTs from the Insert AST dialog box.
The Compare Tool has been improved
The dialog box displays the names of the two processes being compared. A Summary
tab has been added; you can alter the order in which data in the Summary tab is
displayed. Two attributes used for wire harnesses can be listed: wire gage and
harness.
Exporting Manufacturing Assemblies
When exporting a Manufacturing Assembly structure, an option is also provided to
export into a hierarchy of external products.
Copying Processes and Resources allows the copying of resource behavior
You can now copy resource behaviors as well as processes.
Show Assigned Activities command allows selection of TSAs and resource behaviors
You can select TSAs and resource behaviors when using this command. You can also
now multi-select items.
List Products, Resources, and Unassigned Product commands better enable you to focus on
the items in the list
Each command now enables you to right-click on a list item and select from a context
menu that enables you recenter the graph on the item, to reframe on the item, or to
hide or show the item. All items you select in the list are highlighted in the 3D view
and in the PPR tree. In addition, you can use the Part Selection command in
conjunction with the these list commands to view an item or items in the the Part
Selection window.
Export as CATProduct is available as a command
The Export as CATProduct command was previously only available as a context menu
command; it is now available in the DPM Planner toolbar (in DPM Process and
Resource Definition) and in the PPR Tools toolbar (in DPM Process Definition). You can
now select manufacturing assemblies with this command.
Navigation option added for the Verification tab
In the past, when you were in process verification and navigated to the child level,
you went to the last activity in the level. You can elect to go to the first activity.
Output Process added to the Verification tab
Process verification now supports the relation Product Creates Product.
Consider Process Flow option added for Gantt Chart tab
You can choose to take into account the timing of resource usage in analyzing
processes.
Manufacturing Hub
Optional save to the Manufacturing Hub for control flows

When you select Partial Read Only mode for a project, you have previously been
required to save control flows and detailing back to the Manufacturing Hub. This
option allows you to determine whether projects opened in Partial Read Only mode
will have their control flows saved back to the Manufacturing Hub.
Specify default open mode
The default open mode (Read-Write, Partial Read Only, Read Only) can now be
specified in Tools > Options.
DPM Structure Lofting
New Functionalities
This new command enables you to create a job order report on an entire
AssembleMacro activity.
You can select profiles that do not intersect with the datum edges; you can select
multiple edges; you can use non-planar profiles, such as twisted and rolled profile,
and you can select the seam edges as reference elements.
You can specify the tab width, lead in/lead out lengths, and the lead side when
creating tabbed openings.
You can flatten multi-surfaced curved plates and create manufacturing features of the roll
line items
This completes the creation flattened plate with required forming information. Once
the IPM update is done, user can extract the 2D drawings of the 3D flattened plated
using Workshop Document Extraction command.
You can create positive or negative margin items on surfaces previously containing margin
items
Customizing
The Features tab
Electric Harness Simulation
New Functionalities
Control Points
The actions to assign, change, add and delete control points on a bundle segment
have been modified. The control points are named based on their position in the
bundle segment definition curve. Two types of control points are used: user-created
and engineered.
Moving Multiple Cables
The Move Multiple Cables will allow you to manipulate the position of connectors,
clamps, and routed products. As these components are manipulated through space,
the harnesses connected to these components will also move to follow the
components through space within limits of solvability.
The new functionality is available through the new Move Multiple Cables Toolbar.
New Functionality
Reshaping Corners
Improves the blend corner(s) capability for the Edge Fillet and the Variable Fillet
commands.
Autofilleting
Manufacturing System Definition
Show/Refresh Hide Show Status in the System Editor
The system editor provides symbols that show whether specific resources' graphic
representations are in hide or show mode.
The Show/Refresh Hide-Show Status command displays and updates icons on in
the system editor that documents the hide/show status for parts and manufacturing
Assemblies in the PPR tree/3D viewer window
New Functionalities
Replacing a Resource
Now you can replace resources with different plan types. For MSD workbench the
command Replace Resource has been added. You can replace resources with
different plan types. After starting the command all authorized plan types (associated
with the father plan type) of the resource are displayed and can be replaced by each
other e.g. the authorized child plan types associated with the father plan type are a,
b, and c so the resource can be replaced by resources with the plan type a, b, or c.
Find a Fitting Resource
It is possible to search for a fitting logical resource (e.g. station, workplace). This is
used to search for a fitting logical resource (for e.g. station and workplace). It
displays all resources below the selected resource on which the selected process can
be executed. The resource list can be sorted according to the remaining time. The
remaining time is the difference between the resource cycle time and the resource
busy time. The resource busy time is the sum of all durations of processes assigned to
a resource.
Edit Resource Attributes
You can now edit attribute properties for the selected resource.
Part Design
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
of the last evolutions of the code available on the current level.
This capability allows you to control a top diameter of a tapered hole by selecting in
the Type tab, and then entering the desired value in the Extension tab of a Hole
Definition dialog box. Further geometry is computed by the end conditions.
For editing an edge fillet containing at least one blend corner, the Reframe On,
Create by edges, Create by vertex, Edit and Remove options are available in the
Blend corner(s) contextual menu. When no corner is created, only the Create by
edges and Create by vertex commands are displayed in the contextual menu.
The new Intersection selection mode allows the definition of edge fillets at the
intersection of the selected features with current solid.
This capability allows you to edit the parameters of a feature from the specification
tree by double-clicking it and changing its value in the Edit Parameter dialog box.
Dress-Up features and Advanced Dress-Up features have their parameters displayed
under their respective nodes in the specification tree.
Part Design Features Recognition
Colorization of Corners
If limiting faces of a corner have same radius, the color relative to this radius is also
applied to the corner and default color for corners is not taken into account in this
case.
PPR Navigator
New Functionalities
Open and edit templates
Template projects saved in the Manufacturing Hub can now be loaded with PPR
Navigator.
Process preview
The Set Process Preview options command allows you to specify options that
determine which products and resources are shown in the Preview tab when a process
is selected in the PPR tree.
Applying Modification Statements when opening CMC projects
Modification Statements, Actions and Manufacturing Change Orders can be applied
when opening a Change Management Controlled (CMC) project in PPR Navigator.
Volume filtering during load
When loading a process or resource, the products loaded can now be limited by
specifying a volume of interest.
Filtering products by Change Order in MCM Projects
Products in MCM projects can be filtered based on calculation models, change orders
and their relations.
Creating and editing planning contexts
The Create/Edit Context command opens an empty CATProcess document in Partial
Read Only mode, where the Load Planning Context command can then be used to
define and save a planning context.
Real Time Rendering
New Functionality
Variant Management
Applying a Material
Sketcher
New Functionalities
Upgrading Features
The Upgrade contextual command available on the sketch feature allows the
activation of the last evolutions of the code available on the current level.
Exploding Sketch
The Explode... contextual command allows you to modify a sketch obtained by Copy/
Paste As Result With Link. It converts all its as result with link geometry into
regular sketched curves and points.
You can now specify your own position of a sketch feature obtained by Copy/Paste
As Result With Link OR retrieve its associativity in position with its sketch reference
by using the new Positioned as reference option.
Structure Manufacturing Preparation
New Functionalities
This new command enables you to create a job order report on an entire
AssembleMacro activity.
You can select profiles that do not intersect with the datum edges; you can select
multiple edges; you can use non-planar profiles, such as twisted and rolled profile,
and you can select the seam edges as reference elements.
You can specify the tab width, lead in/lead out lengths, and the lead side when
creating tabbed openings.
You can flatten multi-surfaced curved plates and create manufacturing features of the roll
line items
This completes the creation flattened plate with required forming information. Once
the IPM update is done, user can extract the 2D drawings of the 3D flattened plated
using Workshop Document Extraction command.
You can create positive or negative margin items on surfaces previously containing margin
items
Customizing
The Features tab
Tool Selection Assistant
New Functionalities
Support all axis for weld gun approach direction
This option will apply to all the commands of Tool Selection assistant. Biggest impact
will be seen in the way Pie reports and section planes are positioned. The pie report
and section planes will be positioned as per the approach direction defined in the
application setting.
In case of Pie report: if a particular orientation of the weld gun is accessible then, the
Axis of approach will lie in the green zone of the pie report.
In case of Section plane: By positioning the section plane as per the approach
direction, you will always see the right view in the section result window.
Capability to update Robot Posture after changing the Robot Configuration in Generate stack
of 2D Sections/3D Slices at the selected welds command
In Generate stack of 2D sections/ 3D slices at the selected weld, in current scenario
once the user changes the Robot configuration using the Robot Configurations Combo
box in the dialog, the corresponding change is not reflected. This highlight provides
the functionality of changing the Robot configuration using the Robot Configuration
Combo box in the Dialog.
Change Pie report colors for Analyze Welds for Robot command
Currently, it is difficult to properly analyze the pie charts if the pie chart color
resembles that of the surrounding resources color. This enhancement would help to
properly analyze the results of the welds, by changing the color.
User Interface Capabilities for Generate stack of 2D sections/ 3D slices at the selected weld
In Generate stack of 2D sections/ 3D slices at the selected weld command, currently
you can't change the manufacturing location. This highlight allows user to move the
manufacturing location with a compass manipulation.
User Interface Capabilities for Analyze Welds for Robot
In the Analyze Welds for Robot command, you are able to select multiple welds by
multi acquisition.
Performance improvement for Auto Gun Search Command
Auto gun search is the entry point command in process planning. It enables user to
minimize amount of new tooling design for a new product. This command performs
search over very large no. of weld guns and welds to enable validation. The
improvement of performance of this command gives a significant value as; it directly
reduces the time required to validate a new product.
Support gun position changes and moving manufacturing location, during manual weldgun
search
With this option, you can lock the manufacturing location by using Lock Location
check box. After manipulating the manufacturing location using compass manipulation
and on checking Lock Location check box, the compass disappears and you can't
modify the manufacturing location with out un-checking the Lock location check box.
New Functionality
Arc Welding
AMP Enhancements
This will provide a complete AMP solution that will allow the you to create robot-ready
arc trajectories with minimal effort. Hence, significantly improving your productivity.
Device Building
New Functionalities
Define Auxiliary Device
The Define Auxiliary Device functionality has been added to this workbench. This
shows you how to add auxiliary devices to a device, such as a rail or track. "Define
Auxiliary devices" and "Attach" commands are only available if Device Task Definition
(WSU) is available."
Attach
The Attach command allows selection of Products, and the Manufacturing Assemblies.
You will be able to select a Manufacturing Assembly for attachment in addition to a
product or resource.
Device Task Definition
New Functionalities
Modify Tags Orientation
Currently there is no command for orienting Manufacturing tags based on the
orientation of a reference tag. Therefore this address this issue by providing a
command though which the target tags can be re-oriented based on the orientation of
a reference tag.
MT Jog Device
This shows how to efficiently analyze the position of a robot itself, that of a target
Weld Tag, or that of a product having a Weld Tag under a constraint where one or
more robots or IK devices need to reach the Weld Tags, while the users can see the
changed state at real time.
Robot Cable Toolbar
This enhancement allows you to build, synchronize a Simulation module. Using
Penetration Avoidance, this will avoid penetrating into, a product during a simulation,
by modifying its own shape.
Mirroring a Tag Group or Robot Task
The Mirror Tag command now gives you the capability to define the right "approach"
axis by selecting the axes to mirror.
Configuration support in Auto Place
This aims at providing configuration support in Auto place. Currently Robot
configuration is not considered when finding the reachability of the Tag targets. It
aims to improve the functionality of finding the reachability of the Tag targets
(excluding Robot Task) by taking the configuration into consideration.
VB API's for Move Activities
This provides flexibility to tune processes primarily driven on Forward Kin devices.
You will be able to use VB API's and subsequently modify created device move
activities.
Manufacturing Resource Layout
New Functionalities
VB Exposition of Attachments
This allows you to create attachments between products or manufacturing assemblies
or between product and a manufacturing assembly (MA) through VB script in a
product/process document. This allows you to export this information so that you can
perform an analysis outside V5.
Modifying and Viewing a Resource's Footprint
This shows how to modify and view a resource's footprint. A footprint is the
specification of the area occupied by the resource on the floor.
The "Display Resource Area on Footprint" in the Edit footprint dialog box
The area will be displayed on the resource footprint in the Edit footprint dialog box.
Attaching / Detaching a Drafting View
You can visualize the resource locations residing in a 2d CATDrawing file on a footprint
which benefits you to position Robots and other objects with precision using the 2D
drafting view of plant layout.
Cumulative Snap icon
The Cumulative Snap icon has been added to the Snap sub-toolbar.
VB Automation Support for V5 Attachments
This will allow you to extract information about the Parent and Child Product of any
attachment within a Process or Product Document.
Attaching Elements
The Attach command in Resource Layout Workbench, allows selection of Products, and
the Manufacturing Assemblies. You will be able to select a Manufacturing Assembly for
attachment in addition to a product or resource.
Production System Analysis
Improving the Quality Reports
This highlight ensures that the SystemStatistics XML will have information for all runs
run in the current session and also improves the readability of the report generated by
the "Display Statistics" command.
Saving SystemStatistics
This highlight ensures that the SystemStatistics XML will be placed in a temp folder
and this XML will have to be saved before closing the document
Realistic Robot Simulation
RRS Operations: Define, Cancel, Display
Three new V5 shared commands (operating on a user selected RRS-I connected
robot) will be added to the RRS Connect toolbar.
General Spot Activity Model
The Fanuc RRS-I interface is updated so that it internally implements the complete
Fanuc Spot model when the robot is RRS connected to a Fanuc RCS version that does
not implement the Fanuc Spot model (i.e. pre-v6.31 RCS versions).
Robotics Offline Programming
New Functionalities
Saving XML Directory and File Names
This allows you to identify a default directory or file for exported Robot tasks in XML
format.
Supporting Panasonic CSR Translator
This provides upload and download support for Panasonic CSR programs in DELMIA
OLP.
Supporting Kawasaki AS Translator
This provides upload and download support for Kawasaki AS programs in DELMIA OLP.
Uploading Multiple Programs Simultaneously
This allows you to upload multiple programs simultaneously.
Creating Tags
To allow unambiguous tag creation, two XML attributes are available for "Tag" XML
element: "PathToPart" and "AttachmentType".
Identifying Frames of Reference for Tag Targets
A frame of reference for a tag target, relevant for both upload and download, depends
on the values of both object and tool frame profiles associated with the robot motion
activity that contains that tag. There are four different cases explained in the task.
Standard Robot Library
New Libraries
Hyandai
Panasonic
Kawasaki
New Functionality
Users can select edges on the geometry, and generate tracks from the edges. Once
the initial track has been generated from the edges, the track can be modified.
In previous releases, users could not see the effects of attaching a section to a track
until after a simulation was run; now users can see it as they move the slider.
Users can interpolate along the track with a set distance. Also, the Sampling Step
option in the Player Parameters dialog box can be set for distance as well as time.
This tab enables users to see the names of all parts selected as part of the shuttle.
Users can still preview the graphical representations of the parts via the 3D tab.
In previous releases, shuttles could only contain one group and a parent shuttle could
reference another shuttle. In this release, each group is treated as an object, and
users can select as many objects as they like. Similarly, users can include
When you click the Activate Analysis button from the Track dialog box, you can edit the
analysis object
Users have the option to edit one analysis object at a time while using the Track
command; they do not have to exit the Track command and use the analysis
commands.
Deleting Joints
DMU Space Analysis
Sectioning

curve.

New Functionalities
and back.
Human Builder
New Functionalities
Displaying Balance
Auto Grasp Offset
Human Task Simulation
New Functionalities
Editing MoveToPosture Activities with constraints
A new command will be provided under the contextual menu of MTP and also
accessible from /Edit /MoveToPosture object / Synchronize 3D Model.
Manikin Motion speed
This highlight provides the capability to set default joint speed for each manikin
segment based on ergonomic data and also provides the capability to specify a rating
on Human Task, Human Activity Group and Walk Activity.
Opening a Active Task tree
Users modify the task and child activities from within the active task set on process
activity (in the Process List). Modifying the task in the process tree provides the
position of objects in the process sequence. In the current release, when users want
to modify the active task in a process activity, it is very difficult to find the active task
since all tasks under the manikin resource are displayed. This makes the selection of
active task not only cumbersome but also error prone.
Reassigning Human Operations
This provides the ability to re-assign human operations within the same process
document or across different process documents.
Structural change of Operate
This highlight fits into the final assembly workflow of the user and helps in providing
dependable & consistent simulation time and reduces the time required for creating
Operate activities thereby improving productivity.
Line Balancing with Human
This highlight provides the ability to set the HAG as an active task freely without any
restrictions.
Collision Free Walk enhancements
True collision free walk or absolute collision free walk and indicates the collision free
algorithm will account for arm swinging, picked part (if any), current body posture for
computing the walk path.
Move to Posture Activities enhancement
3D state is displayed in the MTP node under the PPR tree. The icon of MTP will be
changed to indicate a 3D state has been assigned to the MTP. Upon removing the 3D
state assignment, the icon will be restored to normal.
Operate Walk with Device Move
The Operate Walking command can be used to define Operate Walking with Robot
Tasks and Device Tasks.
New Functionalities
Part Operation:
Corner Probing,
3/5-Axis Converter:
Now available for all End Mill tools, TSlotters and Lollipops,
A new strategy guide is available: Normal to drive surface,
An Angle parameter has been added to the Thru a guide strategy mode,
Edit feedrates of tool paths, either locally or globally,
Edit PP Words in tool paths,
Edit V4 NCMill operations.
Roughing
Management of start point is enhanced,
Plunge Milling
A new grid type has been added: By Offset,
You can visualize plunging points before computing the tool path,
A new parameter is available for retract motions: Axial corner radius,
You can modify the feedrate of the clearance macro.
Improved guide definition for parallel contour mode,
point and an axis),
New Strategy side parameter for parallel contour mode,
Improved selection of faces in a polygon trap: new option to select visible faces only,
In Between contours mode, with a constant 2D stepover, the offset on guides can be
applied to stops.
An offset on tool path in the machining plane is now available,
You can compute a circular interpolation of the tool path, or approximate one,
The Reverse Machining Conditions command inverts the Climb and Conventional
cutting modes.
Spiral Milling
A new strategy mode has been added: Back and Forth,
A new option Always stay on bottom has been added to the Helical tool path style,
Clearance feedrate management occurs via a contextual menu,
New Ramping up to a plane macro is available.
Lathe Machining
New capability to define a tool axis on each Turning operation. This allows the B-axis
orientation to be managed and eliminates the need for a tool change activity.
A new C-axis inversion option on the Strategy tab page of the Machining Operation
editor enables a C-axis rotation (0/180 degrees) without requiring a tool change
activity.
This allows machining of different areas (front and back areas of a part, or part on
main spindle and part on a counter-spindle) using the same tool assembly. Only the
tool orientation (inversion) differs when machining the different areas or parts.
Part Operation:
Tool axis guidance:
operations.
Contour-Driven
Macros
New Functionality
Power Machining:
Part Operation
This enhancement is provided by the Use Spindle Axis system according to the
Spindle involved on the Machining Operation checkbox in the Option tab of the
Part Operation editor for a Multi-slide lathe machine or a Mill-Turn machine.
If this check box is selected, tool tip points are computed based on the spindle that is
set on the machining operation.
If this check box is not selected, the main spindle axis is used. This is determined by
the default reference machining axis system set on the Part Operation.
New Functionalities
Previously, the creation of Milling Machines and Milling Heads, with the capability to do
a head change during simulation, was not supported. This functionality enables to
create such machines to be used in simulation. It allows to create a new Milling
Machine Head, which can then be inserted into the milling machine CATProduct.
This section describes how to create, modify and delete multiple tool and work-piece
mount points on milling machines, using the Create Mount Point command.
New Functionality
This functionality allows you to simulate Milling machines with interchangeable heads,
thus enabling to verify NC tool paths for travel limits, collisions and modify if
necessary.
This provides the ability to mount the workpiece on a Milling machine bed or Mill-Turn
machine with respect to a user-selected machining axis system.
For Mill-Turn Simulation, this enhancement allows you to define Machine Instruction
activities on Turrets.
This functionality allows you to associate and persist a machine configuration with a
particular tool path point, from within the Modify Tool Path dialog box. This machine
configuration will be applied during machine simulation, when that particular tool path
point is to be reached.
This provides support to simulate machine motion with Integrated Material Removal
for Milling and Mill Turn machines.
This enhancement to feedrates is integrated to the Area Modification command of the
tool path editor and works on one or several tool paths. Tool path editor is available
on APT imports and milling operations. Tool paths can be modified partially or globally.
This enhancement enables Tool Path edition on manufacturing data from V4 NC MILL
models.
This enhancement enables merging several PP instructions and editing PP words inside
a tool path.
This enhancement provides a number of usability improvements such as improved
error messages; open fixtures support; extended support of turning tool holders; save
CATProduct at the same location as the Process; interruptible progress bar; capability
to disconnect non cutting diameter; and support of probing operations.
This enhancement provides a number of improvements for transition feedrates. In
particular, you can now locally set the feedrate for a transition path to a machining
operation B from a machining operation A or from a tool change activity. This is done
by selecting the Transition check box in the Machining Operation dialog box for
operation B.
This enhancement provides a new Head Change command in the Auxiliary
Operations tool bar.
Clicking on this command inserting a new Head Change activity in the program, if an
NC machine with at least one head is assigned to the Part Operation.
Prior to this release, Post Processor (PP) word table names were not listed in an order,
thus making it difficult for the user to locate a PP word table. This enhancement
addresses this usability issue and lists the PP word tables in an alphanumerically
sorted order. Controller Emulator and Post Processor selections are also listed in
sorted order.
This highlight improves the message issued after NC data output generation by
quantifying the number of errors/warnings along with success/failure information.
Prior to this release, the Replace Tool contextual command could be used to replace
the tool of selected Machining Operations. This enhancement allows the tool assembly
of selected operations to be replaced.
This enhancement allows the following additional parameters to be accessed in the
Process Table: Tool Number, Corrector Id, Corrector Number, and Radius Number.
The tool number can be edited.
Prismatic Machining
New Functionality
and spring passes.
This enhancement provides the capability to create axial machinable features
corresponding to existing Technological Results of holes of the selected body.
DPM Work Instructions
New Functionalities
Generate Template has been added
The Generate Template command enables you to create a template for a printable
work instructions document.
Generate Document has been added
The Generate Document command enables you to create printable and customizable
documentation from a work process.
Update Documentation has been added
The Update Documentation command enables you to update documentation when a
work process or the product data within it changes.
Generative Drafting
New Functionality
Setting Large Scale in V5 Session
In drafting there are a few points, which you should consider.
The Synchronize View Definition capability allows you to synchronize view from 3D
(Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench and 2D Layout from 3D Design
workbench) during the update process when the support plane in 3D is changed.
3D Clipping
The Add 3D Clipping capability has been enhanced to allow you to select 2D or 3D
geometry (point, line, edge, planer face, plane) as 3D clipping object to modify the
view.
View
This option allows you to synchronize the view generated from 3D, during the update
process, when the supporting plane is changed in 3D.
New Functionalities
The Large Scale feature allows you to create larger geometries, ranging in
kilometers. In Drafting there are a few points, which you should consider.
The broken constraints are visualized as a red warning symbol above the 2D geometry
when a generative geometry is modified or deleted.

Component Instances)

The elements constrained together using the Fix Together constraint can be
visualized under the Fix Together Constraints node in the specification tree.
The 2D Component instances can be visualized under the Component Instances
node in the specification tree.
General
The Display features under views option allows you to display in the specification
tree the representation for fixed elements and 2D component instances.
annotations.
Shop Floor Review
Analysis Window Viewpoint and tabs
The Analysis Window now has four radio buttons for viewing the data. The viewpoint
stays the same when flipping through different windows.
Shop Order Review
New Functionalities
Performance and Quality in SOI Generation Service: Dedicated EXE for SOI Generation
You will be able to automate the SOI generation service with improved performance
in terms of elapsed/CPU time. Your third party applications would call COM Application
and place request for SOI generation.
Image Capture based on the Process Verification
This allows you to have a way to visualize the build up of products as the process
progresses. You can display Cross highlighting based on Parts or EI consumption in
the captured images. This is generated by using the command, Image Capture for a
Process in DPM Shop Order Release.
Support for batch generation of process 3D XML in Create Shop Order API
3DXML's initiative aims at providing a generic file format and associated tools to
support the efficient use, distribution and visualization of 3d data.
SOI-Generation-Services through Web services
Web services are based on the concept of service-oriented architecture (SOA). SOA is
the latest evolution of distributed computing, which enables software components,
including application functions, objects, and processes from different systems, to be
exposed as services.
Service Orientated Architecture (SOR) Web services
To improve the deploy ability & scalability, this project aims in launching the SOR
functionalities through state-of-art Web Services which are developed over the DS
Web Services Infrastructure and are deployable in packaged format.
Steps to deploy the Web services
This section explains if, and how, the user or the administrator is given the
opportunity to change the way the highlight behaves.
DELMIA D5 Integration
Within Tools > Options > Compatibility > DELMIA D5, the user can retain the D5
visibility settings that were created for tags and/or paths.
MULTICAx AD Plug-in
MULTICAx PD Plug-in
MULTICAx SE Plug-in
Parasolid V17 and V18 and SolidWorks 2007 and 2008 are now supported on Windows 32
bits.
MULTICAx UD Plug-in
CSM Module and Block Editor
Partial Import
Some data can be added to a block using the partial import.
Ergonomics Improvements
New icon in the Product tree for the Internal Logic, Control Logic and Runtime view
The user can sort names and types by alphanumerical order in the dialog box
The user can add comments in the different editors (the comment are represented by
a kind of post-it).
CLM Device Logic Design
Automatic Internal Logic Generation
A new command allows the user to generate automatically the code of the internal
logic that manages Device Tasks, Robot Tasks and Robotic IO's.
Refer to Generating Internal Logic Automatically.
New Commands Replacing the External Functions

The 3D interaction functions in the SmartDeviceLib library are now replaced by
commands. It is no longer necessary to enter the name of the function and its
parameters in an SFC action.
Refer to:
Piloting a Device Task
Getting and Setting the Joints of a Device
Moving a Device to a Home Position
Setting a Device Color
Tracking the Click on a Device
Selecting a Home Position
Getting and Setting TCP values
Reading and Writing Robotic IO's
Defining a Device Motion from the DOF Values
Partial Import
Ports, instances, signals, connections and SFC behaviors can be updated/added to an
existing block using the command Partial Import. Refer to Using Partial Import.
New Management of the Resource Sensors

In order to ease the management of the data returned by the sensors, the behavior of
the signals Detected and Value has been changed. Refer to Creating a Resource
Sensor.
CLM SFC Editor
The user can add comments in the SFC+ and Block editors (the comments are
represented by a kind of Post-it).
CLM FBD Editor
The user can add comments in the FBD editor (the comment are represented by a
kind of post-it).
CLM Ladder
The user can add comments in the Ladder editor (the comment are represented by a
kind of Post-it).
CSM Device Control Connection
New OPC parameters
External block (OPC protocol): two new parameters have been added to monitor the
OPC server read and write modes. The write mode can be synchronous or
asynchronous. The read mode can be cache or device.
Check block definition
This new Check command allows you to verify that the definition of the external block
(OPC protocol) is compliant with the tags defined on the OPC server.
3D Manufacturing for Simulation
New Functionality
Exporting analysis results and device messages to a file
Analysis results and messages related to various devices/robots obtained when
running simulations can be saved to external files.
STEP
IGES
DXF
IGES 2D
Infrastructure
You can now choose the monochrome filter to be applied when capturing images in
monochrome color mode.
You can now drag an element from one location and drop it onto another location
Knowledgeware

Excel 2007 support
documents.
Installation and Deployment
New and Enhanced Functionalities
Support of 64-bit mode for offline licensing
Offline licensing is now supported on Windows laptops running a 64-bit operating
system.
Enhanced user interface for PLM database and vault server setup
The user interface for setting up the PLM database and vault server has been
enhanced on both Windows and UNIX.
Enhanced user interface for online documentation installation
The user interface for installing the online documentation has been enhanced on both
Windows and UNIX.
Product Structure
Administrative Tasks
New Functionalities
Automatic termination for Lock and Update Managers
To help avoid excessive memory fragmentation for long processes, the Lock Manager
and Update Manager can be terminated automatically when there are no IPD server
connections. Once terminated, these processes are then restarted when the next IPD
server process is started.
Variant filtering
Variant filtering is based on the selection of a calculation model, and considers the
relation relationship_component_variant. If this relation exists between the selected
calculation model and a process, the process will be visible and no additional filtering
by effectivity will be applied.
Resource-centric Supplier Integration
Supplier projects can be created starting with a list of resources. Selected resources
can be merged into the original project as new alternatives.
Automatic Line Balancing
New Functionalities
PMS Features: Parallel Stations
Now you can show parallel stations in ALB – indicated by color and the number of
duplicates. Furthermore the moving of processes with owned containers to and from
those stations is also possible. When storing the data to the hub, the part bins and all
other material planning data are automatically multiplied for the parallel stations.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Takt Time per Variant

Now you can optimize a balancing by its takt time and its layout planning. you can
balance the same variant in one balancing with different takt times.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Merge Part Bins

Now you can look for same parts within the complete line, inside one station or inside
a material area. Until now, the complete line was considered when a same part was
searched. That means, if Part 1 is manufactured in station 1, and another part 1 is
manufactured in station 10, the algorithm would have put only one part bin in station
1, and the process in for Part 1 in station 10 would have to use the part bin in station
1.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Merge Tools

You can calculate the right number of necessary tools at the line. When saving the
data to the hub, it create instances of the tools. From now on, the tool information is
used by ALB to instantiate the right number of tools at the right place in the line. That
means, if Tool 1 is required by Process 1 in Station 1/Workplace1 (S1/WP1), and
another Tool 1 is required by Process 2 in the same workplace, the algorithm has to
put only one tool in S1/WP1.
PMS Features: Layout Planning: Use Template Processes

You can create non-value adding processes inside ALB. Standard processes are loaded
from a standard process library. The processes created are copies of the standard
processes.
PMS Features: Multiple Activity Chart: One Worker working in different workplaces
You can create, delete, and assign active resources to stations from within ALB. Now
worker can work on two different workplaces. In PMS there are no real workplaces
anymore. In the 2D View there are two rectangles, previously used as workplaces
which are now used to represent the work content of a machine or a worker in that
station.
PMS Features: Multiple Activity Chart: Worker Bar Chart View

Now there is Active Resource oriented View in ALB, where the processes for each
worker and machine (= Active Resource) are shown.
PMS Features: Variant Matrix: Load Processes for Product Variants
You can load the data in a different way by loading a tree of processes and also their
relations to Calculations Models (which represent a PV).
PMS Features: Variant Matrix: Honor Process Sequence

You can start a new balancing but not using the automatic balancing algorithm. ALB
put all processes in the list of unbalanced processes. It create the first station
automatically. In PMS area, the process planners often plan their processes in the
sequence which is used for manufacturing. That means the sequence of the processes
in the product variant matrix could also be used as manufacturing sequence of the
processes. The list of unbalanced processes is customized. The processes can be
sorted according to their order in the variant matrix. When selecting processes (single
selection or multiple selection) the sum of the process times is displayed in the status
bar of that view. By selecting the first process and the using Shift+Cursor-Down keys,
you can select processes that fit into the takt time. You can then can do a Drag and
Drop of the selected processes in the first workplace. You can repeat the selection
procedure and balance the processes to the second workplace and can continue until
all processes are balanced.
DELMIA Process Engineer Pooling Server and
Server Tools
Global Emergency Mode
Global Emergency Mode is raised when a master process runs into a critical error state
that affects functionality used by other processes. Critical errors are then resolved
automatically, such that Process Engineer does not require a manual restart.
Improved Server monitoring
A set of resource indicators continuously monitor system resources to detect potential
resource overloads. This new resource control mechanism monitors available physical
memory, available virtual pagefile memory, server machine CPU utilization, the
number of active IPDServer processes, the total number of processes and total
number of allocated handles.
ENOVIA VPM V5 - DELMIA Process Engineer
Integration
New Functionalities
64-bit PPRLoader
The importing LCALoader application (and it’s underlying DLLs) are migrated to 64-bit
technology, thus extending the current memory limitations (2/3GB) tremendously up
to 8TB on Windows 64-bit OS.
Support Product Maintenance Lifecycle
Data necessary to support Product Maintenance in the Manufacturing Hub is
transferred from the Engineering Hub. In the Engineering Hub the list of Product
Specifications of a given Product Root Class is extracted by ProductDataGen into XML
files (for each Product Specification one XML file is generated).
Increase Export Capacity on 32-bit platforms
In previous releases, the maximum capacity of the exporter ProductDataGen is about
50000 instances per 1 GB virtual address space. The address space of such an
application is technically constrained to a maximum of 4 GB. Depending on the
operating system, an even lower value, e.g. a maximum of 2GB virtual address space
may be available.
Finder
New Functionality
Setting Search Options
Now through componenet finder you can set search options in the project i.e. search
condition value, string search, and attribute serach criteria.
Graphic Tools
New Functionalities
Geometry Catching
Enable the setting Tools < Settings < Change < Maintenance Tool < Global < Set
graphic/not_copy_cad_files value to 1, and then there is no need to copy the
geometry of resources if:
● The referenced file already is in the cadpath or in the product_cadpath directory no

path is used in the graphicname, only the name of the file is used.
● The referenced file already is in a subdirectory of cadpath or product_cadpath the
absolute path is changed to a relative path.
● Other source files get copied if this setting is not set.
Manufacturing Change Management
New Functionalities
Improved Usability via Switch Button
This provides the usability to switch the Action through component properties dialog
box. The Switch Action button appears on Properties dialog for the component.
Creating Versions for CCZ
Now you can create versions for PPR-components, which are indicated with option
CCZ Owner or No CCZ Member. You can create versions with help of the options
Check Out, Create, Check Out (Deep). or Create (deep).
PPR Navigator
New Functionalities
Variant Matrix
Now PPR navigator supports variant matrix. You can select and assign calculation
models of interest in the available list of calculation Model. The assigned calculation
Models of Interest are further displayed in the Variant Matrix window.
Variant Matrix Main UI
With variant matrix you can assign weightings for different calculation models.
Variant Matrix Printing
You can export the items in the grid view into an excel sheet. This could be
subsequently used for printing.
Variant Matrix Customization
You can create a profile and load the profile while opening the variant matrix. Profiles
are recommended to store the settings. Also, for entering weightings, Variant matrix
provides multiple ways. ‘X’ is a way of entering 100% weight. Also based on setting it
should be possible to enter fractions.
Variant Matrix Capabilities
Now you can edit attributes of the plan types and weights on calculation model. You
can also assign and copy weights from one calculation model to another as well as
copy values of attributes between processes.
Printing
Enhancements in Object Wizard
Now you can specify the desired relation when selecting an entry in the Search to
Plan Type field in Object wizard.
New Functionality
Inserting Logo and Copyrights in Print Form
Now you can insert the DELMIA logo and copy rights in print forms via Tools <
Settings < Change < Printing < Insert DELMIA logo and copy rights in print forms.
You can also modify the print forms and reports.
Process Planning for Body-in-White
New section describing how to extend the fastener and fastening process model
This section includes information on both point and curve fasteners. Because the
addition of this new section expands the overall content of this document, its name
has been changed to Process Planning for Body-in-White to reflect its more
comprehensive role.
Settings
Expand Mode for "Find in Tree"
This setting in Browser and Menu Items tab allows you to can expand your search in
finder when you search for a component in tree.
Show Relation in Object Wizard
This setting in Printing tab allows you to enable the relation combobox in Author
Object Wizard.
Disable MCM Warning Message
This setting in Miscellaneous tab enables to disable the display of warning message
while opening MCM projects if Mod statement is not selected.
Open Maximized
This setting in Other DS Software Modules tab enables to launch the DPE application
in maximized mode otherwise it get launched in normal mode.
Work Instructions Composer
The DELMIA Process Engineer Work Instructions Composer is a new product that allows you
to load a process plan with its assigned products and resources, and then author work
instructions for each of the processes in the process plan. The robust tools of 3DVIA
Composer allow you to annotate, mark-up on the products and resources, and save all the
work instructions back to the Manufacturing Hub.
Systems Routing (SRT) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Structure Design (SR1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Plant Layout (PLO, PLT) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Equipment Arrangement (EQT, MEQ) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Hanger Design (HGR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Knowledge Template (KT1, MK1) - P1
Product Knowledge Template Definition (PKT)
- P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Knowledge Advisor (KWA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
2D Layout for 3D Design (LO1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
(FT1) - P1, (FTA, MFT) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Systems Space Reservation (SSR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Raceway & Conduit Design (RCD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical for Shipbuilding
This page deals with the following products:
● Electrical Connectivity Diagrams (ELD) - P2
● Electrical Cableway Routing (ECR) - P2
Electrical Connectivity Diagrams (ELD) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical Cableway Routing (ECR) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Systems Diagrams (SDI) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Waveguide Design (WAV) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Waveguide Diagrams (WGD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Structure Functional Design (SFD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Licensing
● To be able to use the Finite Element Model Generator
command , the following licenses on top of the SFD product
are needed:
❍ FMS + GAS
● To be able to use the Manage Section CATPart

command, please note that you need to have the following
license to see the Computed Required Section Parameters for
Analysis.
❍ EST
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Ship Structure Detail Design (SDD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Compartment & Access (CNA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Generative Shape Design Products
● Generative Shape Design (GS1, GSM) - P1, (GSD) -P2
● Generative Shape Optimizer (GSO) - P2
● Automotive Body in White Templates (ABT) - P2
● Developed Shapes (DL1) - P1
For information on Sketcher issues, click here.

(GS1, GSM) - P1, (GSD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Autofillet New page in documentation will be added to elaborate more on
Autofillet command available in GSD
Generative Shape Optimizer (GSO) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Automotive Body In White Templates (ABT) -

P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Developed Shapes (DL1) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Quick Surface Reconstruction (QSR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
3D Curve on Mesh ● You cannot constrain a curve extremity on a surface.
● You cannot manipulate tangents in the following cases:
❍ an extremity of the curve is G0 constrained on another
curve,
❍ an extremity of the curve is constrained on the border of
the support mesh,
❍ an extremity of the curve is constrained on a plane.
● Manipulation of tangents on the closing point of a closed

curve is not effective.
● It may be difficult to catch the manipulator to move a control
point or to display the related contextual menu.
● It is not easy to differentiate insertion point and dominant
constraint modification.
● Some actions are not effective and/or reliable if the Hide
curve preview option is cleared.
● Manipulation of a control point can be very slow if the support
mesh is large and if the curve is connected to other curves.
● In some cases, the current manipulator disappear and you
cannot continue the curve edition. The workaround is to
validate the curve and edit it.
● In product mode, you cannot create a curve if the support
mesh is not in the current part.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Digitized Shape Editor (DSE) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
3D Curve on Mesh ● You cannot constrain a curve extremity on a surface.
● You cannot manipulate tangents in the following cases:
❍ an extremity of the curve is G0 constrained on another
curve,
❍ an extremity of the curve is constrained on the border of
the support mesh,
❍ an extremity of the curve is constrained on a plane.
● Manipulation of tangents on the closing point of a closed

curve is not effective.
● It may be difficult to catch the manipulator to move a control
point or to display the related contextual menu.
● It is not easy to differentiate insertion point and dominant
constraint modification.
● Some actions are not effective and/or reliable if the Hide
curve preview option is cleared.
● Manipulation of a control point can be very slow if the support
mesh is large and if the curve is connected to other curves.
● In some cases, the current manipulator disappear and you
cannot continue the curve edition. The workaround is to
validate the curve and edit it.
● In product mode, you cannot create a curve if the support
mesh is not in the current part.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
(TL1) - P1, (STL) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Shape Sculptor (DSS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Photo Studio (PH1) - P1, (PHS) - P2
Photo Studio Optimizer (PSO) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Photo Studio P1 Although PH1 is very simple to use, the integration of a 3D
mock up in front of a 2D photography in background is
sometime not so obvious. Do not forget that you can control the
perspective of the 3D using the command c:view angle . It
makes the job easier especially when the photo in background
was shot with a special lens.
Real Time Visualization New Architecture & Design shaders are globally both compatible
in real time and ray tracing. But some of them are not yet well
tuned for real time applications:
● Car paint: the complex effects with sparkles introduces
performances slow down in real time visualization
● Frosted glass: the frosted effect is not visualized in real time.
It is displayed as a polished glass.
Open Issues
Rendering with a trap When real time Full Scene Anti-Aliasing is activated in Tools/
Options, the PH1 trap's borderlines may disappear when
releasing the mouse. It will be fixed on the forthcoming release.
Documentation
None
FreeStyle Products
● FreeStyle Shaper (FS1) - P1, (FSS) - P2
● FreeStyle Optimizer (FSO) - P2
● FreeStyle Profiler (FSP) - P2
● FreeStyle Sketch Tracer (FSK) - P1
FreeStyle Shaper (FS1) - P1, (FSS) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Performing a Curvature The customization of units for the numerical values displayed in
Analysis the 2D Diagram using Tools > Options > General >
Parameters and Measure > Units will be implemented in the
next SP.
FreeStyle Optimizer (FSO) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
FreeStyle Profiler (FSP) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Performing a Curvature The customization of units for the numerical values displayed in
Analysis the 2D Diagram using Tools > Options > General >
Parameters and Measure > Units will be implemented in the
next SP.
FreeStyle Sketch Tracer (FSK) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Imagine & Shape (IMA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Real Time Rendering
(RT1, MRT) - P1, (RTR, MRR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Real Time Visualization for New Architecture & Design shaders are globally both compatible
new Advanced materials in real time and ray tracing. But some of them are not yet well
tuned for real time applications:
● Car paint: the complex effects with sparkles introduces
performances slow down in real time visualization
● Frosted glass: the frosted effect is not visualized in real time.
It is displayed as a polished glass.
Graphics Performance Graphics performance of V5 (GPU) is enhanced thanks to the
Enhancement for V5 support of the OpenGL feature, Vertex Buffer Object (VBO).
Products VBO increases the performance for large model models and
advanced materials based on CgFX shaders.
This graphics optimization is only available on Windows 32-bit &
64-bit (XP, VISTA) and by exporting the following environment
variable in your V5 install:
set CAT_VBO_ALLOWED=1
It is strongly recommended to switch to this optimization on the
latest hw graphics having at least 512 MB of video memory like:
● Nvidia Quadro FX4500, Quadro FX 5500, Quadro FX4600,
Quadro FX 5600
● ATI FireGL V7300, FireGL V7350, FireGL V5600, FireGL
V57600, FireGL V8600, FireGL V8650
Note that for ATI, it is recommended to install the latest ATI

FireGL 8.44 driver series.
Please refer to the DS certified configuration website to review
your configuration.
Object to object shadows Before you start your working session, we strongly recommend
that you install the latest driver for your PC graphic card. You
should also check with your hardware provider to determine if
your graphic card supports P-Buffer extensions; otherwise, the
shadow option will not be accessible in Version 5.
Moreover Shadows between objects are not taken into account
when capturing images in Pixel Mode (Tools > Image >
Capture...).
Transparency Transparency often generates visualization artifacts where
transparent objects behind another transparent object looks like
display in front. This artifact is also true for user made cgFX
shader and stickers.
Another transparency issue can happen when a regular material
with transparency is completed by a user made CgFX shader,
the material gets the shader's effect but keeps the transparency
of the default definition. Be sure that the material's
transparency is set to 0 prior to switch to shader mode.
ISL Shaders In the current release, the creation and visualization of .isl
format files and visualization is no longer supported. If
necessary, .isl files can be converted easily in .fx format. A
template is provided in the install path under startup/materials/
shaders.
CgFx Shaders The following restrictions apply to current release and Cg1.5
version from NVidia:
● Refer to Hardware Certifications for detailed information on
the supported operating systems and graphic configurations.
● Lights effects: if you use an FX material next to a standard
material, lights effects will be smoothed on the FX side and
aliased on the other side.
● Using shaders may have a significant impact on performance
and visualization due to the complexity of the shaders and the
number of lights in the CATIA session.
● You cannot activate Cg manually material per material, it is
controlled automatically by the software according to the
complexity of visual effects. As a result, it is not possible to
create smoothed lights effects on regular materials.
● The Refraction parameter in Edit > Properties > Lighting
is not taken into account yet.
● External shader files written by the user are under the user's
responsibility. This means that the user is responsible for
coding, debugging and upgrading the language for those
external shader files.
● With an external CgFX shader file, compatibility with PHS/PSO
is not guaranteed.
● If an interactive environment is used, this environment has
no effect on a material with an external shader.
● For an external shader the variable int NeedTandB=1; must
be initialized to compute tangents and binormals in the CgFx
shader file. This variable is not an environment variable.
● External shaders (.fx) are not supported by VB and Materials
APIs.
Cg1.5 library from NVidia are now delivered with Version 5 and
automatically installed on a Windows platform. The activation
remains a user choice in Tools > Options.
Material Update when CATIA does not update a material during a PowerCopy
instantiating a PowerCopy instantiation under the following circumstances:
● You have a CATPart document containing a material that is
assigned to a knowledge parameter and this material is
applied on a surface.
● You instantiate a PowerCopy of this CATPart document into a
second CATPart document that contains a knowledge
parameter.
CATIA does not update the material in the instantiated copy of

the CATPart with the value of the material from the knowledge
parameter of the second CATPart.
Workaround: Set the following variable:

MAT_REFRESH_AFTER_POWERCOPY_WITH_KWE_PARAMETER=1
Revision for Material LibraryWhen you create a new revision of a material library (.
CATMaterial file) and save it in ENOVIA V5 VPM, the links
between the part (or product) document and this library cannot
be automatically synchronized.
This means that you can neither use the Replace with latest
version contextual menu (available in ENOVIA V5 VPM Impact
By dialog box) nor the Synchronize button (in the Edit >
Links dialog box).
You have to reroute manually those links by reapplying the
material from the new revision of the material library.
Recommendation: Do not use revision for material libraries
documents.
Creating a Material Each material must have a unique name.
Library: Naming
convention
Settings for Default When you use a library saved in the ENOVIA VPLM ENOVIAVPM
Material Library database as the default material library (defined via the Tools >
Options > Infrastructure > Material settings), you may
loose the path if you are disconnected from the database and try
to edit the path of the default library.
In this case you need to:
1. exit your session.

2. reconnect to the database.
3. start a session.
4. edit your new material library path.
If you do not follow this procedure and edit the setting when
disconnected, the wrong path is generated in the settings. If the
wrong path is generated, you must erase your
MaterialOptionSettings.CATSettings and then restart the session.
Material Links To ensure visualization compatibility and scalability on all kind of
hardware, both openGL definition and CgFX shader definition
have to co-exist in a single material. As a consequence, all the
links to diffuse textures, reflection maps and shaders are stored
in the material data model even when not displayed. This
particular implementation is noticeable when exchanging
materials to another user with V5 "Send To" or V6 "Import": all
the associated textures are exported.
On this version this effect is brought to the fore when using
Cancel button in the material's property panel. When using
Cancel all the properties are reset but the textures links are kept
in the data model.
Exchanging V5 data without using "Send To" can lead to missing
materials or textures and then broken links. To remove all
broken material links* from CATPart or CATProduct
documents, use the CATDUA V5 tool (either in batch or
interactive mode) and set the following variable:
CAT_CLEAN_BROKEN_MATLINKS=True
Those broken links are detected and removed by the CATDUA as
MAT_6 errors.
*broken material links are links to CATMaterial documents

that have been lost or moved from their original location.
3D XML Materials
● Each reflective material can have its own reflection map, and
it is exported in V4.0 3D XMLfile (it was not the case with V3
3dxml).
● If the material has no associated reflection map, it is the
session reflection map (the” default” one) that is used for
visualization. This “default reflection map” is a Catia user
setting and is not exported in 3dxml. Since the player can
have another “default reflection map”, the visualization of a
reflective material can therefore be different between Catia
and Player.
● 3DXML coming from V6 export may have a slightly different
display in V5. In the particular case of a V6 Core Material
applied inside a V6 part, this material will not be displayed
● 3D materials (specific procedural materials available only with
a PSO license) are saved in 3D XML file without any texture
information except for materials applied onto parts or bodies
and saved in a 3D XML file in static tessellation format.
● specularExponent in 3D XML is not the one usually used in
OpenGL. To obtain the equivalence, you must first set the
OpenGL value between 0 and 1 and apply the following
formula:
3
1-(openGL specularExponent)
● The general recommendation is to use "xml tesselation"
format to export materials in 3D XML. When the 3D XML file is
only for visualization purpose (no need to edit the materials)
or when your model contains a large number of materials
applied only once in the product structure, it can be
interesting to use a "tessellation" mode to export a
tessellated format. In this particular case the resulting file
may be smaller.
Open Issues
DocChooser You cannot access image files stored in the ENOVIA vault when
using the Browse window.
This limitation will be fixed in a forthcoming release.
3D XML Rendering Scenes: Cameras, lights, stickers, environments, and
turntables cannot be saved in 3D XML in this version.
This limitation will be fixed in a forthcoming release.
Shaders and Sectionings Shader materials are not compliant with the DMU Sectioning
command.
This issue will be fixed in a forthcoming release.
Object to object shadows When opening a new window while lights are projecting real
time shadows on objects, the shadows are not displayed in the
new window. This issue will be fixed on the next SP.
Documentation
Enhancement New screenshots are up-to-date but in some existing
documentation sections, they have to be updated in a
forthcoming SP.
Object to object shadows All screenshots and some explanations are not yet up-to-date.
They will be modified on the forthcoming SP.
Tooling Design (TG1) - P1
Mold Tooling Design (MTD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Replace Plate Constraints will be kept only if planes, points,... have been
published.
In automatic update mode, the reconnection to external
references may fail (the dialog box is not available). This may
occur because of previous splits. Bypass: switch to manual
update mode.
If the dimensions of the replacing plate are defined by a design
table, this design table must contain a column named Ref and a
column named RefMold. Otherwise a warning message is
displayed informing that an internal error occurs.
Do not take the message "Impossible to synchronize" into
account.
Split Component ● It is not possible to perform "Add New Instance" from a split
component.
● A split component can be an assembly. However, if this
assembly contains a slider, this slider is not split.
Bypass: perform a second split, this time on the slider.
Split Synchronization To use this command:
● either set the option Update to Automatic, in Tools > Options
> Mechanical Design > Assembly Design,
● or update the father of the component to update, if the option
Update is left to Manual.
Split with Surface Please note:
Reduction ● Undo is not available for both standard split and split with
surface reduction! Using undo on those commands could
result in lost data.
● We recommend that you save your model before starting a
split, to be able to revert to this saved version if need be.
Adapting the Geometrical This capability is enhanced : it is available now for the insertion
Parameters of a Component of several "single instances" of the same component at the same
time:
● clear the check box Several Instances per Reference,
● then position the required number of instances in the 3D
view.
The External Reference Component dialog box will be

activated once for each component.
Insertion of Components The synchronization of the color of the holes generated by the
insertion of component is effective only if you have selected the
option Inherit colors from the reference feature in
Tools>Options> Infrastructure>Part Infrastructure.
Add new instance A component containing external references must be single
command instance (see Adapting the Geometrical Parameters of a
Component above). As a consequence, adding new instances is
not allowed for this type of component.
Component Catalogs CATIA offers catalogs corresponding to those of external
components suppliers. However:
● CATIA components catalogs are not always upgraded to the
latest version of the components suppliers' catalogs.
● a CATIA components catalog may contain components from
several versions of the components supplier's catalog.
● a CATIA components catalog does not contain all the
components from a given components suppliers' catalog.
Some components may be missing.
● a CATIA component may be different from the original one
(features may be missing).
Structure of Components The structure of some catalogs has changed, so the number of
Catalogs steps to reach the final component may have changed too.
In each CATPart that represents a component, there is a
parameter named SupplierRef that provides the version of the
catalog and the name of the supplier.
Tooling Part Interface We recommend that you create a constraint of type "fix" on
Management tooling product and part interfaces.
Using a Norm Other than If you need to use a norm other than ISO 965-2, please refer to
ISO 965-2 Reusing Values Already Defined in a File in Creating Threads and
Taps in the Part Design User's Guide.
Open Issues
Assembled components Faulty behaviors are likely to occur when the first CATPart found
in the Product Structure of the assembled component is not
positioned at the origin of the root product, e.g. when you have
moved the part in its father product using the compass.
Documentation
None
Core & Cavity Design (CCV) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Healing Assistant (HA1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Part Design Feature Recognition (FR1, FRM) -
P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Part Design
(PD1, MPD) - P1, (PDG) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Creating Always ensure that limiting elements intersect neutral curves. If not, the
Basic application does not trim draft features.
Draft
Features
Part
Document Color on import management property is editable
Color on import management property is editable option determines

whether the part editability for synchronization is available or not. If you select
this option, then the Imported features in current part inherit color from
reference feature option is enabled in the Color Management tab on part
properties.
Thus the color synchronization editability defines whether the imported feature
synchronization mode can be edited through Color Management tab on part
properties.
By default, this option is not selected.
Assembly Design
(AS1, MAS) - P1, (ASD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
For information on Product Structure issues, click here.
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Functional Molded Parts
(FM1) - P1, (FMP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Weld Design (WD1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
For information on Product Structure issues, click here.
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Sheetmetal Design
(SM1) - P1, (SMD) - P2
This page deals with the following workbenches:
● Sheetmetal Design Workbench
● Generative Sheetmetal Design Workbench
Sheetmetal Design Workbench

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Generative Sheetmetal Design Workbench

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Composites Products
● All Composites Products
● Composites Design (CPD) - P3
● Composites Engineering (CPE) - P2
● Composites Design for Manufacturing (CPM) - P2
All Composites Products

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Skin swapping elevation Few specific geometrical cases will be treated in R19SP1. Do not
mode hesitate to use the new function Check contours to check the
validity of plies contours.
Documentation
None
Composites Design (CPD) - P3

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Composites Engineering (CPE) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Composites Design for Manufacturing (CPM) -

P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Cast & Forged Part Optimizer (CFO) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Realistic Shape Optimizer (RSO) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Circuit Board Design (CBD) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Tubing Design (TUB) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Tubing Diagrams (TUD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
HVAC Design (HVA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
HVAC Diagrams (HVD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Piping Design (PIP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (PID) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical Products
● Electrical System Functional Definition (EFD) - P2
● Electrical 3D Design & Documentation (EC1, MEC) - P1
● Electrical Library (ELB) - P2
● Electrical Wire Routing (EWR) - P2
● Electrical Harness Installation (EHI) - P2
● Electrical Harness Flattening (EHF) - P2
Electrical System Functional Definition (EFD) -

P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical 3D Design & Documentation (EC1,

MEC) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Documentation
None
Electrical Library (ELB) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Documentation
None
Electrical Wire Routing (EWR) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical Harness Installation (EHI) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
For information on Flex Physical Simulation issues, click here.
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Transfer branches Function does not work properly if you select several times the
same branch.
Edit Branch If the ratio mode is used to define the bend radius while editing
a branch them the bend radius mode and its value are used for
the next branch edition.
Documentation
Duplicate Harness from More detailed information is being documented for Duplicate
ENOVIA Harness from ENOVIA
command command.
Bundle Segment Visual More detailed information is being documented for Bundle
Feedback Segment Visual Feedback.
Electrical Harness Flattening (EHF) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Extract function with If you extract data with option "NewFrom" and Flexible
NewFrom and Flex algorithm and if the 3D Design data contain a splice, there is
algorithm option some crash during the close of Flattening document.
CATDUA corrupt V5R14 The new rule EHI_11 corrupts the Flattening data created before
Flattening data V5R14 (this level is include). thanks to avoid to launch this rule
on Flattening data created before V5R14.
Documentation
None
DMU Engineering Analysis Review (ANR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Data Filtering (DF1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Fastening Review (FAR, MFR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Dimensioning & Tolerancing Review
(DT1, MTR) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Optimizer (DMO,MOP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Navigator
(DU1/DN1/MDU) - P1
(DMU/DMN/MNV) - P2
(DU3) - P3
● DMU Navigator P1: (DU1/DN1/MDU)
P2: (DMU/DMN/MNV)
● DMU Navigator P3: (DU3)
DMU Navigator
(DU1/DN1/MDU) - P1
(DMU/DMN/MNV) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
DMU Viewer DMU Viewer is no longer available.
2D Annotations 2D annotations do not function in multi-viewpoint mode.
When printing 2D annotations:
● you should not use the print mode Whole Doc (this mode
causes the annotations to be misaligned with respect to the
model).
● you should also not use the option Rendering Quality
Custom, which has the same effect of misaligning the
annotations
● you must export the variable
CAPTURE_WITHOUT_PBUFFER=1 in order that the other
Print display and selection options will not undergo the above
misalignment effect .
2D Annotations created in the section window can be displayed

by first selecting the section window and then launching Manage
Annotated Views command. Double-clicking on the 2D
Annotation in the Specification Tree will not display it.
DMU 2D Workshop ● When opening or inserting a DXF document, some texts and
dimensions may not be displayed.
Workaround: In order to display correctly most of the

texts and dimensions, please use CATDMUUtility2D to
convert the DXF in cgm format.
● It is recommended that you not use the Open in New Window

command in the DMU 2D Viewer.
DMU 2D Workshop / Print The Print command will by default print the viewer content.
● In Display mode, the viewer content is printed as is.
● In Whole document mode, the viewer content is printed as
if the entire document were visible in the viewer (equivalent
to the Fit All In command).
● Fit in page and rotation are not taken into account.
DMU 2D Workshop / The comparison precision depends on the zoom factor in the 2D
Comparing Drawings viewer. Thus, in case of large images, some differences will not
be detected without zooming if these differences are too small
regarding the image size.
DMU 2D Workshop / CGM Files generated using SaveAs, Capture or Print, up to R18
Compare CGM Files and included, were enlarged by a thin surrounding margin.
This was an unwanted behavior. Therefore, beginning in R19,
this surrounding margin for CGM is removed. However, if you
compare a CGM generated in R18 or earlier, and a CGM
generated in R19 or later, this margin difference will appear.
Bypass: Exporting the variable
CATPrintOldVDCExtentForCGM = 1 allows you to rollback to
R18 behavior so that the margin difference will not appear.
Running the CATDMUUtility When generating a cgr file from a CATProduct, cgr files will also
Batch Process be generated for all components of the CATProduct.
The cgr generated for certain V4 models (e.g. solids) does not
permit exact measure.
Running the When generating a CATProduct using the option -onlyone, all
CATDMUBuilder Batch CATProducts of the assembly will be generated.
Process
Saving DMU Old Scenes in When trying to save DMU old scenes in ENOVIAVPM in mode
ENOVIAVPM in Mode "publication exposed", the following error message appears on
"Publication Exposed" the ENOVIAVPM side:
"error 110 - Database error 410"
Workaround:
1. First save the CATProduct without the scenes (Create and

Save commands).
2. Add the scenes (or any other DMU application data).
3. File -> Save to update the CATProduct in ENOVIAVPM.
This problem does not occur with Enhanced Scenes.

Visualization Problems for The option "Optimize cgr for large assembly
Certain Graphic Display visualization" (Tools / Options / Infrastructure / Product
Cards Structure / Cgr Management) could lead to visualization
problems when used on an AIX machine with the following
graphic display cards:
● GXT 2000P
● GXT 3000P
● GXT 4000P
● GXT 4500P
3D XML For information in the Program Directory concerning the 3D XML
format, see:
● ENOVIA: DMU Infrastructure, 3D XML
● CATIA: CATIA Object Manager, 3D XML.
Saving as .model It is no longer possible to save DMU Navigator files in .model
format.
Reviews - No Show Warning: In DMU Navigator, when you transfer a Review to No
Show space, Groups that belong to the Review will not be
transferred to No Show space at the same time.
Open Issues
DMU Review - Copying / It is not currently possible to copy / paste a multi-selection
Pasting a Multi-selection consisting of multiple applicative data types.
DMU 2D Workshop / DeleteThe Delete function does not currently work in the 2D
Workshop. It is not possible to delete inserted documents or
markers.
Running the CATDMUBuilder cannot generate a CATProduct from a structure-
CATDMUBuilder Batch exposed product stored in ENOVIA V5 VPM.
Process
Technological Packages In a Technological Package saved under an intermediate node
(part version), if you double-click 3d Text in the geometry in
order to edit it, it will disappear from the geometry.
Workaround: You can click the 3d Text in the specification tree
in order to retrieve it.
Proximity Query A 3dmap cache generated on AIX is not usable on HP.
Fast Clash Detection If the option 'Use voxelization for collision detection' is checked
in Tools/Option/Digital Mockup/DMU Navigator, voxelization (vps
files) is not recomputed correctly when applying a visualization
filter ('Visualization Filters...' and 'CATIA V4 Layer Filters...'
commands).
Save as 3D XML When opening a 3D XML, Presentation Browser thumbnails may
not be correct.
Documentation
None
DMU Navigator
(DU3) - P3
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Space Analysis
(SP1) - P1, (SPA, MSA) - P2
● DMU Space Analysis (SP1) - P1
● DMU Space Analysis (SPA, MSA) - P2
DMU Space Analysis (SP1) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Measure Item vs mass Measure Item takes advantage of the improvements made to
computation improvement the mass computation precision on the R18 level. Consequently,
measure item results on a same CATPart vary between R17 and
R18 levels.
Knowledgeware rule-based If you want to launch a knowledgeware rule-based clash
clash computation for SDD computation under the following circumstances:
Design Units or SFD ● The knowledgeware clash rule contains SddDesignUnit or
Systems SfdSystem objects.
● SddDesignUnit or SfdSystem objects are saved in ENOVIA
database.
● The cache system is activated (The Working with the
Cache system check box is selected in Tools > Options >
Product Structure > Cache Management).
Make sure the SddDesignUnit or SfdSystem objects are saved in

ENOVIA in work packages (black box).
Multi-CPU computer mode Multi-CPU computer mode (designed to distribute the clash
and clash calculation calculation among processors) is no longer activated by default
because it could lead to serious problems.
Workaround: It is still supported but is only available on request
(we provide a specific variable for those who want to continue to
work in multi-CPU computer mode).
Exporting section results in To view the section results in a browser that is different from
VRML format the CATIA dedicated viewer, change the background color of
that browser.
Measures Update in Scenes Automatic update in product Setting:
In Tools > Options > Parameters and Measures > Measure
Tools:
● If the automatic update in product check box is selected,
measures made using Measure Between, Measure Item,
Measure Inertia and Measure Arc through Three Points are
updated in a scene context.
● If the automatic update in product check box is cleared,
not updated in scene context.
Measuring geometry & Measures made using Measure Between, Measure Item, and
inertia Measure Inertia take all items into account even those located in
the No Show space.
Measure Inertia The center of gravity value result differs depending on the
Measure Item command you are using (Measure Inertia or Measure Item). This
is a standard behavior because:
● Measure inertia takes into account the material applied on
parts and/or products whereas,
● Measure Item calculates the geometric center of gravity
without taking into account the applied material.
Measure Between ● The three planes that can be selected in an axis system are
considered to be semi-infinite planes relimited by two
corresponding axes of the axis system. As a result, you may
obtain incorrect results using the Measure Between command
on those planes.
Workaround: Use Any geometry, infinite mode for Measure

Between.
Measuring distances ● The Arc center mode is no longer activated when measuring
(Measure Between) in the distances (Measure Between command) in the Section
Section viewer Results window using Any geometry and Any geometry,
infinite selection modes.
Workaround: To measure distances between centers of arcs, set

the Selection mode to Arc center.
Measures (Item and In 3D XML format, when you save a product containing Measure
Between) and 3D XML Between or Measure Item that is stored in a complex DMU
Review structure (with sub-reviews), the measures between are
also saved in the 3D XML file.
However, when you reopen the 3D XML file, the Measure
Between is created in a default DMU Review but the complex
DMU Review structure is not retained.
Sections and 3D XML ● New product > Insert a 3D XML containing a section:
❍ The section appears in the specification tree but is not
valid.
❍ The section is not displayed in the geometry.
● The plane visualization mode (plane, slice or box) is not

exported.
● The fill mode of the section result is not exported.
● The Section Freeze mode is not retained.
● The information related to the grid (activated, values,
behavior) is not retained.
● The applicative data under a section are not exported.

Therefore, measures, distances, 3D annotations, and 2D
annotations are not exported if they are stored under the
section.
Clash Results export in ● French and Japanese languages are not supported by the first
XML XML type (First XML type: the XML Export for clash
process purpose check box is cleared. For this XML type any
filters applied to the results in the Clash dialog box are taken
into account so you can use the filters to export pertinent
results only ).
● The Zoom in interferences option is now available in the
Tools > Options > Digital Mockup > Space Analysis >
DMU Clash Process tab. By default, the check box is
selected.
CATIA/ENOVIA Customizing XML Export Clash Settings
Interoperability - XML If you want to export clash results (saved in ENOVIA V5 VPM
Export and sent to CATIA) with associated pictures in XML format:
● We recommend you to select the Compute all numeric and
graphic results option button in During initial
Computation area using the Tools > Options > Digital
Mockup > DMU Space Analysis > DMU Clash tab.
Japanese Language Second XML type: To ensure the availability of Japanese
Support in Second XML language support, select the Support for long filenames
type check box in DMU Clash - Process tab (Tools > Options >
Digital Mockup > DMU Space Analysis).
into account so that you can use the filters to export only
pertinent results).
● The Zoom in interferences option is now available in Tools
> Options > Digital Mockup > Space Analysis > DMU
Clash Process tab. By default the check box is selected.
● We recommend you to select Compute all numeric and
Computation area using Tools > Options > Digital
Open Issues
Measures (Item and DMU Reviews and Measures
Between) and 3D XML ● In 3D XML format, when you save a product containing
Measure Between or Measure Item that is stored in a complex
DMU Review structure (with sub-reviews), the measures
between are also saved in the 3D XML file.
● Associativity is not retained when you save in 3D XML. The re-
created measure between is broken and, thus, is
nonassociative.
Measure Customization
● The customization of the repositioning of lines and text for a

measure (green-colored) is not retained in the 3D XML file:
when you reopen the 3D XML file, all measures appear in the
default position.
● The customization of the measure display is not retained in
3D XML format: when you reopen the 3D XML file, all values
are saved and the measure is displayed using the current
customization.
Supported Measures in 3D XML
● Measure Between or Measure Item stored in a complex DMU

Review structure (with sub-reviews) can be saved in 3D XML.
Note the measures between are also saved in the 3D XML file.
● Only Measure Item and Measure Between can be exported to
3D XML format. Measure Thickness and Measure Arc (by 3
points) are not taken into account. In Measure Between the
angle measured is not exported either.
● Measures with names such as "MeasureBetween.5" or
"MeasureBetween.XXX" will be saved as "MeasureBetween.1",
"MeasureBetween.2", etc.
● The maximum distance cannot be saved in 3D XML format
Sections and 3D XML This issue will be corrected on a forthcoming SP level:
● In 3D XML, when you save a product containing sections
stored in a complex DMU Review structure (with sub-
reviews), the sections are also saved in the 3D XML file;
however, when you reopen the 3D XML file, the sections are
created in a default DMU Review: the complex DMU Review
structure is not retained. The selected objects that are cut are
not retained.
Measure Item When you perform a measure on a solid (for example, a pad),
the measure value is the one of the whole Part Body document
(The selected object is not taken into account for the measure
calculation). Therefore, the measure result is incorrect.
Sectioning and This issue will be corrected on a forthcoming SP Level:
CATDrawing documents The current V5 session is inadvertently terminated under the
following circumstances:
● A CATDrawing is open along with the Section Result

window.
● You close the Section Result window.
The same issue is applicable to Distance Result window.
Workaround: Close the Section Result window before

opening a CATDrawing document.
Sectioning and To take advantage of sectioning capabilities in a CATAnalysis
CATAnalysis documents document, open the linked CATProduct before running the
sectioning command.
Measuring in Visual Measures made in the Visual Comparison viewer are displayed
Comparison viewer in the main document window.
Documentation
None
DMU Space Analysis (SPA, MSA) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Measure Item vs mass Measure Item takes advantage of the improvements made to
computation improvement the mass computation precision on the R18 level. Consequently,
measure item results on a same CATPart vary between R17 and
R18 levels.
Knowledgeware rule-based If you want to launch a knowledgeware rule-based clash
clash computation for SDD computation under the following circumstances:
Design Units or SFD ● The knowledgeware clash rule contains SddDesignUnit or
Systems SfdSystem objects.
● SddDesignUnit or SfdSystem objects are saved in ENOVIA
database.
● The cache system is activated (The Working with the
Cache system check box is selected in Tools > Options >
Product Structure > Cache Management).
Make sure the SddDesignUnit or SfdSystem objects are saved in

ENOVIA in work packages (black box).
Multi-CPU computer mode Multi-CPU computer mode (designed to distribute the clash
and clash calculation calculation among processors) is no longer activated by default
because it could lead to serious problems.
Workaround: It is still supported but is only available on request
(we provide a specific variable for those who want to continue to
work in multi-CPU computer mode).
Exporting section results in To view the section results in a browser that is different from
VRML format the CATIA dedicated viewer, change the background color of
that browser.
Measures Update in Scenes Automatic update in product Setting:
In Tools > Options > Parameters and Measures > Measure
Tools:
● If the automatic update in product check box is selected,
updated in a scene context.
● If the automatic update in product check box is cleared,
not updated in scene context.
Measuring geometry & Measures made using Measure Between, Measure Item, and
inertia Measure Inertia take all items into account even those located in
the No Show space.
Measure Inertia The center of gravity value result differs depending on the
Measure Item command you are using (Measure Inertia or Measure Item). This
is a standard behavior because:
● Measure inertia takes into account the material applied on
parts and/or products whereas,
● Measure Item calculates the geometric center of gravity
without taking into account the applied material.
Measure Between ● The three planes that can be selected in an axis system are
considered to be semi-infinite planes relimited by two
corresponding axes of the axis system. As a result, you may
obtain incorrect results using the Measure Between command
on those planes.
Workaround: Use Any geometry, infinite mode for Measure

Between.
Measuring distances ● The Arc center mode is no longer activated when measuring
(Measure Between) in the distances (Measure Between command) in the Section
Section viewer Results window using Any geometry and Any geometry,
infinite selection modes.
Workaround: To measure distances between centers of arcs, set

the Selection mode to Arc center.
Measures (Item and In 3D XML format, when you save a product containing Measure
Between) and 3D XML Between or Measure Item that is stored in a complex DMU
Review structure (with sub-reviews), the measures between are
also saved in the 3D XML file.
However, when you reopen the 3D XML file, the Measure
Between is created in a default DMU Review but the complex
DMU Review structure is not retained.
Sections and 3D XML ● New product > Insert a 3D XML containing a section:
❍ The section appears in the specification tree but is not
valid.
● The plane visualization mode (plane, slice or box) is not

exported.
● The fill mode of the section result is not exported.
● The Section Freeze mode is not retained.
● The information related to the grid (activated, values,
behavior) is not retained.
● The applicative data under a section are not exported.

Therefore, measures, distances, 3D annotations, and 2D
annotations are not exported if they are stored under the
section.
into account so you can use the filters to export pertinent
results only ).
● The Zoom in interferences option is now available in the
Tools > Options > Digital Mockup > Space Analysis >
DMU Clash Process tab. By default, the check box is
selected.
● We recommend you to select the Compute all numeric and
Computation area using the Tools > Options > Digital
Open Issues
Measures (Item and DMU Reviews and Measures
Between) and 3D XML ● In 3D XML format, when you save a product containing
Measure Between or Measure Item that is stored in a complex
DMU Review structure (with sub-reviews), the measures
between are also saved in the 3D XML file.
● Associativity is not retained when you save in 3D XML. The re-
created measure between is broken and, thus, is
nonassociative.
Measure Customization
● The customization of the repositioning of lines and text for a

measure (green-colored) is not retained in the 3D XML file:
when you reopen the 3D XML file, all measures appear in the
default position.
● The customization of the measure display is not retained in
3D XML format: when you reopen the 3D XML file, all values
are saved and the measure is displayed using the current
customization.
Supported Measures in 3D XML
● Measure Between or Measure Item stored in a complex DMU

Review structure (with sub-reviews) can be saved in 3D XML.
Note the measures between are also saved in the 3D XML file.
● Only Measure Item and Measure Between can be exported to
3D XML format. Measure Thickness and Measure Arc (by 3
points) are not taken into account. In Measure Between the
angle measured is not exported either.
● Measures with names such as "MeasureBetween.5" or
"MeasureBetween.XXX" will be saved as "MeasureBetween.1",
"MeasureBetween.2", etc.
● The maximum distance cannot be saved in 3D XML format
Sections and 3D XML This issue will be corrected on a forthcoming SP level:
● In 3D XML, when you save a product containing sections
stored in a complex DMU Review structure (with sub-
reviews), the sections are also saved in the 3D XML file;
however, when you reopen the 3D XML file, the sections are
created in a default DMU Review: the complex DMU Review
structure is not retained. The selected objects that are cut are
not retained.
Measure Item When you perform a measure on a solid (for example, a pad),
the measure value is the one of the whole Part Body document
(The selected object is not taken into account for the measure
calculation). Therefore, the measure result is incorrect.
Sectioning and This issue will be corrected on a forthcoming SP Level:
CATDrawing documents The current V5 session is inadvertently terminated under the
following circumstances:
● A CATDrawing is open along with the Section Result

window.
● You close the Section Result window.
The same issue is applicable to Distance Result window.
Workaround: Close the Section Result window before

opening a CATDrawing document.
Sectioning and To take advantage of the sectioning capabilities in a CATAnalysis
CATAnalysis documents document, open the linked CATProduct before running the
sectioning command.
Measuring in Visual Measures made in the Visual Comparison viewer are displayed
Comparison viewer in the main document window.
Documentation
None
Generative Part Structural Analysis
(GP1) - P1, (GPS, MGS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Associativity Part Features If you delete the last feature in the specification tree of a part
vs. CATAnalysis Document linked to the analysis document, the analysis specifications may
be lost. You must re-define the design specifications to be
applied to each analysis feature specification.
Recommended methodology: Create a dummy feature to be the
last feature in the specification tree, and insert all new design
features before the dummy feature.
Visualization of Analysis When you modify the design and return to the Generative
Specifications Structural Analysis workbench, the preprocessing specifications
are not automatically displayed.
Workaround: Double-click the analysis specifications in the
specification tree to edit the specifications.
2D Display and Undo The creation and the edition of a 2D display does not support
Command the Undo command.
Workaround: Delete the 2D display.
Improving Performance on To improve performance, download the Intel MKL library from
Windows using the Intel the following Intel web site:
Math Kernel Libraries (MKL) http://developer.intel.com/software/products/index.htm
To install the MKL, you just have to execute the downloaded file.
Then, add the following string to your PATH environment
variable:
● 32-bit: C:\Program Files\intel\MKL\XX\ia32\bin (where XX is
the level of MKL)
The supported MKL versions are 6, 7, 8 and 9.
● 64-bit: C:\Program Files\intel\MKL\XX\em64t\bin (where XX
is the level of MKL)
The supported MKL versions are 8 and 9.
Warning:
● MKL 10.0 and upper versions are not supported.
● You may have to pay Intel to use some libraries.
Left-handed Axis System ● Before V5R17, the selection of left-handed axis systems was
authorized.
Only the X and Y coordinates are used: the Z coordinate is
obtained by the cross product of the X and Y coordinates (Z =
X x Y) satisfying the right-hand rule.
It is possible that some preprocessing data are not in desired
sense.
● From the V5R17, it is not possible to select left-handed axis
systems anymore.
The models built with left-handed axis system are invalidated.
1D Property: Beam from Although the Beam from surface option belongs to the ELFINI
Surface Option Structural Analysis (EST) product, this option is available with
the Generative Part Structural Analysis (GPS) product.
The choice of this option will not be taken into account by the
solver if the ELFINI Structural Analysis (EST) product is not
installed.
You must install the ELFINI Structural Analysis (EST) product for
the Beam from surface option to be taken into account by the
solver.
Properties and When applying a property to mesh part that has been
Transformed Mesh Parts transformed (by transformation), the transformed mesh part
inherits this property.
The transfer of the properties between the parent mesh part and
the transformed mesh part with multi-selection of supports may
not have the desired behavior.
Workaround: create several transformed mesh parts with mono-
selection of support.
Integration with Product Do not use the local properties in the algorithm for constraints
Engineering Optimization and derivative providers.
(PEO) Product
Local Sensors: Stress Von All the Stress Von Mises local sensors created before the
Mises V5R15 release are invalidated while opening a .CATAnalysis
document.
You have to launch an update (using the Update Sensor or
Update all Sensors contextual menus) or launch a
computation (using the Compute icon).
Post-processing Before the Version 5 Release 12:
● for vector type data displayed as SYMBOL visualization type
(for example: Translational displacement vector),
minimum and maximum values (displayed in the color map)
were always computed using the norm of the vector even
when filtering on components.
● for eigen values type data displayed as SYMBOL visualization

type (for example: Stress principal tensor symbol),
minimum and maximum values (displayed in the color map)
were always computed over all the components.
These values are now computed according to the selected

components.
Smoothing Post-treatment The smoothing process (element to node) has been modified for
for 2D Properties the 2D properties (Shell, Membrane, Shear Panel).
Previously the axis of the first found connected element was
arbitrarily chosen.
The axis system at node is now the mean axis system of the
adjacent elements for characteristics owning a local axis system.
This will change results when large angle is detected between
elements connected to a node.
The image/sensor types (at Node position) impacted by this
enhancement are: principal stress, stress symbol...
Interoperability ● It is strongly recommended to manage interoperability of
analysis documents with ENOVIA V5 (open, save and impact
graph) using the VPM Navigator product.
● "Analysis on a product saved in Explode mode" and "Data
Mapping" capabilities are supported by the VPM Navigator
product but not by ENOVIAVPM Version 4 and ENOVIA 3dcom.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Generative Assembly Structural Analysis
(GAS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Connection Properties Connection properties applied on general analysis connections
Visualization with group as support on one of its side have no 3D
representation on the geometry.
Connecting Extract and The feature pointed by an analysis connection must be the same
Boundary Features as the meshed feature.
Before Version 5 Release 14:
You can connect an extract feature (or boundary feature) even if
this feature is not meshed.
From Version 5 Release 14:
You cannot apply a connection property to an analysis
connection if one of the supports is not meshed.
Make sure that the supports of the analysis connection are
meshed. To mesh the analysis connection supports:
1. Edit the analysis connection.

2. Select the Select Mesh Part button for each support.
Integration with Product In the analysis assembly context, you cannot use the algorithm
Engineering Optimization for constraints and derivative providers because the derivatives
(PEO) Product in Analysis cannot be supplied by the solver.
Assembly Context
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Fitting Simulator (FIT) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Creating or altering the When you start to create a new track, create several shots for
track the track, and then seek to exit the command without the
track actually being created, there is a latency before the
command terminates.
Documentation
None
DMU Kinematics Simulator (KIN) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Human Products

● Human Builder (HBR, MHB) - P2
● Human Measurements Editor (HME, MHM) - P2
● Human Posture Analysis (HPA, MHP) - P2
● Human Activity Analysis (HAA, MHA) - P2
● Human Task Simulation (MHT) - P2
● Human Anthropometry Catalog (HTC, MTC) - P2
● Human Posture Catalog (HPC, MPC) - P2
● Human Preferred Angles Catalog (HAC, MAC) - P2
● Human Task Catalog (MHC) - P2
Human Builder (HBR, MHB) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Drafting ● If the manikin CATProduct is closed, the Drafting linked to it
will not update the manikin view.
Open Issues
Constraints ● Colors of constraints line are not correctly updated when
applying the reset command on the manikin's posture.
Angular Limitations ● Removed Angular Limitations are reset when moving the
manikin using IK mode
Forward Kinematics ● Impossible to reach the Angular limitations limits with the FK
manipulator
Reach mode ● Selected segment is deselected when switching between the
two Reach modes.
Balance ● The color of the support polygon is not updated when a load
is added to the manikin.
Macros recording ● Constraint update is not recorded in macros.
Catalog ● If an Offset and a a Local Posture are saved together in a
catalog, only the offset is recorded. The Local Posture is lost.
Attach ● Object attached to the Top of Head segment does not move
according to changes of Anthropometry. Workaround: Attach
the object to the Head segment.
Simulation ● Start position is not generate correctly in the MHB simulation
when the second position have an angle at the pelvis.
Documentation
RULA Coloring ● Without Human Activity Analysis license, RULA coloring is still
displayed on the manikin. Note that in this case, the coloring
is based on the RULA default parameters. It is impossible to
edit the RULA parameters without Human Activity Analysis
license.
Human Measurements Editor (HME, MHM) -

P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Message prompts ● Message prompts are not available for commands in the
Human Measurement Editor workbench
Documentation
None
Human Posture Analysis (HPA, MHP) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Preferred Angles ● Preferred Angles optimized using Optimize Angular Limitation
according to best preferred angles command are lost after
closing and reopening the saved file.
Documentation
None
Human Activity Analysis (HAA, MHA) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Biomechanics ● Some data are not the same in Biomechanic analysis joint
moment strengh data and the report (.txt and .Html) for the
Biomechanic joint moment
Documentation
Biomechanics Analysis Note: The DNA notation that is sometimes shown for some
joints data in Joint Moment Strength data tab, means that data
from reference are not available for current results.
Human Task Simulation (MHT) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Operate walking with ● We do not support Operate walking whit pelvis bent. If the
pelvis bent manikin's pelvis is bent, it is automatically straighten when
creating the Operate walking activity. Therefore in simulation
the manikin walks straight without any bent of the pelvis.
Permanent restriction.
Operate walking orientation ● For operate walking activities, the manikin's orientation has
to be sets in order for the manikin to face the desired walking
orientation before creating the operate activity. Permanent
restriction.
Operate simulation time ● The user should expect different simulation time for human
simulation involving operate. These small differences are due
to the use of a numerical solver that not always generates the
exactly same solution to resolve the Operate. Permanent
restriction.
Open Issues
Energy expenditure ● The Energy expenditure command for the manikin will be
available in Human Task Simulation workbench only if the
user also has a Human Activity Analysis license.
IK resolution ● When simulating a Walk, if the manikin is picking something
with both hands and the "Honor constraint during simulation"
option is enabled, the manikin's not picking arm is moving a
lot.
Operate ● When editing a Move activity inside an Operate activity
edition, the modifications to the Move activity are lost if
closing the Operate activity edition window using the cancel
button.
Visualization ● The behavior of Visualization settings(LOD and Pixel Culling)
is different between Human Builder workbench and Human
Task simulation workbench
Packaging ● The Creates Line Tracking Activities Command is not present
with shared licenses.
Swept Volume ● The Swept Volume command for the manikin will be available
if the user also has a DMU Space Analysis or DMU Optimizer
license.
Documentation
None
Human Anthropometry Catalog (HTC, MTC) -

P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Human Posture Catalog (HPC, MPC) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Human Preferred Angles Catalog (HAC, MAC)

- P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Human Task Catalog (MHC) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Apply HumanTask ● Only the Initial MTP is created when applying the two
following items from the catalog: "Walk knees-trunk
flexion_arms swing", "Walk forward knees-trunk
flexion_arms still".
● When we apply the "crawling back" from the Human Task
Transition catalog, the manikin always go in the same
direction, no matter the initial orientation.
Documentation
None
Product Engineering Optimizer (PEO) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Knowledge Expert
(KE1) - P1, (KWE, MKE) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
FEM Surface (FMS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
FEM Solid (FMD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Generative Dynamic Response Analysis (GDY)
- P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Restraint Excitation in a In a transient dynamic response case restraint excitation affects
Transient Dynamic only the translational degrees of freedom.
Response Case
2D Display Generated with The 2D display model upward compatibility is not assured
the Version 5 Release 11 between Version 5 Release 11 and later releases.
2D display visualizations generated with Version 5 Release 11
cannot be edited in the later releases.
You have to generate a new 2D display visualization using the
Generate 2D Display contextual menu.
2D Display and Undo The creation and the edition of a 2D display does not support
Command the Undo command.
Workaround: Delete the 2D display.
2D Display Parameters If you edit the Y Axis of a 2D display visualization, you can
choose dB(Peak) or dB(RMS) as the Format value.
The dB(Peak) format corresponds to a decimal logarithm
format.
The dB(RMS) format is not implemented.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Elfini Structural Analysis (EST) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Improving ● If Windows XP is installed with options allowing you to access to more than 2.0 GB
Performance of memory (for more details, refer to the Accessing more than 2.0 GB of memory
on on Windows XP section), you must also modify the following executables with the
Windows XP
imagecfg.exe utility:
CATELFSlaveProcess.exe
CATELFContactSlave.exe
CATELFLanczosSlave.exe
● To improve performance, download the Intel MKL library from the following Intel
web site:
http://developer.intel.com/software/products/index.htm
To install the MKL, you just have to execute the downloaded file. Then, add the
following string to your PATH environment variable:
❍ 32-bit: C:\Program Files\intel\MKL\XX\ia32\bin (where XX is the level of MKL)
The supported MKL versions are 6, 7, 8 and 9.
❍ 64-bit: C:\Program Files\intel\MKL\XX\em64t\bin (where XX is the level of MKL)
The supported MKL versions are 8 and 9.
Warning:
❍ MKL 10.0 and upper versions are not supported.
❍ You may have to pay Intel to use some libraries.
Multi ● If the HOME environment variable is defined, it MUST contain an existing and
Processing writable directory path.
Capabilities Otherwise you will have the following error message:
(Windows Error in xcoexe/xcocall, IER = -1
only)
● If the HOME environment variable is not defined, the default temporary CATIA
path is automatically used.
Computed Once you have cleared computation data using the External Storage Clean-up
Masses and command, computed masses are automatically re-computed in the following cases:
External ● Generating images on computed masses
Storage
Clean-up ● Activating images on computed masses
● Creating inertia sensors
● Opening a document which contains at least one activated image on computed
masses.
These operations lead to the creation of a CATAnalysisComputations file which needs

to be saved.
Composite ● The composite document may be modified the first time you launch a Mesh Only
Properties computation on an analysis document containing an imported composite material
defined by plies.
● The analysis results are incorrect in the following cases:
Workaround:
● The previous design constraints are also valid for composite materials defined by
plies:
❍ do not use a surface join as ply group support,
❍ use a simple and closed contour as ply contour.
● When you apply successively an imported composite material defined by zones on

a mesh part, then an imported composite material defined by plies on another
mesh part, the computation may not be launched.
● Post-processing and composite:
❍ Zone approach: the values of stress images in Average iso mode are incorrect
for all the nodes common to different composite zones. The results are correct
for the internal nodes belonging to a same zone.
❍ Ply approach: the values of stress images in Average iso mode are potentially
incorrect because the number and the order of the layers may vary from an
element to an other.
Generally, it is strongly recommend to use the Discontinuous iso mode for the
images belonging to the stress physical type in a composite context.
Post- ● Before the Version 5 Release 12:
processing ❍ for vector type data displayed as SYMBOL visualization type (for example:
Translational displacement vector), minimum and maximum values
(displayed in the color map) were always computed using the norm of the
vector even when you are filtering on components.
❍ for eigen values type data displayed as SYMBOL visualization type (for
example: Stress principal tensor symbol), minimum and maximum values
(displayed in the color map) were always computed over all the components.
These values are now computed according to the selected components.

● Edition of images created before the Version 5 Release 14 GA level:
You can select a user axis (created in the Part Design workbench) in the Image
Edition dialog box (Filters tab > Axis system option).
If this axis belongs to a .CATPart document contained in a .CATProduct document,
the part positioning is not taken into account and so, the image results are not
valid.
Workaround: delete the images created before the R14 GA level, and re-create
them.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Advanced Machining (AMG) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Multi-Pocket Machining (MPG) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Multi-Pocket Flank This functionality may lead to unexpected results. Will be fixed
Contouring: Bottom in a future release.
Documentation
Power Machining The contextual menu item Force to machine on a Bottom plane
or an Imposed plane will be available in a future release.
(MPA, MMA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
NC Manufacturing Review
(NG1) - P1, (NCG, MNC) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Tool numbers and tool When a tool assembly is queried from a tools catalog, the
catalogs resulting tool assembly and its tool will have the same tool
number: this unique tool number is the one assigned to the tool
assembly in the catalog.
If this tool number is not defined or equal to zero in the catalog,
resulting tool number (on tool assembly and tool) will be
automatically computed from the assemblies and tools already
present in the resources list.
NC Manufacturing Verification (NVG, MVG) -
P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Multi-Axis Surface Machining (MMG, MMM) -
P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3-Axis Surface Machining (SMG, MSM) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Roughing - Collision Check After several modification of this parameter, if the result is not
with Tool Holder correct, use Compute Tool Path - Forced computation.
3/5-Axis Converter In the 3/5-Axis Converter, the system crashes if you select the
Normal To Part Tool axis mode in the Global modification and
Collisions Checking tabs of the dialog box.
This problem will be solved in R19 SP1.
Documentation
Roughing The contextual menu item Force to machine on a Bottom plane
or an Imposed plane will be available in a future release.
Prismatic Machining
(PG1) - P1, (PMG, MPM) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Lathe Machining
(LG1) - P1, (LMG, MLM) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Lathe tool user Lathe tool user representation visualization may not be correct
representation with tool during toolpath replay, video simulation and machine simulation
axis orientation or tool axis when tool axis orientation is defined or tool axis flip is activated.
flip
Documentation
None
NC Machine Tool Builder (MBG) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Modeling of Mill Turn Turrets modeled with multiple tool mounting stations can only
machines have 3 axes: X and Z as two translation axes, and the turret
indexing axis (C) as the only rotary axis.
Turrets modeled with a single tool mount station can be
modeled like Milling machines.
If a Turret or a Spindle component is deleted from a Mill Turn
machine, it is advisable to save and close the Mill Turn product
document before adding other components.
Documentation
None
NC Machine Tool Simulation (MSG, MPS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Important note about NC Machine Tool Simulation enables simulation of NC Machines
product licensing on pre-computed Tool Paths and ISO code. It does not provide
any creation or edition capabilities for activities.
To create and edit Machining activities or to re-compute tool
paths from existing activities, the corresponding product license
is required. For example, to re-compute a Facing machining
operation from NC Machine Tool Simulation, the Prismatic
Machining license needs to be available.
Distance analysis, Collision detection, and Interactive collision
avoidance functionalities are available when NC Machine Tool
Simulation is used in conjunction with CATIA Space Analysis 2
(SPA) license.
Open Issues
Simulation of Mill-Turn Generation of simulation results interactively and in batch mode
Machines is not supported for Mill-turn machines.
Motion on one spindle can in some cases cause motion of the

Simulation of dual spindle other spindle. This will be corrected in the next service pack.
machines with material
removal
Generation of simulation results interactively and in batch mode
Simulation of Milling is not supported for Milling machines with interchangeable
machines with heads.
interchangeable heads
Documentation
Setting or Modifying The Modify Mount Point command in the Machine Management
Workpiece and Tool Mount Toolbar completely replaces the functionality provided by NC
Points controller to modify mount points for NC machines modeled in
this release. The documentation of this command will be
available in a future release.
Device Task Definition (WSU) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Resource Layout (MRL) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
B0621932 Attachment : Parent appears twice in - one at the origin, the
other one at the correct position.
A0622357 Attachment: child doesn't follow on moving the parent
Documentation
None
Device Building (DBG) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Multi-branchable Document The multi-branchable document shows a non-existent option
(Bundle Segment option) in the dialog box. The corrected
documentation is here.
MULTICAx Products
CATIA and DELMIA Plug-ins
● MULTICAx - CATIA Plug-In (DCL, MCP) - P1
● MULTICAx - DELMIA Plug-In (DDL, MDP) - P1
MULTICAx - CATIA Plug-in (DCL, MCP) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
MULTICAx - DELMIA Plug-in (DDL, MDP) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Process Definition (PRD) - P1
DPM Process and Resource Definition (PRP) -
P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
D5 Integration (D5I) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Interfaces
● CATIA-CADAM Interface (CC1) - P1
● IGES Interface (IG1, MIG) - P1
● STEP Core Interface (ST1, MST) - P1
● STRIM/STYLER To CATIA Interface (STC) - P2
● DXF/DWG Interfaces
CATIA-CADAM Interface (CC1) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
IGES Interface (IG1, MIG) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
STEP Core Interface (ST1, MST) - P1

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
STRIM/STYLER To CATIA Interface (STC) - P2

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DXF/DWG Interfaces
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Wireframe & Surface (WS1, MWS) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Interactive Drafting (ID1, MID) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Generative Drafting
(GD1, MG1) - P1, (GDR, MGD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Generative View Style The default generative view style delivered by Dassault
Systèmes for this release should not be used. As some
attributes are incorrectly declared, using this default file may
lead to unpredictable results.
We advise you either not to use generative view style
functionality or to use a GVS file from a previous release.
Nevertheless, updating CATDrawing views from previous
releases already using GVS will work correctly.
Documentation
None
DELMIA Object Manager
(DO1) - P1, (DOM) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Graphics Performance Version 5 is now taking more benefit from the graphics hardware (GPU).
Enhancement for V5 Graphics performance of V5 is enhanced thanks to the support of the
Products OpenGL feature, Vertex Buffer Object (VBO).
This performance gain matches perfectly the requirements of V5 Products
like:
● Real Time Rendering: large model and gpu-consuming advanced materials
based on CgFX shaders
● Digital Mock Up: very large mode with a great number of triangles to draw
This graphics optimization is only available on Windows XP 32-bit & 64-bit

and by exporting the following environment variable in your V5 install:
It is strongly recommended to switch on this optimization on the latest hw
graphics having at least 512 MB of video memory like:
● Nvidia Quadro FX4500, Quadro FX 5500, Quadro FX4600, Quadro FX 5600
● ATI FireGL V7300, FireGL V7350, FireGL V5600, FireGL V57600, FireGL
V8600, FireGL V8650
Notice that for ATI, it is recommended to install the latest ATI FireGL 8.44
driver series released in December 2007.
Please refer to the DS certified configuration website to check your
configuration.
View Mode Customization We do not guarantee an identical triangulation of meshes between
Releases and from a Service Pack to another.
Printing using the Microsoft When printing documents using the Microsoft Office Document Image Writer
Office Document Image virtual printer, it is recommended to select the Monochrome mode in
Writer printer Version 5 (click the Options... button in the Print dialog box):
Otherwise, selecting the TIFF-Monochrome Fax option in the printer's
Advanced Parameters may lead to a crash.
This is due to a problem with the Microsoft driver and is not related to
Version 5. This problem will be corrected with Microsoft Office 2007.
Language-Specific Fonts Korean and Chinese characters may not be well rendered if you are working
on UNIX.
Open Issues
Screen When using some Vista configurations, the size of the screen is not correctly computed, which
dimensions may lead to a bad visualization: for instance, points may disappear.
on Vista
Workaround: Store your screen dimensions in the following two variables:
● set CATWidthMMOfScreen=width_in_millimeters
set CATHeightMMOfScreen=height_in_millimeters
You have to do these measurements by yourself using a tape measure. The screen
dimensions correspond to the horizontal measurement followed by the vertical measurement.
If your computer does not use the full screen for display (e.g. if there is a strip on the left
side and right side of your screen), you have to measure only the part of the screen used for
display.
Anti- The Anti-Aliasing Full Scene option available in Tools... > Options > General > Display >
Aliasing Full Visualization is not compliant with Object-to-Object shadows in Real Time Rendering
Scene Product.
Viewing When you set a white background color in Tools... > Options > General > Display >
objects Visualization, annotations, texts and lines with a white color cannot be seen.
DLNames The following commands do not support the DLName environment: File > Print..., Tools >
Image > Capture..., Tools > Image > Album... and Tools > Image > Video....
Using ● When undocking toolbars, the title is not display at its full height and is partially
Russian truncated.
fonts on
SUN ● The Sketcher Tools toolbar is partially hidden by a white banner when creating a sketch.
Recording In the Video Properties dialog box you open through Tools > Image > Video, there is no
videos on access to DirectShow codecs on Windows 64-bit. The only accessible codecs are VFW (Video
Windows for Windows) codecs.
64-bit Off the shelf VFW 64 bit codecs are very rare and most often not compatible with Version 5.
Consequently, a Version 5-compatible MJPEG VFW codec for 64-bit is provided. The
DirectShow MJPEG codec is not provided on Windows 64-bit.
Refer to the official documentation for more information about how to install this codec.
Large When printing large documents, the printing process tries to use the dpi value defined in the
memory raster driver's settings and checks if memory allocation is possible before printing.
allocation
However, note that the detection of large memory allocation is available on Windows 32-bit
only.
Capturing On UNIX, the Screen Mode available via Tools > Image > Capture supports only 24-bit
images in visuals (TrueColor or DirectColor): it does not support 8-bit visuals (PseudoColor or
Screen StaticColor).
Mode on Workaround: use the xdpyinfo UNIX command to check the current visual characteristics.
UNIX If this visual is 8 bits, then change the settings of the Windows Manager to a 24-bit visual.
Printing/ If you print documents with the Print white vectors in black option activated or if you
Capturing capture images with the Capture white in black option activated, white specular spots
using the displayed on parts in Shading rendering mode appear in black.
Print white
vectors in
black/
Capture
white in
black option
Printing ● This functionality is not supported in batch mode.
using the Workaround: use VB commands
Rasterization
For large formats (i.e. > 4A0), if the amount of allocated memory is exceeded, you may
rendering
●
encounter problems when using 3D PLM raster printers

mode
● For documents of type 2D Layout, note that:
❍ on Windows, 2 GB of RAM is the minimum recommended amount of memory
❍ on UNIX, performances may be decreased when printing large formats (i.e. > 4A0).
Print Batch ● The Print Batch utility as well as any utilities customized via VB Script macros do not
utility support the print of documents generated with the 2D Layout for 3D Design product.
Documents can only be printed from an interactive session.
● You cannot print in batch mode a document with a scale that does not correspond to the
session scale. If you try to do so, some geometrical data will not be loaded, and the
printing process will fail without displaying any error message.
Remote printing has some limitations for documents with a non-standard scale. For
instance, to print a Small Scale document in remote mode, the remote computer must be
in a Small Scale session (i.e. Small Scale option selected in Tools > Options > General
> Parameters and Measures > Scale).
Loading and printing processes are done by the remote computer and therefore, the scale
of the document must correspond to the scale session of the remote computer. This implies
that when you are in a local Standard Scale session, you can print in remote mode a
Small Scale document on the remote computer if the remote scale is in a Small Scale
session. Moreover, no error message is displayed if the scales of the local/remote
computers do not fit, or if the scale of the document and the remote scale session do not
fit (in this case, the print will fail)
Printing The clipping of entities is not correctly supported by the vector rendering mode named
clipped Dynamic Hidden Line Removal.
entities Workaround: use the Hidden Line Removal rendering mode instead.
Print The PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI variable is ignored when saving a CATDrawing to a Tiff file.
variable The DPI stored in the settings is used instead.
Saving a When using the Save multisheet document in a single vectorial file option available in
document Tools > Options... > General > Compatiblity > Graphic Formats, note that the only
with Version 5 viewer supporting multisheet information is the TIFF viewer. Other Version 5
multiple viewers for GL2, GL, CGM, SVG and PS do not support this feature.
sheets in
single
vectorial file
Copying/ On UNIX, note that when pasting an existing drawing to a new one, the viewer of the new
Pasting . drawing may not be correctly dimensioned.
CATDrawing Workaround: resize manually the viewer, or use the Maximize capability to resize the viewer.
documents
on UNIX
3D XML Saving in 3D XML format - General information
● When working on 3D XML files from 3DLive, note that:
❍ the review structure is changed at save: different reviews on a same level will be
merged into a single one and the reviews on assembly nodes will be saved under the
root
❍ 3D XML V4 format allows more markup than supported by CATIA V5R17 SP5. A V4
3D XML file received from another source could have such information (such as
spline, big arrows...). If this 3D XML is modified in R17 SP5, such markup will be lost.
A warning message is displayed to inform the user when such information is present
in a source 3D XML
● DMU contents (Scene, Presentation, Measure, Section and Annotated Views) are now
treated as one (Design Review).
DMU Navigator
For open issues specific to the DMU Navigator product, see the DMU Navigator Program
Directory.
Materials
For open issues specific to materials, see the Real Time Rendering Program Directory.
CATDrawings
For open issues specific to CATDrawings, see the Interactive Drafting and Generative Drafting
Program Directories.
Scenes and Presentations

● User-defined attributes of scenes are not saved in 3D XML format
● If a Presentation references applicative data which cannot be saved in 3D XML, then the
links to these applicative data are removed from the .3dxml file. A warning message is
added in the conversion log.
● Presentation rendering styles supported in 3D XML format are (all other rendering styles
will be converted to Shading with Material with edges and points in the 3D XML file):
❍ Shading with Material
❍ Shading with Material, edges and points (custom mode)
❍ Wireframe (NHR)
❍ Triangles shading, no edges & points (custom mode)
❍ Gouraud shading, edges, dynamic hidden line removal (custom mode)
Measures (Item and Between)
● When saving in 3D XML format a product containing Measure Between or Measure Item
stored in a complex DMU Review structure (with sub-reviews), the measures between are
also saved in the 3D XML file. However, when reopening the 3D XML file, the Measures are
created in a default DMU Review: the complex DMU Review structure is not retrieved.
❍ Associativity is not retrieved when saving in 3D XML. The re-created measure between is
broken and thus non associative.
when saving in 3D XML format a product containing Measure Between or Measure Item
stored in a complex DMU Review structure (with sub-reviews), the measures between
are also saved in the 3D XML file.
❍ The customization of the repositioning of lines and text for a measure (green-colored) is
not retrieved in the 3D XML file: when reopening the 3D XML file, all measures appear in
the default position
❍ The customization of the measure display is not retrieved in 3D XML format: when
reopening the 3D XML file, all values are saved and the measure is displayed using the
current customization.
❍ Only Measure Item and Measure Between can be exported to 3D XML format. Measure
Thickness and Measure Arc (by 3 points) are not taken into account. In Measure
Between, the angle measured is not exported either.
❍ Measures with names such as "MeasureBetween.5" or "MeasureBetween.XXX" will be
saved as "MeasureBetween.1", "MeasureBetween.2", etc.
❍ Maximum Distance cannot be saved in 3D XML format.
❍ When saving in 3D XML format a product containing Measure Between or Measure Item
Sections
● The selected objects that are cut are not exported.
● The behavior of Sections with respect to the associativity mechanism and/or the Section
Freeze mode is not exported.
● The information related to the grid (activated, values, behavior) is not exported.
● The applicative data under a Section are not exported. This means that measures,
distances, 3D annotations and 2D annotations are not exported if they are stored under the
Section.
● New product > Insert a 3D XML containing a section:
❍ The section appears in the specification tree but is not valid.
Double- When double-clicking a document icon using the Windows Explorer or My Computer, the
clicking a following error message may appear, even though the double-clicked document is correctly
document loaded in session:
on Windows
Ignore the message.

Interrupting Using the Interrupt contextual command in the Processes tab of the batch monitor lets you
batches on interrupt batch execution. When you interrupt a batch on UNIX, an abnormal end is
UNIX generated.
Ignore the abnormal end.
Rendering When using View > Render Style, the Customize View mode appears twice:
styles
This mode should be named Customize View Parameters as explained in the documentation and
should appear only once in the list.
This will be fixed in a forthcoming release.
Documentation
None
Workcell Sequencing (WSQ) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
wsqupdate.pdf The following commands are not listed in R19 V5 doc, but these
pages are in the wsqupdate.pdf
1 Simulation Toolbar --> Resource Verification Command
2. PPR Tools Toolbar --> Reparent Resource and Copy Resource
commands
3. Activity Management Toolbar --> Replace resource command
4. Simulation Reporting Toolbar -->Display Cycle Time command
5. Environment tools toolbar --> List Annotation Switch On/Off,
Filter commands not available
3D Simulation for Manufacturing (DMR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
New options for Graphical New options have been added to the Process Simulation section
Updates of Tools > Options > Infrastructure > DELMIA
Infrastructure > Simulation:
These options provide the default values that are used in the
Visualization Options dialog box when running simulations (i.e.,
using the Process Simulation and Resource Simulation
commands).
Option Effect
No graphical updates, with the following exceptions:
● cruising the camera around
● zooming in and out
● changing the current view mode

Disabled
● activating/deactivating the main application frame
(switching between applications)
● running with Design Model Updates mode enabled
● existing section having automatic update enabled
When Sim Steps=1, the simulation runs at the same

rate as the visualization: for each simulation step the
Sim visualization will be updated as well. Users can specify
Steps the visualization update rate; that is, how many
simulation steps will be executed per one graphics
update.
Tool Selection Assistant (TSA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Robotics OLP (OLP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Commands to be removed The following commands are not available in the workbench,
from online documents and hence are being removed from the online documents:
● SIMULATION ANALYSIS TOOLS TOOLBAR
Enable/Disable Tasks
● PPR TOOLBAR
Create Resources in PPR
Examine Process Model
Reframe Activity
● DATA VIEW TOOLBAR

List Products
List Resources
RRS I (RRS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Arc Welding (ARW) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Production System Analysis (PSY) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
A0600514 Cannot delete simulation sensor
A0600864 Wrong sensor displayed in the grab activity
B0591081 Wrong simulation if Part to Grab by the sink not defined
B0592965 Graphs are not displayed in Bar Chart, Gantt chart and
Customized Reporting window - 64-bit specific issue
A0596367 Duplicate source on Cut/Paste a source
Documentation
Removal of commands The Statistics Save and Statistics Display commands that were
introduced for Production System Simulation workbench, have
been removed.
CSM Device Control Connection (DC1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Port types of runtime A virtual runtime cannot be mapped if one of its port types is a
class of type : 'any, 'any Number, 'any Floating, 'any string.
Only core types are allowed. The user has to constrain the types
before creating the runtime.
Open Issues
Debug Scenario Some of the commands available to build a debug scenario do
not work properly: Reset, Wait and Pause can lock the
simulation, Suspend works only one step, Maxtime is not taken
into account.
Documentation
None
CLM Simulation Engine (LS1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Option Force Signal This option allows the user to force the value of a port in the
Independently debugger without propagating the forced value to the signals/
ports mapped to it. This option can trigger Causality Loop error.
In this case, the user has to disable the option.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Highlight of the If the user enables the environment variable
specification tree during (AUT_DeviceIdentificationInSimulation=yes), the highlight of the
the simulation specification tree is available in the simulation mode as it is in
the design mode. If the user scrolls over an element in the 3D
representation, the element is highlighted in the specification
tree. This features is needed during the simulation to identify
the element being debugged.
CSM Object Modeler (CSM) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM Object Modeler (LM1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CSM Module & Block Editor (LB1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Library Update If a library is modified, the modifications are propagated to its
reference.
Multi-select on Link In the Block Editor, the link properties cannot be applied on a
properties set of selected links. The properties have to be changed
individually.
Open Issues
Insertion of a Panel A panel cannot be instantiated more than once inside a
simulation. That means that all panels have to be different.
Documentation
None
HMI Control Panel Design (HP1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM Device Logic Design (DLD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
XML Import/Export An XML export done from a version previous to R18 SP3 cannot
be loaded in R18 SP3 or a higher version. The XML files are not
compatible.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM SFC Editor (LE1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM FBD Editor (FB1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM Ladder Logic Editor (LL1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Rung highlight while If a rung of the program contains a block, the highlight of this
debugging rung is not correct during the debug.
Documentation
None
Robot Controller Libraries
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CATIA Object Manager
(CO1) - P1, (COM) - P2, (CO3) - P3
CATIA COM 1 to 2 Extension (C12) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
For information on Component Catalog Editor issues, click here.
General Issues
Graphics Performance V5 is now taking more benefit from the graphics hardware (GPU). Graphics
Enhancement for V5 Products performance of V5 is enhanced thanks to the support of the OpenGL feature,
Vertex Buffer Object (VBO).
This performance gain matches perfectly the requirements of V5 Products like:
This graphics optimization is only available on Windows XP 32-bit & 64-bit and
by exporting the following environment variable in your V5 install:
V8600, FireGL V8650
configuration.
View Mode Customization We do not guarantee an identical triangulation of meshes between Releases
and from a Service Pack to another.
Office Document Image virtual printer, it is recommended to select the Monochrome mode in Version
Writer printer 5 (click the Options... button in the Print dialog box):

This is due to a problem with the Microsoft driver and is not related to Version
5. This problem will be corrected with Microsoft Office 2007.
Language-Specific Fonts Korean and Chinese characters may not be well rendered if you are working on
UNIX.
Memory leaks for GDI objects Memory leaks may occur for Graphics Device Interface (GDI) objects when you
create and destroy child windows.
For more information, browse the following Internet site:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;319740"%
20target=_blank%20>http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-
US;319740
Open Issues
dimensions on may lead to a bad visualization: for instance, points may disappear.
Vista Workaround: Store your screen dimensions in the following two variables:
display.
Anti-Aliasing The Anti-Aliasing Full Scene option available in Tools... > Options > General > Display >
Full Scene Visualization is not compliant with Object-to-Object shadows in the Real Time Rendering
Product.
Viewing objects When you set a white background color in Tools... > Options > General > Display >
Visualization, annotations, texts and lines with a white color cannot be seen.
Using Russian ● When undocking toolbars, the title is not display at its full height and is partially
fonts on SUN truncated.
● The Sketcher Tools toolbar is partially hidden by a white banner when creating a sketch.
Windows 64-bit for Windows) codecs.
Off the shelf VFW 64 bit codecs are very rare and most often not compatible with Version 5.
Large memory When printing large documents, the printing process tries to use the dpi value defined in the
allocation raster driver's settings and checks if memory allocation is possible before printing.
However, note that the detection of large memory allocation is available on Windows 32-bit
only.
Screen Mode StaticColor).
on UNIX Workaround: use the xdpyinfo UNIX command to check the current visual characteristics.
If this visual is 8 bits, then change the settings of the Windows Manager to a 24-bit visual.
using the Print displayed on parts in Shading rendering mode appear in black.
white vectors
in black/
Capture white
in black option
Printing using ● This functionality is not supported in batch mode.
the Workaround: use VB commands
Rasterization
rendering
●

mode
clipped entities Dynamic Hidden Line Removal.
Workaround: use the Hidden Line Removal rendering mode instead.
Print variable The PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI variable is ignored when saving a CATDrawing to a Tiff file.
The DPI stored in the settings is used instead.
document with Tools > Options... > General > Compatiblity > Graphic Formats, note that the only
multiple Version 5 viewer supporting multisheet information is the TIFF viewer. Other Version 5
sheets in viewers for GL2, GL, CGM, SVG and PS do not support this feature.
single
vectorial file
documents on
UNIX
❍ the review structure is changed at save: different reviews on a same level will be
root
in a source 3D XML
DMU Navigator
Directory.
Materials
CATDrawings

❍ Wireframe (NHR)

Sections
Section.
document on loaded in session:
Windows
Ignore the message.

UNIX generated.
styles
Knowledgeware xlsx files (Excel 2007) used by Design Tables cannot be saved in ENOVIA. Only Design Tables
that use .xls files can be saved.
Documentation
None
Instant Collaborative Design (CD1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Sketcher
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
For information on other related issues, click the links of interest:

● Part Design
● Functional Molded Parts
● Generative Shape Design Products
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Sheetmetal Production (SH1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Aerospace Sheetmetal Design (ASL) - P3
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Automotive Body In White Fastening (ABF) -
P3
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Function Definition (PFD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
(BK2) - P2, (BKT) - P3
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Composites Review (CPR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Space Engineering Assistant (SPE) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Flex Physical Simulation (FLX) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation

General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Vehicle Occupant Accommodation (VOA) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Manipulation mode ● Undo command inside Manipulation mode is not working
properly.
Package edition ● In top view, some of the manipulation arrows are inverted.
Documentation
None
Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly
(TAA, MTA) - P3
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Multi-Slide Lathe Machining (MLG, MML) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Digital Product Rights Manager (RM1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Structure
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation

● Assembly Design
● Weld Design
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
V4 Integration
(V41) - P1, (V4I) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ENOVIAVPM Supply Chain Engineering
Exchange
(EW1) - P1, (EWE) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
CATShape on VPMV4- CATShape may not be supported on the VPMV4-Reconciliator.
Reconciliator This will be addressed in a future release.
Extracting Root Product, You may face some issues while Extracting Root Product,
CatDrawing and CATDrawing and CATAnalysis files using Reconciliator batches in
CatAnalysis files using VPMV4. This will be addressed in future release.
Reconciliator batches
Reconciling the Product You may face some issues while Reconciling the Product structure
structure with VPM4 containing V4 model files with VPMV4. This will be addressed in
future release.
Documentation
None
CATIA / ENOVIA VPLM Interoperability
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPRxPDM Gateway (PX1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ENOVIA SmarTeam CATIA Integration
Products

● SMARTEAM CATIA V5 Integration (CAI) - P1
● SMARTEAM CATIA Web Integration (CWI) - P1
● SMARTEAM-CATIA Supply Chain Engineering Exchange (SEE) - P1
SMARTEAM CATIA V5 integration (CAI) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Disable check out on the The variable CATIA_TEAM_PDM_NOCOOTF is no more supported.
fly operations Workaround: Disabling check out on the fly operations could be
done by unchecking the Display CheckOut/New Release
dialog box on first modification option in CATIA/Tools/Options/
Compatibility/SMARTEAM (CAI) settings
Mapping Text Values When SmarTeam attributes are mapped to text values containing
carriage returns, the carriage return will not be correctly
displayed in the title block of a drawing. Drawings ignore carriage
returns in text
Open Issues
Open Assemblies in Light Opening an assembly in Light Weight Mode from a directory
Weight Mode (File->Open) is failing: a CATIA broken links error message is
displayed saying that some parts can't be found.
Workaround: Open the assembly through File/Open/

SmarTeam
Global Refresh Global Refresh capability enables the user to update his session
with the latest revisions of documents.
The update succeeds if all assembly's documents are
unloadable. On the other hand, the update is failing if at least
one document can't be unloaded from the CATIA session.
Documentation
Link to Parents of Previous The options Automatically replace in Released Parents of
Revision Previous Revision and Automatically replace in Checked-
In Parents of Prevous Revision are not recommended.
Save Option to Prevent When working with parts with design links, the product that
Loading the Context the design link is created in context of will be automatically
Assembly of Design Links loaded in the session when you save to SmarTeam.
If you do not need to update the design link, the environment
variable CAI_LINKS_LOAD_CONTEXT=NO can be declared in
your Windows environment to prevent the automatic loading
of the product (making the save operation faster and using
less system resources ). When this variable is set to NO, a
message will be displayed after you save indicating that the
design link was not updated because the context was not
loaded.
ENOVIA SmarTeam CATIA Web Integration

(CWI) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
NEW: Switch to SmarTeam The Switch to SmarTeam command is added to the
SMARTEAM menu and toolbar. Upon double clicking on this
command, SmarTeam Web Editor is opened from CATIA.
NEW: Check Exposed Mode To assure compatibility between CAI and CWI, the system
checks that the Expose Mode setting is set to the same value
in SmarTeam System Configuration and in the CATIA settings. If
different value are found, the system warns the user before
connecting to SmarTeam.
ENOVIA SmarTeam-CATIA Supply Chain

Engineering Exchange (SEE) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
NEW: Save & Restore Two new icons have been provided in interactive Reconciliator to
Reconciliation session be able to save and restore the content of the reconciliation
session. This information is captured in an XML similar and
compliant with the one generated by the Reconciliator batch
utility (CATPDMReconcileSTBatch)
Save Session: Enables you to save the content of the

Reconciliation session.
Restore Session: Enables you to restore the content of

the previous Reconciliation session such as mapping and
reconciliation rule.
NEW: Reconciliation The reconciliation batch can inhibit the update of Product or Part
inhibits the update of by using the -noPartUpdate keyword
Product or Part CATPDMReconcileSTBatch -user joe -file E:\Data\Skateboard
\supplier\Skateboard.CATProduct -reload Front_axle.
CATProduct -noPartUpdate
Component Catalog Editor
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation

● CATIA Object Manager
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VPM Navigator (VPN)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Chinese Installation: PVR PVR creation using a Chinese installation of VPM Navigator
Creation terminates the application.
Opening a CATIA When a CATIA document is opened with the out of context
document from the option from the Documents Tab of the Properties panel, the
Document Tab user is unable to choose an existing VPM Session window. This
will be fixed in a future SP.
Attaching a Non-CATIA Non-CATIA documents are not getting attached correctly
document through VPM through VPM Navigator. Link type, Parent Type and Document
Navigator Role are not correctly applied.
Filter Modification Modification Filter does not apply filter when modification of
Level2 instance or below is selected. The complete structure is
displayed on applying the filter.
Detaching Non-CATIA Detaching non CATIA document from part instance (Assembly
Document in VPM Navigator type) is not refreshing the VPM Tree correctly.
Multiselection of Clash in After multiselection of clash in vpmsearch and selecting Property

VPM Search Preview option in the contextual menu, an error message is
displayed.
Preview in VPM Search In VPM Search, after selecting Properties from the contextual
menu, the preview may not be displayed for Part versions, clash
etc.... A Warning will be displayed instead.
Saving Mulitple Objects in When using Save in ENOVIA V5, it is advised to not select 8 or
ENOVIA V5 more documents at once as the product becomes unstable.
Documentation
Versioning a Part that is Click here to see an explanation of how to correctly propagate a
the Root Assembly of a PVR version change on a part with PVR and how to managing Part
relative to Part Version propagation.
VPM Relational Design (RLD)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VPM Configured Product Design (CGP)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
(WPE)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VPM Electrical Cable Route Management (ECV)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VPM Product Design Web Services (DEW)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Applications Desktop (ADK)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Action Editor (AED)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Definition (PDC)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
EBOM Detailing and Configuration (PAS)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Interference Management (PIM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Grid computing If there is more than one ITFCHECK process running at the
same time, the number of clash found may not be correct. A
workaround to this problem is to work in design mode.
Structure Penetration Management (SPT)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Engineering Hub (EPI)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Multi Tier Enterprise Architecture (T3A)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Document Management (DMT)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Program Management (PGT)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Engineering Change Management (ECM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Supply Chain Exchange (SCE)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Product Variant Management (PVM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
LifeCycle Administration Guide
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
LifeCycle Roles Guide
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VPM Lifecycle Navigator Web (LCN)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name LCA Navigator name has changed to the VPM Lifecycle Navigator
Web Product.
Open Issues
Using LC Graph tab to The object status is not changed when using LC Graph tab.
change status. Workaround is to use the Change Status icon, or a contextual
menu selection.
Documentation
None
Web Viewer (W3V)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Document Management Web (DCM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Document
Management"
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Engineering Change Management Web (CGM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Change
Management"
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Workflow Definition Web (WDF)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Workflow
Definition"
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Workflow Management Web (WFM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Workflow
Management"
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Enterprise Process Management Web (EPM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Enterprise Process
Management"
Problem Starting the EPM If EPMStart.ksh does not start EPM correctly, modify the script
Environment on Solaris/ so the MQ queue manager is not started (see below). Start the
Oracle queue manager manually (using the MQ Series administrator id,
mqm) by typing the following on the command line: strmqm
FMCQM. The script can then be run with the MQ Workflow
administration id (fmc) as specified in the Enterprise Process
Management Web Product Installation Guide > Starting
Workflow Server on UNIX.
function epmQueue
{
echo "NOT Starting queue manager $1"
# strmqm $1
}
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Enterprise Process Definition Web (EPD)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Enterprise Process
Definition"
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Lifecycle Management Web Services
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product New Name Until V5R17, this product was known as "LCA Product Lifecycle
Management Web Services"
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPR Hub Gateway (PGW)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPR Hub STEP Part 21 Adapter (STH)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Multisite System Administration Web (SYA)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
People, Organization and Security Web (POC)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
System & Data Administration (SAN)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
People, Organization & Security (POS)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Vault Server Administration (VSA)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CAA Web Services
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DMU Infrastructure
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Graphics Performance Version 5 is now taking more benefit from the graphics hardware (GPU).
Enhancement for V5 Graphics performance of V5 is enhanced thanks to the support of the OpenGL
Products feature, Vertex Buffer Object (VBO).
This performance gain matches perfectly the requirements of V5 Products
like:
This graphics optimization is only available on Windows XP 32-bit & 64-bit

and by exporting the following environment variable in your V5 install:
V8600, FireGL V8650
configuration.
View Mode Customization We do not guarantee an identical triangulation of meshes between
Releases and from a Service Pack to another.
Office Document Image virtual printer, it is recommended to select the Monochrome mode in
Writer printer Version 5 (click the Options... button in the Print dialog box):

This is due to a problem with the Microsoft driver and is not related to
Version 5. This problem will be corrected with Microsoft Office 2007.
Language-Specific Fonts Korean and Chinese characters may not be well rendered if you are working
on UNIX.
Open Issues
dimensions may lead to a bad visualization: for instance, points may disappear.
on Vista
Workaround: Store your screen dimensions in the following two variables:
display.
Anti- The Anti-Aliasing Full Scene option available in Tools... > Options > General > Display >
Aliasing Full Visualization is not compliant with Object-to-Object shadows in Real Time Rendering
Scene Product.
Viewing When you set a white background color in Tools... > Options > General > Display >
objects Visualization, annotations, texts and lines with a white color cannot be seen.
Using ● When undocking toolbars, the title is not display at its full height and is partially
Russian truncated.
fonts on
SUN ● The Sketcher Tools toolbar is partially hidden by a white banner when creating a sketch.
Windows for Windows) codecs.
64-bit Off the shelf VFW 64 bit codecs are very rare and most often not compatible with Version 5.
Large When printing large documents, the printing process tries to use the dpi value defined in the
memory raster driver's settings and checks if memory allocation is possible before printing.
allocation However, note that the detection of large memory allocation is available on Windows 32-bit
only.
Screen StaticColor).
Mode on Workaround: use the xdpyinfo UNIX command to check the current visual characteristics.
UNIX If this visual is 8 bits, then change the settings of the Windows Manager to a 24-bit visual.
using the displayed on parts in Shading rendering mode appear in black.
Print white
vectors in
black/
Capture
white in
black option
Printing ● This functionality is not supported in batch mode.
using the Workaround: use VB commands
Rasterization
rendering
●

mode
clipped Dynamic Hidden Line Removal.
entities Workaround: use the Hidden Line Removal rendering mode instead.
Print The PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI variable is ignored when saving a CATDrawing to a Tiff file.
variable The DPI stored in the settings is used instead.
document Tools > Options... > General > Compatiblity > Graphic Formats, note that the only
with Version 5 viewer supporting multisheet information is the TIFF viewer. Other Version 5
multiple viewers for GL2, GL, CGM, SVG and PS do not support this feature.
sheets in
single
vectorial file
documents
on UNIX
❍the review structure is changed at save: different reviews on a same level will be
root
in a source 3D XML
DMU Navigator
Directory.
Materials
CATDrawings

❍ Wireframe (NHR)

Sections
Section.
document loaded in session:
on Windows
Ignore the message.

UNIX generated.
styles
Documentation
None
DMU Digital Plant & Ship Review (PR1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Classic - Documentation Addendum
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Classic Products

● General Known Issues
● NLS Support
● 3d com Navigator (PNR)
● 3d com Viewer (PVR)
● 3d com Publish (P3B)
● 3d com Space Analysis (S3P)
● 3d com Navigator V5 Plug-In (N35)
All 3d com Classic Products

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
NLS Support
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Navigator (PNR)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Viewer (PVR)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Publish (P3B)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Space Analysis (S3P)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3d com Navigator V5 Plug-In (N35)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
MULTIPDM Products
● OP Plug-in (OGL)
● PM Plug-in (PML)
● CDM/VPM Plug-in (VPL)
● SMARTEAM Plug-in (SML)
● ENOVIA SmarTeam CATIA V5 Integration
OP Plug-in (OGL)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PM Plug-in (PML)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CDM/VPM Plug-in (VPL)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
SMARTEAM Plug-in (SML)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ENOVIA SmarTeam CATIA V5 Integration

This topic is described in a more detailed way in the "ENOVIA SmarTeam CATIA
Integration Products" section of this Program Directory.
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CAA General and Open Issues
This document includes any important or open issues you need to be

aware of in a specific product.
CAA-RADE Products and CAA APIs

Java Interactive Dashboard
C++ Unit Test Manager
Java Unit Test Manager
C++ API Document Generator
C++ Source Checker
Source Code Manager
Interactive Test Capture
CAA APIs

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Open Issues
Documentation search "Find The "Find next" command fails when used after searching the CAA
next" command fails with Encyclopedia with Internet Explorer 7 with a red popup stating
Internet Explorer 7 "netscapejavascript.JSException".
This command enables you to successively find the different
occurrences of the searched string in the opened file from the
Search result window.
Documentation
CAA Media Content Changes In order to help customers' and partners' applications comply with
the CAA V5 usage rules described in the CAA Encyclopedia, our
offering is refined by better aligning the CAA build time media
content with the CAA Encyclopedia content. Thus, starting with
V5R15, non-CAA Authorized APIs previously located in the
ProtectedInterfaces folders are no longer available from the CAA
build time media. While enriching the CAA Authorized APIs offering
with new CAA APIs matching new needs, we will continue to deliver
with CAA RADE a more and more secure development environment
by protecting CAA applications from the risks of using non-CAA
Authorized APIs. As a reminder, CAA RADE tools prevent the usage
of undocumented resources located in ProtectedInterfaces starting
with V5R12. In some cases, the CAA RADE tools may not have
detected all uses of the non-CAA authorized APIs. To ensure that all
non-CAA Authorized APIs have been detected, CAA RADE provides
an audit tool. Launch it before attempting to build your CAA
applications. Please refer to the What's New in the CAA Encyclopedia
for further information on how to use this audit tool. Please contact
your local support if you need assistance.
Locating Documentation and You can access the CAA Encyclopedia online documentation with a
Use Cases HTML browser at the following addresses:
<CATIA, DELMIA, or ENOVIA CAA APIs installation path>/

CAAV5HomePage.htm>
or
<CATIA, DELMIA, or ENOVIA CAA APIs installation path>/CAADoc/
Doc/online/CAACenV5Default.htm>

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
ENOVIA Search does not find When working on an ENOVIA VPLM customization based on several
all customized objects workspaces concatenation, the ENOVIA Search gives only access to
customized objects defined in the first workspace of the
concatenation. Customized objects defined in the other workspaces
are not found.
Bypass: 2 cases can occur
1. 2 workspaces are used in the concatenation, one for ENOVIA

VPLM customization (EnovWorkspace) and one for P&O
customization (PnOWorkspace). In that case, please make
sure that the EnovWorkspace is specified before the
PnOWorkspace. If not, then you will need to copy the
SearchEntitiesDefinition.xml file from the EnovWorkspace
runtimeview to the PnOWorkspace runtimeview.
2. 2 or more workspaces a used in the concatenation for several
ENOVIA customizations. Then you will need to edit the
SearchEntitiesDefinition.xml in the runtimeview of the first
workspace in the concatenation and insert inside all additional
nodes corresponding to customized objects defined in the
SearchEntitiesDefinition.xml files of the other workspaces at
the right place, meaning that the syntax of the XML file must
be respected. In short, all customized objects defined in used
workspaces should appear in the SearchEntitiesDefinition.xml
file of the first workspace in the concatenation.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Using ● Publish works correctly only if the ENOVIA database log size has been updated with
CAA- the following order:
RADE
Data db2 update dbcfg for $1 using LOGFILSIZ 6000 LOGPRIMARY 6 LOGSECOND 6.
Model
Customizer
where $1 is the name of the ENOVIA database. Failing to do this will lead to mask
not being updated during the publish operation.
● With UNIX, when deploying a customization, the following command to launch the
ENOVIA server does not work:
enoviastart -object "-senv WorkspaceEnv -sdirenv $WS_CUSTO/CATEnv"
Instead, to by-pass this command:
❍ Rename $CATEnv/ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R18.B18.txt to $CATEnv/ENOVIA_V5_VPM.

V5R18.B18.txt.save
❍ Copy the file $WS_CUSTO/CATEnv/WorkspaceEnv.txt to the $CATEnv
❍ Rename WorkspaceEnv.txt to ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R18.B18.txt
❍ Launch the server as a standard V5 executable:
catstart -env ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R18.B18 -direnv $CATEnv -run ENOVIA
Where:
❍ $WS_CUSTO is the ENOVIA server customization workspace directory
❍ $CATEnv is the ENOVIA server environment directory

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Icons and/or Commands If icons and/or commands are not displayed in the menus:
might not be displayed with
RADE Tools using Visual 1. From the Tools menu, use alternatively the following
Studio 2005 commands:
❍ Remove Mkmk Add-in commands from menus
❍ Remove CodeGenerator Add-in commands from menus
❍ Remove SCM commands Add-in from menus
2. Close Microsoft Visual Studio and re-launch it.
If a command is still missing in the menus, proceed as follows:
1. From the Tools menu, select Customize...

2. In the Customize dialog box, select the Commands tab and
select the Category and the command you want to add. Select
Addins->Define Prerequisite Frameworks for example.
3. Drag and drop this command to the desired menu.
CAA Add-ins might not be If the CAA add-ins are not loaded:
correctly loaded with RADE ● Exit Visual Studio
Tools using Visual Studio
2005 ● Delete the directory C:\Documents and Settings\$user
\Application Data\Microsoft\VisualStudio\8.0 and its content
● Re-start Visual Studio
Open Issues
CAA Shortcuts are not Some CAA shortcuts may not work correctly with Visual Studio
correctly working with Visual 2005. For example, Ctrl+T will transpose characters. CAA
Studio 2005 commands are assigned to the "Global" domain of use instead of the
"Text Editor" domain.
To fix it, redefine the domain of use of the shortcut, as follows:
● Click Customize in the Tools menu
● Click the "Keyboard..." button
● In the combo box "Use new shortcut in" select "Text Editor"
● In the field "Press shortcut key(s)" enter the shortcut which does
not work
● Select the corresponding CAA command from the list of all
available commands
● Click Assign
● Click OK
Documentation
None
Java Interactive Dashboard

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
CAA Samples/ On locales other than English (en_US) on the AIX Operating System, you
Applications That can get following error messages on standard output/error when executing
Can't Execute on AIX a CAA sample or application:
with non US Locale
Settings Can't open library libTheViewLibrary.a
--> reason = A file or directory in the path name does not exist
or:
Could not load program MainExe:

Could not load module libShared_1.a.
Dependent module Shared_2.exp could not be loaded.
Whereas the library exists and is accessible from the application.

In the case the command /usr/bin/dump -H on the impacted library shows
an invalid dependency on an export file, such as:
dump -H libShared_1.a
INDEX PATH BASE MEMBER
0 /lib:/usr/lib
1 libJS0GROUP.a
2 Shared_2.exp
The problem may be caused by unexpected collation order in non English

locales. Problem was reported with German locale setting (de_DE), but
other locales may be impacted.
To workaround this problem, you should:
● Remove involved shared libraries in aix_a/code/bin directory of the
user's workspace
● Remove involved export files in aix_a/code/lib directory of the user's
workspace
● Export the following environment variable:
export LC_COLLATE=C
● Rebuild the involved shared libraries.
You can also add the export of the environment variable at the end /usr/
DassaultSystemes/B18/aix_a/code/command/mkinit.sh
CAA Samples/ Building CAA samples or applications in debug mode (mkmk -g) on Solaris
Applications That may fail due to additional links to unauthorized symbols added by the
Can't Build in Debug Solaris C++ compiler.
Mode on Solaris
Multi Workspace Up to V5R15 included, the following syntaxes were equivalent in Imakefile.
Application Builder mk files:
doesn't support
anymore LINK_WITH LINK_WITH myModule.m
cards that includes the
module extension
or
LINK_WITH myModule
they were both requesting link-edit against module myModule.m. Starting

in V5R16, the first syntax is not supported anymore because, as mkmk
now supports module names with multiple dots, like for example:
my.module.m
it is so not able anymore to understand whether myModule.m stands for

module myModule.m or myModule.m.m.
Build time control of
usage of non RADE Multi Workspace Application Builder does not perform checks on
Authorized CAA APIs usage of non Authorized and deprecated CAA APIs on Windows 64-bit.
does not work on Take care to also build your code on a Windows 32-bit platform to be sure
Windows 64-bit. not to use non supported APIs.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
C++ Unit Test Manager
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Java Unit Test Manager

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
C++ API Document Generator
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
C++ Source Checker

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Using Implementations of A new MkCheckSource error (VISI) detects the usage of prohibited
Specs Modeler Interfaces implementations of Specs Modeler interfaces. An example is the
CATSpecObject class. You are invited to check this error, and modify
your code to use the appropriate interface in place of the internal
class. For example, do not use CATSpecObject, but instead use the
interface that CATSpecObject implements and that supplies the
CATSpecObject method. In this release, without this migration, your
code could fail.
Documentation
None
Source Code Manager

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Interactive Test Capture

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Mappings tab page is The Mappings tab page that allows you to define data mapping
displayed empty between the different data sources (widgets, Session Data, Web
Methods, custom-written java code ) is displayed empty.
Documentation
None
CAA APIs
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
CAA C++ and VBScript/VBA Small Scale is a capability available since V5R18 that allows to
Applications are not create geometry in a new geometrical range with a submicron
supported in a Small Scale precision. This capability has the following constraints:
session. ● Any application may need to be modified to support this new
mode
● As of V5R19, only a restricted list of DS interactive commands will
be supported
● No Data interoperability between modes: data created in a small
scale session cannot be loaded in a standard scale session and
conversely
Due to the complexity involved by those constraints, V5R19 Small

Scale sessions will not support CAA applications:
Interactive Commands created with CAA are disabled in a Small
Scale session.
CAA C++ code that is not called through interactive commands, like
implementation of user exits, must not be used in a Small Scale
session.
VBScript or VBA macros, must not be used in a Small Scale Session.
Compilation error when The following message may be issued when using afx windows APIs
using windows afx windows within a CAA V5 module:
APIs in CAA V5 modules
C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 8\VC\atlmfc\include
\afxv_w32.h(16) : fatal error C1189: #error : WINDOWS.H
already included. MFC apps must not #include <windows.h>
This is due to modifications in base CAA header files aimed to

improve build performance and reduce debug files size. The
recommended solution to solve this problem is to create a file called
CATIAV5Precompiled.h file in the LocalInterfaces folder of your
module with the following content:
#ifndef CATIAV5Precompiled_H
#define CATIAV5Precompiled_H
#ifdef _WINDOWS_SOURCE
#if _MSC_VER > 1000
#pragma once
#endif // _MSC_VER > 1000
#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
#endif
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stddef.h>
#include <string.h>
#if (defined(_MFC_VER) &&
_MFC_VER>=0x0800) && ( defined
PLATEFORME_DS64 )
#pragma warning(push)
#pragma warning(disable:4530)
#ifndef _WINDOWS_
#include <wtypes.h>
#include <wchar.h>
#include <tchar.h>
#include <shellapi.h>
#endif // _WINDOWS_
#include <objbase.h>
#pragma warning(pop)
#else
#ifndef _WINDOWS_
#include <afxwin.h>
#endif // _WINDOWS_
#include <objbase.h>
#endif
#endif // _WINDOWS_SOURCE
#endif
If needed, replace the include of afxwin.h by any

afx APIs header file required.
NB: In CAA applications, it is recommended to use
CAA APIs instead of native platform APIs when
the CAA platform provides the required
functionality. This avoids compatibility problems
with V5 behavior and allows to take the full
benefit of the muti-platform capability of CAA V5,
minimizing for exemple migrations efforts
required to have your CAA application support
new platforms.
For exemple, when possible, it is recommended
no to use MFC classes but the Dialog framework
instead.
Inter release compatibility of Please note that existing VB/VBA projects may require manual
VB/VBA macros adjustments to be usable on a new release. Consult the Automation
documentation article "About VB, VBA, Debug, and Portability" for
more information.
Open Issues
Session freezes when The session freezes when trying to display a contextual menu
displaying a customer associated to an instance of class CATDlgTableView. Is is
defined contextual menu. recommended not to use this functionality in CAA Applications until
it is corrected.
Documentation
CAA Authorized APIs Are in The CAA authorized C++ , Java, and IDL APIs are located in the
PublicInterfaces PublicInterfaces directories of the exposing frameworks.
CAA authorized APIs:
● Are documented in the CAA Encyclopedia
● Are in the framework PublicInterfaces directories only
● Are in header files that include the CAA Tag @CAA2Level L1 at
the top
● Are NOT preceded by a @nodoc tag in the comment just above
them
As a rule, never use other APIs from the PublicInterfaces directories.

APIs from header files located in the PublicInterfaces directories that
include the CAA Tag @CAA2Level L0 at the top are beta-authorized
APIs. They are not intended to be used in your applications, except
for tests. They are neither build time stable, nor run time stable,
and can disappear without previous notice.
Using CAA Interfaces with a Since V5R7, when using the implementation of the
PDM Product CATIDocEnvironment interface of the ObjectModelerBase
framework, the CATIA Team PDM license is checked and the
methods fail if no license is found.
Warning C4251 on Windows When using the Multi Workspace Application Builder with -g option,
the Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 compiler produces a lot of C4251
warnings concerning CAA APIs, like for example:
CATMoldDesignUI\PublicInterfaces\CATMldComponentDlg.h(1005) :
warning C4251: 'CATMldComponentDlg::
_hSurf1ToComputeCompAxis' : class 'CATSurface_var' needs to
have dll-interface to be used by clients of class
'CATMldComponentDlg'
Denoting possible link-edit problems when using the

CATMldComponent class. There is no such problems in V5R19 CAA
APIs, so those warnings, when issued on CAA APIs, can be safely
ignored. Those warning can also be filtered out by adding to the
Imakefile.mk of the client application modules the following cards:
OS = win_b64
LOCAL_CCFLAGS= /wd4251
This will also filter out similar warning issued on the client
application code, possibly hiding real problems, but such problems
would appear at link-edit anyway.
Warning 4995 at compilation The following warning appears at compilation:
warning C4995: '_OLD_IOSTREAMS_ARE_DEPRECATED':

name was marked as #pragma deprecated
It is due to a Windows deprecated pragma. It can be ignored.

Product Viewing (PVW) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Target Tracking (TGT) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Automatic Line Balancing (ALB) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Workload Balancing (WLB) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Note
Documentation
None
Process & Resource Planning (EPR) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Standard Time Measurement Products PE

● Standard Time Measurement
● Standard Time Measurement - Value Added
● Time Measurement - MTM1
● Time Measurement - SAM
● Time Measurement - MOST
● Time Measurement - WF
● Time Measurement - Datacard
In this page:
● STM stands for Standard Time Measurement
● GUI for Graphical User Interface
● IE for Industrial Engineer
● FC for FinderControl, similar to IE
● PTS for Plantypeset
Standard Time Measurement (STM)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Standard Time Measurement - Value Added

(SVA)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Time Measurement - MTM1 (SMT)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Time Measurement - SAM (SSA)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Time Measurement - MOST (SMO)

● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Time Measurement - WF (SWF)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Time Measurement - Datacard (SDC)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Fastening Process Planner (BWP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Assembly Process Simulation (APS) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Path Smoothing When we create a Move Activity with a CATProduct and try
automatic path smoothing function of Path Finder command,
we cannot get a smooth path.
Latency in Compass While creating a Move Activity for an assembly with section
Manipulation when whose behavior is set to Auto Update, the manual
section is in Auto-Update manipulation by compass has a very long response latency.
mode
Latency in cancelling When you start to create a new track, create several shots for
Track command the track, and then seek to exit the command without the
command terminates.
Generate Track When you use the Generate Track command, if you set a
maximum pitch distance between two consecutive shots that
is very small (to the order of 0.01), then a crash occurs
without a memory warning.
When you use the Generate Track command, if you enter an

invalid value, you get a message that is not relevant to the
incorrect value.
Move Activity Editing a move activity can, in some datasets, cause the
moved parts to jump to a different position.
When you create a new move activity, and move products

around, the preview window does not reflect the updated
positions of the products.
Create a new move activity with only one shot and define a
compass offset for the only shot. Then edit the move activity,
move the assigned parts and record a few shot positions, then
click OK. The part jumps to an incorrect location rather than
staying at the end of the track.
Latency in cancelling When you start to create a new track, create several shots for
Track command the track, and then seek to exit the command without the
command terminates.
Shot times are With a given Assembly Move Activity dataset, if you edit the
inconsistent Move Activity, then click on a shot to position the shuttle on
that shot, and then click Modify Shot, the shot time changes.
This step can be repeated for every shot.
Documentation
None
DPM Machining Process Planner (PTP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical Harness Process Simulation (EHS) -
P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Real Time Cable Move After you start a Real Time Cable Move, you cannot change
the connector you want to manipulate if it is not on the same
cable. Cross-highlighting will also not be updated if you change
connectors/clamps on the cable from the dialog.
Multi-Cable Move Multi-Cable Move Activity creation is disabled in R19GA.
Multi-Cable Move command can be used to move multiple
bundles interactively (like the real-time move command for
single bundles).
If you move a harness too far from its initial position, reset
might not work with realistic solver mode. This is a limitation in
R19GA.
Visualization When the main bundle is moved, some of the cylinders of the
main bundle seem to be missing. This is, however, only a
visualization problem and does not reflect the overall capabilities
of the command.
When you move a connector and an error condition occurs (such
as stretching the cable too far), the fixed/free constraint icons
move.
Working in Cache Mode In Cache Mode, you should have the following Tools Options
setting for EHS to work: Digital Process for Manufacturing >
Tree tab > Hierarchy tree section > Check Applicative
Data check box.
Child moves parent In R19GA, when a child bundle is moved, the parent bundle will
not be affected.
Moving a connector If you move a connector too quickly with an ICIDO solver
enabled, you may have issues such as broken cables.
Free clamps on a moving When you are working with the ICIDO solver enabled, you may
cable see the cable jump around if there are free clamps on the
moving cable. This does not affect the clamp positions or the
connector positions, only the cables.
V4 support Not all migrated V4 models will work.
Engineering control points When working with ICIDO solver, Engineering control points are
treated like user defined control points. Original position of ECP’s
are not respected. ECP’s will instead follow the solver defined
shape.
Home position You cannot select a product after selecting the Home Position
command, but you can select the 3D bundle or the simulation
item under the desired bundle.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Machining and Tolerancing Assistant (MTT) -
P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Engineering Requirements Planner (EIP)
- P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Assembly Process Planner (APP) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Manufacturing System Definition (MSD) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Copy Resource Command ● Executing this command on a resource structure with approx.
100 resource may take a time delay of 60-90 seconds.
● Attributes specific to a resource are not copied using this
command. User has to reset the attributes manually.
Documentation
None
DPM Review (DPR) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Human Review (DHR) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Structure Manufacturing Preparation (SMP) -
P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Rolled profile support These were never supported in SMP product and are still not
Super Panel support supported
Shrinkage Calculation
Open Issues
Profile Flattening Design features of curved profile are not being transferred to
flattened profile
Documentation
Plate Flattening DST has a lot of new features in R19 related to this topic. Shell,
rolled, fanged plates are being transferred with all the required
manufacturing features
DPM Structure Lofting (DST) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Rolled profile Support These were never supported in DST product and are still not
Super Panel Support supported
Shrinkage Calculation
Open Issues
Profile Flattening Design features of curved profile are not being transferred to
flattened profile
Documentation
Plate Flattening DST has a lot of new features in R19 related to this topic. Shell,
rolled, fanged plates are being transferred with all the required
manufacturing features
Assembly Planner D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
NC Machine Tool Builder (MTB) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Modeling of Mill Turn Turrets modeled with multiple tool mounting stations can only
Machines have 3 axes: X and Z as two translation axes, and the turret
indexing axis (C) as the only rotary axis.
Turrets modeled with a single tool mount station can be
modeled like a Milling machines.
If a Turret or a Spindle component is deleted from a Mill Turn
machine, it is advisable to save and close the Mill Turn product
document before adding other components.
Documentation
None
Standard Robot Library (SRL) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Composite Review (MPR) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Dynamics D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLI Device Building D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Envision - Virtual Environment D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Plantype Editor (PTE) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Layout Planning (L2P) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
3D Resource Layout (L3P) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
QUEST D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
QUEST Express D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
IGRIP D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
UltraSpot D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
UltraArc D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
UltraPaint D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
UltraGrip D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ABB Robot Programming D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Cable Simulation D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Calibration and Signature D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Industrial Robot Library D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Realistic Robot Simulation D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
RRS II (RST) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Ergonomic Analysis D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Ergonomics Option D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Virtual NC D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Virtual NC Machine Building D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Material Removal D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Deburring / Finishing D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Surface Path Generator (SPR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Offline Programming D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Review D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Work Instructions (WKI) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Workload Instruction Composer (WKC) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
Note
Documentation
Customizing For information about the Plug Map View Settings tab under
Customizing.
Customizing For information about the Work Instruction Text 3D Display tab
under Customizing.
Low Level Telerobotics Interface D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DPM Shop Floor Viewer (SHF) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Shop Order Release (SOR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPR Manufacturing Hub Navigator (PRM) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPR Manufacturing Life Cycle Management
(PRL) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPR Editor (PRR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Process Context Builder (PCR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Electrical Review (ELR) - P2
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Virtual Collaborative Engineering D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
UG Direct D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CATIA Direct D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Pro-E D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Product Withdrawal Effective D5R18 SP3 and D5R19 GA, this product is being
withdrawn. Please contact DELMIA customer support for
suggestions on Pro/E data translation.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
IDEAS D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Batch IGES D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
DXF D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VRML1 D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
STL D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Pro/E Render Format D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VDA D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
IGES D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
GM/DES D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
VRML2 D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Parasolid Modeling D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ENOVIA VPM Connection (E4M) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ENOVIA VPM V5 Connection (E5M) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Manufacturing Change Management (MCM) PE
Please also check the pages for the ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub for related topics.
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Configuration and Effectivity (CEF) PE
Please also check the pages for the ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub for related topics.
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Object Customization (OCU) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Report Designer (RPD) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
PPR Navigator and Editor (PRN) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
Scripting: General Purpose The documentation mistakenly lists the GeneralPurpose script
script action action. Although this script action exists, it is not supported for
customer use.
ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub Client (EMH) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
ENOVIA Manufacturing Hub Server (EMS) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Cryptographic Interface (ECI) PE
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Manufacturing Hub Integration
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
AXXESS Open Architecture/Virtual Reality D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Complier Requirement To develop C/C++ programs using Axxess APIs, Microsoft Visual
Studio 2005 SP1 is required.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Stereo D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
QUEST Virtual Reality D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Core D5
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
Control Design Exchange (CX1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Enable Removal Mode If an element exists in the RSLogix project but not in DELMIA
Automation, the default mode does not allow the user to delete
the element in DELMIA. However, this mode can be modified
with the environment variable AUTCDx_EnableRemove=yes. In
this case, when the RSLogix project is imported, a dialog box is
displayed to ask the user if the element must be deleted or not.
Open Issues
Documentation The documentation of Control Design Exchange is not available
on the R19 CD. The user's guide will be delivered in SP2. The
main functionalities of the product are available in the
Documentation section below.
Documentation
User's Guide You'll find in the attached Pdfs the following documentation
sections:
● Overview
● Publishing to RSLogix
● Importing a new AOI parameter from RSLogix
● Publishing a new instance to RSLogix
● Importing a new AOI from RSLogix
● Control Design Exchange Toolbar
● Reference Information
CLM Control Setup (LT1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM ST Code Generator (SC1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM SIMATIC Setup (SU1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CLM C Code Generator (CG1) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
SMARTEAM Integration (DAI) - P1
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES - All Products
This page lists issues which are common to all or most of ENOVIA CES products.
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Windows XP x64 Text For the Japanese locale, due to a Microsoft VS 2005 CRT issue,
Display Issue for Japanese server trace and information messages are partially missing for
Locale the following:
1. Command Line Applications

❍ File Introspection (running in daemon mode)
❍ Clash Server
❍ Batch Utilities (including migration, ENOVFixIterUtil,
etc.)
2. Logs and Server Traces
A future Windows patch is needed to resolve this issue.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES Sourcing Hub (SHB)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES Engineering Component Reuse (SRU)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
CES Functionality in Limitations: The following functionality of CES will not be available
CATIA Client in CATIA Client without VPMNav installation in WinTop
1. Display of PLM Properties
2. PLM Usage
3. SSO
4. Mapping ENOVIA properties when introducing a Part Family
Part Family Introduction To introduce a Part Family to CES without using ENOVIA VPM
Navigator, you must have an active document window in the CATIA
application.
Open Issues
Bulk New Component Bulk NCI currently supports up to 100 components. It will
Introduction Limitation provide the capability of handling more than 100 components in
future releases.
Documentation
None
CES Engineering Catalog Navigator (SEC)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
LimitationsThe following functionality of CES will not be available in CATIA Client without VPMNav installation in
WinTop
1. Display of ENOVIA Properties
2. ENOVIA Where-Used
3. SSO
4. Mapping ENOVIA properties when creating Part Family
Constraint When introducing a CATProduct into CES, the document name and the part number of the document
should be the same during the save in ENOVIA.
V4 and CES for V4 and V5 adapters does not support the instantiation of parts linked to .model files.
V5
Adapters
Open Issues
Consumer Organization In the AIX Wintop Client, the Part Family Wizard does not allow access to the
Consumer Organization object due to the problem in resizing the window. This will
be addressed in a future software release.
Documentation
None
CES Enterprise Catalog Administration/Installation
(SCA)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
Sync/ The Sync/Optimize Text Index option in EDM is not functional when used with Java Run
Optimize Environment (JRE) 1.5 version.
Text Index Following are the steps to apply fix for this issue:
Option in
EDM
1. Close the EDM application if it is running.
2. Install JRE 1.4.2
3. Rename the following jar files which are under "<EDS_HOME>/edm/com/jars" directory:
edm.jar
edmMisc.jar
where <EDS_HOME> refers to the EDS installation directory.
Ensure that EDS_HOME environment variable is set correctly.
For example:
❍ On Windows, execute the following commands in the shell prompt
ren %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/edm.jar %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/edm.jar_org

ren %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/edmMisc.jar %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/edmMisc.
jar_org
❍ On Unix, execute the following commands in the shell prompt
mv $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/edm.jar $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/edm.jar_org
mv $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/edmMisc.jar $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/edmMisc.jar_org
4. Copy the following jar files which are under "<EDS_HOME>/edm/com/jars/edm_fix"

directory to "<EDS_HOME>/edm/com/jars" directory:
edm.jar
edmMisc.jar
For example:
❍ On Windows, execute the following commands in the shell prompt
copy %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/edm_fix/edm.jar %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars

copy %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/edm_fix/edmMisc.jar %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars
❍ On Unix, execute the following commands in the shell prompt
cp $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/edm_fix/edm.jar $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars
cp $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/edm_fix/edmMisc.jar $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars
5. Remove the "<EDS_HOME>/edm/com/jars/cachedir" directory if exists.

For example:
❍ On windows, execute the following command in the shell prompt
rmdir %EDS_HOME%/edm/com/jars/cachedir
❍ On Unix, execute the following command in the shell prompt
rmdir $EDS_HOME/edm/com/jars/cachedir
6. Include the bin directory of JRE 1.4.2 in the PATH environment variable
For example:
❍ On Windows, execute the following command in the shell prompt
set PATH=C:\Java\JRE1.4.2\bin;%PATH%
❍ On Unix (in K shell), execute the following command in the shell prompt
export PATH=/usr/java/jre142/bin;$PATH
7. Launch the EDM tool again to use Sync/Optimize Text Index option
NOTE: All other options in the EDM can also be used with JRE 1.4.2
CES Log In case of any deployment issues, CES server connection issues or any other CES runtime issues,
Files log files will be generated and they are stored in the <Installpath>/<OS>/resources/sdm/
exploreJS/admin/log directory.
User can turn ON/OFF the various traces using the CESAdmin client. The URL for CESAdmin client
is same as the CES Webtop URL, except user has to replace ENOVIAPortal with CESAdmin. For
example, if the CES webtop URL is http://SERVER:PORT/R18/html/ENOVIAPortal; then the
CESAdmin URL is http://SERVER:PORT/R18/html/CESAdmin
Total The Total Transaction Lifetime Timeout, available on the LCANav server server1, defines the
Transactiontimeout for each transaction. It can be accessed through Application servers > server1 >
Lifetime Runtime tab > Transaction service in the Websphere Admin Console. It has been observed that
Timeout the default value of 120 seconds provided by Websphere is not enough for some of the more time-
consuming transactions, such as the creation of new, large part families in Wintop. This timeout
value should be set to an appropriate number, based on the length of the transactions that are
anticipated in the CES installation.
Open Issues
None
Documentation
What's New
New Functionalities
There are no new functionalities for R19.
Enhancements
There are no enhancements for R19.
CES Administration Desktop This topic should be as follows:
User Documentation
CES Admin Desktop/CES HTML Client

The Admin Desktop provides support for:
● managing the data model(s) used by your company
This support is provided by the following application:

● Data Modeler
The topics covered in this section are:

● CES Data Modeler
The CES HTML Client provides support for:

● searching
● managing users and user groups
● granting permission
● creating and editing forms
This support is provided by the following applications:

● Search
● User/Group Admin
● Permission Administration
● Forms Editor
The topics covered in this section are:

● Search
● Managing Users and User Groups
● Permissions Administration
● Forms Editor
Configuring CES for VPM V4 -
Webtop Before using CES with VPM V4, in the Webtop environment, you must do the
following.
1. In the VPM Lifecycle Navigator Web product, open the Administration

page. In the Category list, select Administration > Navigator >
Adapters and then go to the CES tab.
2. Check the Enabled box at the top of the tab and change the value of
PLMAbstractionImpl to ENOVIA_VPM.
3. Go to the ENOVIA V5 VPM tab. Uncheck the Enabled box. This
disables the ENOVIA V5 VPM Adapter.
4. Go to the ENOVIA VPM tab. Check the Enabled box at the top of the
page. This enables the ENOVIA VPM Adapter.
5. Set the remaining values on the tab to configure the ENOVIA VPM
Adapter. For more information on configuring the ENOVIA VPM Adaptor,
refer to Lifecycle Administration Guide : Configuring Adapters : How to
Configuring ENOVIA vpm.
6. The Part.xml file must be modified to enable custom part promote, as
described in CES Enterprise Installation : Customizing NCI.
Configuring CES for VPM V4 -
Wintop Before using CES with VPM V4, in the Wintop environment, you must do the
following.
1. In CATIA, select Tools > Options.

2. Select Infrastructure > Product Structure. Go to the ENOVIAvpm
tab. In the VPM Interoperability Administration section browse to
the appropriate location for the Database Administration, Database
Server Dictionary, ENOVIAvpm/Product Structure Mapping, and
ENOVIAvpm/Product Structure Nodes Customization. For more
information on how to set this information, refer to ENOVIA Virtual
Product Model (VPM) User Guide : Using CDMA Data in a CATIA Version
5 Assembly, and MULTI PDM CDM/VPM Plug in : Customizing CATIA V5
with ENOVIAVPM via the ENOVIA 3d com Navigator Client (on Windows).
3. In the Tools > Options window, select Collaborative Enterprise
Sourcing from the list of options.
4. In the Database Management section, change the setting for CES
Preferred PLM System from ENOVIA VPLM to ENOVIA_VPM, to
access the V4 database.
5. The Part.xml file must be modified to enable custom part promote, as
described in CES Enterprise Installation : Customizing NCI.
Component Introduction Management (SCI)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES Enterprise Catalog Management (SCG)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES Component Sourcing (SSG)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES Component Reuse (SLR)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
None
CES Enterprise Catalog Navigator (SLC)
● General Issues
● Open Issues
● Documentation
General Issues
None
Open Issues
None
Documentation
What's New
New Functionalities
QML Attachments
You can now manage QML attachments in the Manufacturer
Information.
Managing Environments
About the Environment Created on Your Computer on Windows
About the Environment Created on Your Workstation on UNIX
What Is An Environment?
Customizing Your Environment on Windows
Customizing Your Environment on UNIX
Enabling User Access to the Software Over the
Network
This task explains how to allow end users access to Version 5 over the network without
installing the software on the client. You have two possibilities. You can:
● set up just a runtime environment on each client: each time the server software is
upgraded, all you have to do is recreate a new environment on each client
● or, to avoid having to set up a runtime environment on each client, you can simply mount
the server software and runtime environment directories from the client and run Version 5
using the environment on the server.
We have chosen the AIX platform for the purposes of this scenario.
When setting up the server you can:

● copy all the software into the same folder (as illustrated above)
● or, given that the software is distributed on several CDs ( 1, 2 ...), copy the contents of
each CD into a separate folder for each CD, making sure that the name of each folder
corresponds to the CD number ( 1, 2 ...) etc.
Setting Up an Environment on the Client
1. Log on as root onto the server.
The name of the server, in our example above, is "ravel".
You already installed the software in:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/aix_a
2. From the server, export the installation directory (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19) to the client.
The directory must be accessible from the client.

3. Log on as root onto the client.
The name of the client, in our example above, is "chopin".

4. From the client, mount the exported installation directory (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19)
via NFS.
5. Go to the following mounted directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/aix_a/code/bin
6. Set the path of the installation directory on the server using the command:
export PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/aix_a/code/bin:/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/
aix_a/code/command:$PATH
The following list contains the variables to modify on each UNIX system:
export LIBPATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/aix_a/code/bin (AIX)
export SHLIB_PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/hpux_b/code/bin (HP-UX)
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/code/bin (Solaris)

Exporting library paths is required by the setcatenv command which creates the environment
as explained below.
7. Create the following global environment (still as "root") using the following command with
exactly the syntax indicated, depending on whether you are running CATIA, ENOVIA DMU
Navigator or DELMIA:
./setcatenv -e MyEnvironment -p /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19 -d MyEnvDirectory -

desktop yes -new yes -a global -cs MyProductLine
where "MyEnvironment" is the name of the environment, "MyEnvDirectory" is the name of the
folder containing the environment and "MyProductLine" is the name of the product line.
Running the setcatenv command as a normal end user runs successfully, but does not create
a global environment.
8. To register document types on the client desktop, go to the directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/aix_a/code/command
and run this command:
./catstart -run "setcatenv -p /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19 -e MyEnvironment -d

MyEnvDirectory -regserver -cs MyProductLine" -env MyEnvironment -direnv
MyEnvDirectory
For a description of the setcatenv and delcatenv command syntax for UNIX, refer to
Customizing Your Environment on UNIX.
9. If you need access to the communications backbone and peripheral device broker, the
associated port numbers must be set up on the client.
Used to support process interoperability (for example, between CATIA and DMU), the
backbone needs to be set up on each computer running applications which need to
communicate.
To set up the ports using the default values:
1. Go to the following installation directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command
./catstart -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory -run setV5Ports
where "OS" is:

❍ aix_a
❍ hpux_b
❍ solaris_a.
For more information, refer to Communications Backbone Files.

10. Log off the root userid.
11. Log on using a normal userid and run a Version 5 session to check your environment has
been correctly set up.
You can run Version 5 as follows:

● double-click the environment icon using the desktop,
● or, go to the following mounted directory:
and enter the command:
./catstart -run CNEXT -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
./catstart -run DMU -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
./catstart -run DELMIA -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
12. To delete this environment, run the command from the same directory:
./catstart -run "delcatenv -d MyEnvDirectory -unregserver -cs MyProductLine" -

env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
./catstart -run "delcatenv -e MyEnvironment -d MyEnvDirectory -desktop yes -a

global -cs MyProductLine" -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
For a description of the setcatenv and delcatenv command syntax for UNIX, refer to
Customizing Your Environment on UNIX.
Accessing the Software Without an Environment on the Client

You already installed the software in:
2. From the server, export the following directories to the client:

● /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/aix_a (installation directory)
● /CATEnv (runtime environment directory)
Both the installation and runtime environment directories must be accessible from the client.
3. Log onto the client as root.

4. From the client, mount both exported directories via NFS.
5. Go to the following mounted directory:

6. Log off the root userid.

7. Log on using a normal userid and run a Version 5 session.
In this case, go to the following mounted directory:
./catstart -run CNEXT
./catstart -run DMU
./catstart -run DELMIA

Note that you cannot run Version 5 on the client using the environment icon using the
desktop: no environment exists on the client, therefore there is no desktop icon.
Distributing Code
Distributing Version 5 on Windows
Distributing Version 5 on UNIX
This section concerns only the CATIA, DELMIA and ENOVIA DMU Navigator product
lines.
Licensing
Licensing Overview
Licensing Tools
Enabling Concurrent Offline Licensing
Setting Up Network Licensing
Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation
This task explains how to enroll nodelock licenses outside the installation procedure.
On Windows
1. Log onto the computer.
2. Select the Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools > Nodelock Key Management V5R19 command, or run the program:
install_root\code\bin\CATNodeLockMgt
where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is, by default:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (Windows XP Pro)

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
The "Nodelock License Manager" dialog box appears:
A check is performed automatically to verify whether your license is still valid, and display the number of days before your license expires.
Note that:
● a green light opposite the license serial number means that the license will still be valid for at least 30 days
● an orange light opposite the license serial number means that the license will still be valid for less than 30 days
● a red light opposite the license serial number means that the license has expired.
If the license is still valid, the number of days left before the license expires is indicated.
Note that the target id of the computer on which you are performing the installation is displayed inside the dialog box.
Pointing to the target id on Windows displays a tooltip
containing the name of the network adapter used by the
licensing software to generate the target id:
On UNIX and Windows, in both interactive and batch modes, the nodelock key management tool now displays the three-letter code for
nodelock custom configuration licenses. If this license contains add-on products, their three-letter code will be also displayed. Identifying
the configuration from which the custom configuration license has been generated is now easier, because the three-letter code provides
additional information, along with the serial number.
If the configuration cannot be identified, the trigram displayed
will be "???" like this:
This can happen for example if you have a license for a configuration which has not been installed, or has been uninstalled.
The File menu contains the following commands:
● Import
● Add
● Read
● Extract
● Restitute
● Clear
● Exit
3. To import your electronic license certificate (if you have one), select the File > Import command.
To be able to import the certificate using this command, you do not need administrator privileges, however you need write access to the
folder in the LUM environment containing the nodelock file.
This displays a file selection box which opens with the C:\Temp folder contents displayed:
Explore your filetree and select the license certificate file which uses the prefix ".lic", then click the Open button to import the certificate.
If you import a license on a machine without a previous LUM environment, the following directory is created:
which is typically:
already exists on your machine and you import a nodelock license, this nodelock file will be updated.
Note: if a nodelock file exists in both locations, the file:
will be used. To avoid problems, we recommend that you use ONLY ONE nodelock file in the following directory:
This procedure can be used both after installing for the first time and after installing additional products.
4. To add a license manually, select the File > Add command.
To be able to add a license using this command, you do not need administrator privileges, however you need write access to the folder
containing the nodelock file.
This is useful when you do not have a license certificate file to import, and your license is sent to you on paper.
The "Add License Manually" dialog box appears:
Type the following information (contained in your license on paper) in the appropriate fields:
● Version
● Password
● Serial Number
There may or may not be a serial number, depending on the case:
❍ a serial number exists for all configurations: all configurations are custom configurations
❍ if you already have a custom configuration, you can extend it by adding products: in this case, a new license is provided, and the
new license contains the same serial number as the original configuration
❍ a serial number does not exist for standalone (shareable) products.
● Annotation
● Comment.
Then, click the Add button to add the license.
The "Nodelock" file is created or updated just as if you had imported a license certificate.
5. To read a license, select the File > Read command.
This displays the license in the "Nodelock Key File Content" box:
Offline Licensing
The File > Extract and File > Restitute commands are used for extracting offline licenses from and returning offline licenses to a LUM
server for the purpose of running Version 5 on a laptop disconnected from the network. For more information, refer to Enabling
Concurrent Offline Licensing. To be able to extract and restitute offline licenses, you do not need administrator privileges, however you
need write access to the folder containing the nodelock file and to the nodelock file itself.
Note that the LUM driver is not installed on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. This means that concurrent offline licensing will not be
available on this 64-bit operating system, irrespective of whether the Version 5 code is 64-bit or 32-bit. As a consequence, the
File > Extract and File > Restitute commands are not available in CATNodelockMgt on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition.
The File > Clear command allows you to clear obsolete nodelock licenses from the nodelock file. Each time you import a nodelock
license, it is added to the nodelock file. After a period of time, the nodelock file may contain a large number of licenses, some of which
are obsolete. We recommend that you clear obsolete licenses from the nodelock file using this command, not by editing the nodelock file
manually. To be able to clear the nodelock file using this command, you do not need administrator privileges, however you need write
access to the folder containing the nodelock file and to the nodelock file itself.
On UNIX
1. Log on as root.
2. Go the directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a
and enter the following command to display the "Nodelock License Manager" dialog box:
./catstart -run CATNodeLockMgt
The user interface on UNIX is the same as the user interface on Windows described above.
This creates a nodelock file on your computer, and stores your license by default in the nodelock file in:
Batch Mode
On all platforms, you can also run the command in batch.
On Windows
install_root\code\bin\CATNodelockMgtB (Windows)
where "install_root" is the name of your installation folder which is, by default:

C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
On UNIX
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run CATNodelockMgtB (UNIX)
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a
and with the following options:

● -i: name of nodelock file to be imported
● -c yes|no: automatic license validity check mode (default yes)
● -C yes|no: clears obsolete nodelock licenses from the nodelock file
● -id: returns the target id of your computer
● -na: returns the network adapter used to generate the target ID on Windows
● -v yes|no: verbose mode (default yes)
● -h: help.
About the Environment Created on Your
Computer on Windows
A Version 5 installation has the following impact on your computer.
Installation Folder
The software is installed (if you used the default location) in the folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64 (64-bit code on Windows XP
Professional x64 Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a (32-bit code on
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
Desktop
The installation:
● creates the
CATIA V5R19 default environment shortcut on the desktop.
Only one environment is created: a global environment (not a user

environment). For more information about global and user environments, refer
to What are global and user environments?.
The environment is created in a text file located in:

\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv
and the environment file name is:
CATIA.V5R19.B19.txt
● sets up the:
Start > Programs > CATIA > CATIA V5R19 default environment shortcut
● and sets up the:
Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools
menu containing the Batch Management V5R19, Printers V5R19, Environment

Editor V5R19, Nodelock Key Management V5R19, Settings Management
V5R19 and Software Management V5R19 commands.
Registry
Whenever you perform an installation (or run a command using the /regserver
command option), the following registry keys are modified:
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
● HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT
Note: for the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT key, 64-bit Windows requires different registry
entries for 32-bit and 64-bit applications. Therefore, 32-bit and 64-bit applications have
different registry paths for following software related entries.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\DassaultSystemes (Windows XP Pro and Windows
XP Professional x64 Edition)
The key "B19" is added containing the key "0" which specifies the destination folder.
Additional entries are made each time you install the same release in a different
location, and the key number will be incremented for each installation as follows:
"0", "1", "2", etc.
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall
\Dassault Systemes B19_0 (Windows XP Pro and Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
Specifies the application name for uninstallation purposes; additional entries are
made each time you install the same release in a different location, and the key
number will be incremented for each installation as follows: "B19_0", "B19_1", etc.)
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App Paths
(Windows XP Pro and Windows XP Professional x64 Edition with 64-bit code)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion
\App Paths (Windows XP Professional x64 Edition with 32-bit code)
Sets up the Start > Run... command so you can enter the appropriate command to
start a session for your product line). This key is now integrated when using the /
regserver and /unregserver command options.
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT
This key registers the document types and extensions for the Version 5 product line
you installed.
Furthermore, the default OLE behavior of certain document types has changed. For
example, what happens when double-clicking a CATPart document in the Windows
Explorer depends on which product lines have been installed. For example, if only
CATIA is installed, the CATPart will be opened. However, if you installed ENOVIA DMU
Navigator after installing CATIA, the default behavior associated with double-clicking a
CATPart in the ENOVIA DMU Navigator context will be used. In this case, the CATPart
must be inserted into a product, not opened.
For 32-bit and 64-bit Applications on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition, this is the original path for 64-bit applications:
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\
For 32-bit applications this is now the path:
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Wow6432Node\
This difference is not visible to the 32-bit application. All registry

references from a 32-bit application to:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Classes
are automatically redirected to:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Classes
by Windows. 64-bit applications simply access the registry with an

unchanged path.
The integration of the following key lets you import nodelock licenses by double-clicking
the license certificate file in the Explorer:
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\CATIA.Licensing
Please note that keys have been integrated into the registry for the CATIA Application,
DELMIA Application and ENOVIA DMU Application so that the the user can choose the
appropriate security settings to use these applications as Distributed COM clients.
Registry entries, folders and files are not protected. You can protect access to these
entries using system tools, for example the regedt32 command. Please note that this
command is only recommended for advanced users because it is potentially dangerous.
Communications Backbone Files

The communications backbone is an implementation of message-oriented middleware
(MOM), used to support process interoperability for distributed application networks in
heterogeneous environments. Installing the product sets up the communications
backbone on your computer. The backbone needs to be set up on each computer
running applications which need to communicate.
When one application attempts to communicate with another, the backbone process is
started automatically. If the process is already running, it is not restarted. A timeout is
triggered once there are no more clients attempting to communicate with other
applications.
A typical scenario involving the use of the inter-application communications backbone is

implemented to allow the ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator and ENOVIA Portal WEB to
communicate: ENOVIA Portal WEB can load geometry and product structures into a
viewer such as ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator, 4D Navigator or CATIA.
When installing from scratch, the installation procedure sets up the communications
backbone by creating the following lines:
catiav5bb 55555/tcp
catiav5run 55556/tcp
in the file:
%windir%\system32\drivers\etc\services
Note that the line:
CATDeviceBroker 55557/tcp
which concerns peripheral device handling is also added to this file.
If you do not want to set up communication ports during the installation, you can
always edit the above-mentioned files manually later.
Note: The services file also contains the line:
mi-ray 7001/tcp # Rendering slave
for the Photo Studio Optimizer product.
Tools for Setting Backbone and Peripheral Device Broker Port

Numbers
The preferred method for setting port numbers, however, is to avoid manual edits by
using one of the following tools:
setV5Ports
The syntax of the command is as follows:
setV5Ports [-backbonePorts p1 p2] [-VRPort p3]|-h

● -backbonePorts p1 p2: Specifies communication ports for backbone. Default values
are 55555 and 55556
● -VRPort p3: Specifies communication port for peripheral device broker - default
value is 55557
● -h: displays help.
To run the command using the default values:
2. Open a Command Prompt window and go to the installation directory, for
example:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (Windows XP

Pro)
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code
on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-
bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
setV5Ports
When used with the default values, it adds the following lines:
catiav5bb 55555/tcp #Dassault Systemes Communication ports
catiav5run 55556/tcp #Dassault Systemes Communication ports
CATDeviceBroker 55557/tcp #Dassault Systemes Communication ports
to the file:
C:/WINDOWS/system32/drivers/etc/services
BBDemonService
You can also use the BBDemonService command to set up the backbone.
BBDemonService [-create [-backbonePorts port1 port2] ] [-delete] [-start]

[-stop]
-create [-backbonePorts port1 port2] : if necessary, updates the file:

%windir%\system32\drivers\etc\services
and creates the Backbone Service demon and starts it.
● if the option -backbonePorts is not used, and if the services file already contains
the lines catiav5bb and catiav5run, it is not modified. If it does not contain these
lines, it is updated using the default ports 55555 and 55556 if they are free, if not,
an error occurs and the command fails
● if the option -backbonePorts is used, a check is performed to see if the above-
specified ports are free, and the port numbers are added to the services file; if they
are not, the file is updated using the port number specified with the option.
-delete: stops the Backbone Service and deletes it
-start: starts the Backbone Service
-stop: stops the Backbone Service.

A backbone daemon is created as a service and started. You can monitor the daemon
by selecting Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. The
name of the service is Backbone Service. The name of the executable program that
corresponds to the backbone service is CATSysDemon.exe, which you can track using
the Task Manager.
Administrator Setting Environments

When running a session at the end of the installation procedure (as administrator),
permanent administrator settings are created in:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes

\CATSettings
Temporary administrator settings (CATTemp, CATReport, etc.) are stored in:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data

\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp, CATReport
System Libraries
System libraries are no longer installed in the Windows filetree. Furthermore, no
system libraries are installed with Windows XP Professional x64 Edition.
All end users can now log onto the same computer and run a Version 5
session, because the environment created at installation is global.
Licensing Overview
Configuration and Product Packaging

The Version 5 product packaging model is based on the concepts of configurations and
products.
Configurations
Configurations are a convenient and attractive way for you to order and install the
adequate combination of products for each type of user, while offering a single solution
from a licensing point of view.
There are two types of configurations:

● standard configurations contain a pre-defined list of products, corresponding to
most frequent user profiles across industries and processes. These configurations
are offered at an attractive price compared to the sum of the individual product
prices.
● the content of custom configurations is dynamically defined at ordering time,
thus allowing you to adapt the configuration content to the most specific user needs.
The content of a custom configuration is defined by adding individual products (see
product delivered as "add-on" below) to an existing standard configuration. The
result is a competitively priced solution, and remains a single solution from a
licensing point of view.
After initial installation, the configuration mechanism lets you manage the evolution
and growth of your user profile content by allowing you to add new products. The
resulting new seat definition is still a single solution from a licensing point of view.
To be able to use Version 5, you need to purchase and acquire at least one
configuration license.
Products
Products are the elementary software building blocks for Version 5 installations.
Version 5 software may be ordered as:
● a standard configuration
● an add-on product on top of a standard configuration to build a custom configuration
● a shareable product:
In this case the product is delivered with its own license key, allowing the user to
obtain the license at the beginning of the session, or to leave it for another user.
Prices of products ordered in this mode are different, versus "add-on" price, to take
into account multiple users potential. Shareable product licenses do not have serial
numbers.
Shareable products concern the CATIA, DELMIA and ENOVIA DMU
Navigator product lines only.
● an Extra Product:
An extra product is a standard product associated with certain configurations or
products. At install time, if you select a configuration or a product which contains an
extra product, a new dialog box is displayed allowing you to install (or not install)
the extra product. An extra product cannot be licensed: it is free of charge. In
additional install mode, the extra products already installed are listed along with the
already installed standard products. Installation in batch mode also takes extra
products into account. The CATSoftwareMgt[B] commands list the installed extra
products along with the installed standard products.
After installation, there is no possibility to differentiate the products installed as
standard products or as extra products. Documentation installation does not
manage extra products.
Licensing Types
In workstation environments, Version 5 controls the number of concurrent users of a
Version 5 configuration or product, according to the number of licenses acquired for
the configuration or product.
Version 5 delivers identical licensing mechanisms on UNIX and Windows environments,

based on IBM License Use Management (LUM). The following licensing principles apply:
● A Version 5 configuration (standard or custom) will require a license. Licenses for
Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total configuration. The
products within a configuration cannot be shared.
● Version 5 shareable products will require a license, in addition to one for the
prerequisite configuration and any prerequisite product, if applicable.
● In all cases, licenses are acquired at the beginning of the process and are released
at its termination.
● Shareable product licenses may be acquired at the beginning of the process and
released at its termination, or upon user request, acquired and released during the
process (ability to acquire and release licenses is not available for configuration
licenses). Shareable licenses acquired at the beginning of the session cannot be
released before the end of the session; only licenses dynamically granted upon user
request during the session can be released during the session.
Version 5 can be used in two licensing modes: nodelock or with concurrent usage of
licenses on a network.
Nodelock Licensing
The use of local display of the hardware configuration is mandatory for Version 5
usage in nodelock mode. There is no limit to the number of Version 5 processes
launched for a given license (configuration or product). For instance, a user can launch
the following simultaneous processes:
● A Version 5 interactive session
● A Version 5 process executed through an OLE container application
● Replay of macros recorded from captured sequences of Version 5 user interactions.
In nodelock mode of operation, only one license per configuration and product can be
registered by machine, and only one user can run a license at a time. If you want
multiple licenses per configuration or product, or multiple users, refer to Concurrent
Licensing.
Nodelock licensing is available only for the CATIA, DELMIA and ENOVIA DMU
Navigator product lines.
ENOVIA V5 VPM and ENOVIA 3d com use concurrent licensing only.
Concurrent Licensing
For CATIA, DELMIA, ENOVIA DMU and RADE, a user on one machine on one display
uses one license per configuration or product used, regardless of the number of
processes. For ENOVIA V5 VPM and 3d com, an individual license is requested by each
running process.
If the display changes, an additional license is reserved for the corresponding process.
Add-on and shareable products require a license for a configuration which includes at
least the prerequisite products.
Licenses for Version 5 configurations are acquired and released for the total
configuration. The functions within a configuration cannot be shared.
Concurrent licensing is implemented for all product lines.
Concurrent Offline Licensing

The concurrent license control technique is available via the LUM server. It gives
CATIA, ENOVIA DMU, DELMIA and RADE applications running on a Windows laptop the
ability to disconnect from the license server for a defined period of time, so that users
can take advantage of the full license capability while mobile. During the checkout
period the license is unavailable for use by another concurrent user.
This feature is designed to add additional flexibility to a user's work environment. It is

offered to accommodate short-term travel needs and collaboration while away from a
fixed office environment or server connection. All ICA terms and conditions, including
Cross-Border licensing terms are unchanged, and users will checkout and check-in
licenses at their home server, where rules and procedures are controlled by LUM.
Demo Usage
In addition to its normal mode of operation where all licensed functions are accessed,
Version 5 is capable of running in demo mode, on UNIX and Windows, with some
disabled functions (such as File > Save - see list below):
● Existing Version 5 customers, who have a minimum of one regular license, can
switch from standard mode to demo mode (Tools > Options > Licensing tab). As
the user restarts a session, the demo mode will be automatically used.
● Qualified prospects, who may be given the Version 5 code for evaluation purposes,
are required to enter a special demo license key. This will ensure that the code
starts automatically in demo mode.
With this mechanism, customers can explore add-on products for which they do not
yet have a license. The qualified prospect can get first hands-on experience, verify the
ease of use of Version 5, and create the first parts. In both cases, a favorable business
environment is created for accelerating sales cycles.
When using Version 5 in demo mode, the following functions are disabled:
● File Save and Save as
● File Read (except for prepared Version 5 demo documents)
● Embedding Version 5 documents in OLE documents
● Opening Version 5 documents using OLE technology
● Cutting, copying and pasting Version 5 documents with the Windows clipboard
● Recording and replaying macros.
How Are Licenses Acquired?
Licenses can be acquired during a session using:
● the License tab
● the Shareable Products tab: licenses for shareable products can be acquired without
exiting the current session.
Note that only shareable products in the CATIA product line can be acquired without
exiting a session.
Setting Up Vault Servers and Clients
Vault Server and Client Concepts
Installing the Vault Server Manually
Installing a Vault Client in Batch Mode
Setting Up the Vault Server Cache
Activating the Full Text Server on Vault Servers
How to Set Up File Transfer Mode for the Vault
Vault Administration Tools
Analyzing and Repairing Vault Links
Setting Up a DB2 DATALINK Vault Server
Migrating a Vault Server Manually
Migrating a Vault Database From V5R17 To V5R18
Running in Demo Mode
This task explains how to run Version 5 in demo mode.
You must have already registered either one demonstration license, or at least one
configuration license (which automatically provides access to the demo mode).
What Is Demo Mode?
Running in demo mode lets you use all the features of all the configurations and/or
products installed, apart from the few exceptions listed below.
In demo mode:
● the automatic save (roll) mechanism is deactivated.
● you can open only specially marked Version 4 or Version 5 demo documents, and
you cannot save them
● you can create new documents, but you cannot save them
● you cannot embed Version 5 documents in OLE documents
● you cannot open Version 5 documents using OLE technology
● on Windows, the clipboard is unavailable for cutting, copying and pasting
● you cannot record or execute macros.
Note that when running a normal (non-demo) session, you can read specially marked
Version 4 or Version 5 demo documents, and save them as non-demo documents.
By default, demo mode is not activated.

1. Display the License Manager.
The License Manager is displayed automatically after starting Version 5 (either for the
first time, or each time you start a session until you reserve a license). You can also
display it by selecting the Tools > Options... command, then the Licensing tab in the
General category.
2. Check the Demo Mode option, and click OK.
A message informs you to restart your session.
3. Click OK and restart.
The Version 5 application window is opened in demo mode.

Display of Licenses in Demo Mode
In demo mode, in the Shareable Products tab, certain products listed in the List of
Products granted Using Licensing tab area are displaced and displayed erroneously in
the List of Shareable Products.
About the Environment Created on Your
Workstation on UNIX
The installation has the following impact on your computer:
Installation Path
The software is installed (if you used the default location) in the folder directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a
Environment
The installation offers you the choice of where to create the /CATEnv directory. The
default is the root $HOME directory (typically "/"), but you can create the /CATEnv
directory anywhere you like.
Note that, if an environment already exists, the installation procedure offers you the
choice between replacing it or creating a new environment with a different name.
If you choose the default location, the installation creates the global environment,
required to set the Version 5 runtime environment variables, in the /CATEnv directory.
The environment is created in a text file and the environment file name is:
CATIA.V5R19.B19.txt
Note: UNIX system administrators can also setup a /CATEnv environment directly in
the home directory of end users.
CDE Desktop on AIX, HP-UX and Solaris
The /CATCDE directory required for CDE desktops is created in the /CATEnv directory.
The installation creates the following filetree required for integrating Version 5 into the
CDE desktop:
● /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/CATIA/CATIA.V5R19.B19 (file
required for graphic representation of environment in the CDE desktop)
● /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA.V5R19.B19.dt (action
description file for environment icon)
● /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA.dt (action description file for
CATIA directory)
● /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIAFiles.dt (action description file
for CATIA document types)
● /CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/icons/C (contains icons for CATIA document
types).
Note that:
● The last four are created using the "-regserver" option of the setcatenv command
and deleted using the "-unregserver" option of the delcatenv command.
● CATIAFiles.dt is common to all product lines.
The application is registered in the CDE application base via the "dtAppIntegrate"
command which is executed automatically during the installation. The result of
registering the application is that the /etc/dt/appconfig/ environment on your
workstation is modified. This environment contains links to the application desktop
filetree located under /CATCDE (described above).
You do not see the icon immediately. To display the icon, you must click the
Application manager icon on the CDE front panel, go into the Desktop Tools cabinet,
then double-click the Reload Applications icon. You can also log off and log on to
display the icon.
The visible impact on the CDE desktop is:

● the creation of the MyProductLine directory in the Application Manager cabinet,
accessible via the front panel
● the creation in this directory of the default global environment icon:
CATIA V5R19
Communications Backbone Files
The installation procedure allows you to declare on your computer:
● a port reserved for the communications backbone process
● a port reserved for starting the communications backbone process automatically
● a port reserved for processing events when using peripheral devices (spaceball,
spacemouse, joystick).
To do so, check the option "Set up communications ports (strongly recommended)"

when prompted.
The communications backbone is Version 5 implementation of message-oriented

middleware (MOM), used to support process interoperability for distributed application
networks in heterogeneous environments. Installing Version 5 sets up the
communications backbone on your computer. The backbone needs to be set up on
each computer running applications which need to communicate.
When one application attempts to communicate with another, the backbone process is
started automatically. If the process is already running, it is not restarted. A timeout is
triggered once there are no more clients attempting to communicate with other
applications.
A typical scenario involving the use of the inter-application communications backbone

is implemented to allow the ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator and ENOVIA Portal WEB to
communicate: ENOVIA Portal WEB can load geometry and product structures into a
viewer such as ENOVIA Portal DMU Navigator, 4D Navigator or CATIA.
If you are installing from scratch, the installation procedure sets up the
communications backbone by creating the following lines:
catiav5bb 55555/tcp
catiav5run 55556/tcp
in the file:
/etc/services
Note that the line:
CATDeviceBroker 55557/tcp
which concerns peripheral device handling is also added to this file.

The following line:
catiav5run stream tcp nowait root /path/CATSysDemon
is added to the file:
/etc/inetd.conf
where "path" is the path containing the Version 5 executable files.
For example:
catiav5run stream tcp nowait root /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/

bin/CATSysDemon
Note: The services file also contains the line:
mi-ray 7001/tcp # Rendering slave
for the Photo Studio Optimizer product.
Tools for Setting Backbone and Peripheral Device Broker Port

Numbers
The preferred method for setting port numbers, however, is to avoid manual edits by
using the following tool:
setV5Ports
setV5Ports [-backbonePorts p1 p2] [-VRPort p3]|-h

● -backbonePorts p1 p2: Specifies communication ports for backbone. Default
values are 55555 and 55556
● -VRPort p3: Specifies communication port for peripheral device broker - default
value is 55557
To run the command using the default values:
1. Log on as root.
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run setV5Ports
where "OS" is:

❍ aix_a
❍ hpux_b
❍ solaris_a.
When used with the default values, it adds the following lines:
catiav5bb 55555/tcp #Dassault Systemes Communication ports

catiav5run 55556/tcp #Dassault Systemes Communication ports
CATDeviceBroker 55557/tcp #Dassault Systemes Communication ports
to the file:
/etc/services
and the following line:
catiav5run stream tcp nowait root /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/bin/

CATSysDemon
to the file:
/etc/initd.conf
Administrator Setting Environments

When running a session at the end of the installation procedure (as administrator),
administrator settings are created in the /CATSettings and /CATTemp directories.
Nodelock Licensing Directories
The Version 5 installation procedure on UNIX sets up on your workstation a filetree for
storing IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM) nodelock licenses, that is, if LUM
is not already installed on your workstation. This is needed to manage nodelock
licensing.
The nodelock file is created by default in:
All end users can now log onto the same workstation and run a Version 5
session, because the environment created at installation is global.
What Is An Environment?
What is an Environment?
An environment is a set of runtime environment variables in a text file. Each variable
points to a path searched by the software when you start a session.
Note that the default installation path can be:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19 (Windows XP Pro)

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19 (64-bit code on Windows XP
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19 (32-bit code on Windows XP
Commands used for illustration purposes are for 32-bit Windows XP Pro.
All Version 5 product lines share the same environment management mechanism.
For example, on Windows, the CATDocView environment variable is set by default, for
32-bit Windows XP Pro, to:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19doc
meaning that the online documentation files are installed in the folder C:\Program
Files\Dassault Systemes\B19doc. When you want to access the online
documentation, the software will look for the files in this location.
The term environment also includes its graphical representation, in other words how it
is represented to the user on the user's desktop.
On Windows, for example, the environment is created in a text file located by default
in:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\DassaultSystemes

\CATEnv
and the environment file name is:

CATIA.V5R19.B19.txt
Note: the environment file name does not necessarily contain a "." (dot).
You can also specify during the installation procedure the location of environment files
on both Windows and UNIX.
What are Global and User Environments?

A global environment can only be created by a Windows administrator, or the root
userid on UNIX. For example, the default environment created at installation is a
global environment: "global" means that it is visible to and can be used by all users on
the computer on which it has been set up.
Global environments can only be created, edited or deleted by a Windows

administrator, or the root userid on UNIX.
A user environment is visible to and can be used and manipulated (customized or

deleted) only by the user who created it.
How are Environments Managed?

Environments are managed:
● by the installation procedure, which creates a default global environment;
the default environments created at installation on each platform are described in
About the Environment Created on Windows and About the Environment Created on
UNIX respectively.
● using the catiaenv command (Windows) or CATIAENV command (UNIX) to run the
Environment Editor, a GUI-based tool which creates, edits, copies and deletes
environments
● using the setcatenv command: this command creates and edits user and global
environments (if you are administrator or root, you can edit the default global
environment)
● using the delcatenv command: this command deletes environments
● using the lscatenv command (to list the names of environments)
● using the chcatenv command (to edit one or more environment variables)
● using the readcatenv command (to read the variables of an environment).
Please use the official tools provided to manage environments. Do not attempt to edit
the environment file using a text editor.
What Does Customizing an Environment Mean?

Customizing your runtime environment means providing different values for the
runtime variables in your default environment, or setting up new environments.
For example, you may install the online documentation at a location different from the
default location. If this is the case, you need to specify where the documentation files
are located by modifying the value for the CATDocView variable. This is an example of
what we mean by customizing your runtime environment.
When customizing runtime environments, you can:
● create new environments
● edit existing environments
● copy existing environments
● delete environments
but you cannot rename existing variables.

You can ONLY create, modify and delete LOCAL environments: the creation,
modification and deletion of REMOTE environments is not supported. This means that if
you customize a local environment, and the same environment exists on other
computers, you have to edit the environments on all of those computers if you want
the environments to be identical.
Locales Whose Use with Version 5 has been Validated

The language locales whose use with Version 5 has been validated are listed in your
Infrastructure Users Guide, sections "Starting a Session in a Language Other than
English on Windows" and "Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on
UNIX".
List of Official Runtime Variables

The runtime environment variables for all product lines are listed in the table below:
Variable Name Description Introduced in

Release..
PATH Executable code search path V5R1
LIBPATH Library search path (AIX) V5R1
LD_LIBRARY_PATH Library search path (Solaris) V5R1
SHLIB_PATH Library search path (HP-UX) V5R1
CATInstallPath Installation path V5R1
CATDLLPath DLL search path (internal use only); V5R1
on Windows, DLLs are loaded from
the directories referenced by the
variables CATDLLPath and PATH
(Windows mechanism).
CATICPath Search path for product V5R1
identification (internal use)
CATCommandPath Command search path V5R1
CATDictionaryPath Library dictionary search path V5R1
CATDocView Online documentation search path V5R1
CATReffilesPath Reference file search path V5R1
CATFontPath Font search path V5R1
CATGalaxyPath Search path for User Galaxy online V5R1
information files
CATGraphicPath Graphic and icon search path V5R1
CATMsgCatalogPath Application message file search path V5R1
CATKnowledgePath Knowledge search path indicating V5R16
the location where Knowledge
resources have to be searched for
while using an application. It can
point to a concatenation of
directories containing the
knowledge Structure.
CATFeatureCatalogPath .OSM file search path V5R2
CATDefaultCollectionStandard Default standard collection path V5R9
CATStartupPath Sample file search path V5R1
CATW3ResourcesPath ENOVIA Portal search path pointing ENOVIA V5R4
to HTTP resources visible to ENOVIA
Portal clients; set by default to
CATInstallPath/docs
CATReconcilePath file path where the Reconciliator will
find customization definition for
Criterion or Global Set
CATReferenceSettingPath Default reference setting search V5R1
path; also used to store settings
locked by the administrator
CATUserSettingPath Permanent user setting search path V5R1
CATCollectionStandard Standard collection path V5R9
CATTemp Temporary user setting search path V5R1
CATMetasearchPath ENOVIA 3d com search path ENOVIA V5R4
pointing to location where ENOVIA
3d com MetaSearch stores data
required for metasearch engine
operation.
CATW3PublishPath ENOVIA Portal search path pointing ENOVIA V5R4
to location for storing HTML
documents created by the ENOVIA
Portal Snapshot command.
CATSharedWorkbookPath Points to shared workbooks for ENOVIA V5R8
ENOVIA Portal
CATErrorLog Error log search path: points to the V5R1
default files error.log, SessionInfo
and AbendTrace files. The syntax is,
for example, on Windows:
CATErrorLog=%CATTemp%\error.
log
The error log file will be:
%CATTemp%\error.log
You can deactivate the creation of

error.log, SessionInfo and
AbendTrace files by setting
CATErrorLog to the special value
OFF (UPPERCASE only) like this:
CATErrorLog=OFF
CATReport Conversion trace report location V5R2
USER_HOME Points to home directory of generic ENOVIA V5R12
user for server-type ENOVIA V5
VPM environments
DB2INSTANCE DB2 environment variable (for
server-type environments only)
TNS_ADMIN TNS environment variable (for
server-type environments only)
ORACLE_HOME ORACLE environment variable (for
server-type environments only); on
Windows, set by the PLMDBSetup
process
For the DB2INSTANCE,
TNS_ADMIN and ORACLE_HOME
variables, in an installation
using CATIA and VPM
interoperability, you should
create these variables using the
Environment Editor, depending
on which database you are
using.
ORA_NLS33 ORACLE environment variable (for
server-type environments only); on
Windows, set by the PLMDBSetup
process
JAVA_HOME_aix_a Java runtime path specified at ENOVIA V5R8
JAVA_HOME_hpux_a= installation
JAVA_HOME_solaris_a
JAVA_HOME
CLASSPATH_JDBC_aix_a= JDBC classpath for ENOVIA V5 VPM ENOVIA V5R8
CLASSPATH_JDBC_hpux_a= server
CLASSPATH_JDBC_solaris_a
CLASSPATH
Customizing Your Environment on Windows
This task explains how to customize an existing environment on Windows.

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19 (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19 (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
Commands used for illustration purposes are for 32-bit Windows XP Pro.
1. Select the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor V5R19 command,
where "MyProductLine" is:
CATIA
The environment editor belongs to the common suite of Version 5 administration tools. All the different examples in
this section procedure step you through the customization of a CATIA environment, for illustration purposes. The
steps are the same for customizing DELMIA, ENOVIA DMU Navigator, ENOVIA V5 VPM and ENOVIA 3d com
environments.
You can also start the environment editor by running the command:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin\catiaenv (Windows XP Pro)

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64\code\bin\catiaenv (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin\catiaenv (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional
x64 Edition)
The Environment Editor appears, and looks like this:
Note that the list of existing environments is displayed in the Environment name list. The list will contain all the environments
detected in the current environment folder. The first environment is selected by default.
When an environment in the list is selected, click the right mouse to display a contextual menu of environment manipulation
commands.
The Mode field indicates one of two possible values:
● User: indicates that the environment was set up using your userid, is visible to you and can only be accessed by you (you cannot
see anybody else's user environments)
● Global: indicates that the environment was set up by somebody belonging to the Administrators group, or who has the privileges
assigned to the Administrators group (you can see all the global environments on your computer): this is what you will see after
an initial installation on your computer.
Only an administrator can modify global environments.
This means that you will only see in the Environment name list the names of environments you created, or which are common to
all users. You can only edit environments which belong to you. Furthermore, if you select a global environment as end user, you
will be able to display an environment, but not edit it.
The Last Modified field specifies the date and time the environment was last modified.
The Environment storage directories area displays the current storage location for both global and user environments. This
setting is the location you specified during installation.
2. To reset environment storage
directories, select the
Options > Set User Storage
Directory or the Options > Set
Global Storage Directory
command to display a file explorer,
then explore your filetree to select
the directory, and click OK.
Any environments created from now

on will be stored in these locations.
You can use the storage directory

settings to filter the list of
environment names and types
displayed. For example, if you
created both global and user
environments in the same user
storage directory, selecting the user
storage directory will now only
display the user environments, and
not the global environments.
3. To display the variables for any environment, click the environment name.
For example, click the CATIA.V5R19.B19 environment which is the name of the default global environment set up at installation.
This will be the only environment name in the list after a default installation. However, once you create new environments, these will
also be displayed in the list.
The variables and their values are displayed:

● the variable name is displayed on the left
● and the value (path) for the corresponding variable is displayed to the right.
4. Click a variable name in the list.
The variable name and its corresponding value are highlighted:

For example, the default path for the CATDocView variable in our example is:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19doc
However, you may have installed the online documentation in a different folder.
5. If you are authorized to edit the variable, click the variable value to be able to edit it, then type in the new value.
For example, you would type in the new path for the variable CATDocView. The value of the variable is reset in the Environment
Variables field.
6. Click OK.
CSIDL Values in Environment Variable Paths

There are a number of folders that are used frequently by applications, but may not have the same name or location on any given
system. For example, the system folder is "C:\Windows" on Windows XP. CSIDL values provide a unique system-independent way to
identify these special folders.
Consequently, CSIDL values are now part of paths pointed to by environment variables. The variables concerned are:
● CATUserSettingPath
● CATTemp
● CATReport
● CATErrorLog
● CATMetasearchPath
● CATW3PublishPath
What Is the DSKEY_TMPDIR Key?

The TMP and TEMP variables pointing to the current temporary file path on your computer are not necessarily activated.
The DSKEY_TMPDIR key points to the current temporary file path on your computer which is obtained as follows:
The software does not verify that the directory specified by the TMP or TEMP environment variables exists. The temporary file path is
obtained as follows:
● the path specified by the TMP environment variable.
● the path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined.
● the Windows directory, if both TMP and TEMP are not defined.
To create an environment using the New command

This task explains how to create a new environment using the Environment Editor.
1. Select the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor command, where "MyProductLine" is:
CATIA
2. Select the Environment > New command to display the following dialog box:
3. Enter the name of the environment to be created.

4. Enter the path of your installation folder.
The default installation folder path is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64 (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
5. If you logged on as administrator, enter the environment mode.
The type can be user or global (global is available only for administrators only). If you are logged on as a normal end user, the type
is set automatically to User.
6. Set the product line by choosing your product line from the list:
● CATIA
● ENOVIA V5 VPM
● ENOVIA 3d com
● ENOVIA DMU Navigator
● DELMIA
● DELMIA Automation.
7. Check the "Server" option if the environment is to be a server-type environment. This concerns ENOVIA V5 VPM and ENOVIA 3d
com only.
8. Check the Add Desktop Icon option if you want to create a desktop shortcut and an entry in the appropriate Version 5 location
of the Start > Programs menu.
9. Check the Overwrite existing environment option to overwrite an existing environment.
10. Click OK to create the environment.
The environment is created in:
C:\Documents and Settings\User\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv
where "user" is "All Users" for a global environment, or "myuserid" for a user environment.
To copy an existing environment using the New from... command

This task explains how to create a new environment using the Environment Editor by copying an existing environment.
1. Select the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor command, where "MyProductLine" is:
CATIA
2. Select an environment and click Yes to confirm you want to modify it.
3. Select the Environment > New from... command to display the following dialog box:
4. Customize the name of the environment to be created.
5. Enter the path of your installation folder.
The default installation folder path is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64 (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
6. Check Add a new path to this environment and specify where to insert the path (before or after the install path) using the
appropriate options if required.
7. If you logged on as administrator, enter the environment mode.
The type can be user or global (global is available only for administrators only). If you are logged on as a normal end user, the type
is set automatically to "user".
8. Set the product line by choosing your product line from the list:
● CATIA
● ENOVIA V5 VPM
● ENOVIA 3d com
● ENOVIA DMU Navigator
● DELMIA
● DELMIA Automation.
9. Check the Add Desktop Icon option if you want to create a desktop shortcut and an entry in the appropriate Version 5 location
of the Start > Programs menu.
10. Check the Overwrite existing environment option to overwrite an existing environment.
11. Click OK to create the environment.
The environment is created in:
C:\Documents and Settings\User\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv
where "user" is "All Users" for a global environment, or "myuserid" for a user environment.
Creating and deleting user-defined variables, and editing variables using the
contextual menu
This task explains how to create and delete user-defined variables, and edit any variable, using the contextual menu.
1. Select the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor V5R19 command, where "MyProductLine" is:
CATIA
2. To display the variables for any environment, click the environment name and confirm that you want to modify it.
3. Without selecting a variable, right-click on the variable list to see the contextual commands:
● New Variable
● Delete Variable
● Edit Variable
4. To create a user-defined variable, select the New Variable command to display the Variable Editor dialog box:
and enter the variable name, its value, and a comment if required, then click OK.
5. To delete a user-defined variable, select the variable, then select the Delete Variable command, then click Yes to delete the
variable.
Note that you can delete only user-defined variables created using the New Variable command, and not official variables.
6. To edit any variable, select the variable, select the Edit Variable command to display the Variable Editor dialog box:
then enter its new value and click OK. Note that the variable name and comment field are not available if you are modifying an
official variable. However, the name, value and comment are editable if you are editing a user-defined variable only.
7. Do not forget to save your changes by selecting the Save command, also in the contextual menu.
To create or customize an environment using the setcatenv command

You can also customize environments using the setcatenv command. This command lets you create both user and global
environments.
The command is located in:

C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
The full list of options for the command:
setcatenv
is as follows:
Operating Environment Options

These options specify the general operating environment:
● -cs: specifies the name of the product line for which the environment is being created;
The value is CATIA (default) for the CATIA product line.
● -e: environment file name ; the "-e" option is mandatory

● -d: specifies an existing directory in which the environment file will be created (it does not create the directory if it does not
exist);
if you do not specify "-d", the environment will be created in:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv
where "user" is "All Users" for a global environment, or "myuserid" for a user environment
● -p: specifies the installation folder, and is mandatory (by default, it is set to the default installation folder: C:\Program Files
\Dassault Systemes\B19)
● -server: creates an environment suited for server type environments. The CATUserSettingPath variable value differs between a
server environment and an interactive environment. The "-e" option is mandatory when specifying server environments, and
always overwrites an existing environment with the same name. Consequently, system administrator rights are required for using
this option
● -cf: specifies the name or path of an existing environment from which you create a new environment.
For example, the command:
setcatenv -e MyNewEnv -cf CATIA.V5R19.B19
creates the new environment MyNewEnv from a copy of CATIA.V5R19.B19.
This allows you to inherit previous customizations without having to recreate them in the new environment.
For example, the CATReferenceSettingPath variable is frequently used to store settings locked by the administrator, and may
concatenate several different levels of settings. Copying an existing environment saves you time because you do not having to
customize the new environment.
Note that if you do not use the "-cf" option, all the variables are set with their default values in the new environment. If only the
name is specified in the "-cf " option, the template environment is searched in the default storage directories (user or global).
Behavior Options
These options determine a type of behavior:
● -v yes/no:
❍ -v yes (default): verbose mode
❍ -v no: non-verbose mode.
● -new yes/no:
❍ yes ( default): an environment with the same name (if it exists) is overwritten
❍ no: if an environment has the same name, this time it is not overwritten (nothing happens).
However, note that if no environment using the same name is detected, a new environment is created in both cases (whether you
use "yes" or "no").
● -tools: sets up the Tools menu containing the Environment Editor V5R19, Nodelock Key Management V5R19, Settings
Management V5R19, Software Management V5R19, Batch Management V5R19 and Printers V5R19 commands.
This is an exclusive option: run this command once like this:
setcatenv -tools -cs MyProductLine
● -desktop yes/no: sets up the desktop representation of the environment, if it does not already exist. The default is "yes".
Equivalent to "-icon yes" "-menu yes".
● -icon yes/no: creates a startup icon on the desktop; default is "yes"
● -menu yes/no: creates a startup icon in the Start menu; default is "yes"
Action Options
These options specify a particular creation or modification action:
● -a user/global: specifies whether you are creating a user or global environment. The default value is "user". Note that you need
administrator rights to create a global environment.
The catenv.log log file logs environment creation and modification operations. The log file is created in the temporary folder in one
of the following locations:
● the path specified by the TMP environment variable
● the path specified by the TEMP environment variable, if TMP is not defined
● the current directory, if both TMP and TEMP are not defined.
Creating an environment using the setcatenv command sets up the following environment:
● sets up Start > Programs > MyProductLine menu by adding the shortcut for your environment
● and creates the shortcut for your environment on the desktop.
If you create a new environment, you can start a session using the new environment with the command:
cnext -env my_new_environment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
where "my_new_environment" is the name of the environment you created, and "MyEnvDirectory" is the name of the environment
directory.
To delete an environment using the delcatenv command

Use the command:
delcatenv
● -d: specifies the directory containing the environment; the default is CSIDL_APPDATA\CATEnv.
● -a user/global: specifies whether you are deleting a user or global environment. The default value is "user". Note that you need
administrator rights to delete a global environment.
● -desktop: if it exists, deletes its graphical representation, in other words, how it is represented to the user on the user's desktop
(desktop shortcut, shortcut in Start menu, etc.). The default is "yes".
● -tools: deletes the Tools menu containing the Batch Management V5R19, Environment Editor V5R19, Nodelock Key
Management V5R19, Settings Management V5R19, Software Management V5R19, and Printers V5R19 commands.
This is an exclusive option: run this command once like this:
delcatenv -tools -cs MyProductLine
● -cs [CATIA|ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator|ENOVIA_VPM|DELMIA|DELMIA Automation|ENOVIA_3d_com|
ENOVIA_VPM_Navigator]: specifies the product line whose desktop tools you want to delete; the default is CATIA.
● -v yes/no:
❍ -v no: non-verbose mode
● -server: deletes an environment suited for server type environments. The CATUserSettingPath variable value differs between a
server environment and an interactive environment. The "-e" option is mandatory when specifying server environments. System
administrator rights are required for using this option.
Keep in mind that deleting an environment using the delcatenv command deletes all the registry entries.
To list environments using the lscatenv command

Run the lscatenv command to list the names of all environments on your computer:
lscatenv
● -a user/global: lists user or global environments. You must specify one or the other.
To read environments using the readcatenv command

Run the readcatenv command to read the environment variables in a specified environment:
readcatenv
● -e: environment file name
● -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. You must specify one or the other.
● -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be read; if you omit "-var", all variables will be displayed
To modify environments using the chcatenv command

Run the chcatenv command to edit one or more environment variables:
chcatenv
● -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. You must specify one or the other.
● -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be modified. The following syntax is allowed:
CATVariable = new_path
CATVariable = %CATVariable%; new_path
CATVariable = new_path; %CATVariable%
If the path includes blanks, include the whole string in " ".
● -new: creates a new user-defined variable (specified by the "-var" option) with its corresponding value
Example:
chcatenv -e CATIA.V5R19.B19 -e global -var TOTO="%"TEMP"%" -new
● -del: deletes a user-defined variable

● -comment "text": adds a comment only to variables you created; the text must be added between " "
Examples
Running this command... Displays this:
readcatenv -e CATIA.V5R19.B19 CATInstallPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a
-a global CATDLLPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin
CATICPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\productIC
CATCommandPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\command
CATDictionaryPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\dictionary
CATDocView=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\doc
CATReffilesPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\reffiles
etc....

-a global -var CATInstallPath

-d C:\Documents and Settings
\user\Application Data
\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv -var
CATInstallPath
chcatenv -e CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a CATInstallPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a;C:\Temp

user -var CATInstallPath=%
CATInstallPath%;C:\Temp
chcatenv -e CATIA.V5R19.B19 - CATInstallPath=C:\Temp

a user -var CATInstallPath=C:
\Temp
chcatenv -e CATIA.V5R19.B19 - NewVar=C:\Temp

a user -var NewVar=C:\Temp -
new
lscatenv -d C:\Documents and CATIA.V5R16.B16.txt

Settings\user\Application Data CATIA.V5R19.B19.txt
Environment creation and manipulation commands are logged in the file catenv.log.
The feedback obtained when using all the administration commands from the command line is now output to the current command
prompt window.
To Set Up Two Environments With Different Licensing Settings

A situation may arise in which you have two different configurations installed on your computer, and you want to use both
configuration licenses.
Each time you use one of the configurations, your licensing settings are stored in the same place. This means that when you start
"Configuration 1", acquire the corresponding license, then exit your session, your licensing settings are saved. When you start
"Configuration 2", your previous licensing settings are retrieved, so you must acquire the new license. Each time you exit, the
previous licensing settings are overwritten by the new licensing settings.
This means that, when you use different configurations alternately, you have to continually reacquire the corresponding license each
time you start.
You can avoid this problem by editing each environment. Let's assume that the two configurations are installed on an Intel computer
running Windows, and that you are authorized to edit each environment. The two variables of interest are:
● CATReferenceSettingPath
● CATUserSettingPath
In the default environments created, let's assume each variable has the following values:
Environment 1
CATReferenceSettingPath C:\Admin_License_Settings
CATUserSettingPath %CSIDL_APPDATA%\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings
For example, on Windows, CATUserSettingPath usually points to:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings
where "user" is your userid.
Environment 2
CATReferenceSettingPath C:\Admin_License_Settings
CATUserSettingPath %CSIDL_APPDATA%\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings
Note that, for the moment, the path pointed to by CATUserSettingPath is the same in both cases. Your licensing settings are saved
here each time you use a configuration.
1. Select the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor V5R19 command,
where "MyProductLine" is:
CATIA
2. Edit "Environment 1" and reset the value for the CATUserSettingPath variable as follows:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATSettings_Config1

3. Edit "Environment 2" and reset the value for the CATUserSettingPath variable as follows:

4. Start configuration 1, acquire the license and exit the session.
Your license settings will now be stored in:

5. Start configuration 2, acquire the license and exit the session.

You will be able to use each configuration alternately, and without having to reacquire the corresponding license each time.
However, you must not use the Tools > Options command.
Customizing Your Environment on UNIX
This task explains how to customize an existing environment on UNIX.
To create or customize an environment using the

catiaenv command
There is now an interactive tool available for customizing values for runtime
environment variables: the catiaenv command.
Run the command as follows:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run CATIAENV
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
The Environment Editor appears. The user interface and functions are the same as on
Windows. For more information, refer to the Windows description of the Environment
Editor.
To create or customize an environment using the

setcatenv command
The setcatenv command is available for customizing environments.
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run setcatenv
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
setcatenv
is as follows:
Operating Environment Options

These options specify the general operating environment:
● -cs: specifies the name of the product line for which the environment is being
created.
The value is CATIA (default) for the CATIA product line.

● -d: specifies an existing directory in which the environment file will be created
($HOME/CATEnv by default); the directory is not created if it does not exist
● -p: specifies the installation directory, and is mandatory (by default, set to the
default installation directory: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19)
● -server: creates an environment suited for server type environments. The
CATUserSettingPath variable value differs between a server environment and an
interactive environment. The "-e" option is mandatory when specifying server
environments, and always overwrites an existing environment with the same name.
Consequently, system administrator rights are required for using this option.
● -cf: specifies the name or path of an existing environment from which you create a
new environment.
For example, the command:
setcatenv -e MyNewEnv -cf CATIA.V5R19.B19
creates the new environment MyNewEnv from a copy of CATIA.V5R19.B19.
This allows you to inherit previous customizations without having to recreate them in
the new environment.
For example, the CATReferenceSettingPath variable is frequently used to store
settings locked by the administrator, and may concatenate several different levels of
settings. Copying an existing environment saves you time because you do not having
to customize the new environment.
Note that if you do not use the "-cf" option, all the variables are set with their default
values in the new environment. If only the name is specified in the "-cf " option, the
template environment is searched in the default storage directories (user or global).
Behavior Options
These options determine a type of behavior when creating or updating environments:
● -v yes/no:
● -new yes/no:
❍ yes (default): an environment with the same name (if it exists) is overwritten
❍ no: if an environment has the same name, this time it is not overwritten (nothing
happens)
However, note that if no environment using the same name is detected, a new
environment is created in both cases (whether you use "yes" or "no").
● -desktop yes/no: sets up the desktop representation of the environment, if it does
not already exist. The default is "yes".
Action Options
These options specify a particular creation or modification action:
● -a user/global: specifies whether you are creating a user or global environment.
The default value is "user". Note that you need administrator rights to create a
global environment.
● -regserver: registers the application on the workstation by adding or modifying a
certain number of files required to support dragging and dropping of documents
inside the desktop environment, and associates the behavior when double-clicking
Version 5 documents. This needs to be performed for each product line.
This option creates the following files for the CDE Desktop:
❍ $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIAFiles.dt (action
description file for CATIA document types)
❍ $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/icons/C (contains icons for
document types)
❍ $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/CATIA/dt/appconfig/types/C/CATIA.dt (action description
file for CATIA directory in the CDE desktop)
If a base configuration is already installed, this option serves no useful purpose since
the desktop environment is already present. Only use the "-regserver" option if no
base configuration is already installed. It should be used after creating a reference
environment, and can be used only by an administrator.
Any environment created by either an administrator or an end user using the
setcatenv command is a user (not global) environment.
What Is the Impact On My Workstation?
Creating a global environment GLOBAL1 and a user environment USER1 using the
setcatenv command creates the following files:
$HOME/CATEnv
Default environment:
CATIA.V5R19.B19.txt
Global environment:
GLOBAL1.txt
The name of this environment is specified by using the "-e" option
User environment:
USER1.txt
The name of this environment is specified by using the "-e" option.
On AIX, HP-UX, SUN systems running the CDE desktop
The setcatenv command creates in your $HOME directory the following filetree:
$HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/MyProductLine/dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/
MyProductLine
/etc/dt/appconfig/appmanager/C/MyProductLine
Contains files required for graphic representation of the default global environment and
global environment in the CDE desktop:
CATIA.V5R19.B19
GLOBAL1
$HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/MyProductLine/dt/appconfig/types/C
/etc/dt/appconfig/types/C
Action description file for default global environment and global environment icon:
CATIA.V5R19.B19.dt
GLOBAL1.dt
Action description file for MyProductLine directory:
CATIA.dt
(file created by the option "-regserver"; the file name depends on the product line).
Action description file for MyProductLine document types:
CATIAFiles.dt
(file created by the option -regserver; identical for all product lines).
$HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/MyProductLine/dt/appconfig/icons/C
/etc/dt/appconfig/icons/C
Icons for MyProductLine document types.
Files created by the option -regserver; file names depend on the product line.
$HOME/.dt/appmanager/My_MyProductLine
File required for graphic representation of user environment in he CDE desktop:
USER1
$HOME/.dt/types
Action description file for user environment icon:
USER1.dt
Note: the files MyProductLine.dt and CATIAFiles.dt are not present in this directory
because they are already present in: $HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/MyProductLine/dt/
appconfig/types/C
/etc/dt/appconfig/types/C
$HOME/.dt/icons
The MyProductLine icons are not present in this directory because they are already
present in:
$HOME/CATEnv/CATCDE/MyProductLine/dt/appconfig/icons/C
/etc/dt/appconfig/icons/C
Application Manager Cabinet
Default global environment and global environment icon:
CATIA V5R19
Global environment icon:
GLOBAL1
User environment icon:
My_MyProductLine : USER1
Note
You do not see the icon immediately. To display the icon, you must click the Application
manager icon on the CDE front panel, go into the Desktop Tools cabinet, then double-
click the Reload Applications icon. You can also log off and log on to display the icon.
Impact of Multiple Brand Installations on the Same Workstation in the
CDE Environment
If you have multiple brand installations on the same workstation, make sure that all the
global environments related to a specfic product line (CATIA, ENOVIA DMU, DELMIA,
etc...) are stored in the same CATEnv directory. The CDE file related to the
environment file is stored in the CATEnv directory. If a DELMIA global environment is
created using CATIAENV and stored in the CATIA CATEnv directory, the CDE will display
the newly created DELMIA environment in the application manager window, but the
icon created by the DELMIA installation will not be displayed anymore.
To delete an environment using the delcatenv

command
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run delcatenv
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
delcatenv
is as follows:
● -d: specifies the directory containing the environment file to be deleted ($HOME/
CATEnv by default)
● -a user/global: specifies whether you are deleting a user or global environment.
The default value is "user". Note that you need administrator rights to delete a global
environment.
● -desktop: if it exists, deletes its graphical representation, in other words, how it is
represented to the user on the user's desktop. The default is "yes".
● -cs [CATIA|ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator|ENOVIA V5 VPM|DELMIA|
ENOVIA_3d_com]: specifies the product line whose desktop tools you want to
delete; the default is CATIA.
● -v yes/no:
● -unregserver: unregisters Version 5 in the CDE Desktop, and deletes the

appropriate desktop files set up by the "-regserver" option. The effect is that
dragging and dropping of Version 5 documents inside the desktop environment, and
the behavior associated when double-clicking Version 5 documents, are deactivated.
This option must be used on its own like this:
delcatenv -unregserver -cs MyProductLine
and once only on a given workstation because it unregisters all Version 5
installations on the same workstation.
This option is an integral part of the installation process, but must be used with
caution if you have more than one Version 5 installation on the same workstation.
For example, you may have two installations, A and B (you first installed A, then B).
Then, you decide to uninstall B. If you run the commands like this and in this order:
delcatenv -unregserver
delcatenv -e EnvB
then remove the code directory for installation B, installation A will continue to work,
but none of the features available via the desktop (dragging and dropping, double-
clicking Version 5 documents, etc.) will work: this behavior is common to all Version
5 applications, and was deactivated when unregistering.
If you have only one Version 5 installation, first unregister Version 5 for each
product line, then delete the runtime environment and finally remove the code.
The "- unregserver" option can be used only by an administrator (root).
For more information, refer to Enabling User Access to the Software Over the
Network.
● -server: deletes an environment suited for server type environments. The
CATUserSettingPath variable value differs between a server environment and an
interactive environment. The "-e" option is mandatory when specifying server
environments. System administrator rights are required for using this option.
To list environments using the lscatenv command

Run the lscatenv command to list the names of all environments on your computer:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run lscatenv
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
lscatenv
is as follows:
● -a user/global: lists user or global environments. You must specify one or the
other.
● -d: specifies the directory containing the environment
To read environments using the readcatenv command

Run the readcatenv command to read the environment variables in a specified
environment.
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run readcatenv
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
readcatenv
is as follows:
● -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. You must specify one or the
other.
● -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be read; if you omit "-var", all variables
will be displayed
To modify environments using the chcatenv command

Run the chcatenv command to edit one or more environment variables.
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run chcatenv
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
chcatenv
is as follows:
● -a user/global: specifies user or global environment. You must specify one or the
other.
● -var: specifies a variable whose value is to be modified. The following syntax is
allowed:
CATVariable = new_path
CATVariable = $CATVariable: new_path
CATVariable = new_path:$CATVariable
If the path includes blanks, include the whole string in " ".
Note: if you are running this command inside a shell, we recommend that you
add a "\" (backslash) before each variable preceded by the "$" character to
avoid the values of referenced variables from being replaced by their real
values.
For example:
CATVariable = \$CATVariable: new_path
● -new: creates a new user-defined variable (specified by the "-var" option) with its
corresponding value
Example:
chcatenv -e CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a global -var TOTO=\$TEMP -new
● -del: deletes a user-defined variable
● -comment: adds a comment only to the newly created variables
Examples
Running this command... Displays this:
(where "OS" varies for the UNIX platform)
./catstart -run "readcatenv -e CATInstallPath=/usr/DassaultSystemes/
CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a global" B19/OS
CATDLLPath=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/
OS/code/bin
CATICPath=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/
OS/code/productIC
CATCommandPath=/usr/DassaultSystemes/
B19/OS/code/command
CATDictionaryPath=/usr/
DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/
dictionary
CATDocView=/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/
OS/doc
CATReffilesPath=/usr/DassaultSystemes/
B19/OS/reffiles
etc....

CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a global -var B19/OS
CATInstallPath"
CATIA.V5R19.B19 -d /CATEnv -var B19/OS
CATInstallPath"
./catstart -run "chcatenv -e CATInstallPath=/usr/DassaultSystemes/

CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a user -var B19/OS:/tmp
CATInstallPath=\\\
$CATInstallPath:/tmp"
./catstart -run "chcatenv -e CATInstallPath=/tmp
CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a user -var
CATInstallPath=/tmp"
./catstart -run "chcatenv -e NewVar=/tmp
CATIA.V5R19.B19 -a user -var
NewVar=/tmp -new"
./catstart -run "lscatenv -d / CATIA.V5R16.B16.txt

CATEnv" CATIA.V5R19.B19.txt
Environment creation and manipulation commands are logged in the file $HOME/
CATENV.log.
The feedback obtained when using all the administration commands from the command
line is now output to the current command prompt window.
Running a Tool with the Correct Environment When

Multiple Product Lines Are Installed Together
In certain cases, you may have installed several products in the same installation
directory:
● an ENOVIA V5 VPM server
● CATIA
● 3d com.
All of these products can install, by default, a runtime environment in the same
location. If you run a tool using the catstart command without specifying which
environment you want to use, the last environment installed will be executed.
Consequently, make sure you use the "-env" option to specify which runtime
environment you want to run.
For example, if you want to run an ENOVIA V5 VPM tool:
./catstart -env myenv -run mytool
where "myenv" is the environment for your product, and "mytool" is the tool you are
running.
For example, if you want to run the VPMPeopleEdit tool, which is an ENOVIA V5 VPM
tool, use a command like this:
./catstart -env ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19 -run VPMPeopleEdit

Distributing Version 5 on Windows
About Distributing Version 5 on Windows
Distributing the Software To a Single Client Computer
Distributing the Software To a Client Using the RCMD Command
Accessing the Software From a Thin Client
Distributing the Software in Compressed Form
Distributing a Service Pack From an Archive File on Windows
Distributing Version 5 on UNIX
About Distributing Version 5 on UNIX
Setting Up the Server
Distributing the Software To A Client Workstation
Enabling User Access to the Software Over the Network
Distributing a Service Pack From an Archive File on UNIX
Licensing Tools
Enrolling Nodelock Licenses After the Installation
Reserving Static Licenses Using the License Manager
Reserving Shareable Product Licenses Dynamically
Running in Demo Mode
Enabling Concurrent Offline Licensing
What Is Concurrent Offline Licensing?

Concurrent offline licensing allows users to extract a concurrent license from a license server for a certain number of
days and to use it on a laptop disconnected (or not) from the network, and applies to CATIA, ENOVIA DMU or DELMIA
(or RADE) software.
When the concurrent offline license is reserved for use, a license is installed on a laptop connected to the network. For
the duration of the reservation, the extracted license is considered as a nodelock license tied to the laptop. This license
is called an offline nodelocked license. Once the offline nodelocked license has been installed on the laptop, the laptop
can be disconnected from the network.
Once extracted, the license is no longer available from the license server. The license only becomes available once more
to other users when one of the following occurs:
● the reservation period expires
● the license is returned to the server from the laptop (end-users can return the license before the expiry date).
The maximum extraction duration is 30 days. License Use Management Runtime administrators can reduce this duration.
If a free standard concurrent license and a free concurrent offline license exist for the same product, and an end-user
requests a license for this product, the server will provide the standard concurrent license, so that the concurrent offline
license remains available for extraction.
Note that if you extract a license, you will not be able to run a release prior to V5R12 with that license.
Offline licensing is not supported if you use the LUM HAL (High-Availability Licensing) feature.
Note: The LUM driver required for offline licensing is not installed on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition.
Consequently, concurrent offline licensing is not supported, and the File > Extract and File > Restitute commands
are not available.
Software Prerequisites
Here are the software prerequisites for the laptop and the license server.
License Server
● Concurrent offline licenses can be enrolled and administered only on a server running IBM License Use Management
Runtime (LUM) Version 4.6.8 on either Windows or UNIX.
● The machine running the license server does not require Version 5 software.
Laptop
● Version 5 Release 19 General Availability level of CATIA, ENOVIA DMU or DELMIA (or RADE) software
● on all supported Windows platforms (32-bit or 64-bit)
● the laptop does not require any IBM License Use Management Runtime software, but must be configured as a LUM
client
● and a LUM driver has to be installed on the client.
Procedure
Implementing concurrent offline licensing involves the following steps which should be performed in the following order:
● on the license server
● then on the laptop.
On the License Server
1. Log onto the machine running the LUM license server as root (UNIX) or as administrator (Windows).
On Windows, you must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators
group.
The following steps referring to starting and stopping existing LUM servers and migration tasks do not apply if you
are installing LUM for the first time or on a different machine.
2. If you have already installed a previous version of LUM, go to the LUM installation directory.
3. Stop the license server using the command:
i4cfg -stop
4. Back up the data on the LUM server.
To do so, refer to the section "Using the Built-In Backup and Recovery Procedure" in "Chapter 7. Hints and Tips"
in the following manual: IBM License Use Management - Using License Use Management Runtime.
5. Install IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM) Version 4.6.7.
6. On Windows, perform the necessary license database migration steps.
Refer to the section "Installing after an Uninstallation", in section "Installing License Use Management Runtime on
Windows" in "Chapter 3. Installing License Use Management Runtime" in the following manual:
IBM License Use Management - Using License Use Management Runtime.
7. Migrate the concurrent network licenses into concurrent offline licenses.
To do so, you need to copy the i4_offline_mig tool from the LUM CD-ROM. This purpose-built command
migrates all concurrent licenses into concurrent offline licenses on the network license server.
It is similar to a normal concurrent license because, even after migration, it can continue to be used as a normal
concurrent license. Each time a new license is enrolled, and you want to use it as an offline license, you must use
the same command again to migrate the license.
The tool is located in a folder named after the operating system you are using. Copy the tool into the same LUM
installation directory from which you run your LUM commands (i4cfg, i4blt, ...). Change the execution rights on
the executable file to make sure that you will be able to run the tool.
Then, run the following command to migrate the licenses:
i4_offline_mig
After migration, the licenses will remain available, once the server has been restarted.
8. Restart the license server using the command:
i4cfg -start
9. Set up the concurrent offline license authorization rules.
The LUM administrator must set up rules to determine which users, groups of users and machines are authorized
to extract an offline concurrent license, and under which conditions.
For example, a password can be associated to each rule. By default, nobody is authorized to extract offline
licenses.
To do so, you use the Basic License Tool. Run the following command to start the Basic License Tool GUI:
i4blt
At this point, refer to the following manual: IBM License Use Management - Using License Use Management
Runtime.
In this manual the section: Scenario 15: Managing Concurrent-Offline Licenses, located in the chapter
Administering License Use Management Runtime, explains how to manage the use of concurrent-offline licenses.
This scenario shows you the different aspects involved in concurrent offline license management, for example:
❍ setting the maximum number of days a product can be reserved
❍ modifying authorization
❍ adding a password for the default authorization
❍ creating and modifying authorization records for a specific concurrent-offline license, allowing authorized users
or groups of users to take the license
❍ displaying details about the offline users, etc.
Once this phase has been completed, you are now ready to extract the offline licenses to the laptop.
Warning: if you are using ENOVIA V5 VPM or ENOVIA 3d com, these product brands use concurrent licenses only:
nodelock licenses are not supported. This means that, although nothing stops you physically from extracting licenses for
these brands, the extracted licenses will be useless. Consequently, do not extract concurrent-offline licenses for ENOVIA
V5 VPM or ENOVIA 3d com.
On the Laptop
1. Check that your laptop is connected to the network.

2. Check you have write access to the folder containing the nodelock file and to the nodelock file itself.
3. Make sure that the LUM client is correctly configured and points to the machine running the LUM 4.6.7 license
server from which you are going to extract the license.
4. Select the Start > Programs > CATIA V5R19 (or ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator V5R19, or DELMIA
V5R19) > Tools > Nodelock Key Management V5R19 command.
The "Nodelock License Manager" tool appears.

5. Using the Nodelock Key Management tool, select the File > Extract command.
The following dialog box appears, listing the concurrent offline licenses located on the license server:
You can select one or several licenses to extract.
Before you extract the license, you can reset the license duration to extract the license for a lower duration than
the one authorized. To do so, click the appropriate field, then click it again and enter a new value (30 days
maximum).
In certain cases, you may attempt to set a value greater than the value registered for that license on the LUM
server. You will be informed if this is the case, and must reset an appropriate value accordingly.
In our example, the MD2 license will expire in 5 days.
If the LUM administrator set a password, you must enter the password. Even if you select several licenses for
extraction, there will still be only one password. After validation, the license(s) is(are) extracted.
You cannot extract a license if the same license already exists as a nodelock license (either standard nodelock or
offline nodelock) and with the same serial number, if applicable.
Let's assume that you want to extract a license for the MD2 configuration which you have installed on your
laptop. Note that you can extract several licenses if required.
6. Select the license MD2, then click the Extract button.
A message popup will confirm that the license was successfully extracted. You can then click the OK button in the
message box. Once the license has been extracted, it is no longer available on the license server for network
users. The new status of the license can be tracked on the license server using the Basic License Tool.
Extracting an offline license creates the nodelock file on your laptop, or updates it if it already exists. If you select
the File > Read command, you will see the offline license for MD2:
Offline nodelock licenses are identified in blue when listed using the Nodelock Key Management tool.
7. To test that you can use the license offline, disconnect the laptop from the network.
8. Start a Version 5 session.
Check that you are using a nodelock license by selecting the Tools > Options... command, then the Licensing
tab.
If you were using a network license beforehand, the request for this license is still stored in your licensing
settings. Consequently, at this point, the License Manager will inform you that the requested license is not
available (you are now disconnected from the network) and prompt you to select the offline license and restart.
Once you have finally displayed the Licensing tab, you will then see the following (note that the tab does not
specifically identify the license as an offline nodelock license, but as a Local license):
You can now use your license for the duration specified when it was extracted. Once that duration has expired,
the license will no longer be available.
You may also return the license before the expiry date.
9. To do so, reconnect the laptop to the network, then make sure that the LUM client is correctly configured and
points to the machine running the LUM 4.6.7 license server to which you are going to return the license.
10. Select the Start > Programs > CATIA V5R19 (or ENOVIA_DMU_Navigator V5R19, or DELMIA
V5R19) > Tools > Nodelock Key Management V5R19 command.
11. Using the Nodelock Key Management tool, select the File > Restitute command.
The license you extracted is listed in a dialog box:
Note that you can return more than one offline license.
12. Select the license, then click the Restitute button.
A message popup will confirm that the license was successfully returned. You can then click the OK button in the
message box. Once the license has been returned, it becomes available once more on the license server for
network users.
The status of the license can be tracked on the license server using the LUM Basic License Tool.
Setting Up Network Licensing
Setting Up IBM License Use Management (LUM)
Setting Up Your Network License Server
Setting Up Your Network License Clients
Using High-Availability Licensing (HAL)
Vault Server and Client Concepts
What Is a Vault?
The vault is the repository in which all ENOVIA V5 documents (CATIA V4 models, CATIA V5 documents, text files, html files, cgr files,
etc.) are saved.
The use of the vault offers the following advantages:

● optimized data flow: the flow of data over the network is optimized; documents are not stored in the database because a database is
used mainly for querying operations. If the ENOVIA V5 documents were stored in a database, access to the documents in the
database would be too complicated, especially in the case of very large documents
● secured storage: the vault is a set of data repositories (directories on one or more disks) structured and organized like a database
and all documents in the vault are secured
● access by non-ENOVIA applications: access data in a vault is possible by using not only the ENOVIA V5 Life Cycle Applications, but
also by using Version 5 applications involved in interoperability.
Vault Servers and Clients

The vault is built on a client/server model. On a machine running the ENOVIA VPM Product Editor client, the vault client is also
installed: access to the vault server is implemented through the vault client mechanism. The vault client is simply the definition of all
the necessary information required by the client machine to contact the vault server, both parts being separately managed.
Access to the vault server from the vault client is resolved as follows: through CORBA, the vault client contacts the vault server which
listens (for incoming requests) on the Orbix port specified at installation. The whole point is to set up on the client side an "Alias" that
will describe the target to be reached:
● Orbix service name
● host name
● port number.
Zoom On Vault Server/Client Architecture
The vault client is a thin component enabling an application to access the vault, and hides the communication from the application.
The vault client application requires the vault client properties file. The vault client process may run on a separate machine from the
vault server, or on the same machine. The vault client application knows how to connect the vault server by reading the properties in
the vault client properties file (if needed, it can connect several vault servers simultaneously).
Each vault server must have its own database structures, file repositories and properties file. Vault database setup and repository
management are independent from each other, but are integrated within the same vault setup tool.
Each vault server process may run on a separate workstation, and does not need to be installed on a machine hosting Version 5 code
(except of course the vault code). The server can deal with multi-processing and can answer several vault client applications
simultaneously. When running, it keeps a set of database connections open in order to improve performance and database access.
Which Objects Are Created?
Setting up a vault client and vault server creates the following objects:
● the vault database tables
● the following files:
XXXVaultServer.properties
VaultClient.properties
VaultLocalServerList.properties
are created, where "XXXVaultServer" is the appropriate name of the vault server (Orbix service name) in:
install_dir/docs/java
For example, the default vault server name and resulting file are named: ENOVIAVaultServer.properties
● the following files:

ENOVIAVaultServer.imp
are created with the appropriate name (Orbix service name) in:
install_dir/startup/orbix/config/Repositories/ImpRep
Standard Vault Server/Client Configuration Example
The following figure illustrates a standard vault installation configuration:

● VaultClientA is the vault client name, with its corresponding properties file
● Vault1OrbSrv is the name of the vault server and the Orbix service name, with its corresponding properties file, database and
repository.
How Do I Create a Vault Server and Client?
A vault server can be created on its own without the rest of the ENOVIA V5 VPM software, and can be created without having created
an associated vault client previously.
If you installed the Vault Administration configuration, the Vault Server dialog box is displayed instead of the Vault Client Setup dialog
box, and contains two tabs:
● Vault Server
● Vault Client.
You can create the vault server in a number of ways:

● from within the installation procedure
● after installing the ENOVIA V5 VPM code by running a command from the command line to access the vault setup graphic user
interface
● using the corresponding batch tools
● or manually as explained in Installing the Vault Server Manually.
Note: the vault administration tool does not manage the vault cache.
It is quite possible to install the ENOVIA V5 VPM code in one location, and the Vault Server Administration configuration in another
location on the same machine.
You MUST NOT attempt to set up this kind of installation on the same machine. If you need the ENOVIA V5 VPM code and vault server
on the same machine, install them both at the same location.
More About Vault Architecture

Supported Protocols
Several protocols are supported for document transfer:

● Corba
● NFS
● HTTP.
Multi-user Document Server
Several applications configured as vault clients can simultaneously access documents from the vault server.
Security
The vault server process is the only one that has access to the vault contents.
In the file implementation, vault directories do not need to be mounted on the client workstation (except when using the NFS access or
datalink implementation).
Enhanced scalability: Multi-threaded Vault
The vault server has the ability to serve several users at the same time.
The server will work with a pool of pre-allocated threads:

● performance and scalability are predictable
● the server will not collapse in case of a temporary large amount of incoming requests
● the number of threads can be tailored according to the capabilities of the machine
When all the threads are busy, an incoming request is queued.
Vault Server Licensing

When the vault server or vault cache is started, a license request for the ENOVIA - Vault Administration (VAR) configuration is
transmitted to the LUM license database. Each vault server or vault cache takes one concurrent VAR license. If either fail to get a
license, an error message is written to the log file and the operation stops.
PCS Considerations
For vault server memory settings on AIX with JVM 1.5 to support a large number of simultaneously connected users, we recommend
you set the following options on the java command line in the runENOVVaultServer shell located in:
install_dir/code/command directory:
Java parms (in runENOVVaultServer)

Xmx 1280m
Xms 1280m
Xss 64k
Xmso 64k
Xgcpolicy subpool
So the modified command line looks like:
exec $JAVA_HOME/bin/java -Xmx1280m -Xms1280m -Xss64k -Xmso64k -Xgcpolicy:subpool $JAVA_OPT ...
Moreover, the V5MEM environment variable has to be set to 8:

V5MEM=8
Vault Server Configuration

The Vault Server configuration properties file allows server configuration with the appropriate properties.
For detailed vault server properties, refer to Vault Server Settings.

Installing the Vault Server Manually
This task will show you how to install manually a vault server on UNIX.
On Windows, we recommend that you install a vault server using the interactive tools
provided.
Data Structure Creation

Beware: Each Vault Server is supposed to have its own data structure. Do not share Vault
Server data structure between several Vault Server!
You will find the reference files for the data structure creation (tables, index, etc.) under the
following directory:
YourUnloaddir/$OSDS/reffiles/DBMS/ddl
The $OSDS value could be aix_a, hpux_b or solaris_a depending on your operating system.
The suffix of these reference files is .clp for DB2 and .sql for Oracle.
They are named:
VPM_VAULTFILE.clp and VPM_VAULTFILE.sql when creating tables
grant_VPM_VAULTFILE.clp and grant_VPM_VAULTFILE.sql when creating grants on

tables
You can also use the drop_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx and the revoke_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx files to
remove respectively tables and grants on tables.
When creating your data structure, you have to customize the above-mentioned files.
To do so:
1. Duplicate the following files and rename them as indicated below:
Original file name: Duplicated file name:
VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx
grant_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx
grant_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx
drop_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx drop_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.
xxx
revoke_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx
revoke_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx
2. Change the name of the structure owner (the default owner is VPMADM) and the
tablespaces name if necessary. In the case of the grant file, we advise you to change the "to
public" right into "to vault_structure_owner".
3. Execute the VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx file and the related grant file

(grant_VPM_VAULTFILE_My_Vault.xxx) on your database:
a. Logon to the database as Database Administrator
For DB2:
b. Under the DB2 prompt, run the command:

db2 -tvf file_fullpathname.clp
For Oracle:
b. Under sqlplus, run the command:

start file_fullpathname.sql
Register the New Vault Server on the Orbix daemon

1. Execute the following command:
IT_CONFIG_PATH= install_dir/startup/orbix
export IT_CONFIG_PATH
Run it using catstart, or export the environment before like this:

catstart -env -direnv -run "/bin/ksh"
Putit -h machine_name -shared VaultServerName "install_dir/code/command/

catstart -env \"env_name\" -direnv \"env_dir" -run install_dir/code/command/
runENOVVaultStarter -object \" MyVaultOwner_UID MyVaultOwner_GID env_name
env_dir\ ""
chmodit VaultServerName i+all
chmodit VaultServerName l+all
The values for the parameters are:
VaultServerName: name of the CORBA service for the VaultServer.
Beware:'_' are not allowed in the Vault server name and the Vault server alias name!
MyVaultOwner_UID: UNIX user id of the vault administrator user.

MyVaultOwner_GID: UNIX group id of the vault administrator user.
IT_CONFIG_PATH: path of the iona.cfg file under the installation. On a standard installation,
this file is under startup/orbix directory.
Example:
With the values below:

Install_dir: /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a
Machine: reverdsy
VaultServerName: ENOVIAVaultServer
Env_name: ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19
Env_dir: /CATEnv
MyVaultOwner_UID: 1400
MyVaultOwner_GID: 360
We get:
IT_CONFIG_PATH= /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/startup/orbix
export IT_CONFIG_PATH
Putit -h reverdsy -shared ENOVIAVaultServer "/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/

solaris_a/startup/orbix/code/command/catstart -env \"ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19
\" -direnv \"/CATEnv" -run /usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/solaris_a/startup/orbix/
code/command/runENOVVaultStarter -object \"1400 360 ENOVIA_V5_VPM.V5R19.B19 /
CATEnv\""
chmodit ENOVIAVaultServer i+all

chmodit ENOVIAVaultServer l+all
If all is OK, you should have a ENOVIAVaultServer.imp file under the following directory:
YourUnloaddir/$OSDS/startup/orbix/config/Repositories/ImpRep
Then you have created the Orbix service name ENOVIAVaultServer.
The above command will generate a file named ENOVaultServer.imp in the directory:
/home/DS/B19/solaris_a/startup/orbix/config/Repositories/ImpRep.
The file ENOVaultServer.imp looks like this:
Name : ENOVaultServer
Comms : cdr/tcp
Activation : shared
Owner : root
Launch : ;all;
Invoke : ;all;
ImpRep Version : 2
no. of servers : 1
server's port : 0
Marker Launch Command * /home/DS/B19/solaris_a/code/command/
runENOVVaultStarter 1415 363
Vault Settings Creation

The new Vault Setting software is based on an extended JAVA properties mechanism. So the
Vault Setting file looks like a java property file. When the Vault tries to get a property, the
search order is:
1. in system properties (java only: "-D" option in launch command line)
2. in environment (shell variables)
3. in vault properties file.
There are two kinds of Vault settings: server and client.
Vault Server Settings

Each Vault Server is supposed to have its own Vault Server properties file. Do not mix
properties of two Vault Server in the same properties file. It is not supported!
The default location of the Vault server settings file is:
The default filename is no longer VaultServer.properties, but:

VaultServerName.properties
VaultServer setting purpose
VaultServer settings are used to manage:

● ORB parameters (Orbix implementation)
● Database connection and connection pool parameters
● Vault repositories
● Thread number
● Trace activation
● Optional behaviors: NFS mode, Cache, DB2 DATALINK.
Here are keys used by a VaultServer:
Mandatory Keys
VaultServer_Name : vault server Orbix service name

VaultServer_HostName : vault server host name
VaultServer_DaemonPort : Orbix daemon listen port
VaultServer_TimeOut : vault server timeout (unit: milli second)
VaultServer_ThreadNumber : number of thread waiting for client request
VaultServer_DBMINPoolSize : minimum number of connections for the
vault server database connection pool
VaultServer_DBMAXPoolSize : maximum number of connections for the vault
server database connection pool
VaultServer_TimeZoneRawOffset : time zone offset (unit: milli second), used
for document creation
and modification date
VaultServer_DBName : name of the database where vault tables are
VaultServer_DBVendor : database vendor pertaining to the database
name above
VaultServer_DBUser : database connection user
VaultServer_DBSchema : database structures owner
VaultServer_DBPassword : database connection user password
For detailed information about how to generate the password, refer to the description of the
GenVaultPassword command in Database password encryption for the Vault Server
properties file.
VaultServer_NumOfRepo : number of Vault Server repositories

VaultServer_Repo_x_Name : name of the Vault Server repository
VaultServer_Repo_x_Path : path of the Vault Server repository
For more information, refer to Multiple File System Support.

Beware: the following keys are no longer valid since release V5R8:
VaultServer_Default_Secured_StorageLocation : default vault secured path
for files
VaultServer_Default_Tmp_StorageLocation : default vault temporary path
for files
Those keys are still allowed but they can't be mixed with the keys replacing them
(VaultServer_NumOfRepo, …), it is not supported!
Optional Keys
Standard optional Keys:

VaultServer_TmpFilesAccessRights : file access rights under
temporary path (default: 600)
VaultServer_SecuredFilesAccessRights : file access rights under secured
path (default: 400)
VaultServer_LogRemovedFiles : trigger logging of delete
operations (default: false)
VaultServer_RemoveFiles : trigger file delete on disk
(default: true)
VaultServer_IsDBPasswordEncrypted : trigger password encryption use
(default: true)
VaultServer_DBURL : JDBC connection string
VaultServer_DBDriver : JDBC driver class to load
VaultServer_DBTransIsoLevel : database transaction isolation
level
VaultServer_FDSMIN : free disk space threshold
VaultServer_Repo_x_ReadOnly : trigger read only mode on a
Repo (default: false)
VaultServer_Repo_x_Priority : modifies use frequency
(unit: double, default: 1.0)
VaultServer_Repo_x_NumOfSecDir : number of secured directories
for the repository number x
(default: 1)
VaultServer_Repo_x_TmpDirName : name of the tmp directory
for the repository number x
(default: tmp)
VaultServer_Repo_x_SecDirName_y : name of the secured directory for
the repository number x
(default: securedy)
VaultServer_ENOVIStorageLocation_Implementation: class to load for storage
location user exit
VaultServer_ENOVIDocIndexation_Implementation : class to load for document
indexation user exit
VaultServer_MilliSecondTimestamp : trigger timestamp
millisecond precision (default: true on DB2 and false on ORACLE)
VaultServer_ReadOnly : trigger read only mode on the whole vault
VaultServer_Trace : trigger trace (default: OFF)
VaultServer_LicenseName : forces the use of a particular
license (instead of VAR); this license must be an authorized license
for the VSA product
Optional Keys for DB2 DATALINK
VaultServer_DB2DATALINK : trigger datalink mode (default:

false)
VaultServer_DLFMHostServerName : datalink file manager host server
name (only for datalink mode)
Optional Keys for a Cache VaultServer
VaultServer_Cache : trigger cache mode (default: false)

VaultServer_Cache_MaxSize : Maximum size of Vault Cache (unit:
kb)
VaultServer_Cache_CleanThreshold : threshold for cleaning file (percent
of cache max size)
VaultServer_Cache_CleanRate : targeted size after cleaning
(percent of cache max size)
VaultServer_Cache_CleanEnabled : trigger cleaning mode on (default:
true)
VaultServer_Cache_TimeoutForClean : time between two cleaning (unit:
milli second)
Standard VaultServer properties file example
## Vault Server Properties File

## Orbix parameters
VaultServer_Name = ENOVIAVaultServerOrbSrv
VaultServer_HostName = regis
VaultServer_DaemonPort = 1572
VaultServer_TimeOut = 36000000
## Request execution parameters

VaultServer_ThreadNumber = 2
VaultServer_TimeZoneRawOffset = 3600000
## Database connection pool parameters

VaultServer_DBMINPoolSize = 4
VaultServer_DBMAXPoolSize = 6
## Database connection parameters
VaultServer_DBName = AIXINT8
VaultServer_DBVendor = oracle
VaultServer_DBUser = tacr
VaultServer_DBPassword = ******
## VaultServer file repositories parameters
VaultServer_NumOfRepo = 2
VaultServer_Repo_0_Name = Repo0
VaultServer_Repo_0_Path = /VAULTCXR8/Repo0
VaultServer_Repo_0_NumOfSecDir = 2
VaultServer_Repo_0_TmpDirName = TmpDirectory
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_0 = SecuredDirectory0
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_1 = SecuredDirectory1
## Trace parameter
VaultServer_Trace = OFF
Explanation of Example
This properties file is corresponding to a standard VaultServer (no DATALINK or VaultCache)

running on a workstation named "regis". The Orbix service name, which is the name
declared is registered on the Orbix daemon, is ENOVIAVaultServerOrbSrv. The Orbix
daemon is listening on port 1572 on this workstation. The VaultServer timeout is exactly ten
hours. Two request execution threads and four database connections are created at start
time. The server time zone is GMT+1. The database used is an Oracle database named
AIXINT8 and the connection user is tacr. Two Vault repositories are declared.
Vault Client Settings
Several Vault Clients can use the same Vault Client properties file.
VaultClient setting purpose
VaultClient settings are used for:

● Client/Server communication parameters
● Trace activation
● Accessible VaultServer declaration through the VaultAliasName notion.
VaultAliasName concept:
The VaultAliasName is the way for VaultClient applications to identify a VaultServer. A

VaultClient application needs three data to connect a VaultServer. It needs VaultServer
Orbix service name, Orbix listen port on the remote workstation where VaultServer is
running and the remote workstation name. VaultClient properties file is used to link a given
VaultAliasName to the three data identifying a given VaultServer.
Here are the keys used by a VaultClient:
Mandatory Keys
VaultClient_DefaultAliasName : default vault alias name

VaultClient_ReadProtocol : number of allowed read protocol
VaultClient_ReadProtocol_0 : first read protocol
VaultClient_ReadProtocol_1 : second read protocol
VaultClient_WriteProtocol : number of allowed write protocol
VaultClient_WriteProtocol_0 : first write protocol
VaultClient_BlockSize : size in bytes of block for read and write
operation
Optional Keys
VaultClient_Active_ReadProtocol : file transfer protocol to use for read

operation
VaultClient_Active_WriteProtocol : file transfer protocol to use for write
operation
VaultClient_ReadOnly : trigger read only mode (default: false)
VaultClient_Trace : traces activation (java only, default:
OFF)
How to catalog a new VaultServer
In order to do that, you have to declare a new VaultAliasName pertaining to the VaultServer
you want to catalog. As read and write operations are separate, you have to add six data by
VaultAliasName which are:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadVaultServerName :
Orbix service name of the target vault server for read operation
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadVaultServerHostName :
Host name of the target vault server for read operation
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadVaultServerDaemonPort :
Orbix listen port of the target vault server for read operation
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_WriteVaultServerName :
Orbix service name of the target vault server for write operation
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_WriteVaultServerHostName :
Host name of the target vault server for write operation
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_WriteVaultServerDaemonPort :
Orbix listen port of the target vault server for write operation
These keys are mandatory for the default alias name.

You can catalog as many VaultServers as you want in a VaultClient properties file. But do
not declare a VaultAliasName twice. Only the first entry will be taken into account.
VaultClient properties file example:
## Vault Client Properties File

VaultClient_DefaultAliasName = Vault1
VaultClient_ReadProtocol = 2
VaultClient_ReadProtocol_0 = CORBA
VaultClient_ReadProtocol_1 = NFS
VaultClient_WriteProtocol = 2
VaultClient_WriteProtocol_0 = CORBA
VaultClient_WriteProtocol_0 = NFS
VaultClient_BlockSize = 262144
VaultClient_Trace = OFF
## Vault1 alias entry
VaultClient_Vault1_ReadVaultServerName = Vault1OrbSrv
VaultClient_Vault1_ReadVaultServerHostName = laureen
VaultClient_Vault1_ReadVaultServerDaemonPort = 1570
VaultClient_Vault1_WriteVaultServerName = Vault1OrbSrv
VaultClient_Vault1_WriteVaultServerHostName = laureen
VaultClient_Vault1_WriteVaultServerDaemonPort = 1570
VaultClient_Vault2_ReadVaultServerHostName = floydsy
VaultClient_Vault2_WriteVaultServerHostName = floydsy
VaultClient_Vault3_ReadVaultServerHostName = bayeux
VaultClient_Vault3_WriteVaultServerHostName = bayeux
Explanation of Example
This VaultClient properties file declares three VaultAliasName that are Vault1, Vault2 and
Vault3. The VaultServer Vault1OrbSrv Orbix service name is associated to the Vault1 alias
name. This VaultServer is running on a workstation named laureen and the Orbix daemon
listen port is 1570. The VaultServer Vault2OrbSrv Orbix service name is associated to the
Vault2 alias name. The VaultServer Vault3OrbSrv Orbix service name is associated to the
Vault3 alias name.
Properties file access path:
The vault application default access path for properties file is:
unload_dir/$OSDS/docs/java
You can change this behavior by exporting the keys below in your environment:
VaultServer_PropertiesFilePath : Path of the vault server properties

file
VaultServer_PropertiesFileName : Name of the vault server properties
file
VaultClient_PropertiesFilePath : Path of the vault client properties
file
VaultClient_PropertiesFileName : Name of the vault client properties
file
For instance:
VaultServer_PropertiesFilePath=/u/lego/VAULTServer/PropertiesV5R19
export VaultServer_PropertiesFilePath
VaultServer_PropertiesFileName=CustomVaultServer.properties
export VaultServer_PropertiesFileName
VaultClient_PropertiesFilePath=/u/lego/VAULTClient/PropertiesV5R19
export VaultClient_PropertiesFilePath
VaultClient_PropertiesFileName=CustomVaultClient.properties
export VaultClient_PropertiesFileName
Beware: '_' are not allowed in Vault server name and Vault server alias name!
Multiple File System Support

In order to allow declaration of tmp and secured directories on several file systems, the
concept of Vault Server Repository has been introduced. A Vault Server Repository is defined
by a name, a tmp directory and a set of secured directories. These directories have to be on
the same file system for a given Vault Server Repository. It is necessary to improve
performances and reliability. The following Vault Server properties have been added to
support this new feature.
Vault Server Repository Definition Keys
Mandatory Keys
Number of Vault Server Repositories: VaultServer_NumOfRepo.
For instance, the line:
means that two Vault Server Repositories are defined below.
Repository name: VaultServer_Repo_x_Name
(x stands for the repository index rank. It begins at 0)

means that the name of the Vault Server Repository number 0 is Repo0.
Repository path: VaultServer_Repo_x_Path
This property defines the root path under which tmp and secured directories are supposed to
be created.
For instance:
means that tmp and secured directories are created under the directory /VAULTCXR8/Repo0
Optional Keys
Minimum free disk space threshold (unit: kb): VaultServer_FDSMIN.

VaultServer_FDSMIN = 1000
means that the Vault Server will not use a file system any more if there is less than 1000
free kb on it. Default value for this property is: 0.
Tmp directory name: VaultServer_Repo_x_TmpDirName

VaultServer_Repo_0_TmpDirName = tmpDir0
means that the tmp directory for Vault Server repository named Repo0 is /VAULTCXR8/
Repo0/tmpDir0. The default value for this property is: tmp.
Number of secured directories definition key: VaultServer_Repo_x_NumOfSecDir

For instance the line:
means that two secured directories are defined below. The default value for this property is:
1.
Secured directory name: VaultServer_Repo_x_SecDirName_y
(x stands for the repository index rank. It begins at 0; y stands for the secured directory
index rank. It begins at 0)
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_0 = secDir0
means the the first secured directory for Vault Server Repository named Repo0 is /
VAULTCXR8/Repo0/secDir0. The default value for this property is: securedy (where y stands
for the secured directory index rank. It begins at 0)
Read only feature: VaultServer_Repo_x_ReadOnly
VaultServer_Repo_0_ReadOnly = true
means that the Vault Server repository named Repo0 is read only. The default value for this
property is: false.
Priority feature: VaultServer_Repo_x_Priority
VaultServer_Repo_0_Priority = 2.0
means that the Vault Server repository named Repo0 is two-time more used than it would
be by default when creating new documents. The default value for this property is: 1.0.
Example:
Vault Server properties file example
# Vault Server Repositories

# Number of Vault Server Repositories
# First Vault Server Repo

VaultServer_Repo_0_Path = /VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo0
VaultServer_Repo_0_TmpDirName = TmpDirOfRepo0
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_0 = SecDir0OfRepo0
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_1 = SecDir1OfRepo0
# Second Vault Server Repo

# Third Vault Server Repo

The lines above mean that the following directories are supposed to be created for Repo0,
Repo1 and Repo2:
Repo0:
/VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo0/TmpDirOfRepo0
/VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo0/SecDir0OfRepo0
/VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo0/SecDir1OfRepo0
Repo1
/VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo1/tmp
/VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo1/secured0
Repo2
/VAULTCXR8/DirOfRepo2/tmp
File dispatching rules
A user exit mechanism (ENOVIStorageLocation interface) is used to know where to write

new or modified files into vault repository directories. If you want to code your own user
exit, keep in mind that the code has to be thread safe.
The default user exit implementation we supply dispatches files depending on free disk
space on file system. The more free disk space you have on a file system, the more you will
have new or modified files written on it.
The file dispatching rule is not verified with one single file but it is a statistic rule. For
example, there are two vault repositories (REPO1 and REPO2) such that REPO2 free disk is
space equal to 2 times REPO1 then the file distribution will be such that 1/3rd of files will go
in REPO1 and 2/3rd will go in REPO2.
So If you have 3000 files you will have 1000 files in REPO1 and 2000 in REPO2. Of course
this rule can not verified if you have only 1 file.
On a given Vault repository, there is no preference between secured directories. The free
disk space is not computed per secured directory but it is calculated per Vault repository. So
if there are 1000 files in a Vault Repo with 10 secured directories (all created at Vault
repository creation time) then you will have 100 files stored per secured directory.
Here is how the file dispatch algorithm works on several Vault repositories
When the application needs a repo to store a file, the following steps are done:
1. Free disk space is calculated for each repo.

2. Then, the percentage of the sum of the above disk space is calculated for each repo.
3. Then, a range between 1-100 is associated to each repo depending on the percentage
above.
4. A random number between 1 and 100 is obtained by a call to the java method Math.
random
5. The repo in which the file will be stored is selected following the random number
above and the range of each repo determined by step 3.
So the files are dispatched according to statistical rules.
Example:
Case with three Vault repositories : Repo1, Repo2, Repo3
Assumptions:
● Free disk space for Repo1 is 25000 KB
Percentage and range for each repo:

● percentage for Repo1: 25 %
● range for Repo1: 1 - 25
So by applying the statistical rules, the Repo3 will be chosen twice more than Repo1 or
Repo2.
Creating Storage Directories

Creation of secured and tmp directory for VaultServer.
For each defined Vault Server repository create tmp and secured directories:
1. Log on as VaultOwner OS user.

2. mkdir -p directory_to_create
3. chmod +rw just_created_directory
Setting Up Your Environment
CLASSPATH issue on vault client and vault server side: the Vault client and server software
component are based on JNI operations for file access rights management. So, make sure
the JNIVAULT.jar file is in your CLASSPATH.
DB2 mandatory environment variables for JDBC use (vault server side only):
DB2INSTANCE has to be set. For instance:
DB2INSTANCE=admclien
export DB2INSTANCE
CLASSPATH issue on vault server side for JDBC use: add

db2client_home_directory/sqllib/java/db2java.zip to your CLASSPATH (see
db2profile shell in the DB2 client installation to set the value of this variable
properly).
LIBPATH (or LD_LIBRARY_PATH ...) issue on vault server side for JDBC use:
db2client_home_directory/sqllib/lib has to be in LIBPATH (see db2profile shell
in the DB2 client installation to set the value of this variable properly).
ORACLE mandatory environment variables for JDBC use (vault server side only)
NLS_LANG has to be set (US7ASCII, WE8DEC, WE8ISO8859P1, UTF8, ...). This

variable is set by default by the Oracle installation. So, you can just keep the default
value. For instance:
NLS_LANG=FRENCH_FRANCE.WE8ISO8859P1
export NLS_LANG
ORACLE_HOME has to be set. For instance:
ORACLE_HOME=/u/env/oracle/SunOS
export ORACLE_HOME
TNS_ADMIN has to be set. For instance:
TNS_ADMIN=/u/env/oracle/SunOS/network/adminµ
export TNS_ADMIN
CLASSPATH issue on vault server side for JDBC use:
UNIX:
Add $ORACLE_HOME/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip and $ORACLE_HOME/jdbc/
lib/nls_charset11.zip to your CLASSPATH
Windows XP:
Add [ORACLE_HOME]\jdbc\lib\classes111.zip and [ORACLE_HOME]\jdbc

\lib\nls_charset11.zip to your CLASSPATH.
Set THREAD_FLAG variable to native value: THREAD_FLAG=native
LIBPATH (or LD_LIBRARY_PATH ...) issue on vault server side for JDBC use:
Unix:
$ORACLE_HOME/lib:$ORACLE_HOME/jdbc/lib has to be in LIBPATH.
Windows XP:
Add [ORACLE_HOME]\lib:[ORACLE_HOME]\jdbc\lib to your PATH.
Dealing with OS limit parameters
The communications between the Vault Client and Vault Server are using TCP/IP sockets.
Each socket represents a file descriptor on the Vault Server process. If the file descriptor
limit per process is set too low, attempts to open socket connections may be unsuccessful.
To resolve this condition, increase the file descriptor limit for the user from which the Orbixd
process is started (normally root). Edit the .profile for the user, and add the following:
ulimit -n 1024
Depending on the number of connections needed, this number may need to be increased
more. For this change to take effect, you do not have to reboot. Just logoff and then logon
again.
Solaris
To change the hard upper limit of the number of file descriptors in the kernel (which defaults
to 1024 per CPU), you can, edit the /etc/system config file to include a couple of entries:
set rlim_fd_max=4096
set rlim_FD_cur=1024
After you change this file, you must reboot for the changes to take effect.
HP-UX
HP-UX kernel parameter configuration for Java™ support
Threads
The default values for HP-UX 11.0 are set too low for VaultServer application. Two kernel
parameters need to be set so that the limit of the maximum number of threads per process
is not encountered. Usually you will see this problem as a Java Out of Memory error. You will
want to set the value of the max_thread_proc higher than the expected maximum number
of simultaneously active threads for your application
max_thread_proc
The maximum number of threads allowed in each process. The minimum value (and
default) is 64, often too low for VaultServer application. The maximum value is the
value of nkthread.
nkthread
The total number of kernel threads available in the system. This parameter is similar
to the nproc tunable except that it defines the limit for the total number of kernel
threads able to run simultaneously in the system. The value must be greater than
nproc. The default is approximately twice that of nproc. The maximum is 30000.The
suggested value of nkthread is 2*max_thread_proc. If you have many Java
processes running and each running process uses many threads, you will want to
increase this value.
open files
Problems occur when the value of kernel parameters are set too low for the number of files
allowed to be simultaneously open in a process. Be certain that your kernel is configured so
that you do not reach the limit for the number of open files for your process. Java opens
many files in order to read in the classes required to run your application. A file descriptor is
also used for each socket that is opened.
nfiles
Maximum number of open files.
This value is usually determined by the formula:
((NPROC*2)+1000)
NPROC is usually: ((MAXUSERS*5)+64)
For a MAXUSERS of 400, this works out to 5128. You can usually set it higher.
maxfiles
Soft file limit per process
maxfiles_lim
Hard file limit per process
2048 is the maximum value you can set through SAM for maxfiles and maxfiles_lim.
Note that you can set the parameters higher by configuring the kernel using the
configuration file and then rebuilding the kernel (or by modifying stand/system and
doing a mk kernel). Since setting these parameters too low results typically in
application failure, you may want to calculate the number you need and then double
it. You might also consider inode along with these parameters, that is as a member
of the "set". If there's no space in the appropriate inode table then you cannot open
a new file.
timeouts
If the number of pending timeouts on the system exceeds the maximum number of
allowable pending timeouts on the system then the system will crash. This undesireable
behavior can be avoided by increasing the following kernel parameter:
ncallout
Maximum number of pending timeouts
If you are opening many sockets, many of which are waiting on I/O, you will likely run into
this limit.
Set ncallout to a value greater than the sum of:
nkthread + the number of I/O devices connected to the machine
A callout structure is used by each thread that sleeps waiting for a time-based event.
Traditionally the callout structure used by a thread is taken from a pool the size of which is
controlled by ncallout. Each thread has a set of timers associated with it, e.g. for nanosleep
or sleeping in select(). There are a set of BringYourOwnCallout functions that don't allocate
from the pool. The maximum number of callout structures needs to be approximately the
maximum number of threads.
Interactively setting user limits
If you suspect that you are running out of file descriptors, you can check your limits by
switching to the Bourne Shell and resetting the limits. Simply type in the following:
>sh
>ulimit -a
time(seconds) unlimited
file(blocks) unlimited
data(kbytes) 65536
stack(kbytes) 8192
memory(kbytes) unlimited
coredump(blocks) 4290772993
nofiles(descriptors) 200
>
Use the first character to reset any of the values. For example, to increase the number of
file descriptors, simply type:
>ulimit -n 5000
>ulimit -a
time(seconds) unlimited
file(blocks) unlimited
data(kbytes) 65536
stack(kbytes) 8192
memory(kbytes) unlimited
coredump(blocks) 4290772993
nofiles(descriptors) 5000
>
Try re-running your application. (Do not exit the shell in which you've just reset your limits.)
Specific use case
Important warning for the installation of a vault running on an AIX server and a
local DB2 database
You have to implement a client/server database connection for the vault, because of a
limitation in the number of JDBC connections that the VaultServer can open.
Otherwise an SQL1224N error is triggered when the vault is started.
So, if you had initially an AIX vault with a local DB2 server (resulting from a standard
installation, a migration of a former configuration, ...) you need to modify the database
connectivity for the vault.
You will have to run the appropriate db2 commands to catalog your local database under an
alias which will be accessible through a client/server connection. (typically, "db2 catalog
tcpip node" + "db2 catalog database at node" statements)
Then you will have to update your Vault server java properties, referencing the new db2
alias as the VaultServer_DBName parameter.
Here is how to by-pass this limitation:
1. Install a DB2 client on the AIX server.

2. Catalog the Vault database on the DB2 client.
3. Set up the VaultServer in order to connect the database through the DB2 client
instead of the DB2 server.
Modifying the Vault Server to Use Java Runtime Environment (JRE)

On UNIX
Edit the runENOVVaultServer shell:
$InstallPath/$OSDS/code/command/runENOVVaultServer
and make the following changes.
Add the following before the echo "Starting ENOVIA V5 VAULT SERVER..... statement
export JAVA_HOME=/usr/java5 (where /usr/java5 is the install path for the JRE 1.5 code)
export PATH=$JAVA_HOME/bin:$PATH
Stop the Vault Server, if running, to ensure it will use the JRE 1.5 the next time it starts.
Installing a Vault Client in Batch Mode
On Windows
To perform a batch vault client installation:
2. Select Start > Programs > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt window.
3. Go to the following installation directory
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a \code\bin(32-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
catstart -run VaultClientSetupB
with the appropriate arguments.
Command Syntax
VaultClientSetupB
-list
-add VaultAliasName -host ServerHostname -port OrbixDaemonPort
-modify VaultAliasName [-host ServerHostname] [-port OrbixDaemonPort]
-delete VaultAliasName -h help
● -list: lists the catalogued vault servers
Example of output:
Catalogued Vault servers:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vault alias name | Server hostname | Orbix daemon port
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENOVIAVaultServer | JANE2DSY | 1570
● -add VaultAliasName: catalogues the vault server VaultAliasName
● -modify VaultAliasName: modifies the catalogued Vault server VaultAliasName; you can also specify the server hostname and
Orbix daemon port
● -delete VaultAliasName: deletes the VaultAliasName's catalogued entries; the VaultAliasName properties file and the data
(database, repositories) are not deleted
● -h: this help.
On UNIX
To perform a batch vault client installation:
1. Log on as root.
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run VaultClientSetupB
where "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
Command Syntax
VaultClientSetupB
-list
-add VaultAliasName -host ServerHostname -port OrbixDaemonPort
-modify VaultAliasName [-host ServerHostname] [-port OrbixDaemonPort]
-delete VaultAliasName -h help
The options are:

Example:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENOVIAVaultServer | LOUG3DSY | 1570
● -add: catalogues the vault server VaultAliasName

● -modify: modifies the catalogued Vault server VaultAliasName; you can also specify the server hostname and Orbix daemon port
● -delete: deletes the VaultAliasName's catalogued entries; the VaultAliasName properties file and the data (database, repositories)
are not deleted.
● -h: this help.
Setting Up the Vault Server Cache
Introduction to Vault Server Cache

The purpose of the vault server cache is to improve performance when accessing vault documents over a wide
area network (WAN). To be efficient, the mechanism is based on the assumption that most users perform read
access rather than modification to vault documents. The vault server cache mechanism creates a local copy of a
remote vault document the first time it is accessed. Once in the cache, it is accessed locally in the cache and not
remotely. The document in the cache is refreshed when needed.
This functionality applies only to a multi-site deployment with a vault cache.
To understand how a vault server cache works, compare the differences between a standard vault server and a
vault server cache installation.
Standard Vault Server Installation

The following drawing illustrates a standard vault server installation:
Read/Write Mechanism for the Standard Vault Server Installation
In the case of a standard vault server installation, where a cache is not used, each vault client application
connects directly to the standard vault server for any read/write operation.
Thus, for the sample above, in case of the standard vault server installation, the VaultClient properties file
pertaining to VaultClientA could contain the following:
## Standard Vault Client Properties File (VaultClientA)
## We suppose the VaultServer Vault1OrbSrv is running

## on a workstation called laureen and the Orbix
## daemon listen port on this workstation is 1570
## Server for read operations
## Server for write operations
Note: the vault alias name is the same as the Orbix service name, but you can modify the alias.
One benefit of activating the cache via a properties file is that it is very easy to plug in or unplug a vault server
cache. You only have to modify a VaultClient.properties file once the vault server cache is installed. Another
benefit is that the client application does not waste time in managing a cache application.
Vault Server Cache Mechanism

The example below illustrates how a vault server cache works:
Note: If there is a single Vault Master, the VaultClientA VaultClient.properties file is the same as
VaultCacheOrbSrv VaultClient.properties file.
Read Mechanism
In a vault server cache installation, when a client application using a vault server cache tries to access a
document, it asks the vault server cache to retrieve the document. Then, the vault server cache checks if the
requested document is already in the cache. If the document is found, it checks if it is up-to-date. If this is the
case, it transmits the document to the client application. But if the document is not up-to-date, it retrieves the
latest version of the document from the vault server, stores it in the local cache, then sends it to the client.
In order to do so, a vault server cache embeds its own vault client application. This is why a vault server cache
needs a VaultClient.properties file. This properties file has to be different from the one used by the VaultClientZ
application in the illustration. It is due to the fact that read operations are done on the standard vault server
instead of the vault server cache.
Vault Client Properties File with VaultServer Cache (VaultClientZ)
In the case of a vault server cache installation, the VaultClient properties file pertaining to VaultClientZ could
contain the following:
## Vault Client Properties File with

## VaultServer Cache (VaultClientZ)
## daemon listening port on this workstation is 1570.
## We assume the VaultServer Cache VaultCacheOrbSrv

## is running on a workstation called glenn and the Orbix
## daemon listening port on this workstation is 1572.
VaultClient_Vault1_ReadVaultServerName = VaultCacheOrbSrv
VaultClient_Vault1_ReadVaultServerHostName = glenn
VaultClient_Vault1_WriteVaultServerName = VaultCacheOrbSrv
VaultClient_Vault1_WriteVaultServerHostName = glenn
Mechanism for Writing Documents to the Local Vault Cache
Now, the vault client application can write documents to the local vault cache, as illustrated by the diagram
below:
In more details, the mechanism is as follows:
● the vault client begins a write operation
● the vault cache sends a lock reservation to the remote vault server with the vault cache name (as seen by the
vault client, the document is reserved for writing but is still available in read mode)
● the vault client writes the document in the local vault cache
● the vault server is informed in which vault cache the document is: later, the vault server will retrieve the
document through an asynchronous replication process
● once saved, the document can then be read and saved again by vault clients
● document deletion is performed synchronously in both the vault server and the vault cache.
Lock reservation procedure
1. The vault client begins an open write operation.

2. The vault cache requests the lock reservation from the vault server.
3. The vault server performs the lock reservation.
4. The vault server returns the new Vault ID and Timestamp information to the vault cache.
5. The vault cache does a reservation with the vault server parameters in its database.
6. The vault client writes the document in the vault cache.
7. The vault client requests a close from the vault cache.
8. The vault cache requests a close from the vault server.
9. The vault server commits the lock.
Vault Master Refresh Mechanism
The vault server replicates through an external thread when the vault server is inactive or via a command line.
Asynchronous replication step by step:
1. The vault server requests the document by block from the vault cache.
2. The vault server publishes the document when the document is completely transferred.
3. The vault server suppresses the reservation.
4. The vault server commits steps 2 and 3.
Note: The vault cache could interrupt the asynchronous vault server transfer if its vault client modifies the
document.
Other Vault Cache or Vault Client
Vault server clients and others vault cache clients cannot access the new document version until the document is
on the vault server. In read mode, these vault clients will have access to the previous version of the document
being modified.
Vault server clients and others vault cache clients cannot access the document in write mode until the document
is on the vault server.
Vault Server Cache Installation Setup

Now that you understand the differences between the standard vault server installation and the local vault server
cache, you are ready to begin the vault server cache installation.
This setup is implemented in four steps:
Step one
Install the Vault Server Cache as you install a standard Vault Server. Then, change this Vault Server installation
into a Vault Server Cache installation by following steps two and three below. Keep in mind that just like a
standard Vault Server, a Vault Server Cache needs its own database structures and its own VaultServer.
properties file. For information about how to install a standard vault server, refer to Setting Up the Vault Server.
Beware: do not share database structures or server properties file between Vault Servers, it is neither supported
nor allowed. In order to avoid any misunderstanding, assume the name of the Vault Cache server properties file
is VaultCacheServer.properties in the following steps.
Step two
Change the Vault Server you just installed into a Vault Server Cache. Two operations have to be done in order to
do that:
1. Add the following line to the VaultCacheServer.properties file to enable the Cache working mode:
VaultServer_Cache = true
This converts a standard vault server into a vault cache.
2. Create a VaultClient.properties file for the Vault Server Cache to setup read/write connection parameters
between the Vault Server Cache and the remote standard Vault Server. In the file VaultClient.properties
for the vault server cache, declare the same vault alias name as in the VaultClient.properties file used for
the ENOVIA VPM Product Editor.
The host/port/Orbix service name for a given alias must be different between the VaultClient.properties file
of the ENOVIA VPM Product Editor client and the VaultClient.properties file of the vault server cache. The
host/port/Orbix service name for the ENOVIA VPM Product Editor client reference the vault cache, whereas
the host/port/Orbix service name for the vault cache reference the cached vault.
The VaultClient properties file pertaining to VaultCacheOrbSrv illustrated above in the

section Vault Server Cache Mechanism could be:
## Vault Client Properties File for

## VaultServer Cache (VaultCacheOrbSrv)

## daemon listen port on this workstation is 1570.
In this example, the vault cache is a client of the vault master Vault1OrbSrv illustrated
above.
Step three
Note: an old configuration (read on Vault Cache, write on Vault Server) is no longer supported and has been
replaced by the Vault Cache write operation support.
Modify the VaultClient.properties used by Vault Client applications that are to use the VaultServer Cache. You
have to update the read/write parameters for the right VaultAliasName in order to use the Vault Server Cache in
place of the standard Vault Server, as illustrated in Vault Client Properties File with VaultServer Cache
(VaultClientZ).
Step four
Set up the remote Vault Server to enable it to retrieve the documents from the VaultServer Cache. Add the
following line to the VaultServer.properties file to enable the Vault Server to get documents from the Vault
Server Cache:
VaultServer_VSForWCV = true
The VaultServer will check every 300 seconds if it has a document to retrieve from a Vault Server Cache. You
can change that default behavior by setting the following optional VaultServer key:
VaultServer_TimeoutForDocsCatcher: time between two checks if there is a document to get from a

VaultServer Cache (unit: millisecond).
If there are several documents to retrieve from one or several Vault Server Caches, the Vault Server retrieves
them and then waits for the timeout above.
Vault Server Cache Administration

Vault Cache Clean Behaviour
Whenever a client application connects with the Vault Server, a Vault session is created. When a Vault client such
as CATIA V5 uses the Vault Server to retrieve data about a specific document, that document is kept in the Vault
session. Documents remain in the Vault Cache as long as they are in a Vault session. Saving a document will
remove it from the Vault session, and closing the Vault client application will remove opened documents from the
Vault session. Only documents removed from the Vault session can be cleaned from the Vault Cache, if the
VaultCacheClean property is enabled.
Keys
In order to be able to manage cache size and cleaning policy, the following keys can be added to the VaultServer.
properties file used by Vault Server Cache:
Optional Keys for a Cache VaultServer administration:
VaultServer_Cache_CleanEnabled : trigger cleaning mode on (default: true).
VaultServer_Cache_MaxSize : Maximum size of Vault Cache (unit: kb).
VaultServer_Cache_CleanThreshold : threshold for cleaning files (percent of cache max size).
VaultServer_Cache_CleanRate : targeted size after cleaning (percent of cache max size)
VaultServer_Cache_TimeoutForClean : time between two cleaning (unit: milli second).
These keys may be modified and reloaded without stopping the VaultServer Cache process.
Key explanation
Cleaning functionality enabling: VaultServer_Cache_CleanEnabled
For instance, the line VaultServer_Cache_CleanEnabled = true means that a specialized thread is launched inside
the VaultServer Cache process in order to manage cache size and cleaning operations. If this key is set to false,
it disables the whole set of cache size management functionality.
Maximum cache size: VaultServer_Cache_MaxSize
For instance, the line VaultServer_Cache_MaxSize = 10000 means that the maximum size of the cache is ten
mega bytes.
Threshold for cleaning files: VaultServer_Cache_CleanThreshold

For instance, the line VaultServer_Cache_CleanThreshold = 80 means that if there is less than 80 per cent of
maximum cache size in use, then there is no cleaning operation done. But, if it is not the case, a cleaning
operation is launched.
Targeted size after cleaning: VaultServer_Cache_CleanRate
For instance, the line VaultServer_Cache_CleanRate = 50 means that after a cleaning operation, the new current
cache size should be 50 per cent of the maximum cache size.
Time between two checks if a cache cleaning is needed: VaultServer_Cache_TimeoutForClean
For instance, the line VaultServer_Cache_TimeoutForClean = 300000 means that every five minutes a check is
done to know if a cleaning operation should be launched or not.
Activating the Full Text Server on Vault Servers
Introduction
In order to take advantage of the full text search feature in the ENOVIA Document Management application, full text servers must be activated on
each vault server on which the full text indexing feature is enabled.
For example, the full text server is designed to be activated principally on vaults intended to store specification or maintenance documents in various
word processing or spreadsheet formats. A full text server need not be activated on vaults dedicated to storing CAD data or images, since there would
be no text to index.
Software Prerequisites
Full text indexing is supported only on Windows machines hosting a vault server.
The Microsoft Index Server (MIS) feature must be installed on the vault server running a vault with documents needing to be indexed in full-text
mode. This is an optional component of Windows server operating systems, just like Microsoft IIS), along with the prerequisite .NET runtime including
J# redistributable at version documented in Software Prerequisites section of the Program Directory.
Use of a Microsoft Index Server located on a different machine from the machine running the vault server is not supported.
WebSphere Application Server is no longer a prerequisite for full text indexing on the vault server.
Installation of the full text server is performed using command line instructions. However, the MIS administration is performed using the Microsoft
Management Console. Everything related to MIS administration is located under the Indexing Services node in the Services and Applications node.
Full Text Indexing Command Syntax
For this task, you will need the following inputs:
Input placeholder used in this task Meaning Source

<install_path> Location of the code installation Unloading Your Product Code on Windows
Unloading Your Product Code on UNIX
<fulltext_workdir> Location of the full text working Person in charge of full text server activation for the
directory. This directory contains the full ENOVIA vault
text indexes, and other directories
directly required for the full text solution.
<VaultAliasName> Vault server name Setting Up the Vault Server
<VaultServer_PropertiesFileName> Optional: Name of the vault server Installing the Vault Server Manually
properties file. If not set, the vault server
properties file is: <VaultAliasName>.
properties
<VaultServer_PropertiesFilePath> Optional: Path of the vault client Installing the Vault Server Manually
properties file. If not set, the vault server
properties files is located at:
<install_path>\intel_a\docs\java
<catalog_name> Optional: name of the Microsoft Index MIS Administrator
Server catalog used to index vault
documents. Default value is ‘vaultv5’ if
not provided.
<rootURI> Optional: name that appears in the URL IIS Administrator
your users will use to connect to the web
application. Default value is ‘/enovia’ if
not provided.
Supported Formats
The full text engine allows indexing and searching of the following data formats:
● ANSI Text, ASCII Text
● HTML, SGML, XML
● Microsoft RTF, Microsoft Word for Windows V3.x upwards
● Microsoft Word Mac V4.x to 6.x, Microsoft Word PC V2.0 to 5.5
● Adobe PDF
● Microsoft Works V3.x upwards
● Microsoft Excel V3.x upwards
● Microsoft Powerpoint 4 upwards.
Extending Support to PDF and Other Formats
The full text infrastructure relies on MIS in order to index vault documents. In turn, MIS relies on IFilters in order to index documents of a given type.
Windows provides pre-installed IFilters for the document formats listed above. To enable indexing of other document formats stored in the vault, two
steps must be performed:
● the IFilter enabling MIS to index the new format must be installed on the machine running the vault server and MIS
● the mapping between the MIME type of the new document format and its extension must be declared in the file:
FullTextTypeMap.property.
Given that Vault stores documents in its repository without their original extension (using the .Vault extension), the full text infrastructure for the
vault needs to know the original file extension, given its MIME type of the document. The mapping between MIME type and document extensions is
declared in the following file located in:
<install_path>\intel_a\docs\java\FullTextTypeMap.property
The format of this file is very simple:
# Syntax:
# MIME.<id>=<mime type identified>
# Extension.<id>=.<extension for the MIME<.id> mime type>
If you want to index PDF documents, the Acrobat PDF IFilter must be downloaded from the www.adobe.com internet site. Once on this site, enter the
string IFilter and take the most recent version of the IFilter. For example: Adobe - Acrobat : For Windows : Adobe PDF IFilter v6.0.
The Adobe IFilter for PDF must be installed on the server machine hosting MIS, and the MIME type-to-extension mapping file must be updated
accordingly. A sample pair of lines is left at the end of the file to help enable PDF indexing:
# Uncomment these two lines for PDF indexing support (once Adobe PDF IFilter is installed)
#MIME.10 = application/pdf
#Extension.10 = .pdf
The Microsoft Index Server will not index documents for which no IFilter has been installed, until the appropriate IFilter implementation is installed.
Text written after the sharp (‘#’) character is ignored until the end of the line, allowing you to write comments in this file. The space and tab
characters are ignored.
Activating the Full Text Server

1. In a Windows Command Prompt window, change directory to:
<install_path>\intel_a\code\bin
Here is the syntax of the ActivateFullText command used to activate the full text server:
catstart –run “ActivateFullText.exe –d <fulltext_workdir>

[–catalog <catalog_name>]
[-rootURI <rootURI>]
[-alias <VaultAliasName>]”
Run the command, for example, like this:
catstart –run “ActivateFullText.exe –d E:\FullTextWorkDir –catalog SESFullTextR19 -rootURI FullTextR19 -alias

ENOVIAVaultServer”
The different parameters are described in Full Text Indexing Command Syntax.
The -env and -direnv parameters may also be used if several environment files exist.
2. Make sure that the Microsoft Indexing Service is stopped, otherwise stop it.
To stop it, select the My Computer icon then right-click and select the Manage command on the contextual menu. Go to Services and
Applications, select Indexing Service, then right-click and select the Stop command.
3. Create a new catalog.
Microsoft Index Server has its own format to manage full text indexes. To index a given set of locations, MIS uses a catalog. The indexes
corresponding to a given catalog are stored in a location associated with this catalog.
To create a catalog, right-click Indexing Service, select New > Catalog and provide the name and location of the catalog. Make sure that the
catalog name is the same as <catalog_name> you specified with the ActivateFullText command:
When the following popup appears:
click OK.
The catalog is added like this:

4. Add the following directory to the catalog:
<fulltext_workdir>\ftvault
To do so, right-click the catalog name, select the New > Directory command, and provide the path:
<fulltext_workdir>\ftvault
For example:
then click OK.
To find where MIS stores full text indexes (and other working files) associated with a given catalog, select Services and Applications, then
Indexing Service, then right-click on the catalog. Select Properties to access the information:
5. Tune Microsoft Index Server to maximize performance.
While it is not possible to guarantee when the full text index will take into account a file inserted, modified or deleted in the vault, it is possible
to tune MIS to make it as reactive as possible.To be more precise, if MIS performance is configured as shown below, the lag between the
moment when a document modification is committed on a full-text indexed vault will be equal to:
sleep time of the full text queue reader + MIS time to index a document in "Immediate mode"
MIS time in "Immediate mode" depends on the machine load. Using very slow "sleep time" for the queue reader and dedicated full text machine
can help to attain as close as possible "real time".
To set up MIS "Immediate mode", use the Microsoft Management Console, right-click on Indexing Services and then select All Tasks and
Tune Performance:
to display the Indexing Service Usage dialog box. In the Indexing Service Usage dialog box, select Customize:
then click on the Customize… button. In the Desired Performance dialog box, move the Indexing performance cursor to Instant, and the
Querying performance to High load:
then click OK, then OK again.
6. Finally, restart MIS and restart IIS.
To restart MIS, right-click Indexing Service then select the Start command.
The vault full text server is ready for service. Any documents created in the vault from now on will be automatically indexed.
XML Settings for Full Text Search

XML Settings need to be setup in the ENOVIA installation (on the client side) to enable Full Text Search capabilities. Depending on the type of
application you are deploying, the locations and contents are different.
There are two groups of applications:

● Webtop applications: ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle Navigator
● Wintop applications: the ENOVIA VPM Product Editor (the ENOVIA VPC product).
The full path of the XML Settings file for Wintop configuration is:
intel_a\resources\fulltext\fulltextserverconfig.xml
and for Webtop configuration:
intel_a\resources\fulltextconfig\fulltextserverconfig.xml
From the installed samples delivered on the CD-ROM at installation time, you will notice that they contain different tags.
As an example, the settings for Webtop deployment require setting the ftsInstalled tag to true.
Example for ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle Navigator
In order to operate full text searching in ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle Navigator, the following settings need to be customized after completing full text
server setup:
The fulltextserverconfig.xml file located at:
install_path/resources/fulltextconfig (UNIX)
install_path\resources\fulltextconfig (Windows)
contains the following:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<FullTextServers>
<ftsInstalled>false</ftsInstalled>
<server>
<ftServerHost>FTServerHost:HTTPPort</ftServerHost>
</server>
</FullTextServers>
Modify the file fulltextserverconfig.xml as follows:
Example:

<FullTextServers>
<ftsInstalled>True</ftsInstalled>
<server>
<ftServerHost>pinnacle1plb:80</ftServerHost>
<collection>ev5vault</collection>
<iisNode>enovia</iisNode> (optional)
</server>
</FullTextServers>
Note:
<ftsInstalled>True</ftsInstalled>
ftsInstalled: The value True/False in this Tag says whether the full text server is installed or not.
True : FTS is Installed.

False : FTS is Not Installed (Default).
In Server Node:
<server>
<iisNode>enovia</iisNode> (optional)
</server>
ftServerHost: FTServerHost: HTTPPort

FTServerHost: Hostname of the Full Text Server (eg. "pinnacle1plb").
HTTPPort: This is the TCP Port provided in IIS (by default it is 80)
The IIS Website Port may be checked as follows (TCP Port):
1. Go to the Computer Management Console.

2. Expand Service and Applications > Internet Information Services > Web sites.
3. Right-click on Default Web Site and click Properties.
4. Check the TCP Port number.
Collection: The collection in which the queries are made.

A default is used on the server side (for example, ev5vault)
iisNode: The IIS website name.

Optional parameter: the default /enovia is used on the server side. If the IIS Website name is other than /enovia, the iisNode Node should be
added in the Server Node (<server>).
Since the full text search supports multiple full text servers, there can be multiple server nodes (<server>) in the fulltextserverconfig.xml file.
Example:

<FullTextServers>
<ftsInstalled>true</ftsInstalled>
<server>
<iisNode>enovia</iisNode>
</server>
<server>
<ftServerHost>pinnacle1plb:80</ftServerHost> <collection>ev5vault1</collection> <iisNode>enovia</iisNode>
</server>
<server>
<ftServerHost>pinnacle1plb:80</ftServerHost> <collection>ev5vault1</collection> <iisNode>enoviaTVD</iisNode> </server>
</FullTextServers>
Notes
Multi-vault support (one FTS for multiple vaults) is available. The full text infrastructure can be used with multiple vaults, provided the following
actions are taken:
1. Run the full text activation using the ActivateFullText command on each vault, choosing distinct catalog names for each vault, and a distinct
full text working directory per vault.
2. Create an MIS catalog, one per vault, with associated catalog name and directory corresponding to where each vault stub will store the .
ftvault files.
3. The client application (ENOVIA VPM Product Editor or ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle Navigator) must support configuration of catalog name, i.e. the
fulltextserverconfig.xml file should contain details about the server name and catalog.
Example (for ENOVIA VPM Lifecycle Navigator):
<FullTextServers>
<ftsInstalled>true</ftsInstalled>
<server>
</server>
<server>
<ftServerHost>pinnacle1plb:80</ftServerHost> <collection>ev5vault1</collection>
</server>
</FullTextServers>
Multi-full text server support is also provided.
You do not need to have one full text server per vault: you can have multiple catalogs, each for one vault, in a single full text server.
Creating Documents and Search
This example uses ENOVIA VPM Product Editor:
1. Open Content Management.

2. Create and check in one or many text document(s).
3. Commit the document(s).
4. Wait for a minute. The indexing is done at the beginning of every minute.
Using the Full Text Search Command

1. Click on the Full text search icon.
2. Enter the text you want to search and Click 'Search'
3. Check the results.
Deactivating the Full Text Server
1. In a Windows Command prompt, change directory to:
<install_path>\intel_a\code\command
2. Run the InactivateFullText command:
catstart –run "InactivateFullText.exe [-alias <VaultAliasName>]
For example:
catstart –run "InactivateFullText.exe -alias ENOVIAVaultServer"
This command will not remove any data from <fulltext_workdir>.
An inactivated full text server can be re-activated later using the same full text working directory.
Any documents created, modified or deleted in a vault having an inactivated full text server will not be taken into account in the full text
indexes. If documents were created, modified or deleted while the full text server was not active, the vault must be re-indexed. Otherwise, the
full text query results will not be consistent with the actual document content and status.
Indexing Previously Existing Vaults
The ftreindex command allows you to index previously existing vaults. By default, the ftreindex command performs the following operations:
● retrieves the required parameters, in particular the name of the directory in which the .ftvault files will be written (this property was added to the
Vaultserver.properties file when you ran the ActivateFullText command)
● extracts the documents from the vault one by one
● reads the data required to create the .ftvault files
● and generates the ftvault files in the indexing directory.
Then, MIS indexes the all the new files automatically (but you can also force indexing using the Management Console).
Here is the syntax of the ftreindex command:
catstart - jrun "ftreindex"
Note that the vault server in question must have been activated in full text mode.
Exporting Variables
The vault server properties file can be located elsewhere than in the default installation path. This is managed using the following two variables:
VaultServer_PropertiesFilePath
VaultServer_PropertiesFileName
These variables have to be set to allow successful execution of the command:
catstart - jrun "ftreindex"
The key point is that the information of the vault to re-index is not an input parameter for the command, and has to be explicitly provided using the
VaultServer_PropertiesFilePath and VaultServer_PropertiesFileName properties.
What Happens if the Full Text Server Is Not Active For a Short Time?
If the full text server Is not active for a short time, the consequences depend on "what was not active" when the documents were written to the vault:
● if full text indexing was not active: this can happen for example, when migrating an R17 to an R19 vault, or when a decision has been taken not to
activate full text indexing immediately in the production version.
Solution: use the reindexing command since in this case there are missing .ftvault files to inform MIS what it has to index.
● if full text indexing has been activated, but MIS has been stopped;
Solution: restart MIS, then MIS will index the .ftvault files submitted while MIS was stopped. The only method for determining if the indexes are
up-to-date is to look at the MIS Console to determine the number of files remaining to be indexed for the catalog created to index the vault.
● if full text indexing has been activated, MIS is running, but IIS has been stopped;
There are no consequences on indexing: the query service will be available immediately once IIS has been restarted.
Advanced task: Activate Full Text for Multiple Vault Servers Located on the Same Machine
The following instructions are required if there is, for a given ENOVIA V5 VPM installation, more than one vault server running on the same machine,
and if full text is required on more than one vault server running on the same machine.
To index several vault servers running on the same machine, the only requirement is to follow the activation steps as many times as there are vaults,
to have the same <fulltext_workdir>, and to create the MIS catalog only once.
Warning: it is currently not possible to have more that one full text server active at the same time on the same machine, even if these servers
originate from distinct ENOVIA installations or distinct ENOVIA releases.
Limitations
1. There is no full text solution for vaults on UNIX. The by-pass is to use a vault on Windows for documents on which full text indexing is needed.
Mounting a vault file system on a Windows machine using Hummingbird NFS or a similar solution is not supported by Microsoft Index Server.
MIS prevents users from adding a directory originating from an NFS mount to a catalog.
2. Due to the underlying MIS technology, it is not possible to activate full text from more than one ENOVIA installation on the same machine. To
activate full text, an IFilter for is registered for the .ftvault document extension. This IFilter is part of the unloaded ENOVIA vault
administration product, and Windows does not allow registering of more than more IFilter for a given extension.
Temporary ASP.NET Files
When using the Index Server, you must exclude the Temporary ASP.NET Files directory from the folders that the Index Server scans. To do so, follow
these steps:
1. Click Start, point to All Programs, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Computer Management.
2. Expand the Services and Applications node, expand the Indexing Service node, and then expand the System node.
3. Right-click the Directories folder, point to New, and then click Directory from the subform to open the Add Directory dialog box.
4. Click Browse, and then locate the Temporary ASP.NET Files directory. You typically find the Temporary ASP.NET files in the following path:
c:\<WINDIR>\Microsoft.NET\Framework\<Version Number>\Temporary ASP.NET Files
Note <Version Number> is the version of .NET Framework installed on your computer.
5. Click No under the Include in Index? option buttons.
6. Click OK to close.
7. Close the Computer Management dialog box.
8. Restart the Indexing Services service.
For more information, refer to Microsoft Article ID 329065.

How to Set Up File Transfer Mode for the Vault
This document will show you how to set up the Vault file transfer mode. This vault
administration documentation is for UNIX only.
First of all, a short explanation about the different Vault file transfer mode available
and theirs benefits. Three file transfer modes are available for the Vault: CORBA, HTTP
and NFS.
CORBA file transfer mode

This mode enables vault client applications (for instance: CATIAV5/CATIAV4, ENOVIA
desktop and server) to access vault file by CORBA protocol to transfer data. This is the
default mode, no particular needs are required, very simple to setup. Client
applications do not need to access the Vault directories (high security level).
HTTP file transfer mode (read operations only)

desktop and server) to access vault file by HTTP protocol to transfer data for all read
operations. Write operations are done by CORBA protocol. This mode requires an
apache HTTP server with access to Vault directories, but client applications still do not
need to access the Vault directories. The benefit is a smaller cpu usage for the Vault
Server. Thus, Vault Server can serve more user request simultaneously.
NFS file transfer mode

desktop and server) to access vault file by NFS. The benefits are a better elapsed time
for users and a smaller cpu usage for the Vault Server. Thus, the Vault Server can
serve more user requests simultaneously. The drawbacks are that you need to have a
fully functional NFS link between the clients and the Vault server. It is also less
secured as all clients are able to access the vault directories.
File transfer protocol declaration

File transfer protocols are declared in the VaultClient.properties file. You can modify
default protocol for read or write operations and set a specific one for a given
VaultAliasName.
VaultClient properties file example:
## File read protocol declaration

VaultClient_ReadProtocol_2 = HTTP
## File write protocol declaration

## Default file transfer protocol

VaultClient_Active_ReadProtocol = CORBA
VaultClient_Active_WriteProtocol = CORBA
##Data BlockSize parameter

## Trace parameter
## Default alias name


## Use default file transfer protocol which is CORBA

## Use NFS file transfer protocol
VaultClient_Vault2_ReadVaultServerHostName = floydsy
VaultClient_Vault2_ReadProtocol = NFS
VaultClient_Vault2_WriteVaultServerHostName = floydsy
VaultClient_Vault2_WriteProtocol = NFS

## Use HTTP file transfer protocol (read operations only)
VaultClient_Vault3_ReadProtocol = HTTP
VaultClient_Vault3_ReadHTTPServerHost = caen
VaultClient_Vault3_ReadHTTPServerPort = 8080
Example Explanation
This VaultClient properties file declares three VaultAliasName: Vault1, Vault2 and
Vault3.
VaultClient_Active_ReadProtocol, and VaultClient_Active_WriteProtocol keys define the
default read/write file transfer protocol. In the example above it is CORBA. There are
no file transfer protocol keys defined for VaultAliasName Vault1, it means that the
default protocol is used. As VaultClient_Vault2_ReadProtocol and
VaultClient_Vault2_WriteProtocol are set to NFS, the file transfer mode for
VaultAliasName Vault2 is NFS. In the case of VaultAliasName Vault3, there is no
protocol defined for write operation, so the default one is used (CORBA). However
HTTP protocol is defined for read operations. In order to be consistent, two additional
keys are required for HTTP protocol. Theses keys are used to define the HTTP server
host and communication port.
How to Set Up CORBA File Transfer Mode

This is the default mode so you have nothing to do, but you can explicitly set the
CORBA transfer mode by setting the following keys.
Vault Client side modifications
Modify or add the following lines in the $CATInstallPath/docs/java/VaultClient.

properties file according to the application behavior you want:
Default file transfer protocol update:
File transfer protocol update for a given VaultAliasName:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadProtocol = CORBA
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_WriteProtocol = CORBA
Additional features
You have the ability to specify a default block size for CORBA protocol by setting the
following key to the wanted value (CORBA block size is limited up to 7M):
VaultClient_CORBABlockSize = 1048576
You can specify block size for CORBA protocol for a given VaultAliasName:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadCORBABlockSize = 1048576
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_WriteCORBABlockSize = 1048576
How to Set Up HTTP File Transfer Mode (read

operations only)
Keep in mind that an HTTP server is supposed to be installed correctly. This server
must have access to VaultServer directories. In order to avoid file access right
problems, we advise you to run the HTTP server under the same operating system
user you already use for the VaultServer. Vault HTTP file transfer mode is only certified
with the Apache HTTP server.
Vault Client Side Modifications


VaultClient_Active_ReadProtocol = HTTP

VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName _ReadProtocol = HTTP
And for each VaultAliasName where HTTP protocol is wanted:

VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadHTTPServerHost = Hostname
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadHTTPServerPort = PortNumber
Hostname: the name of the workstation where the HTTP server is installed.
PortNumber: the communication port number of the HTTP server.
Additional features
You have the ability to specify a default block size for HTTP protocol by setting the
following key to the wanted value:
VaultClient_HTTPBlockSize = 1048576
You can specify block size for HTTP protocol for a given VaultAliasName:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadHTTPBlockSize = 1048576
How to Set Up NFS File Transfer Mode

Keep in mind that NFS is supposed to be installed correctly. VaultServer directories are
supposed to be accessible from client and server applications under the same path on
each workstation.
Vault Server Side Modifications
Add the following lines in the $CATInstallPath/docs/java/VaultServer.properties file:
VaultServer_TmpFilesAccessRights = 666
VaultServer_SecuredFilesAccessRights = 444
Vault Client Side Modifications


VaultClient_Active_ReadProtocol = NFS
VaultClient_Active_WriteProtocol = NFS

VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName _ReadProtocol = NFS
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName _WriteProtocol = NFS
Beware: If the vault server is not empty, you have to change the file access rights of
the already existing files in order to allow client application to read secured files and
read/write temporary files.
Additional features
You have the ability to specify a default block size for NFS protocol by setting the
following key to the wanted value:
VaultClient_NFSBlockSize = 1048576
You can specify block size for NFS protocol for a given VaultAliasName:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_ReadNFSBlockSize = 1048576
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_WriteNFSBlockSize = 1048576
You have the ability to specify a mount directory and a mount point in order to have a
client file access path different from the server side by setting the following keys to the
wanted value:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_NFSMountDir = /u/users/ojh
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_NFSMountPoint = F:
The example above illustrates a Windows client accessing a Unix Server with the /u/
users/ojh UNIX path mounted on F: on the Windows workstation.
If you use a \ (backslash) in the value of the properties:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_NFSMountDir
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_NFSMountPoint
you must double each backslash. For example, if the mount point is:
\\remoteVaultDir\VSRepo
you must double the backslashes like this:
VaultClient_MyVaultAliasName_NFSMountPoint =\\\\remoteVaultDir\\VSRepo
Vault Administration Tools
There are two vault administration tools. The purpose of the first one is to encrypt
database password for the Vault Server properties file, and the second one is about
how to administrate a Vault Server from a remote workstation. The remote
workstation requires an ENOVIA VPM Product Editor installation (VPC) or Vault
Administration (VAR) configuration.
This vault administration tools are available on both UNIX and Windows. This section
illustrates the commands on UNIX.
Conventions for command syntax:
Feature Example Explanation

Bold text START Enter text exactly as written
Lowercase italics user_name A clause value; substitute an appropriate value.
Separate alternative syntax elements that may be
Vertical bar |
optional or mandatory.
One or more optional items. If two items appear
Brackets [OFF | ON] separated by |, enter one of them. Do not enter
the brackets or |.
A choice of mandatory items. If two items appear
Braces {OFF | ON} separated by |, enter one of them. Do not enter
the braces or |.
Database password encryption for the Vault Server properties file

You can generate the database password to put in the Vault Server properties file by
using the following command logged as root:
./catstart -run "GenVaultPasswd -UserName user_name -Passwd

user_database_password"
Then, you can copy and paste the password from the output into the properties file.
The pertaining key is VaultServer_DBPassword.
Some usage help will be provided if you execute:
./catstart -run GenVaultPasswd

VaultServer administration tool
In order to allow remote administration services on Vault Server, a tool called vsadm,
which stands for Vault Server Administration, has been supplied. Some usage help will
be provided if you execute:
./catstart -run vsadm
How to start/stop a Vault Server from a remote workstation
You can start a remote Vault Server by using the following command logged on as
root:
./catstart -run "vsadm START {ALIAS vaultserver_alias_name
VAULT vaultserver_name
HOST vaultserver_host
PORT vaultserver_port }"
You can stop a remote Vault Server by using the following command:
./catstart -run "vsadm STOP {ALIAS vaultserver_alias_name |
How to refresh Vault Server properties from a remote workstation

You can reload Vault Server properties by using the following command logged on as
root:
./catstart -run "vsadm REFRESH PROPERTIES
Here is the list of VaultServer properties you can modify and reload:
VaultServer_ThreadNumber
VaultServer_Trace
VaultServer_DBMINPoolSize
VaultServer_DBMAXPoolSize
VaultServer_FDSMIN
VaultServer_NumOfRepo
VaultServer_Repo_x_Name
VaultServer_Repo_x_Path
VaultServer_Repo_x_ReadOnly
VaultServer_Repo_x_TmpDirName
VaultServer_Repo_x_Priority
VaultServer_Repo_x_NumOfSecDir
VaultServer_Repo_x_SecDireName_y
If you are using a VaultCache, you can modify and reload the following additional
properties:
VaultServer_Cache_MaxSize
VaultServer_Cache_CleanThreshold
VaultServer_Cache_Rate
VaultServer_Cache_Enabled
VaultServer_Cache_TimeoutForClean
How to enable Vault Server tracing from a remote workstation

You can enable tracing on a Vault Server by using the following command logged as
root:
./catstart -run "vsadm TRACE {ALIAS vaultserver_alias_name |
PORT vaultserver_port }
{ON | OFF }"
How to list VaultAliasName

You can list the whole set of VaultAliasName entries by using the following command
logged on as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm LIST ALIAS"
How to get Vault Client configuration parameters on the local

workstation
You can get Vault Client parameters configuration by using the following command
logged on as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm GET CLIENT CFG"
How to get Vault Server configuration parameters from a remote

workstation
You can get Vault Server configuration parameters by using the following command
logged on as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm GET SERVER CFG FOR {ALIAS

vaultserver_alias_name|
PORT vaultserver_port}"
How to have a Vault Server online/offline from a remote workstation

You can have a Vault Server online/offline by using the following command logged on
as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm TAKE { ALIAS vaultserver_alias_name |
PORT vaultserver_port }
{ONLINE | OFFLINE }"
When a Vault Server is offline, all database connections are released and client
requests receive a specific answer which is a dedicated error message. However, client/
server orbix connections are kept. Thus, the client applications do not need to be
restarted when the Vault Server is put back online.
How to test a Vault Server from a remote workstation

You can test if a Vault Server is OK by using the following command logged as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm TEST ALIAS vaultserver_alias_name"
This test creates a file in the vault and reads it. The creation of the file confirms that
the vault is running correctly.
How to get Vault Server request queues state from a remote workstation
You can get Vault Server request queues state by using the following command logged
on as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm GET SERVER REQUEST STATE FOR { ALIAS

vaultserver_alias_name|
When a request arrives on the Vault Server it is dispatched to a dedicated queue for
execution, depending on the request type.
There is a dedicated queue to manage the commit request (commit priority). The
commit command releases some critical resources such as a DB connection on the
Vault Server; that is why there is a dedicated pipe to manage it.
There is a dedicated queue to manage high priority requests such as shutdown.

Some commands have to be executed immediately; that is why there is a dedicated
pipe to manage them.
There is a default queue for all other request types (standard priority). For
instance, the request used to create a Vault document is a standard priority request.
Most of the time you should not have more than two or three for each priority queue.
Otherwise, it means that you may have a lack of CPU or a lack of execution thread.
For instance when you have:
Standard priority request queue state: <12>;
it means that 11 remote users are waiting to have their request executed on the Vault
Server.
Bad elapse time
The first thing to do is to check the CPU consumption. If the CPU consumption on the
machine is more than 70%, additional processors have to be added on the machine. If
the CPU consumption is low, then the:
VaultServer_ThreadNumber
parameter should be increased.
Commands for Vault Cache Management
How to force documents refresh between Vault Cache and Vault Servers
from a remote workstation
You can force document refresh between Vault Cache and all Vault Servers by using
the following command logged as root:
./catstart -run "vsadm REFRESH DOCUMENTS VAULT vaultserver_name
PORT vaultserver_port
[FETCHSIZE fetch_size_value]"
The command above trigger a document version check and refresh for the Whole set
of document hold by the Vault Cache regarding all the Vault Server cached by the
Vault Cache. You can specify your own fetchsize if you want.
How to force documents refresh between Vault Cache and a given Vault
Server from a remote workstation
You can force document refresh between Vault Cache and a given Vault Server
identified by an alias by using the following command logged as root:
FROM ALIAS vaultserver_alias_name
[FETCHSIZE fetch_size_value]"
The command above triggers a document version check and refresh for the whole set
of documents held by the Vault Cache regarding a given Vault Server. You can specify
your own fetchsize if you want.
How to add new documents into Vault Cache and force document
refresh from an input file containing a list of Vault document URLs
You can add new documents and force document refresh between Vault Cache and a
given Vault Server by using the following command logged as root:
HOST
vaultserver_host
PORT
vaultserver_port
FROM FILE
file_full_path_name
[ FETCHSIZE
fetch_size_value]"
The command above triggers a document version check and refresh for the list of vault
document URL specify by the input file. If a document is missing in the Vault Cache, it
is added automatically. You can specify your own fetchsize if you want.
The FROM FILE file which needs to be used should be a text file and should contain a
list of Vault URLs, and the format of Vault URLs should look like this:
vault://VaultAliasName/VaultDocumentOIDinHexa
For example, for the documents handled by Content Management, the Vault URL can
be found within the V_VaultDoc attribute of the VPMDocSecuredFile type.
For example, create a file, for instance VDocURLColl.txt in which the entries look like
this:
.....
vault://VaultServerINT18/6CCBDB530000183045E439AD00000004
.....
and then provide the path of the same file while using the command below.
./catstart -run "vsadm REFRESH DOCUMENTS
FROM FILE file_full_path_name
[ FETCHSIZE fetch_size_value]"
Analyzing and Repairing Vault Links
This task explains how to analyze and repair vault links to be able to restore a consistent state of the data after a
crash of the vault server file system or vault server data base, particularly in an environment where the metadata
database is centralized and the vault servers are distributed among several sites.
After restoration, the reporting tool, in a specific number of cases described below, will analyze the ENOVIA V5 VPM
metadata, vault server metadata and vault server file systems in order to track broken links, and provides repair
functions and correction proposals whenever possible.
Errors Tracked
The tool can track four types of errors broadly divided into two categories:
● dangling pointers
● unreferenced data.
ENOVIA V5 VPM dangling pointers to vault metadata
This can occur after a vault database server crash. Any vault metadata created after the last backup will be missing in
the restored vault database. But ENOVIA V5 VPM metadata still points to the data in the central ENOVIA V5 VPM
database server.
Vault metadata dangling pointers to file
This can occur:

● after a vault database server crash: any vault metadata deleted after the last backup will reappear after the restore
of the crashed vault server but the pointed file has been deleted.
● after a vault file system crash: any vault file created after the last backup will be missing in the restored vault file
system, but vault metadata still points to the data in the corresponding vault server database.
Unreferenced vault metadata
This can occur after a vault database server crash. Any vault metadata deleted after the last backup will reappear after
the restore of the crashed vault server but the corresponding ENOVIA V5 VPM metadata is missing from the central
ENOVIA V5 VPM database.
Unreferenced vault files
This can occur:

● after a vault database server crash: any vault metadata created after the last backup will be missing in the restored
vault server but the corresponding vault file still exists in the vault file system.
● after a vault file system crash: any vault file deleted after the last backup will reappear after the restore of the
crashed vault file system, but the corresponding vault metadata has been deleted from the vault database.
Running the Vault Link Checker
Run the vault link checker on the machine on which the vault server is installed (this is the vault server being checked)
as follows:
./catstart -run "ENOCheckVaultLink.sh"
The arguments are:
ENOCheckVaultLink.sh [ -h | -TmpDir tmpdir -DatabaseVendor databaseVendor -DatabaseName databaseName -

TableOwner tableOwner -ConnectUser connectUser -ConnectPasswd connectPasswd -FileOut fileOut[-ExceptVaultAlias
exceptVaultAlias | -ListVaultAlias listVaultAlias ] [-ExceptDomain exceptDomain | -ListDomain listDomain] [-
AfterTimeStamp afterTimeStamp] [-NOCorrection | -ONLYCorrection]
Option Optional/Mandatory Description

-TmpDir mandatory A directory where the executables can read and write
temporary data
-DatabaseName mandatory the connection string to the central database
-DatabaseVendor mandatory the database vendor [DB2 | ORACLE]
-TableOwner mandatory the database schema (on DB2) or the database structures
owner (on ORACLE)
-ConnectUser mandatory the user to be used to connect on the central database, read/
update data on the central database
-ConnectPasswd mandatory the password of the user used to connect to the central
database
-FileOut mandatory The absolute name of the file that will be generated. The file
has to be generated in a writable directory for the user that
will launch the shell.
-ExceptVaultAlias optional Not yet supported.
-ListVaultAlias mandatory Enter the alias name of the restored vault. This alias has to
be found in the vault client properties.
Only lists with one item are supported for the moment. This
means one vault alias name, the alias name of the vault
server which crashed. This alias is located in the VaultClient.
properties file on the central ENOVIA V5 VPM server.
-ExceptDomain optional enter the name of data domains found in the admin data
that are not to be checked
-ListDomain optional enter a list of the only data domains that are to be checked
-AfterTimeStamp optional enter a timestamp in the following format (usual database
time format):
%4d-%2d-%2d-%2d.%2d.%2d.%6d
this will check only the ENOVIA V5 VPM metadata modified

after this timestamp.
-NOCorrection optional do not perform the correction step
-ONLYCorrection optional perform only the correction step (with the info stored in the
TmpDir from a previous Check run with the -NOCorrection
option).
After the check, the tool only uses the information contained
in the -TmpDir option but uses the file of the option -FileOut,
obtained after first running the tool in -NOCorrection mode.
-h optional displays help.
Narrowing the Scope of Processing

You can narrow the scope of the processing performed by the tool as follows:
By a timeframe
The tool will use the LASTUPDATEDATE column to collect the vault links to check. Only dangling pointers to vault
metadata or vault file systems will benefit from this option.
By a list of vault alias
Both LIST (…) and EXCEPT (…) options are available. The standard use is to narrow the process with the alias of the
crashed vault.
By a list of domains
Both LIST (…) and EXCEPT (…) options are available. Only dangling pointers to vault metadata or vault file systems will
benefit from this option.
Reporting tool steps
The tool performs the following steps:
● extracts all the vault links from the central ENOVIA V5 VPM database (optimized with narrowing capabilities)
● checks the consistency between the extracted links and the vault metadata and file system.
● tracks unreferenced vault metadata and files.
● outputs an XML format report containing the detected errors
● processes the correction proposals.
Understanding the Generated File

The output file generated contains XML tags describing the detected problems. There are 5 nodes that can appear in
the XML file:
ROOTNODE
this tag aggregates all the other tags.
DANGLINGLCA (ENOVIA V5 VPM dangling pointers to vault metadata)
attributes of the XML node comment

hexadecimal value of the OID of the object pointing to
OID
a missing vault metadata
TYPE type of the object pointing to a missing vault metadata
attribute name that points to the missing vault
Attribute
metadata
URL the URL of the missing vault metadata
VDOID not filled
DOCLOCATION not filled
DANGLINGVAULT (Vault metadata dangling pointers to file)
attributes of the XML node comment comment

hexadecimal value of the OID of the object pointing to
OID
a missing vault file
TYPE type of the object pointing to a missing vault file
Attribute attribute name that points to the missing vault file
URL the URL of the faulty vault metadata
VDOID the OID of the vault metadata
DOCLOCATION the expected physical location of the missing file
UNREFVAULT (Unreferenced vault metadata)
attributes of the XML node comment comment

OID the identifier of the unreferenced the vault metadata
the alias of the vault where the unreferenced vault file
ALIAS
is stored
UNREFFILE (Unreferenced vault files)
attributes of the XML node comment

Path the path where the unreferenced vault file is stored
Name the name of the unreferenced vault file
Size the size of the unreferenced vault file (not filled)
the alias of the vault where the unreferenced vault file
ALIAS
is stored
Correction Modes
The tool ENOCheckVaultLink command can be run in the following correction modes.
No automatic correction
No automatic correction of the detected problems. You must run the command using all the mandatory options (not
just -NOCorrection). The XML output file will be generated in the -FileOut location. Along with the mandatory options, -
NOCorrection must also be specified.
Automatic correction of the detected problems
To correct the detected problems automatically, you must run the command using all the mandatory options (but
neither -ONLYCorrection nor -NOCorrection).
Note: automatic correction only corrects errors for unreferenced vault metadata and unreferenced vault files, as well
as the correction that is applied.
Customize the desired corrections in the XML file
Run the tool in no automatic correction mode using all the mandatory options. Then, edit the XML file generated in the
-FileOut location to specify the corrections you want to perform. Finally, rerun the command using the same options,
except this time replace the -NOCorrection option by the -ONLYCorrection option.
Correction scope and Limitations

ENOVIA V5 VPM dangling pointers to vault metadata
The ENOVIA V5 VPM dangling pointers identified by the tool have to be manually repaired.
Vault metadata dangling pointers to file
The impacted vault metadata identified by the tool have to be manually repaired.
Unreferenced vault metadata
In this case, the tool will be able to automatically clean the vault database.
Unreferenced vault files
In this case, the tool will be able to automatically remove the files.
Return Codes for the Vault Link Checker
The return code is not meaningful to know if errors have been reported in the output file. It just indicates if all steps
have been fully performed.
0 : all steps have been performed

1 : step 1 failed.
2 : step 2 failed
3 : step 3 failed.
100: bad arguments.
Repairing ENOVIA V5 VPM Dangling Pointers
There is a way to try to repair ENOVIA V5 VPM dangling pointers (which the Vault Link Checker cannot do).
Using a two-step process, the Vault Link Restore Utility makes propositions to repair the dangling pointers, and repairs
the accepted ones.
During the first step, simulation, it uses the DANGLINGLCA tag in the Generated XML file, to access to the database
and to generate an output XML file which proposes to:
● delete the Format
● delete the Iteration
● find a Preferred Iteration.
The command syntax of this simulation step is:
>CheckVaultLink_Restorator -user uuu -pwd ppp -role rrr -isimul InSimul.xml -osimul OutSimul.xml
Here is an example of an OutSimul.xml file:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding='UTF-8' ?>

<!DOCTYPE docChange >
<DOCCHANGE>
<!-- ************************************************************************************** - >
<!-- * - >
<!-- * Warning :only authorized modifications are deletes of whole Document Revision blocks - >
<!-- * - >
<!-- ************************************************************************************** - >
<!-- * - >
<!-- * Warning :if execution is succesfull ,this file will be renamed ,do not re-use it - >
<!-- * ,restart a simulation - >
<!-- * - >
<!-- ************************************************************************************** - >
<DOCREV V_version="---" V_description="---" V_ID="PGR2" >
<ACTION Action="Delete" V_doc_iter_num="0" OID_MO="ACE4C6CE0014A0544048BF37000AF3E1"
TYPE_MO="80A2B3BD00000509384D10620005D1D1" DD_MO="454E4F44525F444F4344495220202020" />
</DOCREV>
</DOCCHANGE>
The Data Administrator chooses to accept some of the propositions by leaving them in the file and to refuse some
others by deleting them from the file.
During the second step, execution, the Vault Link Restorator Utility reads the file reviewed by the Data Administrator,
and applies the repair propositions.
The command syntax of this step is:
>CheckVaultLink_Restorator -user uuu -pwd ppp -role rrr -exec InExec.xml
Note that the Generated file has evolved to a certain extent: for both DANGLINGLCA and DANGLINGVAULT, the tags
are:
OID
TYPE
Attribute
TYPEOID new: hexadecimal value of the Type the pointing object
DATADOMAINOID new: hexadecimal value of the Data Domain the pointing
object
URL
VDOID
DOCLOCATION
DOCSIZE new: size (in bytes) of the pointed document
LASTUPDATEDATE new: last update date of the document
The shell arguments of ENOCheckVaultLink.sh have not changed.

Setting Up a DB2 DATALINK Vault Server
This document will show you how to setup DB2 DATALINK mode for Vault operations.
This vault administration documentation is for UNIX only.

This setup is implemented in two steps.
Set Up the DB2 DATALINK system:

See DB2 DATALINK documentation for more information about how to setup a datalink
system.
Vault Server Specific Installation Operations due to

DATALINK
Data Structure Creation
Beware: Each Vault Server is supposed to have its own data structure.
Do not share Vault Server data structures between several Vault Servers!
You will find the reference files for the data structure creation (tables, index, etc.) under the
following directory:
The suffix of these reference files is .clp for DB2.
They are named:
VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp when creating tables
grant_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp when creating grants on tables

You can also use the drop_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp and the
revoke_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp files to remove respectively tables and grants on tables.
When creating your data structure, you have to customize the above mentioned files.
To do so:
Original file name Duplicated file name
VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL_MyVault.clp
grant_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp grant_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL_MyVault.clp
drop_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp drop_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL_MyVault.clp
revoke_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL.clp revoke_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL_MyVault.clp
tablespaces name if necessary. In the case of the grant file, we advise you to change the "to
public" right into "to vault_structure_owner". The datalink options used to create the
datalink column on the VAULTDOCUMENT table are:
linktype url file link control integrity all read permission DB write
permission blocked recovery yes on unlink restore
See DB2 documentation if you want to change options above. Beware: the on unlink delete
option is not supported.
3. Execute the VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL_MyVault.clp file and the related grant file
(grant_VPM_VAULTFILEDB2DL_My_Vault.clp) on your database:
a. logon the database as Database Administrator
b. under the DB2 prompt, run the command:
4. Continue Vault Server installation as a standard Vault Server installation.
Vault Server properties file modifications for datalink mode activation:

Add the following lines in the $CATInstallPath/docs/java/VaultServer.properties file:
VaultServer_DLFMHostServerName = datalink_file_manager_host_name
VaultServer_DB2DATALINK = true
datalink_file_manager_host_name: name of the workstation where the datalink

file manager service is running (see DB2 DATALINK documentation for more information
about the datalink file manager).
ENOVIA Windows Vault Database Migration
From V5R18 To V5R19
Introduction
These instructions apply only to migrating the Vault database. This process is required for
successful migration from R18 to R19. However, you must also run the standard ENOVIA V5
VPM migration separately in order to achieve a complete migration from R18 to R19.
Remember that Vault data may be contained in the regular ENOVIA V5 VPM database (the
same one that contains all the production data) or it may be in a separate database, or
both. You will need to run this migration once for each database that contains Vault
data. If you are uncertain about the location of your vault data, you should determine the
names of all the databases that contain vault data before starting this Vault Migration script.
You can only run this migration script on one database at a time. If you have multiple Vault
databases, you will have to run the Vault database migration multiple times.
These instructions assume you have completed the standard ENOVIA V5 VPM database
migration. If you have not completed it, please stop and run the ENOVIA V5 VPM database
migration first.
These instructions do not cover migration of a Unix database. This is covered in a separate
document.
These instructions do not cover migration of the Vault environment. This is covered in a
separate document. You must change the ENOVIA V5 VPM environment in R19 to be able to
use the R18 vault files. You must perform both the Vault environment changes and the Vault
Database Migration in order to access the same vault information in R19 that you were using
in R18.
Vault Database Migration Instructions

1. MAKE AN OFFLINE BACKUP OF ALL VAULT DATABASES and copy them to tape
before starting any migration.
2. Ensure that you are migrating directly from V5R17 to V5R19. These procedures do not
support any other releases or migration effort. Do not attempt to use any other
releases of ENOVIA V5 VPM with these instructions. Also ensure that your V5R19 Vault
path points to the same path as your V5R17 Vault.
3. Ensure that you have a working V5R17 installation, including a completely functional
Oracle or DB2 database that conforms to the required level of Oracle or DB2 software
and is up and running before beginning migration. There should be no users
connected to ENOVIA V5 VPM or the database at the time of migration.
4. Logon to the ENOVIA V5 VPM product server with the ENOVIA administrator ID that
you defined during your PLMDBSetup. This will be the same admnistrator ID that you
used to run the regular database migration. DO NOT attempt to run the database
migration as root.
5. cd to the code/command directory under your R19 product install path. This path will
appear something like one of these:
~/aix_a/code/command
~/solaris_a/code/command
~/hp_b/code/command
under the directory where you installed the product.

6. Create (for example, using the notepad editor) a batch file containing all the
parameters you will need to run the migration script. The parameters should all wrap
continuously as one line; there should be no carriage return. The batch file must have
the suffix .bat to be executable. If it does not exceed the operating system limit for
the length of a line, you could also type these commands directly onto a command
line instead of using a command file.
7. If you are using a DB2 database, you will need to launch this vault database migration
command line or command file from a DB2 command window. You can generate this
window by going to a C:/ shell prompt or an MKS toolkit Korn shell and typing the
command db2cmd. If you are using Oracle, you will need to launch this command
from an MKS toolkit Korn shell. Failure to use the correct shell documented in this
step will cause the script to fail. Other shells and command lines are not supported.
The parameters are:
DBVendor : ORACLE or DB2

DBName : Database name
DBAdmHome : Database administrator home directory
(for userid that created the database in Oracle or DB2)
DBAID : Database administrator ID (a user-id that has DBA permissions; may be
different from the ID that owns the tables)
IdxTbsName : Tablespace name for indexes inside the database
TbsName : Tablespace name for tables inside the database (can be the same as
IdxTbsName)
For command line help with this script, simply type Upgrade518_Vault.sh -h and
press Enter from the Unix command line and it will return some help text.
Here is a sample of 2 executable files, one for Oracle and one for DB2. Notice the
placement of the quotation marks and the direction of the slash “\” character:
ORACLE:
"C:\B18\intel_a\code\bin\catstart" -run "sh C:\B18\intel_a\code\command
\Upgrade518NT_Vault.sh
-DBVendor ORACLE -DBName BOLODB -DBAdmHome C:\ora102 -DBAID vpm2adm -
TbsName ENOTBS -IdxTbsName ENOTBS –tmp C:\migration\R19"
DB2:
"C:\B18D01\intel_a\code\bin\catstart" -run "sh C:\B18\intel_a\code
\command\Upgrade518NT_Vault.sh
-DBVendor DB2 -DBName DB17 -DBAdmHome C:\DB2 -DBAID lcaadm -TbsName
ENOTBS
-IdxTbsName ENOTBS -tmp C:\migration\R19"
8. chmod 700 vault.bat (where vault.bat is the command file you created in #6
above) You must give the full rights to execute this file to the ENOVIA Administrator
ID which will run the upgrade shell using chgrp/chmod UNIX commands (the user
identified above in Step #4).
9. Execute the vault.bat script from command line (For example: .\vault.bat or ./
vault.bat ). You will be prompted to enter the password for the DBAID. This
password will appear on the screen when you type it, so you must take steps to
safeguard the privacy of this password.
10. Informational status messages will appear. At the end of the script a message will
appear clearly indicating the outcome of all the steps. Note that one of the steps
(when running with Oracle database) will pause at a step that attempts to connect to
the database. It advises that if this step does not complete in less than 2 minutes,
you should interrupt it and diagnose the reason for the failure of Oracle connections.
If this connection failure (or hung condition) occurs, the best way to diagnose the
problem is to attempt to connect to Oracle while running as the same userid that was
executing the migration, using a command line like this:
sqlplus DBAID/Password@DATABASE
This should return an error that your database administrator can diagnose. Common
causes for failure include:
❍ Environment failure – not having the ORACLE_HOME value set properly or the PATH
does not include $ORACLE_HOME/bin
❍ Wrong database name
❍ Wrong user-ID or wrong password
❍ Oracle listener not running
❍ tnsnames.ora file not containing the DATABASE name
❍ database not started (use the Oracle startup command)
❍ incorrect database admin home path on the migration script command line
Once the database connection issues are resolved, you can restart the script from the
beginning.
11. In case of failure, go to the directory you specified for the -tmp parameter and ensure
that all *518* files are preserved. Some of them will be needed by Support to
determine the cause and solution to the problem. Move these files to a safe location
before running the program again. The script is completely restartable. If it fails for
any reason, you can relaunch it without any actions needed to clean up.
12. Below is some sample output showing the results of a successful run of
Upgrade518NT_Vault.sh
Now working on tables owned by these Users:

EV5ADM5
Now working on EV5ADM5...
Checking db2 results...
Number of DB2 errors found was: 0
Successfully completed update of DBNAME EV5ADM5 tables.
Status of R17 > R19 Vault Migration = SUCCESS
13. You can verify the results by looking in the directory you designated in the –tmp
option and viewing the file: Upgrade518NT_Vault_internal.log This file has a log of
the actions that were taken on your database.
14. Vault database migration should take less than 5 minutes. If you find that the process
is running longer than this, most likely something is wrong. See the tips above about
what to do if the process gets hung.
ENOVIA UNIX Vault Database Migration From

V5R18 To V5R19
Introduction
databases, you will have to run the Vault migration multiple times.
migration. If you have not completed it, please stop and run the standard migration first.
These instructions do not cover migration of a Windows database. This is covered in a

separate document.
in R17.
Vault Migration Instructions:

you defined during your PLMDBSetup. This will be the same administrator ID that you
used to run the regular database migration. DO NOT attempt to run the migration as
root.
~/hp_b/code/command

6. Create (for example, using the vi editor) a command file (e.g. vault.sh) containing
all the parameters you will need to run the migration script, starting the command
with the ./catstart –run prefix. The parameters should all wrap continuously as one
line; there should be no carriage return. If it does not exceed the operating system
limit for the length of a line, you could also type these commands directly onto a
command line instead of using a command file.
The parameters are:

DBAdmHome : Database administrator home directory (for userid that created the
database in Oracle or DB2)
IdxTbsName)
Here is a sample of 2 executable files, one for Oracle and one for DB2:
ORACLE:
/installpath/R19/aix_a/code/command/catstart -run "Upgrade518_Vault.sh -
DBVendor ORACLE -DBName ORA1718 -DBAdmHome /oracle/app/oracle/
product/9.2.0 -DBAID dbausr -IdxTbsName ENOIDX -TbsName ENOTBS -tmp /tmp/
mig"
DB2:
./catstart -run "Upgrade518_Vault.sh -DBVendor DB2 -DBName DB1718 -
DBAdmHome /home/db2adm -DBAID dbausr -IdxTbsName ENOTBS -TbsName ENOTBS -
tmp /tmp/vaultmig"
7. chmod 700 vault.sh (where vault.sh is the command file you created in #6 above)
You must give the full rights to execute this file to the ENOVIA Administrator ID which
will run the upgrade shell using chgrp/chmod UNIX commands (the user identified
above in Step #4).
8. Execute the vault.sh script from Unix command line (For example: ./vault.sh ).
You will be prompted to enter the password for the DBAID. This password will not
appear on the screen when you type it.
you should press the Control-D buttons on your keyboard to interrupt it and diagnose
the reason for the failure of Oracle connections. If this connection failure (or hung
condition) occurs, the best way to diagnose the problem is to attempt to connect to
Oracle on your Unix command line while running as the same userid that was
beginning.
10. In case of failure, cd to the directory you specified for the -tmp parameter and ensure
any reason, you can relaunch it without any actions needed to clean-up.
Upgrade518_Vault.sh

EV5ADM5
option and viewing the file: Upgrade518_Vault_internal.log This file has a log of
Migrating a Vault Server Manually

This document will show you how to migrate manually a Vault Server. This vault migration
documentation is for UNIX workstation only.
Migration Concepts
To migrate a Vault Server, the root concept is to create an R19 Vault that reuses existing
Vault repositories from a previous version and connect a migrated database. This migration
is implemented in four steps:
1. Data structure Migration

2. Vault Server creation
3. Useless data deletion
4. Vault settings update
Note: when you have an installation comprising multiple vaults, you must migrate each vault
one by one by following the procedure documented below.
Data Structure Migration

Data structures are not systematically modified in each release. For example, data
structures have not been changed in R19, so you can skip this step for R19.
You will find the reference files for the data structure migration (tables, index, etc.) under
the following directory:
The suffix of these reference files is .clp for DB2 and .sql for Oracle. They are named:
● upgrade517_VPM_VAULTFILE.clp and upgrade517_VPM_VAULTFILE.sql when creating R19
new Vault tables
● grant_VPM_VAULTFILE.clp and grant_VPM_VAULTFILE.sql when creating grants on tables
When creating/updating your data structure, you have to customize the above-mentioned
files.
To do so:
1. MAKE AN OFFLINE BACKUP OF ALL VAULT DATABASES and copy them to tape before
starting any migration.
4. Log as root User.
Original file name Duplicated file name
upgrade517_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx upgrade517_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx
grant_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx grant_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx
tablespaces name for table and for index if necessary. In the case of the grant file, we
advise you to change the "to public" right into "to vault_db_cnx_user". That
"vault_db_cnx_user" is the user specified in the VaultServer.properties file for the
VaultServer_DBUser property.
7. Execute the upgrade517_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx file and the related grant file

(grant_VPM_VAULTFILE_My_Vault.xxx) on your database:
For DB2:
For Oracle:
Example:
If the database structure owner is SES and the tablespace for table and index is
USERSPACE1 then, the SQL statement:
create table "VPMADM"."VAULTCHK"
( OID varchar(64)
,TYPE varchar(64)
,ATTR varchar(128)
,URL varchar(256)
,VOID varchar(16) for bit data
,DOCSIZE integer
,DOCLOCATION varchar(508)
,TAGTYPE integer
,LASTUPDATEDATE timestamp
) IN "TSTVPM" INDEX IN "TSIVPM" ;
has to be updated to:
create table "SES"."VAULTCHK"
( OID varchar(64)
,TYPE varchar(64)
,ATTR varchar(128)
,URL varchar(256)
,VOID varchar(16) for bit data
,DOCSIZE integer
,DOCLOCATION varchar(508)
,TAGTYPE integer
,LASTUPDATEDATE timestamp
) IN "USERSPACE1" INDEX IN "USERSPACE1" ;
Vault Server Creation
Once the vault database has been migrated, you have to create a new R19 Vault server
corresponding to the R16 Vault you want to migrate. To do so, use the VaultSetup tool in
batch mode or interactive mode. For more information, refer to Setting Up the Vault Server.
Beware: the VaultSetup tool create database structures and directories for that new Vault
server. So you will have to remove that useless creation.
In the context of a Vault migration, use the VaultSetup tools as the following:
Keep the R16 VaultServerName for the R19 one.

Keep the R16 VaultAdministrator for the R19 one.
Use a test or unused database to create the database structures, keep in mind that you will
have to drop them after Vault Server creation.
BEWARE: do not use the migrated database to create the database structures.
Use a temporary or unused directory to create the Vault repositories directories, keep in
mind that you will have to remove them after Vault Server creation. Creates only one Vault
repository, it is the minimum number required by the VaultSetup tool.
BEWARE: Do not use the true Vault directories (R16 ones) to create the R19 VaultServer
repositories.
Useless data deletion
You will find here after how to remove the useless database structures and directories
created by the Vault setup tool.
Database structures

3. Original file name Duplicated file name.
4. drop_VPM_VAULTFILE.xxx drop_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx
5. Change the name of the structure owner (the default owner is VPMADM). Execute the
drop_VPM_VAULTFILE_MyVault.xxx file on the test database you have used to create
the R19 Vault:
For DB2:
For Oracle:
BEWARE: do not remove the Vault database structure of the migrated R16 database.
Example:
If the structure owner is SES the line:

drop table "VPMADM"."VAULTDOCUMENT";
has to be updated to :
drop table "SES"."VAULTDOCUMENT";
Directories

2. Remove the R19 Vault repositories directories (see rm Unix command).
BEWARE: do not remove the R16 Vault repositories directories.
Vault Setting Update
Vault server setting update
The vault server property file has to be changed in order to access the vault to migrate
repositories and to connect the migrated vault database.
The VaultSetup tool has created a XXXVaultServer.properties file under the directory:
(default name is ENOVIAVaultServer.properties). That file has to be replaced by a copy of

the vault server properties file of the R16 vault you want to migrate.
Then, edit that file and update the following parameters depending on your R19 Vault server
installation:
VaultServer_HostName
VaultServer_DaemonPort
VaultServer_DBName (Warning: the value to set is the name of the migrated
database: in the sample below, it is DBSES)
Example:
R19 Vault server properties file before update:

## Orbix parameters
VaultServer_Name = ENOVIAVaultServer
VaultServer_HostName = TITI1DSY
VaultServer_DBName = DBSESR19
VaultServer_DBVendor = Oracle
VaultServer_DBUser = SES
VaultServer_DBPassword = 252C252C
## Other parameters
VaultServer_VaultAdministrator = ses
VaultServer_ReadOnly = false
VaultServer_LogRemovedFiles = false
VaultServer_RemoveFiles = true
VaultServer_AuthorizeNfsAccess = false
## Repositories parameters
VaultServer_DBSchema = SES
VaultServer_Repo_0_Name = MyRepo1
VaultServer_Repo_0_ReadOnly = false
VaultServer_Repo_0_Path = E:\\tmp\\MyRepo1
VaultServer_Repo_0_TmpDirName = tmp
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_0 = Secured
R16 Vault server properties file:

## Orbix parameters
VaultServer_HostName = JANE1DSY
VaultServer_DBName = DBSES
## Other parameters
VaultServer_Repo_0_Path = E:\\users\\ses\\MyRepo1
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_1 = secured2
R19 Vault server properties file after update:

## Orbix parameters
VaultServer_HostName = TITI1DSY
VaultServer_DBName = DBSES
## Other parameters
VaultServer_Repo_0_Path = E:\\users\\ses\\MyRepo1
VaultServer_Repo_0_SecDirName_1 = secured2
VaultClient setting update
If you have some specific parameters in the VaultClient.properties file you have in R16, you
should transfer those customizations in the R19 VaultClient.properties file generated by the
VaultSetup tool.
Note: Do not forget to propagate the updated VaultClient settings, once generated,
throughout your R19 migrated domain.
Example:
In the following example, the migrated Vault is the ENOVIAVaultServer one.
R19 VaultClient properties before update:

## File read protocol
## File write protocol
## File transfer protocol activation
## Data BlockSize parameter
## Trace parameter
VaultClient_DefaultAliasName = ENOVIAVaultServer
## Vault server alias ENOVIAVaultServer
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadVaultServerName = ENOVIAVaultServer
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadVaultServerHostName = TITI1DSY
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadVaultServerDaemonPort = 1572
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_WriteVaultServerName = ENOVIAVaultServer
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_WriteVaultServerHostName = TITI1DSY
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_WriteVaultServerDaemonPort = 1572
R16 VaultClient properties:

## Trace parameter

VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadVaultServerHostName = JANE1DSY
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadProtocol = HTTP
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadHTTPServerHost = JANE1DSY
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadHTTPServerPort = 8080
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_WriteVaultServerHostName = JANE1DSY
## Vault server alias Vault2
## Use HTTP file transfer protocol (read operations only)
VaultClient_Vault2_ReadVaultServerName = Vault2
VaultClient_Vault2_WriteVaultServerName = Vault2
R19 VaultClient properties after update:

## Trace parameter

VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadVaultServerHostName = TITI1DSY
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadProtocol = HTTP
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadHTTPServerHost = TITI1DSY
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_ReadHTTPServerPort = 8080
VaultClient_ENOVIAVaultServer_WriteVaultServerHostName = TITI1DSY
The HTTP read protocol has been added and updated to the right machine. The BlockSize
has also been updated. The Vault2 alias declaration has not been copied because we only
migrated in that example the ENOVIAVaultServer Vault.
ENOVIA Windows Vault Database Migration
From V5R1 To V5R19
Introduction
databases, you will have to run the Vault database migration multiple times.
migration. If you have not completed it, please stop and run the ENOVIA V5 VPM database
migration first.
These instructions do not cover migration of a Unix database. This is covered in a separate
document.
in R17.
Vault Database Migration Instructions

you defined during your PLMDBSetup. This will be the same admnistrator ID that you
used to run the regular database migration. DO NOT attempt to run the database
migration as root.
~/hp_b/code/command

6. Create (for example, using the notepad editor) a batch file containing all the
parameters you will need to run the migration script. The parameters should all wrap
continuously as one line; there should be no carriage return. The batch file must have
the suffix .bat to be executable. If it does not exceed the operating system limit for
the length of a line, you could also type these commands directly onto a command
line instead of using a command file.
7. If you are using a DB2 database, you will need to launch this vault database migration
command line or command file from a DB2 command window. You can generate this
window by going to a C:/ shell prompt or an MKS toolkit Korn shell and typing the
command db2cmd. If you are using Oracle, you will need to launch this command
from an MKS toolkit Korn shell. Failure to use the correct shell documented in this
step will cause the script to fail. Other shells and command lines are not supported.
The parameters are:

DBAdmHome : Database administrator home directory
(for userid that created the database in Oracle or DB2)
IdxTbsName)
Here is a sample of 2 executable files, one for Oracle and one for DB2. Notice the
placement of the quotation marks and the direction of the slash “\” character:
ORACLE:
"C:\B18\intel_a\code\bin\catstart" -run "sh C:\B18\intel_a\code\command
\Upgrade518NT_Vault.sh
-DBVendor ORACLE -DBName BOLODB -DBAdmHome C:\ora102 -DBAID vpm2adm -
TbsName ENOTBS -IdxTbsName ENOTBS –tmp C:\migration\R19"
DB2:
"C:\B18D01\intel_a\code\bin\catstart" -run "sh C:\B18\intel_a\code
\command\Upgrade518NT_Vault.sh
-DBVendor DB2 -DBName DB17 -DBAdmHome C:\DB2 -DBAID lcaadm -TbsName
ENOTBS
-IdxTbsName ENOTBS -tmp C:\migration\R19"
8. chmod 700 vault.bat (where vault.bat is the command file you created in #6
above) You must give the full rights to execute this file to the ENOVIA Administrator
ID which will run the upgrade shell using chgrp/chmod UNIX commands (the user
identified above in Step #4).
9. Execute the vault.bat script from command line (For example: .\vault.bat or ./
vault.bat ). You will be prompted to enter the password for the DBAID. This
password will appear on the screen when you type it, so you must take steps to
safeguard the privacy of this password.
you should interrupt it and diagnose the reason for the failure of Oracle connections.
If this connection failure (or hung condition) occurs, the best way to diagnose the
problem is to attempt to connect to Oracle while running as the same userid that was
beginning.
11. In case of failure, go to the directory you specified for the -tmp parameter and ensure
any reason, you can relaunch it without any actions needed to clean up.
Upgrade518NT_Vault.sh

EV5ADM5
option and viewing the file: Upgrade518NT_Vault_internal.log This file has a log of
ENOVIA UNIX Vault Database Migration From

V5R18 To V5R19
Introduction
databases, you will have to run the Vault migration multiple times.
migration. If you have not completed it, please stop and run the standard migration first.
These instructions do not cover migration of a Windows database. This is covered in a

separate document.
in R17.
Vault Migration Instructions:

you defined during your PLMDBSetup. This will be the same administrator ID that you
used to run the regular database migration. DO NOT attempt to run the migration as
root.
~/hp_b/code/command

6. Create (for example, using the vi editor) a command file (e.g. vault.sh) containing
all the parameters you will need to run the migration script, starting the command
with the ./catstart –run prefix. The parameters should all wrap continuously as one
line; there should be no carriage return. If it does not exceed the operating system
limit for the length of a line, you could also type these commands directly onto a
command line instead of using a command file.
The parameters are:

DBAdmHome : Database administrator home directory (for userid that created the
database in Oracle or DB2)
IdxTbsName)
Here is a sample of 2 executable files, one for Oracle and one for DB2:
ORACLE:
/installpath/R19/aix_a/code/command/catstart -run "Upgrade518_Vault.sh -
DBVendor ORACLE -DBName ORA1718 -DBAdmHome /oracle/app/oracle/
product/9.2.0 -DBAID dbausr -IdxTbsName ENOIDX -TbsName ENOTBS -tmp /tmp/
mig"
DB2:
./catstart -run "Upgrade518_Vault.sh -DBVendor DB2 -DBName DB1718 -
DBAdmHome /home/db2adm -DBAID dbausr -IdxTbsName ENOTBS -TbsName ENOTBS -
tmp /tmp/vaultmig"
7. chmod 700 vault.sh (where vault.sh is the command file you created in #6 above)
You must give the full rights to execute this file to the ENOVIA Administrator ID which
will run the upgrade shell using chgrp/chmod UNIX commands (the user identified
above in Step #4).
8. Execute the vault.sh script from Unix command line (For example: ./vault.sh ).
You will be prompted to enter the password for the DBAID. This password will not
appear on the screen when you type it.
you should press the Control-D buttons on your keyboard to interrupt it and diagnose
the reason for the failure of Oracle connections. If this connection failure (or hung
condition) occurs, the best way to diagnose the problem is to attempt to connect to
Oracle on your Unix command line while running as the same userid that was
beginning.
10. In case of failure, cd to the directory you specified for the -tmp parameter and ensure
any reason, you can relaunch it without any actions needed to clean-up.
Upgrade518_Vault.sh

EV5ADM5
option and viewing the file: Upgrade518_Vault_internal.log This file has a log of
About Distributing Version 5 on Windows
There are several ways in which you can provide multiple end users with access to
Version 5. You can:
● install the software on each computer directly from the CD-ROM
● install the software on each computer by mapping to another computer on which the
software has been copied and is accessible.

❍ copy all the software into the same folder (as illustrated above)
❍ or, given that the software is distributed on several CDs ( 1, 2 ...), copy the
contents of each CD into a separate folder for each CD, making sure that the
name of each folder corresponds to the CD number ( 1, 2 ...) etc.
Both solutions are ideal if you want the best level of performance, and involve
installing and maintaining the software on each computer.
This section explains how to:

● distribute the software from a source computer to a client computer using the
StartB batch installation command on the client computer
● distribute the software from a source computer to a client computer using the RCMD
command (part of the Windows Workstation Resource Kit)
● access the software installed on the server from a "light" client on which only a
runtime environment is installed, but no code
● distribute the software in compressed form
● distribute a service pack from an archive file.
Code distribution scenarios based on the use of the Install Shield silent installation file
mechanism are no longer supported, and are replaced by the use of the StartB batch
installation command.
There are two types of profile available to end users:
● local user profiles
● roaming profiles.
Your roaming profile is the same on every computer you use. Windows system
administrators should ensure that Version 5 end users use roaming profiles. This will
enable end users to log onto different computers to run Version 5 and recover their
customizations. Refer to your Windows online documentation for more information
about roaming profiles.
Distributing the Software To a Single Client
Computer
This task explains how to distribute the software from the server to another computer. Note
that the online documentation files can be distributed using the same scenario.
You can copy the software into a folder on the source computer, or simply insert the Version 5
CD-ROM into the drive. Then, you can log onto another computer, the client, on which you
want to install Version 5, map the drive containing the folder (or the CD-ROM drive directly)
and run the StartB batch command to install Version 5 over the network, as illustrated below:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19 (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional
x64 Edition)
Note also that, if an IBM License Use Management Runtime (LUM) license server is running on
the computer on which you are installing Version 5, you must stop the server before starting
the installation.
When you insert the CD-ROM into the source computer, the installation procedure starts
automatically. The Setup program displays a message telling you that it is preparing the
installation procedure. In our example, you do not need to install the software on the source
computer before distributing it, so at this point, you must stop the installation procedure from
starting automatically.
One way of preventing the installation procedure from starting automatically after inserting
the CD-ROM is to press and hold down the Shift key immediately after inserting the CD-ROM.
1. Log on as Administrator onto the remote computer on which Version 5 is to be installed.
You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the
Administrators group.
2. Run the Windows Explorer.
You need to use the Explorer to connect over the network to the computer containing the
software, and access the StartB batch program in the folder
3. Using the Explorer, select Tools > Map Network Drive...
The Map Network Drive dialog box is displayed:

4. Select a Drive, then enter either the name of the folder containing the software (in our
example, this would be something like \\Remote_Computer\My_CATIAV5_Folder) or directly
the CD-ROM drive, or use the Browse... button to navigate, then click the Finish button once
you have made your selection.
Note that if you browsed to select the folder, its name will be displayed like this in the Folder
field:
\\Remote_Computer\My_CATIAV5_Folder
Once mapped, the connection to the remote computer in the Explorer window will look like
this:
My_CATIAV5_Folder on 'Remote_Computer' (L:)

You can only map to the other folder or CD-ROM drive if they have been previously set up as
shared resources.
5. Open a Command Prompt window and go to the folder on the source computer you mapped
previously, and then go to the INTEL folder.
6. Run the command:
StartB -h
to display help if you are not familiar with the StartB command.
7. Install the Version 5 software.
For example, running the following command will install the DP2 and MD2 configurations (and
the corresponding nodelock licenses) for the CATIA product line into the following location, for
example on 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
StartB -u "C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19" -newdir -l "DP2.slt MD2.slt"

-lic E:\CATIAV5_Licenses\MYCONFIG.LIC
For detailed information about the StartB command, refer to Installing in Batch Mode
Distributing the Software To a Client Using the
RCMD Command
This task explains an alternative to the previous scenario: how to use the RCMD command,
which is part of the Resource Kit for your Windows platform, for distributing the software from
a source computer to a client computer inside the same domain.

x64 Edition)
The Resource Kit must be installed on both the source computer ("ravel" in our example) and
the client computer ("chopin" in our example).
Furthermore, for the RCMD command to operate, the RCMDSVC service must be started
beforehand on the client computer. This involves installing a Remote Command server on
each client computer, then starting the Remote Command server. For more information, refer
to the following Windows online help topic: RCMD.EXE: Remote Command Service.
With Windows XP Professional 32-bit operating systems, if LUM is already installed on your
machine, and the LUM license server has been started, you will be prompted to stop the LUM
server before proceeding. If you choose not to stop the LUM server, the installation will be
stopped.
The software supplied by Microsoft in the Windows Workstation Resource Kit is not officially
supported. Microsoft (and Dassault Systemes) do not guarantee the performance of the
Windows Workstation Resource Kit tools, response times for answering questions, or bug fixes
to the tools. The software (including instructions for its use and printed and online
documentation) is provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind.
1. Log onto the source computer using an account with Domain Administrator privileges.
2. Copy the Version 5 software into a folder on the source computer, and share the folder.
For example, the folder name could be My_CATIAV5_Folder ,and you could share the folder
using the name "CATIA".
3. Select Start > Programs > Windows XP Professional Resource Kit > Tools.
4. Double-click the Network Management Tools control, then the Remote Command Service
control.
A Command Prompt window is opened and you are now located in the directory, for example
on 32-bit Windows XP:
C:\Program Files\Resource Pro Kit\rcmd

5. Connect to the remote client computer using the command:
rcmd \\remote_computer
where "remote_computer" is the name of the remote computer.
In our example, the command would be:
rcmd \\chopin
6. Once you are connected to the remote computer, map a drive on the remote computer to
the shared folder on the source computer.
To do so, enter the command:
net use drive: \\Source_computer\SharedDirName DomainAdminPwd /user:DomainName

\DomainAdminUserName
where:
● drive is the drive letter used to map to the shared folder
● Source_computer is the source computer from which you are performing the installation,
and on which the shared folder containing the Version 5 software is located
● SharedDirName is the share name of the folder containing the Version 5 software
● DomainAdminPwd is the domain administrator password
● DomainName is the domain name
● DomainAdminUserName is the domain administrator username.
In our example, the command would be for example:
net use M: \\ravel\CATIA admin /user:MyDomain\root
This command maps the M: device (the device must be available) on the remote computer
"chopin" to the shared folder "CATIA" on the source computer "ravel", using the domain
administrator password "admin". Note that the domain name is "MyDomain" and the domain
administrator username is "root".
To check that the map has been successfully performed, enter the command:
net use
which will list the mapped resources like this:
Status Local Remote Network
OK M: \\ravel\CATIA Microsoft Windows Network

For more information about the net use command, refer to the Windows online help system.
7. To check that the installation folder and the StartB batch command are accessible, enter
the command:
M:\INTEL\StartB -h
to access the command help, or:
M:\INTEL\StartB -list
to list the configurations/products you can install.
Note: Replace INTEL by WIN64 on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition.

8. Install the Version 5 software.
For example, running the following command will install the DP2 and MD2 configurations (and
the corresponding nodelock licenses) for the CATIA product line into the following location, for
example on 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
StartB -u "C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19" -newdir -l "DP2.slt MD2.slt"

-lic E:\CATIAV5_Licenses\MYCONFIG.LIC
into the following location on the remote computer:

9. Unmap the drive on the remote computer by running the command:
net use M: /delete

For detailed information about the StartB command, refer to Installing in Batch Mode.
Note that appending the "-exe" option to the StartB command does not launch a session at
the end of the installation on the remote computer.
You can also use the System Management Server (SMS), part of the Windows BackOffice
suite. SMS includes desktop management and software distribution that significantly
automates the task of upgrading software on client computers.
Accessing the Software From a Thin Client
This task explains how to set up thin clients for accessing the Version 5 software over the
network.
A thin client can run Windows XP.
This type of scenario is sometimes referred to as a "code server" scenario. The advantages of
this type of scenario are:
● you save time: the code is installed on the code server only, and not on the clients; and
future upgrades and installation of service packs are easier since you only have to upgrade
the software on the server, and not the clients
● you save disk space: code is installed on the server only, so you save disk space on the
clients.
The drawbacks with this type of scenario are:

● the code is sent over the network to the client, so you will experience problems if the
network is not efficient or goes down
● the code is executed on the client, so performance may vary depending on the power of the
client computer and the amount of memory on the client.

x64 Edition)
1. Log on as administrator onto the server computer, install the Version 5 software, for
example, in the following folder, for example on 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
then share the disk and folders in the installation path.

2. Log on as administrator onto the client computer.
3. Run the Windows Explorer.
You need to use the Explorer to connect to the server over the network and access the C:
\Program Files folder on the server.
4. Select Tools > Map Network Drive...
The Map Network Drive dialog box is displayed, and looks something like this:
5. Select a drive.
6. Select the folder Program Files on the server, and click Finish.
This is the folder containing the Dassault Systemes folder in which you installed the Version
5 software.
Note that selecting the folder displays the server name and folder name in the Path field:
\\server\Program Files
In the All Folders list in the left window of the Explorer, you will now see the connection to the
server, for example:
Program Files on 'server' (F:)
where "server" is the server name, for example, and "F:" is the name of the drive you mapped.
7. Still on the client computer, open a Command Prompt window and go to the following
directory:
F:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B18\intel_a\code\bin (Windows XP Pro)

F:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B18\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code on
F:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B18\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code on
where, for example, "F:" is the name of the mapped drive and represents F:\Program Files.
8. Open a Command Prompt window to go back to the directory where you were before,
Then, run the following command using exactly the syntax indicated, depending on whether
you are running CATIA, ENOVIA DMU Navigator or DELMIA:
V5Regserver –set PRODUCT_LINE
where "MyEnvironment" is the name of the environment, and "MyEnvDirectory" the name of
an existing folder containing the environment on the client, if you intend to create an
environment on the client as described in step 10a.
If you intend to use the environment on the server (step 10b), run the command:
cnext /regserver
dmu /regserver
delmia /regserver
This activates OLE support which ensures that double-clicking Version 5 document icons on
the client will run a Version 5 session.
9. Run the following command, depending on whether you are running CATIA, ENOVIA DMU
Navigator or DELMIA:
setcatenv -tools -cs MyProductLine -e MyEnvironment -d MyEnvDirectory
to set up the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools menu containing the Batch
Management V5R19, Environment Editor V5R19, Nodelock Key Management V5R19,
Printers V5R19, Settings Management V5R19 and Software Management V5R19
commands.
At this point, you have two possibilities:
● create the runtime environment on the client (step 10a)
● or access the server environment via the network, to avoid creating an environment on the
client (step 10b).
10a. Create the runtime environment on the client.
To do so, you have two possibilities:

● from the directory:

run the following command:
setcatenv -p "F:\Dassault Systemes\B19" -e MyEnvironment -d

MyEnvDirectory -a global -desktop yes -cs MyProductLine
where "MyEnvironment" is the name of the environment, "MyEnvDirectory" is the

name of the folder containing the environment and "MyProductLine" is the name of
the product line.
● or, use the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor V5R19
command. In this case:
1. Select the Environment > New command to display the New Environment
dialog box.
2. Select the Options menu, then the Set Global Storage Directory command,
and set the environment storage directory to the same location you set in step
8.
3. Enter the same environment name you also set in step 8.
4. Enter the path of the shared installation folder on the server as follows:
F:\Dassault Systemes\B19
5. Select Global for the Mode.
6. Select your Product Line.
7. Click OK.
In both cases, a global environment is created on the client computer which can be
used by all users who log onto the client.
10b. You can also access the server environment via the network. To be able to do so, the
code and the runtime environment on the server must be installed in a shared location so you
can map it from the client.
For illustration purposes, let's suppose you installed the code for example on 32-bit Windows
XP Pro in:
E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19
To facilitate access to the runtime environment over the network, the environment must be
located in a shared easily accessible location, and NOT in the default location in the All Users
profile on the server which is:
C:\%WINDIR%\Profiles\All Users\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATEnv
For illustration purposes, let's suppose you created the runtime environment on the server in
the following shared location:
E:\CATEnv
To access the environment over the network:
1. Map a drive to the shared folder on the server.

You must choose the same drive letter on the client as the drive on which the code was
installed on the server, for example "E:".
2. Open a Command Prompt window and go to the directory "E:", then to the directory:
E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (Windows XP Pro)

E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code on
E:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code
3. To start a session, run the command:
cnext -env MyEnvironment -direnv E:\CATEnv
dmu -env MyEnvironment -direnv E:\CATEnv
delmia -env MyEnvironment -direnv E:\CATEnv
where "MyEnvironment" is an example for the name of the runtime environment on the server.
Note that this scenario will only work if the drive letter on the client and the drive letter on the
server are identical. In certain cases, you may not be able to use the same drive letter on the
client and the server. For example, the code is installed on "E:" on the server, but the drive
"E:" on the client is not free, so you map the drive "K:". If you then try to start a session, the
runtime environment will not be found because the paths referenced in the runtime
environment point, for example, to "E:..." like this (32-bit code on Windows XP):
...
CATInstallPath=E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a
CATDLLPath=E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin
...
whereas on the client there is no software installed on the "E:" drive.
To bypass this problem, create a new global environment on the server using the following
command:
setcatenv -e NewEnvironment -d \\servername\home\CATEnv -a global -p "\

\servername\home\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19" -desktop no
where "\\servername\home" is the UNC name of the server and shared folder, and
"NewEnvironment" is the new environment name. Creating a new environment this way will
create the correct UNC paths as follows (32-bit code on Windows XP):
...
CATInstallPath=\\servername\home\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a
CATDLLPath=\\servername\home\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code
\bin
...
This time, your attempt to start a session will be successful if you use the following command:
cnext -env MyEnvironment -direnv \\servername\home\CATEnv

dmu -env MyEnvironment -direnv \\servername\home\CATEnv
delmia -env MyEnvironment -direnv \\servername\home\CATEnv
Note also that if you disconnect the drive you mapped, you will have to remap it as before for
the scenario to continue to work.
11. If you require extended font support, run the following command:
VE0IFONT.exe -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
from the directory:

F:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B18\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code on Windows
XP Professional x64 Edition)
For more information, refer to "Using and Customizing Fonts" in your Infrastructure Users
Guide.
12. If you want to record and replay macros, and Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications
(VBA), Version 6.0 is not already installed on your client, you have to install VBA manually
from the product CD-ROM.
To install Microsoft Windows installer if it is not installed on the workstation:
Pathcdrom\VBA\MSI\INSTMSIW.exe /Q
To install VBA6 on all Windows platforms, run the command:
msiexec /q /i pathcdrom\VBA\VBA6.msi
However, note that VBA is supported on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition with Version 5
32-bit code.
13. You will need to install the VC8 Runtime prerequisite on each client computer. This has to
be installed before running any Version 5 executable programs on this platform.
To do so, open a Command Prompt window, go to the first CD-ROM folder, then to the folder:
INTEL (32-bit media)

WIN64 (64-bit media)
and run the following commands for 32-bit media:
msiexec /i InstallDSSoftwarePrerequisites_x86.msi /q (for 32-bit Windows)

msiexec /i InstallDSSoftwarePrerequisites_x86_x64.msi /q (for 64-bit Windows)
and the following command for 64-bit media:
msiexec /i InstallDSSoftwarePrerequisites_x86_x64.msi /q for 64-bit Windows)

14. If you need access to the communications backbone and peripheral device broker, the
associated port numbers must be set up on the client.
communicate.
To set up the ports using the default values:
2. Open a Command Prompt window and go to the installation directory, for example:

F:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B18\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code
3. Enter the commands:
setV5Ports
\\Server\"Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code

\bin"\BBDemonService -create
where "server" is the name of the server machine. The UNC path
must be used imperatively.
For more information about the communications backbone, refer to Communications Backbone
Files.
15. If you created a runtime environment on the client, start a session by double-clicking the
environment icon on the desktop or by selecting the command to start the product from the
Start > Programs menu.
Make sure that you have set up your licenses (either network or nodelocked) before starting a
session.
16. If you created an environment on the client, and want to delete this environment, run the
following commands:
To update the registry (deactivate OLE support):

V5Regserver –unset
To delete the reference environment:

delcatenv -d MyEnvDirectory -e MyEnv -a global -desktop yes -cs MyProductLine
To delete the Start menu entries:

Distributing the Software in Compressed Form
This task explains how to distribute the software in compressed form to another
computer. The idea is to perform an installation on a server, compress the code, send
the compressed code to another computer, decompress it and perform local operations
on the computer to be able to run the decompressed code.
The default installation path can be:

Note that you cannot first install a GA level in compressed form, then install a service
pack in normal installation mode. In this particular case, you have two solutions:
● reinstall everything in compressed form
● or use the CATDeltaInstall utility.
1. Log on as administrator onto the server computer, install the Version 5 software in
the following folder, for example on 32-bit Windows XP Pro:

2. Compress the software using a popular compression software product (for example,
WinZip), and send it to the client computer on which it is to be used.
3. Log on as administrator onto the client computer on which you want to use the
software.
4. Once you have retrieved the compressed package, extract it to a folder, for
example:

5. You will need to install the VC8 Runtime prerequisite on each client computer. This
has to be installed before running any Version 5 executable programs on this platform.
To do so, open a Command Prompt window, go to the first CD-ROM folder, then to the
folder:
INTEL (32-bit media)

WIN64 (64-bit media)
and run the following commands for 32-bit media:
msiexec /i InstallDSSoftwarePrerequisites_x86.msi /q (for 32-bit Windows)

msiexec /i InstallDSSoftwarePrerequisites_x86_x64.msi /q (for 64-bit
Windows)
and the following command for 64-bit media:
msiexec /i InstallDSSoftwarePrerequisites_x86_x64.msi /q for 64-bit

Windows)
6. In a Command Prompt window, go to the following directory:

E:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit
code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
then run the following command using exactly the syntax indicated, depending on
whether you are running CATIA, ENOVIA DMU Navigator or DELMIA:
V5Regserver –set PRODUCT_LINE
where "MyEnvironment" is the name of the environment, and "MyEnvDirectory" the

name of the folder containing the environment, if you intend to create an environment
on the client as described in step 8.
This activates OLE support which ensures that double-clicking Version 5 document
icons on the client will run a Version 5 session.
7. Run the following command:
setcatenv -tools -cs MyProductLine
to set up the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools menu containing the
Batch Management V5R19, Environment Editor V5R19, Nodelock Key
Management V5R19, Printers V5R19, Settings Management V5R19 and
Software Management V5R19 commands.
8. Create the runtime environment on the client, for example using the paths for 32-
bit Windows XP Pro.
To do so, you have two possibilities:

● from the directory E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code
\bin, run the following command:
setcatenv -p "E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19" -e

MyEnvironment -d MyEnvDirectory -a global -desktop yes -cs
MyProductLine
where "MyEnvironment" is the name of the environment, "MyEnvDirectory" is

the name of the folder containing the environment and "MyProductLine" is the
name of the product line.
● or, use the Start > Programs > MyProductLine > Tools > Environment Editor
V5R19 command. In this case:
1. Select the Environment > New command to display the New

Environment dialog box.
2. Select the Options menu, then the Set Global Storage Directory
command, and set the environment storage directory to the same
location you set in step 7.
3. Enter the same environment name you also set in step 7.
4. Enter the path of the shared installation folder on the server as follows:
5. Select Global for the Mode.
6. Select your Product Line.
7. Click OK.
In both cases, a global environment is created on the client computer which

can be used by all users who log onto the client.
Instead of creating an environment on the client computer, you can use access the
environment on another computer via the network. For more details, refer to step 10b
in Accessing the Software From a Thin Client.
9. If you require extended font support, run the following command:
VE0IFONT.exe -env MyEnvironment -direnv MyEnvDirectory
from the directory:

E:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit
code on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition)
For more information, refer to "Using and Customizing Fonts" in your Infrastructure
Users Guide.
10. If you want to record and replay macros, and Microsoft Visual Basic for
Applications (VBA), Version 6.0 is not already installed on your client, you have to
install VBA manually from the product CD-ROM.
To install VBA6 on all Windows platforms, run the command:
However, note that VBA is supported on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition with
Version 5 32-bit code.
11. If you need access to the communications backbone and peripheral device broker,
the associated port numbers must be set up on the client.
communicate.
To set up the ports using the default values, for example for 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
2. Open a Command Prompt window and go to the installation directory, for
example:
E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin
setV5Ports
\\Server\\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin
\BBDemonService -create
where "server" is the name of the server machine. The UNC

path must be used imperatively.
For more information about the communications backbone, refer to Communications

Backbone Files.
12. If you intend to extract offline licenses for use on the client, and the client
happens to be a laptop (as described in Enabling Concurrent Offline Licensing), you
must install the LUM driver as follows:
1. Open a Command Prompt window.

2. Go to the following directory, for example for 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
E:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\reffiles

lumdevdi.exe
You must run this command only from the specified directory because it contains
the file LUMDriver.sys required for the command to work.
13. If you created a runtime environment on the client, start a session by double-
clicking the environment icon on the desktop or by selecting the command to start the
product from the Start > Programs menu.
Make sure that you have set up your licenses (either network or nodelocked) before
starting a session.
14. If you want to delete the environment created on the client, run the following
commands.
To update the registry (deactivate OLE support):
V5Regserver –unset
To delete the reference environment:

delcatenv -d MyEnvDirectory -e MyEnv -a global -desktop yes -cs
MyProductLine
To delete the Start menu entries:

Distributing a Service Pack From an Archive File on Windows
This task explains how to install a service pack from an archive file, as an alternative to the traditional methods
involving installing the service pack from the CD-ROM or using the StartSPKB command.
What Is an Archive File?

An archive file is a file in compressed format on Windows built by a command provided. The compressed file contains
installation files containing differences with respect to an earlier installed level of the same release of the same software
configuration. A level can be either a GA or a service pack.
For example, you can build an archive file containing the differences between level V5Rn GA and V5Rn SP2 (even if you
installed V5Rn SP1 in between).
Building and Installing the Archive

You first need to install several software levels (belonging to the same release) on the source computer. In our example
illustrated below, we installed levels V5Rn GA, V5Rn SP1 and V5Rn SP2, and committed the service packs. On the target
computers, only the V5Rn GA level is installed.
You use the CATDeltaInstall command with the appropriate arguments to build the archive. The resulting archive file
can then be copied to the target computer and decompressed using platform-specific tools. For example, you need the
Microsoft CabArc.exe utility which can be downloaded from:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb%3ben-us%3b310618
The installation files from the archive file then overwrite the installation files on the target computer.
The advantages of this type of installation are:
● an archive file is smaller than a service pack on a CD-ROM, therefore the installation is more rapid
● you can copy an archive file to other computers on your network and automate the installation of the archive using a
method of choice.
Note that installing a service pack from an archive file always commits the service pack automatically. Make sure that
the previously installed service packs on the target computer have been committed before installing the archive.
Furthermore, you can only use this method if the configurations/products on both the source and target computers are
identical.
The traditional methods of service pack installation and the use of the CATDeltaInstall command are interchangeable:
you can install a service pack from a CD-ROM, then install another service pack from an archive file.
Installation Procedure
1. Log on as an administrator onto the source computer.
You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group. Otherwise,
you will not be able to install the different levels on the source computer.
2. Perform, for example, the following installations:

● install V5Rn GA
● install V5Rn SP1 then commit the service pack
● install V5Rn SP2 then commit the service pack.
3. On Windows, open a Command Prompt window and go to the following directory:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B0n\intel_a\code\bin (Windows XP Pro)

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B0n\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B0n\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional
x64 Edition)
where "B0n" is the level V5Rn.
4. To build an archive file based on the differences between the V5Rn GA and V5Rn SP2 levels, for example, run the
CATDeltaInstall command as follows, for example on 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
CATDeltaInstall -s 0 -d "C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B0n\intel_a" -a E:\users\MyUser

\MyArchiveFile
The full command syntax is:
CATDeltaInstall -s PreviousServicePackNumber [-d InstallationDirectory]

[-l|-a ArchiveFile] [-h]
● -s: previous level number: the level can be either a service pack or the GA level for the same release;
0 = GA, 1 = service pack 1, 2 = service pack 2, etc.; the default is 0.
A service pack must have been correctly installed if you intend to build an archive based on the differences between
this service pack and another level. For example, if you installed only the V5Rn GA and V5Rn SP2 levels, you cannot
specify "-s 1" as an argument (because you did not install the V5Rn SP1 level).
● -d: Installation directory; when the command is run from the installation directory, this argument is not required
● -l: only lists the files which are different between the two installation levels; this list can be used to build a different
type of archive (for example, WinZip)
● -a: builds an archive file with the specified name (requires the CabArc utility)
● -h: help.
Note that there are two distinct operating modes:

● build an archive file (using the "-a" argument)
● only list the files which are different between the two installation levels (using the "-l" argument)
On Windows, the archive file compression is handled automatically thanks to the cabarc format.
The service pack installed your computer, and used as the basis for comparison with a previous level, must be
committed beforehand. If not, the CATDeltaInstall command will not operate.
5. Copy the archive file to a target computer on which you want to install the same service pack level.
Keep in mind that the target computer must be running the same Version 5 configuration/products as the source
computer on which the archive file was built.
6. Stop all running Version 5 processes on the target computer before proceeding.
7. Install the archive using the following command, for example on 32-bit Windows XP Pro:
cabarc -p -o X E:\users\MyUser\MyArchiveFile "C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B0n\"
8. Start a session to check the service pack has been correctly installed.
About Distributing Version 5 on UNIX
There are basically two ways in which you can provide multiple end users with access
to Version 5.
You can:
● install the software on each computer, either directly from the CD-ROM or from a
server.
This is the ideal solution if you want the best level of performance, but involves
installing and maintaining the software on each computer.

❍ copy all the software into the same folder (as illustrated above)
❍ or, given that the software is distributed on several CDs ( 1, 2 ...), copy the
contents of each CD into a separate folder for each CD, making sure that the
name of each folder corresponds to the CD number ( 1, 2 ...) etc.
● or, set up the software on a server, and simply set up a minimum environment on
each user's computer so end users can access the software over the network.
This is the ideal solution if you want to save space on each computer, and facilitates
future upgrades since means that you only have to upgrade the software on one
computer: the server.
You can run Version 5 using CATIA Version 4 userids. Using Version 5 with a CATIA
Version 4 userid is transparent as is the case for other userids.
Mounting and Exporting File Systems

The distribution scenarios described in this section are based on mounting NFS file
systems. Note that you can also use DFS (Distributed File System). DFS is an open,
cross-platform distributed file system for managing network security and
administration, and is compatible with Version 5.
The scenarios in this section involve mounting and exporting file systems between
source and destination machines.
To mount a directory or a file system you must:

● on the source machine, export the file system to which the directory belongs
● on the destination machine, mount the desired directory or file system.
Furthermore, file mounts can be temporary or permanent.

Temporary Mount
Export the directory
If you do not export a directory or file system, it cannot be mounted elsewhere. On

AIX and HP-UX machines, use the following command to temporarily export a directory
or a file system:
exportfs -vi [path of the file system]
Example:
exportfs -vi [/home/V5R19/code/bin]
On Solaris machines, use the following command to export a directory or a file system
temporarily:
share -F nfs -o right [path of the file system]
Example:
share -F nfs -o rw /home
Note that you can only export file systems. If the directory you are trying to export is
not a file system, depending on your OS level and your machine, either it will not work
at all or it will export the higher-level file system in the path. If it doesn't work, use
the command:
df -k .
in order to know which file system to export if it's done automatically.
Mount a Directory
On AIX, HP-UX and Solaris machines, the command you must use in order to mount a
directory on your machine is:
mount [machine name]:/[path to mount] [path of the mount]
Example:
mount tampa:/usr/V5R19 /mnt
Note that the mount directory is not necessarily a file system, but the file system it
depends on must be exported on the source machine as explained above.
Note that you must mount /CDROM with the option ro (read only).
Unmount a Directory
You can unmount the directories, which are mounted on the system by using this
command:
umount [path of the mount]
Example:
umount /mnt
Permanent Mounts
To make permanent mounts, the principle is the same. The only difference is that you
must write the information in files instead of launching commands.
Export the File Systems
First, modify the file in which all the permanently exported directories are written.
On AIX and HP-UX, this file is:
/etc/exports
For each file system you want to export, you must add (or modify … ) a line:
[path of the file system] -[rights],root=[name of the computer]
Example:
/CDROM -ro,root=verre
On a Solaris computer, the file you must modify is:
/etc/dfs/dfstab
You must include this type of line:
share -F nfs [path of the file system]

Example:
share -F nfs /home
Again, we can only export file systems. If you want to mount a directory, you must
export the higher-level file system in the path.
Once you've modified the file, you must use the following command. If you don't use
this command, the computer will not take into account your modifications until the
next restart:
exportfs -a
Make a Permanent Mount
In order to mount a directory permanently on an AIX computer, you must modify the
file:
/etc/filesystems
For each directory, you must add certain lines in this file:
[local path]:
dev = [original path]
vfs = [mount type - nfs, jfs, …]
node name = [name of the original machine]
mount = [true/false/automatic] - at start ? -
options = [rw ,ro,wo],Basefs=[original file system type]
account = [true/false]
Example:
/data1:
dev = "/data1"
vfs = nfs
nodename = cabochon
mount = true
options = bg,hard,intr
account = false
On an HP-UX machine, the file you must modify is named:
/etc/fstab
you must insert a line like this:
[source machine name]:[source path] [destination path] [type of FS]

options 0 0
Example:
caxhh940:/VPMDATA.auto/DMUDATA /VPMDATA/DMUDATA nfs rw,suid 0 0
On a Solaris machine, the file you must modify is:
/etc/vfstab
The line structure is:
[machine name]:[FS name] - [mount point] [FS type] no yes [options]
Example:
briadsy:/diskext - /diskextahmed nfs no yes bg,soft,wr
On all machine types, once you've modified the file, don't forget to launch the
command:
mount -a
otherwise your modifications will not be taken into account until the machine is
restarted.
Setting Up the Server
This task explains a suggested method (not mandatory) for setting up the server. It involves
copying the Version 5 software to a directory from which you set up a Version 5 installation
server used to easily distribute the software to other UNIX workstations. This avoids having to
install the software from the CD-ROM on each workstation.

1. Log on as root onto the UNIX workstation to be used as the server.
2. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive on the server.

3. Check whether the CD-ROM drive is declared.
4. Check whether the CD-ROM drive is mounted, and mount the CD-ROM drive, if necessary.
5. Copy the contents of the CD-ROM to a directory you already created.
For the purpose of our example, the name of the directory is:
/usr/my_Version5_software_directory
6. Go to the directory as follows:
cd /usr/my_Version5_software_directory
You are now ready to perform an installation of Version 5 from this directory.
7. To start the installation, enter the command:
./start
and follow the instructions provided by the program.
For the purposes of this scenario, when you are prompted to choose a destination directory in
the Choose Destination Location dialog box, choose the default installation directory:
For detailed information about the start command, refer to Start Command Syntax.
You are now ready to distribute Version 5 to other workstations on your network.
You could also export the CD-ROM directory itself in read only mode.
Distributing the Software To A Client Workstation
Now that the server has been prepared, as explained in Setting Up the Server, this task
explains how to distribute the software from the server to another workstation.

You already copied the contents of the CD-ROM into the following directory on the server:
/usr/my_Version5_software_directory
using the scenario described in Setting Up the Server. You are going to perform the installation
by allowing the client to access this directory on the server.
To do so, you must export the directory /usr/my_Version5_software_directory to the

client: the directory must be accessible from the client.
2. Log on as root onto the client "chopin".

3. Mount the exported directory via NFS.
4. Go to the mounted directory.

5. To start the installation, enter the command:
./start
and follow the instructions provided by the program.
The Version 5 software is installed on the client in the directory:
For detailed information about the start command, refer to Start Command Syntax.
You have another alternative if you have not already copied the CD-ROM contents into a
directory: insert the CD-ROM, export the /cdrom directory to the client, then mount the /
cdrom directory from the client.
Distributing a Service Pack From an Archive File on UNIX
This task explains how to install a service pack from an archive file, as an alternative to the traditional methods
involving installing the service pack from the CD-ROM or using the Start command.
What Is an Archive File?

An archive file is an uncompressed file on UNIX, built by a command provided. The compressed file contains installation
files containing differences with respect to an earlier installed level of the same release of the same software
configuration. A level can be either a GA or a service pack.
For example, you can build an archive file containing the differences between level V5Rn GA and V5Rn SP2 (even if you
installed V5Rn SP1 in between).
Building and Installing the Archive

You first need to install several software levels (belonging to the same release) on the source computer. In our example
illustrated below, we installed levels V5Rn GA, V5Rn SP1 and V5Rn SP2, and committed the service packs. On the target
computers, only the V5Rn GA level is installed.
You use the CATDeltaInstall command with the appropriate arguments to build the archive. The resulting archive file
can then be copied to the target computer and decompressed using platform-specific tools (for example, you use the
tar command). The installation files from the archive file then overwrite the installation files on the target computer.
The advantages of this type of installation are:

● an archive file is smaller than a service pack on a CD-ROM, therefore the installation is more rapid
● you can copy an archive file to other computers on your network and automate the installation of the archive using a
method of choice.
Note that installing a service pack from an archive file always commits the service pack automatically. Make sure that
the previously installed service packs on the target computer have been committed before installing the archive.
Furthermore, you can only use this method if the configurations/products on both the source and target computers are
identical.
The traditional methods of service pack installation and the use of the CATDeltaInstall command are interchangeable:
you can install a service pack from a CD-ROM, then install another service pack from an archive file.
Installation Procedure
1. Log on as an root onto the source computer.
2. Perform, for example, the following installations:

● install V5Rn GA
● install V5Rn SP1 then commit the service pack
● install V5Rn SP2 then commit the service pack.
3. Go to the directory:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/BOn/OS/code/command
where "B0n" is the level V5Rn and "OS" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● solaris_a.
4. To build an archive file based on the differences between the V5Rn GA and V5Rn SP2 levels, for example, run the
CATDeltaInstall command as follows:
./catstart -run "CATDeltaInstall -s 0 -d /usr/Dassault Systemes/B0n/OS -a /u/users/MyUser/

MyArchiveFile -t /tmp"
The full command syntax is:
CATDeltaInstall -s PreviousServicePackNumber [-d InstallationDirectory]

[-l|-a ArchiveFile] [-t TemporaryWorkDirForUnixOnly] [-h]
● -s: previous level number: the level can be either a service pack or the GA level for the same release;
0 = GA, 1 = service pack 1, 2 = service pack 2, etc.; the default is 0.
A service pack must have been correctly installed if you intend to build an archive based on the differences between
this service pack and another level. For example, if you installed only the V5Rn GA and V5Rn SP2 levels, you cannot
specify "-s 1" as an argument (because you did not install the V5Rn SP1 level).
● -d: Installation directory; when the command is run from the installation directory, this argument is not required
● -l: only lists the files which are different between the two installation levels; this list can be used to build a different
type of archive
● -a: builds an archive file with the specified name
● -t: temporary file for storing archive file; the default is /tmp
● -h: help.
Note that there are two distinct operating modes:

● build an archive file (using the "-a" argument)
● only list the files which are different between the two installation levels (using the "-l" argument).
The archive built on UNIX is not compressed.
The service pack installed your computer, and used as the basis for comparison with a previous level, must be
committed beforehand. If not, the CATDeltaInstall command will not operate.
5. You may want to compress the archive file. To do so, run the command:
compress MyArchiveFile
to create the compressed archive file MyArchiveFile.Z.
6. Copy the compressed archive file MyArchiveFile.Z to a target computer on which you want to install the same
service pack level.
Keep in mind that the target computer must be running the same Version 5 configuration/products as the source
computer on which the archive file was built.
7. Stop all running Version 5 processes on the target computer before proceeding.
8. If you compressed the archive file earlier, uncompress it by running the command:
compress -d MyArchiveFile.Z
to obtain the archive file MyArchiveFile.
9. Install the archive file MyArchiveFile using the following commands.
On UNIX, go to the directory:
/usr/Dassault Systemes/B0n
then install the archive by running the command:
tar -xvf /u/users/MyUser/MyArchiveFile
The service pack is committed automatically.
Note: The tar command is not enabled for files greater than 2 GB an AIX.
10. Start a session to check the service pack has been correctly installed.
Reserving Static Licenses Using the License Manager
This task explains how to reserve static product licenses during a session using the Licensing tab via the
Tools > Options... command. The term "static" is used in opposition to "dynamic": you need to restart a
session after acquiring a static license, whereas shareable product licenses can be acquired and used
immediately without restarting a session.
1. Select the Tools > Options... command.
2. Select the General category, then the Licensing tab to display the License Manager.
The role of the License Manager is to allow you to reserve licenses before using these products. You will not be
able to work with any Version 5 products until you have first reserved the corresponding licenses.
If you are using network licensing, selecting this tab contacts any license servers to update the list of available
configurations and products.
You must select at least one configuration license.
In our example, it will look like this if you installed the configurations CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) and
CATIA - Drawing Production (DP2), and imported a nodelock license for the CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2)
configuration:
The "Licensing Information" section contains the following information:
● Target id: specifies the target id of your computer
● Display Type: informs you whether you are running on a local or remote display;
❍ Local: you are running on a local display and you can work with either nodelock or server licenses
❍ Remote: you are running on a remote display and you can work with server licenses only.
● Active servers: if you are using network licensing, the list of all active and the number of available license
servers is now displayed like this:
The name of the server you are using is displayed in the field opposite. Click the the up and down
arrows to display the list of servers available.
If you are using nodelocked licensing only (in other words, if you are not using network licensing), the
following is displayed:
Active Server : None
Licensing Setup
The "Licensing Setup" section contains the following information:
● Server Timeout: When a client requests a license from a license server list, the client is prepared to wait a
certain amount of time for a response from the first license server (the server replies that the license is
available or not available) before contacting another server. A slider lets you specify approximately the
amount of time the client is prepared to wait for a response from the license server, from a few seconds to a
few minutes.
If you have a high-performance network, and servers that are not heavily loaded, we recommend that you
reduce the value: this will allow the client to contact other servers more quickly, instead of waiting too long
for a response from the first server.
If you have a low-performance network, or servers that are heavily loaded, we recommend that you
increase the value: this will allow the client to wait long enough for a response over a slow network or from
heavily loaded servers.
● Frequency (mn): allows you to set the heartbeat duration.
In principle, a license granted by a LUM license server to a V5 session is released when the V5 session stops.
The license is also automatically released when a V5 session crashes.
However, it may occur in the event of certain severe crashes or network problems, that the V5 session
cannot instruct the license server to release the license, so the license is not released. To prevent the license
from being retained endlessly by the license server, there is a specified period of time (referred to as the
"heartbeat") after which the license server considers the V5 session to be dead, and releases the license.
This heartbeat is communicated to the license server by the V5 session when the license is first requested.
Originally, the value of the heartbeat was set by default to approximately 17 mn, which meant that a license
could be incorrectly retained by the license server up to 17 mn, and could not be customized. During this
period of time, this license cannot be granted to another user. However, it can still be granted to the same
user on the same machine on which the severe crash occurred.
Now, you can set the heartbeat using the Frequency option. The default value is the same as before:
approximately 17 mins. This is the maximum value (represented by the value MAX in the list) and cannot be
increased. Decreasing the heartbeat value will decrease the maximum period of time during which a license
can be inadvertently retained by the license server.
You can set the appropriate value by increments of 1 min. Consequently, the heartbeat can be set to any of
the following range of values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 and MAX.
The value is stored in the settings, and can be locked if required.
Note: because the V5 session must contact the license server more frequently, decreasing the heartbeat
leads to increased network load and to increased license server workload. In particular, before decreasing
this value to below 6 minutes, evaluate carefully the impact on license server performance.
Allow save if license server goes down
When a license server or the network goes down, a Version 5 session now enters a special mode giving
users the opportunity to save their work before exiting.
To understand the new behavior when a license server goes down, let`s look at what happened in
previous releases. Let`s take the example of a concurrent license granted to a V5 session when
started. Every heartbeat period (about 17mn), the V5 session checks that the license is still granted to
it. It may occur that, for example, the license server or the network are down. In that case, the license
check fails.
The session then enters a "countdown" mode. A popup is displayed informing the user that the license
check has failed. The user must then save any work in progress. Five checks are performed at one
minute intervals. If all checks fail, the session exits.
There were two problems:

● users may not necessarily have understood that any work in progress had to be saved.
● even when a save was launched, the session could be exited while the save was still running.
From now on, the popup message clearly indicates to users that saving open documents is strongly
recommended. After the five failed checks, instead of exiting, a new license request is attempted. If it
succeeds, the session continues. If this session fails also, the session is set to a special mode in which
only saving and exiting commands are available. All menu items and toolbars are grayed out, except
the commands Exit, Save, Save As, Save All and Save Management from the File menu. Only the save
and exit commands can be launched by using power input.
Notes:
● processes such as batches and macros do not support this mechanism: automatic exit is still
performed.
● even if the problem which led to the license check failure is solved, it is impossible to return to the
normal mode after the session has been set to the special mode in which only saving and exiting are
allowed: no other license request is performed after entering in this mode
● Show Info: check this option if you want feedback when attempting to reserve a license which is not
available (reserved by another user), or messages about expired server licenses. The next time you start a
session, the software will inform you who is using the license you are trying to use. Uncheck this option if
you do not want to display this type of information.
Note that this mechanism, even though managed by the Licensing tab, also applies to shareable product
licenses managed by the Shareable Products tab.
● Demo mode: You will be able to work in demo mode if you registered and reserved at least one
configuration license, and checked the Demo Mode option. For more information about the demo mode, refer
to Running in Demo Mode.
● Alert: use the alert setting if you want to be informed by a message (popup in the interactive application
and written in logs for batch application) that a license will soon expire.
License Expiry Date Warnings
Information about license expiry dates is already available via the Nodelock Key Management tool
which lists nodelock licenses and the remaining validity duration using a color code:
● green means more than 30 days before expiration
● orange means less than 30 days before expiration
● red means already expired.
Regarding concurrent licenses, LUM tools allow the administrator to manage licenses and in particular
to determine license expiry dates.
But neither method provides end users with advanced warning of imminent license expiry.
Setting the License Expiry Alert
The Alert control:
is set by default to 30 days, and is enable by default. This means that if a granted license is going to
expire within 30 days, a warning popup will be displayed like this:
The popup is displayed as soon as a license is granted. This means that the popup will appear each
time you start a session (because the licensing settings specifying that a nodelock license is granted
are read at startup) or when you select a shareable license (because the license is granted
immediately).
Note that:
● the maximum value you can set is 90 days
● if you do not want to be warned by a popup when acquiring a license, set the value to 0 to disable
the alert
● the tooltip message displayed when pointing at the control indicates the value is between 0 and 90
days
● like any other setting attribute, it can be locked.
The alert is available only for nodelock (and consequently offline) licenses.
If more than one license is about to expire, the popup will display a message like this:
The following granted license(s) will soon expire:

MD2 (2118..R1) in 10 days
GSD (2126..R1) in less than 24 hours
(Go to Tools/Options/Licensing and enter 0 for Expiry Alert value if you no longer
wish to display this message)
In the case of batch licensing, the equivalent information is written to the batch log file.
List of Available Configurations/Products

The list contains ALL the installed configurations and products. Note that nothing prevents you from installing
software for which you do not have the corresponding license, so the list may contain software for which you
do not have a license.
Note that, if you have not previously reserved any licenses, none of the check buttons is checked.
If you are working with a nodelocked license, the license will be reserved by default when you start a session,
even if you unchecked the corresponding button.
If you entered a nodelock license during the installation, the corresponding configuration is preselected in the
list.
In our example, the MD2 option is checked because we imported a nodelock license for this configuration
(CATIA - Mechanical Design (MD2) (DS4D8E940000 - MD2)) during the installation.
The "+" button is displayed next to the license in the list. Clicking this button lets you switch between compact
mode (the default) and expanded mode. In compact mode, the license imported is already reserved.
Click the "+" button to switch to expanded mode. In this mode, a sublist is displayed containing the list of all
the installed licenses, preceded by the "Any License" option.
All configurations are considered as custom configurations. When you install a configuration, the list of
configurations/products is organized as follows, in the order of appearance from top to bottom:
● selected configuration licenses forced by the administrator, in alphabetical order
● selected product licenses forced by the administrator, in alphabetical order
● selected configuration licenses not forced by the administrator, in alphabetical order
● selected product licenses not forced by the administrator, in alphabetical order
● non-selected product licenses with the "Granted" status, in alphabetical order
● non-selected configuration licenses available for selection, with the "Not Granted" status, in alphabetical
order
● non-selected product licenses available for selection, with the "Not Granted" status, in alphabetical order
● non-selected configuration licenses, not available for selection, with the "No License" status, in alphabetical
order
● non-selected product licenses, not available for selection, with the "No License" status, in alphabetical order
● non-selected configuration licenses, not available for selection, locked and prohibited by the administrator, in
alphabetical order
● non-selected product licenses, not available for selection, locked and prohibited by the administrator, in
alphabetical order.
How To Reserve Licenses

To find out how many licenses are available for a specific configuration or product, click the "+" button to
display the list like this:
● Any License
● License serial number XXX
● License serial number YYY
● ...
Your administrator instruct you specifically to reserve a specific license with a specific serial number in the list.
In this case, check the button for the corresponding license.
You can also reserve a license for an individual product.

Any License
For a variety of reasons, (network performance, license availability, ...) you may decide to install several
identical configuration licenses on different license servers. Furthermore, these licenses may have identical
serial numbers, but they may also have different serial numbers.
If you are interested in using a specific configuration, irrespective of the serial number, and you do not care
which server serves the license, check the Any License option. This means that you want to reserve any one
of the licenses for that configuration in the list.
In this case, the software reserves by itself one of the available licenses. If the software finds a valid nodelock
license on your computer, the nodelock license will be used first. If there is no nodelock license, or the
nodelock license is not valid, the software will reserve a network license from the list of license servers.
Note: each license has its own serial number. The same configuration license can exist on several servers but
with different, unique serial numbers. Once a serial number is determined (when a license is acquired), it
cannot be modified during the same session. This means that if the license server which provides the license
using the Any License option becomes unavailable, the session will stop: the license will not be replaced by a
license for the same configuration from a different server, because the serial numbers are different.
Below each configuration or product license, you will see Local or Server which informs you whether the
license is a nodelock (local) license or a server license. If you are using a server license, the name of the server
will be displayed like this:
Server (ip:servername)
where "servername" is the name of the license server.

The status Granted appears next to the products in the list which belong to a configuration whose license you
reserved. The name of the license that granted access to the product is indicated in parentheses.
The status Not Granted means that you have not requested a configuration or product license, or that you
attempted to reserve a license that is not available (nodelock license expired, server license expired, network
server down, etc.).
The status No License appears next to configurations and products which have been installed, but for which
you do not have a license. The configuration and product names are grayed out in the list, and the check
buttons cannot be checked.
Click the "-" button to return to compact mode.
3. After checking the appropriate license buttons, click OK.
4. Exit and restart your session.
You need to restart your session after reserving configuration and/or product licenses.
Licensing settings are stored in a settings file. The settings active in the License tab depend on what you set
the last time you used it.
If you run a Version 5 session in administrator mode, you can lock individual configuration and/or product
licenses to control their usage.
For background information about locking settings, refer to Locking Settings.
Troubleshooting Messages
You may encounter one of the following messages (the list is not exhaustive) when using the Licensing
Manager:
Environment xxx not set or incorrect. Please set an environment using the setcatenv command
Set a valid environment using the setcatenv command. For more information about customizing environments,
refer to Customizing Your Environment on Windows.
No Configuration/Product Available
The path containing the information required to display the list of configurations/products, referenced by the
CATICPath environment variable, is incorrect, or the information is incomplete.
There is no suitable license to fulfill the xxx request
You tried to reserve a license when all available licenses are used. Contact your administrator. See Show
License Info.
You have requested one or more product licenses, but no configuration license. Click OK and
select at least one configuration license using the License Manager dialog box.
You tried to reserve only a product license. Click OK and select at least one configuration license using the
License Manager.
No License Available for Requested Configuration(s)
Click OK and select at least one valid configuration license using the Licensing tab.
Not All Licenses Available
Contact your administrator.

Reserving Shareable Product Licenses Dynamically
This task explains how to acquire and release shareable product licenses.
The added value of shareable products is that they can be either reserved statically, or reserved and released
"dynamically". You can simply reserve the shareable product license dynamically using the Shareable Products
tab described below, and start using it immediately without exiting your session.
Scenario
In the following scenario, we previously installed the DP2 - CATIA - Drawing Production 2 configuration and
the MD2 - CATIA - Mechanical Design 2 configuration. The DP2 license has already been reserved.
2. Select the General category, then the Licensing tab to display the License Manager.
You can see that the DP2 license has already been reserved:
If you scroll down the list of available configurations and products, you will see three product licenses
belonging to the MD2 configuration and whose status is "Not Granted":
3. Select the Shareable Products tab.
You will now see the same three product licenses belonging to the MD2 configuration and whose status is "Not
Granted". These are shareable products:
Consequently, note that shareable products are listed in both the Licensing tab and the Shareable
Products tab. This means that a shareable product license can be reserved either statically or
dynamically.
List of Products Granted Using Licensing Tab
The lower part of the tab lists the products belonging to the DP2 configuration. When you reserved the DP2
configuration license using the License Manager in the Licensing tab, the authorization to use this list of
products was granted.
List of Shareable Products
You can also use shareable products along with the licenses you reserved using the Licensing tab.
The list of shareable products is displayed in the upper part of the tab. The software detects all potentially
shareable products installed on your hard disk and displays them in the list. Accessible shareable products
have an option button which you can check to reserve them.
If you reserve a shareable product statically using the Licensing tab, after restarting your session it will no
longer appear in the list of shareable products in the Shareable Products tab.
The list of shareable products is organized as follows, in the order of appearance from top to bottom:
● selected product licenses, in alphabetical order
● non-selected product licenses, not locked by the administrator, in alphabetical order
● non-selected product licenses, locked by the administrator, in alphabetical order.
Unlike the Licensing tab, selecting the Shareable Products tab does NOT contact the license servers to display
the licensing status of the products. This is intended for performance reasons. For example, if you installed a
shareable product for which there is no license, the status of the product as displayed in the Licensing tab is:
No License
However, when you select the Shareable Products tab, the status of the product displayed is:
Not Granted
This illustrates that that you cannot determine immediately the true status of the license in the Shareable
Products tab. To do so, select the license: the license servers are then contacted, and return the message, in
our example, that no license is available for this product.
Consequently, in all cases, you first have to select the license to display its true licensing status.
4. Check the button for the shareable product you want to use.
If you select a product which requires another shareable product as a prerequisite, this prerequisite is also
reserved. Once reserved, the list will indicate that the product is required by another product.
5. Click OK to save your changes and exit the tab.
You can now start using the workbench associated with the shareable product without exiting your session.
Note that:
● if you are using a workbench for a shareable product, then attempt to release the shareable product, you
must first close the corresponding workbench before being able to release the product
● shareable product licensing is disabled when accessing the Shareable Products tab using the
Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools menu, and running the Settings Management V5R19 command.
Saving Changes to Other Tabs
If you reserve a shareable product, use the Tools > Options... command to make changes to a tab
introduced by this product, then release the shareable product, any changes made to these tabs will be saved.
Locking Shareable Product Licenses
An administrator can lock access to shareable products in administration mode. End users will not be able to
access the shareable product license, but an administrator running in administration mode will be able to do so.
Reset Button
The Reset button has no effect on the Shareable Products tab.

Setting Up IBM License Use Management
(LUM)
The IBM License Use Management (LUM) software for managing nodelocked licenses is
integrated into the Version 5 software.
If you need to install the complete LUM package, and if you want to set up a network
license server, you can download the software over the Internet.
Additional information about LUM may be found at:
Setting Up Your Network License Server
This task explains how to set up a network license server, and is intended for the
administrator who is setting up an environment to allow multiple client workstations to
share licenses stored on one or more network license servers.
This scenario shows you how to set up a network license server on one workstation
(ravel), and the scenario Setting Up Your Network License Clients two network license
clients on two other workstations (mozart and chopin):
Designing the network licensing environment requires careful thought and planning.
Consequently, we strongly recommend that you read the following sections in the
manual Using License Use Management Runtime for your platform:
● Chapter 2 "Planning Network Licensing": note that before starting, you must
determine whether you want to use direct binding or namespace binding. For more
information about what this means, read the section "Selecting a Type of Network
Binding". For reliability reasons, we strongly recommend that you use direct binding.
● the section "Setting Up Your Servers and Clients", in particular "Scenario 3:
Configuring a Network License Server" in the chapter "Configuring License Use
Management Runtime".
1. Log on as root onto the workstation on which the network license server is to be
configured.
In our scenario, the workstation name is "ravel".

2. Go to the LUM installation location.
You configure the network license server using a configuration tool which has, in LUM
4.5.8 on AIX and Windows XP, and in LUM 4.6.X on all platforms, a graphic user
interface (GUI), and on all UNIX platforms a script interface.
3. Run the command:
i4cfg
The Configuration Tool notebook is displayed.

4. On the Configure As page, check the Network License Server and Advanced
Configuration options.
5. On the Start up page, check the option "Start services at system startup" if you
want the configured server to start when you power on your workstation.
6. On the Log page, select the events you want to be logged, and specify the log file
directory where you want the log to be kept.
7. If you have decided to use direct binding (strongly recommended), select the Direct
Binding page, and enter in the Name field the TCP/IP host name of the server
workstation ("ravel" in our scenario), then press the <<Add button to add the server
to the Servers list.
8. Select Close from the system menu at the top left corner of the Configuration Tool
notebook, and click the Yes button to save your changes.
On all UNIX platforms, the license server can be configured using a script. To do so,
type the command:
i4cfg -script
and in response to the first question, select 3, then answer the questions when
prompted.
9. Run the command:
i4cfg -start
to start the server.

10. Run the command:
i4cfg -list
to check that the server is up and running.

You are now ready to enroll your licensed products and register the licenses using the
Basic License Tool.
This phase involves:

● enrolling the products and the licenses
● distributing the licenses to the network license server.
For detailed information and a scenario explaining how to enroll licensed products and
register the licenses, refer to the sections "Performing Basic Administration", "Scenario
6: Managing a Licensed Product", in the chapter "Administering License Use
Management Runtime" in the manual: Using License Use Management Runtime for
your platform.
If you suspect that the license server database has been corrupted, we recommend
that you run the following LUM command
i4blt -C
to check and if necessary repair the license database.

Setting Up Your Network License Clients
This task explains how to set up two network license clients on two other workstation,
as clients of the network license server you set up in Setting Up Your Network License
Server.
You need to install License Use Management Runtime on at least one client.
Refer to the section "Setting Up Your Servers and Clients", in particular "Scenario 5:
Configuring a Network License Client" in the chapter "Configuring License Use
Management Runtime".
1. Log on as root onto a workstation to be configured as client, and on which you
installed License Use Management Runtime.
2. Go to the LUM installation location.
You configure the network license clients using a configuration tool which has, in LUM
4.5.8 on AIX and Windows XP, and in LUM 4.6.X on all platforms, a graphic user
interface (GUI), and on all UNIX platforms a script interface.
3. Run the command:
i4cfg
The Configuration Tool notebook is displayed.

4. On the Configure As page, check the Network License Client and Advanced
Configuration options.
5. If the network license client is to locate the network license server using direct
binding (strongly recommended), select the Direct Binding page, and enter in the
Name field the TCP/IP host name of the server workstation ("ravel" in our scenario)
with which the client will communicate, then press the <<Add>> button to add the
server to the Servers list.
6. Select Close from the system menu at the top left corner of the Configuration Tool
notebook, and click the Yes button to save your changes.
On all UNIX platforms, the license server can be configured using a script. To do so,
type the command:
i4cfg -script
and in response to the first question, select 1, then answer the questions when
prompted.
7. Run the command:
i4tv
to check that the server is up and running, and that the client can communicate with
the server.
Windows
The configuration creates the i4ls.ini configuration file in:
which is typically:
C:\ifor\Ls\Conf\i4ls.ini
already exists on your machine, this file will be updated.
Note: if the "i4ls.ini" file exists in both locations, the file:
C:\ifor\Ls\Conf\i4ls.ini
will be used. To avoid problems, we strongly recommend that you use ONLY ONE file in
the following directory:
UNIX
The configuration creates the i4ls.ini configuration file in:

● /var/ifor/ (AIX)
● /opt/lum/ls/conf/ (HP-UX, Solaris).
Configuring Other Clients
To configure the other clients, simply copy this file to a directory on each client and
reference the LUM variable IFOR_CONFIG with the full path to the file name: you do
not need to install License Use Management Runtime on each client.
Using High-Availability Licensing (HAL)
High Availability Licensing

High-availability licensing enables you to set up an environment in which there is a
very high degree of certainty that concurrent licenses will be available, even if a
network license server goes down.
A cluster is a set of active servers configured to communicate with each other through
direct binding mode. In this mode, several workstations serve licenses and others are
in reserve ready to take over from an unavailable server.
For more information about clusters, refer to the manual Using License Use
Management Runtime for your platform: section "Planning Clusters for High-Availability
Licensing" in Chapter 2 "Planning Network Licensing."
For more information about configuring clusters, refer to the manual Using License Use
Management Runtime for your platform: section "Administering High-Availability
Licensing (HAL)", "Scenario 11: Creating and Managing a Cluster" in Chapter 4
"Administering License Use Management Runtime".
Note that if you wanted to set up a mixed Windows and UNIX cluster, LUM 4.5.9 or
higher is required.
However, you should be aware of the following situation which might occur when using
HAL clusters.
In this example, let's suppose you have one license on a 3-server HAL cluster. A first
CATIA client requests the license, and the license is granted by the first server.
Then, the first server shuts down.
The next time that CATIA connects to the first license server to check that it is still up
and running, CATIA displays several warning messages because it is not certain that
the license can be acquired or not on another server in the cluster.
The license is then granted by the second server and CATIA goes on.
After the first server shuts down, another CATIA client on another machine may
request the same license from the first server which has shut down. The same license
is then granted to this client by the second server. The next time that CATIA connects
to the first license server to check that it is still up and running, CATIA displays several
warning messages on the first CATIA client then exits, because the license is already
granted to the second CATIA.
This problem is due to the fact that the second server knows that the first server is
down, but doesn't take into account the licenses granted by the first server. If this was
the case, the second CATIA process wouldn't start, the same license wouldn't be
granted to two CATIA processes, and the first CATIA process wouldn't exit.
In both cases, the messages which appear are insignificant, and should be ignored.
These problems are due to the way in which HAL was originally designed.
Servers that are members of a HAL cluster share license availability information, but
not license usage information. Consequently, the other servers do not know that a
certain license was in use on the server that went down, consider this license as
available, and grant it to the first client that requests it.
HAL was not designed to share this type of license usage information among all the
servers in a cluster.
Setting Up the Vault Server
This section explains how to set up a vault server using both interactive and batch tools.
It contains enough information to get you through the vault deployment stage during installation. For more detailed information
about the vault, refer to Setting Up Vault Servers and Clients.
Procedure
1. You can start the vault server setup tool in either of two ways.
If you are still in the installation procedure, and if you selected the Vault Administration configuration, the Vault Setup dialog
box will appear after the PLM Database Setup step.
Or, if the installation is finished, log on as administrator, open a Command Prompt window, go to the following installation
directory:
C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin
catstart -run VaultSetup
or run the command Start > All Programs > ENOVIA V5 VPM > Tools > Vault Setup V5R19
The Vault Setup dialog box looks like this:

2. Because you have not yet created a vault server, click the Add... button.
The Authentication dialog box is displayed like this:
3. Provide the vault administrator userid, password and domain name.
The vault administrator can be any operating system userid recognized on the computer on which you are creating the vault
server. This userid is the same as the userid to which the vault server process belongs. Furthermore, the files created in the
vault by applications will be owned by this userid.
The Vault Administrator:
❍ must have the privileges to administrate the vault (the user must have write authorization on the vault directories)
❍ must already exist as a system user.
Vault Identification
4. Click OK to continue to the Vault Server - Add dialog box:
Vault Server Name
The Vault server name is the way for vault client applications to identify a vault server. A vault client application needs three
items of information to connect to a vault server:
❍ the service name under which the vault server is registered
❍ the server listening port on the remote machine where the vault server is running
❍ the remote machine name.
The vault client properties file (set up when installing a vault client) is used to provide the link between a given vault server
name and the three items of information identifying a given vault server.
The default server name is ENOVIAVaultServer, but can be customized.
Vault administrator
The userid of the Vault administrator you entered in the Vault Server Authentication dialog box is displayed for information
purposes.
Server hostname
The server hostname is the name of the machine on which you are creating the vault server.
Orbix daemon port
The Orbix daemon will listen on the specified Orbix daemon port on the machine hosting the vault server. This value is the
initial value entered during the unload step in the installation procedure.
Warning: When attempting to install an ENOVIA V5 VPM server and a Vault server on the same machine, the administrator
may be allowed to specify two different port numbers for the servers. If you do so, the application does not work afterwards.
This is particularly important since the vault server and ENOVIA V5 VPM server can be more easily installed separately, that is
on two different server paths, which implies two different port numbers.
Thread number
Set the thread number, which is the number of threads waiting for client requests. A vault server can answer several vault
client applications simultaneously. This number specifies the number of simultaneous requests that can be processed. The
default is 2. Multi-processing capacity depends on the number of processors on the workstation.
Timeout
Set the timeout value. The timeout is applied if the vault server does not receive a request from a vault client after the
specified period of time starting when the last connection to the Vault server was closed. The default is -1 (infinite): the server
stops only when explicitly requested.
Time zone offset
Set the time zone offset in hours. The server time zone offset (in milliseconds) is used for document creation and
modification dates. For example, if you set the value to 3600000, the server time zone is GMT+1 hour.
5. Click the Database setup... button to access the Vault Server - Database dialog box, then check the DB2 or Oracle option
to specify which database you are working with, fill in the fields, and set the desired options.
Database Setup
Each vault server requires its own data structure in the database. During this step, you are going to create tables in the
database to support the vault server.
The options specific to your database are displayed.
Note that, before entering this phase, you must have already created a database on DB2 or Oracle. If you already
created a database used for the PLM database setup procedure, you can use that database here.
Note that a tablespace also has to be created first before you enter this phase.
For DB2
The Vault Server - Database dialog box looks like this for DB2:
Options Specific to DB2
DB2 install path
Click the ... button to select the DB2 install path. Selecting the install path automatically detects the DB2 instance, Database
alias name and Database directory.
DB2 instance
Select the DB2 instance to be used to store the vault tables. All available DB2 alias names, remote as well as local, will appear
in the selection list.
Database alias name

Select the database alias name for the chosen DB2 instance.
Database directory
If the database directory of the chosen database alias is LOCAL, then the database directory field will contain its path. If the
database directory of the chosen database alias is REMOTE, then the database directory field will simply specify the text
REMOTE.
For Oracle
The Vault Server - Database dialog box looks like this for Oracle:
Options Specific to Oracle
Oracle home directory
Click the Browse... button and browse to select the home directory of the Oracle installation if it is not already detected
automatically.
Database service name
Oracle clients communicate with Oracle servers through service names, which are easy-to-remember aliases for database
addresses. Service names can be resolved using various methods:
❍ Local Naming method: resolves service names using a local configuration file (TNSNAMES.ORA, SQLNET.ORA, LISTENER.
ORA).
❍ Centralized Naming method: resolves service names using Oracle Names (highly recommended to centrally administer
large Oracle networks).
To use the Local Naming method, check the TNS_ADMIN option (this is the default): the path of the default tnsnames.ora file
containing the list of database service names is highlighted, but you can click the browse button and choose the file at a
different location.
Note: If you don't check the above button, the Centralized Naming method will be used.
To use the Centralized Naming method:

❍ uncheck the TNS_ADMIN option
❍ enter the database service name in this field.
Note about Oracle Userids
For Oracle, do not choose userids starting with a numeric character, an error may occur. If you do, a warning message will
prompt you to correct the problem.
Options Common to Both DB2 and Oracle

Database table owner
Enter the database table owner. This name is a database userid and is used as a prefix in the name of the vault tables. For
example, if you enter VPMADM, the table name will be: VPMADM.VAULTDOCUMENT. The userid is the owner of the database
structures created. The resources created in the database for the vault will belong to this owner.
For DB2, the owner name could be any database userid accepted by DB2, whereas the connection user must exist at the
operating system level.
On Oracle, you have to provide a password. This password is not required in DB2.
Vault database connection user
For DB2, this is a system userid used by the vault to connect to the database. For Oracle, this is a user database. All
connections to the database will be performed under this id (the main interest of this specific user being for remote database
connectivity, since server authentication is being used). With a local database, it might identical to be the vault administrator.
Password
Enter the vault connection password.
Database administrator
Enter the user name of the database administrator.
The Database Administrator User:

❍ has the privileges to administrate the database
❍ creates tablespaces (spaces for the data structures that will contain the data).
Password
Enter the database administrator password.
Notes: For Oracle, both the Vault database connection user and the Database table owner will have to exist as Oracle
users (and will be created as such if needed), but do not have to exist at the operating system level.
Database minimum pool size
Minimum number of connections for the vault server database connection pool.
Database maximum pool size
Maximum number of connections for the vault server database connection pool.
Tablespaces
Reminder: a tablespace has to be created. You can create one interactively at this stage. Note that the table space for the
vault does not require a size of 8K (unlike the PLM database setup which does require a size of 8K). You can select the default
tablespace, for example USERSPACE1 (or USERS on Oracle), or the tablespace created by the PLM database setup phase (if
you already created the PLM database).
6. After filling in all the fields, click the Tablespace... button.

Note: on Oracle, if you already performed a previous installation and created a table schema, and want to reuse the same
schema, you will be prompted to reuse it. If so, click Yes. If you do not succeed, use the Oracle Enterprise Manager Console
and delete the corresponding schema name. To delete, the schema name, you may first have to delete the tables in the
schema.
The Vault Server - Tablespace dialog box looks like this, for example on DB2:
and like this, for example on Oracle:
Select the tablespace and click OK, then click OK again.
This returns you to the Vault Server - Add dialog box, for example for DB2:
and on Oracle:
The database type, database name and vault database connection user you just configured are now displayed next to the
Database setup... button.
Setting Up Repositories
Data is stored in the vault server repository. A vault server repository is characterized by:
❍ its name
❍ a tmp directory: when vault client applications create new documents, they are stored temporarily in this directory, and are
written to a secured directory when saved
❍ and a set of secured directories.
These directories have to be on the same file system for a specific vault server repository to improve performance and
reliability.
7. Click the Repositories setup... button to access the Vault Server - Repositories dialog box:
8. Click the Add... button to access the Repository - Add dialog box:
Name
Enter a name for the vault server repository.
Path
Click the Browse... button, double-click a directory in the list to select the repository path, then click OK. This path will contain
the tmp and secured directories. You can select an existing directory or create a new one using the Browse... button.
If you have already created a directory used by another repository, you cannot choose the same directory used by the other
repository, either in the same vault server or a different vault server, and either in the same installation or in a different
installation.
Tmp path
Click the Browse... button, double-click a directory in the list to select the path of the temporary directory, then click OK. The
directory must already exist. You can select an existing directory or create a new one using the Browse... button.
Secured list
Secured storage occurs when the saved documents are actually committed into the database.
The secured list displays the list of secured directories. To add a secured directory, click the Add... button, double-click a
directory in the list to select the secured directory, then click OK. The secured directory must already exist. You can select an
existing directory or create a new one using the Browse... button.
A warning will inform you if the selected Tmp path or Secured path is not empty, however you can maintain your choice.
A warning will also inform you if the Repository's path contains something else other than the Tmp path and the Secured
paths, however you can maintain your choice.
Select a directory and click the Delete... button to delete it.
9. Click OK to confirm, and return to a summary of your repository setup in the Repositories dialog box which looks like this:
10. Click the Close button.
The Vault Server - Add dialog box now displays all the information you entered, and now looks like this, for example on DB2:
and on Oracle:
11. Check the appropriate global vault server administration options.
Read only
Check the Read only option to set the entire vault to read only mode. This is useful when the vault is full and you want users
to be able to continue to read data from the vault. Obviously, no documents can be saved in the vault in this mode.
Remove files
Check the Remove files option to trigger file deletion on disk. When you request a deletion operation using a vault client
application, a line containing the instruction to remove the file is stored in the database: the file itself is not removed from the
vault. This option must be checked if you want files to be physically removed. This option is checked by default.
Log Removed Files
Check the Log removed files option to trigger the logging of deletion operations requested by vault client applications. If you
did not check the Remove files option, your files will remain in the vault. You can then use the log containing the list of
deletion operations as input for your own deletion batch programs.
Authorize NFS access
Check the Authorize NFS access option to ensure that the authorization rights set for the vault directories are correctly set
for NFS access. NFS access is an alternative enabling vault client applications to access the vault directly by the vault server.
Refer to How to Set Up File Transfer Mode for the Vault for details about different file transfer modes supported.
Add required privileges to the current user
If the vault is run as a user other than the vault administrator logged on, certain privileges are necessary for this user.
Note: these privileges can be managed using the command Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Local
Security Policy. If you already set the privileges this way, the Add required privileges to the current user option will not
appear.
If these privileges have not been already set, to ensure that the privileges are set, the Add required privileges to the
current user option is checked by default.
The privileges added for the vault are:

❍ Adjust memory quotas for a process
❍ Replace a process level token.
12. Click OK again.
If this is the first time you are creating a vault, you will be prompted to create the user if the database. Click Yes to do so. If
the user you declared already exists in the database, you may be prompted to choose whether you want to use this user. If so,
click OK to confirm.
You then return to the Vault Setup dialog box:

Note that you can also modify an existing vault or delete a vault using the Modify... and Delete... buttons. You will be
prompted to log on using the Vault Server Authentication dialog box.
Modifying a Vault Server
You can edit most vault server properties. However, you cannot select another database for your vault server: the
corresponding options are grayed out in the Database setup... dialog box.
The Modify... button lets you modify an existing vault server. To do so, the current Windows session user who executes the
vault setup must be the vault administrator. Otherwise, you will receive the the following error message when you click the
Modify... button:
The Windows current session user should be the Vault Administrator in order to modify the Vault server
Deleting a Vault Server
If you attempt to delete a vault server, you will be warned that the catalogued entries for the vault server you want to delete
will be deleted, along with the associated properties file, but the associated database and repositories will not be deleted.
If there is only one vault server, you cannot delete it. If you attempt to do so, a warning will inform you that there must
always be at least one default vault alias name.
The characteristics of the vault server you created are displayed in the Vault Setup dialog box.
13. Click the Close button to exit the vault setup.
Vault Setup Log Files
The vault setup log file is located in the installation directory and is named:
SetupVault.log
How to deal with Multiple Network Domain Names
Use the full qualified name in the VaultClient.properties file on client side in order to avoid the problem of network domain
name resolution. For instance, if the Vault server machine name is "reverdsy" and the network domain name is "ds.dsy", you
should replace "reverdsy" in the VaultClient.properties file by "reverdsy.ds.dsy"
Vault Server Trace File on Windows
Note: the vault server trace file is generated in the %USERPROFILE% directory under the name VaultAliasName.log.
For instance, if the user used for running the vault server is XYZ on a particular domain AA, the trace file will be located in:
C:\Documents and Settings\xyz.AA
How to deal with Multiple Network Domain Names
Use the full qualified name in the VaultClient.properties file on client side in order to avoid the problem of network domain name
resolution. For instance, if the Vault server machine name is "reverdsy" and the network domain name is "ds.dsy", you should
replace "reverdsy" in the VaultClient.properties file by "reverdsy.ds.dsy"
Vault Server Trace File on Windows
Note: the vault server trace file is generated in the %USERPROFILE% directory under the name ENOVIAVaultServer.log.
For instance, if the user used for running the vault server is XYZ on a particular domain AA, the trace file will be located in:
C:\Documents and Settings\xyz.AA

Setting Up the Vault Server and Client in Batch Mode
Setting Up the Vault Server
The batch tool provides the same functions as the interactive tool, with some minor exceptions indicated below.
Windows
To perform a batch installation:
2. Go to the following installation directory:
catstart -run VaultServerSetupB
Command Syntax
VaultServerSetupB
-list [VaultServerName | -a]
-add VaultServerName -adm domain@VaultAdministrator:password
[-thread ThreadNumber] [-timeout TimeOut] [-offset TimeZoneOffset]
-db_vendor db2|oracle
-db2_path DB2InstallPath
-instance DB2Instance -db DBAliasName -schema DBTableOwner
-tbs Tablespace | -new_tbs NewTablespace
[-new_tbs_dir TablespaceDirectory]
-bp Bufferpool | -new_bp NewBufferpool
or:
-oracle_home OracleHomeDiretory -db DBServiceName

[-tns_admin true|false] [-tns_path tnsnames.oraPath]
-schema DBTableOwner:password
-tbs Tablespace | -new_tbs NewTablespace
[-new_tbs_dir TablespaceDirectory]
-connect DBConnectionUser:password -db_adm DBAdministrator:password

[-min_pool DBMinimumPoolSize] [-max_pool DBMaximumPoolSize]
-repo RepositoryName -repo_path RepositoryPath -tmp RepositoryTmpPath
-secured SecuredPath [-secured OtherSecuredPath ...]
[-repo OtherRepoName -repo_path OtherRepoPath -tmp OtherRepoTmpPath
-secured SecuredPath [-secured OtherSecuredPath ...] ...]
[-read_only true|false] [-log_removed_files true|false]
[-remove_files true|false] [-nfs_access true|false] [-add_privileges]
[-generate_settings_only [-no_check]]
-modify VaultServerName -adm domain@VaultAdministrator:password

[-thread ThreadNumber] [-timeout TimeOut] [-offset TimeZoneOffset]
(to modify [-min_pool DBMinimumPoolSize] [-max_pool DBMaximumPoolSize]
general-purpose [-read_only true|false] [-log_removed_files true|false]
options) [-remove_files true|false] [-nfs_access true|false] [-add_privileges]

-add_repo RepositoryName
-repo_path RepositoryPath -tmp RepositoryTmpPath
(to add
-secured SecuredPath [-secured OtherSecuredPath ...]
repositories)
[-add_repo OtherRepositoryName
-repo_path OtherRepositoryPath -tmp OtherRepositoryTmpPath
-secured SecuredPath [-secured OtherSecuredPath ...] ...]

-modify_repo RepositoryName
[-add_secured SecuredPath [-add_secured OtherSecuredPath ...]]
(to modify
[-del_secured SecuredPath [-del_secured OtherSecuredPath ...]]
existing
[-repo_read_only true|false]
repositories)
[-modify_repo OtherRepositoryName
[-add_secured SecuredPath [-add_secured OtherSecuredPath ...]]
[-del_secured SecuredPath [-del_secured OtherSecuredPath ...]]
[-repo_read_only true|false] ...]

-del_repo RepositoryName [-del_repo OtherRepositoryName ...]
(to delete
existing
repositories)
-delete VaultServerName -adm [domain@]VaultAdministrator:password

-h
Options:
● -list: lists the vault servers
-list VaultServerName: lists the properties of VaultServerName
-list -a: lists the properties of all Vault servers.
● -add: creates the Vault server VaultServerName.
Default values with -add:

❍ thread: 2, timeout: -1, offset: 0, min_pool: 4, max_pool: 6, read_only: false,
❍ log_removed_files: false, remove_files: true, nfs_access: false
❍ instance: the DB2INSTANCE value in the environment file.
❍ oracle_home: the ORACLE_HOME value in the environment file.
❍ tns_admin: true
❍ tns_path: the TNS_ADMIN value in the environment file.
If not valued, the default value is:
%ORACLE_HOME%\network\ADMIN.
● -modify: modifies the vault server VaultServerName. You can add, modify or delete repositories. Note: unlike in interactive mode,
you cannot create repositories from scratch in batch mode so you must create them manually beforehand. You can also change
general-purpose vault properties.
Default values with -modify: the parameters keep their current values (at creation, repo_read_only is false).
● -delete: deletes the VaultServerName's catalogued entries and properties file; the data (database, repositories) are not deleted.
● -h: this help.
Vault Server Setup Batch Examples
The following commands were run on Windows in a Command Prompt window in the installation directory:
Command:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB.exe -add ENOVIAVaultServer -adm the:pwd -db_vendor db2 -instance DB2 -db
THEDB2A8 -schema the -connect the:pwd -db_adm db2admin:db2admin -tbs USERPACE1 -repo Repo1 -repo_path C:\Temp
\Repositories\Repo1 -tmp C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Tmp -secured C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Secured -secured C:
\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Secured2"
Output:
C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1: directory not found.

The command failed.
The command failed because the repositories had not been created, so you must create them first using the following Windows
command:
mkdir C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1 C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Tmp C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Secured

C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Secured2
Then, the following command was run:
THEDB2A8 -schema the -connect the:pwd -db_adm db2admin:db2admin -tbs USERPACE1 -repo Repo1 -repo_path C:\Temp
Output:
The Tablespace parameter is not found in the following list:

USERSPACE1
The command failed.
There was a spelling mistake in the tablespace name ("USERPACE1" instead of "USERSPACE1"), so it was corrected and the
command was run again:
THEDB2A8 -schema the -connect the:pwd -db_adm db2admin:db2admin -tbs USERSPACE1 -repo Repo1 -repo_path C:\Temp
Output:
[2672: New Connection (vagu1dsy.dsy.ds,IT_daemon,*,the,pid=2808,optimised) ]

Command successful.
The vault server is created.
The following command lists the vault servers created:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB -list"
Output:
Current installation Vault servers:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Server hostname: VAGU1DSY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vault server name | Orbix daemon port | Vault administrator
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENOVIAVaultServer | 1570 | the
The following commands list the characteristics of the vault server you just created:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB -list ENOVIAVaultServer"
or:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB -list -a"
Output:
Alias name ENOVIAVaultServer

Vault administrator the
Server hostname VAGU1DSY
Orbix daemon port 1570
Threads number 2
Time Out (minutes) -1
Time zone offset 0
Database type DB2
Database name THEDB2A8
Database schema name THE
Database connection user THE
Database minimum pool size 4
Database maximum pool size 6
Repositories number 1
Repositories list:
1) Repo1
Read only false
Path C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1
Tmp path C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Tmp
Secured number 2:
C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Secured
C:\Temp\Repositories\Repo1\Secured2
Read only false

Log removed files false
Remove files true
Authorize NFS access false
The following command modifies the general-purpose properties of the vault server:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB.exe -modify ENOVIAVaultServer -adm the:pwd -thread 8 -timeout 9 -offset -10 -
min_pool 11 -max_pool 12 -read_only true -log_removed_files true -remove_files false -nfs_access true"
Output:

ENOVIAVaultServer is the default alias name. You can't delete it because there is no other Vault alias name to
become the default alias name instead of it. The command failed.
The following command deletes the vault server:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB.exe -delete ENOVIAVaultServer -adm the:pwd"
Output:
ENOVIAVaultServer is the default alias name. You can't delete it because there is no other Vault alias name to
become the default alias name instead of it. The command failed.
The following command lists the vault servers, and the list is now empty:
catstart -run "VaultServerSetupB.exe -list"
Output:
Current installation Vault servers:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Server hostname: VAGU1DSY
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vault server name | Orbix daemon port | Vault administrator
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENOVIAVaultServer | 1570 | the
Setting Up the Vault Client
3. Go to the following installation directory
catstart -run VaultClientSetupB
Command Syntax
VaultClientSetupB
-list
-add VaultAlias -host ServerHostname -port OrbixDaemonPort
-modify VaultAlias [-host ServerHostname] [-port OrbixDaemonPort]
-delete VaultAlias
-h
Example:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENOVIAVaultServer | jane2dsy | 1570
● -add: catalogues the vault server VaultAliasName

● -modify: modifies the catalogued Vault server VaultAliasName in order to update the server hostname and Orbix daemon port
● -delete: deletes the VaultAliasName's catalogued entries; the VaultAliasName properties file and the data (database, repositories)
are not deleted.
● -h: this help.
Installing in Batch Mode
Installing in Batch Using the StartB Command on

Windows
The StartB batch command lets you install Version 5 without the graphical user
interface. You can install all Version 5 software except online documentation in batch
mode.
Note that, if your Version 5 software is delivered on more than one CD-ROM, you must
copy all the software to the same directory from which you run this command.
You can:
● copy all the software into the same folder
● or, given that the software is distributed on several CDs ( 1, 2 ...), copy the contents
of each CD into a separate folder for each CD, making sure that the name of each
folder corresponds to the CD number ( 1, 2 ...) etc.
1. Select Start > Programs > Command Prompt to open a Command Prompt
window.
2. Go to the directory containing the copied software, then to the Intel or win64
folder.
StartB
The message:
Checking VC8 Runtime...

Checking VC8 Runtime : OK
is displayed, confirming that the VC8 runtime prerequisite has been installed.
StartB Command Syntax
-u "unload_dir": specifies the unload directory; make sure the directory path is
enclosed like this: "unload dir" if the directory name contains spaces; the default
unload directory is:

-ident IDENT: creates an identifier used for differentiating multiple versions of the
same release installed in different locations on the same computer; the IDENT must not
exceed 20 characters and must be in uppercase
-newdir: creates the unload directory if it doesn't exist
-D env_dir: specifies the environment directory; the default environment directory is:

-lic "pathname.lic": specifies the path and name of the nodelock license certificate
to import
-exe: runs a Version 5 session at the end of the installation
-orbixport port1: specifies the Orbix daemon port number
-orbixbase port2: specifies the starting port number for daemon-run servers
-orbixrange: specifies the range for daemon-run servers
-addUserPrivilegesForOrbix: adds required privileges for Orbix for current user if

they are missing
-backbonePorts port3 port4: specifies the ports reserved for the communication
backbone - default values are 55555 and 55556
-VRPort port5: specifies the port reserved for processing events when using
peripheral devices (spaceball, spacemouse, joystick); the default port for the peripheral
device broker is 55557
-noSetupPorts: specifies you do not want to set up any communication ports
-CatiaV5Info/-CatiaV5Path Path -CatiaV5EnvPath Path -CatiaV5EnvName

EnvName: options for CATIA V5 - ENOVIA V5 VPM interoperability
-CatiaV5Info/: used alone, setup takes default values for other parameters
-CatiaV5Path Path: specifies CATIA V5 Installation path
-CatiaV5EnvPath Path: specifies CATIA V5 Environment path
-CatiaV5EnvName EnvName: specifies environment file for CATIA V5
-v: verbose mode
-h: displays help.
-list: lists the configurations, products and extra products on the CD-ROM
-all: unloads all the configurations and the products on the CD-ROM
-l "list_to_unload": specifies the list of configurations and/or products to unload.

You have to type the list of configurations and/or products, which you can obtain by
running the command using the "list" argument. In the list, configuration names look
like this: ME2.slt., and product names look like this: KIN.prd. These are the names you
must type. Separate the names using a blank.
The arguments -list, -all and -l "list_to_unload" are mutually exclusive.
-allextra_prd: unloads all the extra products included with the configurations and
products that are already installed or to be installed from the CD-ROM.
-lextra_prd "list_to_unload": specifies a list of extra products to unload. These

extra products must be included with the configurations and products that are already
installed or to be installed.
-noLang "fr ge it jp ch ko"/-noLang all: specifies user doesn't want to install

language user interface files for French, German, Italian, Japanese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean
-noFonts: specifies user does not want to install language-indexed fonts
-noreboot: the system will not be restarted if needed
-noDesktopIcon: does not create a startup icon on the desktop
-noStartMenuIcon: does not create a startup icon in the Start menu
-noStartMenuTools: does not create an entry in the Start menu for the administration
tools
-Timeout: customizes the server timeout value
Example
The following example installs Version 5 software from scratch, creating the unload
directory and importing the appropriate licenses.
To install the MD2 and DP2 configurations for the CATIA product line, type the following
command, for example on Windows XP with 32-bit code:
StartB -u "C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19" -newdir -l "MD2.slt

DP2.slt" -lic E:\CATIAV5_Licenses\MYCONFIG.LIC
Note: VBA is not installed automatically by the StartB batch.
You have to install VBA6 manually after a batch installation. To do so, run the
command:
However, note that VBA is supported on Windows XP Professional x64 Edition with
Version 5 32-bit code.
Installing in Batch Mode Using the start Command on

UNIX
The start batch command lets you install Version 5 without the graphical user
interface.
Note that, if your Version 5 software is delivered on more than one CD-ROM, you must
copy all the software to the same directory from which you run this command.
You can:
● copy all the software into the same folder
● or, given that the software is distributed on several CDs ( 1, 2 ...), copy the contents
of each CD into a separate folder for each CD, making sure that the name of each
folder corresponds to the CD number ( 1, 2 ...) etc.
To perform a batch installation, log on as root, change directory to the appropriate

directory (or CD-ROM mount point if there is only one CD-ROM) and enter the
command:
./start
with at least one of the arguments below.
start Command Syntax
-u "unload_dir": specifies the unload directory. The default unload directory is:
-newdir: creates the unload directory if it doesn't exist
-D: specifies the /CATEnv environment directory. The default environment directory is /
CATENV.
-lic "pathname.lic": specifies the path and name of the nodelock license certificate
to import
-env new|replace: if the environment file already exists, you can choose to replace it
or create a new one
● -env new: If you install the same level several times, the same
environment is created each time, and using the same name, except that
the name is incremented like this each time:
MYPRODUCT.V5R19_1.B19.txt, MYPRODUCT.V5R19_2.B19.txt
● -env replace: if you already installed Version 5, you may then have
deleted the installation directory, in which case the environment remains; in
this case, use the "-env replace" argument to overwrite the existing initial
environment and create a new one during the installation. Note that the
"replace" option does not replace existing environments that you may have
created using the "new" option (or using the "Create New Environment"
option when installing using the GUI), and whose name is incremented, for
example:
MYPRODUCT.V5R19_1.B19.txt
-exe: runs a Version 5 session at the end of the installation
-s: silent mode
-orbixport port1: specifies the Orbix daemon port number
-orbixbase port2: specifies the starting port number for daemon-run servers
-orbixrange: specifies the range for daemon-run servers
-CatiaV5Info/-CatiaV5Path Path -CatiaV5EnvPath Path -CatiaV5EnvName

EnvName: options for CATIA V5 - ENOVIA V5 VPM interoperability
-CatiaV5Info/: used alone, setup takes default values for other parameters
-CatiaV5Path Path: specifies CATIA V5 Installation path
-CatiaV5EnvPath Path: specifies CATIA V5 Environment path
-CatiaV5EnvName EnvName: specifies environment file for CATIA V5
-orbixboot: boot Orbix daemon at restart
-backbonePorts port3 port4: specifies the ports reserved for the communication
backbone - default values are 55555 and 55556
-VRPort port5: specifies the port reserved for processing events when using
peripheral devices (spaceball, spacemouse, joystick); the default port for the peripheral
device broker is 55557
-noSetupPorts: specifies you do not want to set up any communication ports
-DirCATIAV4: specifies CATIA V4 path for administrator home directory

-libCATIAV4 V422-1/V423-1: specifies which version of CATIA V4 to use (V422-1 or
V423-1)
-DirVPM1: specifies VPM1 path for administrator home directory
-v: verbose mode
-h: displays help.
-list: lists the configurations, products and extra products on the CD-ROM
-all: unloads all the configurations and the products on the CD-ROM
-l "list_to_unload": specifies the list of configurations and/or products to unload.

You have to type the list of configurations and/or products, which you can obtain by
running the command using the "list" argument. In the list, configuration names look
like this: ME2.slt., and product names look like this: KIN.prd. These are the names you
must type. Separate the names using a blank.
The arguments -list, -all and -l "list_to_unload" are mutually exclusive.
-allextra_prd: unloads all the extra products included with the configurations and
products that are already installed or to be installed from the CD-ROM.
-lextra_prd "list_to_unload": specifies a list of extra products to unload. These

extra products must be included with the configurations and products that are already
installed or to be installed.
-noLang "fr ge it jp ch"/-noLang all : specifies user doesn't want to install

language user interface files for French, German, Italian, Japanese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean
-noFonts : specifies user doesn't want to install language-indexed fonts
-Timeout: customizes the server timeout value
Reminder: if you run the command without arguments, the installation will be started
using the graphical user interface.
Error Codes
The following error codes may appear on both Windows and UNIX for a GA installation:
0 Installation OK
1 Insufficient privilege
2 Bad environment
4 Bad media
5 Bad options
6 Allocation problem
7 Prerequisites KO
Prerequisites warning (only for
10
3dcom: concerns ddraw.dll)
44 LUM server to be stopped
55 Installation problem
Locking Settings
This task explains how to run a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings so that other users running a
session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot change them.
An administrator can also take advantage of this mechanism to set default settings which, although not locked, are proposed to
users as a starting point.
By default, there is "zero administration" of settings: user settings are stored in the CATSettings environment as explained in
About Settings.
The following scenario walks you through a procedure useful for locking settings for users of the default environment created at
installation. This is a useful procedure if you are interested in locking settings, but do not want to multiply environments on the
same computer.
The scenario described reflects the Windows platform only, but the feature is also supported on UNIX.
Do not confuse running a session in administrator mode (a Version 5 concept) with logging on as administrator (a system concept).
Scenario 1: Locking Settings for the Default Global Environment

You must belong to the Administrators group, or have the privileges assigned to the Administrators group.
For the purposes of this particular scenario only, you need to log on as administrator because you are going to modify the default
global environment (V5R19).
2. Select the Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools > Environment Editor V5R19 command to display the Environment Editor.
You will see an environment with the following name:
CATIA
3. Click the CATIA.V5R19.B19 environment to display the corresponding environment variables.
4. Locate the following environment variable: CATReferenceSettingPath
Note that the default setting for this variable is empty.

5. Reset the variable so that it points to an existing folder, for example:
CATReferenceSettingPath E:\users\administrator\LockSettings
then click Set, then OK to save and exit the environment editor. This folder will contain the setting locks you will create later. The
folder access rights must be set up for read access only for end users, and read/write for the person creating the setting locks.
6. Run a session in administrator mode using the following command:
cnext -env CATIA.V5R19.B19 -admin
or:
cnext -admin
The session is started using the default global environment, and a message informs you that you are running in administration
mode. Click OK in the message box to proceed. If prompted by the License Manager, reserve at least one configuration license
then restart a session in administrator mode.
The "Options" dialog box is displayed. Note that a lock symbol like this appears opposite each option in the General tab:
Pointing the cursor to a lock symbol displays a message indicating the name of the folder/directory containing the lock settings.
This is particularly useful for administrators who need to identify which lock settings are active when there are multiple levels of
concatenated locks.
8. To set the locks, click on one of the appropriate lock symbols.
For example, click the lock symbol for the User Interface Style option:
The lock symbol now looks like this: .
Because the user interface style was set to CATIA - P2, end users running this environment will not be able to change this setting.
9. Click OK to confirm.
The lock settings are stored in the folder referenced by the CATReferenceSettingPath environment variable you reset earlier.
10. Exit the session.
An end user who starts a session with the normal startup commands (but not the cnext -env CATIA.V5R19.B19 -admin
command) and using the same environment, will see this after selecting the Tools > Options... command:
The lock symbol now looks like this: .
Because the user interface style was set to "CATIA - P2", end users running this environment will not be able to change this
setting to "CATIA - P1".
Scenario 2: Locking Settings for User Environments

You do not necessarily have to log on as administrator to customize an environment and set locks on settings: the lock
mechanism is not limited to the global environment only.
End users can customize their own user environments to store their own settings in a location referenced by the
CATReferenceSettingPath environment variable, start a session using the command:
cnext -env myenv -admin
where "myenv" is the name of the user environment, then lock settings in the same way as described in their first scenario. Then,
other end users starting a session on the same computer, with the normal startup commands and using the same environment,
will inherit the locked settings.
Scenario 3: Concatenating Settings Locks

Different users may want to set different types of locks at different levels for a variety of reasons.
If several users set locks in different folders using the same environment, end users of the same environment will inherit all the
locks set by those administrators.
To implement this solution, you must concatenate several CATReferenceSettingPath values as illustrated below:
In this example:
● one administrator (starting in administration mode) locks settings in "Environment 1" at the site level
● on the same site, two administrators (also starting in administration mode) in two different workshops lock settings in
"Environment 2" and "Environment 3" respectively
● users 1 and 2 run a Version 5 session with "Environment 2" and inherit the setting locks in "Environment 1" and "Environment
2" respectively
● users 3 and 4 run a Version 5 session with "Environment 3" and inherit the setting locks in "Environment 1" and "Environment
3" respectively.
About Settings
Version 5 creates different types of settings data:
● application data contained in the documents you create
● setting files which are non-editable.
There are two types of settings:

● temporary settings
● permanent settings.
Certain Version 5 applications also create preferences.
What Do Settings Files Contain?

Temporary settings contain settings of a temporary nature (album screen captures, roll file information,...)
CATTemp contains two folders or directories:

● Album: contains screen captures created using the Tools > Image > Capture... command
● CNext01.roll: roll file.
Temporary settings are created in a location referenced by the CATTemp variable.
Permanent setting files store customization you perform mainly using the various tabs provided by the Tools > Options...
command. For example, application window customization, background colors, part and print settings, etc.
Permanent setting files are identified by the suffix: *.CATSettings, and are created in a location referenced by the
CATUserSettingPath variable.
Deleting either types of files deletes your customization.
How Do You Set Settings?

You can specify settings:
● using the Tools > Options... command in a Version 5 session
● or without starting a Version 5 session.
Specifying Settings in a Version 5 Session
You specify settings using the Tools > Options... command which displays the Options dialog box:
The left-hand column contains a list of categories used for organizing the different groups of settings. There are general
settings for all configurations and products, and settings for each type of configuration installed. The category names are
the same as those listed on the Start menu.
To access the settings for a specific configuration, click the "+" to display the subcategories. Clicking on the subcategory
displays the settings tabs for that subcategory.
Specifying Settings Without Running a Session
On Windows
1. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.
On Windows, the default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B19\win_b64\code\bin (64-bit code on Windows XP Professional x64
Edition)
C:\Program Files (x86)\Dassault Systemes\B19\intel_a\code\bin (32-bit code on Windows XP Professional
x64 Edition)
CATOptionsMgt
If you have several runtime environments on your computer, you can select the environment by entering the following
command:
CATOptionsMgt -env envname

where "envname" is the name of the environment.
You can also access the Options dialog box using the Start > Programs > CATIA Tools menu, and running the Settings
Management V5R19 command.
The Options dialog box is displayed.
This function is useful for administrators because it allows you to set up user settings without having to start an interactive
session first.
On UNIX
1. Log on as root or end user.
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B19/OS/code/command/catstart -run CATOptionsMgt
If you have several runtime environments on your computer, you can select the environment by entering the following
command:
catstart -run "CATOptionsMgt -env envname"
where "envname" is the name of the environment.
Where Are Settings Files Located on Windows?

The location of settings files on Windows platforms is inspired by the general data and settings management requirements
operating on the Windows platform, which provides an underlying infrastructure allowing you to separate user data, user
settings and computer settings.
The mechanism used is the CSIDL value mechanism. This implementation allows:
● your permanent settings (CATSettings) to roam as part of your user profile (CSIDL_APPDATA)
● your temporary settings (CATTemp, etc.) to be still stored in the user profile, but prevents them from roaming
(CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA).
The following table will help you determine where your settings are located:
Windows XP
Variable Location
CATUserSettingPath C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings
CATTemp C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes
\CATTemp
CATCache Obsolete
CATReport C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes
\CATReport
CATErrorLog C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes
\CATTemp\error.log
CATMetasearchPath C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes
\CATTemp
CATW3PublishPath C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes
\CATTemp
CSIDL Values in Environment Variable Paths

The value:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data
is the default on Windows XP for the CSIDL_APPDATA values.
The value:
C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data
is the default on on Windows XP for the CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA values.
Location of Settings Files on UNIX

Permanent settings are stored in the CATSettings directory in your home directory; temporary settings are stored in the
CATTemp directory, also in your home directory.
How Settings are Concatenated and Inherited

Settings are managed in Version 5 in two ways:
● "zero administration": end users start a "standalone" session, inherit their settings values from the software defaults, and
change their settings at will
● "administration mode": the administrator starts a session in administration mode which provides two possibilities:
❍ specify a "starter set" of setting values which end users running the same environment can use to get started;
however, end users retain the ability to modify the values explicitly
❍ lock settings so that end users running a session with the same environment inherit those settings and cannot
change them (discussed in detail in Locking Settings).
Concatenation Mechanism
Settings are based on a hierarchical concatenation mechanism.
Default Values in the Software
The Version 5 software provides default values for all settings. This enables you to start a session without any settings files
(for example, if settings have been deleted accidentally). End users can run a session and use the defaults.
Order of Priority
Setting files are stored in directories referenced in the Version 5 runtime environment by the CATReferenceSettingPath and
CATUserSettingPath environment variables:
● CATReferenceSettingPath: points to the directory (or directories) where administrator settings are stored
● CATUserSettingPath: points to the directory where user settings are stored.
When a session is started, the directories pointed to by these variables are searched in the following hierarchical order: all
files found first in the CATReferenceSettingPath, and then in the CATUserSettingPath will be read in this order of priority.
Concatenation Mechanism Involving One or More Administration Levels
When a session is started, if no setting file is found either in the CATReferenceSettingPath or in the CATUserSettingPath, the
setting value is the default provided by the software.
If settings files have been deleted, an end user will inherit the setting values set by the administrator or the default values
provided by the software.
If there are administrator directories pointed to by CATReferenceSettingPath, and the settings have not been locked, the
value is the value written in the last administrator's file found in CATReferenceSettingPath, or in the user file found in the
CATUserSettingPath. In this case, the tend user will be able to modify the settings.
If there are administrator directories pointed to by CATReferenceSettingPath, and settings have been locked, the setting
value is the value written in the first administrator directory where this attribute has been locked. End users will not be able
to modify the settings.
For full details about how to start a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings, refer to Locking
Settings.
For a fully detailed scenario illustrating how settings are concatenated and inherited, and involving multiple administration
levels, refer to Detailed Scenario Illustrating Concatenation and Inheritance Mechanisms.
What Are Preferences?

Preference files contain user preferences set by the user when using certain applications. For example, certain drafting user
choices, the last height of a pad (Part Design), the list of values entered in certain editable fields, are stored as preferences,
but are not settings. Preference files are a convenient means of storing and recalling user preferences from one session to
another.
Consequently, unlike settings, preferences are created by certain applications, and not via the Tools > Options...
command.
Preference files are identified by the suffix: *.CATPreferences, and are created in the same location as settings, referenced
by the CATUserSettingPath variable. However, preferences cannot be administered, and consequently are not referenced by
the CATReferenceSettingPath variable.
Installing New Graphic Drivers

When installing a new graphic driver version on a machine running Version 5, you first one have to delete all Version 5
settings before restarting Version 5.
The same applies when installing a new Version 5 version, for example: you must delete the settings for previous versions
before starting the current version on the same machine.
Dumping Settings in Tools > Options...

The Tools > Options... dialog box contains a button for dumping settings to a .vbs script macro file:
Click the dump button to open the following dialog box, then specify which settings to dump, the output directory for the
dump, then click Yes:
The resulting macro recovers settings values: the values are represented as comments in the macro. This function is only
implemented on a limited number of tabs. The objects involved are derived from SettingController. For documentation on
the corresponding Automation interfaces, refer to the Automation Home page in the CAA V5 Encyclopedia.
Detailed Scenario Illustrating Concatenation
and Inheritance Mechanisms
This section contains a lengthy but comprehensive scenario illustrating how the setting
concatenation and inheritance mechanism works.
The scenario involves one end user and two administration levels, explains what
happens when both administrators successively set, explicitly modify, lock and unlock
settings, and describes the impact on the end user inheriting these settings and who in
turn explicitly modifies and resets settings.
We assume before reading this scenario that you are already familiar with the
following concepts:
● basic settings concatenation and inheritance mechanisms
● resetting settings
● locking and unlocking settings.
The scenario presents a list of tables containing settings visible to or specified by
Administrators 0 and 1, and visible to or specified by the User.
Legend
Black: unlocked values inherited from the higher administration level, or from software
defaults
Blue: explicitly modified values
Orange: values locked by the current administrator
Red: inherited locked values
(X, Y, Z) this expression represents the state of the setting where:

● X represents the administration level where the value has been set:
❍ 0 or 1 (meaning Admin 0 or Admin 1): specifies the level where the setting has
been set in the administration concatenation. "0" means that the highest level
administrator has set this setting.
❍ D means Default value: this means that no one has set this setting and thus the
value is the code default value.
● Y represents the administration level where the setting has been locked:
❍ 0 or 1 (meaning Admin 0 or Admin 1): specifies the level where the setting has
been locked in the administration concatenation. 0 means that the administrator
of highest level has locked this setting. The level X and Y can be different. In this
case, we have necessary X <= Y.
❍ U is for Unlocked meaning that the parameter has not been locked
● Z specifies if the parameter has been explicitly modified at the current level by the
logged user (or administrator):
❍ T for TRUE meaning that the value has been explicitly modified and thus is not
inherited
❍ F for FALSE meaning that the current value of the setting is inherited from an
administrator.
1. The initial status of the settings after installation is:
Setting
Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 3 Setting 4
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 0 a1 (D, U, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
Admin 1 a1 (D, U, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
User a1 (D, U, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
The settings visible to Admin 0, Admin 1 and User are identical: they are the default
values provided by the software.
2. Admin 0 explicitly changes Setting 1 to value b1:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 0 b1 (D, U, T) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
Admin 1 b1 (D, U, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
User b1 (D, U, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
Admin 1 and User inherit the value b1.

3. User explicitly changes Setting 2 to value b2:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 b1 (D, U, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
User b1 (D, U, F) b2 (D, U, T) a3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
4. Admin 1 explicitly changes Setting 2 to value c2 and Setting 3 to value b3:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 b1 (0, U, F) c2 (D, U, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User b1 (0, U, F) b2 (1, U, T) b3 (1, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
When the User starts a session, because the User has not yet explicitly modified
Setting 3, the User inherits directly the new value b3. However, as the user has
already explicitly modified Setting 2, the modification of Setting 2 made earlier by
Admin 1 is not visible.
5. The User then resets the settings:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 b1 (0, U, F) c2 (D, U, T) b3 (D, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
User b1 (0, U, F) c2 (1, U, F) b3 (1, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
After the reset, the User immediately sees that the value of Setting 1 is imposed by
Admin 0, whereas the values of Settings 2 and 3 are imposed by Admin 1. The main
difference is that, for Setting 2, the User now inherits the value c2.
6. The User explicitly changes Setting 2 to value d2 and Setting 4 to value b4:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 b1 (0, U, F) c2 (D, U, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User b1 (0, U, F) d2 (1, U, T) b3 (1, U, F) b4 (D, U, T)
7. Admin 1 locks Settings 1 and 2:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 b1 (0, L, F) c2 (D, L, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User b1 (0, 1, F) c2 (1, 1, F) b3 (1, U, F) b4 (D, U, T)
The User now inherits the values of Settings 1 and 2 directly: the values are locked so
they cannot be modified.
Note that the value locked for the Setting 1 is directly inherited from the Admin 0. The
lock and value can be set at different administration levels.
8. Admin 1 unlocks Setting 1 and explicitly changes the value to d1:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 d1 (0, U, T) c2 (D, L, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User d1 (1, U, F) c2 (1, 1, F) b3 (1, U, F) b4 (D, U, T)
Because the User has not yet explicitly changed (and therefore has not saved) Setting
1 before Admin 1 locked it earlier, the User now inherits the new value d1 from Admin
1 when the setting is unlocked.
9. Admin 1 unlocks Setting 2 and explicitly changes the value to e2:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 d1 (0, U, T) e2 (D, U, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User d1 (1, U, F) d2 (1, U, T) b3 (1, U, F) b4 (D, U, T)
Earlier in the scenario (step 6), the User had already explicitly changed the value of
Setting 2 to d2 before Admin 1 locked it. This value was saved. Consequently, because
the lock is no longer present, the User does not inherit the new value e2 from Admin 1
(as in step 8).
In this case, once the setting has been unlocked, the User retrieves the value set in
step 6, i.e. d2.
10. Admin 1 sets Setting1 to c1 and Setting 2 to c2 again and locks them:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 c1 (0, L, F) c2 (D, L, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User c1 (0, 1, F) c2 (1, 1, F) b3 (1, U, F) b4 (D, U, T)
11. The User resets:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 c1 (0, L, F) c2 (D, L, T) b3 (D, U, T) a4 (D, U, F)
User c1 (0, 1, F) c2 (1, 1, F) b3 (1, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
12. Admin 1 unlocks Setting 1 and explicitly changes the value to d1, and unlocks
Setting 2 and explicitly changes the value to e2:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
User d1 (1, U, F) e2 (1, U, F) b3 (1, U, F) a4 (D, U, F)
It is important here to note the difference with step 9. The user reset the setting in
step 11, and has also lost all modifications, therefore the d2 value of the Setting 2 is
lost and is not restored.
13. The User now explicitly changes the values of all four settings like this:
● Setting 1 is changed to e1
● Setting 2 is changed to f2
● Setting 3 is changed to c3
● Setting 4 is changed to b4
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
User e1 (1, U, T) f2 (1, U, T) c3 (1, U, T) b4 (D, U, T)
Both Admin 1 and the User now inherit the locks and values of Settings 1 and 3, which
can no longer be modified.
15. Admin 0 resets:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 0 a1 (D, L, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, L, F) a4 (D, U, F)
Admin 1 a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (D, U, T) a3 (D, 0, F) a4 (D, U, F)
User a1 (D, 0, F) f2 (1, U, T) a3 (D, 0, F) b4 (D, U, T)
The locks are not removed by the reset, which works only on the values. Thus the two
locks on Setting1 and 2 remain unchanged. The default value of Setting 1 is however
restored.
16. The User finally resets the settings:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (D, U, T) a3 (D, 0, F) a4 (D, U, F)
User a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (1, U, F) a3 (D, 0, F) a4 (D, U, F)
The value of Setting 2 is now e2, and the value of Setting 4 is now back to a4.
17. Admin 1 sets Setting 4 to b4:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 1 a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (D, U, T) a3 (D, 0, F) b4 (D, U, T)
User a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (1, U, F) a3 (D, 0, F) a4 (1, U, F)
18. Admin 0 sets Setting 4 to c4:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 0 a1 (D, L, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, L, F) c4 (D, U, T)
Admin 1 a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (D, U, T) a3 (D, 0, F) b4 (0, U, T)
User a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (1, U, F) a3 (D, 0, F) a4 (1, U, F)
19. Admin 0 locks Setting 4:
Setting
/Level
Default a1 a2 a3 a4
Admin 0 a1 (D, L, F) a2 (D, U, F) a3 (D, L, F) c4 (D, L, T)
Admin 1 a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (D, U, T) a3 (D, 0, F) c4 (0, 0, F)
User a1 (D, 0, F) e2 (1, U, F) a3 (D, 0, F) c4 (0, 0, F)

Catia Delmia Enovia VPLM 519

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catia Delmia Enovia VPLM 519

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catia Delmia Enovia VPLM 519

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Program Directory

© Dassault Systèmes. 1994-2008 Version 5 Release 19

❍ DELMIA Process Planning (PE) ❍ Certifications – A list of product certifications.

Solutions and Products

● General and Open Issues

Documentation Browsers Prerequirements

Documentation search applet

On-line Documentation Installation

Accessing Online Documentation Using Internet Explorer on Windows XP

To access the page for Server side, click here.

Operating System Supported Operating System Level(s) Detailed Information

● Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2 click here

Hewlett-Packard HP-UX ● HP 11iv1 (11.11) December 2004 click here

Sun Solaris ● Solaris 10 HW 03/05 click here

Important notice for Operating Systems support

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

For 3d com products:

For CAA-RADE products:

For CAA-RADE: Specific Hardware Requirements

Windows XP x64 SP2 2048 15 ● Intel Pentium4

Windows XP SP2 512 4

AIX 5.3 TL05 SP3 mini 512 4

HP-UX 11.11 (11i) 512 4

For ENOVIA 3d com: Specific Hardware Requirements

Windows XP x64 SP2 ● Intel Pentium4

300 MHz mini

Windows Vista 512 20 000 800 MHz mini

Windows Vista 64 512 20 000 800 MHz mini

AIX 5.3 TL05 SP3 mini 128/256 100

HP-UX 11.11 (11i) 128/256 100

Microsoft Windows XP 32-bit

● Windows XP deliver an implementation of OpenGL libraries. Dassault Systemes will provide

Additional Software Requirements

Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 - SP1 with the following

● CRT and MFC Redistributables

For ENOVIA 3d com and V5 VPM products:

Java Run-Time Environment

For V5 VPM products:

Microsoft Windows Vista 32-bit

Additional Software Requirements

● CRT and MFC Redistributables

For ENOVIA 3d com and V5 VPM products:

Java Run-Time Environment

For V5 VPM products:

Known DS Product Limitation

Microsoft Windows XP 64-bit

Installation of 32-bit V5 applications

The following patches must be applied:

The following patches must be applied:

Additional Software Requirements

Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 - SP1 with the following

● CRT and MFC Redistributables

For ENOVIA 3d com and V5 VPM products:

Java Run-Time Environment

Microsoft Windows Vista 64-bit

Additional Software Requirements

Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 - SP1 with the following

● CRT and MFC Redistributables

For ENOVIA 3d com and V5 VPM products: